REESE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. Received... ___4^^?^ Accessions No.^.?Q}!*~*.. SJielf No. V INSTRUCTION IN GERMAN, (Bo Jo Respectfully informs his friends and the public, that during the coming sea- son he will give lessons in the GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, either at his own rooms, No- 7 University-Buildings, near I Washington- Square, or at the houses of his pupils. By his long residence in this country, where in part he has received hi* education, Mr. ADLEH has had an opportunity of adding to a knowledge of his native language, such a familiarity with the English, as enables him to commend his services with so much the more confidence to all such as wish to acquire a speedy and thorough knowledge of the German, more especially to those who desire it for scientific or literary purposes. Applications may be made either by letter, or personally, at No. 7 Univcr- iity-Buildinga, from 9 to 10 A.M. &ef erentes. HON. THEODORE FRELINGHUYSEN, LL.D., Chancellor of the University. The following Gentlemen of the FACULTY or SCIENCE AND LETTERS of ihe University : CYRUS MASON, D.D., Prof, of Political Economy and the Evidences of Revealed Religion. TAYLER LEWIS, LL.D,, Prof, of the Greek Language and Liteiwture. E. A. JOHNSON, A.M., Prof, of the Latin Language and Literature. C. S. HENRY, D.D., Prof, of Intellectual Philosophy, History, and Belles- Lethw. JOHN W. DRAPER, M.D., Prof, of Chemistry and Natural Hittmy. COLLEGE OF Nsw-JEnsar, 1 Sept. 8, 1845. J Having personally enjoyed the benefit of Mr. ADLER'S instruction, we ex- press with confidence our high sense of his qualifications as a teacher. Hi* thorough acquaintance with the German language and literature, and at the same time with the English, his aptness to teach what he knows, and hi* general philological attainments, give him advantages as an Instructor that but few men possess. ALBERT B. DOD, Professor of Mathematics. EVERT M. TOPPING, Adj. Prof, of Ancient Languages. $3- Parents who wish to obtain a thorough Classical education for their sons, and who prefer private tuition, are also informed, that Mr. ADLER haa had several years experience as an instructor in this line, and is ready to re- ceive a few private scholars who may wish to prepare for college, or to read some one of the Latin or Greek authors usually embraced in a course of liberal education. OF THE UHIVERSIT OLLENDORFF'S ]\ T E METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK GERMAN LANGUAGE TO WHICH IS ADDED A SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, THEIR INFLECTION AND USE, " WITH FULL PAR^Dl&ALS AND A COMPLETE TABLE OF THE IF03 G. J. ADLER, A.B. N E W - Y O R K : D. APPLETON & CO., 200 BROADWAY. PHILADELPHIA: GEORGE S. APPLET* CIIESNUT-STREET. 1840. ENTERED according to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by D. APPLETON & CO., In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. NOTICE. A Key to the exercises of this Grammar is published in a separate volume. PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. Ix presenting to the American Public a new and improved edi- tion of OllendorfTs New Method, it would seem to be only necessary to state what alterations or additions have been made. To say anything in commendation of the book itself appears almost gratuitous ; for the extensive circulation which it now enjoys in England, and the increasing demand for it in this country, its costliness notwithstanding, constitute the strong- est evidence in its favour. The fact that Ollendorff has been sought after with avidity, whilst many other Grammars of high merit have met with but a slow and cold reception, justifies the inference that, as a book of instruction, it presents facilities which in similar works were either entirely wanting or but imperfectly afforded. Even the excellent and highly scientific Grammar, written for the use of Englishmen by the genial Becker himself, who by his Orcjcmt'Sm, his Deiitfcfye 28ortlnftiimj, and subsequently by his Deiitfcfye rammatif, has made such valuable contribu- tions to the Philosophy of Language, and has almost revolu- tionized the terminology of Grammar in his own country, has, in the space of fifteen years, not even undergone a second edi- tion, and is now entirely out of print. Surely, Becker has de- served a better fate among scholars at least ! iv The success of Ollendorff is unquestionably due to his method, by which he has made the German, heretofore noto- riously difficult to foreigners, accessible to the capacity of all, young or old, learned or unlearned. Instead of pre-supposing a familiarity with English Grammar in the pupil, and then presenting a synthetic view of the principles of the language, as is commonly done, he begins apparently without any system, with the simplest phrases, from which he deduces the rules, until gradually and almost imperceptibly he makes the pupil master of the etymology and syntax of every part of speech. The rules are, as it were, concealed amid the multitude of exercises which are added to each lesson, and which serve to fortify the learner in the principles he has already acquired. Another characteristic feature of the book, and one in which its practical merit chiefly consists is, that the examples on which the rules are based, and those which are intended to illustrate the rules, are not derived from the German Classics ; they are neither the ideal language of Poetry, nor the rigorous language of Science, but of life, short sentences, such as one would be most likely to use in conversing in a circle of friends, or in writing a letter. Special prominence is given from the beginning to the end of the book to the idioms of the language, as it were the Ger- man side of the German a most important element in the acquisition of any language. In the beginning of the book the exercises are of necessity very brief and simple, and the Author, according to his own confession (page 351), has of- ten sacrificed logical accuracy to his eagerness for thoroughly grounding the pupil in the principles of inflection and construc- tion previously laid down. As the pupil advances the exer- PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. Ix presenting to the American Public a new and improved edi- tion of OllendorfT's New Method, it would seem to be only necessary to state what alterations or additions have been made. To say anything in commendation of the book itself appears almost gratuitous ; for the extensive circulation which it now enjoys in England, and the increasing demand for it in this country, its costliness notwithstanding, constitute the strong. est evidence in its favour. The fact that Olleridorff has been sought after with avidity, whilst many other Grammars of high merit have met with but a slow and cold reception, justifies the inference that, as a book of instruction, it presents facilities which in similar works were either entirely wanting or but imperfectly afforded. Even the excellent and highly scientific Grammar, written for the use of Englishmen by the genial Becker himself, who by his Organism, his Seutfdje SfBortlnltumcj, and subsequently by his Dciitfcfye rammattf, has made such valuable contribu- tions to the Philosophy of Language, and has almost revolu- tionized the terminology of Grammar in his own country, has, in the space of fifteen years, not even undergone a second edi- tion, and is now entirely out of print. Surely, Becker has de- served a better fate among scholars at least ! IV The success of OllendorfF is unquestionably due to his method, by which he has made the German, heretofore noto- riously difficult to foreigners, accessible to the capacity of all, young or old, learned or unlearned. Instead of pre-supposing a familiarity with English Grammar in the pupil, and then presenting a synthetic view of the principles of the language, as is commonly done, he begins apparently without any system, with the simplest phrases, from which he deduces the rules, until gradually and almost imperceptibly he makes the pupil master of the etymology and syntax of every part of speech. The rules are, as it were, concealed amid the multitude of exercises which are added to each lesson, and which serve to fortify the learner in the principles he has already acquired. Another characteristic feature of the book, and one in which its practical merit chiefly consists is, that the examples on which the rules are based, and those which are intended to illustrate the rules, are not derived from the German Classics ; they are neither the ideal language of Poetry, nor the rigorous language of Science, but of life, short sentences, such as one would be most likely to use in conversing in a circle of friends, or in writing a letter. Special prominence is given from the beginning to the end of the book to the idioms of the language, as it were the Ger- man side of the German a most important element in the acquisition of any language. In the beginning of the book the exercises are of necessity very brief and simple, and the Author, according to his own confession (page 351), has of- ten sacrificed logical accuracy to his eagerness for thoroughly grounding the pupil in the principles of inflection and construc- tion previously laid down. As the pupil advances the exer- CONTENTS SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE, Pag* PARTS OF SPEECH, $ 1 377 Cases, $ 2 377 ARTICLES. Declension of the articles, 3. 378 The article, before proper names, $ 5 379 " before abstract substantives and names of materials, $ 6. 379 " before common nouns, 7. 330 " idiomatic use of, $ 8 330 " in sentences, $ 9. 331 " " contracted with prepositions, 10 331 SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. Classification of nouns, $ 11 332 I. Their GENDER, determined by their signification, $ 13 and 14. . 333 determined by their termination, $ 15- 20. . 383 Gender of compound substantives, 20 336 " of foreign substantives, $ 21 337 II. NUMBER. Rules for the formation of the plural, 22, 23 and 24. 383 Nouns employed in the plural only, $ 27 390 Nouns with two forms of the plural, $ 23 390 III. INFLECTION. Declension of common and abstract nouns, 30. . 391 Earlier Declension, $ 31-$ 33. . 391 Later Declension, % 3S-$ 42 397 Declension of foreign substantives, $ 42 400 Declension of proper names of persons, $ 43-$ 48. ... 401 " " " of places, $43 404 IV. GOVERNMENT of substantives, $ 49- 52 405 ADJECTIVES. Classification of adjectives, $ 52- 55 406 I. INFLECTION, $ 55. First declension, $ 56 408 Second declension, $ 57 and 58. . . . 410 Third declension, 59 411 Observations on the three declensions, 60 and $ 61. . . .412 II. COMPARISON, terminational and compound, $ 62-$ 66. . . . 414 irregular and defective, $ 66 and $ 67. . . . 415 " of adverbs, $ 68 416 III. USE AND GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES, $ 70 417 Adjectives with the infinitive, 72 ; with the genitive, $"73 ; with the dative, $ 74 ; with the accusative, 74. iii. . . .418 NUMERALS. Classification of numerals, $ 75 419 List of CARDINALS and ORDINALS, $ 76. 420 Observations on their inflection and use, $ 77-$ 80. ... 421 COMPOUND NUMERALS: Distributives, Iteratives, &c., Dimidiatives, &c., $80 and $81 423 INDEFINITE NUMERALS, $ 82; implying number, $ 83; quantity, $ 84 ; number and quantity both, $ 85 424 The use of numerals, $ 86 ami $ 87. 426 PRONOUNS. Classification of pronouns, $ 88 427 I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS, 89 ; including reflexive, 90, Obs. 3, and reciprocal pronouns, 90, Obs. 4 427 Indefinite personal pronouns, 92. ...... 429 II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, 93; conjunctive, 94. . . . 430 Absolute possessive pronouns, 95 431 III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, their inflection and use, 97- 99. 433 IV. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS, 100- 103 434 V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS, 103- 106 435 VI. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, 106- 109 437 VERBS. CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS Transitive, 109 ; Intransitive, 110; Reflexive, 113; Impersonal, 114; Auxiliary, 115. . . . 439 Personal terminations, 117; moods, 118; tenses, 119. . . 442 The infinitives, 120 ; participles, their formation and signification, 121. 442 The omission of the prefix 13 e in the perfect participle, 122. . . 443 AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES, their use in the formation of compound tenses, 123 443 |lules for the formation of compound tenses, 124. .... 444 XI Conditionals, 126 .......... . 444 Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs : f>afrcn, 127 ; fctit, 123 ; ivcrben, 129 .............. 445 Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary Mtn, 131. . . . 454 Intransitive verbs winch assume the auxiliary fcill, 132. . . . 454 CONJUGATION OF VERBS, 134; regular and irregular mode of conju- gation, 137. . ....... 455 Table of terminations, 140 .......... 457 Formation of the tenses of the pas.-hv voice, 142. . . . 458 CONJUGATION OF TRANSITIVE VERBS, 143 ...... 459 " REFLEXIVE VERBS, 144 ...... 463 " INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 145 ...... 464 " IMPERSONAL VERBS, 146 ...... 466 COMPOUND VERBS sej (arable and inseparable, 148- 155. . . 467 Conjugation of compound verbs, ........ 469 SYNTAX OF THE VERB agreement, 156- 159 ...... 470 Use of the tenses and moods, 159- 163 ...... 471 The infinitive w'dhout \ u, 167 and 168 ...... 472 The infinitive with $ u, 169- 172 ....... 473 Use of the participles, 172- 178 ....... 475 ADVERBS. Definition and classification of adverbs, 178. ..... 477 ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME, 179 ....... 477 " " MODALITY, OF QUANTITY, OF QUALITY OR MANNER, OF INTENSITY, ........ 478 Signification of the adverbs I) i n and f) c r, 180 ...... 478 The pronominal adverbs b d and to) 0, and their compounds, . . . 479 Comparison of adverbs, see 68. PREPOSITIONS. Definition, 181 ; list of German prepositions, ..... 480 Prepositions which govern the genitive, 184. ..... 480 " the dative, 185 ....... 481 " " " the accusative, 186 ...... 481 Prepositions governing both the dative and accusative, 187. . . 482 Three prepositions which govern the genitive and dative both, 188. . 482 CONJUNCTIONS. Classification of conjunctions copulative, disjunctive, adversative, con- ditional, concessive, &c., 191 ......... 483 Xll INTERJECTIONS. Page A list of German interjections, 193 . . 484 Observations on their use, 485 CLASSIFICATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 486 A TABLE OF THE SIXTEEN VERBS WHICH ARE IRREGULAR ONLY IN PART, 489 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS, 490-506 The government of verbs, ........ 506-510 ERRATA. Page 9, 9th line from the bottom, read ,,e t W a 8" instead of (* t tt) a 8." On page 72, near the bottom, read " Thirty-second Lesson. 3tuet unb bret* fjtgfle Section " instead of " Thirty-fourth Lesson" fyc. Page 139, 7th and 8th lines from the top, read ,,aUe$" instead of Page 313, 8th line from the bottom, read ,,Sie toerbCtt ft e" instead of ,,/ f, .ef, f, / 8/ gay, 5\ b, hah, h, i f, e, i, 3,* \f yot, f, kah, i, ?/ t, el, 1, m, TTt, em, in, 9Z> It, en, n, >, o, o, o, * In print, the Germans have but one capital letter for the vowel * and the consonant j. I CAPITALS. The Figures. The Pronunciation, The Power. -A k @, ,' 58, SB, 3, SMALL LETTERS. r, fi *, */ 9/ pay, koo, err, ess, tay, oo, fow, vay, iks, ypsilon, tset, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, yi z. Most of the German letters being pronounced as in English, we shall only present those that follow a dif- ferent pronunciation. TABLE OF THOSE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, THE PRONUNCIATION OF WHICH IS NOT THE SAME AS IN Arr In Figures. Nnme. pronounced the Enjlith as : words: a, ah-a, a, made, 6, o-a, i. bird,* it, oo-a, t ie/I e-a, ie, field, ci, a-e, \ c*>, a ypsilon, \ I, I, at, ah-e, ) au, Cit, ah-a-oo, a-oo, (oy, boy.ll German Examples. SSatcr, fathers. l'6u>c, lion. PHucf^appiness. SBBicfe, meadow. !2Beife, manner. fcmt, to be. $aifcr, emperor. ( SSdume, trees. \ ?eute, people. * The English word bird does not qnite answer to the sound of this rowel ; it has rather the sound of cu in the French words : feu, coeur, fltur, jcune, pen. f There is no sound corresponding to this vowel in English, and, in order to learn it well, the pupils must hear it pronounced ; it answers to the sound of u in the French words : but, n#, vertu. t The method which we have adopted, of placing analagous sounds to- gether, will facilitate to learners the study of the pronunciation. There are even some provinces in Germany, where d and o are both pronounced a; u and ie, c; ct or ei% Clt and alt, /. jf We hare only been able to indicate the sounds of the two diphthong? 5tt Figure*. M, Are pronounced In the Entltsh German Examples. as : an, ah-oo, ou, lions. -. au$, house. n/ oo, oo, boot, gut, good. Of the simple and compound consonants the follow- ing differ in their pronunciation from the English con- ;iits: (5. (5, before a, o, it, before a consonant, or at the end of a syllable, has the sound of k. Ex. Sato, Cato ; Sonmb, Conrad ; (5ar, cure ; (Jrcfrir, credit ; gpectafcl, l>ei'(nv the other vmvrls, the letter C is pro- like /.v. Ex. @dfar, Caesar; C5tccro, Cicero; Ch. &, which is called tset$, white. This double consonant is compounded of f and $, and is called ess-tset. g is compounded of t and j, and has the sound of these two consonants combined. Ex. @d)a, treasure ; (3, finery. 35 is sounded like /. Ex. Setter, father ; Sormwtb, tutor ; SBoff, people. 25. 28 is pronounced like an English v and not like w. Ex. 2Balt>, forest ; 2Ctefe, meadow. 3* 3 has the pronunciation of ts. Ex. 3<*fytt/ tooth ; $elt, tent. EXPLANATION OF SOME SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. Expressions which vary either in their construction or idiom from the English are marked thus : f. A hand (08F") denotes a rule of syntax or construction. SECOND LESSON Zwtite Cation.* NOMINATIVE, the. GENITIVE, of the. DATIVE, to the. ACCUSATIVE, the. Masculine. Neuter. NOM. be*, bag* GEN. beg. beg. DAT. bent. bem. Ace. ben. bag* * To INSTRUCTORS. Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils, who should pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The instructor should also exercise his pupils by putting the questions to them in various ways. Each lesson, except the second, includes three operations : the teacher, in the first place, looks over the exercises of the most attentive of his pupils, putting to them the questions contained in the printed exercises ; he then dictates to them the next lesson ; and lastly puts fresh questions to them on all the preceding lessons. The teacher may divide one lesson into two, or two into three, or even make two into one, according to the degree of intelligence of his pupils. 6 Have you ? ci&en @ic ? Yes, Sir, I have. So, nictn <**/ id) fyafce. Have you the hat ? aOcn @ie ten ut ? Yes, Sir, I have the hat. 3a, nictn eiT, id) fyabe ben The ribbon, fcas 23cmfc ; the salt, fccig 0(5 ; the table, ten Stfd) ; the sugar, ten Surfer ; the paper, ba$ The Germans begin all substantives with a capital letter. Masculine. Neuter. NOM. my. GEN. of my. DAT. to my. Ace. my. NOM. mem* mem* GEN. metneS. meme$. DAT. tttetnem, metnem. Ace. meinem ntetn. 3fjr, you, is declined like mem. Example : Masculine. Neuter. NOM. 31r. GEN. DAT. Ace. NOM. your. GEN. of your. DAT. to your. Ace. your. Have you my hat ? 4bciOcn (Sic uictncn .,... . Yes, Sir, I have your hat. >/ nictn H'rr, id) f)obc Sfyrot $ut. Have you my ribbon ? obcn @ic incin iBnnt) '? I have your ribbon. 3d) ()flOc 3b* JsBanfc. EXERCISE 1. Have you the salt? Yes, Sir, I have the salt. Have you your salt? I have my salt. Have you the table? I have the table. Have you my table ? I have your table. Have you the sugar? I have the sugar. Have you your sugar ? I have my sugar. Have you the paper? I have the paper. Have you my paper ? I have your paper.f * Sfyt with a small letter signifies their, and has the same declension as 3^V, your. t Pupils desirous of making rapid progress, may compose a great many phrases in addition to those we have given them in the exercises ; but they must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns and verbs, as they meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more easily, when they have occasion to refer to them in writing their lessons. THIRD LESSON. JDritte Action. SBefcfjer, which, has the same declension as t>er. Masc. Neut. Which. NOM. Ace. tt)e(d)er. roelcfyen. DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, OR A WORD WHICH HAS THE SAME TERMINATION.* Masc. Neut. NOM. the good. GEN. of the good. DAT. to the good. Ace. the good. NOM. fcer gnte* baS gate. GEN. be$ guten. beS guten. DAT. bem guten. bcm gutetu Ace. ben gnten* bag gnte. Observation. Adjectives vary in their declension when preceded by : mem, my ; 3f)f, your ; or by one of the following words : em, a ; fein, no, none ; bein, thy ; fetn, his ; ifyr, her ; tmfer, our ; Sner, your. Example : Masc. Neut. NOM. my good. N. metn gnter* mem gnteS* GEN. of my good. G. meinetf gnten. metneS gnten* DAT. to my good. D. meinem gnten. meinem gnten. Ace. my good. A. metnen gnten metn gnte$. Good, qut ; bad, fcMcd)t ; beautiful or fine, fd)en ; great, big or large, Have you the good sugar? Yes, Sir, I have the good sugar. Have you the fine ribbon? I have the fine ribbon. Which hat have you ? I have my ugly hat. W T hich ribbon have you? I have your fine ribbon. (Sic ^cn gntcn Sucfcr ? niein ^crr x tc^ (jobc t>cn ^utcn Sucfcr. Sic fcci* fcbb'nc fflonb ? &c tas fd)6'nc !^ ut fjobcn < Scl) haOc ntcincn 2Be(cfK$ S^anb bnOcn * As biefer, this ; jener, that, &c EXEHCISE 2. Have you the fine hat 1 Yes, Sir, I have the fine hat. Have you my bad hat! I have your bad hat. Have you the bad salt ! I have the bad salt. Have you your good salt? I have my good salt. Which salt have you ] I have your good salt. Which su- gar have you 1 I have my good sugar. Have you my good su- gar? I have your good sugar. Which table have you 1 I have the fine table. Have you my fine table? I have your fine table. Which paper have you 1 I have the bad paper. Have you my ugly paper 1 I have your ugly paper. Which bad hat have you ? 1 have my bad hat. Which fine ribbon have you? I have your fine ribbon. FOURTH LESSON. J Cation. It. Masc. NOM. er. Ace. tbm Neut. Not. I have not. No, Sir. Have you the table 1 No, Sir, I have it not. Have you the paper 1 No, Sir, I have it not. The stone, the cloth, the wood, * the leather, the lead, the gold, 3?td)t. 3db M>e ntcM* SRcin, mcin crr. &a(>cn (Sic ben Stfcf) ? 97cm, nu-tn crr, tcl) fja&e tfjn n i 3) t. r, id) fja&e fecin, inc'm ntd)t. fccr Stein ; tnS Sud) ; bag &el$ ; ba^ Scbcr ; t>a^ S3(et ; bag otb. The terminations en and crn are used to form adjectives and denote the materials of anything. golden or of gold, leaden of lead, stone of stone, pretty, Have you the paper hat 1 I have it not. cjcftxm ; btctcrn ; jlctncrn ; F)U6|cr, (artifl). tc ben pctptercncn tfyn nid^t. The wooden table, the horse of stone, the coat, the horse, the dog, the shoe, the thread, the stocking, the candlestick, the golden rihbon, 9 Km f>e($crncn Stfrf) ; ta6 frcincrnc $)fcrt> ; ten a $ . 97 t cb t . aOcn (Sic 3d) fafcc md)t$. ben .ficife ; ta$ a(rc 23ret> ; ton artigcn (tjubfcfycn) fra$ a$ filOcrnc * As in French : avez-vous faim ? 1* 10 r C 3d) bin rjunqriq. I am hungry. * fS* fobe $unger. C tc butftiq ? Are you thirsty 1 i f *ertn i SDutfl 1* S Set) bin turfttq. la @tc nuibe ? I am not tired. 3d) bin ntcljt miibe. Of tfAe (genitive). Masc. Neut. Nouns of the masculine and neuter gender take 3 or e in the genitive case singular. The tailor's, or of the tailor, te6 the dog's, or of the dog, bcs &iintc ; the baker's, or of the baker, t>c$ iJ3aefer8 ; the neighbour's, or of the neigh- tc$ iflad)bcir$ ; bour, of the salt, teg cit$c$. rp, , , . , C tcr >oitnb beg SBtfcferS, The bakers dog. 1 tailor's coat bcr Kccf bl?fi EXERCISE 4. Have you the leathern trunk ? I have not the leathern trunk. Have you my pretty trunk ] I have not your pretty trunk. Which trunk have you 1 I have the wooden trunk. Have you my old button 1 I have it not. Which money have you 1 I have the good money. Which cheese have you ? I have the old cheese. Have you anything ! I have something. Have you my large dog 1 I have it not. Have you your good gold ] I have it. Which dog have you ? I have the tailor's dog. Have you the neighbour's large dog ? I have it not. Have you the dog's golden ribbon 1 No, Sir, I have it not. Which coat have you ? I have the tailor's good coat. Have you the neighbour's good bread? I have it not. Have you my tailor's golden ribbon ? I have it. Have you my pretty dog's ribbon ? I have it not. Have you the good baker's good horse 1 I have it. Have you the good tailors * As in French: avez-vous soif? f The first of these two expressions is more usual, the latter is preferred in poetry. 11 horse 1 I have it not. Are you hungry] 1 am hungry. Are you sleepy 1 I am not sleepy. Which candlestick have you ? I have the golden candlestick of my good baker. SIXTH LESSON. Sedjste Cection. Anything or something good. (ttt>fl$ @)utc$. Nothing or not anything bad. 9iid)t$ Gtyfafttt*. Have you anything good ? >n(,K'n (gie ctnxi$ I have nothing bad. 3d) (jn&c md)t$ What ? 2B a $ ? What have you ? 2n$ IjaOcn ut cbcr ben beg baker's ? S3oc!ers ? EXERCISE 5. Have you my book ? I have it not. Which book have you 1 I have my good book. Have you anything ugly ? I have nothing ugly. I have something pretty. Which table have you ? I have the baker's. Have you the baker's dog or the neighbour's"? I have the neighbour's. What have you 7 1 have nothing. Have you the good or bad sugar? I have the good. Have you the neighbour's 6od or bad horse 1 I have the good (one*). Have you the golden or the silver candlestick ? I have the silver can- dlestick. Have you my neighbour's paper or that of my tailor "? I have that of your tailor. Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am hungry. Are you sleepy or tired ] I am tired. What have you * Words in the exercises between parentheses, arc not to be translated. 12 pretty 1 I have nothing pretty. Have you the leather shoe 11 have it not. SEVENTH LESSON. Gitbtnte Cation, Have you my coat or the tailor's ? a6en alu'n Sic ben c Unrcd)t. Am I right? t $*bc id) EXERCISE 7. I have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. Are you sleepy 1 I am not sleepy. I am hungry. You are not hungry. Have I the cork 1 No, Sir, you have it not. Have I the carpen- ter's wood ? You have it not. Have 1 the Frenchman's good um- brella? You have it. Have I the carpenter's iron nail or yours ? You have mine. You have neither the carpenter's nor mine. Which pencil have 1 1 You have that of the Frenchman. Have I your thimble or that of the tailor ? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. Which umbrella have 1 1 You have my good umbrella. Have I the Frenchman's good honey ? You have it not. Which biscuit have 1 1 You have that of my good neigh- bour. Have you my coffee or that of my boy 1 I have that of your good boy. Have you your cork or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine. What have you T I have my good brother's good pencil. Am I right"? You are right. Am Twrong? You are not wrongf. Am I right or wrong 1 You are neither right nor wrong. You are hungry. You are not sleepy. You are neither hungry nor thirsty. You have neither the good coffee nor the good sugar. What have I ? You have nothing. NINTH LESSON. Neunte Section. Have I the iron or the golden abc id) t>cn ctfcrncn cfccr ten cjotfcc* nail ] ncn 9?agcl ? You have neither the iron nor @ic fyafrcn nxfcct ten cifcrnen nod) the golden nail. ten gcltcnen Sftagcf. 15 The sheep, the ram, the chicken (the hen), the ship, the bag (the sack), the young man, the youth, Who ? Who has ? Who has the trunk? The man has the trunk. The man has not the trunk. Who has it? The young man has it. The young man has it not. He has. He has the knife. He has not the knife. He has it. Has the man ? Has the painter? Has the frie~nd ? Has the boy the carpenter's hammer ? He has it. Has the youth it? Is he thirsty ? He is thirsty. Is he tired ? He is not tired. fcer .panmiel (to 1 fca$ Jbubn ; ta$ c&tff; tor jjunge SHenfd) (gen. en) ; fccr Stinging. hat fren jl offer? )cr 9)tann bat ten jl offer. Dor s)3tann !)at fecn Coffer n t d) t. Sl'er bat tbn ? 2)er junge 9)Jenfd) bat thru 2)er jungc $Renfd) fyat tbn n t d) t. (Sr (jat. (5r bat tag SKcffft n i d) t . at ter 9)2ann ? |>at bcr grater ? $at ber Jrcunt) ? j^at ter JtnaOc ^cn jammer Suunu'rmanns ? 6r bat ibn. ^>at tbn t>cr Siingdng ? Sft cr turfttg? (.oat er SDurft?) (Sr tft burfltg. ((Sr feat JDurft) Sit cr niflfcc ? (Sr tjl n i cl) t EXERCISES. 8. Is lie thirsty or hungry ? He is neither thirsty nor hungry. Has the friend my hat? He has it. He has it not. Who has my sheep ? Your friend has it. Who has rny large sack ? The baker has it. Has the youth my book ? He has it not. W T hat has he ? He has nothing. Has he the hammer or the nail ? He has neither the hammer nor the nail. Has he my umbrella or my stick ? He has neither your umbrella nor your stick. Has he my coffee or my sugar ? He has neither your coffee nor your sugar ; he has your honey. Has he my brother's biscuit or that of the Frenchman ? He has neither your brother's nor that of the French- man ; he has that of the good boy. Which ship has he ? He has my good ship. Has he the old sheep or the ram ? 9. Has the young man my knife or that of the painter ? He has neither yours nor that of the painter. Who has my brother's fine 16 dog? Your friend has it. What has my friend 1 ? He has the baker's good bread. He has the good neighbour's good chicken. What have you 1 I have nothing. Have you my bag or yours 1 I have that of your friend. Have I your good knife ] You have it. You have it not. Has the youth it (.feat c?) 1 He has it not. What has he? He has something good. He has nothing bad. Has he anything] He has nothing. Is he sleepy] He is not sleepy He is hungry. Who is hungry 1 The young man is hungry. Your friend is hungry. Your brother's boy is hungry. My shoemaker's brother is hungry. My good tailor's boy is thirsty. Which man has my book 1 The big (cjrcp) man has it. Which man has my horse 1 Your friend has it. He has your good cheese. Has he it ] Yes, Sir, he has it. TENTH LESSON. 2eljnte Section. The peasant, the ox, the cook, the bird, His. tec 2$cwcc (gen. n) *, NT cbfc ; tcc.fi tcr \ Masc. fem/ feittnt/ NOM. Ace. Neut. fetn. fern. Obs. A. The conjunctive possessive pronoun fcin is declined like mem and (See Lessons II. and III.) The servant, the broom, Has the servant his broom 1 His eye, his foot, his rice, He has his own. His or Jiis own (absolute possessive pronoun). tec SBcttente ; tec Skfcn. v&at tec jycttcntc fcincn JBcfcn ] few ?(uc)c ; fcincn ^u{j ; fcincn 9?et$. Has the cook his chicken or at ^ ct -^ Cc ft f^n ^nljn ctcr tas tc5 that of the peasant ] ^auern ] 'It ()at ta^ fctntgc. Masc. Neut. i N. ber feinige. bae^ feinfge. j A. ben jeinigen* ba^ fentfge* )cit tec SBcjbtcntc fcincn Coffee otcc ten mctntgcn ? Has the servant his trunk or mine] He has his own. Have you your shoe or his ] I have his. (Sc fiat ten fcmtgetu fi'tntgcn ? d) f)abc ten fcintcjcn. obcr 17 Somebody or anybody, some I ~ ( ^ one or any one (indefi- < ^ -nrmnnV . nite pronoun). ^ = Has anybody my hat? Sc~bodyta.it. Who has my stick 1 r bat mctncn (gtccf ? Nobody has it. SHicmanfc fjat il)n. JVo one, nobody or no/ anybody. 97 1 c m a n t. Ofo. B. SJttemanb is declined exactly like Who has my ribbon ? 8ct fyat mctn 33cwt> ? Nobody has it. 9iiemcmt> bat ft. Nobody has his broom. 97icnmnt> f)at fctncn 23cfen. EXERCISES. 10. Have you the ox of the peasant or that of the cook? I have neither that of the peasant nor that of the cook. Has the peasant his rice ? He has it. Have you it ? I have it not. Has his boy the servant's broom ? He has it. Who has the boy's pencil ? Nobody has it. Has your brother my stick or that of the painter? He has neither yours nor that of the painter ; he has his own. Has he the good or bad money 1 He has neither the good nor the bad. Has he the wooden or the leaden horse ? He has neither the wooden nor the leaden horse. What has he good 1 He has my good honey. Has my neighbour's boy my book ? He has it not. Which book has he ? He has his fine book. Has he my book or his own 1 He has his own. Who has my gold button ? Nobody has it. Has anybody my thread stocking 1 Nobody has it. ' 11. Which ship has the merchant? He has his own. Which horse has my friend? He has mine. Has he his dog ? He has it not. Who has his dog ? Nobody has it. Who has my bro- ther's umbrella ? Somebody has it. W T hich broom has the ser- vant? He has his own. Is anybody hungry? Nobody is hun- gry. Is anybody sleepy ? Nobody is sleepy. Is any one tired ? No one is tired. Who is right? Nobody is right. Have I his biscuit ? You have it not. Have I his good brother's ox ? You have it not. Which chicken have 1 ? You have his. Is anybody wrong? Nobody is wrong. 18 ELEVENTH LESSON. lfte Section. The sailor, tcr sfflatrofc, tcr S3ect$fncdf)t ; the chair, tcr tuf)l ; the looking-glass, tcr (Sptcgcf ; the candle, ta$ td)t ; the tree, tcr Staum ; the garden, tcr artcn ; the foreigner, tcr Jrcmtc ; the glove, tcr antfd)ulj. This ass, ttcfcr (5fe( ; that hay, ticfce (tic$) cu. The grain, bag ,Rorn ; the corn, ta$ ctrcttc. This man, ttcfcr 9)tann ; that man, jcncr Dflann ; this book, ttcfc* (ttc$ a ) 23ud) ; that book, jcncS X) N. G. D. A. This or this one. Masc. btefer e^ em en* That or that one. Neut. jeneS e$ em e$. It will be perceived that btefer and jeiier are declined exactly like the definite article. (See Lesson II.) The English almost always use that, when the Germans use b i e f e 3. In German j e n e r is only em- ployed when it relates to a person or a thing spoken of before, or to make an immediate comparison be- tween two things or persons. Therefore, whenever this is not the case, the English that must be translated by btefer. Have you this hat or that one ? o&cn ic ticfcn obcr }cncn ut ? But. 2Ct>cr, f on tern. 06s. Slber is used after affirmative and negative propositions ; fonbertt is only used after negative propo- sitions. I have not this, but that one. 3cb f)flk ntcbt ttcfon, fcntcrn jcncn. Has the neighbour this book or at tcr 97ad)0ar ttcfcS ctcr jcnc* that one 1 22ud) ? is often used for biefeS in the nominative and accusative neu- ter, particularly when it is not followed by a substantive, and when it re- presents a whole sentence, as will be seen hereafter. 19 He has this, but not that one. ct>cr friefcn nod) jcncn. That ox, ttcfvT d>fc ; the letter, fccv SBricf ; the note, t>ct 3cttc( (frciS fillet) ; the horse-shoe, tas .pufctjVn. EXERCISE 1-J. Which hay has the foreigner 1 He has that of the peasant. Has the sailor my looking-glass 1 He has it not. Have you this can- dle or that one ? I have this one. Have you the hay of my gar- den or that of yours ? I have neither that of your garden nor that of mine, but that of the foreigner. Which glove have you? I have his glove. Which chair has the foreigner 1 He has his own. Who has my good candle? This man has it. Who has that looking-glass ? That foreigner has it. What has your ser- vant (3br sftcDicntcr) ? He has the tree of this garden. Has he that man's book ] He has not the book of that man, but that ot this boy. Which ox has this peasant ? He has that of your neighbour. Have I your letter or his ? You have neither mine nor his, but that of your friend. Have you this horse's hay 1 I have not its hay, but its shoe. Has your brother my note or his own 1 He has that of the sailor. Has this foreigner my glove or his own 1 He has neither yours nor his own, but that of his friend. Are you hungry or thirsty! I am neither hungry nor thirsty, but sleepy. Is he sleepy or hungry 1 He is neither slee- py nor hungry, but tired. Am 1 right or wrong? You are neither right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. Have I the good or the bad knife ? You have neither the good nor the bad, but the ug^ly (one). What have 1 1 You have nothing good, but some- thing bad. W T ho has my ass ? The peasant has it. TWELFTH LESSON. 28lfte faction. N. O. D. A. That or which (relative ( Masc. tt>efd)er e3 em em pronoun). ( Neut. tttflofyeS e em eg. Obs. A. It will be perceived that the relative pro- noun tt>e(of)er is declined like the definite article, which may be substituted for it ; but then the masculine and neuter of the genitive case is beffen instead of 3CeIdher is never used in the genitive case. 20 Have you the hat, which my akn (Sic ben .put, rocldjcn man brother has 1 JsBruK'r f)at ? I have not the hat, which your 3d) bnbc nidjt ten vput, rockbcn 36^ brother has. SBrubcr bat. Have you the horse, which I ^jo6cn te bag ^ferb, roctdjcS id) have ? b^Oc ? I have the horse, which you have. 3d) b^c bns s yfcrb, nx(d)C$ (Sic Masc. Neut. f NOM. berjemgc* ba^jemge. That or the one (determi- i GEN. beSjemgem be^jenigen* native pronoun). ] DAT. bemjenigen, bentjcntgen. [Ace. benjenigen, ba^jcnige. Obs. B. jD c r j e n t g e is always used with a rela- tive pronoun, to determine the person or thing to which that pronoun relates. It is compounded of the definite article and jemg, and declined like an adjective, pre- ceded by this article. The article alone may also be substituted in its stead, but must then undergo the modification pointed out in the foregoing observation, as will be seen hereafter. I have that, or the one which P*^ *<<<<> l*cn ' you have< C 3d) bal'c t)cn, mcld)cn You have that which I have re(cf)er. Ace. benjenigen, tt)eld)en. NOM. batfjemge, Ace. ba^jenige, n>elcf)e. Which carriage have you : SOBcfdjcn Sfitagcn baK'n (gtc ? I have that which your friend 3d) bate ben (bcnicnujcn), roctd)en has. 3fa Srcunl) ^ at - The carriage, bcr SKagcn ; the house, bciS ^>au^. rp, ( Masc. berfetbe (ber namltcfje). 21 Obs. C. Scrfelbe, the same, is compounded of the definite article and fefb, and is declined like tor jo* tttge. It is frequently used instead of the personal pro- noun of the third person to avoid repetition and to make the sentence more perspicuous. Have you the same stick, which Apaben Ctc tcnjVtben (ten ncw.lls I have ] d)cn) Stecf, ten id) haK* ? 1 have the same. 3d) hnbc tcnfi'Uvn (ten nftwttdxn)* Has that man the same cloth, .pat tu'fcv 9)Janu ta?|\10c (to* nams which you have ] (td)c) Suel), iwldKS (tai>) Sic vn? He has not the same. OT iv.r i;::M tui>|Vtbc (ta$ nani(td)v'). Has he (that is, has the same .pot tafilK' nictncn antfd)iil) ? man) my glove ] He has it not. (5r fyat tfw (tcnfdOcn) nid)t. EXERCISE 13. Have you the garden, which 1 have;? I have not the one that you have. Which lookiiiLi"-'. 1 ;!.^- have you? I have the one which your brother has. Has he the hook that your friend has ] He has not the one which my friend has. Which candle has he 1 He has that of his neighbour. He has the one that I have. Has he this tree or that one! He has neither this nor that, but the one which I have. Which ass has the man 1 He has the one that his boy has. Has the stranger your chair or mine 1 He has neither yours nor mine; but he has his friend's good chair. Have you the glove which t have, or the one that my tailor has. 1 have neither the one which you have, nor the one which your tailor lias, but my own. Has your shoemaker my fine shoe, or that of his boy ] He has neither yours nor that of his boy, but that of the jrood stranger. Which house has the baker] He has neither yours nor mine, but that of his oood brother. Which car- riage have 1 ] Have I mine or that of the peasant 1 You have neither yours nor that of the peasant ; you have the one which 1 have. Have you my fine carriage 1 I have it not ; but the Frenchman has it. W r hat has the Frenchman ] He has nothing. What has the shoemaker] He has something fine. What has he fine] He has his fine shoe. Is the shoemaker right] He is not wrong ; but this neighbour, the baker, is riorht. Is your horse hungry 1 It (($) is not hungry, but thirsty. Have you my ass's hay or yours] I have that which my brother has. Has your friend the same horse that my brother has] He has not the same horse, but the same coat. Has he (at fccrfMe) my umbrella ] He has it not. 22 THIRTEENTH LESSON. JBrei^ntc flection. DECLENSION OF MASCULINE AND NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES. I. RULES. 1. Substantives of the masculine and neu- ter gender take e3 or 3 in the genitive case singular : those ending in $, f5, J, , take c3 ; all others, particu- larly those ending in el, en, er, cfyen and kin, take $. 2. Masculine substantives which end in e in the nominative singular, take n in the other cases of the singular and plural, a and do not soften the radical vowel. II. PLURAL. RULES. 1. All substantives, without exception, take n in the dative case of the plural, if they have not one in the nominative. 2. All masculine and neuter substantives ending in el, en, er, as also diminutives in cfyen and leilt, have the same termination in the plural as in the singular. 3. In all cases of the plural masculine substan- tives take e, and neuter substantives er ; and soften the radical vowels a, c, u, into a, 6, ii* 4. In words of the neuter gender ending in ef, en, er, the radical vowel is not softened in the plural, ex- cept in : ba$ Softer, the convent ; plur. tie The hats, Me utc ; the buttons, tic jtncpfc ; the tables, Me Stfdjc ; the houses, tic a'ufcr ; c the ribbons, Me " Except bcr -Jtafe, the cheese ; gen. be8 JlafeS ; plur. b The cleclen^ion of those substantives which deviate from these rules will be separately noted *. c It must be observed that in the diphthong (lit, a is softened. In the diph- thong Ctl, u is not softened, as : bcr $rem:b, the friend ; plur. bte ffteutftt, the friend*. [UNIVERSITY 23 The threads, the tailors, the notes, tic gatcn ; tic (Scbncitct ; tic Scttcl, tic 23ittctte. The hoys, the Frenchmen, men or the men, tic vftnabcn ; tic ran$efcn ; tic 9)icnfd)cn. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IN THE PLURAL. NOM. the good. GEN. of the good. DAT. to the good. Ace. the good. The good boys. The ugly dogs. For all genders. NOM. bte guten. GEN. ter guten. DAT. ten guten. Ace. bte guten. Bitten untc. d Obs. Adjectives preceded in the plural by a posses- sive pronoun, have the same declension as with the definite article. For all genders. f NOM. metne guten. TM- j / i i\ J GEN. metner quten My good (plural). m ^^ n ffMf I Have you my good books ? I have your good books. tneuten guten. . meine guten* ic mcinc cjutcn SBiicfyct ? c 3f)rc cuitcn JBficl)cr. A TABLE OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. Sat st. Masculine. Subst. Feminine. Su N. bst. Neuter. G. D. or e or e I > invariable. G. D. or e. or e. kA AJ A. The word $unb, dog, docs not soften the rowel u in the plural 24 Sul r N. st. Masculine. e. N." Subst. Feminine. G. D. e* en or n G. D. > en or n* A. e. A. Subst. Neuter. N. G. D. A. er* em* er. EXERCISE. 14. Have you the tables'? Yes, Sir, I have the tables. Have you my tables ? No, Sir, I have not your tables. Have I your but- tons ? You have my buttons. Havel your fine houses'? You have my fine houses. Has the tailor the buttons 1 He has not the buttons, but the threads. Has your tailor my good buttons 7 My tailor has your good gold buttons. What has the boy 1 ? He has the gold threads. Has he my gold or my silver threads? He has neither your gold nor your silver threads. Has the Frenchman the fine houses or the good notes? He has neither the fine houses nor the good notes. What has he? He has his good friends. Has this man my fine umbrellas? He has not your fine umbrellas, but your good coats. Has any one my good letters ? No one has your good letters. Has the tailor's son (tcr Sohn) my good knives or my good thimbles? He has neither your good knives nor your good thimbles, but the ugly coats of the stran^' r's big (flvofO boys. Have I your friend's good ribbons? You have not my friend's good ribbons, but my neighbour's fine carriage. Has your friend the shoemaker's pretty sticks, or my good tailor's pretty dogs ? My friend has my good shoemaker's fine books ; but he has neither the shoemaker's pretty sticks nor your good tailor's pretty dogs. Is your neighbour right or wrong? He is neither right nor wrong. Is he thirsty or hungry ? He is neither thirsty nor hungry. FOURTEENTH LESSON. bierjeljntc ection. The Englishman, the German, the Turk, the small books, the large horses, Have the English the fine hats ot* the French ? fccr (Sn.qfcmbct ; fccr )eutfdjc ; bet iir!c ; Me Hctnen Mcbct ; Me tc fcer Me fd)b'nen 25 For all genders. f NOM. biejettigen or bie. rp, I GEN. berjcmgen berer, ] DAT. bcnjcm'gen bcueiu (^Acc. bicjeuigeu bie* Obs. A. When the definite article is substituted for berjenige, its genitive plural is bercr, and its dative plur. bencn. (See also Lesson XII. Obs. B.) Have you the books which the aOcn (Sic tic 23ud)cr, roe(d)C tic men have ? 9flcnnct WH'II ? I have not those which the men 3d) faOc nid)t Mcjcmcjcn (tic), ivct- have; but I have those which d)C fctc Scanner ifabcn ; nbcv id) you have. ^abc Me (fctqcnujcn), wctdjc (Sic For all genders. fp, I) i c f e 1 6 e n a (bic ndmlicfyem See Lesson XII. Obs. C.) Have you the same books, which afccn tcfc((>cn 23iid)cr, t>tc tc^ I iiave ? ^aOc ? I have the same. 3d) fabe btcfc(6cn* The Italian, the Italians, bet Staltcncr, tic Softener ; the Spaniard, the Spaniards, t>cc (Spanicr, tic For all genders. TNoM. n>e(ci)c or bt'e* GEN. . n>cfcf)e bie* . B. When the definite article stands for its genitive case plural is not berer, but beren, (See Lesson XII. Obs. A.) The genitives beficn, berett, are preferable to the genitives tt>efd)e, tt>eld)er, being more easily distinguished from the nominative. For all genders. N. G. D. A. These. Those. btefe, btefer, biefen, biefe* jene, jener, jenen, j[ene $>tefet(jen is declined like btcjcntgert. b Nouns derived from foreign languages do not soften the radical vowel in the plural. 2 26 Obs. C. The definite article may be used instead of these pronouns. Before a noun it follows the regu- lar declension ; but when alone, it undergoes the same changes as when substituted for terjemge (See Obs. A. above). The pronoun fcer, ba, is distinguished from the article bet, ba, by a stress in the pronunciation. As an article, it throws the principal accent on the word which immediately follows. Which books have you ! 95Md)C 23ud)Ct rjatjcn (Sic 1 Have you these books or those ? $aOcn ic fctcfe oK'c jcnc 23iid>cr ? I have neither these nor those. ^ I have neither the one nor the S- 3d) f)a(>c n^bcr fctcfe nccfy jcnc, other. c ) I have neither those of the Span- 3d) fynfec tvcbcr btc tcr et Siitfen. EXERCISES. 15. Have you these horses or those 1 I have not these, but those. Have you the coats of the French or those of the English"? I have not those of the French, but those of the English. Have you the pretty sheep (ba? <2d)af takes c, and is not softened in the plural) of the Turks or those of the Spaniards? I have neither those of teh Turks nor those of the Spaniards, but those of my brother. Has your brother the fine asses of the Spaniards or those of the Italians ] lie has neither those of the Spaniards nor those of the Italians, but he has the fine asses of the French. Which oxen has yum brother ? He has those of the Germans. Has your friend my large letters or those of the Germans 1 He has neither the one nor the other (See Note c , Lesson XIV.). Which letters has he ? He has the small letters which you have. Have I these houses or those ? You have neither these nor those. Which houses have I ] You have those of the English. Has any one the tall tailor's gold buttons 1 Nobody has the tailor's gold buttons, but somebody has those of your friend., 16. Have I the notes of the foreigners or those of my boy] You have neither those of the foreigners nor those of your boy, but those of the great Turks. Has the Turk my fine horse ] He has it not. Which horse has he 1 He has his own. Has your neigh- bour my chicken or my sheep ] My neighbour has neither your chicken nor your sheep. What has he ] He has nothing good. Have you nothing fine ? I have nothing fine. Are you tired 1 I c The English phrases the former and the latter, the, one and the other, are generally expressed in German by btefer, plur. fctefe, and jener, plur. jenc, but in an inverted order, ticfer referring to the latter and jetter to the former. 27 am not tired. Which rice has your friend ] He lias that of his merchant. Whir-h sugar has he 1 He has that which I have.- Has he your merchant's good coffee or that of mine 1 ? He has nei- ther that of yours nor that of mine ; he has his own. Which ships (to? Sccbtff forms its plural in c) has the Frenchman 7 ? He has the ships of the English. Which houses has the Spaniard 1 He has' the same which you have. Has he my good knives'? He has your good knives. Has he the thread stockings which I have 1 He has not the same that you have, but those of his brother. tcr Jtamm. afcen te mctnc ttetncn Jlamme ? 3*>0c fie. fi c (after the verb). Plural for all genders. N. G. D. A. metne-meuter-memett-meme* 3f)re -Sforer -Sfymt -SJjre. feine -fdn er -fetnen -feine, tfyre -tfyrcr -tfymt -ifyre. FIFTEENTH LESSON. jrunfjeljnte Cettion. The glass, the comb, Have you my small combs 1 I have them. Them, My (plural), Your, His, Their, Have you my fine glass 1 Has he my fine glasses 1 He has them. The man has them. He has them not. The men have them. Have the men them ? Have you my chairs or his "? I have neither yours nor his. Which chairs have you 1 I have mine. Some sugar, some bread, some salt, tc nu'tn cr mctnc fdjb'ncn (afcr ? (Sr f)at ftc. 2)cr O^nnn ^at ftc. (t r)at fie nt d)t. 5)ic Banner fjabcn fie. |>aOcn ftc tic 9)2a'nner; 1 Sic mctnc ^tiif)(e cbcc tie fctntgcn ? (See Lesson VII.) 3cb fyabc njcter tic S^tgcn nod) tie feint cjcn. aOBi-lcfec ttt^tc ftabcn ic ? 3d) ^abc tic mcimgcn. Surfer ; SBrcD ; 60!*. RULE. in German. or ?iy before a noun is not expressed 28 EXERCISE. 17. Have you my good combs 1 I have them. Have you the good horses of the English ] 1 have them not. Which brooms have you] I have those of the foreigners. Have you my coats or those of my friends ? I have neither yours nor those of your friends. Have you mine or his"? I have^his Has the Italian the good cheeses which you have? He has not those which I have, but those which you have. Has your boy my good pencils ? He has them. Has he the carpenter's nails ? He has them not. What has he 1 He has his iron nails. Has anybody the thim- bles of the tailors ? Nobody has them. Who has the ships of the Spaniards! The English have them. Have the English these ships or those 1 The English have their ships. Have your brothers my knives or theirs? My brothers have neither your knives nor theirs. Have I your chickens or those of your cooks 1 You have neither mine nor those of my cooks. Which chick- ens have I? You have those of the good peasant. Who has my oxen 1 Your servants have them. Have the Germans them 1 The Germans have them not, but the Turks have them. Who has my wooden table 1 Your boys have it. Who has my good bread ! Your friends have it. SIXTEENTH LESSON. 0ecl)}el)nte flection. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES WITHOUT AN ARTICLE. RULE. An adjective, not preceded by an article, takes the same termination as the definite article, ex- cept in the genitive singular, masculine and neuter, which then ends in en instead of e. Masculine. Neuter. {N. guter 2Beuu gutetf Sa(j. G. quten SBeined. quten Sal* t D. gntentSffietne, gntem afje. A. guten 28ein* Plural for all genders. Good or some good, &c. ( N. G. D. A. (plural.) \ gute, guter, guten, gute, Some good cheese, gutcr some good bread, gutc$ 23rer. 29 Singular. Some of it, any of it, of it. \ %' "??J e "' ** "' J e ff e |J m - I N. reclcfyetf, beffcn, be^felben. Same of them, any of them, OjT tfl-STTlu Plural for all genders. ^ The pronoun so;we or wy, when taken in a partitive sense, is expressed by tt>efcf). Of him, of it, of them* &i\, when governed by a substantive, an adjec- tive, or a verb requiring in German the genitive, are expressed by the genitive of the personal pronouns, if rein ting to a person, and if to a thing, by the genitives teflon, betffelbcn, bercn, berfdbcn, which may sometimes be omitted. Have you any wine 1 I have some. Have you any water 1 I have some. Have you any good wine ? I have some. Have I any good cloth ? You have some. Have you any shoes ? I have some. 1 lave you good or bad horses 1 I have some good ones. Have you good or bad wine 1 I have some good. Have you good or bad water 1 I have some good. EXERCISE. 18. Have you any sugar ? I have some. Have you any good cof- fee 1 I have some. Have you any salt 1 I have some. Have I any good salt 1 You have some. Have I any shoes 1 You have some. Have I any pretty dogs'? You have some. Has the man any good honey 1 He has some. What has the man 1 He has some good bread. What has the shoemaker] He has some pretty shoes. Has the sailor any biscuits (3nricfoacf does not soften in the plural) 1 He has some. Has your friend any good pencils 1 He has some. Have you good or bad coffee 1 I have somo good. Have you good or bad wood 1 I have some good. Have jaafccn Sic SOScin ? 3d) babe n>c(d)cn. 4babcn Sic SHSofiet ? 3d) b^bc nxld)C$. cibcn Sic gutcn SBctn ? 3d) fjobc roc(d)cn. ^>aOe id) gutc$ Sud) ? Sic Ija&cn tDe(d)f^. Jbabcn (Sic @d)u()e ? 3d) ^abc n?c(d)f. afan Sic cjutc ctcr fd)(cd)tc ^fcrbc? 3d) b^Oc flute. $cibeu Sic Quten otcr fc^tcc^tcn SKcin? 3d) fafce QUtcn. a(>cn Sic cuUcS otcr fd)(cc^tc^ far? 3d) taO 30 I good or bad oxen 1 You have some bad (ones). Has your brother good or bad cheese 1 He has neither good nor bad. What has he good 1 He has some good friends. Who has some cloth ? My neighbour has some. Who has some money ? The French have some. Who has some gold ? The English have some. Who has some good horses 1 The Germans have some. Who has some good hay 1 This ass has some. Who has some good bread 1 That Spaniard has some. Who has some good books 1 These Frenchmen have some. Who has some good ships? Those Englishmen have some 1 Has anybody wine 1 Nobody has any. Has the Italian fine or ugly horses ? He has some ugly (ones). Have you wooden or stone tables'? I have neither wood- en nor stone (ones). Has your boy the fine books of mine 7 He has not those of your boy, but his own. Has he any good thread stockings 1 He has some. What has the Turk 1 He has nothing. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 0i*b*n?e!)nte alien. Singular. C N. G. D. A. No, none, not a, or not < M. fern, feine$, fement, feinen* any. ( N. fein, feinetf, fetnem, few. Obs. A. The word fein has this declension when, like no in English, it is followed by a substantive ; but when the substantive is understood as with none in English, it forms its nominative masculine in er, and its nominative and accusative neuter in e or 3. Have you any wine ? abcn tc 8ctn ? I have none. 3d) M>c ton en. Have you no bread ? akn (Sic f cm SBrct) ? I have not any. 3d) fyafce fcincS (fctn$). Obs. B. It will be observed that any is expressed by fein, when accompanied by a negation. Plural for all genders. No, none, or not any (plu- ( N. G. D. A. ral). ( feme, feiner, feinett, feme. Have you no shoes ? ^afccn ic feme (Scfyufye I have none. 3d) fyabc fctne* Have you any ? abcn ct 9)tonn nx(d)C ? 31 He has none. r fjat fctnc. Has he any good books ? &at cr gutc S3iid)Ct ? He has some. f)r Scttcntcr) any c bcrcn gweu (See Obs. Lesson XVI.) He has three. r fyat bcrcn t>rct. You have four. (Sic fyabcn bcrcn mcr. Have you five good horses ? aben (Sic funf c;utc 3)fcrt>C ? I have six. 3d) ^abc bcrcn fccl)^. I have six good and seven bad 3d) fabt fcc^^ fiutc vmfc fiebcn ones. fcr)(cd)tc. 33 RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES RELATIVE TO THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. We have shown in the foregoing lessons that in Herman as in English, the adjective always precedes the substantive. When two or more adjectives are before the same noun, they all follow the same declen- sion. Adjectives are not declined when they are jiot accompanied by a substantive expressed or understood, i. e., when they form the predicate of a proposition. J\br ut ift fcfycn, your hat is beautiful ; mciit 93anb t|l fd)CH, my ribbon is beautiful; tyvc itte jwt> fd)6n, your hats are beautiful. When followed by a substantive expressed or under- stood, the adjective is declined, and assumes three dif- ferent forms, viz: 1st, Before a substantive without an article pre- ceding, it takes the same termination as the definite article, except in the genitive case singular masculine and neuter, in which it adds e tt instead of e 3. 2d, When it follows the definite article, or a word of the same termination, it adds en in all cases, except in the nominative singular of all genders, and the ac- cusative singular feminine and neuter, in which it adds e* 3d, When preceded by the indefinite article, or a possessive or personal pronoun, it adds c t in the nomi- nalive masculine, e in the nominative and accusative feminine, eg in the nominative and accusative neuter, and e it in the other cases. All participles partake of the nature of adjectives, and are subject to the same laws. 2* 34 A TABLE OF THE DECLENSION OF GERMAN ADJECTIVES. I. The adjective without an article before | II. The adjective preceded by the defi- III. The adjective preceded by the indefi- a substantive. nite article. nite artic e. Jlfasc. Fern. JYeut. Jfasc. Fcni. JVeut. Jtfasc. Fern. Jfeut. NOM. er e e3 e e e er e e bS J GEN. en er en en en en en en en D - jiE DAT. em er em en en en en en en OQ L Acc. en e e en e e en e e$ fNoM. e en J GEN. er For all en For all to * DAT. en genders. en genders. PH Ace. e en Obs. A. The adjective is declined in the same manner when taken substantively. B. Adjectives preceded by the words : atle, all ; etnige, etlirfje, some, sundry ; genttjfe, certain ; feme, none ; mandje, several ; mefyrere, many, several ; folcfye, such ; fcerfcfyiebene, various ; Diefe, many ; n>efd)e r which ; tt>entge, few, lose the letter n in the nominative and accusa- tive plural ; but they keep that termination when pre- ceded by a possessive or personal pronoun in the plural. a C. Adjectives ending in e (, e n, e r, for the sake of euphony often reject the letter e which precedes those three consonants. Ex. instead of efcefer, golbener, tfyenc* rer, we say : ebfer, golfcner, tfyenrer* EXERCISE. 20. Have you a good servant 1 I have one. Has your hatmaker a beautiful house 1 He has two of them. Have I a pretty gold rib- bon 1 You have one. What has the joiner'? He has beautiful a Most modern authors frequently reject this distinction, and form all the cases of the plural in ett. 35 tables. Has he a beautiful round (runt)) table 1 He has one. Has the baker a large looking-glass ? He has one. Has the Scotchman the friends that I have 1 He has not the same that you have, but he has good friends. Has he your good books 1 He has them. Have I their good hammers 1 You have them not, but you have your good iron nails. Has that hatter my good hat ] He has mt yours, but his own. Have I my good shoes "? You have not yours; you have his. Who has mine? Somebody has them. any body two letters ] Tlvc brother of my neighbour has three. Has your cook two sheep (plur. S?d)flfc) 7 He has four. - he six good chickens 1 He has three good and seven bad. Has the merchant good wine 1 He has some. Has the tailor good coats ] He has none. Has the baker good bread 1 He has some. What has the carpenter ? He has good nails. What has your merchant ! He has good pencils, good coffee, good honey, and good biscuits (plur. Snne&ncfc). Who has good iron] My good friend has some. Am I right or wrong ? You are wrong. Is any body sleepy 1 The shoemaker is sleepy and thirsty. Is he tired ? He is not tired. Has your servant the glasses of our (iwfcrer, see the next Lesson) friends ? He has not those of your friends, but those of his great merchants. Has he my wooden chair ? He has not yours, but that of his boy. Are you thirsty 1 I am not thirsty, but very hungry (gtopcn ungcr). NINETEENTH LESSON. tf*un}el)nte Section. How much* How many ? 2BtCt)ic(] a How many hats 1 95Mcwc( itfc 1 How many knives ] SBtctricl $)icf]cr T How much bread ? SQ&tc&tct 23ret> ? Only, but. 01 u r. How many tables have you ! SQ&tcwcl 3>tfrf)C fja&en ag fiir em. n>a3 fair em. A, n>a3 fiir etnen* tt>a3 fiir eitn Plural for all genders. fiir. gteunfc 7 Our. Our (plural). i fiic ctnen Stfcf) 3d) feafcc ctnen f)6'($ernen 5Sas fur StfofK feat cr ? (Sc feat fK'inccne Stfcbe. i fiir cm .^8iid) f)ot 2 hat cm bfit'fcbc^ Slid i fftc c papier baOcn 3d) babe fd)6'nc6 papier. SOSa^ fiic Sucfec feat ec 1 (c feat Quten Sudfer. Masc. Neut. ( NOM. itnfer* imfen J GEN. nnfere& imfere^* ] DAT. uujerem* imferem* [ Ace. unferen* imfer* Plural for all genders. ( N. G. D. A. a$ 2(ugc takes n in th<> plur. and is not softened) ? He has great eyes and great feet. Who has great thread stockings'? The Spaniard has some. Has he any cheese 1 He has none. Has he corn ? He has some. What kind of corn has he 1 He has good corn. What kind of rice has our cook ? He has good rice. W T hat kind of pencils has our merchant ? He has good pencils. Has our baker good bread 1 He has good bread and good wine. 23. Who is thirsty ? Nobody is thirsty ; but the friend of our neighbour is sleepy. Who has our iron knives ? The Scotch- man has them. Has he them ? He has them. W T hat kind of friends have you ? I have good friends. Is the friend of our Englishmen right 1 He is neither right nor wrong. Has he good little birds, and good little sheep (plur. Sobnfc) ? He has neither birds nor sheep. What has the Italian? He has nothing. Has our tailor's boy anything beautiful ? He has nothing beautiful, but something ugly. What has he ugly? He has an ugly dog. Has he an ugly horse ? He has no horse. What has our young friend ? He has nothing. Has he a good book ? He has one. Has he good salt ? He has none. TWENTIETH LESSON. guwnfofite Cection. Much, many, a good deal of. 83 t c t . Much wine. 83 id SQBetn. Much money. 83 id dt>. 38 Obs. A. When tttel is preceded by an article, pro- noun, or preposition, or when it stands alone and is used substantively, it is declined like an adjective ; otherwise it is indeclinable. Have you much good wine ] a(>cn c|]en wcL Too mwcA. 3 u otcl. You have too much wine. (Sic IjciOcn $u wet SDSctn. We. 80S i r. We have. S5Mt bafccn. We have not. SStr ^aOcn mcfet. We have little or not much money. S05tr FjuOcn nid)t ttct (5>c(t>. Enough. <& c n u g. Enough money. (SJclt) c;cnucj. Knives enough. S^effci; gcnug. Obs. B. eiuig is never put before the substantive, Little. C. Our remark on fciel applies equally to tt>emg. But these two words are declined, when they relate to several distinct things, or anything that may be coun- ted, as will be seen hereafter. But little, only a little (not much). 9 u r w c n i 9 (ntd)t met). Have you enough wine 1 $obcn c n i g. A little wine. in rucmg ctn. A little salt. in rocntg 0(3. Courage. t) c r 9)j u t &. You have but little courage. (Sic fja&en ntd^t tJtct SDlutlj. We have few friends. SOStr fjoOcn wcntg O/* them (relative to persons). 3 ft t c r (gen. of the personal pro- noun fie, they; see Ota. Les- son XVI.) 39 Have you many friends ] .oalvn (Sic Diet Jreuufc*? We have but few. &Mr baben tbrcr nuu nxnicje (See Obs. C. above). You have but little money. 2;. habcn nicbt met c(b. Has the foreigner much money ] at tvr Jremfce Diet ctt> ? He has but little. CT hat fceffen nut rventcj. EXERCISES. 21. Have you much coffee] I have only a little. Has your friend much watt-r ? He has a great deal. Has the foreigner much corn 1 He has not much. What has the American 1 He has much su-jr-ar. What has the Russian? He has much salt. Have ire much rice"? We have but little. What have we] We have much wine, much water and many friends. Have we much gold] \\'u iiave only a little, but enough. Have you many boys] \\ 'f have only a few. Has our neighbour much hay ] He has < Mouoli. Has the Dutchman much cheese] He has a great deal. Has this man courage] He has none. Has that foreigner money ] 1 lr lias not a great deal, but enough. Has the painter's boy candles (plur. 2id)tc) ] He has some. 25. Have we good letters] W T e have some. We have none. l the joiner good bread] He has some. He has none. Has he good honey ] He has none. Has the Englishman a good h Mi-.su ] He has one. What have we ] We have good horses. Who has a beautiful house ] The German has one. Has the Ita- lian many pretty looking-glasses] He has a great many; but he has only a little corn. Has my good neighbour the same horse which you have] He has not the same horse, but the same car- riage. Has the Turk the same ships that we have ] He has not the same, he has those of the Russians. 26. How many servants have we ] We have only one, but our bro- thers have three of them. What knives have you ] We have iron knives. What bag has the peasant ] He has a thread bag. Has the young man our long (grojj) letters] He has them not. Who has our pretty notes ] The father (t>cc Stater) of the sailor has them. Has the carpenter his nails ] The carpenter has his iron nails, and the hatmaker his paper hats. Has the painter beau- tiful gardens ] He has some, but his brother has none. Have you many glasses ] W r e have only a few. Have you enough wine ] We have enough of it. Has anybody my brooms ] Nobody has them. Has the friend of your hatmaker our combs or yours ] He has neither yours nor ours; he has his. Has your boy my note or yours ] He has that of his brother. Have you my stick ] I have not yours, but that of the merchant. Have you my gloves (plur. Jpant>fd)ub0 I nave not yours? but those of my good neighbour. 40 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. in unb }ttmn?igst* Cation. The pepper, the meat, the vinegar, the beer, A few books. The other. The others. Another, another horse, other horses, Have you another horse ? I have another. No other. bcr spfcffcr ; bas g let fd) ; A few. Have you a few books 1 I have a few. He has a few. I have only a few knives. You have only a few. The florin, the kreutzer (a coin), Other. bas fN. etntge (etlicfye) SBitdjer* 1 G. euriger (etltcfyer) SSnrfjer. i D. etntgen (ctltdjcn) SMirfjcnu [A. etntge (etlidje) S3itd)er 6 i n i cj c, e t ( t d) c. t (Sic ctntijc 93ttd)cr ? ibc cini^c. t ctttd)C. v .ibc nur eintgc SCWcflcr. (&tc (jabcn nur ctntgc. bcc diutbcn (is not softened in the plur.) ; tfnbct (is declined like an ad- jective). Singular. Masc. Neut. N. bet anbere. ba^ anbere. G. be^ anbern. be3 anbenu D. bem anbcnu bent anbem, [ A. ben anbern* ba^ anbere. Plural for all genders. N. bte anbenu D. ben anbenu G. ber anbenu A. bte anbern, (See Obs. Lesson XIX.) ctn ?Cnbcrcr ; ctu anber e 1 3d) fyabe anfrete. 3d) babe tone anfrere. fra$ .oeinfr (plur. en) ; frag Sn'tn (plur. e) ; fret Jlcpf ; frer 2{tm (is not softened in the plur.); No others. I have no other horse. I have no other. Have you other horses ] I have some others. I have no others. The shirt, the leg, the head, the arm, the heart, the month, tct fiXOBOl (is not softened in the plur.) ; the work, fra* 2erf (plur. e) ; the volume, fret i^anfr ; the crown (money), fret SMct (is not softened in the plur.). What day of the month ? fr C t (t)a) rot c & t c I ft e ? Obs. Ordinal numbets are used in replying to the question ber or bag ttriemel fte ? what day of the month ? These numbers are declined like adjectives. They are formed of the cardinal numbers by adding t as far as twenty, and fl from twenty to the last, with the excep- tion of erfi, iirst, and britt, third, which are irregular. Ex. The first, tcr the second, t)Ct the third, fcct the fourth, fcct the fifth, fret the sixth, fret the seventh, fret the eighth, fret the ninth, fret the tenth, fret the eleventh, fret the twentieth, fret the twenty-first, &c. fret or fra$ ctfte ; frtitte ; tnevte ; fiinfte ; fieOente ; ad)te ; neuntc ; gcljntc ; dfte ; cm unt) jvvansicjjie, 8 Ta -6cr^ the heart, takes c n 9 in the genitive and en in the dative case singular ; in the plural it takes e n in all the cases. b Henceforth the k-amers should write the date before their task. Ex. Son- ben, ten erftcn s !)?at, em taufeub cic^t fjunfert unb arf)t utib bvet^tg, London, 1st May, 1838. 42 Have you the first or second aOcn ic ba$ erftc ober bag book? 23ud>? 1 have the third. 3d) ()abc bag btittc. Which volume have you ? S^c(d)cn S3anb faben (Sic ? I have the fifth. Set) fya&c ben fttnften. EXERCISES. 27. Have you a few knives 1 I have a few. Have you many rams ? I have only a few. Has the friend of the great painter many looking-glasses ? He has only a few. Have you a few florins ? 1 have a few. How many florins have you ? I have ten. How many kreutzers has your servant ? He has not many, he has only two. Have the men the beautiful glasses of the Ita- lians 1 The men have them not, but we have them. What have we ? We have much money. Have you the carriage of the Dutchman or that of the German? 1 have neither the one nor the other. Has the peasant's boy the fine or the ugly letter 1 He has neither the one nor the other. Has he the gloves of the merchant or those of his brother? He has neither the one nor the other. Which gloves has he ? He has his own. Have we the horses of the English or those of the Germans? We have neither the one nor the other. Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ? We have them not ; the Americans have them. Have you much pep- per ? I have only a little, but enough. Have you much vinegar ? I have only a little. Have the Russians much meat? The Russians have a great deal, but the Turks have only a little. Have you no other pepper ? I have no other. Have I no other beer ? You have no other. Have we no other good friends ? We have no others. Has the sailor many shirts ? He has not many ; he has only two. Have you a wooden leg ? I have not a (few) wooden leg, but a good heart. Has this man a good head ? He has a good head and a good heart. How many arms has that boy? He has only one; the other is of wood (ocn olj). What kind of head has your boy ? He has a good head. 28. Which volume have you ? I have the first. Have you the se- cond volume of my work? I have it. Have you the third or the fourth book ? I have neither the one nor the other. Have we the fifth or sixth volume ? We have neither the one nor the other. Which volumes have we? We have the seventh. What day ()en nriciricfjtcn) of the month is it (fjafrcn rotr) ? It is (SBtt bafcen) the eighth. Is it not (aben nut ntcht) the eleventh ? No, Sir, it is the tenth. Have the Spaniards many crowns ? The Spaniards have only a few ; but the English have a great many. Who has our crowns ? The French have them. Has the youth much head ? He has not much head, but much courage. How many arms has the man ? He has two. 43 29. Have you the crowns of the French or those of the English 1 I have neither those of the French nor those of the English, but those of the Americans. Has the lierman a few kreutzers 1 He has a few. Has he a few florins ? He has six of them. Have you another stick] I have another. "What other stick have you"? another iron stick. Have you a few gold candlesticks! \V. have a to\v. Have these mm vim-jr,ir ! These men have none, but their i'ru-nds have some. Have our boys candles 1 Our boys have none, but the friends of our boys have some. Have you some other bags 1 I have no others. Have you any other cheeses ! I have some others. Have you other meat 1 I have no other. (See note f, Lesson II. ) c TUEXTY-SECOND LESSON. Zmi nnb }*mn}igste Section. The tome (volume), K't Sfyctt. Have you the first or third tome .paOcn cc trittcn of my work ? Sfjctl mctnc6 2Bcrf$ 1 Both. 23 e i t> c (is declined like an ad- jective). I have both. 3d) fyoOc Oette. Obs. The singular of 6 e i b e is used only in the no- miimtive and accusative neuter. The olural beifce is employed \\hrn two substantives excess the same thin::, and the singular neuter betbe$, when they ex- pivss two different things: as, Have you my book or my stick 1 aOcn (Sic mem 2}ud) ot>ct metncn etccf? I have both. 3d) tyaOc bctfccS. yet, some or any more. 02 d). Some more wine. 97ccr) SSctn. Some more money. Stfod) db. Some more buttons. 97erf) Jlntfpfc. Have you any more wine ? akn (Sic nod) S03cin ? W- h:m- liiih'-ri.) iMi'-ntiunt>c mcfjr. 3d) ()abe Ccinc mc(;r. 97 t cr; t t c t m c f) r . Sic nod) met 2ctn 7 3d) fjabc tcjjcn nid)t r?tct mc(jr. ^abcn ic nod) met JBudjcr ? 3d) ^abc fccrcn ntd)t tel meljr. 97od) cin S5ud). 9?ocr) cin chutes JSudft. 97od) ctnige 93ud)cr. ^)dbcn ruir nod) ^cinige .J>utc ? SSir fjabcn nod)Vinicjc. g)at cr nod) ciniqc gutc^cfTcr? 7 (See Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) (5r ()at nod) etntge. (See OZ5. Lesson XVI.) " EXERCISES. 30. Which volume of his work have you ? I have the second. How many tomes has this work 1 It has three. Have you my work, or that of my brother 7 1 have both (bcitc). Has the for- eigner my comb or my knife 7 He has both (K'ifcC6). Have you our bread or our cheese 7 I have both. Have you my glass or that of my friend 7 I have neither the one nor the other. Have we anymore hay 7 We have some more. Has our merchant any more pepper 7 He has some more. Has he any more candles 7 He has some more. Have you any more coffee 7 We have no more coffee ; but we have some more vinegar. Has the German any more water 7 He has no more water ; but he has some more meat. Have we any more gold ribbons 7 We have no more gold (Lesson XVIII. Obs. D.) ribbons ; but we have some more silver (ribbons). Has our friend any more sugar? He has no more. Have I any more beer ? You have no more. Has your young man any more friends 7 He has no more. 45 31. Has your brother one more horse 1 lie 1ms one more. Have you one more ] I have one more. I las the peasant one more ox '? He has one more. Have you a few more "-.miens 1 We have a few more. What have you more] We have a few (rood ships (plur. (Scfytffc) and a few good sailors more. Has our brother a few more friends ] He has a few more. Have I a little more money 1 You have a little more. Have you any more courage ] I have no more. Have you much more money] I have much more, hut my brother has no more. Has he enough salt ? He has not enough. Have we buttons enough ] We have not enough. Has the good son of your good tailor buttons enough] He has not enough. TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. Dm nub Section. Seveni/. The father, the son, the child, the captain, the tea, the cake, 33erfd)tebcnc (is tlrHinrd like an adjective, and hardly ever used in the singular.) (See Lesson XVIIL, Obs. B.) For all genders. N. fcerfcfy'cbene. D. fcerfcfnebcncn. G. fcerfctyefccttcr. A. tor NT < Nrt.fi NT .ocwptmann (plur. aupt(cutc) ; NT 2f)cc ; fcet .fiudxn (is not softened in the plur.). 2$crfcl)icbcnc Winter. Several children. As much) as many. As much as, as many as As much bread as wine. As many men as children. Have you as much gold as sil- afccn Sic fo wet olt> ver] Of. t c. ^o met JBrot rate SSctn. So OK( Banner rate Winter. t(0ct ? 25 o n (preposition governing the dative). 46 I have as much of this as of %d) f)a(cn ton other. (intern. Obs. A. When e t tt is used as an indefinite numer- al adjective, it is declined like other adjectives. Quite (or just) as much. (S c n f o o t c (. I have quite as much of this as 3d) bate cOen fc inct sen fctcfem wic of that. pen jcncnu The enemy, tec J the finger, tvr fi the hoot, tec Afore. 9E c ^ r (comparative adverb). More bread. 9)?cl)r More men, 932e()c 77mn. ?( I ^. 7?. 91 1 d answers to than in English, as tt) t e answers to <7>. More broail t!nn win<-. More in.'n than children. 9)^ % I^r SNcmiuT civ .vuntvr. More of this i!r.m of that. 9}febr t>cn ttefv'tn 0(6 rcn joncm. More of the one than Of the other. 9)icbr vcn torn einon als .rcn tcin More of those than of those. 9)M)r pen Mofcn ol{t ?on I have more of your sugar than 3<-t babe nu'br rcn 3l)vcm Surfer of mine. vcn tern inctni^cn. Less. 8S c n 1 9 c r (comparative of wcnicj). Less water than wine. 2Bcntc\cc Staffer a( 85?ctn. Less than I. SScntcjcr al^ icf). than he. d$ cr. than you. d$ 8ic. T//f y. (5 1 c*. TVwn //icy. Xl fie. As much as you. (^e wel wtc Sic. As much as he. ^o ticl ivtc cr. As much as they. (So wet rote fie. When collective or plural nouns, as : SB e t it, wine ; 03 r b, bread, &c., are to he rrpivsontoi] by the pronouns, fc t cfc r and jcrtcr must be used, and not cin and a n t* e r. 47 EXERCISES. 32. Have you a coat 1 1 have several. Has he a looking-glass ? He has several. What kind of looking-glasses has he ? He has beautiful looking- glasses. \Vho lias my good cakes'? Several men have them. lias your brother a child ? He has (tfyrcr, Les- son XVI.) several. Have you as much coftee as honey] I have as much of the one as of the other. Has he as much tea as beer ? He has as much of the one as of the other. Has this man as many friends as enemies ? He has as many of the one as of the other. Has the son of your friend as many coats as shirts ? He has as many of the one as of the other. Have we as many boots as shoes ? We have as many of the one as of the other. 33. Has your father as much gold as silver ? He has more of the latter than of ihe former. Has lie as much tea as coffee 1 He has more of the latter than of the former. Has the captain as ma- jors as ships ? He has more of the one than of the other. Have you as many rams as I ? I have just as many. Has the foreigner as much courage as we ? He has quite as much. Have we as much good as bad paper? We have as much of the one as of the other. Have we as much cheese as bread ? We have more of the latter than of the former. Has your son as many cakes as books ? He has more of the latter than of the former ; more of the one than of the other. 34. How many children have you ? I have only one, but my bro- ther has more than I ; he has five. Has your son as much head as mine ? He has less head than yours, but he has more courage. My children have more courage than yours. Have I as much money as you ? You have less than I. Have you as many books as 1 ? I have less than you. Have I as many enemies as your father] You have fewer than he. Have the Americans more children than we ? They have fewer than we. Have we as many ships as the English ? We have less than they. Have we fewer knives than the children of our friends 1 We have fewer than they. 35. Who has fewer friends than we 1 Nobody has fewer. Have you as much of my tea as of yours"? I have as much of yours as of mine. Have I as many of your books as of mine 1 ? You have fewer of mine than of yours. Has the Spaniard as much of your money as of his own ? He has less of his own than of ours. Has your baker less bread than money? He has less of the latter than of the former. Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses ? 48 He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; he has fewer of the one than of the other. He has fewer horses than we, and we have less hread than he. Have our neighbours as many carriages as we ] We have fewer than they. We have less corn and less meat than they. We have but little corn, but meat enough. TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. t)i*r unit Certion. OF THE INFINITIVE. All German verbs form their infinitive in en. This termination in verbs, the root of which ends in e i or e r, a is contracted by throwing out the letter e, as fytnbew, to prevent ; fammeht, to collect, &c. The verbs marked with an asterisk (*") are irregular. A wish, a ndnd, a desire, 2 u ft ; time, 3 c i t ; b to, 3 u . Obs. The preposition } it/ 20, always stands before the infinitive. In compound verbs it is placed between the separable particle and the infinitive, as will be exemplified in future lessons. To work. 2CrOcitcn. To speak. p r e dj c n*, r e b c n. c Have you a mind to work 1 afren tc Shift gu arOcttcn ? I have a mind to work. Scl) f)aOc Suft $u arbdten. He has not the courage to speak. <5r fyat ben Sftutf) ntct)t, $u fprcd)cn. To cwjJ. d) n e t b c n*. To cut them, fie fcfynctbcn*. By the root we understand that part of a verb which precedes the termi- nation c n of the infinitive ; e. g. in the verb lobett, to praise, I b is the root. b The two substantives llft and Beit are feminine. If they are required in a negative sense, feme uft, and tucfyt $tit must be used. Ex. 3d) l)abe letue Sufi $u fprerfjen, I have no mind to speak: ev I;at nicf)t %tit gu avbeiten, he has no time to work. c (S)?ved)en is derived from bie (SV^itc^e, the language, and signifies to pro- duce or emit sounds in a physical manner ; vebett means to express ideas by words, from bie SRebe, the discourse. To cut some. Has he time to cut trees ? He has time to cut some. To buy. To buy some more. fMasc. roefdjen/ bejfen, bafcon Neut. tt>elcf)e3, beffett, To buy one. To buy two. To buy one more. To buy two more. s cciDon j # Plural for all genders. tt>elrf)e, beren, batten frfjnet* ben. &at ec Sett- SBa'ume ^ii fcbncttcn ? (t f;at 3eit welcbc 511 fdjnetfcen. faufen. S7cd) faufen. M5c. etnen > fanfen. faufen. 3roei fail fen. Masc. ttocf) etnen norf) etn3 'i faufen. The infinitive is always placed at the end of the phrase whether preceded by jn or not. Have you a mind to buy one abcn ic Cuft nccr; cin ^fetfc 311 more horse ? fan fen ? I have a mind to buy one more, Scb fjafce uft ncct) ein^ gu fanfen. Have you a mind to buy some abcn (ie Suft S5iicf)er jit faufen ? books ? I have a mind to buy some, but Scf) I)aOe Cuft wetcbe gu faufen/ I have no time. abet icb babe nid)t 3eit. Has he time to work ? at cc 3ctt ^u arbeiten? He has time, but no mind to (5r bat 3eit x abet: fctnc Cuft $U ars work. beiten. EXERCISES. 36. Have you still a mind to buy the house of my friend 1 I have still a mind to buy it, but I have no more money Have you time to work 1 I have time, but no mind to work. Has he time to cut some sticks ? He has time to cut some. Have you a mind to cut some bread ] 1 have a mind to cut some, but I have no knife. Have you time to cut some cheese ? I have time to cut some. Has he a desire to cut the tree ] He has a desire to cut it, but he has no time. Has he time to cut the cloth 1 He has time to cut it. Have 1 time to cut the trees ] You have time to cut them. Has the painter a mind to buy a horse 1 He has a mind to buy two. Has" your captain of the navy (Scbtff^papitan) time to speak Jrle has time, but no desire to spea 3 50 37. Have you a mind to bay a carriage ] I have a mind to buy one. Have I a mind to buy a house ] You have a mind to buy one. Has your brother a mind to buy a great ox ] He has a mind to buy a little one. We have a mind to buy little oxen. How many horses have you a mind to buy 1 I have a mind to buy four. Has any one a rnind to buy a broom ? This man has a mind to buy one. What has that man a mind to buy ? He has a mind to buy a beautiful carriage, three beautiful horses, good tea, and good meat. 38. Have yon a desire to speak 1 I have a desire, but no time to speak. Have you the courage to cut your arm 1 I have not the courage to cut it. Am I right in speaking ($u fprccfjcn) ? You are not wrong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting ($u fcfynctK'n) my trees. Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more bird ? He has a desire to buy one more ? Have you a mind to buy one more beautiful coat 1 I have a mind to buy one more. Have we a mind to buy a few more horses 1 We have a mind to buy a few more, but we have no more money. (See Lesson XXII.) 39. What have you a mind to buy ? : We have a mind to buy some- thing good, and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beau- tiful. Have their children a desire to buy any birds 1 Their children have no desire to buy any. Have you the courage to buy the trunk of the captain 1 I have a desire to buy it, but I have no more money. Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog ? Nobo- dy has a mind to buy it. Have you a mind to buy my beautiful birds, or those of the Frenchman] I have a mind to buy those of the Frenchman. Which book has he a mind to buy 1 He has a mind to buy that which you have, that which your son has, and that which mine has Have you two horses 1 I have only one, but I have a wish to buy one more. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. JFtinf tmb Section. OF COMPOUND VERBS. There are in German two kinds of compound verbs : one kind consists of a simple verb and a particle which is inseparable from it ; the other of a simple verb and a particle which can be separated, either to 51 give place to the syllable g c of the participle past, or to $ U, or to be itself placed after the verb or even at the end of the phrase. We shall distinguish the separ- able verbs by placing j u between the verb and the particle. 1 Examples : To break. To keep (to take care). ?(uflvii>abtcn To pick up. 2(ufbcOcn* f To mend. ?(usbetTcrn (au$$ubcf[crn). To make a fire. 5 l ' ucr flnmad)cn (an$umad)cn). Has the tailor time to mend my at fccr ScfwetK't 3cit mctncn 9?ect He has time to mend it. (5r fyat 3cit ti;n au$$uOc(jcrn. b To wash. 2afd)cn *. To burn, < iHerbrcnncn (to destroy by burn- ( in )- To seek, to look for. Suchon (governs the accusative). To warm. Qiv'irmcn. To make. SHfld)cn (physically). To do. Sfjun * (morally d ). Has the shoemaker time to make ^att^cr Sd)iif)niad)CV Sett mctnc tic* my boots 1 fcl $u mad)cn ? He has time to make them. (Sc fyat Sett ftc 511 madjcn. To be willing j to wish. 2B c t ( e n *. Will you ? ) Are you willing ? > SKottcn Sic ? Do you wish ] J I will, I am willing;, I wish. 3d) rwtt. Will he ? is he willing? does > *. he wish.] { These verbs may likewise be distinguished by the principal accent, which is placed on the root of the verb when the particle is inseparable, and when separable on tli* particle itself. b These examples show how the separable particle gives way in the infini- tive to \ u . c The verb brcnncit (as well as its compounds, oerfcrennen, &c.) is regu- lar when used in an active or transitive, but irregular when in a neuter or in- transitive sense. We denote such verbs by the following abbreviations : v. ac. and neut. irreg. d The verb in a d) c n always relates to a determinate action, and is em- ployed nearly as the English verb to make, in the sense of producing anything ; the verb t b u n * on the contrary always, like the English verb to do, relates to an indeterminate action, as : (vin Jllctb mad;cn, to make a coat; 'Aencr ma* cfceu, to make a fire; eincn QJefaUen ttyun, to do a favour; feme fK ttjun, to do one's duty. 52 He will, he is willing, he wish- ) ~ ^ es. J We will, we are willing, we 5 ^ u wish. 3 They will, they are willing, 7 @ they wish. _$ Ofo. A. The particle j U does not precede the in- finitive added to the verb tt> o 1 1 e it, to be willing. Ex. Do you wish to make my fire ? SSeflcn te mcin $cucr cmmcu djcn ? I am willing to make it. 3cb will c$ annwd)cn. I do not wish to make it. \cb will eg ntcbt anmacbcn. Does he wish to buy your horse ? 2itl cr Sfa 'Pf^t) faufcn ? He wishes to buy it. (t will Co few fen. A TABLE OF COMPOUND VERBS/ I. INSEPARABLE VERBS . g These verbs are formed by prefixing one of the fol- lowing unaccented particles to simple verbs : b e, e m p, ent, er, gc, fyinter, er, rotbcr, jPc bcbcnfcn *, to reflect. ^tntcr fymtergcbcn * f to deceive. (Sinp cmpfcf)(vn * f to recommend. 8Scr Dcrfptccbtn *, to promise. @nt cntflicbcn */ to run away. SBibcr wit>cr(cc\cn *, to refute. g-t: crfyaltcn */ to receive. 3^ jC(^rcd)cn */ to break. c cjcllcljcn*/ to confess. II. SEPARABLE VERBS. 2((> afefcbrct&cn *, to copy. 23ei kiftefjcti */ to assist. 2(n anfangcn */ to begin. 3)ar barftcllen/ to exhibit. 2Cuf oufbctcn */ to pick up. 2)aruntcr batuntctmifdxn, to in- 2(us auftjcbcn */ to go out. termingle. ' 3 ? y/ you, is the real second person plural ; but the Germans generally use t C , which is the third. f Our intention in giving tables of the most complicated grammatical parts, is not that the learners should make an immediate application of them ; we only wish to give them a clear and general idea of those parts, in order to en- able them to find them out more easily, as they will be in want of them in ad- vancing by degrees. They must in their exercises employ only the words and expressions made use of in the lessons. We call verbs inseparable when they cannot, and separable when they can be separated. 53 ADflfen bafconfemmcn*, to escape. 9?ncb nacfyucicbcn, to imitate. >urd) twrcfyrcijcn, to travel Ucbcr uberfltcjjcn *, to overflow. through. Um uninK'vjvn *, to overturn. (Sin cinfcbtofen *, to fall asleep. Untor untcr jinfcn */ to go to the Jort fcrtfaljren *, to continue. bottom. ctm bctnujcben *, to go home. >ell Dottgteffett *, to fill up. erau$ [jcfauvfomnu'n *, to come s Hor scrflcben *, to pretend. out. &>orau$ peraufagcn, to foretell. gaunter fjcruntcrOrincjcn *, to SSerba vevbacjebcn*, to pass by. bringdown. Berber DCrfxrff fan *, to foresee. vT}ii bcrjimabcn, to draw near. SSorubcr perubcrfcifyrcn*, to pass >tn ()imvbcn * / to go thither. by in a coach. jptnauf t)tnauf|leu}v'n*, to ascend. SBeg nwgcjebcn * / to go away. imuis ijtnausnxrfcu * / to throw SBtcfccr Sic&crfemmcn * / to come out. again. iiu'tn fjtnetngcbcn *, to go in. 3u $urct>cn, to persuade. Snnc mncfjaltcn * / to stop. Surucf ^uriidffcljrcn, to return. 932 it mtttf)ci(cn, to communicate. 3u|ammcn jufaninicnfc^cn, to put Stictcr nictcrU'ijon, to lay down. together. B. Some compound verbs are either insepar- able or separable, according to their signification. We shall speak of them hereafter. EXERCISES. 40. Have you a desire to keep my letter 1 I have a desire to keep it. Am I right in keeping (auftubavafyrcn) your money 1 YOU are right in keeping it. Has the tailor a desire to make my coat 1 He has a desire to make it, but he has no time. Has your tailor time to mend my coats ? He has time to mend them. Have you the courage to burn my hat 1 ? I have not the courage to burn it; I have a mind to keep it. Has the shoemaker's boy a mind to mend my boots 1 He has no time to mend them. What has our friend's tailor to mend ? He has to mend our old coats. Who has to mend our boots 1 Our shoemaker has to mend them. What has our hatmaker to do 1 He has to mend your great hats. Has your brother's joiner anything to do ] He has to mend our great tables and our little chairs. 41. Do you wish to keep my twenty-seven crowns 1 I wish to keep them. Will you pick up that crown or that florin ? I will pick up both. Do you wish to cut his finger 1 I do not wish to cut it. Does the painter wish to burn vinegar 1 He wishes to burn some. Is the peasant willing to burn his bread 1 He is not wil- ling to bum his own, but that of his neighbour. Have you any- thing to do ] I have nothing to do. Have we anything to do 1 We have to warm our coffee. Do you wish to speak 1 I wish to Bpeak. Is your son willing to work ? -He is not willing to work. 54 42. Do you wish to buy anything? I wish to buy something. What do you wish to buy ] I wish to buy some good books. What has he to buy 1 He has to buy a good horse. Will you buy this or that table 1 I will buy (put the infinitive always to the end of the phrase) neither this nor that. Which house does your friend wish to buy ? He wishes to buy your brother's great house. Is your servant willing to make my fire ? He is willing to make it. Will your father buy these rams or these oxen ] He will buy neither the one nor the other. Does he wish to buy my umbrella or my cane ] He wishes to buy both. 43. Bo you wish to make a fire 1 We do not wish to make any. What do you wish to make ] I wish to make vinegar. Will you seek my knife? I will seek it. Have you to look for anything 1 1 have nothing to look for. Has he time to seek my son ? He has time, but he will not seek him. What has he to do 1 He has to make a fire, to wash my thread stockings, to buy good coffee, good sugar, good water, and good meat. Will he buy your good trunk ? He will buy it. Will you buy my great or my little house 1 I will buy neither your great nor your little house ; I wish to buy that of our friend. Will you buy my beautiful horses ? I will not buy them. 44. How many rams will you buy 1 I will buy twenty-two. Does the foreigner wish to buy much corn ? He wishes to buy but little. Do you wish to buy a great many gloves ] We wish to buy only a few ; but our children wish to buy a great many. Will they seek the same boots that we have 1 They will not seek those which you have, but those which my father has. Will you look for my coats or for those of the good Frenchman 1 I will look for neither yours nor those of the good Frenchman ; I will look for mine, and for those of my good son. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. Qttfc ftnb ;tDan?ig0te Cation. To tear. Settctpen*. Togo. c 6 c n *. At. SB c i , > prepositions governing To. 3 u , 5 the dative case. To be. cm *. RULE. The preposition b c i signifies with or at the house oj, the preposition } U, to or to the house of. 55 To be with the man or at the 23ct tern SDftmnc fcin*. man's house. To go to the man or to the 3u fccm 9)?annc gcfjcn*. man's house. To be with his (one's) friend or 23d fcincm Jtcunfcc fcin*. at his (one's) friend's house. To go to my father or to my 3u mctncm 93atcr gcfycn*. father's house. To be at home. 3u aufc fcin*. To go home. 9?ad) aufc gcfjcn. To be with me or at my house. S3ct nut fcin*. To go to me or to my house. 3u nut gcfycn*. To be with him or at his house. 23d tfym fcin*. To go to him or to his house. 3u tjjm gcljcn*. To be with us or at our house. 23d un$ fcin*. To go to us or to our house. 3u un$ gcfjcn*. To be with you or at your house, i 23d S^ncn fcin*, 6ct (Sud) fcin*. To go to you or to your house. ( 3u 3fjnen gcljcn*, $u ucr; gcljcn* To be with them or at their house. 23ct tfjncn fctn*. To go to them or to their house. 3u tfyncn gc^cn*. ^ To be with some one or at some J&ct Sfcmanbem fctn*. one's house. To go to some one or to some 3 U Scmanbcm gc^cn*. one's house. To be with no one or at no one's SBct SHcmant'Cm fctn*. house. To go to no one or to no one's 3u 9?iemant>cm gcfjcn*. house. At whose house ? With whom ? S3 c t tt> c m ? To whose house ? To whom ? 3 u tt? c m ? To whom (to whose house) do 3u rocm wollcn ie gcljcn ? you wish to go 1 I wish to go to no one (to no 3d) rottt $u 97tcmanbcm gcljcn.* one's house). At whose house (with whom) is 23ct went iff 3>Ijt S3rut>ct ? your brother ? He is at ours (with us). (5c if! 6ci un^. Is he at home ? 3ft cc gu J^aufc ? He is not at home. @t tft nic^t gu |>oufc. To drink. Srtnfcn*. To carry (to take). Sragcn*. To bring (to carry). S3ringcn*. 8 In German, as in English, no more than one negative is ever expressed, as has already been seen in many instances. 56 EXERCISES. 45. Do you wish to tear my coat 1 I do not wish to tear it. Does your brother wish to tear my beautiful hook ? He does not wish to tear it. What does he wish to tear 1 He wishes to tear your heart. With whom is our father? He is with his friend. To whom do you wish to go 1 I wish to go to you. Will you go to my house 1 I will not go to your's, but to my tailor's. Does your father wish to go to his friend ? He wishes to go to him. At whose house is your son ? He is at our house. Do your children wish to go to our friends 1 They wish to go to them. Is the foreigner at our brother's 1 He is there (bet ifym). At whose house is the Englishman ? He is at yours. Is the American at our house? No, Sir, he is not at our house; he is at his friend's. Is the Italian at his friend's ? He is at their house. 46. Do you wish to go home ? I do not wish to go home ; I wish to go to the son of my neighbour. Is your father at home ? No, Sir, he is not at home. With whom is he ? He is with the good children of our old neighbour. Will you go to any one's house ? I will go to no one's house. At whose house is your son ? He is at no one's house; he is at home. What will he do at home? He will drink good wine. Will you carry my letters home? 1 will carry them to my father's.^ Who will carry my notes ? The young man will carry them. Will he carry them to my house? No, he will carry them to his brother's. Is his father at home ? He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner's. 47. What have you to drink ? I have nothing to drink. Has your son anything to drink? He has good wine and good water to drink. Will your servant carry my books to my brother's? He will carry them to their house. What will you carry to my house ? I will carry to your house two chickens, three birds, good bread, and good wine (always put the infinitive to the end, and do not separate it from " to your house"). Will you carry these chairs to my house ? I will not carry these, but those. What will the German do at home? He will work and drink good wine. 48. What have you at home ? I have nothing at home. Have you anything good to drink at home ? I have nothing good to drink ; I have only bad water. Has the captain as much coffee as sugar at home? He has as much of the one as of the other at home. Will you carry as many crowns as buttons to my brother's ? I will carry to his house as many of the one as of the other. Will you carry great glasses to my house ? I will carry some to your house. Has the merchant a desire to buy as many oxen as rams? He wishes to buy as many of the one as of the other. 57 49. Has the shoemaker as many shoes as boots to mend] He has as many of the one as of the other to mend. Has he as much wine as water to drink ] He has as much to drink of the one as of the other. Has the Turk a desire to break some glasses 1 He has a desire to break some. Has he a mind to drink some wine 1 He has no mind to drink any. Will you buy anything of (bet) roe? I will buy nothing of you. Of whom (-Bet ivem) will you buy your corn ] I will buy it of the great merchant. Of whom will the English buy their oxen] They will buy them of the Dutch. Will the Spaniards buy anything] They will buy nothing. TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Qieben tmfc Section. w / ? C SOB o ? (an adverb of place with- out motion.) WL*L 9 JL / CSBobin? (an adverb of place Whither ? where to ? RULES. 1. The question tt)0? indicates rest in a, place, or with any person or object whatsoever ; the preposition which answers this question always governs the da- tive. 2. The question tt> 1) t it ? denotes motion or direc- tion towards some place or object ; when answered by one of the prepositions a it, to ; a it f, upon ; t) t it t e r, behind ; it e 6 e it, by the side ; it b e r, above ; it it t e r, under; jrotfdjeit, between; ttor, before; tit, in or into, it always requires the accusative.* There. ) a (rest, repose). Thither. $ t n or t> a r; t n (motion or direc- tion). To carry thither. tn or fcaljin tracjcn*. m ( Masc. tbn \ Init or babf To carry it thither, j ^^ j ^^ The same prepositions govern the dative when they answer the question too ? 3* ftt 58 To carry some thither. $ ^ *$* ! ^ r I Neut. tt>dcf)e $ tragen*. To carry them thither, jTe fyitt or bafytn tragen** Obs. A. The adverb b a, there, is always joined to a verb of rest, and the abverb ty t n or b a 1) i it, thither, to a verb of motion. t n is used to express motion from, and ft e r motion towards the person that speaks. Ex. @r ifi ba, he is there ; id) tt>itt aiuf) f)irt (bat)in) gefyert, I will also go thither ; tt>otten @ie fyerfommen ? will you come hither? rp c C (Scnbcru* lo send. -< ~ . . (. (Sd)tofen. b To come. ^cmmcn*. To lead. giifyrcn. I will send him (it) to you. d) will tfyn (ce) 511 3^ncn fcl)ic!cn. When ? To-morrow. Stfercjcn. To-day. Some where, any where. Stgcnbroo (rest). Some whither, any whither. 3rgcnt>roof)tn (direction). No where, not any where. 9? t r Q c n b or n i r $ c n t) $. Do you wish to go any whither! Section (Sic tr$cnbn?ef)tn I do not wish to go any whither. 3d) roill ntrgcnfc$ The physician, bo To write. cfjrcibcn*. Have you to write as many let- akn (Sic fo ttc( fflricfc 311 fc^rctOcn, ters as rny father? rutc mctn iSatcrl Obs. B. Where the verb stands at the end of a phrase, the word tt> t e , as, or a 1 3 , ^TI, is placed with its npminative after the verb. I have to write more (i. e. let- 3d) Ijafce fccrcn mcfyr gu fdjrctOcn, aU ters) than he. er. EXERCISES. 50. Where is your brother? He is at home. Whither do you wish to go? I wish to go home. Whither does your father wish to b tf) t df e tt is used when a person is sent without any object, or with one of little importance, fen ben, on the contrary, always denotes a mission of importance, whence fret efanbte, the ambassador. 59 go ] He wishes to go to your house. Whither will you carry this letter 1 I will carry it to my neighbour's. Is your son at home ] He is there. \Vhither will the shoemaker carry my boots I He will carry them to your house. Will he carry them home? He will carry them thither. Will you send good sugar home ] I will send some thither. Will the baker send good bread home ] He will send some thither. Will you come to me"? I will come to you. Whither do you wish to go? I wish to go to the good Frenchmen. Will the good Italians go to our house 1 They will go no whither. Will you take (fufjrcn) your son to my house 1 I will not take him to your house, but to the captain's. When will you take him to the captain's 1 I will take him there (511 ifjm) to- morrow. 51. Will you go any whither (any where) 1 I will no whither (no where)- Will your good son go to any one 7 He will go to no one. When will you take (fftfjrcn) your young man to the pain- ter ] I will take him there ($u tfjm) to-day. Where will he carry these birds to] He will carry them no whither. Will you take tho physician to this man] I will take him there (gu ifjm). When will you take him there] I will take him there to-day. Will the ians come to your good brother] They will not come to him. Will you send me a servant] I will send you none. Will you send a child to the physician? I will send one to him. With whom is the physician] He is with nobody. Do you wish to go any whither] I wish to go to the good Americans. Has he time to come to my house] He has no time to come there. Will the captain write one more letter ] He will write one more. Will you write a note] I will write one. Has your friend a mind to write as many letters as I ] He has a mind to write quite as many. 52. Have you many letters to write ] I have only a few to write. How many letters has our old neighbour to write ] He has as many to write as you. Who has long letters to write] The youth has some to write. How many more letters has he to write ] He has six more to write. How many has he to send ] He has twen- ty to send ] Has he as many letters to send as his father ] He has fewer to send. Has the hatmaker some more hats to send ] He has no more to send. Has your son the courage to write a long letter ] He has the courage to write one. Will he write as many letters as mine ] He will write quite as many. Will you buy as many carriages as horses ] I will buy more of the latter than of the former. 60 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. cl)t nrib }ttmn?ig*t ju buy bread. faufrn. Has your brother a knife (in or- at 3fa SBrufoct cm SRcfler, (um) der) to cut his bread ? fcin S?rcb gu fdjncitcn ? He has one to cut it. (?E f)at ctn^/ um cs ^u fcl)nctt)cn. To sweep. 2(u!cf)tcn (nu^ufc^rcn). To kill. SoDtcn 7 To slaughter. (S d) ( a d) t c n 5 " Tosaltl atjcn. To og a0/e. ^ 6 n n c n *. I can (am able) he can (is 3ci) fann cc Fann. able). We can (are able) they can SStr fonncn pc f onncn. (are able). You can (are able). 3^ fonnct (8ic fonncn). Obs. B. The particle j u does not precede the infini- tive added to the verb fonncn, to be able. (See Les- son XL.) Ex. Can you write a letter ? jtcnncn tc ctncn SBrtcf fdjrctbcn *? I can write one. 3d) fann ctncn fd)rctfccn. He is able to work. 6't fann arbcitcn. Singular. DAT. Ace. To me. me. To him. him. 1st person, mir. micfj. 3d person, ifynt* ifyn, 5!obtcn means to deprive any one of life ; fd)tadjtett, to slaughter, is used in speaking of animals, the flesh of which is eaten. Ex. <3(f)afe f<$la$ten, to slaughter oxen and sheep. 61 To us. us. To you. you. To them. them. To kill me. To see u H-. To speak to me. To speak to him. To send to him. To send to his house. To send him to me. To send him to me to-morrow. 1st person. Plural. DAT. Ace. 3d person, ibuen. fie. tittten. ) ft-bcn*. S)Jtd) (nut nut or $u mtr) fprcs d)cn*. 3bn (mit tfjm or 311 ifym) fprcs d)cn*. 3bm fd)icfcn. 3u tf)in fcbicfcn. Sbn mir ($u mir) fcf)icfcn. Sfyn nur merqcn fcbtctcn (tfyn mors gen ju mtr fd)ic!cn). In German the dative precedes the accusative ; but when the accusative is a personal pronoun it pre- < the dative. Singular. Plural. It to me them to me. It to him them to him. It to us them to us. It to you them to you. It to them them to them. Masc. thm thm ifjm Neut % eg mtr fie mtr* eg tfynt fie tf)m. eg iin^ fie ung* eg @ucf) fie @urf), eg (3hnen)fie(3(nten). eg iljnen fie tfynett. When will you send me the hat ? Sfcann wcttcn (Sic mtr ben |)Ut [d)tc!cn ? I will send it to you to-morrow. 36 nutt i^n 3bncn morgcn fdjicfcn. Masc. Neut. Plural. Some to me. Some to him. Some to us. Some to you. Some to them. t mtr t nttg mir tl)tn t ifynen roetefyen. n>e(rf)eg. tt>efrf)e. Moeldw. b See note % Lesson XXXJ. 62 e 6 c n *. 2 c 1 1) c n *. To give. To lend. To give me. To lend me. 932it fct()cn*. Are you willing to lend me SBotlcn a$ (Sefyaf adds c and is not softened in the plural) ? He has none to buy any. Have you time to see my father ? I have no time to see him. Does your father wish to see me? He does not wish to see you. Has the servant a broom to sweep the house 1 He has one to s\\< p it. Is he willing to sweep it] He is willing to sweep it. Have I salt enough to salt my meat 1 You have, not enough of it to salt it. Will your friend come to my house in order to see me ? He w r ill neither come to your house nor see you. Has our neighbour a desire to kill his horse ? He has no desire to kill it. Will you kill your friends ? I will kill only my enemies. 54. Can you cut me some bread ? I can cut you some. Have you a knife to cut me some ? I have one. Can you wash your gloves ? I can wash them, but I have no wish to do it. Can the tailor make me a coat ? He can make you one. Will you speak to the physician ? I will speak to him. Does your son wish to see me in order to speak to me ? He wishes to see you, in order to give you a crown. Does he wish to kill me? He does not wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. Does the son of our old friend wish to kill an ox 1 He wishes to kill two. How much money can you send me ? I can send you thirty crowns. Will you send me my letter? I will send it to you. Will you send the shoemaker anything ? I will send him my boots 1 Will you send him your coats? -No, I will send them to my tailor. Can the tailor send me my coat? He cannot send it you. Are your children able to write letters ? They are able to write some. Have you a glass to drink your wine? I have one, but I have no wine ; I have only water. Will you give me money to buy some ? I will give you some, but I have only a little. Will you give me that which you have ? I will give it you. Can you drink as much wine as water ? I can drink as much of the one as of the other. Has our poor neighbour any wood to make a fire ? He has some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and meat. Are you willing to lend him some ? I am willing to lend him some. Do you wish to speak to the German ? I wish to speak to him. Where is he ? He is with the son of the captain. Does the German wish to speak to me ? He wishes to speak to you. Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours ? He wishes to speak to both Can the children of our tailor work ? They can work, but they will not. 64 56. Do you wish to speak to the children of your shoemaker 1 I wish to speak to them. What will you give them 1 1 will give them great cakes. Will you lend them anything 7 I have nothing to lend them. Has the cook some more salt to salt the meat ] He has a little more. Has he some more rice 1 He has a great deal more. Will he give me some ] He will give you some. Will he give some to my poor children? He will give them some. Will he kill this or that hen ] He will kill neither this nor that. Which ram will he kill "? He will kill that of the good peasant. Will he kill this or that ox ] He will kill both. Who will send us biscuits 1 The baker will send you some. Have you anything good to give me ] I have nothing good to give you. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. tfetm nub Cation. To whom ? 803 e m ? (A question followed by the dative.) Whom ? For persons : SB c n ? ^ (Questions > followed by What ? For things : SOS a $ ? j the accus.). DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN 3S C t ? WHO? Masc. and Fern. Neut. N. tt>er? G. D.n)em?li n ^!!!!' ran o ? A. njorauf ? NOM. Who ? what ? GEN. whose? DAT. to whom ? to what ? Ace. whom ? what ? 5GB e r, 10^0, has no plural, and relates only to per- sons, without distinction of sex, as who in English. It may be used instead of fcerjenige, tt>clrf)er, he who. 2B a $, which, has no plural, and always relates to a thing. It often stands for baSjenige, tt>etd)e$ or batf, tt>ek d)e, that which. To answer. U n t n? o r t c n. a To answer the man. )cm 9Jfannc antroortcn. The verb anttoorrctt is inseparable, although the accent rests upon the particle ant; it governs the accusative with the preposition auf, to. * n, to answer, governs the accusative without a preposition. 65 To answer the men. 3)en SRa'nncrn antworten. To answer a letter. 7(iif cinen i>*ncf antivcrtat or etncn iBricf beantiverten. To it. 2) a r a it f. To answer it. arauf antivcrtcn or tf;n (c$) fccant* tvcrtcn. Obs. A. The demonstrative local adverbs, ba, there ; fytcr, here ; tt)0, where ; are usually employed instead of demonstrative pronouns, and connected with the preposition which the verb requires. If the preposi- tion begins with a vowel, the letter r is added to the words ba and tt>o for the sake of euphony. In. 3n (governs the dat. and ace.). In the. 3" b-'iN (tm, rest' 1 ). Into the. 3 n ben (motion). In the. >n ben (rest). Into the. 3 n b t C (motion). To go into the garden. 3" ben artcn qcfjcn*. To be in the garden. 3n K'm (tin) Qortal fctn*. To go into the gardens. SH tie artcn gcfjcn*. To be in the gardens. 3n ben arten fein*. B. The rapidity of pronunciation has led to a contraction of the last letter of the definite article with certain prepositions which precede it ; thus betm is of- ten said instead of bei bent, im instead of m bent, tn3 in the accusative neuter instead of in ba$. According to this contraction we may say or write : ?fm, near the, for an Km ftto, for the, for fur t>a& ?(n, to the, against 3m, in the, in fcenu the, on fcci. 3n/ into the, tn t>n. ?fiiu-, upon the, auf Da*. SScn^from the, t>cn torn, i^ctm, at the, Ivt tern. Sinn, to the, ju tern. Duress, through the, tmrcf; 'on$. 3ur, to the, 311 t>cr. The theatre, tag Sbcatcr ; the forest, the wood, tct SO^ntb (plur. Me S&flbft) ; the warehouse, ta? SBanrcntagct (is not softened in the plur.) ; b The preposition t n is used when the place in which a person is, or to- wards which the motion is directed, is closed, or conceived to be so. It is followed by the dative to the question ? , and the accusative to the question tt) o f) i n . 66 the storehouse, ba$ 23etrat!)$!)au$ ; c the magazine, t>a$ $0Zaga$in (plur. c) ; the provision, store, tcr 23orratfj ; the room, the chamber, ba$ Simmer ; the butcher, tcr jlctfcfyct (bet Sttc^er-). To go into. ^tnctngcfjcn*. To be in the. ) a t t.n f C t U *. Do you wish to go to the thea- Sottcn ; the place (the square), bet >p(a6 ; the field, ba$ gelt)". To be at the market. ?Cuf bcm $ttatftc b fdn*. To go to the market. 2Cuf ben Sttarft fttfcn*. To be at the ball. ?fuf tern JBolU fdn*. To go to the ball. 2Cttf ben Sail gehon*. To be in the country. ?(uf bem anbe fdn*. To go into the country. 2(uf ba$ 2anb Qcfyen*. The preposition rtuf, upon, is used when the place is not closed, but open. b The genitive singular of masculine a: il neuter nouns sometimes termi- luit'-s in 6, and sometimes in t (except th >< > in el, en, er, d) e n and let it which always take 0). These forms ar- cnially good; but the former is more frequently used in conversation, and tii 1 latter in composition. The same distinction ought to be observed with r <>ard to the dative singular of masculine and neuter nouns, which takes e whai the genitive takes e3. 68 To be at the place (in the square). 2fuf fccm $plfl|c fcin*, To go to the place. 2(uf ben $)(ci6 gcbcn*. To be in the field. 2tuf bem Sft&* KIN*. To go into the field. 2uf jDa$ Jclb a,el;cn*. JU. 2C n (dat. and ace.). At the* 2( n bem (repose 11 ). To Me. 2( n t> c n , bag (action). The window, tag Jenfter. To go to the window. 2(n bag gvnftct a,cr)cn*. To stand, (gtcbcn*. To stand at the window. 2Cn bem Jenftet ftcfjcn*. To write to somebody. Are you willing to write to me '.{ gjg f I am willing* writetoyou. Jg jg Sj I wish to write to the man. 3d) n>iU an ben 9)iann fc^rctt>cn. To w;A0m ? 2( n n? c n ? To whom do you wish to write 1 2(n wen ivcUen lace. 69 the country in order to see the fields, but to see the forests, the birds, the water, and to drink tea. Where is the son of the peasant] He is in the field to cut some corn (cutting corn). Does the son of the nobleman wish to go anywhither 1 He does not wish to go anywhither ; he is tired. Whither does the son of the bailiff wish to carry corn 1 >He wishes to carry some to the store- house of your brother. Does he wish to carry thither the wine and the meat 1 He wishes to carry both thither. 61. Is the friend of the Spaniard able to carry provisions 1 He is able te carry some. Whither does he wish to carry provisions ] He wishes to carry some to our storehouses. Do you wish to buy provisions in order to carry them to our storehouses 1 I wish to buy some in order to take them into the country. Do you wish to go to the window in order to see the youth 1 I have no time to go to the window. Have you anything to do 1 I have a letter to write. To whom have you a letter to write ] I have to write one to my friend. Do you wish to write to the bailiff? I wish to write to him. What do you wish to write to him ? I wish to answer him his letter. Are you able to write as many letters as 1 1 I am able to write more of them than you. Can you write to the (cm fcic) noblemen 1 lean write to them. Have you paper to write 1 I have some. Is the bailiff able to write to anybody ] He is not able to write to anybody. 62. Have you time to stand at the window] I have no time to stand at the window. Is your brother at home 1 He is not at home. W'here is he ? He is in the country. Has he anything to do in the country] He has nothing to do there. Whither do you wish to go ] I wish to go to the theatre. Is the Turk in the theatre 1 He is there. Who is in the garden 1 The children of the English and those of the Germans are there. Where does your father wish to speak to me 1 He wishes to speak to you in his room. To whom does your brother wish to speak ] He wishes to speak to the Irishman. Does he not wish to speak to the Scotch- man ] He wishes to speak to him. Where will he speak to him ? He will speak to him at (in) the theatre. Does the Italian wish to speak to anybody 1 He wishes to speak to the physician. Where will he speak to him ] He will speak to him at the ball. 63. Can you send me some money 1 I can send you some. How much money can you send me 1 I can send you thirty-two crowns. When will you send me that money ] I will send it to you to-day. Will you send it tome into the country ] I will send it to you thither. Will you send your servant to the market ] I will send him thither. Have you anything to buy at the market 1 1 have to buy good cloth, good boots, and good shoes. What does 70 the butcher wish to do in the country 1 He wishes to buy there oxen and rams in order to kill them. Do you wish to buy a chick- en in order to kill it 7 I wish to buy one; but I have not the courage to kill it. Does the boatman wish to kill any one 1 He does not wish to kill any one. Have you a desire to burn my let- ters ] 1 have not the courage to do it. Will the servant seek my knife or my paper 1 He will seek both. Which knife do you wish (to have) 1 I wish (to have) my large knife. What oxen does the butcher wish to kill 1 He wishes to kill large oxen. What provisions does the merchant wish to buy ? He wishes to buy good provisions. Wliere does he wish to buy them 1 ? He wishes to buy them at the market. To whom does he wish to send them 1 He wishes to send them to our enemies. Will you send me one more book 1 I will send you several more. Are you able to drink as much as your neighbour ? I am able to drink as much as he ; but our friend, the Russian, is able to drink more than both of us (rwr K'tbc). Is the Russian able to drink as much of this wine as of that ? He is able to drink as much of the one as of the other. Have you anything good to drink ] I have nothing to drink. THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. in twi Cation. The corner, bcr 2Btnfc( ; the fountain (well), bcr 23runncn (is not softened in the plur.) ; the hole, ba$ Cod). To leave, to let. Caffcn*. To go for ) to fetch. $ o I c n. To send for. I c n laffeu*. I leave he leaves. 3cf) fofic et (apt. We leave they leave. 2Bir, (affcn fie taffcn. You leave. 3(jr tofftf (Sic foffcn). Obs. A. The particle j it , does not precede the infi- nitive joined to the verb taflen. See Lesson XL. Ex. We send for bread. 5>tt laffcn 2?rct> fyefcn. We wish to send for wine. Btr roolU'ti 2Bctn fyotcn (affcn. To go for it, to fetch it. Sbn O r c$ f)o(cn. To go for some, to fetch some. SBctcfycn, roefefycS F;eU*n. Thou. > u a . a In addressing one another, the Germans use the second person singular and third person plural. The second person singular >U, thou, is used : 1. in addressing the Supreme Being ; 2. in sublime or serious style and in poetry ; 71 Thou hast thou art. Hi Ijaft )u fcift. Art thou fatigued 1 SSift >u unite ? I am not fatigued. 3d) bin nicl)t mute. Thou wilt (wishest), thou art S)u nritlft 3)u fcmnjt. , able (canst). Art thou willing to make my fire] SSiflft )u mcin Jcucr cmmarfjcn ? I am willing to make it, but I 3d) will c$ cmmadjcn, abcr id) fcmn cannot. nid)t. Thou leavest. >ii lafjcfl. Thy. To be obliged (must). I must he must. We must they must. Thou must you must. Sing. 3) e i n. Plur. e t n e b . SEuffcn*. 3d) mujj cr mujj. nmffcn fie nwjjcn. )u mu(Jt 3fyr mullet or mupt (ein and Tetne, thy, are declined exactly as mctu and meine, my. ( 5)tefen 2(6cnt (accusative). f ^)cute 2(bent. \ f 3)eg 2(6cnt^ (genitive). t 2(m 7(bent. iD'tefen ^crcjcn (accusative). t &eute 9Rer$en. 1 ^^ 97Jorgem> (genitive). j 2(ni 72 EXERCISES. 64. Will you go for some sugar 1 I will go for some. Son (90?ctn bncn) ! You must keep (for) me (nur) my good gold and my good works. Must the children of our friends do anything! They must work in the morning and in the evening. What must the tailor mend (for) you ! He must mend my old coat (for) me. Which chicken must the cook kill ! He must kill this and that. Must I send you these or those books ! You must send me (both) these and those. g THIRTY-FOUflTH LESSON. Jbiet nnb Csction. As far as. SB t $ (an adverb of place). How far! 23t roef)tn ? (See Lesson XXVII, .Rufe 2.) As far as the corner. . S8te in ten mr\'f. As far as the end of the road. 93 i$ an ta$ ^ntc tc$ 73 The end, the end (the extremity), the road, the way, To the bottom of the cask. To the bottom of the well. To the bottom of the wells. The bottom, the garret, the ground, the cask, the purse, ta (Snfoc (has no plural) ; tab @nte (plur. tie (Snten) ; tec 9Skt> 23t$ auf ten SBctcn te$ gaffe*. 93i*auf ten G>cunt te$ SBcunnenS. &H* auf ten runt tec 23cunnen. tec eten ; tec toten ; tec cunt ; tec JBcutct. I go, am going he goes, is 3d) gefye cc gef)et or gefyt. going. We go, are going they go, are SO&tc gcr)en fie Qefjeru going. Thou goest, art going you go, >u gcfjeft or gcfyft 3f)C gcrjct or are going. ger;t (S>ie cjefjcn). A//, every. 2C I (. 31H, is declined like the definite article. It is never preceded or followed by an article, but may be so by a pronoun. t TCtlc Sage, f 2(Ue Gorgon, t Me Went. Unu Um rwetriel Ufyc ? Um nx'lcrje Sett ? Um etnS or um cm U^c.* Every day. Every morning. Every evening. At. At what o'clock ? At what time ] At one o'clock. Half. At half past three. At a quarter past one. At a quarter past eleven. At a quarter to one. At twelve o'clock. At twelve o'clock at night (mid- Um night). The quarter, ta$ t Um r)a(6 mec. f Um ein SSiectct auf groet. t Um ctn SSiectet auf gmolf. { Um tcet $tectel auf Um ^roolf or urn 93tcctc(. . 2C u $ 9 c ^ e n * (au^ugcfjen). At present, now. To go out. To remain, to stay. * Ufyr signifies clock, watch, and not hour, which is translated by etten (Sic 3d) nritt iet WciOcn*. Here. ter. To remain here. ier fctci&en*. There. 5) a. To remain there. JDa &leikn*. Are you going to your brother ? I am going to him. We are they are. You are. We have they have. You have. (Skljcn ie gu Sfaem S3rubctr ? 3d) gcfje su tfjm. SOStr finb fie finb. $f)t feib (@ie finb). 28ir fjaben fie fyafccn. 3f)r fyaDet or ()a()t ((^te 6fl^'n). Are your brothers at home ! They are at home. They are not at home. Are the men thirsty 1 Have your friends my books'? They have them not. Have they time to write ? To thee. Thcc. S3riibct gu tc finb gu ^>aufc. Ctc finb md)t gu ^>aufe. tnb btc Banner bur(!ig? ntctnc Ijabcn fie nid)t. fie 3cit su fd)tci6cn ? 3) it (dative). 3) t c^ (accusative). Obs. Do and a#z, when used as auxiliaries, are never expressed in German. Ex. Do you wish to take me to my SEctlcn ie mid) 311 metncm father 1 fiifju'n ? I wish to take thee to him. 3d) will >pid) gu i^m filf)rcn. Are you willing to give me a SBctlcn ^ic mir ein 5Kc(fer knife ? I am willing to give thee one. 3d) witt 2)ir cinS geben. Am I going to him ? cfee id) gu tftm ? Thou art not going to him, but )u .qcfjcft ntdbt 311 ifym, fonbcrn 5U to me. mir. EXERCISES. 66. How far do you wish to go 1 I wish to go as far as the end of the forest. How for does your brother wish to go ? He wishes to go as far as the end of that road. How far does the wine go ? It goes to the bottom of the cask. How far does the water go ? It goes to the bottom of the well. Whither art thou going 1 I am going to the market. Whither are we going] We are going into the country. Are you going as far as the square ? I am 75 going as far as the fountain. When does your cook go to the market 1 He goes there every morning. Can you speak to the nobleman] I can speak to him every day. Can I see your father ] You can see him ervery evening. At what o'clock can I see him ] You can see him every evening at eight o'clock. Will you come to me to-day 1 I cannot come to you to-day, but to-mor- row. At what o'clock will you come to-morrow ] I will come at half past eight. Can you not come at a quarter past eight 1 I cannot. At what o'clock does your son go to the captain 1 He goes to him at a quarter before one. At what o'clock is your friend at home .* At midnight. 67. Have you a mind to go out ] I have no mind to go out.When will you go out ] I will go out at half past three. Does your father wish to go out ] He does not wish to go out ; he wishes to remain at home. Are you willing to remain here, my dear (licb) friend ] I cannot remain here, I must go to the warehouse. Must you go to your brother 1 I must go to him At what o'clock must you write your letters ] I must write them at midnight. Do you go to your neighbour in the evening or in the morning] I go to him (both) in the evening and in the morning. Where are you going to now ] I am going to the play Where are you going to to-night 1 I am going nowhither; I must remain at home in order to write letters. Are your brothers at home ] They are not there. Where are they 1 They are in the country. Where are your friends going to 1 They are going home. Has your tailor as many children as your shoemaker 1 He has quite as many of them (thrcr). Have the sons of your shoemaker as many boots as their father ] They have (tcrcn) more than he. Have the children of our hatter as much bread as wine 1 They have more of the one than of the other. Has our carpenter one more son ] He has several more. Are the Italians thirsty ] They are thirsty and hungry. Have they anything to do ] They have nothing to do. Are the children of the Irish hungry or thirsty ] They are neither hungry nor thirsty, but fatigued. 68. Have you time to go out ] I have no time to go out, W T hat have you to do at home ] I must write letters to my friends. Must you sweep your room ] I must sweep it. Are you obliged to lend your brothers money ] I am obliged to lend them some. Must you go into the garden? I must go thither. At what o'clock must you go thither 1 I must go thither at a quarter past twelve. Are you obliged to go to my father at eleven o'clock at night (Tfbcnfcs) ] I arn obliged to go to him at midnight. Where are the brothers of our bailiff? They are in the great forest in order to cut great trees. Have they money to buy bread and wine] They have some. Are our children wrong in going ($u Cjcfycn) to 76 the English ] They are not wrong in going ($u $cfjcn) to them. Must the children of the French go to the children of the English They must go to them. Is the Russian right in remaining ($1 bletfrcn) with the Turk ? He is not wrong in remaining with him Will you send for some wine and glasses ? I will neither sen< for wine nor for glasses ; I am not thirsty. Is thy father thirsty He is not thirsty. Are you willing to give me some money ii order to go for some bread 1 I am willing to give you some ii order to go for some bread and beer. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. JUui tmfc To sell. aScrfaufen. To tell, to say. tcntcu fagcn, a broom 1 ctncn SBcfcn %u fan fen ? I will tell him to buy one. 3d) will ifom facjcn, einen ^u faufcn. It is. g i ft. Late. pat. What oVlork is it I $* m * ^ ift C ^ ? \ t kernel Ul)r t(l eg ? It is three o'clock. (g ift tret ilf)r. It is twelve o'clock. te btefeS ute$ benotbia,t ? Set) ba&e tbn notbtg. 3d) bin fccffcn bcnotbtgt. abcn @te btcfe* clb notbta,? Are you in want of this money ? tnb (Sic btefcS clbe$ babe e* n(Jtbtg. 3d) bin tcffcn benb'tbtjt. 3d) bak c^ nid)t nctbtg. 3d) bin bffe nic^t bcnotf)tc;t, 3d) babe nicbt^ notbig. ie c(b I want it. I am in want of it. I do not want it. I am not in want of it. I do not want anything. I am not in want of anything. Do you want money 1 Are you in want of money ] I want some. I am in want of some. I do not want any. I am not in want of any. Obs. A. 33enotfyigt few*, must never be used when the noun is not preceded by a determinative word like the definite article, or a possessive or demonstrative pronoun. What ? 805 a $ ? wSt a?e y yowant of 1 } ** *<* nW d ? Obs. B. All the cases of the personal pronouns have been more or less employed thus far, except the genitive, which is as follows : Of me of thee of him. SRctnet )ctnct fctncr. Of us of you of them. Unfcr (Suet (3b^ r ) ^ rct (f r all genders). Is he in want of me ? 3ft er mctncr benefit ? He is in want of you. (r tft 3brcr bcnotbigt. (See Les- son XVI.) Are you in want of these books ? tnb n). Wilt thou go to my hatter to tell him to mend my hat 1 I will go to him. Wilt thou go to the tailor to tell him to mend my coats 1 I will go to him. Art thou willing to go to the market 1 I am willing to go thither. What has the merchant to sell 1 He has beautiful leather gloves, combs, and good cloth to sell. Has he any shirts to sell 1 He has some to sell. Does he wish to sell me his horses 1 He wishes to sell them to you. 70. Is it late 7 It is not late. What o'clock is it 7 It is a quarter past twelve. At what o'clock does your father wish to go out 7 He wishes to go out at a quarter to nine. Will he sell this or that horse 7 He will sell neither this nor that. Does he wish to buy this or that coat 7 He wishes to buy both. Has he one horse more to sell 7 He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. Has he one carriage more to sell 7 He has not one more carriage to sell ; but he has a few more oxen to sell. When will he sell them 7 He will sell them to-day. Will he sell them in the morning or in the evening 7 He will sell them this evening. At what o'clock 7 At half past five. Can you go to the baker 7 I cannot go to him ; it is late. How late is it 7 It is midnight. Do you wish to see that man 7 I w r ish to see him, in order to know him. Does your father wish to see my brothers 7 He wishes to see them, in order to know them. Does he wish to see my horse 7 He wishes to see it. At what o'clock does he wish to see it 7 He wishes to see it at six o'clock. Where does he wish to see it 7 He wishes to see it in (cwf) the great square. Has the German much corn to sell 7 He has but little to Sell. What knives has the merchant to sell 7 He has good knives to sell. How many more knives has he 7 He has six more. Has the Irishman much more wine 7 He has not much more. Hast thou wine enough to drink 7 I have not much, but enough. Art thou able to drink much wine 7 I am able to drink much. Canst thou drink some every day 7 I can drink some every morning and every evening. Can thy brother drink as much as thou 7 He can drink more than I. 79 71. What are you in want of] I am in want of a good hat. Are you in want of this knife ] I am in want of it. Do you want money] I want some. Does your brother want pepper] He does not want any. Does he want some boots ] He does not want any. What does my brother want ] He wants nothing. Who wants some sugar] Nobody wants any. Does anybody want money ] Nobody wants any. Does your father want any- thing] He wants nothing. What do I want] You want no- thing. Art thou in want of my book ] I am in want of it. Is thy father in want of it ] He is not in want of it. Does your friend want this stick] He wants it. Does he want these or those corks ] He wants neither these nor those. Are you in want of me] I am in want of thee. When do you want me] At present. What have you to say to me ] I have a word to say to thee. Is your son in want of us ] He is in want of you and your brothers. Are you in want of my servants ] I am in want of them. Does any one want my brother ] No one wants him. THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. kr unb irmsigste THE PRESENT. There is no distinction in German between : I love, do love and am loving. All these present tenses are expressed by : id) [iebe, I love. In the regular verbs the third person singular and second person plural of the present tense indicative mode are alike, and terminate (even in most of the ir- regular verbs) in e t or t* The first and third persons plural in all German verbs are like the infinitive. 5 To love. 2 i e t) e n. love, C loves, J do love, he ^ does love, >3dj liebc, ct licfcet or ftc&t. am loving. ( is loving, y art loving. ( are loving. ) i love, f love, 1 We ? do love, they-? do love, >2Bit Ittftcn, ftc Ucfccn. f are loving. ( are loving, y 80 Obs. A. The letter e is often rejected in the second and third persons singular and in the second person plural of the present tense ; but never in verbs the root of which ends in b, t, t f), ft, or in two or more consonants, after which t or ft could not be distinctly pronounced, as in : fettbett*, to send ; bit fenbefl, er fenbet, 3fyr fenbet ; orbnen, to set in order ; bit orbitefl, er orbnet, 3fyr crbltet, &c. On the other hand this contraction always takes place in verbs that end in e I n or e r it, as : fcfymeicfyeftt, to flatter ; bit fdpneicfyetft, er fcfjmeidjeft, fcfjmetcfyelr ; cinbertt, to alter ; bit anbertf, er dnbert, 3 bert* (See Lesson XXIV. the Infinitive.) 93 r o u d) e n (governs the accusa- tive). To want. Do you want your money ? I want it. 3d) braucfye e$. To set in order. ) r t> n e tt. To 0;?ew. ) e f f n e n (aufmndKtt, Do you open the window 1 9ftad)cn ic fca$ Jenfter auf ? I open it. 3d) macfye cs cwf. Ofo. jB. German verbs are generally not irregular in the present tense, but rather in the imperfect and past participle. Some, however, are irregular in the second and third persons singular ; and as pupils should be acquainted with all the irregularities, we shall always mark these two persons whenever they present any. Of those which we have seen already, the following are irregular in the second and third persons singular. To give : thou givest he gives. To see : thoa seest he sees. To speak : thou speakest he speaks. To take, to carry : thou carriest he carries. To wash : thou washes! he w T ashes. To break : thou breakest he breaks. (Sic&en* : )u Stcicjen* : >u SB&afcftcn* : cjt&fl er cjtfct. ficf)ft cr fiefjt. er fprtcfyt er wafcfyeft er t et 81 Personal pronouns not standing in the nomina- tive, take their place after the verb. Do you love him ? fitc&cn (Sic i fj n ] I do love him. Set) Itcbc i 1) n. I do not love him. Scl) lii'&c i 1) n n t cf) t. Does the servant sweep the Jteftrt bet SBcfctentc t>a$ Simmer room 1 ci u $ ] C. In simple tenses, as the present or imper- fect, the separable particle is always placed at the end of the sentence ; unless this begins with a con- junction, a relative pronoun, or a relative adverb, in which case the particle is not separated from the verb, which then takes its place at the end. He sweeps it. (?t fcf)rt e cui$. Does your father go out to-day 1 cfyt 3()t SSnter fccutc cms 1 He does not go out to-day. (t gefyt fycutc ntcl)t cw$. EXERCISES. 72. Do you love your brother 1 I love him. Does your father love hirn ] He does not love him. Dost thou love me, my good child ? I love thee. Dost thou love this ugly man ] I do not love him. Does your father want his servant] He does want him. Dost thou want anything 1 I want nothing. Does the servant open the window 1 He does open it. Dost thou open it] 1 do not open it. Dost thou set my books in order] I do set them in order. Does the servant set our boots or our shoes in order ? He sets (both) the one and the other in order. Do our children love us ] They do love us. Do we love our enemies ] We do not love them. Do you want your money ] I do want it. Do we want our carriage ] We do want it. Are our friends in want of their clothes (.ftU'ifccr) ? They are in want of them. What do you give me ] I do not give thee anything. Do you give my brother the book ] I do give it him. Do you give him a hat ] I do give him one. 73. Dost thou see anything 1 I see nothing. Do you see my large garden ] I do see it. Does your father see our ship ] He does not see it, but we see it. How many ships do you see ] We see a good many ; we see more than thirty of them. Do you give me books] I do give thee some. Does our father give you money 1 -He does not give us any. Does he give you hats ] He does not give us any. Do you see many sailors ] We see more soldiers (fcct (Selfcnt, plur. en) than sailors. Do the soldiers see many storehouses ] They see more gardens than storehouses. 4* 82 Do the English give you good cakes ] They do give us some. Do you give me as much wine as beer ] I give thee as much of the one as of the other. Can you give me some more cakes 1 I can give thee no more ; I have not many more. Do you give me the horse which you have ] I do not give you that which I have. Which horse do you give me ] I give you that of my brother. 74. Do you speak to the neighbour ] I do speak to him. Does he speak to you 1 He does not speak to me. Do your brothers speak to you 1 They do speak to us. When dost thou speak to thy father 1 I speak to him every morning and every evening. What dost thou carry 1 I carry a book. Where dost thou carry it to 1 I carry it home. Do you wash your stockings ] I do not wash them. Does your brother wash as many shirts as stockings 1 He washes more of the one than of the other. Hast thou many more stockings to wash ] I have not many more to wash. How many more shirts have your friends to wash 1 They have two more to wash. What does your servant carry ] He carries a great table. What do these men carry 1 They carry our wooden chairs. Where do they carry them to ] They carry them into the large room of our brothers. Do your brothers wash their stockings or ours ] They neither wash yours nor theirs ; they wash those of their children. 75. Dost thou not break my glass 1 No, Sir, I do not break it. Do the sons of our neighbours break our glasses ] They do break them. Who tears your books 1 The young man tears them. Do you not tear them ] I do not tear them. Do the soldiers cut trees ] They do cut some. Do you buy as many hats as gloves 1 I buy more of the one than of the other. Does your brother buy any bread ] He is obliged to buy some ; he is hungry. Do our brothers buy any wine 1 They are obliged to buy some ; they are thirsty. Do you break anything. We do not break anything. Who breaks our chairs ] Nobody breaks them. Dost thou buy anything! I do not buy anything. Who keeps (takes care of) our money 1 My father keeps it. Do your brothers take care of my books 1 They do take care of them. Dost thou take care of anything] I do not take care of anything. 76. Does the tailor mend our coats ] He does mend them. What dost thou write] I write a letter. To whom dost thou write a letter ] To my father. When does thy brother write his letters ? He writes them in the morning and in the evening. What dost thou now. I do nothing. At what o'clock do you go to the the- atre ] At a quarter past seven. What o'clock is it now ] It 83 wants a quarter to six. At -what o'clock does your cook go to the market? He goes there at five o'clock (put tafyin to the end). Does he go thither in the evening 1 No, he goes thither in the morning. Do you go any whither ] I go no whither; hut my brothers go into the garden. Dost thou drink anything 1 I drink nothing ; but the Italian drinks good wine and good beer. Do you send me one more book 1 I do not send you one more. Are you answering his letter ? I am answering it. Does he answer thine 1 He does answer it. What do you say 1 I say nothing. Must I give him money to remain here 1 You must give him some to go out. Is this man selling anything 1 He is selling good cakes. What do you sell] I sell nothing; but my friends sell nails, knives, and horse-shoes. What does the man say 1 He says no- thing. What art thou looking for 1 I am not looking for any- thing. *** We should fill volumes, were we to give all the exercises that are applica- ble to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them- selves. We shall therefore merely repeat what we have already mentioned at the commencement : pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose a great many sentences in addition to those given ; but they must pronounce them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of speaking fluently. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. Jfmf ttnfr Certion. The pain, the tooth, the ear, the neck, the ache, the evil, tct ter 3afjn ; tag )f)r (is not softened takes en in the plur.) ; tec a(* ; tag Belj (plur. en *) ; tag UcOct. and Sore (ill, wicked). SB 6 f C . Bad. d)ltmm. Evil, ill. Ucbet. Have you a sore finger 1 I have a sore finger. Has your brother a sore foot 1 He has a sore eye. We have sore eyes. ic ctnen fcb'fen Jtncjcr ? f)afce etnen fcofen $tnqer. Sbt S3rutet einen f)at cm Oofeg 2Cua,e. c fyafccn fcofe #ua,cn. $a 2Bef), the ache, is employed in the plural only to denote the pangs of childbirth. 84 The head-ache, bag the tooth-ache, bag the ear-ache, ba$ a sore throat, a pain in one's back, 3?ucfenfd)mer3. He has the head-ache. I have the tooth-ache* 3d) The elbow, tier (StlOegcn ; the back, bet SKucfcn ; the knee, bag jtnte. d To bring. IB r i n g c n *. To find. gin ten*. That which (what). 255 a $ (fcasicnigc rccfcfyctf, t>a$ O&s. -4. 90Ba is often used instead of ba$jenige, tt>el* or ba3, melcf^e^/ that which. (See Lesson XXIX.) Do you find what you are look- gintxm a$ rmr fud)cn. 1 have what I want. 3cf) ^abc, tva$ tcl) brand)?. I mend what you mend. 3d) bcffcre oii^, wa^ U auskf; fern. Obs. B. As the second member of this phrase be- gins with a relative pronoun, the particle au is not separated from its verb which is removed to the end. (See Obs. C. Lesson XXXIV. and rule of Syntax, Les- son XLVII.) To read (thou reddest, he reads), gcfen* (t>u licfcfl, cr liefct or To study. 5 1 U t> t C C tt . To learn. 8 c r n c n . C. The particle j ll does not precede the infini- tive joined to the verb krneit, to learn. (See Lesson XL, Ex. b Compound words are of the gender of the last component which expresses the fundamental or general idea, c & corner 5, pain, is here in the plural. In compound words, 2Se^ is em- ployed in the singular, and ct s j$ctct) ? He cannot go out ; he has sore feet. Does the Spaniard find the umbrella which he is looking for? He does find it. Do the butchers find the sheep which they are looking for ? They do find them. Does the tailor find his thimble ? He does not find it. Dost thou find the paper which thou art looking for? I do not find it. Do we find what we are looking for ? We do not find what we are looking for. W^hat is the nobleman doing? He does what you are doing. W T hat is he doing' in his room ? He is reading. Derived from ter $ranjofe, the Frenchman. 86 79. Art thou reading? I am not reading. Do the sons of the noble- men study] They do study. What are they studying] They are studying German. Art thou studying English ] I have no time to study it. Are the Dutch looking for this or that ship ] They are looking for both. Is the servant looking for this or that broom 1 He is neither looking for this nor that. Who is learning German 1 The sons of the captains and those of the noblemen are learning it. When does your friend study French] He studies it in the morning. At what o'clock does he study it ] He studies it at ten o'clock. Does he study it every day ] He studies it every morning and every evening. What are the children of the carpenter doing] They are reading. Are they reading German] They are reading French ; but we are reading English. What books does your son read ] He reads good books. Does he read German books ] He reads French books. What book do you read ] I read a German book. Do you read as much as my chil- dren ] I read more than they. Does your father read the book which I read ] He does not read that which you read, but that which I read. Does he read as much as I ] He reads less than you, but he learns more than you. Do you lend me a book ] I do lend you one. Do your friends lend you any books ] They do lend me some. X THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 0ecl)S unb Ceriion. Spanish, fpantfd) (an adjective ) The termination ifcf) serves to form adjectives of the names of nations. Thus : Italian, itaticmfdj ; Polish, potntfd) ; Russian, r ufftfcl) ; Latin, (atctntfd) ; Greek, Arabian, Arabic, Syrian, Syriac, fynfcrj. The Pole, bcr $otc ; the Roman, tec JKomcc ; the Greek, tct the Arab, the Arabian, ter the Syrian, fcct ( Derived from ad)tm (plur. c). (Sic cin gutc* (Sktacfytnip 1 (;at ctncn ftctncn 9}?unt). Sbt SBrutcr bat Mauc 2(uc\cn. c mit cincn gutcn cincn gutcn 2Cnftatt ^u. @ p t c ( c n. ^> o r c n. f TCnftatt su f)6rcn. j cr ctroag fjoren. > a ^ n; a & I listen to him. To listen to some one or some- thing. That which. |"6rcn Do you listen to what the man I SNann facjt? tells you 1 ] $crcn ie auf t>a$, wag tcr I Sbncnfagt? I do listen to it. 3* ()orc fcarauf. b > 2lttf)orett takes the person in the accusative, and ju^oren in the dative. They never relate to a thing ; but f)6tett auf stands either with the person or 88 He listens to what I tell him. CSr fyb'tt cwf ta$, rca$ id) ifjm fagc. To correct. 95 c 1 1> c ff c r n, c o r r t g i re n. To tae off (as the hat). 2C b n c I) m en* (ab$unef)mcn). To tae ojf (as clothes). U u 3 1 c () c n * To tae away. SOB c 3 n c f) m c n*. To take. 91 c Omen*. Thou takest, he takes. )u ntmmft, cr nimmt. Thou takest off thy hat. )u mmmft >ctnen Jjbut cifc. Do you take off your boots ? Ste&cn ic Sbre (Sticfcln cm* 1 We take off our coats. Ctt $tef)cn unfcre SKocfe tc tiil)(e ttK'$ ] The servant takes them away. >cc SBetit'nte nimmt fie weg. EXERCISES. 80. Do you speak Spanish ] No, Sir, I speak Italian. Who speaks Polish 1 My brother speaks Polish. Do our neighbours speak Russian 1 They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. Do you speak Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin. What knife have you ] I have an English knife. What money have you there ] Is it Italian or Spanish money ? It is Russian money. Have you an Italian hat ] No, I have a Spanish hat. Are you a German 1 No, I am an Englishman. Art thou a Greek ] No, I am a Span- iard 1 Are these men Poles'? No," they are Russians. Do the Russians speak Polish ? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, and Arabic. Is your brother a merchant ] No, he is a joiner. Are these men merchants 1 No, they are carpenters. Are we boatmen ? No, we are shoemakers. Art thou a fool ? I am not a fool. What is that man ? He is a tailor. Do you wish me anything] I wish you a good morning. What does the young man wish me ] He wishes you a good evening. Whither must I go ] Thou must go to our friends to wish them a good day (Sag). Do your children come to me in order to wish me a good evening ? They come to you in order to wish you a good morning. 81. Has the nobleman blue eyes ] He has black eyes and a little mouth. Hast thou a good memory ] I have a bad memory, but much courage to learn German. What dost thou (do) instead of playing ] I study instead of playing.^ Dost thou learn instead of writing ] I write instead of learning. What does the son of our bailiff (do) ] He goes into the garden instead of going into the field. Do the children of our neighbours read ] They write in- stead of reading. What does our cook (do)] He makes a fire the thing, and always requires the accusative. Ex. 3cf) f)5re tljn an, or tcfy f)D= re thm 511, 1 listen to him; but i$ fjove auf bag, ta3 eie mir fatjcn, I listen to what you are telling me. 89 instead of going to the market. Does your father sell his ox ? He sells his horse instead of selling his ox. Do the physicians out] They remain in their rooms instead of going out. At what o'clock does our physician come to you ] He comes every morning at a quarter to nine. Does the son of the painter study English 1 He studies Greek instead of studying English. Does the butcher kill oxen 1 He kills sheep instead of killing oxen. Do you listen to me ? I do listen to you. Does your brother listen to me ] He speaks instead of listening to you. Do you listen to what I am telling you ? I do listen to what you are telling me. 82. Does the man listen to what you are telling him ? He does listen to it. Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them ? They do not listen to it. Dost thou listen to what thy brother tells thee ? I do listen to it. Do you go to the theatre 1 I am oing to the storehouse instead of going to the theatre. Are you willing to listen to me ] I am willing to listen to you, but I cannot ; 1 have the ear-ache. Does thy father correct my notes or thine ? He corrects neither yours nor mine. Which notes does he correct 1 He corrects those which he writes. Does he listen to what you tell him ? He does listen to it. Do you take off your hat in order to speak to my father 1 I do take it off in order to speak to him. Does thy brother listen to what our father tells him ] He does listen to it. Does our servant go for some beer 1 He goes for some vinegar instead of going for some beer. Do you correct my letter ? I do not correct it ; I have sore eyes. Does the servant take off his coat in order to make a fire 7 He does take it off. Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money ? I do take them off in order to give you some. Does he take off his shoes in order to go to your house ] He does not take them off. Who takes away the tables and chairs ? The servants take them away. Will you take away this glass ? I have no mind to take it away. Is he wrong to take off his boots 1 He is right to take them off. Dost thou take away anything 1 I do not take away anything. Does anybody take off his hat ? Nobody takes it off. THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Siebim mtir Certion. Wet (moist"). S a 6 (an adjective). To wet (to moisten). 97 a jj m a d) e n (ncfeen). To show. 3 c i $ c n, ro c i f e n * (govern the dative' 1 ). Bei^ctt expresses the mere act of showing- ; tvetfctt implies showing with instruction, and is derived from the word : tie 3Betfc, the manner. 00 To let see (expose to sight). (Scfycn laffen (governs the ac- cusative). Do you let me see your gold Caffcn (Sic mid) 3fjrc cjolbcnen SBa'ru ribbons ? bet fefyen ? I do let you see them. 3d) taffe (Sic btefel&en fefyen. Brandy, -sBtanntroctn (masc.) ; tobacco, &aba! (masc.) ; tobacco (for smoking), Raud)tcibaf ; snuff, (gdwupftaba? ; cider, (Stbct (masc.) ; meal (flour), Sflef)( (neut.) ; apples, tfcpfel (tpfel) (plur. of bet tfpfel). The gardener, bet cittnct ; the cousin, bet letter ; the brother-in-law, bet (Scfyrcaget ; the handkerchief, bci$ ud) ; the pocket handkerchief, bag d)nupfhtd) ; the valet, servant, bet )icnct, bet jtncd)t. b Do you go for your brother-in- olen te S^ten (Sdjroaget ? law? I do go for him. 3d) Ijete tfjn. To intend (to think). C b C n f c n. Do you intend to go to the ball cfccnfrm te Fjcute 7C6cnb ouf ben this evening ? SBatt ^u Qcfjen ? I do intend to go thither. 3d) acbcnfe ttn^u^ebcn. (See Ols. A. Lesson XXVII.) To know. 2B t f f e n * I know he knows. 3d) roetp ct We know they know. SOBtt nnflcn fie wiffen. Thou knowest you know. )u rcctpt 3^ wiff^t (@ie ttrif* fen). Do you know German 1 jtonnen @ic bcutfd) ? I do know it. 3c^ fann c^. Do you know how to read "^ French ? >^onncn tetter generally means servant ; hence : ber Jtammerbtener, the valet de chambre ; ber ^trc^enbtener, the church-minister, clergyman ; Jtnecfyt points out the lowest degree of servitude, hence : ber .jpaugFnec&t, the menial ser- vant ; ber <5taUfnec|t, the groom, the stableman ; ber $ett!ned)t, the jockey. c SQBiffen implies to have the knowledge of a thing, not to be ignorant of it ; Bnnen signifies to be able, to have the knowledge of an art or a science. Ex. 3>cf) tt?et$, was te ctncn ut mcicfyen ? hat 1 ? J Can you come to me to-day 1 jlonncn tc fyeute $u nut fommcn ? To swn'm. d) n) t mm c n *. fd>nmmen ? Whither ? where to? 90S f) i n ? Whither are you going ? ?H$o Qcfycn tc f)tn ? d EXERCISES. 83. Do you wish to drink brandy 1 No, I wish to drink wine. Do you sell brandy ] I do not sell any ; but my neighbour, the mer- chant, sells some. Will you fetch-- me some tobacco ] I will fetch you some ; what tobacco do you wish to have ] I wish to have some snuff; but my friend, the German, wishes to have some tobacco (for smoking). Does the merchant show you cloth] He does not show me any. Does your valet go for some cider 1 He does go for some. Do you want anything else (nod) cmxi) 1 I want some flour ; will you send for some (for) me ] I will send for some (for) you. Does your friend buy apples 1 He does buy some. Does he buy handkerchiefs 1 He buys tobacco instead of buying handkerchiefs. Do you show me anything ] I show you gold and silver clothes. Whither does your cousin go 1 He goes to the ball. Do you go to the ball ] I go to the theatre instead of going to the ball. Does the gardener go into the garden 1 ? He goes to the market instead of going into the garden. Do you send your servant to the shoemaker ] I send him to the tailor instead of sending him to the shoemaker. 84. Dost thou go to fetch thy father ] I do go to fetch him. May (.5tann) I go to fetch my cousin 1 You may go to fetch him. Does your valet find the man whom he is looking for 1 He does find him. Do your sons find the friends whom they are looking for] They do not find them. When do you intend going to the ball] 1 intend going thither this evening. Do your cousins intend to go into the country ] They intend to go thither. When do they intend to go thither 1 They intend to go thither to-morrow. At what o'clock ] At half-past nine. What does the merchant wish to sell you ] He wishes to sell me pocket-handkerchiefs. Do you intend to buy some ] 1 will not buy any. Dost thou know - 1 2Bot)ttt, as above, may be divided into two parts, the first of which is placed in the beginning and the second at the end of the sentence. If the sentence ends with a past participle 01 an infinitive, f) t tt is placed before it, 92 anything 1 I do not know anything. What does thy cousin know ? He knows how to read and to write. Does he know German ] He does not know it. Do you know Spanish ] 1 do know it. Do your brothers know Greek 1 They do not know it ; but they intend to learn it. Do I know English ] You do not know it; but you intend to study it. Do my children know how to read Italian"? They know how to read, but not how to speak it. 85. Do you intend to study Arabic ? I intend to study Arabic and Syriac. Does the Englishman know Polish ? He does not know it, but he intends learning it. Do you know how to swim ? I do not know how to swim, but how to play. Does your cousin know how to make coats] He does not know how to make any; he is no tailor. Is he a merchant] He is not one. What is he 1 He is a physician. Whither are you going ? I am going into my garden, in order to speak to trie gardener. What do you wish to tell him ? 1 wish to tell him to open the window of his room. Does your gardener listen to you 1 He does listen to me. Do you wish to drink some cider ] No, I have a mind to drink some beer ; have you any ? I have none ; but I will send for some. When will you send for some ? Now. Do you send for apples ? I do send for some. Have you a good deal of water ? I have enough to wash my feet. Has your brother water enough ? He lias only a little, but enough to moisten his pocket-handkerchief. Do you know how to make tea ? I know how to make some. Does your cousin listen to what you tell him ? He does listen to it. Does he know how to swim ] He does not know how to swim. Where is he going to] He is going no whither; he remains at home. THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. <3UI)t tttti brd$$i0$te Cection. The intention. 3) e t > t f a |. Intended. c f o n n c ru To intend or to have the intention. (SJcfonnen fctn*. I intend to go thither. 3$) f>tn Qcfenncn fytngugerjen. We have the intention to do it. aBBir finb cjcfcnncn c$ $u tfyun. ' (S r !) a ( t c n * (to receive any- thing sent). S3 e f o m m e n * (to receive as a To receive. (S m p f a n 9 c n * (to welcome, to entertain). 93 C>u crtjaltff. (L .,., 1 >u fmpfSngft/ (Sr cmpfangf. (St kfemmt clb. (t crfyalt fccn SBerjug. (r cmpfancjt fcinc Jteunbe. (Stfyatten ic beutc ctncn SSt'uf 1 3d) crfyaltc nietgcn ctncn. i. gftljtetO b Ceiten 5 ' 3d) ffifjte bag spfctb in ben tolt. bet 93et$ua, ; bet (Stall ; bltnb ; ftan! ; otnu 2Culofd)cn (v. act. and n. ir. li n 5 (I n b c n (an$u$unbcn). 2( n ft c cf c n (anguftaftn). er Thou receivest He receives. He receives money. He obtains the preference. He receives his friends. Do you receive a letter to-day 1 I receive one to-morrow. To guide (conduct, take) To lead. I lead the horse into the stable. The preference, the stable, blind, sick (ill), poor, To extinguish. To light. To set on fire. Does he extinguish the candle 1 He lights it. t jiinbct c an. To depart, to set out. U 6 1 c i f c n (afyutctfcn). When do you intend to depart 1 2ann gcbcnfen @tc afyutcifcn ? I intend to depart to-morrow. 3d) $cbcn!e metcjen afyuretfcn. EXERCISES. 86. Do your brothers intend to go into the country ? They do in- tend to go thither. Do you intend to go to my cousin 1 I do in- tend to go to him. Dost thou intend to do anything 1 ? I intend to do nothing. Do you intend to go to the theatre this evening] I do intend to go thither, but not this evening. Dost thou receive anything] I receive money. From (iCon) whom dost thou receive some ] I receive some from my father, my brother, and my cousin. Does your son receive books ? He does receive some. From whom does he receive some ] He receives some from me, from his friends, and neighbours. Does the poor man (bet TCrme, See page 34, Obs. A.) receive money ] He does receive some. From whom does he receive some ] He receives some from the rich. Dost thou receive wine] I do not receive any. Do I receive money '\ You do not receive any. Does your servant receive a The persons not mentioned follow the regular conjugation. (See Pre- sent Tense, Lesson XXXIV.) b Bubrett expresses the act of conducting only ; leitctt means to conduct with safety. Ex. (inen Jtrtttfen fiityren, to conduct a sick person j etn Jlinb, einen 33litiben leiten, to guide a child, a blind man. 94 clothes (,ft(e!bcr) ? He does not receive any. Do you receive the books which our friends receive 1 ? We do not receive the same which your friends receive; but we receive others. Does your friend receive the letters which you write to him ? -He does re- ceive them. Do you receive the apples which I send you? I do not receive them. Does the American receive as much brandy as cider 1 He receives as much of the one as of the other. Do the Scotch receive as many books as letters 1 They receive as many of the one as of the other. 87. Does the Englishman obtain the preference 1 He does obtain it. Does your cousin receive as much money as I ? He receives more than you. Does the Frenchman receive his letters 1 He does receive them. When does he receive them 1 He receives them in the evening. When dost thou receive thy letters 1 I re- ceive them in the morning. At what o'clock 1 At a quarter to ten. Dost thou receive as many letters as 1 1 I receive more of them than thou. Dost thou receive any to-day ? I receive some to-day and to-morrow. Does your father receive as many friends as ours (as our father) ? He receives fewer of them than yours (than your father). Does the Spaniard receive as many enemies as friends 1 He receives as many of the one as of the other. Do you receive one more crown ] I do receive one more. Does your son receive one more book ? He does receive one more. What does the physician receive ? He receives good tobacco, good snuff, and good pocket-handkerchiefs. Does he receive brandy ? He does receive some. 88. Does your servant receive shirts 1 He does receive some. Does he receive as many of them as my valet (does) 1 He receives quite as many of them. Do you receive anything to-day 1 I receive something every day. Dost thou conduct anybody 1 I conduct nobody. Whom do you guide 1 I guide my son. Where are you conducting him to ? I conduct him to my friends to wish them a good morning. What is your son 1 He is a physician. Does your servant guide any one ? He guides my child. Whom ("Iftcn) must I guide] Thou must guide the blind. (Page 34, Obs. A.} Must he conduct the sick person 1 He must conduct him. Whither must he conduct him 1 He must couduct him home. Whither is he leading your horse ? He is leading it into the stable. Dost thou guide the child or the blind man? I guide both. When does the foreigner intend to depart] He intends to depart this morning. At what o'clock 1 ? At half past one. Does he not wish to remain here ? He does not ((5r rcill nicfct). Do you intend to to the theatre this evening ] I intend to go there to-morrow. Do you depart to-day ? I depart now. When do you intend to 95 write to your friends "? I intend to write to them to-day. Do your friends answer your letters ] They do answer them. Do you ex- tinguish the fire 1 I do not extinguish it. Does your servant light the candle ] He does light it. Does this man intend to set your warehouse on fire 1 He does intend to set it on fire (cmjuftccf en). THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. mtfr COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. The comparative is formed by adding e r and the superlative by adding fl a to the ^simple adjective. Examples : POSIT. COMP. SUPERL. Handsome handsomer @cf)6n fcfyoner 1 handsomest. Small smaller smallest. Wild wilder wildest. ffetner ffeinjh SOBtfb nnlber nrilbefl. Obs. A.* Comparative and superlative adjectives are declined like the positive. Examples : COMPARATIVE. Masculine. Neuter. The handsomer table, the hand-<^ somer book, &c. "N. ber fdjonere ba$ fcfyonere SSitcfy. Stp, G. beS fcfyoneren be$ fcfyoneren SSucfyeS* D. bem fcfyotterett bent fdjottereit Stifle, A. ben fcfyoneren ba^ fdE)6nere h S3itcf|. In the superlative, fl is sometimes preceded by c when the pronunciation requires it, as : flip, sweet, fujjeft ; fc^tecfjf, bad, fdpled)tefl. In the word flrojii, great, the superlative grofjeft, is contracted into gropt, as : ber grofjte 3Jiann, the greatest man. b The letter c, which precedes or follows the consonant r in the compara- tive, is often omitted for the sake of euphony; thus instead of: ber, bag fci)o= nere, beg fcboneren, bem fcfcotteren, we say : ber, ba$ fd)5nre, be$ fd)onern, bem fd[)i>nern, & c . (See Oba. Lesson XIX.) 96 The smallest hat, the smal- < lest book, &c. SUPERLATIVE. Masculine. Neuter. N. bet ffemfle ba3 ftemtfe S3ncf), 3 ffemflen G. be ffemfien D. bem flemften bent Hempen 33ncfje, A. ben fteinften ba$ Hetntfe 23uen alien. SDicfct .put tft grop, allctn jcncc t(l grower. Sft 3ft t 23 ud) fo grcp wic t>a$ met? nic^c? 65 tft nid)t fo 6s tft : fo gr op. tic Winter unfcrcS _.... fo arttg n>tc tic unfrtgcn ? Sic fint artigcr al$ tic unfrtgcn. SB c f f c n ? 6 (See Lesson XXIX.) < ift. SQBcffen ut tft tag ! (5$ ift tcr ut mcinc$ 25rutcr& @ ift mcinc$ JBrutcrS. Qi ift mctnc^ 23rutcr$ ^ut. 2Bc(fcn ^)Ut tft tcr fd)onftc ? JDcr mcincg Waters ift tcr fcftb'njtc. SQScffcn JBnnt ift fdjoncr, tas 3ftn s gc otcr ta6 tncinigc ? orttg ; lcid)t ; fdbrucr ; grop; lang ; f urj ; runt ; rctci). 5. D. The adjectives which do not soften the ra- dical vowels in the comparative and superlative, are : 1st, Those of which the last syllable does not belong f In this phrase the word a 1 1 1 $ does not quite correspond to the English word good; but it does in many others, as for instance : be good ! fei arttg ! a good child, em arttgeS ifttnb. g The word which answers the question toeffen ? is always put in the geni- tive case. 98 to the primitive 11 word, as: banfbar, grateful; culpable ; bogfyaft, malicious. Ex. arttg, pretty ; artiger, prettier ; arttgfl, prettiest. 2d, Participles, as : kbenb, refreshing ; gelobt, praised; tobenb, furious ; fucfyenb, seeking, &c. 3d, Those which contain a diphthong, as: gencw, exact ; few!, lazy ; bfait, blue ; grait, grey, &c. 4th, Those terminating in e r, as tapfer, valiant, &c. 5th, The following : flat, clear ; f napp, tight ; fafym, lame ; (os, loose ; matt, wearied ; morfcf), brittle ; nncft, naked ; platt, flat ; plump, clumsy ; ref), raw; runt/ round ; , pale ; bunt, variegated fat)(, fallow ; falfci), false ; fref), joyful ; gcrafcc, straight; ijcfiwt), healthy ; fltott/ smooth ; I)cl)l, hollow ; f)dt>, kind ; faW/ bald ; fare), stingy ; E. fan ft, gentle ; fatt, satisfied ; fdbtoff, slack ; jcfyanf, slender ; parr, numb ; (M$, proud ; draff/ stiff; fhimm/ dumb ; tell, mad ; oll, full ; jafyrn, tame. In German the superlative is almost al- ways relative, and to express the absolute superlative, we use, as in English, one of the adverbs: fet)r,very; rerfjt, very ; fyocfyft, extremely ; imgemeitt, uncommonly, &c. Ex. u fefyr armer SSJJanit, a very poor man ; em fefyr fcfyoneg $mb, a very fine child. Obs. F. Than, after a comparative, is translated by a I g (See Obs. B. Lesson XXIIL). To increase the force of the comparative, we use the adverbs nod), still, and toeit, far. Ex. 9fa>d) grower, still greater ; icf) bin tt>ett gfitdfttcfyer afg er, I am far happier than he. Obs. G. The following adjectives have no compara- tive: POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE. The exterior, ber or bag aufjiere, ber or bag aitffcrtfe ; the interior, ber bag innere, ber bag innerfle ; the posterior, ber bag fyintere, ber bag fyinterfte ; the middle one, the superior, ber bag nritrfere, ber bag mittef fte ; ber bag obcre, ber bag oberfle ; h By primitive we mean a word to which a syllable may be added in order to form another word, as bflttfbcir, which is formed of the word *anf, thanks, and the syllable bar. 99 POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE. the inferior, ber or ba3 itntere, bet or bag imtertfe ; the anterior, ber ba$ fcorbere, bcr ba ttorberfle, EXERCISES. 89. Is your brother taller (grc) than mine 1 He is not so tall, but better than yours. Is thy hat as bad as that of thy father 1 It is better, but not so black as his. Are the shirts of the Italians as white (roeip) as those of the Irish 1 They are whiter, but not so good. Are the sticks of our friends longer than ours 1 They are not longer, but heavier. Who have (2Bcr f)0t) the most beautiful gloves ? The French have them. Whose horses are the finest ? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends are the finest of all. Is your horse good 1 It is good, but yours is better, and that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses which we know. Have you pretty shoes'? I have very pretty (ones) ; but my brother has prettier (ones) than I. From (iCcn) whom does he receive them 1 He receives them from his best friend. Is your wine as good as mine 1 It is better. Does your merchant sell good handkerchiefs 1 He sells the best handkerchiefs that I know. 90. Have we more books than the French ? We have .more of them than they ; but the Germans have more of them than we, and the English have the most of them. Hast thou a finer garden than that of our Physician ] I have a finer (one). Has the American a finer house than thou 1 He has a finer (one). Have we as fine children as our neighbours ] We have finer (ones). Is your coat as long as mine 1 It is shorter, but prettier than yours. Do you soon (l>cilt>) go out 1 ? [ do not go out to-day. When does your father go out ] He goes out at a quarter past twelve. Is this man older than that (man) ] He is older, but that (man) is healthier (gi'funfccr). W T hich of these two children is the better 1 ? The one who studies is better than the one who plays. Does your servant sweep as well as mine 1 He sweeps better than yours. Does the German read as many bad books as good (ones) ] He reads more good than bad (ones). Do the merchants sell more sugar than coffee] They sell more of the one than of the other. Does your shoemaker make as many boots as shoes 1 He makes more of the one than of the other. 91. Can you swim as well as the son of the nobleman ? I can swim better than he ; but he can speak German better than I. Does he read as well as you ? He reads better than I. Have you the head-ache ? No, I have the ear-ache. Does your cousin listen to what you tell him 1 He does not listen to it. Does the 100 son of your bailiff go into the forest? No, he remains at home; he lias sore feet. Do you learn as well as our gardener's son ? I learn better than he, but he works better than I. Whose car- riage is the finest ? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still finer, and ours is the finest of all. Has any one as fine apples as we ? No one has such fine (ones). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTIETH LESSON. bierjlgpt* Action. To begin. 2Cnfano,en* (anjufancjen). Thou beginnest he begins. )u fana,ft an cr fangt an. I begin to speak. 3d) fange an gu fprccfjcn. Does your servant sweep the 3U'()tt 3(jr SBcbicntet t>a Simmer room, which I sweep ? au$, n>c(d)e$ id) au^fcfjrc ? To finish, to end. ( n t> t g C n. Not yet. 9?od) ntd)t. Already. ft (eftmatS, 8fter$), its compara- tive is oftcr/ and its superlative am oftcftcn. As often as you. (So eft rate (Sic. Oftener than you. )cftcr ()ftcr) o($ Qcf)cn ? 101 Does he breakfast before he be- Jrufyftuoft et, c!je ct anftfngt $u at* gins to work ] Oaten ? Do you breakfast as early as 1 1 $rul)ftuc!en (Sic fo ftiif) nric id) ? I breakfast earlier than you. 3d) frttfyftiirfe ftiifyct 0(5 p & t. Too. 3 u. Too late. 3u fpat. Too early. 3u frfifj. Too great. 3u Qrcp. Too little. 3u ftctn. Too much. 3u ttcf. Do you speak too much ? (prcd)cn o(* len*, to be willing, to wish (will). $afyren*, to ride, to go (in a carriage) ; ftnten*/ to find ; fiifyteit, to feel ; ttennen*, to call, to name ; reiten*, to ride, to go on horseback. 2d, When the infinitive is used in an absolute sense. Ex. gfeiig fern cjejt'emt bem Sftcmne/ it behoves a man to be assiduous. When two infinitives are thus em- ployed, the verb which follows them is put in the third person singular. Ex. Seine $ef)(er befennen nnb berenett ijl fofyon fyalbe Sejfernng, to acknowledge one's faults and to repent of them is already half an amendment. In constructing the phrase with e t(l, it is, the verbs fern*, to be; befennen*, to acknowledge; berenen, to repent, are removed to the end and preceded by } it, Ex. @ gejtemt bem 9Kanne, fleigtg jn fetn. $ tjl fcf)on f;a(be rnng, feine geljkr jit befennen nnb jn berenen* 102 EXERCISES. 92. Do you begin to speak ? I begin to speak. Does your brother begin to learn Italian? He begins to learn it. Can you already speak German? Not yet, but I am beginning. Do our friends begin to speak? They do not yet begin to speak, but to read. Does our father already begin his letter ? He does not yet begin it. Does the merchant begin to sell ? He does begin. Can you swim already? Not yet, but I begin to learn. Does your son speak before he listens ? He listens before he speaks. Does your brother listen to you (Lesson XXXVI.) before he speaks? He speaks before he listens to me. Do your children read before they write ? They write before they read. Does your servant sweep the warehouse before he sweeps the room ? He sweeps the room before he sweeps the warehouse. Dost thou drink before thou foest out? I go out before I drink. Does your cousin wash his ands (feme anfce) before he washes his feet ? He washes his feet before he washes his hands. Do you extinguish the fire be- fore you extinguish the candle ? I extinguish neither the fire nor the candle (oul, to the end). Do you intend to go out before you write your letters ? I intend writing my letters before I go out. Does your son take off his boots before he takes off his coat ? My son takes off neither his boots nor his coat (au, to the end). 93. Do you intend to depart soon (baft) ? I intend to depart to- morrow. Do you speak as often as 1 1 I do not speak as often, but my brother speaks oftener than you. Do I go out as often as your father ? You do not go out as often as he ; but he drinks oftener than you. Do you begin to know this man 1 I begin to know him. Do you breakfast early 1 We breakfast at a quarter past nine. Does your cousin breakfast earlier than you? He breakfasts later than I. At what o'clock does he breakfast ? He breakfasts at eight o'clock, and I at half-past six. Do you not breakfast too early ? I breakfast too late. Does your father break- fast as early as you ? He breakfasts later than I. Does he finish his letters before he breakfasts ? He breakfasts before he finishes them. Is your hat too large ? It is neither too large nor too small. Does our gardener breakfast before he goes into the garden 1 He goes into the garden before he breakfasts. Do you read French as often as German? I read French oftener than German. Does the physician speak too much ? He does not speak enough. Do the Germans drink too much wine? They do not drink enough of it. Do they drink more beer than cider J They drink more of the one than of the other. Have you much money ] We have not enough of it. Have your cousins much corn ? They have only a little, but enough. Have you much more brandy ? We have not much more of it. Have you as many tables as 103 chairs 1 I have as many of the one as of the other. Does your friend receive as many letters as notes ? He receives more of the latter than of the former. Do you finish before you begin ? I must begin before I finish. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTY-FIRST LESSON. Qcin uni met$$*te Italian. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. The past participle of regular verbs a is formed from the second person plural of the present indicative, by prefixing to it g e, Ex. 3fyr fiebet or Kebt, you love ; ge* Itebct or geliebr, loved. The past participle of irregular verbs will always be given with the verb. All that has been said (Obs. A. Lesson XXXIV.) on the rejection of the letter e, is equally applicable to the past participle, this being formed from the second person plural. Obs. A. Some verbs do not add the syllable g e in the past participle. (See those verbs, Lesson XLV.) To be been. bin ba gcrocfcn. I have not been there. 3cf) tin nicl)t ba gcrocfcn. Have 1 been there 1 S3in id) ba gcrocfcn ? You have been there. (Sic fint) ba gctvcfcn. Has he been there ? 3ft ct ta gcnxfcn ? Ever. 3 C , i c m a I $ . Never. $1 i c , n i c m a I $ . Have you been at the ball ? (Stnt) cm 33ai( gcwcfcn ? I have never been there. 3d) bin nic t>a gcrocfcn. Thou hast never been there. 3)u In ft me t)a gcrocfcn. You have never been there. (Sic ftnb (3()t: fcit) ntcmatS ba C tt>cfcn. He has never been there. (t ift ntc ba gcttJcfcn. Have you already been at the (Stnb @ic fcljcn im te btcfcn SERorgcn ing 1 fen ? I have been in the garden. 3d) bin tm (in bem) artcn fi-n. Where has thy brother been ? SBo tft >etn ffirubcr gcnxfcn ? He has been in the storehouse. (Sr ift tm 33orratOs!;aufc gcrocfcn. EXERCISES. 94. Where have you been ? I have been at the market. Have yon been at the ball ] 1 have been there. Have I been at the play 7^ You have been there. Hast thou been there ? I have not been there. Has your cousin ever been at the theatre 1 He has never been there. Hast thou already been in the great square ? I have never been there. Do you intend to go thither ? I intend to go thither. When will you go thither? I will go thither to-morrow. At what o'clock ? At twelve o'clock. Has your son already been in my large garden ? He has not yet been there. Does he intend to see it ? He does intend to see it. When will he go thither (frinctn) ? He will go thither to-day. Does he intend to go to the ball this evening ? He does intend to go thither. Have you already been at the ball 1 I have not yet been there. When do you intend to go thither (bafytn) 1 I intend to go thither to-morrow, Have you already been in the Englishman's room ? I have not yet been in it (bartn). Have you been in my rooms? I have been there. When have you been there ? I have been there this morning. Have I been in your room or in that (in bcm) of your friend ? You have neither been in mine nor in that of my friend, but in that of the Italian. 95. Has the Dutchman been in our storehouses or in those (in bcncn) of the English ? He has neither been in ours nor in those of the English, but in those of the Italians. Hast thou already been at the market ? I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither. Has the son of our bailiff been there ? He has been there. When has he been there ? He has been there to-day. Does the 105 son of our neighbour intend to go to the market 1 He does intend to go thither. What does he wish to buy there 1 He wishes to buy some chickens, oxen, cheese, beer, and cider there. Have you already been at my cousin's house 1 I have already been there. Has your friend already been there 1 He has not yet been there. Have we already been at our friends 1 We have not yet been there (foci tfyncn). Have our friends ever been at our house 1 They have never been there. Have you ever been at the theatre ? I have never been there. Have you a mind to write a letter 1 I have a mind to write one. To whom do you wish to write I I wish to write to my son. Has your father already been in the country 1 He has not yet been there, but he intends to go thither. Does he intend to go thither to-day 1 He intends to go thither to- morrow. At what o'clock w r ill he depart 1 ? He will depart at half past six. Does he intend to depart before he breakfasts ? He intends to breakfast before he departs. Have you been any- where ] I have been nowhere. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTY-SECOND LESSON. gtxm uttir Ceciion. To have had. a fc e n * 9 c & a 6 1 . DC/ 3 The participle past, as well as the infinitive (Lesson XXIV), when it forms with the auxiliary a compound tense, is in German placed at the end of the phrase. Have you had my coat ? afcen &w nicinen 9?oc! gcljafct ? I have not had it. 3d) fyabe ttw nicfyt Qcfyabt. Have I had it ? abc tcb ifytt gefjabt ? You have had it. Sic fynben tl)h gcbcibt. You have not had it. (gte fyabcn tf)n md)t acljafct. Thou hast not had it. S)u fyaft tf>n md)t gctjabt. Has he had it ? &at cr tfw ^cfjaM ? He has had it. (5t fyat ifyn gefya&t. Hast thou had my book 1 ^oft u twin 23ud) I have had it. 3cf) fabc C$ gcfycibt. I have not had it. 3d) fyabe C8 md)t cjcftafct. Have you had the books 1 akn Cjelja&t ? I have had some. Scb fyaOc n?ctd)C^ gcbcibt Hast thou had paper ? |>aft J)u Rapier 6* 106 I have had none. Scf) fynfce fctnS geljcibt. Have I had any ? ^>abe id) n>c(d)C* .qcfyabt Has he had some wine ? $at cr SSctn gcfyabt ? He has had some. eld)en gcfjabt He has had none. @r fyat fcinen gef)abt. What has he had ? Ba$ f)at cr geljabt ? He has had nothing. (r (jot nid)t$ gefyabt. He has never been either right f (t fyat rue n?ct)Ct: SKcdjt no<^ Uns or wrong. rcd)t To ^a^e ^Zace. t a 1 1 ft n b c n *. Does the ball take place this Jtnbct tct S3all ttcfcn 2(0cnt) evening ] tatt ? It does take place. lcte 9^a(. Last. Cc|t. How many times (how often) ? SBic mctmat ? Once, cinmal ; twice, gTOcimol ; thrice, brctmal ; several times, crfcfttct>cnc 9}Ja(. Formerly. f) c b c m (etcmat^ cfjcbcffen, rcr* mnts). Sometimes. 5)1 a n d) m a ( . Do you go sometimes to the mar- ebon cr iBruict: rncine* gteun* be*.? I am. f 3d) bin c $. Are you ill ? feint (Sic frcmf ? I am not. f 3d) Inn c $ md)t. Are our neighbours as poor as f unfctc 9?cid)&arn jo arm, roie they say ? ft c c $ fcigcn ? They are so. t * c P n & c & T0 speak spoken. ptecfycn* cjefprecfyen. I have spoken with, the man. Scf) f)cibc nut fccm 9^annc gcfprcd)cn. I have spoken to the man. 3d) Ija&e t>cn SOiann gcfprcdjcn.* 9JI 1 1 (a preposition which gov- erns the dative). With which man have you SOttt wc(d)cm SO^annc ^abcn tc cjc$ spoken ] fprccl)cn ? To which man have you spoken 1 SEctdjcn 9}fann f)cibcn ett means to speak to somebody in an absolute sense, with- out mentioning the subject spoken of. whilst mtt 3eman>cm fyrecfyen, means to speak with or to somebody about a particular thing, as : mit Semanbem liber etttxiS (yon etner cl) bin Cf). Ts that boy your son ? He is. How many children have you ? I have but two. Has the bailiff gone to the market ? He has not gone thither. Is he ill ? He is. Am I ill ? You are not. Are you as tall (grojj) as 1 1 I am. Are your friends as rich as they say ? They are. Art thou as fatigued as thy brother? I am more so (e$ nictjr) than he. 101. Have you spoken to my father? I have spoken to him. When did (fjaOcn cjcfprocfyen) you speak to him? I spoke to him the day before yesterday. Have you sometimes spoken with the Turk ? I have never spoken with him. How many times have you spoken to the captain? I have spoken to him six times. Has the nobleman ever spoken with you ? He has never spoken with me. Have you often spoken with his son ? I have often spoken with him. Have you spoken with him oftener than we ? I have not spoken with him so often as you (have). To which son of the nobleman have you spoken ? I have spoken to the youngest. To which men has your brother spoken? He has spoken to these. What has your gardener's son cut ? He has cut trees. Has he cut corn ? He has cut some. Has he cut as much hay as corn 1 He has cut as much of the one as of the other. Have you picked up my knife ? I have picked it up. Has your boy picked up the tailor's thimble? He has not picked it up. Have you picked up a crown ? I have picked up two of them. What have you picked up? We have picked up nothing. Have you burnt anything? We have burnt nothing. What have the sailors burnt? They have burnt their cloth coats. Hast thou burnt my fine ribbons ? I have not burnt them. Which books has the 112 Greek burnt! He has burnt his own. Which ships have the Spaniards burnt? They have burnt no ships. Have you burnt paperl I have not burnt any. Has the Physician burnt notes 1 He has burnt none. Have you had the courage to burn my hat 1 I have had the courage to burn it. When did you bum it 1 I burnt it yesterday. Where have you burnt it 1 I have burnt it in my room. Who has torn your shirt ? The ugly boy of our neighbour has torn it. Has anybody torn your books 1 No- body has torn them. FORTY-FOURTH To drink drunk. To carry carried. To bring brought. To send sent. To write written. Te see seen. To give given. To lend lent. LESSON. Ceciion. )i*r tm& uutjigste INFINITIVE. PAST PART. rtnfen* getrtmfem ragen* getragem 93ringen* gebracfyt, enben* gefanbt. cfyreiben* gefcfyriebetu (Sefyen* gefehem eben* gegeben* ?eifyen* getiefyem NEUTER VERBS. Neuter verbs are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always form their past tenses with the auxiliary fyafcen*, to have ; on the contrary, some neuter verbs take fetn*, to be, and others fyaben*, for their auxiliary ; others again take sometimes fyabett*, and sometimes fern** Those of which the auxiliary is not marked have the same as in English. To come come (Past part.). & o m m c n * g e E o m m c n. To go gone. e f) c n Is the man come to your father? 3ft fcet fommcn ? He is come to him. (5t ift $u tfjm gcfcmmcn. Is thy brother gone into the 3ft )Ctn JBrufcer auf tag (auf$) field 1 gclb ge^cncjen ? He is gone thither. (T iff t>al)tn gCijcuiQcn. Have you seen the man 1 afcen cn 3}tann cjcfcfjen ? I have seen him. 3cr> babe tf)it Have you seen my book ? $aOen @ic mcin 113 I have seen it. 3d) fafce c$ gefcfjcn. I have not seen it. 3d) (ja&e c$ md)t geferjen. When? Where? 2B onn? 955 c ? a When did you see my cousin ? SBann fjafcen tc mctncn SScttcr aes I saw him the day before yester- 3d) fyaOe tf)n ttorgcftcrn gcfefjen. day. Where have you seen him * 95*0 Men (Sic tfjn gcfcrjcn ? I have seen him at the theatre. 3d) baOc if)n im Sweater gcfcfjcn. Where hast thou seen my book ? S5?o f)dfl >u mctn 93ud) gcfcfycn ? I have seen it in your room. 3d) fyabc e$ in Sfyrcm dinmict cjcfc* r;cn. Do you learn to read I Serncn tc tcfcn ? I do learn (it). 3d) Icrnc c^. I learn to write. 3d) (erne fcbret&en. Have you learnt to write ? jbaben te fd)tetbcn Qe(ernt ? I have (learnt it). 3d) (jttbc es gclernt. To know (to be acquainted with) Jtennen* cjcfannt. known. Have you known those men 1 akn @ie jenc Scanner I have not known them. 3d) (jabc fie md)t gefannt* Obs. Instead of the past participle, the following verbs retain the form of the infinitive when preceded by another infinitive : b biirfen*, to be permitted ; fyeifjen*/ to bid ; fyelfen*, to help ; fyorett, to hear ; fontten*, to be able (can) ; fofien*, to let ; Iel)ten, to teach ; (ernen, to learn ; ntogen*, to be allowed (may) ; muflfen*, to be obliged (must) ; fefyen*, to see ; fotlen, to be obliged (shall, ought) ; Gotten, to be willing, to wish (will). To let (to get, to have, to order). 2 a f f c n *. (See Lesson XXXI. where this verb is conjugated in the present tense.) To get or to have mended got TCusbeffcrn (often*. or had mended. a Learners ought now to use in their exercises the adverbs of time, place, and number, mentioned in Lessons XXVII. XXXI. XXXII. and XLII. b It will be useful to remember that the particle J ll does not precede the infinitive joined to one of these verbs. (See Obs. B. Lesson XL.) c Modern authors do not always observe this distinction, but give the pre- ference to the regular form. Thus it is already generally said : 2>cfe babe tfytt lennen geternt (not lernett), I have become acquainted with him; 3d) bftbe tf)nt arbeitcn gcbolfeit (not fcelfett), I have helped him to work; ec f)at mid) ftredjen gele^rt (not lenteit), he has taught me to speak correctly. 114 To get or to have washed got SBafdjen (often*. or had washed. To have made had made. 9fl?ad)cn taffcn*. Are you getting a coat made (do affcn ic ctncn iKec! you order a coat) 1 I am getting one made (I do 2$) (affc ctncn macfycn. order one). I have had one made. 3$ f)a(>c ctncn macf)cn (affcn. Has your brother had his shirt at Sfc 23tut>ct fctn cml> washed ? (affcn ? He has had it washed. (Sr fyat c*> roafcfycn (affcn. The cravat, tag a(stud) ; the neck, tcr a(*. Hastthou sometimes had cravats ^>aft )u mancftmat $aUl\i$)tt au$* mended 1 frcffcrn (affcn ? I have had some mended some- 3>cf) fyabc mandjma( roctcfyc auSfccffcnt times. (affcn. * EXERCISES. 102. Have you drunk wine 1 I have drunk some. Have you drunk much of it] I have drunk but little of it. Hast thou drunk some beer ? I have drunk some ? Has thy brother drunk much good cider? He has not drunk much of it, but enough. When did you drink any wine ? I drank some yesterday and to-day (3d) FjaOc gcjicrn unt beute ivc(cbcn). Has the servant carried the letter ? He has carried it. Where has he carried it to ? He has carried it to your friend. Have you brought us some apples 1 We have brought you some. How many apples have you brought us 1 We have brought you twenty-five of them. When did you bring them ? I brought (babe c}cbrad)t) them this morning. At what o'clock? At a quarter to eight. Have you sent your little boy to the market? I have sent him thither (t>af)tn). When did you send him thither? This evening. Have you written to your father ? I have written to him. Has he answered you ? He has not yet answered me. Have you ever written to the physician ? I have never written to him. Has he sometimes written to you ? He has often written to me. What has he written to you ? He has written to me something. Have your friends ever written to you ? They have often written to me. How many times (Lesson XLII.) have they written to you 1 They have written to me more than thirty times. Have you ever seen my son ? I have never seen him. Has he ever seen you 1 He has often seen me. Hast thou ever seen any Greeks ? I have often seen some. Have you already seen a Syrian 1 I have already seen one. Where have you seen one ? At the theatre. Have you given the book to my brother ? (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XXVIII.) I have given it to him. Have you given money to the merchant"? I have given some to him. How much have you given to him 1 I have given to him fifteen crowns. Have you given gold ribbons to our good 115 neighbours' children"? I have given some to them. Will you give some bread to the poor (man) (Page 34, Obs. A.) 1 I have already given some to him. Wilt thou give me some wine ] I have already given you some. When didst thou give me some ] I gave you some formerly. Wilt thou give me some now ] I cannot give you any (3ct) fann Sl^cn Cctncn). 103. Has the American lent you money 1 He has lent me some. Has he oftenlent you some 1 He has lent me some sometimes. When did he lend you any ? He lent me some formerly. Has the Italian ever lent you money ] He has never lent me any. Is he poor ] He is not poor ; he is richer than you. Will you lend me a crown ] I will lend you two of them. Has your hoy come to mine ] He has come to him. When ] This morning. At what time ] Early. Has he come earlier than I ] At what o'clock did you come ] I came at half past five. He has come earlier than you. Where did your brother go to ? He went to the ball. When did he go thither] He went thither the day before yesterday. Has the ball taken place ] It has taken place. Has it taken place late? It has taken place early. At what o'clock? At midnitrht. Does your brother learn to write ] He does learn it. Does he already know how (Lesson XXXVII.) to read ] He does not know how yet. Have you ever learnt German ] I learnt it formerly, but I do not know it. Has your father ever learnt French] He has never learnt it. Does he learn it at present] He does learn it. Do you know the Englishman whom I know? I do not know the one whom (Lessons XII. and XIV.) you know ; but I know another (Lesson XXI). Does your friend know the same nobleman whom I know] He does not know the same ; but he knows others. Have you known the same men whom I have known (nxtcbc id) gcfcmnt hobc). I have not known the same ; but I have known others. Have you ever had your coat mended] I have sometimes had it mended ] Hast thou already had thy boots mended ] I have not yet had them mended. Has your cousin sometimes had his stockings mended ] He has several times had them mended. Hast thou had thy hat or thy shoe mend- ed ? I have neither had the one nor the other mended. Have you had my cravats or my shirts washed ] I have neither had the one nor the other washed. W 7 hat stockings have you had washed ? I have had the thread stockings washed. Has your father had a table made? He has had one made. Have you had anything made ? I have had nothing made. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 116 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. JFiinf unir merjipte Action. To receive received. S3e!ommen* (erfyatten*, e m p f a n 9 c n *). Ofo. A We have observed (Lesson XLI.) that some verbs do not take the syllable g e in the past participle ; they are, 1st, Those which begin with one of the inseparable unaccented particles : be, emp, ent, er, ge, fcer, ttnber, jer (See Lesson XXV.)? or with one of the following par- ticles, when inseparable : bltrcf), through ; fyirtter, behind ; fiber, over ; unt, around ; itttter, under ; Dolt, full ; tttteber, again. a 2nd, Those derived from foreign languages and ter- minating in tren, or tereru Ex. flubiren/ to study ; past part, flubirt, studied. Rule. All verbs, in general, which have not the prin- cipal accent upon the first syllable, reject the syllable g e in the past participle. How much money have you re- SBtCDtcl dklb fya&cn fie bcfommcn 1 ceived "? I have received three crowns. 3d) fya&c tret Sfjafct ftcEommctu Have you received letters ] abcn ^ ffirtcfc erf)a(ten ? I have received some. 3d) fjabc wclc^c ctfyalten. To promise promised. SSerfprcc^e n* 1> erfproc^cn. Obs. B. Derivative and compound verbs are con- jugated like their primitives : thus the verb fcerfprerfjeri* is conjugated like fprecfyen*, to speak, which is its pri- mitive. (Lessons XXIV. and XXXIV.) Do you promise me to come ? 83crfptecf)cn icr unt) swanjtg groshes. rcfc^cn. a Verbs compounded with these particles are inseparable, when the par- ticles may be considered as adverbs, and separable, when they have the meaning of prepositions. 117 A grosh contains twelve deniers. of)t, I am well ; id) Itcif e tooljl, I know it well. c (ScJ)lec^t is the opposite to gut, and libel the opposite to UJoftf. Ex. (r fdjmbt fcbledjt, he writes badly. (ttt>a8 libel ne^men, to be offended at any- thing. (d)ltmm is employed nearly in the same sense as iibel, thus we say : fd)limnt gemtg, bad enough ; befto [glimmer, so much the worse. 118 I have placed it upon the table. 3$ fyafce cS auf ten Sifcfj $c(ea,t. To lie lain. i c a, c n * eleven. Where lies the book ? 2$e (tccjt ba$ 93ucb 1 It lies upon the table. C ttcgt auf bem Stfcbe. It has lain upon the table. ('6 f>at auf bcm Stjtfje $c(ca,cn. TAere. 2) a r a u f . Does the book lie on the chair ? Ctcgt bag -Sue!) auf bem @tu!j(c ? It does lie there (on it). (5* (te^qt b a r a u f. It has lain there. ($ (jat barauf gclcgen. EXERCISES. 104. Hast thou promised anything? I have promised nothing. Do you give me what you have promised me ? I do give it to you. Have you received much money ? I have received but little. How much have you received of it '\ I have received but one crown. When have you received your letter 1 I have received it to-day. Hast thou received anything] I have received nothing. What have we received ? We have received long (.qrop) letters. Do you promise me to come to the ball ? I do promise you to come to it. Does your ball take place to-night? It does take place. How much money have you given to my son ? I have given him fifteen crowns. Have you not promised him more ] I have given him what I have promised him. Have our enemies received their money ? They have not received it. Have you German money ? I have some. What kind of money have you ? I have crowns, florins, kreuzers, groshes, and deniers. How many groshes are there in a florin 1 ? A florin contains (f)at) sixteen groshes, or sixty kreuzers, or forty-eight good kreuzers. Have you any oboles *? I have a few of them. How many oboles are there in a denier ? A denier contains two oboles. Will you lend your coat to me 1 I will lend it to you; but it is worn out. Are your shoes worn out 1 ? They are not worn out. Will you lend them to my brother ? I will lend them to him. To whom have you lent your hat] I have not lent it ; I have given it to somebody. To whom have you given it ? I have given it to a pauper (fccr TCrmc). 105. Does your little brother already know how to spell 1 ? He does know. Does he spell well 1 He does spell well. How has your little boy spelt 1 ? He has spelt so so. How have your children written their letters 1 They have written them badly. Do you know (Lesson XXXVII.) Spanish 1 I do know it. Does your cousin speak Italian 1 He speaks it well. How do your friends speak 1 ? They do not speak badly (mcfet u6c(). Do they listen to what you tell them "? They do listen to it. How hast thou learnt English 1 I have learnt it in this manner. Have you called me 1 1 have not called you, but your brother. Is he come ? Not yet, 119 (Lesson XL.) Where have you wet (na macftcn) your clothes ? I have wet them in the country. Will you put them to dry (ju trerfncn tccjcn) ? I will put them to dry. Where have you put my hat 1 I have put it upon the table. Hast thou seen my book 1 I have seen it. W T here is it ] It lies upon your brother's trunk. Does my handkerchief lie upon the chair 1 ? It does lie upon it. When have you been in the country 1 I have been there the day before yesterday. Have you found your father there 1 I have found him there. What has he said ] He has said nothing. What have you been doing in the country ? I have been doing nothing there FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. 0*d)0 mt& trierjigste Action. Does your father wish to give SBtfl 3fyr SSatcr mit ctn?a$ $u tfyun me anything to do ? gcfocn ? He does wish to give thee some- Gt nrill it ctroaS $u tfyim Qcfcen. thing to do. Obs. > a j it , to it, relates sometimes to an infini- tive, as: Have you a mind to work ? nftcn (Ste Cuff gu arfccttcn ? I have no mind to it. 3cf) fyaOc fatne 2uft tqu. Is thy brother gone to the 3ft i)ctn &3riit>ei: ouf* Ccwb country 1 c\cn ? He is gone thither. (Stftft t)ol)in gcgnngcn. Hast thou a mind to go thither? ^>aft 5)u Suft fcafytn ^u C|cf}cn ? I have a mind to it. 3d) r;abe Cufl ba^iu How old are you 1 SSte a(t finb ( I am twelve years old. 3d) bin ^o(f 3af)r a a(t. How old is your brother 1 SOBic ci(t i|l 3fjr 23rut)cc ? He is thirteen years old. (5t iffc trct^c^n 3nfjr a(t Almost (nearly). JBctnafje or faft. About. U n 9 c f a f) r. Hardly. ^ a u ni . He is almost fourteen years old. (Sr ift faft mcr$cFm Saljr atf. I am about fifteen years old. 3cr) bin uncjcftff;t . He is almost sixteen years old. <5r ift t'Ctnabe fccfeef)n 3ar)r atf. Your are hardly seventeen years ic fint) faum (ictcn^cljn 3^r olt old. Here custom requires the singular number. 120 Not quite. 0Z t d) t $ a n 3. I am not quite eighteen years 3d) 6tn md)t $an$ ad)t$ef)n old. oft. Art thoa older than thy brother 1 SBtft >it filter al$ )ein JBruber ? I am younger than he. 3d) bin (linger fll$ er. To understand understood. SSerftefjen* t Do you understand me 1 SSerftefjen &e mid) 1 I do understand you. 3d) ttcrfiefyc a6en te ben 90?ann I have understood him. 3d) fycifce ifyn Dcrftanben. 1 hear you, but I do not under- 3d) fybre ie, flfcer id) flerftcfje ie stand you. nid)t. The noise, ber Carnt ; - The noise (roaring) of the wind, ba oufcn bc^ SDSinbe^ ; The wind, ber SStnb. Do you hear the roaring of the oren @tc bae aufen be$ 2Bin< wind ? be^ ? I do hear it. 3d) f)6'rc c$. To bark. S5cllcn. The barking, bag 23cltcn. Have you heard the barking of afcen c r ( o r c n. To beat beaten. < d) I a g c n * C} e f d) I a g c n. Thou beatest,he beats. >u fdjta'gft, er fcfttd'gt. To read read (past part.) . C e f C n * 9 c ( c f c n. To remain remained. 23 ( c 1 6 c n* 3 e b I i e C n (takes fcin for its auxiliary). To take taken. 9Z e f) m c n * g e n o m m c tu To know known. SOS t f f e n * Q c n) u p t. Have you lost anything ? akn (Sie ctroag Dcrforen ? 1 have lost nothing. 3d) (jabc ntd)t^ certorcn. To Zo^e (at play) Zos*. SSerfptctcn* Derfpielt. How much has your brother lost? SOStcmcl ^at 3f)r SBruber erfpictt? He has lost about a crown. (5r ^at uncjefafyr ctncn Skater er^ fptett. Who has beaten the dog 1 Ber fyat ben ^unb .qefcbta^en ? No one has beaten it. 9? it* numb hat tf)n gefd)(agett, How many books has j^our cousin SOStcind 93uc^cr ^ot 3^ letter fd&on already read 1 Qetefen ? 121 He has already read five of them, (5r fjat turcn fcfcen fiinf $cfcfcn, unb and at present he is reading jct ticfl cr fcas fcd)ftc. the sixth. Has the man taken anything- f at tcr 9]?ann Sfywn ctroaS cjcs from you ? ncinmcn ? He has taken nothing from me. f (T (jat nut ntcbtS gcnommcn. Do you know as much as this aBtfjVn <2ic fo wet rcic fctcfct: man ? sjjiann ? I do not know as much as he. Sol) nxift nicl)t fc wcl tvie cr. Have you known that? &a&cn Sic tag gcnnijjt ? I have not known it. 3d) babe c$ md)t genwpt. Where have our friends re- 2Bo ftnt) unjctc Jwun&e QcbUcbcn ? mailed ? They have remained at home. (Sic ftnb $u aufc gcOttcbcn. EXERCISES. 106, Have you time to write a letter] I have time to write one. Will you lend a hook to my brother 1 I have lent one to him already. Will you lend him one more ? I will lend him two more. Have you given anything to the poor 1 I have given them money. How much money has my cousin given you 1 He has given me only a little ; he has given me only two crowns. How old is your brother 1 ? He is twenty years old. Are you as old as he? I am not so old. How old are you? I am hardly eighteen years old. How old art thou ? I am about twelve years old. Am I younger than you ? I do not know. How old is our neighbour ? He is not quite thirty years old. Are our friends as young as we ? They are older than we. How old are they ? The one is nineteen and the other twenty years old. Is your father-as old as mine ? He is older than yours ? Have you read my book ? I have not quite read it yet. Has your friend finished his book ? He has almost finished it. Do you understand me ? I do understand you. Does the Englishman understand us ? He does understand us. Do you understand what we are telling you ? We do understand it. Dost thou understand German? I do not understand it yet, but I am learning it. Do we understand the English ? We do not understand them. Do the Germans understand us ? They do understand us. Do we understand them ? We hardly understand them. Do you hear any noise ? I hear nothing. Have you heard the roaring of the wind ? I have heard it. What do you hear? I hear the barking of the dogs. Whose dog is this ? It is the dog of the Scotchman. 107. Have you lost your stick ? I have not lost it. Has your ser- vant lost my note ? He has lost it. Have you gone to the ball ? No, I have not gone to it. Where have you remained ? I have remained at home. Has your father lost (at play) as much money as I ? He'nas lost more of it than you ? How much have I lost ? 6 122 You have hardly lost a crown. Where has thy brother re- mained 1 He has remained at home. Have your friends re- mained in the country! They have remained there. Do you know as much as the English physician? I do not know as much as he. Does the French physician know as much as you ? He knows more than I. Does any one know more than the French physicians? No one knows more than they. Have your brothers read my books ? They have not quite read them. How many of them have they read ? They have hardly read two of them. Has the son of my gardener taken anything from you ? He has taken my books from me. What hast thou taken from him ? I have taken nothing from him. Has he taken money from yea 1 ? He has taken some from me. How much money has he taken from yon ] He tas taken from me almost two crowns. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTY.SEVENTH LESSON. SUbett nnb faction. To lite bitten* SBcipcn gcfciffen. Why ? SB a t u m ? Because. 2B c 1 1. DC/ 3 The verb of the subject or nominative, (in compound tenses, the auxiliary) is placed at the end of the phrase, when this begins with a conjunction or a conjunctive word, such as a relative pronoun or a relative adverb. The conjunctions which do not re- quire the verb to be placed at the end, will be given hereafter. Why do you heat the dog ? SBarum fd)fagcn te ben I beat it, because it has bitten 3d) fd)la$c tf)n, roctt ct mid) gc&tflcn me. fjat. Do you see the man who is in (d)en te ben sjjfonn/ wcldjct (bet) the garden 1 tin atten ift ? I do see him. 3d) fefye t fin- Do you know the man who has ^cnncn @tc ben 9)?cmn, bcr (nocld)Ct) lent me the book ? nut baS S3ud) gclicfjcn fynt ? I do not know him. 3d) Cennc tfnt ntc^t. Do you read the book, which I Ccfcn te ba^ 93nd)/ tvctd)C5 tc^ 3b- have lent you ] ncn cjcltc^n fy&t 1 I do read it. 3d) lefe eg. . When the verb, which a conjunctive word causes to be placed at the end of the phrase, is com- 123 pounded with a separable particle, this is not detached from it. Ex. I breakfast before I go out. 3d) friiljftudfc, cf)C id) auSgcfjc. Does the tailor show you the Sctcjt Sbncn K'r (gcbncttcr ten 9?Ccf, coat, which he is mending? nx'(d)cn cr au0c(fcrt? To wait. 80S a r t c n. To expect. ( r n? a r t c ru* , To wait for some one or for ?(uf (Stncn et>ct ctroaS roartcn. something". To expect some one or some- (Sincn efcct ettvaS crrcartcn. thing. Do you wait for my brother? Smarten i 9 f c i n *. b How much do you owe me 1 SOStcwet finb d)tttijrtg ; the pound, ta the livre (a coin), t>cr To return (to come back) re- Surucffonimcn* turned. I m men. At what o'clock do you return Urn nncinct Mr !cmmcn ie tcn from the market? fccm 93Zarftc ^urtic! ? I return from it at twelve o'clock. 3d) fcmmc urn srco'lf tlfyr ocn ta su^ riic!. From there, thence (from it). 2> C n t) a. Does the servant return early jtommt tcr JScttcntc fru5 t?cn ba $1* thence? rue!? He returns thence at ten o'clock Cr fcmmt win jefjn it^r 93?crcjcn in the morning. cn to $urtirf. At nine o'clock in the morning, f Urn ncun Uf)t 9^crC|cn^. At eleven o'clock at night. f Urn ctf lU)r 2((>cnt)^. a 53itrtctt auf, with the accusative case, is used, when the person or thing spoken of is present, and entfarfeil, when it is not. b ecbulbtfl fetn*, to owe, is to be considered as a compound verb, of which the separable particle is placed at the end, fdjubig, due, owing, indebted, hav- ing here the force of the separable particle. 124 How long ? During, for. How long there ? A minute. An hour. A day. A year. A month. The summer, The winter, SStc _ . B a f) r c n t) (a preposition which governs the genitive case). has he remained SBtc lancje ift ct fca gebUeben ? During the summer. < How long have you spoken with the man ] I have spoken with him for three hours. How long has your brother re- mained in the country T He has rernained there a month. Have you remained long with my father 1 1 have remained with him for an hour. Long. (Sine (Sine < (Stncn Sao,. in Sfafyr (a neuter substantive, taking c in the plur. without beiug softened). (Stncn 9)ionat. tcr omnicr. tec SBintcr. 3Baf)rcnt> t>c^ (Scmmcr^. ^)cn cmmcr iibcr. 3)en Scunner l)in^urc!). 9Stc lange f)abcn (Sic mit tcm 9)?an* nc gcfprcd)cn ? Scl) fyabc t>rci Stunbcn mit i()m t* fprcd)cn. SEic tancjc ift 3fc 95rubcr auf tcm (Sr ift ctncn (gic lanc^c tct mctncm bin cine bticbcn. tancj bet ifjm gc* EXERCISES. 108. Why do you love that man 1 I love him, because he is good. Why does your neighbour beat his dog "? Because it has bitten his little boy. Why does our father love me 1 He loves you, be- cause you are good. Do your friends love us 1 ? They love us, be- cause we are good. Why do you bring me wine? I bring you some, because you are thirsty. Why does the hatter drink 1 He drinks, because he is thirsty. Do you see the sailor who is in (auf) the ship 1 I do not see the one who is in (auf) the ship, but c The accusative case answers to the question line lange ? how long? and other similar questions, relative to measure, weight, quantity, &c.. as rote Icing? how long? tine fdjtuet? how heavy? WtWteiV how much? mie then* et? at what price? We nmt? how far? we gvojj? of what size? We alt? how old ? d Sfttnitte, minute, (Shmbe, hour, are two nouns of the feminine gender; they add tt in al) the cases of the plural, without softening the radical vow- els. We can also say: eitte <5tlltti?e lang during an hour; ehl otft/v Uiiij, during a year. 125 the one who is in (auf) the square. Do you read the books which my father has given you 1 I do read them. Do you know the Italians whom we know 1 We do not know those whom you know, but we know others (anfciTe). Do you buy the horse which we have seenl I do not buy that which we have seen, but another (cm entered). Do you seek what you have lost] I do seek it. Do you find the man whom you have looked for? I do not find him. Does the butcher kill the ox which he has bought in (auf with the dat.) the market ? He does kill it. Do our cooks kill the chickens which they have bought 1 They do kill them. Does the hatter mend the hat which I have sent him 1 He does mend it. Does the shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him 1 He does not mend them, because they are worn out. Does your coat lie upon the chair 1 It does lie upon it. Does it lie upon the chair upon which 1 placed it? No, it lies upon another. Where is my hat ? It is in the room in which (ivcrin or in tvold)cm) you have been. Do you wait for any one 1 I wait for no one. Do you wait for the man whom I have seen this morning'? I do wait for him. Art thou waiting for thy book 1 I am waiting for it. Do you expect your father this evening 1 ? I do expect him. At what o'clock has he gone to the theatre 1 He has gone thither at seven o'clock. At what o'clock does he return from there 1 He returns from there at eleven o'clock. Has your bailiff returned from the market ? He has not yet returned from it. At what o'clock has your brother returned from the country? He has returned from thence at ten o'clock in the evening. 109. At what o'clock hast thou come back from thy friend 1 I have come back from him at eleven o'clock in the morning. Hast thou remained long wdth him ? I have remained with him about an hour. How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? I intend to remain there a few minutes. How long has the Englishman remained with you ? He has remained with me for two hours. Do you intend to remain long in the country 1 I intend to remain there during the summer. How long have your brothers remained in town (in t>ct 3tat>t) 1 They have remained there during the winter. How much do I owe you 1 You do not owe me much. How much do you owe your tailor ] I only owe him fifty crowns. How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ] I owe him already seventy crowns. Do I owe you anything ? You owe me nothing. How much does the Frenchman owe you 1 He owes me more than you. Do the English owe you as much as the Spaniards "? Not quite so much. Do I owe you as much as my brother ? You owe me more than he. Do our friends owe you as much as we 1 You owe me less than they. Why do you give money to the mer- chant ] I give him some, because he has sold me handkerchiefs. Why do you not drink ? I do not drink, because I am not thirsty. Why do you pick up this ribbon 1 I pick it up, because 126 I want it. Why do you lend money to this man] I lend him some, hecause he wants some. Why does your brother study 1 He studies, because he wished to learn German ((ernen n)i(l). Art thou thirsty ] I am not thirsty, because I have drunk. Has your cousin drunk already? Not yet, he is not yet thirsty. Does the servant show you the room which he sweeps ] He does not show me that which he sweeps now, but that which he has swept yester- day. Do you breakfast before you go out ] I go out before I breakfast. What does your shoemaker do before he sweeps his room ]-He mends my boots and my shoes before he sweeps it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. <3Ul}t itnir merest* lection. To live, to dwell, to reside, to SOS abide, to lodge. Where do you live ? Bo reefyncn (Sic? I live in William-street, number 3cf) rcefyne in bet 4 twenty-five. Summer fitnf unfr 1 Where has your brother lived 1 ? SBo fjat tf)t SBrutcr g He has lived in Frederic-street, (t rmt in t>ct grtebn^sftrape, number one hundred and fifty. met fyunfccrt unt) fiinfttg Dost thou live at thy cousin's 2Bel)nft )u bet >ctnew letter house 1 I do not live at his, but at my 3$ rcoljnc md)t fcet iljm/ fonbcrn bci father's house. mctncm SScitcr. Does your friend still live where 2Bcl)iU 3l)r grcunt) nod) (ba) r it>o I have lived 1 id) c^civc^nt fjabc ? He lives no longer where you 6r wofjnt ntcl)t mcljr (ba) x tt?o ie have lived ; he lives at present gcrooljnt f)at>cn ; cr rvcljnt jcgt auf in the great square. bcm grcpcn The street. jDtc (Strapc (a noun of the femi- nine gender). The number. JDtc Summer (a noun of the femi- nine gender). To brush. 25 it r ft en. Have you brushed my coat ] nOcn (te mctncn 9?ccf gc6itrftct 1 I have brushed it. 3d) ftabc tf;n gcburftct. long? 2Btc tan^c? S3 i & * In German, the conjunction unb, is used to add a number less than a hundred. 127 Till noon. Till twelve o'clock. Till to-morrow. S3i$ mermen. Till the day after to-morrow. 25t uOetmero/n. Till Sunday. - <8i$ (genntag. Till Monday. SBiS sflttntao,. Till this evening. J8U fccutc 2(6ent>. Till evening. S3i* auf ten Until morning. 3St an ben Until the next day. 23t$ gum anbecn Until this day. S3i3 auf fctcfen Until this moment. SBtS auf fcicfcn Till now hitherto. SBiS iet &i$f)Cr. To this place, hither, thus far, as 23U fjtcrfyct (an adverb of place)* far as here. To that place, thither, so far, as 23i$ bafyitt (an adverb of place). far as there. Obs. The days of the week are all of the mascu- line gender, except tt'e 9Rttttt)ed)e, Wednesday, which some authors use as feminine. Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, 3)onncrftag ; Friday, Saturday, Then. 2) a n n (a I t> a n n). Till I return (till my return). 95t$ ic() gurucffcmmc. Till my brother returns (till my S3t$ mctn 23tut>ct surudffcmmt. brother's return). Till four o'clock in the morning. 2St3 trier ll^c g^orgen^. Till midnight (till twelve o'clock 23U Sp^tttetna^t (a noun of the at night). feminine gender). How long did you remain with 2Bie (angc jm> tc fcci mcincm my father ? 2Sater gcKicOcn ? I remained with him till eleven Sd) tun bt c(f Uf)t: 2tbcnt^ Oct ir)iu o'clock at night. gcbltcbcn. One-) the people, they or any one. $31 an (indefinite pronoun always singular). Have they brought my shoes ? cit man mctnc (Sc^ufic ^ct)racf)t ? They have not brought them yet. 9)?an fyat fie nccl) ntcht What have they said 1 SBaS r)ot man Qef They have said nothing. 9J?an bat ntd)t^ g What have they done ? 9Sab bat man ^c They have done nothing. 932an (jat ntd)t^ 128 To be willing (to wish), been 85$ H f n *, $ C R> H t willing (wished). Has he been willing to go for at cr ben 2Cr$t fjckn roetlctt ? (not the physician ? gciveUt. See Obs. Less. XLIV.) He has not been willing to go <5r fyat i()n ntcfyt fyelcn rcellcn. for him. Has he wished to go out this at cr bicfcn Sflergcn attorn morning ? roellcn ? He has not wished to go out, Gr fyat ntcl)t au$cljcn roellcn. Have they been willing to do it I jjbat man eg tf)im wcUen ? They have not been willing to 93fan Ijat c$ md)t tfjun n?cltcn do it. They have not been willing to 9)?cm fyat mcfytS tr)un rooftctt. do any thing. To be able (cari),leen able & on UC n* -Cj c I onn t (cow/J). Have they been able to find the $at wan tic 93iicber flnbcn fonncn ? books ? (not gcfcnnt. See Less. XLIV.) They have not been able to find SBtan (jot fie nufyt jtntcn fonnen. them. Has the tailor been willing to $at fccr ^cfcncibcr nictncn S'Jcc! au^ mend my coat ] beffern tucllcn ? He has not been willing to mend (Sr ()at t^n nic^t au^ffcrn it. Something (or anything) new. (ttt>a$ What do they say t new 1 2Sa5 fagt man They say nothing ' new. 9)ian fagt My new coat. g^ctn neuc^ .Sfcit). My new friend. SJictn ncucr S rcl | n t His new clothes. cine ncucn ^leit>et. EXERCISES. 110. Where do you live! I live in the large (in bet cjropcn) street. Where does your father live 1 He lives at his friend's house. Where do your brothers live 1 They live in the large street, number a hundred and twenty. Dost thou live at thy cousin's T 1 do live at his house. Do you still live where you did live (gercefynt fjabcn) 1 1 live there still. Does your friend still live where he did live? He no longer lives where he did live. Where does he live at present ? He lives in William-street, number a hundred and fifteen Where is your brother 1 He is in the garden. Where is your cousin one to ? He is gone into the garden. Did you go to the play yesterday] I did go thither. Have you seen my friend 1 I have seen him. When did you see him ] I saw (fyafrc gcfcfjcn) him this morning. Where has he gone to 1 I do not know 129 Lesson XLIII.). Has the servant brushed my clothes 1 He has brushed them. Has he swept my room ? He has swept it How long 1 did he remain here ? Till noon. How long- have you been writing? I have been writing until midnight. How long did I work] You worked until four o'clock in the morning. How long did my brother remain with you 1 He remained with me until evening. How long hastthou been working 1 I have been working till now. Hast thou still long to write ? I have to write till the day after to-morrow. Has the physician still long to work ? He has to work till to-morrow. Must I remain long here? You must remain here till Sunday. Must my brother remain long with you ? He must remain with us till Monday. How long must I work? You must work till the day after to-morrow. Have you still long to speak 1 I have still an hour to speak. Did you speak long 1 I spoke (fyabc cjcfiTCcbcn) till the next day. Have you remained long in my room ? I have remained in it till this moment. Have you still long to live in this house? I have still long to live in it (bavin). How long have you still to live in it? Till Sunday. 111. Does your friend still live with you 1 He lives with me no longer. How long has he lived with you ? He has lived with me only a year. How long did you remain at the ball ? I remained there till midnight. How long have you remained in the carriage ? I have remained an hour in it. Have you remained in the garden till now ? I have remained there (fcarin) till now. Has the captain come as far as here? He has come as far as here. How far has the merchant come ? He has come as far as the end of the small road. Has the Turk come as far as the end of the forest ? He has come as far as there. What do you do in the morning? I read. And what do you do then ? I breakfast and work. Do you breakfast before you read ? No, Sir, I read before I breakfast. Dost thou play instead of working (Lesson XXXVI. )? I work instead of playing. Does thy brother go to the play instead of going into the garden? He does not go to the play. What do you do in the evening ? I work. What hast thou done this evening ? I have brushed your clothes and have gone to the theatre. Didst thou remain long at the theatre ? I remained there but a few minutes. Are you willing to wait here ? How long must I wait ? You must wait till my father returns. Has anybody come ? Somebody has come. What have they (man) wanted (gcroollt) ? They (9)?an) have wanted to speak to you. Have they not been willing to wait? They have not been willing to wait. What do you say to that man ? I tell him to wait. Have you waited for me long? I have waited for you an hour. Have you been able to read my letter? I have been able to read it. Have you understood it ? I have understood it. Have you shown it to any one? I have shown it to no one. Have they brought my clothes V They have not brought them yet. Have they swept my room and brushed my clothes ? 6* 130 They have done both (Octbcs). What have they said 1 They have said nothing. What have they done 1 They have done nothing. Has your little brother been spelling 1 He has not been willing to spell. Has the merchant's boy been willing to work ] He has not been willing. What has he been willing to do 1 He has not been willing to do anything. 112. t Has the shoemaker been able to mend my boots 1 He has not been able to mend them. Why has he not been able to mend them "? Because he has had no time. Have they (man) been able to find my gold huttons ? They have not been able to find them. Why has the tailor not mended my coat 1 Because he has no good thread. Why have you beaten the dog 1 Because it has bitten me. Why do you not drink ? Because 1 am not thirsty. What have they wished to say ] They have not wished to say anything. What do they (man) say new in the market? They say nothing new there. Have they (man) wished to kill a man ] They have not wished to kill any one. Have they said any thing new ? They have said nothing new. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FORTY.NINTH LESSON. Jfrmt n& merest* faction. To steal stolen. u fticl)lfr, cr ftteljlt. To steal something from some f 3cnwnt)cm ctivaS ftcl;(cn*. one. Have they stolen your hat from f frat man Sfynen Sfyrcn ut gcs you "? ' frozen ? They have stolen it from me. f 9)Jan fyat tfyn nur qcflehtcn. Has the man stolen the book f &. The word, tag 2&ert ; the speech, ta$ 2ett (plur. SBorte).* How is this word written? SBtc fcfymOt man fciefeS SOBort ? It is written thus. 93Jan fdjrctfet c^ fc. To ctpc J5ut. Do you dye your coat blue ? farOcn @ic Sftrcn $Kccf Mail ? I dye it green. Scf) fa'r&c i^n gritn. What colour will you dye your SDSie molten @ic 3^ Sud^ fd'rbcn ? cloth ? 1 will dye it blue. %< roill c Wau fatten. The dyer, tcr garbcr. To ^-e/ c?yecr. t$ 2ent>en. 2MS ncd) Wi$ nod) $ 23i6 nad) Stoltcn. )cutfd)tant> ; (Spamen ; Reliant)* Rule. The names of countries, towns, and villages, belong to the neuter gender, and stand without the article. They are indeclinable, except in the genitive, which receives $ when the pronunciation admits it. If the ending of the name does not admit the letter 3, as in sparig, Paris, the preposition Don/ of, is used. Ex. bte ttttwfyner Don ^3ari^, the inhabitants of Paris. Some proper names of countries are of the feminine gender. These, like all other feminine nouns, are in- variable in the singular, and form their case by means of the definite article, viz. 1, Names of countries which terminate in ei. Ex. tie urfei, Turkey ; and 2, the following : bte Stvimm, Crimea ; bte ?aujTg, Lusatia ; bt'e 9DJarf, March ; tie SMbcut, Moldavia ; bt'e $faf j, Palatinate ; bfe Srf)tt>et$, Switzerland. Ex. bte rf)tt>etj, Switzerland ; ber @d)tt)eij, of Switzerland ; ber @cf)tt>etj, to Switzerland ; bie ofytt)ei$, Switzerland. To travel. Do you travel to Paris ? Do you go to Paris ] I do travel (or go) thither. Is he gone to England 1 He is gone thither. How far has he travelled 7 He has travelled as far America. 9? c t f c ti (is used with the auxi- liary fctn). 9?ctfcn ( ct)cn 'Bit nacl S'cb rctfc (id) gc()c) Sft cr nad) ngtanb G:r i)l t>abtn gcrctpt. iBt^ n>obtn tft cr gcrcipt 1 as (r tft Oi^ nact) 2(incri!a cjcreipt. EXERCISES. 113. Have they (man) stolen anything from you 1 They have stolen all the good wine from me. Have they stolen anything from your father T They have stolen all his good books from him. Dost thou steal anything 1 I steal nothing. Hast thou ever stolen 133 anything] I have never stolen anything (me ctroaS). Have they stolen your apples from you 1 They have stolen them from me. \Vhat have they stolen from me ] They have stolen from you all the good books. When did they steal the carriage from you] They stole (^ion fycit- gcftefytcn) it from me the day before yesterday. Have they ever stolen anything from us 1 They have never stolen anything from us. Has the carpenter drunk all the wine ] He has drunk it. Has your little boy torn all his books ] He has torn them all. Why has he torn them ] Because he does not wish to study. How much have you lost (at play) ] I have lost all my money. Do you knoAV where my father is 1 I do not know. Have you not seen my book 1 I have not seen it. Do you know how this word is written] It is written thus. Do you dye anything] I dye my hat. What colour do you dye it ] I dye it black. What colour do you dye your clothes] We dye them yellow. 114. Do you get your trunk dyed ] I get it dyed. What colour do you get it dyed ] I get it dyed green. What colour dost thou get thy thread stockings dyed ] I get them dyed white. Does your cousin get his handkerchief dyed ] He does get it dyed. Does he get it dyed red ] He gets it dyed grey. What colour have your friends got their coats dyed ] They have got them dyed green. W T hat colour have the Italians had their carriages dyed ] They have had them dyed blue. What hat has the nobleman ] He has two hats, a white one and a black one. Have I a hat ] You have several. Has your dyer already dyed your cravat ] He has dyed it. What colour has he dyed it] He has dyed it yellow. Do you travel sometimes ] I travel often. Where do you intend to go to (f)tn$urctfcn) this summer] I intend to go to Germany. Do you not go to Italy ? I do go thither. Hast thou sometimes travelled ? I have never travelled. Have your friends the intention to go to Holland ] They have the intention to go thither. When do they intend to depart ] They intend to depart the day after to morrow. Has your brother already gone to Spain ] He has not yet gone thither. Have you travelled in Spain ] I have travelled there. When do you depart? I depart to-morrow. At what o'clock ? At five o'clock in the morning. Have you worn out all your boots ] I have worn them all out. What have the Turks done ? They have burnt all our good ships. Have you finished all your letters ? I have finished them all. How far have you travelled ] I have travelled as far as Germany. Has he travelled as far as Italy ] He has travelled as far as America, How far have the Spaniards gone ] They have gone as far as London. How far has this poor man come ] He has come as far as here. Has he come as far as your house 1 He has come as far as my father's. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 134 FIFTIETH LESSON. jTunf^igsle Cettiott. (motion). Above. Below. )ben (rest). Uttten (rest). $ [nttauf ) fyerauf 5 t)muttte 1 l)eruttte This side. That side. 2>enfeit (rest). Hithei I)icr t)0tt Thithe (motion). Obs. A. The particles f)et and Ijitt, having no corres- ponding words in English, must be carefully distin- guished from each other. 5per expresses motion to- wards the person who speaks, as : fyerauf, up ; fyerimter or fyerab, down ; fyerau^, out ; fyeriiber, hither, to this side, jput expresses motion from the person who speaks towards another place, as : fytttcwf, up ; fytttlMter or I)tna6, down ; t)tncw3, out ; fymiiber, thither, to the opposite side. If, for instance, I wish to tell any one who is on a mountain to come down, I must say : t cm* men Sie fyerunter, come down (to where I am). He might answer me, fomnten te fyeraitf, come up. I might say to him, id) fomme nicfyt fytncwf, I am not coming up ; and he might answer me, imb id) nicfyt Ijinimter, and I am not coming down. According to this we must say : fontmen (St'e Cerent, come in ; gefyen @te ^mau^, go out ; fafyren @e fyiniiber, drive to the opposite side ; fprittgen @te t)tnetn, jump in (i. e. in ben Iu$, into the river) ; but should the per- son speaking be already in the water, he would say ; fprtngen @ie fyeretm The mountain, the river, the present, tcr tcr cfct)cn! (plur. e a ). Obs. B. The adverbs bte^feit^, jenfett^, ought to be carefully distinguished from the prepositions, bte^feit, a Neuter words, formed of a verb and the prefix gc, add e to all the cases plural, and do not soften the radical vowel. 135 jenfett* The latter are always followed by the genitive, whilst the others never govern a case, Ex. fcie^fett fce$ fufife$, on this side of the river ; jenfeit teg 33erge3, on the other side of the mountain. To go up the mountain. )cn 23crg Ijtnauf gcfyen Where is your brother gone to! Bo ift 3fa SSrufccr bin He is gone up the mountain. (5r ift ten 23crg Ijincwf To give back again (to restore). SBteberge(( Thou givest back again. )u gitft roiebcr, He gives back again. (5r gibt tvtebcr. Given back again. S&tcbcrgcgcfrcn* Does he restore you your book ? it>t cr 30ncn He does restore it to me. (r gibt c^ mir wtcbcr. Has he given you your stick at cr Sfyncn Sftnn ~ back again ? qcbcn ? He has given it me back again. (Sr f)ot ifyn mir To begin, to commence. TCnfancjen*, fcccjtnncn*. Begun, commenced. ^ngcfangcn, t>cgcnncn. Have you already commenced aben W S^cn ffirtcf fcl)Cn QtigC- your letter] fangcn ? Not yet. 97od) ntd)t. I have not yet commenced it. ScI) &a6e i^n nccl) ntd)t gen. Have you received a present 1 a6cn te cin cfcljcnf men ? I have received several. 3d) feaOe crfd)tebcne 6cfommcn. From whom have you received $on rocm t?aOcn @tc cfd)cn presents "? men ? Whence ? Where from ? 2B f) e r ? Ow^ o/. 2C u g (governs the dative). Where do you come from ? SODo Fommcn ic r;cr ? C. The adverb tt>of)cr may be separated into two parts (as tt>oJ)Ut, Lesson XXXYIL), the first of which is put at the beginning, and the second at the end of the phrase. If the phrase ends with a participle past, or an infinitive, her is placed before it ; but it precedes the particle jit of the infinitive. I come from (out of) the garden. 3d) fcmmc cw$ bcm artcn. Where has he come from 1 2Bc|)cr ift cr gcfommen ? He has come from the theatre. n$ rocrtf) ? That is not worth much. )$ ift nicbt met nxttf). That is not worth anything. 2)a if! nid)t$ rocrtlj. To fo footer. 93 c f f c t fcin* (mcfyr rccrtfj fcin ). Ami not as good as my brother? 23in id) nicfyt fo gut rcic nicin 23cus You are better than h, I am not as good as you. Set) bin nid)t fo gut EXERCISES. 115. Do you call me ? I do call you. Where are you ? I am on (cwf with the dative) the mountain ; are you coming up ? I am not coming up. Where are you? I am at the foot (am 5 ll f tne mountain ; will you come down ? I cannot come down. Why can you not come down ] Because I have sore feet. W T here does your cousin live ] He lives on this side of the river. Where is the mountain 1 It is on that side of the river. Where stands the house of our friend ? It stands on that side of the mountain. Is the garden of your friend on this or that side of the wood 1 It is on that side (jcnfctt?). Is our storehouse not on that side of the road 1 It is on this side (ticft*!t6). Where have you been this morning ? I have been on (Lesson XXX.) the great mountain. How many times have you gone up the mountain ] 1 have gone up (binauf Qccjancjcn) three times. Is our father below or above 1 He is above. Have the neighbour's boys given you your books back again 1 They have given them to me back again. When did they give them back again to you ] They gave (Ijciben nMi'tonjcgeben) them back again to me yesterday. To whom have you given your stick 1 I have given it to the nobleman. To whom have the noblemen given their gloves 1 They have given them to Englishmen. To which Englishmen have they given them ] To those (Lesson XIV.) whom you have seen this morning at my house. To which people do you give money ] I give some to those to whom (Lesson XIV) you give some. Do you give any one money ] I give some to those who want any. To which children does your father give cakes 1 He gives some to those who are good, 137 116. Have you received presents ? I have received some. What presents have you received 1 I have received fine presents. Has your little brother received a present 1 He has received several. From whom has he received any ? He has received some from my father and from yours. Do you come out of the garden ? I do not come out of the garden, but out of the house.- Where are you going to ? I am going into the garden. Whence comes the Irishman ? He comes from the garden. Does he come from the same garden from which (au$ rudofycm) you come] He does not come from the same. From which garden does he come ? He comes from that of our old friend. Whence comes your boy ? He comes from the play. How much is that carriage worth? It is worth five hundred crowns. Is this book worth as much as that 1 It is worth more. How much is my horse worth ? It is worth as much as that of your friend. Are your horses worth as much as those of the French ? They are not worth so much. How much is that knife worth ? It is worth nothing. Is your servant as good as mine 1 He is better than yours. Are you as good as your brother? He is better than I. Art thou as good as thy cousin ] I am as good as he. Are we as good as our neighbours ? We are better than they. Is your umbrella as good as mine ? It is not w r orth so much. Why is it not worth so much as mine? Because it is not so fine as yours. Do you wish to sell your horse ] I do wish to sell it. How much is it worth ] It is worth two hundred florins.- Do you wish to buy it 1 I have bought one already. Does your father intend to buy a horse 1 He does intend to buy one, but not yours. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. in ttnfc fiUtfftjste Section. That (conjunction). 2) a (See Rule of Syntax, Les- son XL VII.). What do you say 1 8a$ fciojcn Sic 1 I say that you have my book. 3d) fagc, fcoQ Sic nicin 23ud) fycifren. I tell you that I have it not. 3d) fagc 3fyncn, &ojj id) c$ ntd>t babe. Have you not had it ? obcn Sic c ntdjt gcljafct ? I have had it, but I have it no 3d) bobc Cs gcfjobt/ abet id) fyctfcc tf longer. md)t mcfjr. No more. 9H d) t m c f) r. Where have you placed it T o fjo&cn Sic cr> fjtn.qctt'gt ? I have placed it on the table. 3d) Ijobc c$ ouf t>cn Stfd) n/lecm It is (lies) on it. (5$ (tco,t fcorouf. 138 Some, a little. (5 1 tt> a 6 (e i n n? e n i a,). Can you give me some water ? .ftcnncn Sic nut etn?a SOSaffet kn ? I can give you some. 3d) frinn 3fynen tt>ctd)e cjcfcen. jlfu j*. 931 u \ f e n, past part. Cj e m u p t . Necessary (adjective). 9? o 1 1) i Q. To #e necessary. 5)2 6 1 f) 1 0, fein*. S0?up man auf ben 9War!t cjcfyen ? Is it necessary to go to the < 3ft c$ notfyto, auf ben SDlarft su ges market? f ^en? It I. necessary to gothithe, {^3^^^". What must one do in order to Ba$ mup man t^un/ urn beutfc^ 5U learn German ? (crnen ? One must study much. 9}lan mup met ftubtrcn. What must he do ? SBa^ mup cr tfjun ? He must go for a book. (Sr mup ctn SSud) 1 What must I do 1 805a$ mup ic^ fyttft! etia To oe sitting, been sitting. i ^ e n * (takes r)afocn for its auxiliary), gcfcff en. You must sit still. Sic miiffcn jlitt ft^cn. Have you been obliged to work |>a6en @te met arbcttcn muffen ( Obs. much to learn German? Lesson XLIV.), um beutfd) jtt terncn ? I have been obliged to work 3d) fyafcc tttel artciten muffen. much. The competency, the subsistence, >a$ 2Cu$!ommen. the livelihood. To have wherewithal to live. (Sein TCllSfommen ^aben*. Has he wherewithal to live ? ^at cr fein TdiSfommen ? He has. (5r F)at c^. What must I buy T Ba$ mujl id) taufen ? Some beef. KtnbfU'tfd). The ox (neat). S)a^ 9?tnb. Y'ou must buy some beef. Sic miiffcn SRtnbfletfd) faufen. What do you wish ? SBaS rooften What do you want t f - LT*^ .f^ ? I want S0me money. Do you want some money ? 23raucl)en tc Do you wish to have some SBettcn o, ix>a$ @tc brcuict)cn 1 )a$ tft TCUcS, n?a$ id) braucfyc. . 4babcn (Sic, wag (Sic braucfycn ? Set) fyabc, tvag id) braudjc. (r t)at, tva^! cr braucl)t. (Sic ^abcn, wa^ ftc brauc^cn. To be obliged (shall, ought). (Soltctt, past. part. What am I to do ? You must work. Am I to go thither] You may go thither. SBo* felt tct) tfjun ? Sic feflcn arbcitcn. (Sell id) f)ing em cfyu&macljci; tie the shoes 1 d)ul)e ? I pay him for them. $cf) bqafyle fie tfym. Does he pay you for the knives? 23qaf)tt cr Sbncn fur t>tc SDttffet ? He pays me for them. a* id) fcbuttig bin. Have you paid for your book? aben ^ie 3^r SBud) be^aljlt? I have paid for it. 3d) babe e$ bcgaftft. I have not yet paid for it. 3d) ^abc c ncd) nic^t bc^a!){t. To beg of begged of. To pray prayed. To request requested. To ask any one for money. To beg money of some one. To request money of any one. What do you ask me for 1 I ask you for nothing. I beg some money of you. 2tnfprcd)cn* angcfprecfyen. um c(b anfprcd)cn*. 3cnmntcni um clfe bitten*. n5 perlangcn (Sic tcn nur ? 3ct) fpvcdjc tc um an. He has begged some money of (t fycit mid) um @5elt> nngcfprcc^cn. Por. U m (a preposition governing the accusative). Do you beg some money of him 1 ^prccfccn Sic ifyn um ctt> on ? I beg some of him. 3d) crbtttc mtc iuc(d)C tcn tf)m. To solicit any one to do a thing, twos Don 3cmcmt>cm crbittcn*. For it. To ask him for it. To ask him for them. I ask you for it." Do you ask me for anything ] I ask you for the hat. Do you ask me for the hat 1 I ask you for it. To speak of some one. Does one speak of that man ] One speaks of him. 2) Q r u m. C 3f)n tarum cinfprcdjcn*. ($ t>cn tfym t>er(nngcn. C 3bn barum anfprcd)cn*. i tc t>cn tljin t>cr(anijcn. C 3cb fprcdjc tc fcarum an. C 3d) ttcrlangc eg t>cn Sftncn. 95cr(angen Sic ctrcaS Don nut ? 3cb btttc Sie um ben ^ut. S3ittcn Sic nu'ct) um ben ut ? 3d) bitte Sie barum. 3cmanbcm fprcd)cn*. Sprtcbt man son btcfem 9)?annc 1 fprid)t ocn il?m. 142 One does not speak of him. 93?cm fpttd)t nid)t ucn ifjm. Do they speak of my book ] on mctncm 23ud)C 1 They speak much of it. 9)Jcm |prtd)t wcl baron. What do you say to it? SSaS fagcn tc ba$u (f)U'r$u) ? I say he is right. 3d) f a 9 e / k fl P Content, satisfied. 3 u f r t c b C n. 97 e u. To be content with any one. Sfflit 3'emanbcm gufrtcbcn fctn*. Are you content with this man ? inb cn bflintt. Discontented. Of what do they speak ? SDBoocn fpvtd)t man ? They speak of peace, of war, of 9Dfcm fptid)t ocn bcm J^rtcbcn, c your book. bcm ^ricge, i?cn Sb^cm S8ud)C. Do they speak of peace 1 pridjt man pen bcm Jrtcben ? They do speak of it. 9)tan fprtd)t baron. Obs. C. The adverb tt) c r where, like ^fer and ba (See Obs. above), forms compound adverbs with certain prepositions governing the dative or accusative. In these tt)0 takes the place of the dative and accusative of the pronoun interrogative VDelcfyer, rt>elrf)e, toelcfyeg, or With what are you content 1 SSSomit finb (Sic gnfrtcbcn ? I am content with my book. 3d) bin nut mcincm JBudjc ben* With whom are you satisfied ? 93?it wcm finb tc ^ufrtcben ? I am satisfied with my master. 3d) bin wit mctncm Cdjrct jufrtcs ben* To study studied. (Stnbircn ftnbtrt. (See Obs. A. Lesson XLV.) \ ." 5 i* JV/,". - Y.Vr'/J I, I To question, interrogate. r a 3 c n (governs the ace.). The uncle, tcr %im (is not softened in the plural) ; the gentleman, the lord, tct ert ; the master, the tutor, the pre- ) v _ ft ,, , ceptor, the professor, ^cr Scorer ; the scholar, tct en Scmcmtcm ein efcfycnf fccfenu one. men*. EXERCISES. 119. * Have we what we want ? We have not what we want. What do we want 1 We want a fine house, a large garden, a beautiful carriage, pretty horses, several servants, and much money. Is that all we want? That is all we want. What must I do ] You must write a letter. To whom (Lesson XXX.) must I write 1 You must write to your friend. Shall I go to the market 1 You may go there. Will you tell your father that I am waiting for him here ? I will tell him so (Obs. Lesson XLIII.). What will you tell your father 1 I will tell him that you are waiting for him here. What wilt thou say to my servant 1 I will say to him that you have finished your letter. Have you paid (for) your table 1 I have paid (for) it. Has your uncle paid for the book ? He has paid for it. Have I paid the tailor for the clothes ] You have paid him for them. Hast thou paid the merchant for the horse 1 ? I have not yet paid him for it. Have we paid for our gloves ] We have paid for them. Has your cousin already paid for his boots ] He has not yet paid for them. Does my brother pay you what he owes you 1 He does pay it me. Do you pay what you owe ] I do pay what I owe. Have you paid (with the dative) the baker 1 I have paid him. Has your uncle paid the butcher for the meat ? He has paid him for it. Have you paid your servant his wages ? I have paid them 1o him. Has your master paid you your wages 1 He has paid them to me. When did he pay them to you 1 He paid (f)cit 6^a()(t) them to me the day before yesterday. What do you ask this man for ] I ask him for my book. What does this boy beg of me ? He begs of you some money. Do you ask me for anything ] I ask you for a crown Do you ask me for the bread] I ask you for it. Do the poor beg money of you ? They beg some of me. Which man do you ask for money ] I ask him for some whom you ask for some. Which merchants do you ask 144 for gloves ? I ask those who live in William-Street (Lesson XLVIII.) for some. Which joiner do you ask for chairs "? I ask that one, whom you know, for some. What do you ask the baker for 1 I ask him for some bread. Do you ask the butchers for some meat ] I do ask them for some. Dost thou ask me for the stick ? I do ask thee for it. Does he ask thee for the book"? He does ask me for it. What have you asked the Englishman for ? I have asked him for my leather trunk. Has he given it to you 1 He has given it to me. 120. Whom have you asked for some sugar ? I have asked the mer- chant for some. Of whom have the poor begged some money "? They have begged some of the noblemen. Of which noblemen have they begged some 1 They have begged some of those whom you know. Whom do you pay for the meat ] 1 pay the butchers for it. Whom does your brother pay for his boots ] He pays the shoemakers for them. Whom have we paid for the bread ] We have paid our bakers for it. Of whom have they (man) spoken 1 They have spoken of your friend. Have they not spoken of the physicians ! They have not spoken of them. Do they not speak of the man of whom (tcn nx(d)cm) we have spoken"? They do speak of him. Have they spoken of the noblemen ] They have spoken of them. Have they spoken of those of whom we speak 1 They have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken of others. Have they spoken of our children or of those of our neighbours 1 They have neither spoken of ours nor of those of our neighbours. Which children have been spoken of ? Those of our preceptor have been spoken of. Do they speak of my book ? They do speak of it. Of what do you speak ] We speak of war. Do you not speak of peace 1 We do not speak of it. Are you content with your pupils ] I am content with them. How does my brother study ] He studies well. How many lessons have you studied ? I have already studied fifty-four. Is your master satisfied with his scholar 1 ? He his satisfied with him.-r- Has your master received a present ] He has received several.- From whom has he received presents ? He has received some from his pupils. Has he received any from your father 1 He has re- ceived some (both) from mine and from that of my friend. Is he satisfied with the presents which he has received ? He is satisfied with them. How many exercises hast thou already done ? I have already done twenty-one. Is thy master satisfied with thee ? He says that he is satisfied with me. And what dost thou say ? I say that I am satisfied with him. How old art thou ? I am not quite ten years old. Dost thou already learn German ? I do already learn it. Does thy brother know German 1 He does not know it. Why does he not know it] Because he has not learnt it. Why has he not learnt it 1 Because he has not had time. Is your father at borne ] No, he has departed, but my brother is at home. Where 145 is your father gou tffef! cr tffct or tt. C 3u 9J2itta^ cficn T0 t^ cffcn. I have supped late. 5 |* M f^ : Ucnt. fleffj. After. 9Z a cl) (a preposition governing 1 the dative). After you. 9?ad) Sf)ncn. After me. 97 ad) mir. After him. 97ac^ iljm. After my brother. 0tocfo nictncm 93tutcr. I Jiave breakfasted after him. $fy fyabt nnc^ if^m j 7 146 To holdheld. Thou boldest he holds. Will you hold my stick ? To trytried. To taste tasted. Will you try to do that ? I have tried to do it. You must try to do it better. Have you tasted that wine 1 I have tasted it. Are you looking for any one T Whom are you looking for 1 I am looking for a brother mine. An uncle of mine. A neighbour of yours, A relation of mine. >u baltft ct beat SBotten ic mcincn torf flatten ? n p r e (u 1 1. (. & cr f u d) c n c r f u d) t. C&*ft*n gefafiet. C 9$ c t f u djc n c r f u d) t SSottcn ic &cr(iid>cn, ba$ ju t!)im T 3d) bafo scrfudbt, c* 511 tfjun. ic muffcn Dcrfucfycn, c$ 6cf[cc $u mcu d)cn. ^n6cn ic ttcfcn SOScin Qcfeftct (ocr^ ^ fn*t)? S* Me ifjn gcfcjlet (t?crfud)t). udjen (Sic SBcn fud)cn ic ? of f 3c^ fuc^c ctncn mctncc SSriibcr. Ace. Sing-. GEN. PZwr. t Stncn iticiner t Smen t (Stnen ntcincr 3Scrtt>anbten* Obs. Adjectives taken substantively are declined like other adjectives. Ex. bcr SSemanbte, the relation ; gen. be3 aSern>anbten, of the relation, &c. ; ber S3cbtcnte, the servant ; gen. be3 SSebtenten, of the servant, &c. ; em SSer^ tt>anbter, a relation ; em SSebienter, a servant, &c. The parents (father and mother). He tries to see an uncle of his. A cousin of his. A friend of ours. A neighbour of theirs. He tries to see you. Does he try to see me ? To inquire after some one. After whom do you inquire ? I inquire after a friend of mine. The acquaintance. Whom do you look for? >ic ?Ccttcrn ((tern). @r fucrjt ctncn fctncr Dfjctmc $u fc- ben* t (Stncn fctncr SScttern. t @tncn unfcrcr ^cunbc. j ^-tncn ifjrcr 9?ad)born. @r fud)t ic ju fcfycn. ud)t cr nuc^ 311 fc&cn ? Scmonbcm fragcn. tvcm fragen ic ? Sid) ftcuje nacr; cincm mctncr grcun* be. jpcr ' Rule 1. The preposition of, which in English stands between two substantives, when the second determines the substance of the first, is never expressed in Ger- man. Ex. A piece of bread. f in tficf SBrofc. A glass of water. f Gin tog SBafjcr. A sheet of paper. i (Sin Imogen Copter. Three sheets of paper. f S)tvt 2$ecjcn papier. The piece, ta$ the sheet, tcr the small piece (little bit), fcas ( the little book, ' ta$ S3ttcl)tcin. Rule 2. All diminutives terminating in cfyett and f eut are neuter, and those terminating in ling are mascu- line. To form diminutives from German substantives, the syllable rf) e tt or I e i It is added, and the radical vowels, a, o, it, are softened into a, 6, it* Ex. The small house, t>a$ the small picture, t>a$ 3H(t>clKn ; the little heart, tc$ Jbcqcben ; the little child, fccul .fiinfclctn ; the little boy, ta$ ^tnaOlctn, jtnafccljen ; the suckling (baby), tct (Sciuqting; the favourite, darling 1 , t>cr SicWtng; the apprentice, tcr 2cl)rling. EXERCISES. 121. Have you already dined 1 Not yet. At what o'clock do you dine 1 I dine at six o'clock. At whose house (Bct im'tn, Lesson XXVI.) do you dine ] I dine at the house of a friend of mine. With whom (bet tvcm) did you dine yesterday 1 I dined (()oOe cjefpctf't with a re- lation of mine. What have you eaten ? W T e have eaten good bread, beef, apples, and cakes. What have you drunk? We have drunk good wine, good beer, and good cider. Where does your uncle dine to-day ? He dines with (bet) us. At what o'clock does your father eat supper 1 He eats supper at nine o'clock. Do you eat supper ear- ier than he? T eat supper later than he. At what o'clock do you breakfast] I breakfast at ten o'clock. At what o'clock did you eat supper yesterday ? We ate (fjaOcn gocjcfjcn) supper late. What did you eat ? We ate only a little meat and a small piece of bread. When did your brother sup ? He supped after my father. 148 Where are you going to? I am going to a relation of mine, in order to breakfast with him. Do you dine early ?- We dine late* Art thou willing to hold my gloves ? I am willing to hold them. Is he willing to hold my cane 1 He is willing to hold it. Who has held your hat ] My servant has held it. Will you try to speak. I will try. Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises ? He has tried. Have you ever tried to make a hat? I have never tried to make one. Have we tasted that beer? We have not tasted it yet. Which wine do you wish to taste 1 I wish to taste that which you have tasted. Have the Poles tasted that brandy ] They have tasted it. Have they drunk much of it (toioon) 1 They have not drunk much of it. Will you taste this tobacco 1 I have tasted it already. How do you find it 1 I find it good. Why do you not taste that cider ] Because I am not thirsty. Why does your friend not taste this meat 1 Because he is not hungry. 122. Whom are you looking for ? I am looking for the man who has sold a horse to me. Is your relation looking for any one ? He is looking for an acquaintance of his. Are we looking for any one "\ We are looking for a neighbour of ours. Whom dost thou look for ? I look for a friend of ours. Are you looking for a servant of mine 1 No, I am looking for one of mine. Have you tried to speak to your uncle ? I have tried to speak to him. Have you tried to see my father ? I have tried to see him. Have you been able (Less. XLVII1.) to see him ] I have not been able to see him. After whom do you inquire ] I inquire after your father. After whom dost thou inquire 1 I inquire after the tailor. Does this man inquire after any one ? He inquires after you. Do they in- quire after you 1 They do inquire after me 1 Do they inquire after me ? They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of yours. Do you inquire after the physician? I do inquire after him. What do you ask me for 1 I ask you for some meat. What does your little brother ask me for ] He asks you for some wine and some water. Do you ask me for a sheet of paper ? I do ask you for one. How many sheets of paper does your friend ask for] He asks for two. Dost thou ask me for the little book ? I do ask you for it. What has your cousin asked for 7 He has asked for a few apples and a small piece of bread. Has he not breakfasted yet 1 He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. What does your uncle ask for 1 He asks for a glass of wine. What does the Pole ask for ] He asks for a small glass of brandy. Has he not already drunk 1 He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. 149 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.-bkr uttb Ciction. I see the man who has my mo- 3cb fcljc ten Sftcmn, rccldjct twin ney. (Skit fycit. I see the child who plays. 3d) fcl)C tciS Jltnt, nx(d)C$ fpictt. I perceive him who is coming. 3d) fccmerfc ten, nxld)cr femwt. I see him who owes me money. 3$ fcbe ten, rvctd)cr mir ($>elt> fd)u(= tig ifh Do you perceive the soldiers I*"*** J5 We .^ atc ' ( * c who are going into the store- g^Jf^JJS ^ [ in ta 9}?aga^in (bincin) get)cn ? I do perceive those who are go- C 3d) bcmcrfc tic, tt>e(d)C ta^in gcfjcn. c Iji Ccmerfc tie, i 2(ud). S3 c m e r f e n t i (Sic 3cmanten bcmcrf t ? Dcmcrft. ing into it. J./50. To perceive perceived. Have you perceived any one"? I have perceived no one. 3$ 1 The soldier, tcr ( To go to the store-house. { SSSJI** (') **" O&5. JL. Direction towards a place or towards a country is expressed by the preposition nad) with the dative. Willingly. To like. To like to see. To like to study. To like wine. He likes a large hat. Do you like to see my brother 1 I do like to see him. I like to do it. Do you like water ? No, I like wine. Fowl, the fish, fish, the pike, pike, crn. t ern fjafcen*. f ctn fcfyen*. t crn ftufcitm j ern Bctn trtnfcn*. t (T fat gcrn cincn grcfcn ,wt. t ig lernen. Do your scholars like to learn Sernen Sfjrc (d)u(ct gcrn by heart? big? They do not like learning by (tc icrncn md)t gcrn cwSrcc heart. Have you learnt your exercises $abcn ig gotcrnt ? We have learnt % them. SBtr Ijabcn @ic gdcrnt. Once a day. (Stnmol bc^ Soc^ Thrice or three times a month. SDrctnuil tc Obs. B. The genitive is used in reply to the ques- tions: tt>amt? when? nne oft? how often? in speak- ing of something that takes place habitually and at a determinate period. Six times a year. cdjSmat bc$ 3or)rc$. How many times a day does he 9Stc mctaial (wtc eft) ipt CC t>e^ eat ? 09$ ? He eats three times a day. (Sc tpt fcvctmat bc^ Sciq^. Do you eat as often as he! (Sffcn tc fo eft n>tc cr ? When do you go out? 85$cmn gcfjcn ^tc au^ ? We go out early in the morning. SOSir gctycn t)c^ 9^cr(jcn^ friif) au^. T/*. S05 c n n (See Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLVIL). I intend paying you if I receive 3d) bin gcfonncn/ tc ^u fcejartfcn/ my money. wcnn id) nictn clt) bcfcminc. Do you intend to buy wood ? ebcnEen ic ^0(5 ^u fciufcn ? I do intend to buy some, if they 3cft gcbcnfc roclefocS 511 faufcn x wcnn pay me what they owe me. man nut bejafylt, wa<) man nut fcfyulbta, iff. How is the weather? What kind of weather is it ? It is fine weather at present. (5$ if! jcgt fd)6'nc^ SOBcttcr. How was the weather y ester- "j " f fit ^'^ lwt 7 ^f^ ;o- * t 5 ^^ fu ' ^ CttCr ^ ** ' kind of weather was it yesterday ? C. SBar, was, is the imperfect of the auxilia- ry verb fein*, to be; we shall speak of it hereafter, (See Lesson LVII.) 1.51 Was it fine weather yesterday \ It was bad weather yesterday. It was fine weather this morning, Is it warm! It is warm. Very. It is very warm. It is cold. It is very cold. It is neither cold nor warm. Dark, obscure, dusky, gloomy, clear, light, It is gloomy in your shop. Is it gloomy in his room 1 It is gloomy there. The shop, moist, humid, damp, dry, Is the weather damp ? The weather is not damp. It is dry weather. The weather is too dry. It is moonlight (moonshine). We have too much sun. We have no rain. The moonlight, moonshine, the rain, the sun, Of what do you speak ? W^e speak of the weather. The weather, SOSar c$ ^cfkrn fcrjoru'S letter ? (5$ war Cjcftern fcf)led)te$ 2Bettcr. . (5 war tivfcn Bergen fcfyoncS 2Bet- tor. Sft c* warm \ ift !a(t. cn gu ttc( SDBtr IjaOen Ccincn tcr tie (Senne (a feminine noun). SOSct>cn fpmfycn @te ? S53ir fprcc^cn t?om (r>cn km) SEcttcr. tag SQBetter. EXERCISES. 123. Do you perceive the man who is coming ? I do not perceive him. Do you perceive the soldier's child ? I perceive it. What do you perceive 1 I perceive a great mountain and a small house. Do you not perceive the wood ] I perceive it also. Dost thou perceive the soldiers who are going to the market 1 I do perceive them. Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden 1 I do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going to the market. Do you see the man to whom I have lent money ? I do not see the one to whom you have lent, but the one who has lent you some. Dost thou see the children who are studying ] I do not see those who are studying, but those 152 > you like a large hat 1 I do not like a large hat, large umbrella. What do you li'ke to do ? I like to write. Do you like to see those little boys ] I do like to see them. Do you like beer ? I like it. Does your brother like cider ] He does not like it. What do the soldiers like I They like wine and water. Dost thou like wine or water ? I like both (Oetfci'S). Do these children like to study 1 They like to study and to play. Do you like to read and to write 1 I like feo read and to write. How many times do you eat a day ? Four times.. How often do your children drink a day T They drink several times a day, Do you drink as often as they I I drink ofteaer. Do you often go to the theatre ? I go thither sometimes. How often do you go thither (in) a month ? I go thither but once a month. How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball I He goes thither twiee a year. Do you go thither as often as he 1 I never go thither* Does your cook often go to the market I He goes thither every morning. 124. Do you often go to my uncle's 1 I go to him six times a year. Do you like fowl ] I do like fowl, but I do not like fish. What do you like ? I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. What fish does your brother like 1 He likes pike. Do you learn by heart 1 I do not like learning by heart. Do your pupils like to learn by heart I They like to study, but they do not like learning by heart. How many exercises do they do a day 1 They only do two, but they do them well. -Do you like coffee or tea 1 I like both. Do you read the letter which 1 have written to you (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLYII.) T I do read it. Do you understand it ]-~ I do understand it. Do you understand the man who speaks to you ? I do not understand him ? Why do you not understand him 1 1 do not understand him because he speaks too badly. Does this man know German 1 He does know it, but I do not know it* Why do* you not learn it I 1 have no time to learn it. Have you received a letter 1 I have received one. Will you answer it. I am going to (3d) nriK) answer it. Whea did you receive it ? I received it at ten o'clock In the morning. Are you satisfied with it 1 I am not dissatisfied with it. What does your friend write to yo 1 He writes tome that he is ill (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XL VII.). Does- he ask you for anything I He asks me for money . Why does he ask you for money .? Because he wants some. What do you ask me for ? I ask you for the money which you owe me. Will you wait a little ? I cannot wait. Why can you not wait 1 I cannot wait because I intend to depart to-day. At what o'clock do you in- tend to set out ? I intend setting out at five o'clock in the evening. Do you go to Germany ? I do go thither. Are you not going to* Holland T- I am not going thither. How far has your brother gone I He has gone as far as. London* " 153 125. Do you intend going to the theatre this evening 1 I do intend going thither, if you go. Has your father the intention to buy that horse ] He has the intention to buy it, if he receives his money. Has your cousin the intention to go to England. He has the intention to go thither, if they pay him what they owe him. Do you intend going to the ball 1 I do intend going thither, if my friend goes ? Does your brother intend to study German 1 He does in- tend to study it, if he finds a good master. How is the weather to- day] It is very fine weather. Was it fine w r eather yesterday ? It was bad weather yesterday. How was the weather this morning? It was bad weather, but now it is (tjl c$) fine weather. Is it warm ] It is very warm. Is it not cold ] It is not cold. Is it warm or cold 1 It is neither warm nor cold. Did you go to the country (Lesson XXX.) the day before yesterday 1 I did not go thither. Why did you not go thither ? I did not go thither, because it was bad weather. Do you intend going into the country to-morrow? I do intend going thither, if the weather is fine. 126. Is it light in your room 1 It is not light in it. Do you wish to work in mine 1 I. do wish to work in it. Is it light there 1 It is very light there. Can you work in your small room (Rule 2, Lesson LIII.)1 I cannot work there. Why can you not work there 1 I cannot work there, because it is too dark. Where is it too dark ? In my small room. Is it light in that hole 1 It is dark there. Is it dry in the street (Lesson XL VIII.) ] It is damp there. Is the weather damp 1 The weather is not damp. Is the weather dry 1 It is too dry. Is it moonlight 1 It is not (fcin) moonlight, it is very damp. Why is the weather dry ? Because we have too much sun and no rain. When do you go into the country 1 I intend go- ing thither to-morrow, if the weather is fine, and if we have no rain. Of what does your uncle speak 1 He speaks of the fine weather. Do you speak of the rain 1 W T e do speak of it. Of what do those men speak 1 They speak of fair and bad weather. Do they not speak of the wind 1 They do also speak of it (aud) tcwen). Dost thou speak of my uncle 1 I do not speak of him. Of whom dost thou speak 1 I speak of thee and thy parents. Do you inquire after any one ? I inquire after your uncle (Lesson LIII.) ; is he at home ] No, he is at his best friend's. (See Lesson XXXIX and end of Lesson XXXIV.) 154 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. Jiinf tmb ffin%5fe Cation. OF PASSIVE VERBS. In English, the past participle is joined to the verb to be, either to form the passive voice, or as an ad- jective to qualify the subject. In the first instance it must be translated by tt>erbeit*, and in the second by feilt** In German we distinguish, as in Latin : ba$ Qd\l$ if! gebaut, domus cedificata est, from ba3 S^aii^ ft>irb gebaiit, ^domus cedificatur ; bie SSriefe fntb gefdjrieben, litterce scrip- tee sunt, from bie SSriefe werbett gefrf)rieben, litterce scri- buntur. To ascertain whether a past participle stands as an adjective or not, one has only to change the construc- tion into the active voice ; if in that voice the tense is the same as in the passive, the participle is a pas- sive participle, and the auxiliary to be must be trans- lated by werbett*; but if the tense is not the same, it then stands as a mere adjective, and the auxiliary to be must be translated by fein** Ex. 3d) tt>erbe geltebf, I am loved, is in the same tense, when I say : er liebt mid), he loves me ; but ber (Spiegel tfl jerbrodjen, the looking-glass is broken, is not in the same tense, when I say : er fyat ben (Spiegel jerbrodjen, he has bro- ken the looking-glass. Here jerbrccfyett is nothing but an adjective, which qualifies the subject (Spiegel, look- ing-glass. I am loved. 3d) rucrbc gcltcfct. Thou art guided. HDu nrirft gcfcttct. He is praised. (Sr nnrfc gefebt. We are heard. 83Mt rocrben < They are blamed. Sic rucrbcn ; You are punished. 1 1^ ^ r ^ ^^ To praise, to blame. goften/ tat)ctn. By me by us. SScn nut t>cn un$. By thee by you. SScn 3)tr t)cn (Sudj (S^ncn). By him by them. SSon t()m sen tfmcn. I am loved by him. 3d) ivcrbc on ifem gc(ic6t. Who is punished ? SScr ivtrb cjcftrnft 1 155 The naughty boy is punished. 3)et unarttgc Jtnafte tmtb Qcffraft. By whom is he punished ? 83 en it>cm rcitb ct cpftraft ? He is punished by his father. (t nntb i?on fctncm SSatet gcfttaft. "Which man is praised, and which SBctcbct 9)2ann roitb gelobt, unb rccfe is blamed ? erbcn on t^ncn t?erad)tct. Good naughty. 2frtta unortifl. (See Note f , Les- son XXXIX.) Skilful, diligent awkward. Gkfcfyidft ungefitcTt. Assiduous idle. Sfctfttg tra'^e (faul). Ignorant. UntOtffcnb. The. idler, the lazy fellow, bet To reward rewarded. S3c(o^ncn tctofint (See Obs. A. Lesson XLV). To esteem. 2Cd)tcn, fcfyffgcn. To despise. 83ctad)ten. To hate. ^affcn. Is your book torn ? 3ft 3f)t $BucIj ^ctttffen ? It is not torn. cn roelcfyem) lam loved. After whom do you inquire 1 I inquire after no one. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 0*d)S twi OP IMPERSONAL VERBS. These verbs having no determinate subject, are only conjugated in the third person singular, by means of the indefinite pronoun e3, it. Ex. To rain it rams. To snow it snows. Does it thunder 1 It does thunder. Is it foggy 1 Does the sun shine 1 The sun shines. It thunders loud. F gy the fog, hard, violent, To shine shone. To thunder. The sun does not shine. The sun is in my eyes. The face, the thunder, the snow, the sunshine, the parasol, JKcgnen e 6 rccjnet. c $ fcfynctt, cs? ($* fconncrt. 3ft eg nebdtg ? 3ft ^ ct d) e t n c n * 9 c f d) i c n e n* 3D o n n c r n. )ic onne fcfjcint ntd)t. f >k (Scnnc fd)dnt nuc in$ l>ag efidbt ; bcr Conner ; t>cr 158 Does it lighten 1 ffiftgt c$ 1 It does lighten. ($ bttfet. To hail. 4^90(11, fd)lopen. The hail, fccr ngc(. Tt haik 5 * *W (t * } fd)(cifcrt B. The case of the verb may be placed before the impersonal verb, but then the indefinite pronoun e$ must be suppressed. For instance, instead of : e$ fyuttgert mid), one may say : nttd) fywtgert, I am hungry ; but if the sentence is interrogative, the indefinite pronoun e$ must not be omitted. Are you sleepy 1 d)td'fcrt c$ tc ? We a, sleepy. {ZflS^ Are those men hungry ? ^uncjcrt c^ btcfc SWfinncr ? They are hun gry . [ftttgf 1 Who is thirsty 1 SBcn burftct c^ ? C @ burftct mid) fcr}r. I am very thirsty. 1 smicf, tur(}ct fcf)t. a c^utt^crtt, in the signification of to fast, is neuter, and follows the conju- gation of neuter verbs. 159 x Has your cousin been thirsty "? cit eg S&ren 23ettcr gcfcurftct? He has been thirsty. Where has he gone to * Sef)tn tft cr Qcrctf't ? He has gone to Vienna. C?r tft nad) SQ&Kn""gcrci|'t. Is it good travelling 1 3ft c$ gut rctfcn ? It is bad travelling. ( tft fd)tcd)t rctfcn. In the winter. %n\ SBintcr. In the summer. stn cnmicr. Is it good travelling in the win- 3ft C$ gut rctfcn tm ter 1 ? It is bad travelling in the winter. <$ tft jcf)(cd)t rctfcn tm SBinter. The spring, tec griifjltng ; the autumn, tcr crt>ft. To ride in a carriage. Jal)rcn* (in this signification takes fcin* for its auxiliary 11 ). Ridden in a carriage. cfaf)ren. To ride on horseback. SKcttcn* (takes fcin* for its auxi- liary). Ridden on horseback. crtttcn. To go on foot. 3u Jfuflc gcficn*. Do you like to go on horseback ? f SKcttcn ic gcrn ? I like to ride in a carriage. f 3cb fcifjrc Qorn. Where is the bailiflf gone to (on 2Bo tft fcct TCmtmann ^tngcrittcn ? horseback) ? He is gone (on horseback) to the (Sr tft in ten SBalb gcrtttcn. forest. When does your cousin go to SBann acf)t il)r SScttcr nadj 23crlin ? Berlin ? He goes thither this winter. (t gcfjt bicfcn SStntcr ba^tn. I intend going this spring to 3d) tun gcfenncn, fctcfcn grii!}(incj Dresden. nacb Srcsbcn gu rctfcn. Where is your uncle 1 Se tft Sfa Df)cim ? He is in Berlin. (t tft in SBcrttn. He is at Berlin. (5r ift su SScrlin. The preposition jtt or in is used to express rest in a place or country, and the preposition rtcicfy motion or direction towards a place or country. 3^iac^ is particularly used before names of towns or coun- tries (Lesson LIV.) ; but the preposition jtt must be made use of to express motion towards a person. (Lesson XXVI.) p When the verb fafjven* signifies to move anything by a carriage it is ac- tive and takes fyafcett* for its auxiliary. 160 The two prepositions ju and tit answer the question tt)0 ? and ttacf) the question toofyin ? as is seen by the above examples. Is it good living in Paris 1 7 o-i. * A * r,< M ;, Is the living good in Paris ? j ^ <* 3 Ut Ickn w sfl The living is dear there. ( tft tl)cuet U'Oen t>a. Is it windy ? Does the wind Sft c$ rotnfctc} ? blow] It is windy ? The wind blows. (5$ ift roinbtcj, t>ct 2Btnt> cjefyt. Is it stormv t 5 3ft <6 Prmtf* 1 Sfi 59 fUtmifclM Better T It is not stormv \ * ijl nid)t } ^)a^ SBcttet tft nicl)t (Ifirmtf*. Strong, stormy, dear, windy. (Star6 ; fturmtfc^ ; tftcucr ', EXERCISES. 130. Do you like to ride in a carriage 1 I like to ride on horseback. Has your cousin ever gone on horseback 1 He has never gone on horseback. Did you go on horseback the day before yesterday 1 I went on horseback to-day. Where did you go to (on horseback) ? I went into the country. Does your brother ride on horseback as often as you 1 He rides on horseback oftener than I. Hast thou sometimes ridden on horseback? I have never ridden on horse- back. Wilt thou go (in a carriage) to-day into the country 1 I will go thither (in a carriage). Do you like travelling 1 I do like travelling. Do you like travelling in the winter] I do not like travelling in the winter, I like travelling in the spring and in autumn. Is it good travelling in the spring 1 It is good travelling in the spring and in the autumn, but it is bad travelling in the summer and in the winter. Have you sometimes travelled in the winter 1 I have often travelled in the winter and in the summer. Does your brother travel often 1 He travels no longer, he formerly travel- led much. When do you like to ride on horseback 1 I like riding on horseback in the morning after breakfast. Is it good travelling in this country ? It is good travelling here (t>a). Have you ever gone to Vienna 1 I have never gone thither. Where is your brother gone to ? He is gone to London. Does he sometimes go to Berlin 1 He went thither formerly. What does he say of (port) that country 1 He says that it is good travelling in Germany 1 Have you been at Dresden? I have been' there. Have you stayed there long ? I have stayed there two years. What do you say of 161 the (t>on tcn) people of that country 1 I say that they are good people (i'S flute Ccutc fint>). Is your brother at Dresden ? No, Sir, he is at Vienna ? Is the living good at Vienna 1 The living is good there. 131. Have you been in London ? I have been there. Is the living good there ? The living is good there, but dear. Is it dear living in Paris 1 It is good living there and not dear. At whose house have you been this morning ? I have been at my uncle's. Where are you going to now ? I am going to my brother's. Is your brother at home ? I do not know. Have you already been at the English captain's 1 I have not been there yet. When do you intend going thither ? I intend going thither this evening. How often has your brother been in London 1 He has been there thrice. Do you like travelling in France ? I like travelling there, because one finds good people there. Does your friend like travelling in Holland ? He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. Do you like travelling in Italy 1 I do like travelling there, be- cause the living is good there, and one finds good people there ; but the roads are not very good there. Do the English like to travel in Spain? They like to travel there ; but they find the roads there too bad. How is the weather ! The weather is very bad. Is it windy ? It is very windy. Was it stormy yesterday ? It was stormy. Did you go into the country 1 I did not go thither, because it was stormy. Do you go to the market this morning ? I do go thither, if it is not stormy. Do you intend going to Germany this year ? I do intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. Do you in- tend breakfasting with me this morning 1 I intend breakfasting with you, if I am hungry. 132. Does your uncle intend dining with us to-day? He does intend dining with you, if he is hungry. Does the Pole intend drinking some of (r>cn) this wine ? He does intend drinking some of it (t>cu ton), if he is thirsty. Do you like to go on foot ? 1 do not like to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (roenn) I am travel- ling. Will you go on foot 1 I cannot go on foot, because I am too tired. Do you go to Italy on foot ? I do not go on foot, because the roads are there too bad. Are the roads there as bad in the summer as in the winter 1 They are not so good in the winter as in the summer. 133. Are you going out to-day ? I am not going out when it is raining. Did it rain yesterday 1 It did not rain. Has it snowed ? It has snowed. Why do you not go to the market ? I do not go thither, because it snows. Do you wish to have an umbrella ? If you have one. W T ill you lend me an umbrella? I will lend you one. What sort of weather is it ? It thunders and lightens Does the sun shine ? The sun does not shine, it is foggy. Do you hear the 162 thunder ? I do hear it. How long have you heard the thunder. I have heard it till four o'clock in the morning. Is it fine weather 1 The wind blows hard and it thunders much. Does it rain 1 It does rain very fast (ftarf). Do you not go into the country 1 How can I go into the country, do you not see how (rate) it lightens 1 Does it snow 1 It does not snow, but it hails. Does it hail ? It does not hail, but thunders very much. Have you a parasol 1 I have one. Will you lend it me ? I will lend it you. Have we sunshine ? We have much sunshine, the sun is in my eyes. Is it fine weather ? It is very bad weather, it is dark ; we have no sun- shine. 134. Are you thirsty ? I am not thirsty, but very hungry. Is your servant sleepy? He is sleepy. Is he hungry ? He is hungry. Why does he not eat ? Because he has nothing to eat. Are your children hungry 1 They are very hungry, but they have nothing to eat. Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink. Why do you not eat? I do not eat when (rocnn) I am not hungry. Why does the Russian not drink 1 ? He does not drink when he is not thirsty. Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening 1 He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread. Did he not drink ? He also drank. What did he drink 1 He drank a large glass of water, and a small glass of wine. How long did you stay at his house (fcci ifjm) ? I stayed there till midnight. Have you asked him for anything ? I have asked him for nothing. Has he given you anything 1 He has given me nothing. Of whom have you spoken 1 We have spoken of you. Have you praised me ? We have not praised you; we have blamed you. Why have you blamed me 1 Because you do not study well. Of what has your brother spoken? He has spoken of his books, his houses, and his gardens. Who is hungry 1 My friend's little boy is hungry. Who has drunk my wine ? No one has drunk it. Hast thou already been in my room? I have already been there. How dost thou find my room ? I find it beautiful. Are you able to work there ? I am not able to work there, because it is too dark. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) s/ FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. giebett nn& ffttt$ij0te OF THE IMPERFECT AND PERFECT TENSES. In English there are three imperfect tenses, viz : I praised, did praise, and was praising. These three are expressed in German by one imperfect irf) lobte. It is used to express a past action or event in reference 163 to another, which was either simultaneous with or an- tecedent to it. It is the historical tense of the Germans, and is always employed in narration, particularly when the narrator was an eye-witness of the action or event. The perfect tense, on the contrary, expresses an action or event, as perfectly past and ended, with- out any reference to another event, and when the narrator was not an eye-witness. In this latter in- stance the imperfect also may be used, if the narrator accompanies his narrative with any phrase denoting that he does not speak in his own name, as meat fagt or fagt man, they say, it is said, &c. The perfect tense is compounded of the present of the auxiliary, and the past participle, as in English. (See Lessons XLL, XLII. &c.) I was he was. 3d) n?at ct roar. We were they were. Stt nxitcn fie rcatctt. Thou wast you were. 2)u ivarft 3fa roatct (6'te tvaren). Were you content ? S&arcn (Sic gcjfcrn bo 0/roefcn ? I was there to-day. 3d) bin f)cute bo gcrucfcn. W T here was he the day before o tft cr DOV^cftcrn gcwefcn ? yesterday 1 Were you already in Paris ? (g'tnb ( loved ' ) CVA ficttc er I | did love, He] did love, ( was loving. ( was loving. ( loved ' \ loved ' We ] did love, They] did love, ( were- loving. ( were loving. 164 ( lovedst, C loved, ) u [tebteft Thou < didst love, You < did love, > 3br tiebtet(ie ( wast loving. ( were loving. ) liebten) Obs. B. The consonant t of the imperfect is pre- ceded by e, if the pronunciation requires it, which is the case in all verbs, the root of which ends in b, t, tl), or (I, or in several consonants united. (See Obs. A. Lesson XXXIV. and Lesson XLI.) Ex. [was working, [was working. J We k. They [were working. [were working. j (workedst, f worked, 1 Sit arbetteteft - didst work, Youi did work, r 3t)i* arbeitetet wast working, [were working, j (Siearbciteten)* Obs. C. In all German verbs, whether regular or irregular, the third person singular of the imperfect tense is the same as the first person ; and the third person plural is the same as the first in all the tenses. I had he had. 3cf) Ijflttc ct F)atte. We had they had. Sffitt fatten fie fatten. Thou hadst you had. )u fyatteft Sfa (jattctCSic fatten). Had you money ? fatten Sic ctt) ? I had some. 3cf) fattc melc^e^. Had your brother books 1 attc Sfjt iBrubcr 23iid)cr ? He had some. (5r fattc roclcl)?. What had we 1 SBaS fatten n?ir ? What sort of weather was it yes- a$ fiir ^Better war e$ ^cftcrn ? terday ? It was fine weather. (5$ war fdfoo'neS ^Better. Had you a wish to buy a horse ? gotten tc Suft etn 5)fcrb su fou? ' fen ? I had a wish to buy one, but I 3d) fatte Cuft cin^ $u faufen, atec had no money. tcf) fattc fetn ctt>. Did your cousin intend to learn SBcit Sfa SScttet gcfonncn fccutfd) 5U German ] (ernen ? He did intend to learn it, but he (r roar gefonnen c^ ^u ternen/ afcec had no master. cr fatte fcincn Scorer. 165 EXERCISES. 135. Were you at home this morning 1 I was not at home. Where were you 7 I was at the market. Where were you yesterday 1 I was at the theatre. Wast thou as assiduous as thy brother 7 I was as assiduous as he, but he was more clever than I. Where have you been 7 1 have been at the English physician's. W T as he at home ? He was not at home.- Where was he 7 He was at the ball. Have you been at the Spanish cook's 1 I have been at his house. Has he already bought his meat 1 He has already bought it. Have you given the book to my brother 1 I have given it to him. Hast thou given my books to my pupils? I have given them to them. Were they satisfied with them (fcamtt) 1 They were very well (fcfjr) satisfied with them. Had your cousin a wish to learn German 7 He had a wish to learn it. Has he learnt it? He has not learnt it. Why has he not learnt it? Because he had not courage enough. Have you been at my father's 1 I have been there (bei tfym). Have you spoken to him 7 I have spoken to him. Has the shoemaker already brought you the boots 7 He has already brought them to me. Have you paid him (for) them 1 I have not paid him (for) them yet. Have you ever been in London I I have been there several times. What did you do there 7 I learnt English there. Do you intend going thither once more 1 I intend going thither twice more. Is the living good there 1 The living is good there, but dear. Was your master satisfied with his pupil 7 He was satisfied with him. Was your brother satisfied with my children 7 He was very well (|\'f)r) satisfied with them. Was the tutor satisfied with this little boy 7 He was not satisfied with him. Why was he not satisfied with him 1 Because that little boy was very negligent. 136. Were the children of the poor as clever as those of the rich ? They were more clever, because they worked harder (mefjr). Did you love your tutor 1 I did love him, because he loved me. Did he give you anything 1 He gave me a good book, because he was satisfied with me. Whom do you love 1 I love my parents and my preceptors. Do your tutors love you 1 They do love me, because I am assiduous and obedient. Did this man love his parents! He did love them. Did his parents love him 1 They did love him, because he was never disobedient. How long did you work yesterday evening 7 I worked till ten o'clock. Did your cousin also work 1 He did also work. When didst thou see my uncle] I saw him this morning. Had he much money 1 He had "much. Had your parents many friends 7 They had many. Have they still some ? They have still several. Had you any friends 7 1 had some, because I had money. Have you still some ? I have no longer any, because I have no more money. Where was your brother ? He was in the garden 7 Where were his servants 7 They were in the house. 106 Where were we 1 We were in a good country and with (fret) good people. Where were our friends 1 They were on (hoard) the ships of the English. Where were the Russians ? They were in their carriages. Were the peasants in the fields 1 They were there. Were the bailiffs in the woods 1 They were there. Who was in the storehouses ? The merchants were there. 137. What sort of weather was it 1 It was very bad weather. Was it wind y 1 It was windy and very cold. Was it foggy 1 It was foggy. Was it fine weather 1 It was fine weather, hut too warm. What sort of weather was it the day before yesterday ] It was very dark and very cold. Is it fine weather now] It is neither fine nor bad weather. Is it too warm 1 It is neither too warm nor too cold. Was it stormy yesterday 1 ? It was very stormy. Was it dry weather] The weather was too dry ; but to-day it is too damp. Did you go to the ball yesterday evening] I did not go, because the weather was bad. Had you the intention to tear my books'! I had n.ot the intention to tear, but to burn them. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. &d)t untr Cation. f spoke, fspoke, I did speak, He did speak, I was speaking. I was speaking. fspoke, f spoke, 1 5Qtr fpracfyett We \ did speak, They 1 did speak, jle fpracfyem I were speaking. I were speaking. J o&s.c.Less.LVii. f spokest, fspoke, 1 it fpracfyft Thou -( didst speak, You-^ did speak, l^br I wast speaking, [were speaking. J (te Obs. In irregular verbs the imperfect of the indica- tive is formed by changing the vowels : a, et, i, 0, it, and adding the termination belonging to each person. Hence in the irregular verbs we shall mark only the change of that vowel, together with the termination of the first person, in order to enable learners to know a Learners ought now to add to their list of verbs the imperfect of all ir- regular verbs which they have been using hitherto, or will have to use here- after. 167 the imperfect tense. Examples : the verb fprecfjett above changes in the imperfect the radical vowel e into a ; Metbeit, to remain, changes it into ie, thus : id) Wieb, I remained ; gefyett, to go, into t, thus : id) ging, I went ; gtefyen, to draw, into o, thus : id) jog, I drew ; fd)(agen/ to beat, into it, thus : id) fd)Iitg, I smote. Compound verbs follow in general the conjugation of simple verbs. At first (in the beginning). (Srjt, $uerft (cmfcm$$). Afterwards. ernad) or nadjfycr. Hereupon, upon this. tctauf* DCP Whenever a sentence begins with any other word than the subject, its order is inverted, and the subject stands after the verb in simple, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses. b At first he "said yes, afterwards (Svft fagtc ct {a, fycrnad) ttdn. no. At first he worked, and after- (Srft atkitetc, unt> rjernacr; fpicftc c r. wards he played. I do not go out to-day. ^cutc (jcfte tct) md)t cwS. Now you must work. te(?t mujjcn @ t c cirbcttcn. My father set out yesterday. cftcrn ift me t n %$ a t c r atyt* tctf't. Here lies your book and there $tct ^^f- 3^ JBucr) tinb fca S^ your paper. Copter. He came afterwards. r ift rjctnacl) (nad^^cr) gcfcmmcn. Upon this he said. tcrcuif fagtc c r. A$ soon as. 1> a ( D x f o a 1 1> a ( ^. I drink as soon as I have eaten. $c!) trtnfc, fcOalt) tcr) Qcgeffcn r;ci6c As soon as I have taken off my (Cobalt) id) mcinc 5d)uf)e au^qqc^ shoes I take off my stockings. gen IjaOc/gic^c tcl) mcinc (Strtiinpfc au^. c What do you do after supper? 2BaS tfyun u fcf)(afft, cr fc^taft. b From this rule must be excepted the conjunctions which serve to unite sentences (See Lesson XLVIL) ; they leave the subject in its place and throw the verb to the end of the sentence. " c See 06*. C. Lesson XXXI V. 168 Does your father still sleep 1 He does still sleep. To live. Is your relation still alive 1 He is no longer alive (he is dead). Without. Without money. Without speaking. Without saying anything. To go away gone away. He went away without saying anything. At last. To arrive arrived. Has he arrived at last ? He has not arrived yet. Does he come at last? He does come. To give away given away. To cut off cut off (past part.). Has he given away anything ? He has given away his coat. To cut one's throat. They have cut his throat. To crop a dog's ears. What have they done to him ? They have cut off his ears. Aloud. anbtet nod) ? t (Sc lebt md)t mefyr. ) I) n c (is followed by $u before the infinitive). Sfoie c(b. t )f)nc gu fprcdjen. f )f)ne etwag $u facjcn. 2B e a, $ c f) e n * -w c a, 3 e 9 a n 9 c n. Imperf. 9 t n 9. r ging wc^, c^nc ctwa^ su fagcn. (5 n b ( t d> . 7C n ! c m in c n * a n g e ! o m m c n. Imperf. 6 a m. Sit cc cnfcttdj angcfommcn 1 @c ijt nod) nid)t anqcEommcn. ^cmmtcc @t fommt. 8S e cj 9 c 6 c n* Imperf. g a 0. t c n. Imperf. f d) n 1 1 1 ^at cr ctmag (Sr (;at btc Dfjrcn afcfdfyneU ben |>a{$ aOfd)nctt>cn *. if)tn ben fcbnttten. (Stncm ben *. ftc t^ bafrcn ibm bic D^cen fd)nittcn. Cant. Does your master speak aloud ! @prtd)t %fo Odjrct (aut ? He does speak aloud. (Sc fprtd)t (aut. la order to learn German, one Urn bcutfd) ju letncn, mufj man (aut must speak aloud. [prcd)cn. EXERCISES. 138. Hadst thou the intention to learn English 1 I had the intention to learn it, but I had not a good master. Did your brother intend 169 >*. to buy a carriage ? He did intend to buy one, but he had no more money. Why did you work ] I worked in order to learn Ger- man. Why did you love that man ] I loved him because he loved me. Have you already seen the son of the capt.iin ? I have already seen him. Did he speak French ] He spoke English. Where were you then (Lesson XL VIII. )? I was in Germany. Did you speak German or English 1 I spoke neither German nor English, but French. Did the Germans speak French ? At first they spoke German, afterwards French. Did they speak as well as you 1 They spoke just as well as you and L What do you do in the evening. I work as soon as I have supped. And what do you do afterwards 1 Afterwards I sleep. When do you drink ] I drink as soon as I have eaten. When do you sleep ] I sleep as soon as I have supped. Dost thou speak German 1 I spoke it formerly. Dost thou take off thy hat before thou takest off thy coat 1 I take off my hat as soon as I have taken off my clothes. What do you do after breakfast 1 As soon as I have breakfasted I go out. Art ihou sleeping ] You see that I am not sleeping. Does thy brother still sleep ] He does still sleep. Have you tried to speak to my uncle ? I have not tried to speak to him. Has he spoken to you ? As soon as lie sees me, he speaks to me. Are your parents still alive ] They are still alive. Is your friend^s brother still alive ? He is no longer alive. 139. Have you spoken to the merchant? I have spoken to him. Where have you spoken to him ? I have spoken to him at my house (fret nur). What has hes aid ] He went away without say- ing anything. Can you work without speaking ] I can work, but not study German, without speaking. Do you speak aloud when (iwnn) you are studying German 1 I do speak aloud. Can you understand me 1 I can understand you when (roenn) you speak aloud. Wilt thou go for some wine 1 1 cannot go for wine withont money. Have you bought any horses ] I do not buy without money. Has your father arrived at last] He has arrived. When did he arrive 1 This morning at four o'clock. Has your cousin set out at last ] He has not set out yet. Have you at last found a good master 1 I have at last found one. Are you at last learning English 1 I am at last learning it. Why did you not learn it al- ready 1 Because I had not a good master. Are you waiting for any one] I am waiting for my physician 1 Is he coming at last ? You see that he is not yet coming. Have you the head-ache "? No, I have sore eyes. Then you must wait for the physician. Have you given away anything 1 I have not given away anything. What has your uncle given away ? He has given away his old clothes. Hast thou given away anything? I had not anything to give away. What has thy brother given away ? He has given away his old boots and his old shoes. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 170 FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. 3\ r e n. O&s. A. The learner must remember that tt)erben % not fetn*, is the verb which serves to form the passive voice (Lesson LV.}. The past participle of the former is ttwrbert, and that of the latter getoefen, (Lesson XLL) Have you been praised "? (Stnb te gcfefrt rcerbcn ? I have been praised. 3d) bin gdo&t roorbcn. Hast thou been blamed ? 93ift >u gctafcdt roorbcn ? I have not been blamed. 3d) Otn md)t gctaMt roorbcn. Have we been loved 1 ttnr gclicbt worsen ? By whom has he been punished 1 >en worn ijt cr gcftraft wcrbcn ? He has been punished by his arb or nmrfce er roarb or nmrbc. Thou becamest. u marbft or wurbcft. 5. In all the other tenses and persons, toerben*, to become, is conjugated as the verb which serves to form the passive voice. (See Lesson LV. and above.) * Not ttiorbcn, which is the past participle of the verb that serves to form the passive voice, as may be seen above, 171 Have you become a merchant] (ginb U' .ftaufmann gcivertcn ? 1 have become a lawyer. 3d) bin Httntfat gcruerben. He has taken the degrees of a f (r tft Doctor geroorbcn. doctor. The king, bcr .fto'ntg ; the successor, bcr 97ad)fefgcr ; b the lawyer (barrister at law), bcr tfbwtat (See Note , Lesson L1V.) ; the office, the employment, ba$ 2(mt. Learned. ctcfyrt. To fall sick. > , To be taken ill. $ t Stan! rocrbcn *. To recover, to grow well. > , To recover one's health. 1 1 *M* bcn *. He was taken ill. j @r roarb franf. He has recovered his health. f (T tft o/funb gcrocrbcn. What has become of him ! 5" a W au tf)m gctvcrbcn ? (. 9Sc tft cr fnngcfommcn ? He has turned soldier. (Sr ift Gftflbot gCttMrtoflt He has enlisted. (Sr bat j'tcl) anivcrbcn laflicn. To enlist, to enroll. 5" f^' flt Wtfr ^ *; - , C 6>ttft annxrbcn taffcn*. Children become men. 2(u$ ^tnbcrn wcrtcn Scute. To tear torn. To snatch snatched. I tore we tore. 3d) rt rc>tt riffcn. Thou torest you tore. 2)u rtffcft 3fa tiffct (8te rtffcn). He snatched it out of my hands. <5r rt9 c^ mir cwg ben ^a'nbcn. What did he snatch out of your 28a$ rip cr Sfyncn au^ ben anbcn 1 hands ? When. 2(U (b a, wcnn). (See Lesson XL VII.) I was there, when you were 3d) war ba 7 al$ ^te ba warcn. there. Next year. 9?acf)ftc$ 3abr. Last month. QSortgcn ((efetcn) 5Kcnat. Last Monday. gcten 9}icntacj. Next, tiachft ; last, pcrtg, (c^t. When was he in Berlin ? 20$ann roar cr tn SBcrttn ? He was there last winter. ($r n?ar ocrtqcn 2Btntcr ba. When will you go to Berlin 1 SSann roellen ic nac^ Scrltn rctfcn ? b Masculine substantives derived from a regular v^rb do not soften jhe radi- cal vowel in the plural, as : s ji a c^ folder, which is derived from nacfyfolgeit, to follow, to succeed ; plur. He -ftacfefolger, the successors. c The verb ret^eu, to tear, to pull, to wrest, must not be mistaken for $er* tcipeu, which means : to tear to pieces, to rend, to burst asunder. ^ >$Kei|5cn* cjeriffen. 172 I will go thither next summer. 3d) nnft nad)fhm emitter tafyitt retfetu So that. (So t a ' (See Lesson XLVIL). I have lost my money, so that I 3cf) fyafte mctn d5e(t ccdorcn, fo tap cannot pay you. id) re$tcn. Which way has he taken ? SBclrfjcn SBcg fyat cr genemmen? He has taken the way to Leipzic. @r ()at ten SBea, nad) Cctp^ia, genems men. Which way will you take 1 OGBctdbcn Beg tvotlen ie neljmcn ? I will take this way. 3d) will ttcfcn Beg nefymcn. And I that one. Unt id) icneiu EXERCISES. 140. Why has that child been praised ? It has been praised, because it has studied well. Hast thou ever been praised 1 I have often been praised. Why has that other child been punished 1 It has been punished, because it has been naughty and idle. Has this child been rewarded ? It has been rewarded, because it has worked well. When was that man punished ? He was punished last month. Why have we been esteemed? Because we have been studious and obedient. Why have these people been hated 1 Be- cause they have been disobedient. Were you loved when you were at Dresden] I was not hated. Was your brother esteemed when he was in London ? He was loved and esteemed. When were you in Spain ? I was there when you were there. Who was loved and who was hated ? Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those who were naughty, idle, and disobedient, were punished, hated and despised. What must one do, in order not to be despised 1 One must be studious and good. Were you in Berlin when the king was there? I was there when he was there. Was your uncle in London when I was there ] He was there when you were there. Where were you when 1 was at Dres- den ? I was in Paris. Where was your father when you were in Vienna ? He was in England. At what time did you breakfast when you were in Germany 1 I breakfasted when my father break- fasted. Did you work when he was working? I studied when he was working. Did your brother work when you were working ? He played when I was working. 141. What has become of your friend 1 He has become a lawyer. What has become of your cousin ? He has enlisted. Was your 173 uncle taken ill ? He was taken ill, and I became his successor in his office. Why did this man not work ] He could not work, be- cause he was taken ill. Has he recovered 1 He has recovered. What has become of him 1 He has turned a merchant. What has become of his children 1 His children have become men. What has become of your son 1 He has become a great man. Has he become learned ] He has become learned (cf>). What has become of my book ? I do not know what has become of it. Have you torn it ? I have not torn it. What has become of our neighbour 1 ? I do not know what has become of him. Did they wrest the book out of your hands 1 They did wrest it out of my hands. Did you wrest the book out of his hands ? I did wrest it out of his hands. When did your father set out 1 He set out last Tuesday. Which way has he taken 1 He has taken the way to Berlin. When were you in Dresden ] I w r as there last year. Did you stay there long 1 I stayed there nearly a month. Has my brother paid you 1 He has lost all (Obs. B., Lesson XLIX.) his money, so that he cannot pay me. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SIXTIETH LESSON. Qet^Qte Action. Of whom, of which. 93 n b C lit, W t> n. Obs. A. Of which, when relating to a thing, may be translated by the preposition which the verb re- quires, added to the adverb ttXh I see the man of whom you 3d) fcfyc ben 90?ann, t> o n bcm (sen speak. nxlcrjcm) Sic fpred)cn. I have bough t the horse of which gcf) f)abe ta$ g)fcrfc getauft, en you spoke to me. b c m Sic mit nut cjcfprecfycn fyaben. Has your father the book of at 3f)t >ater ba$ SBud)/ n> D n which I am speaking ? tcl) fptcd)C 1 Whose. 5) c f f c n. Plur. b c r c n. The man whose. )et 93?ann, fccffcn. The child whose. )a$ ^tnt) x fccffi'n. The men whose. )tc SRa'nncr/ bereft* I see the man whose brother has Set) fcbc ten SRann, foeflcn 23rut>ct killed my dog. nvctncn unt> gcto'btct hat. Do you see the child whose fa- (Scbcn Sic ta$ jUnt>, fccffcn SSatcc ther set out yesterday ? cjcfK'tn abgcrcipt ift ? I do see it. ^scb fcf)C c^. I see the man whose dog you Set) fcbe ben Sfflann, tcficn ^)Unt) (Sic have killed. qctot)tct babcn. Do you see the people whose Sc'rjcn Sic t>tc Ocutc, tcrcn $fcrb id) horse I have bought ] cjcfcwft 174 I do see them. 3d) fcfjc fie. I have seen the merchant whose 3d) f)flbc ten jtaufmann cjefcfjcn, shop you have taken. tcffcn gaten Sic gcnommcn fyaben. DC? 9 Incidental or explicative propositions are placed either immediately after the word which they determine, or at the end of the principal proposition. 13d) fyabc nut tern SOtannc, fccffcn nu$ abgebtcmnt tft, gejpved)en. 3d) fyabc nut bcm 9J?annc gcfpredjcn, tcffen >au$ abgcbrannt ift. r2Cbbrenncn, (verb act. and neut. To burn burnt. < irreg.) abgcbrannt. Imperf. C b r a n n t c. akn (Sic t>a$ S3ud), ivcfcbc^ icr) 3f)ncn gcltc^cn babe, gctcfcn ? $abcn @ic t)ag S3ud) gcfcfcn icf) Sbncn gcjicfjcn i)abc ? I have what I want. 3d) fyabc, tt>ag id) braucbc. That, the one of which. SD a $/ t) c f f c n. Have you the paper of which abcn a$ papier, tcffcn Sie you have need ] benotfjigt finb ? I have that of which I have need. 3d) fyaOc fca*/ fccffcn id) bcnb'tfjigt bin. DATIVE. GEN. That, the one of which, ( M. ter, fcon n)drf)em-ber, beffen, of whom. \ N. t)a0,t)0tt n)e[rf)em-ba^,beffett> I see the man of whom I speak. 3d) fcbc ben Sftcmn, son nxtdjcm id& fprcd)C. I see the one of whom I am 3d) fcftc t>cn (bcnjcntgcn), cn rocU speaking to you. d)em icl) nut 3fynen |"prcd)C. (See Lesson XII.) Which book have you 1 2Bc(d)es SBud) ftaben (Sic ? I have that (the one) of which I 3d) fyflfcc tag (fcaSjcntcjO, tcffcn ic^ have need. bcnotfyigt bin. DATIVE. GEN. Those, the ones of which. g JJJ bie, berem Which men do you see "? 2Bckf)C Banner fcfjcn (Sic ? I see those of whom you have 3d) fcfyc tic (fcicjcnicjcn), tcn welt spoken to me. cl)cn (son tcncn) (Sic ntit nut Qcfurodxn l)abcn. (See Lesson XIV.) 175 Which nails has the man? 908cld)e Sftacjcl fyat jDer He has those of which he has (t Ijot ttc (DiqcutQcn), tcccn cr bt* need. notfytcjt t)l DAT. Plur. To whom. & c n c n . I seethe children to whom you 3d) fefjc tic tnbcr, be tun Sic gave apples. 2Ccpfcl cjcgcOcn fjabcru Of those. 2$en bcncn (dative). Of which people do you speak 1 SScn nxtcfycn Scutcn rcfccn c ren t> en c n (tcnjcnigcn), have been assiduous. t>mn Jlinfccr pctpig gct&cfcn finfc. DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE when it is used instead of either The demonstrative pronouns btefer, jetter, the determi- native pronoun berjemge,or the relative pronoun tt>ekf)er* (See Obs. Lessons XII. and XIV.) Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural for all genders. NOM. ber tie ba bie (TEN. beflfen (beg) berett beffen (beg) berer (beren) DAT, bent ber bent benett Ace. ben bic bag bie* B. In the genitive singular masculine and neuter, beg is often used instead of beften, chiefly in poe- try and compound words. Obs. C. When the definite article is used instead of ttttfcfyer, its genitive plural is not berer, but beren. (See Obs. Lesson XIV.) EXERCISES. 142. Did your cousin learn German 1 He was taken ill, so that he could not learn it. Has your brother learnt it 1 He had not a good master, so that he could not learn it. Do you go to the ball this evening 1 I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. Did you understand that Englishman 1 ? I do not know English, so that I could not understand him. Have you bought that horse 1 I had no money, so that I could not buy it. Do you go into the country on foot ] I have no carriage, so that I must go thither on foot. Have you seen the man from whom I received a present ] I have not seen him. Have you seen the fine horse of which I spoke to you 1 I have seen it. Has your uncle seen the books of which 176 you spoke to him] He has seen them. Hast thon seen the man whose children have been punished? I have not seen him. To whom were you speaking when you were in the theatre ] I was speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. Have you seen the little boy whose father has become a lawyer ] I have seen him. Whom have you seen at the ball 1 I have seen the people there whose horses and those whose carriage you bought. Whom do you see now 1 I see the man whose servant has broken my looking-glass. Have you heard the man whose friend has lent me money I I have not heard him. Whom have you heard ? I have heard the French captain whose son is- my friend. Hast thou brushed the coat of which I spoke to you] I have not yet brushed it. Have you received the money which you were wanting] I have received it. Have I the paper of which I have need ] You have it. Has your brother the books which he was wanting 1 He has them. Have you spoken to the merchants whose shop we have taken ] We have spoken to them. Have you spoken to the physician whose son has studied German ] I have spoken to him. Hast thou seen the poor people whose houses have been burnt ? I have seen them. Have you read the books which we lent to you ] We have read them. What do you say of them 1 We say that they are very fine. Have your children what they want ] They have what they want* 143. Of which man do you speak ] I speak of the one whose brother has turned soldier. Of which children did you speak? I spoke of those whose parents are learned. Which book have you read ? I have read that of which I spoke to you yesterday. Which paper has your cousin ? He has that of which he has need. Which fishes has he eaten 1 He has eaten those which you do not like. Of which books are you in want ? I am in want of those of which you have spoken to me. Are you not in want of those which I am reading T I am not in want of them. Is any one in want of the coats of which my tailor has spoken to me? No one is in want of them. Do you see the children to whom I have given cakes 1 I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, but those whom you have punished. To whom have you given m oney '! I have given some to those who gave me some. To which children must one give books ] One must give some to those who learn well and who are good and obedient.-^To whom do you give to eat and to drink? To those who are hungry and thirsty Do you give anything to the children who are idle 1 I give them nothing. What sort of weather was it when you went (gtltgen) out ] It was raining and very windy. Do you give cakes to your pupils 1 They have not studied well, so that I give them nothing. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 177 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. in un& sedj}igste Action. To forget forgotten. 9S e t g ef f en * ocr gcffcn. Forgot. Imperf. 23 e v 0, a fj . Thou forgettest he forgets. )n wrgiffcft cr tcrcu't. I have forgotten to do it. sd) (jabc wra,cffen, c$ JU thun. Has he forgotten to bring you the at cr wrcjcftcn, Sfyncn bag S3 u eft JU book? bringcn"? He has forgotten to bring it me. (r fyat fcrgeffen, eg nitr $u trins gen. !(ic fyakn cnjcflcn, an mid) $u fdjrcU 6cn. (Sic ^aku tKtgejfen/ nut ^u fc^rei* ten. To belong. C I) 6 t C n . Does this horse belong to your cf)6'rt btcfcg 9>fcrb brother 1 tcr ? It does belong to him. (5$ $c()6'rt tfim. To whom does this table belong 1 955cm $cf)0tt t)tcfcr S'tfcf) ? It belongs to us. ag ftebt Sbnen feljt gut. To suit (please} suited. 2C n ft e b e n * angcfUnben. Imperf. ft a n b. Does this cloth suit (please) your crfaufcn ? They do succeed therein. f G$ Qcltngt tl)ncn. There is. <5 i ft. TAere are. <$ fint). Is there any wine ? Sf! SOBctn to? There is some. ($ ijlt wc(d)cr t)a, Are there any apples I info 2Cepfcl ta ? There are some. & ftnb W)ctd)C ba. There are none. (5^ jint) fetne t>a, Are there any men ? (Sint) ?cutc t>a ? There are some. C* ftnb cintc^ ba. Z). The impersonal verb there is, there are, is translated by ed ifi, e^ ftnb, when it expresses exist- ence in a certain place, and by e gtbt, when it expres- ses existence in general. Ex. There are men who will not stu- & gt&t gftenfcfyen, wcldje nidjt dy. ten rooltcn. Is there any one 1 %ft Semanb ba ? There is no one. <$ iff 9^icmanb ba. Has a man been there 1 3ft ctn 5)iann ba a,enxfcn t There has been one there. ($ ift ctncc ba gctvcfcn. Were many people there ? Baren uictc Scute ba ? There were a great many there. 5 rcatcn fcfyt tncle ba. To clean. Stetnigctt/rein Clean. 9?ctn. The inkstand, ba$ Stntcnfa^. Will you clean my inkstand ? SBeflcn @ie wctn ^intcnfap rctnts a,cn ? I will clean it. 3d) n?itt c^ rctntgcn. 180 To keep kept. 33 c fj a 1 1 c n*. JTe/?/. Imperf. S5 e f) i c 1 1. Will you keep the horse 1 Gotten tc t>ci$ $fctt> ktyattcn ? I will keep it. 3d) rotll c* kfjalten. You must not keep my money. t ten. Directly, immediately. This instant. JDtcfcn 2CuQCnbltct Instantly. I will do it. 3d) nritt c$ tfjuti. I will do it immediately* 3d) n>iU c* fog(t'td) tfyun. I am going to work. 3d) will atbeitcn. Some conjunctions do not throw the verb to the end of the phrase (See Lesson XL VII.), but leave it in its place immediately after the subject. They are the following : llnb, and ; entrocbct eK't, either or ; oOcc or atletn, but ; roefcer tied), neither nor ; fenfccrn, but (on the contrary) ; fcn?ol)l G(, ? as fccnn, for ; fetvofyt o(s aud), < cfcet, or ; tud)t nur fonfoern cwd), not only but also. I cannot pay you, for I have no 3d) frinn jSic ntd)t &c$aF}fen, t>erm td> money (because I have no ftofec !cin cl& (n>ci( id) fcin < money). fyabc). He cannot come to your house, (r fann nid)t gtt 35ncn for he has no time. tcnn cr fyat nid)t Beit. EXERCISES. 144. Have you brought me the book which you promised me ] I have forgotten it. Has your uncle brought you the handkerchiefs which he promised you ] He has forgotten to bring me them. Have you already written to your friend ] I have not yet had time to write to him. Have you forgotten to write to your parent ] I have not forgotten to write to him. To whom does this house belong] It belongs to the English captain whose son has written a letter to us. Does this money belong to thee ] It does belong to me. From whom hast thou received it ? I have received it from the men whose children you have seen. To whom do those woods belong] They belong to the king. Whose horses are those] They are ours. Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him here] I have forgotten to tell him so. Is it your father or mine who is gone into the country ] It is mine, Is it your baker or that of our friend who has sold you bread on 181 credit 1 It is ours. Is that your son ? He is (($ tft) not mine, he is my friend's. Where is yours 1 He is at Dresden. Does this cloth suit you 1 It does not suit me, have you no other ]- I have some other; but it is dearer than this. Will you show it to me 1 I will show it to you. Do these boots suit your uncle 1 They do not suit him, because .they are too dear. Are these the boots of which you have spoken to us ? They are the same. Whose shoes are these 1 They belong to the gentleman whom you have seen this morning in my shop. Does it suit you to go with us ] It does not suit me. Does it become you to go to the market 1 It does not become me to go thither. Did you go on foot into the country 1 It does not become me to go on foot, so that I went thither in a carriage. 145. What is your pleasure, Sir ? I am inquiring after your father. Is he at home 1 No, Sir, he is gone out. What is your pleasure 1 I tell you that he is gone out. Will you wait till he comes back again 1 I have no time to wait. Does this merchant sell on credit 1 He does not sell on credit. Does it suit you to buy for cash 1 It does not suit me. Where have you bought these pretty knives'? I have bought them at the merchant's whose shop you saw yesterday. Has he sold them to you on credit ? He has sold them to me for cash. Do you often buy for cash 1 Not so often as you. Have you forgotten anything here 1 I have forgotten nothing. Does it suit you to learn this by heart 1 I have not a good memory, so that it does not suit me to learn by heart. 146. Has this man tried to speak to the king? He has tried to speak to him, but he has not succeeded in it. Have you succeeded in writing a letter 1 I have succeeded in it. Have those merchants succeeded in selling their horses 1 They have not succeeded therein. Have you tried to clean my inkstand ] I have tried, but have not succeeded in it. Do your children succeed in learning the English 1 They do succeed in it. Is there any wine in this cask ? There is some in it (fcartn). Is there any brandy in this glass 1 There is none in it. Is wine or water in it ] There is neither wine nor water in it. What is there in it 1 There is vinegar in it. Are there any men in your room ] There are some there Is there any one in the store-house? There is no one there. Were there many people in the theatre 1 There were many there. Are there many children that will not play? There are many that will not study, but few that will not play. Hast thou cleaned my trunk ] I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. Do you intend buying an umbrella ? I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me on credit. Do you intend keeping mine ? I intend giving it back again to you, if I buy one. Have you re- 182 turned the books to my brother ? I have not returned them yet to him. How long do you intend keeping them 1 I intend keeping them till I have read them. How long do you intend keeping my horse? I intend keeping it till my father returns. Have you cleaned my knife ] I have not had time yet, but I will do it this instant. Have you made a fire ? Not yet, but I will make one (tDdcrjC*) immediately.- Why have you not worked ] I have not yet been able. What had you to do 1 I had to clean your table, and to mend your thread stockings. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. %mi ttnir To run part, past run. Thou runnest he runs. To run away. Behind (a preposition). To be sitting behind the oven. Caufen* 9 el a uf en (takes fctn for its auxiliary). Imperf. lief. >u Wufll et Wufl. SQBcgtaufcn** .ptntet (governs the dative and accusative). $tntct bem )fen ft|en*. Imperf. He ran behind the oven. (gt lief Ijtntet ben jDfen Where is he running to ? 2Bcf)tn (a'uft et 1 He is running behind the house. (5t Iciuft fjmtet bag Where has he run to 1 2Bo ift et The oven, the stove, bet )fen ; the blow, the knock, the kick, the stab, Have you given that man blow] I have given him one. A blow with a stick, beatings with a stick, the stab of a knife, the kick (with the foot), a blow (with the fist), blows (with the fist), the sword, the stab of a sword, the sabre, To push pushed. tcr dblag, bet t>ct ct Sritt; bet (Sttd). tc biefcm Qftanne etnen gegcbcn ? Scl) fabe tfjm ctnen gcgcben. etn ^d)(ag nut betn tocfe ; bet bet Sritt (nut bcm etn (cl)(ag (nut bet gaujt) ; bet 3)egen ; bet Dcgenfti bet topen* fliep. Imperf. 183 Thou pushest he pushes. Ht ftojkjt cr ftot. To beat. $>rttgcfo (ferfd)tct>cnc 9^a( nad) i^m gefdjeffcn. I have heard a shot. 3ct) ^be ctncn g(tntcn[d)up $ef)6rt He has heard the report of a tc TCugcn) nuf Scmcm* or something. ten efccr euvaS rocrfvn*. Have you cast an eye upon that $ciben ef) tfnw*. m i ! Scmantcm cm 8eit tbim*. To hurt some one. ^ Scn^tvm '* tbun*. [ 3emflnfccm JBofcS sufugcn. The injury, the damage, frcr (Scfyafccn. To cause (to do). 3 u f u g e n / c r u r f a d) e n . To prejudice some one. 3cmant>fni d)at>en guffigcn. It is a pity. f C'5 tjl abcn en (te ttefcm SKannc cm Setb getl?an ! I have not hurt him. 3d) ()al>e thin nid)t<5 ffidfc^ gct^an. Does this hurt you? S&ut tag 36 IU *n ivcf) ? It does hurt me. @g tr)ut mir ivcl). Have I hurt you ? j^aOc id) 3bncn ivcb You have not hurt me. @ic F;abcn mir ntd)t i Harm. S3 o f c ^. Have I ever done you any harm! aOc id) 3f)"?n je 236'fcS i On the contrary. 3m Q&gentfjetf. No, on the contrary, you have Sictn/ tm cgcntftcit/ Sic ^o6cn mir done me good. utc gctfjan (crrviefcn). I have never done harm to any 3d) Ijnbe nie 3emant>em ctroag 311 one. 8cii gctban. To do good to anybody. 3emnnt>cm utc$ t^un* (crweis fen*). To show shown. (Srn?etfv'n* ertxncfen. Imperf. cr* To be good for the health, to be 3utrffgltdj wholesome. efunD That does mp o-ood 5" ^ tc * tf)ut " lic wc ^ le good. . cg . p mic Jutc&a( . 186 What does the servant do with 8a$ matf)t t>cc 23et>tente nut feincm his broom ? SBcfcn ? He sweeps the room with it. a$ Simmer bamtt au. What does he wish to make out SQBaS roitt cr au$ fctcjcm ^>o(jc mas of this wood ? d)cn ? He does not wish to make any- <5r nritt ntdjtS fcaranS macfjcn. thing of it. To pass hy the side of some one. 2Cn Semanbem 90t6ctger)en *. I pass by the side of him. 3d) Qefye an ifjm ocrbet. Have you passed by the side of cr t>or? my brother? bci()cgangcn? I have passed by the side of him. 3d) bin an ir)m DOtfocta^angen. To throw away. He has thrown away his money. Cr feat fcin (3>clt> roea^eroorfen. Before. S3 r (dative and accusative). To pass before a place. $or cittern )rte t>ot&ctgcr)en * To pass by a place. tfn ctncm >tte wcMyfyin *. He has passed before my house. u 3ctt nut ctit>a$ jubrin^cn * or fytnOtincjcn*. Imperf. brought. 23rad)te. What do you spend your time in 1 Bomtt Ovmcjcn @tc btc 3ctt $u ? Rule. A demonstrative, relative, or interrogative pro- noun is never used with a preposition, when it relates to an indeterminate thing. Instead of the pronoun, one of the adverbs ba, too is joined to the preposition ; thus : baran, for an ba3 ; woran, for an tt>a$ ; rooranf, for auf tt>a3 ; ttomtt, for tntt tt>a3, &c. (See Obs. B. and C., Lesson LII.) I spend my time in studying. 3kb fringe btc Sett nut tubtrcn What has he spent his time in ? SEomtt (Jat ct btc 3cit To miss, to fail. S3 c t f c f) I c n x t) e r a fc f a u m c n. bringcn ucrabfa'umt (ocrfcMt). 3)ct Jlaufmann t)t lu'rabfaumt (tcrs fc()(t), ba^ e(b gu bttn^cn. You have missed your turn. (Sic bcibcn Sbw 3?eibe tcrfi $ f)tt. You have failed to come to me ic bobcn ocrfcfjtt/ bicfcn Bergen jU this morning. nitr ^u fciumcn. The turn, bic 9lctl)C. To hear. fy o t C n. To hear of some one. >on 3*numfcem 188 * Have you heard of my friend 1 .^afk'n >tc tten mctncm Jrcunfcc gc? Wrt? I have heard of him. Set) fea&e tton thm gcfyort. Of whom have you heard 1 93 en nxm IjaOcn it* gefyb'rt ? Have you heard nothing- new 1 .fra&cn if nicfyts 9?eue$ gcljert ? I hear that your father has ar- 2>rf) fyore, txijj 36? SSatcr cmgi'fems rived. men ift To assure. 33 C t ft cl) c rn (governs the dat.). Ofo. The verb tterjTcfyent requires the dative of the person, when followed by the conjunction ba$, expressed or understood ; otherwise it takes the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing, or the dative of the person and the accusative of the thing. Set) wrjidjcre Dorfe ? lage? TAer^. 5)afct6(l or ba. There is not a single good horse ($ gtbt fctn ctn^tgcS gutc^ $fcrb bas there. fflbft. The village, fcnS 2)orf ; single, cingtg. Are there many learned men in iOt c^ met ctc^vtc tn gran!rctc% ? France ? There are a good many there. (5$ gi&t fcf)t tictc bn. There are no apples this year. & gtfct fcinc 2Ccpfct To Je of use, to be good. a u g c n. To be good for something. 3u ettvaS taugcn. 189 Of what use is that ? 2Be$u tciUQt bag ? (Ofo. C., Les- son LIL, and Rule, page 187.) It is good for nothing. (5$ tauQt 511 md)t$. The good for nothing fellow, fcct gaugenid)t$ ; the fault, the defect, tct gef)Ur. Is the stuff which you have 3ft tor Seng/ ben @ie gcfauft bought good 1 gut 1 EXERCISES. 150. I do not see my gloves ; where are they 1 They are lying in the river. Who has thrown them into it ? Your servant, because they were no longer good for anything. What have you done with your money ? I have bought a house with it (franut). What has the, joiner done with that wood 1 He has made a table and two chairs of it. What has the tailor done w r ith the cloth which you gave him ? He has made clothes of it for (fur with the accus.) your children and mine. What has the baker done with the flour which you sold him 1 He has made bread of it for you and me. Have the horses been found 1 They have been found. Where have they been found 1 They have been found behind the wood, on this side (Lesson L.) of the river. Have you been seen by anybody ? I have been seen by nobody. Have you passed by anybody 1 I passed by the side of you, and you did not see me. Has any one passed by the side of you 1 No one has passed by the side of me. 151. Do you expect (Lesson XLVII.) any one ? I do expect my cousin, the officer. Have you not seen him 1 I have seen him this morning ; he has passed before my house. What does this young man wait for (Obs. C., Lesson LIL and page 187) ? He waits for money. Art thou waiting for anything? I am waiting for my book. Is this young man waiting for his money ] He is waiting for it. Has the king passed (in the carriage) here (fnct roorOct) ? He has not passed here, but before the the- atre. Has he not passed before the new fountain ? He has passed there ; but I have not seen him. What do you spend your time in ? I spend my time in studying. What does your brother spend his time in ? He spends his time in reading and playing. Does this man spend his time in working ? He is a good for nothing fellow ; he spends his time in drinking and playing. What did you spend your time in, when you were at Berlin? When I was at Berlin, I spent my time in studying, and riding on horseback. What do your children spend their time in 1 They spend their time in learning. Can you pay me what you owe me ? I cannot pay it to you, for our bailiff has failed to bring me my 190 money. Why have you breakfasted without me? You failed to come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. Has the merchant brought you the stuff which you bought at his house (-bci ifym) ] He has failed to bring it to me. Has he sold it to you on credit ] He has sold it to me, on the contrary, for cash. Do you know those men] I do not know them; but I think that they (c$) are good for nothing fellows, for they spend their time in playing. Why did you fail to come to my father this morning 1 The tailor did not bring me the coat which he promised me, so that I could not go to him. 152. Have you heard of any one 1 I have not heard of any one, for 1 have not gone out this morning. Have you not heard of the officer who has killed a soldier ] I have not heard of him. Have you heard of my brothers ] I have not heard of them. Of whom has your cousin heard ] He has heard of a man to whom a misfortune has happened. Why have your scholars not done (gcmcid)t) the exercises] I assure you that they have done them. What have you done with my book ? I assure you that I have not seen it. Have you had my knives ] I assure you that I have not had them. Has your uncle arrived already ] He has not arrived yet. Will you wait till he returns ] I cannot wait, for I have long letters to write. What have you heard new ] I have heard nothing 1 new. Has the king assured you of his assistance 1 ? He has assured me of it (fceffen, Obs. Lesson XVI.). What has happened to you ] A great misfortune has happened to me. What] I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with his stick. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. JTunf tmfc 0ecl)?ig$te How long is it since ? SOStc fonqe tft e fd)0tt, tap ? It is long since. ($ tft fdjon langc, bap. Is it long since you breakfasted 1 3ft t* fd)0n (ano,c, bap or etnem Sab** gi'fc- ben. Two years ago. 93er $roci 3abren. An hour and a half ago. 93or anbertbatO (Stunbctt. Two hours and a half ago. 83er brtttbato tunben. Is it long since you are in 3)1 c$ fd>cn fano,c, bap (Sic in grant's France ] rotcl) finb ? Have you been long in France 1 f tnfc te fdjcn (ano,e in rctcb ? He has been in Paris these three C f r tft fett brci Sabtcn in years. ^ j @r iff (ebon brct Sabre in How long is it since he was gffitc (ange tft c^ bap cr bier war ? here"? He was here a fortnight ago. <5r war t)0r mcqcbn Sagcn b'^'t. It is but a year since. atHtcjmal ty times. gefcfycn. More than a hundred times. Sftefyt al$ fyunt>ettma(. Since. c i t (a preposition governing the dative). How long ? t@ c ttroann? How long has he been here ? f ^ctt roann tfl cr fytct ? These three days. f (gctt tret S This month. f ctt ctncm To c0s. $ o f! c n (is an impersonal verb governing the dative of the person)* How much does this book cost SBiwcl fcftct Sfyncn fctcfcS you? It costs m e three crowns and . gg nan* j rvt / !5)tefcr Sifd) fcpct t^ ben. 5)tcfcc SifcJ) fefkt ifjm ficfccn ctncn Oalbcn utbcn. jB. The adjective ^at6, half, is declined when before a substantive ; but it is not declined in fraction- al numbers, as anbertfyalb, one and a half, compounded of ber cmbere (jtoette), the second, and fyalb, half; britt* halb, two and a half, compounded of ber britte, the third, and fyalb, half. To purchase (to buy). <5 i n I a u f c n. "What have you purchased to- SSag ftafifn 1C f)cutc ctn^cfauft ? day? I have purchased three pair of 3cl) fiflt>c brci ^?aar ^cf)ube un^ shoes, and two pair of boots. groci ^)aar (Sttcfct ctngefanft. Have you purchased anything abcn tc I;cutc ctwag ctmjcfcwft 1 to-day 1 C. The names of \veights, measures, and quantities, as well as the word SWamt, man, meaning a soldier, are not used in the plural, when preceded by a noun of number. My father has bought twenty gflc'tn Skater f)at 3tt>an$tg pounds of sugar. Sucfcr cjefruiff. Three quires of paper. >Dm 9ft It (6 Rapier. A regiment of a thousand men. (Sin Regiment t*cn taufcn^ 9JJ fl n n. 193 The pound (weight), fc ; the dozen, fca6 JDu&cnfo the pair, fca* )aar ; the quire of paper, fcnS 35 ud) p the foot (measure), frcr $u$, fcct a$ $Hc$imcnt ; the ring, bet the picture, fcas ( EXERCISES. 153. Have you ever been in this village ? I have been there several times. Are there good horses in it ? There is not a single one in it. Have you ever been in that country 1 I have been there once. Are there many learned men there ? There are many there, but they spend their time in reading. Are there many studious chil- dren in that village ? There are some, but there are also others who will not study. Are the peasants of this village able to read and write ] Some are able to read, others to write and not to read, and many both to read and to write; there are a few who are neither able to read nor to write. Have you done the exercises 1 We have done them. Are there any faults in them ? There are no faults in them, for we have been very assiduous. Has your friend many children? He has only one, but who is a good for nothing fellow, for he will not study. In what does he spend his time 1 He spends his time in playing and running. Why does his father not punish him? He has not the courage to punish him. What have you done with the stuff which you bought? I have thrown it away, for it was good for nothing. Have you thrown away your apples ] I tasted (them), and found them very good, so that I have eaten them. 154. Have you been long in Paris ? These four years. Has your brother been long in London 1 ? He has been there these ten years. -Is it long since you dined ? It is long since I dined, but not long since I supped. How long is it since you supped ? It is two hours and a half. Is it long since you received a letter from your father ] It is not long since I received one. How long is it since you received a letter from your friend who is in Germany] It is three months since I received one. Is it long since you spoke to the man whose son has lent you money 1 It is not long since I spoke to him. Is it long since you saw your parents 1 It is a great while since I saw them, Has the son of my friend been living long in your house ? He has been living there a fortnight (ricr$d)n SiU]0- How long have you had these books 1 I have Jiad them these three months. How long is it since your cousin set cut? It is more than a month since he set out. What is be- 9 194 come of the man who spoke English so well ? I do not know what is become of him, for it is a great while since I saw him. - Is it long since you heard of the officer who gave your friend a stab with his sword? It is more than a year since I heard of him. How long have you been learning German ? I have been learn- ing it only these three months. Are you already able to speak it? You see that I arn beginning to speak it. Have the children of the French noblemen been learning it long ? They have been learning it these five years, and they do not yet begin to speak. Why can they not speak it 1 They cannot speak it, because they are learning it badly. Why do they not learn it well? Tney have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 155. Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German with (bet) the same master with whom we learnt it ? I have not seen him for nearly a year. How long is it since that child ate? It ate a few minutes (Lesson XL VII. Note d ) ago. How long is it since those children drank 1 They drank a quarter of an hour ago. How long has your friend been in Spain 1 He has been there this month. How often have you seen the king 1 I saw him more than ten times when I was in Paris. When did you meet my brother 1 I met him a fortnight ago. Where did you meet him 1 In (2(uf) the great square ($)la) before the theatre. Did he do you any harm ? He did me no harm, for he is a very good boy. Has your son long been able to read ? These two days only. With (SBct) whom has he learnt it? He has learnt it with (bci) the Ger- man tutor. How long have you been spending your time in study- ing ? Nearly these twenty years. Have you purchased anything to-day ? I have purchased something. What have you bought ? I have bought three casks of wine and thirty pounds of sugar. Have you not bought any stockings ? I have bought nine pair of them. Have you also bought handkerchiefs ? I have bought two dozen of them. Why have you not bought gold rings ? I could not buy anything more, for I had no more money. Are there many soldiers in your country ? There is a regiment of three thousand men there. How long have I kept your cousin's money ? You have kept it almost a year. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. gedjs tmb Cation. Just now. (So often. I have just seen your brother. 3cb fabc fo c&cn Sfacn 93ruter fycn. 195 He has just written. <5r fycit fo cK'n 0>'fcf)riekn. The men have just arrived. 5)ie Scute fint> fo cfccn ongcfommctu To spend money. 1( \\ 6 9 c ft c n *. How much have you spent to- Biewd fyofcen cn ? day? To spend (to eat, to consume). SSer^efyrcn. What am I to pay 1 t %&** We id) t>er$ef)rt ? How much has he spent at the } SBtcstcl fyat cr feet fcem SSittljc inn 1 t>crjcf)rt ? He has fifty crowns a month to f (r ()at ten SGRenat funftig live upon. $u To squander, to dissipate, 95 C r f c^ W C n t) C n. lavish. He has squandered all his (5t r)at fctn gan^c^ SScrmogcn wealth. fdbrccnbet. The landlord, the innkeeper, fcct SBirtr) ; the wealth, the fortune, tag SSermocjcn ; entire, whole. gartj. rf 3Bof)cr fint) tc? SKo ftnb What countryman are you ] < t)cr ? C 935ag fur cin Sanb^mann 8 fint) From Venice. 85on (au^) SScncbtg. From London. 9Son (au$) Sonbon. I am from Dresden. 3d) bin aus )rc5t)en. Obs. A. The syllable er is the characteristic termi- nation of the masculine gender, b and signifies the per- son that performs or is accustomed to perform the thing expressed by the verb. This syllable joined to the name of a town or country, forms a substantive de- noting the man born in such a town or country. Ex. He is a saddler, cr tft cin t e n c n (governs the dative). To serve, to wait upon. < &$ c b t c n c n (governs the accu- ( sative). To serve some one, or to wait 3 C m o n b C m b t C n e n. upon some one. To be in one's service. S3 C t 3 C m a n b C m b i e n C n. Has he been in your service ? at er bci 3ftncn gebtcnt ? Does he serve you well 1 JBebtent cr f S)amtt ift nur ntd)t gebtcnt. It will not do for me. To spoil. Thou spoilest he spoils. You have spoiled my book. My book is spoiled, Has he spoiled my hat ? To damage. That hat fits you well. How does this hat fit me 1 It does not fit you. Most lovely, charming. Admirably. To dress, to fit, to sit well. fSScr bet t>cn* (verb. act. and \ neut. irreg.). j 3 u u gcmad)t) ? S5efd)abtgcn. SDtefcr &ut ftc^t 3bncn put. SOBtc ftc^t nur btcfcr ^ut ? (5r ftc^t 35cn ntd)t gut. ($u SBunberfdjcn. I e t b e n. Obs. B. The verb ffetben, when it signifies to jit, to sit well, is neuter ; but when it means to dress, to clothe, it is active, and governs the accusative in both signi- fications. d SlUer is the genitive plural of the word all, all. It is sometimes thus joined to the superlative to give it more strength. 107 That hat fits you admirably well. -Dtefcr 4Mit Rctbet Sic \ That coat fits him. 2)tefer JKccf Hettet U;n gut. My father clothes me. 9}?ctn Stater fteibet mid). God clothes the poor. ctt fteibet btc TCrmen. The man with the blue coat. 2)er 93iann nut bem Wauen .fttcibe. How was the child dressed? flGte roar bas ^inb gcfletbet? It was dressed in green. f (Sg roar griin gefleibct. How high ] of what height ] 2Bte fjocf) ? H6w deep ] of what depth ] SBic ticf ? Of what height is his house ? Bte Ijed) ift fi'tn It is nearly thirty feet high. & ift ungefahr breigig guff (Lesson LXV. Obs. C.) Trwe. SK a fj r. Is it true that his house has been 3ft c$ nxifjr, tap fcin &oug at>gcs burnt 1 Orannt i)t ? It is true. ($ ift roaljr. Is it not] (meaning, Is it not f 9^td)t wafjr ? true 1) The philosopher, tcr aKcftwctfc, bcc >pl)ttofeplj (gen. en). EXERCISES. 156. Who is the man who has just spoken to you ? He is a learned man. What has the shoemaker just brought] He has brought the boots and shoes which he has made us. Who are the men that have just arrived ] They are philosophers. Of what country are they] They are from London. W T ho is the man who has just started ? He is an Englishman, who has squandered away (cr fd)n>cnbct) all his fortune in France. What countryman are you ] I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Italian. Wilt thou go for the locksmith 1 Why must I go for the locksmith ] He (*Dcvfct()c) must make me a key, for I have lost the one belonging to my room (ben mcincS Simmers). Where did your uncle dine yesterday ? He dined at the innkeeper's. How much did he spend 1 He spent three florins. How much has he a month to live upon ? He has two hundred florins a month to live upon. Must I go for the sad- dler] You must go for him, for he must mend the saddle. Have you seen any one at the market ] I have seen a good many people there. How were they dressed ] Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. 157. Who are those men ] The one who is dressed in grey is my neighbour, and the one with the black coat the physician, whose eon has given my neighbour a blow with a stick. Who is the manf 198 with the green coat? He is one of my relations. Are you from Berlin? No, I am from Dresden. How much money have your children spent to-day ] They have spent J^ut little ; they have spent but one florin. Does that man serve you well 1 He does serve me well ; but he spends too much. Are you willing to take this servant 1 ? I am willing to take him if he will serve me. Can I take this servant 1 You can take him, for he has served me very well. How long is it since he (first) served you 1 ? It is but two months since. Has he served you long ] He has served me (for) six years. How much did you give him a year (t>e$ Sabre*) ? I gave him five hundred francs without clothing him. Did he board (7(9) with (bet) you] He did board with me. What did you give him to eat? I gave him whatever (son allem, nxi) 1 ate. Were you pleased with him 1 I was much (fchr) pleased with him. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) - SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. Quben ttttfc s Section. To trust with. tfnoerttctuen. To entrust, to confide, to commit SScrtraucn. in confidence. 1 trust you with my money. 3cf) ttertraue 3bnen niein clb an. He has trusted me with his mo- (*r fyat mir fetn clt> cmscrtrcwt. ney. I entrust you with a secret. 3cb ttcttrcwe Sfyncn etn ntp. To unbosom one's self to one. f (Std) Scntonbem ucrtroucn. The secret, ba efycimmp (plur. e a ). To keep anything secret. (tn?a gebcim fyaltcn. Imperf. fytctt. I have kept it secret. 3d) fjabe eg gefyei Secret (adjective). e&eim. To pity. 23 c f ( a 9 c n. With all my heart. f 93 en gcm$cm jbcrgcn. Do you pity that man] SBcHogcn (Sic fcicfcn 9)i I do pity him with all my heart. 3ct) bcHcige ifjn on gangcm $MZ 5cn. To offer offered. 2n(>teten* angebotcn. Imperf. b o t. I offer it you. 3d) btctc c^ 3^ncn an. R Neuter nouns terminating in jj, add e to all cases of the plural without * softening the radical vowel. 169 From. Slit ( a preposition governing the accusative). c C (gorge fiic ctrcaS ttaacn To take care of something. nc(m J cn ; ncfymen*. Neut. To take care of it. ifr '* fcforgen. To take care of the hat. >cn ut in 2Ccf)t ncfjmcn*. Imperf. ncibm. Do you take care of your clothes? 9?cfjmcn ct in 2(d)t? I do take care of them. t 3d) tiefyme fie in 2Cd)t. A There are in German many substantives, adverbs and other words and expressions which form one signification with the verb, as : mt3tt>enbtg lemen, to learn by heart ; b gem effen*, to like to eat (Lesson LIV.) ; fcf)iilbig fein*, to owe (Lesson XL VII.), &c. These are placed exactly like the separable particles (Lesson XXV.), but are never joined to the verb. C SBotten fcrb fcv* Will you take care of my horse ? < gen ? ( SBcttcn fcrb fccforgcn ? c Iwillta^caroofit. To take care. orgcn, The merchant of Hamburg. 2)ct ^amburget &aufmann. B. The genitive of names of towns is gener- ally expressed in German by an adjective. This is formed by adding the syllable et to the name, and is indeclinable. Ex. SINGULAR. PLURAL. f NOM. ter Seipjiger tubent bfe^ ?eip* The student 1 GEN, beg 8etp$tger tubenten ber I jtger of Leipzic. ] DAT. bent ?etp$tger tubenten ben [ tit^ i^Acc. ben ?etpjiger tubenten bt'ej betttem * This and the above examples show that such a construction is not alto- gether unusual in English. c The first of these two expressions is the best. | 200 The citizen (burgess) of London, tcr Conbencr the citizen of Paris, tor ^attfet S3urgcr ; the beer of Strasburg, t>a fetrapOurger EXERCISES. 158. Are there many philosophers in your country 1 ? There are as many there as in yours. How does this hat fit me 1 It fits you very well. How does this hat fit your brother 1 It fits him ad- mirably. Is your brother as tall (fltcjj) as you ? He is taller than I, but I am older than he. How high is this man ? He is five feet, four inches high. How high is the house of our landlord?^ It is sixty feet high. Is your well deep ] Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. How long have those men been in your father's service ? They have been in his service already more than three years. Has your cousin been long at Paris? He has been there nearly six years. Who has spoiled my knife ? Nobody has spoiled it, for it was spoiled when we were in want of it. Is it true that your uncle has arrived 1 I assure you that he has arrived. Is it true that the king has assured you of his assistance? I assure you that it is true. Is it true that the six thousand men whom we were ex- pecting have arrived ? I have heard so. Will you dine with us ? I cannot dine with you, for I have just eaten. Will your brother drink a glass (of) wine j He cannot drink, for, I assure you, he has just drunk. Do you throw away your hat 1 I do not throw it away, for it fits me admirably. Does your friend sell his coat ] He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully . There are many learned men in Berlin, are there not (ntcfyt roafyr) 1 asked Cuvier a man from Berlin (fccr 33crttncr). Not so many as when you were there, answered the man from Berlin. 159. Why do you pity that man? I pity him, because he has trusted a merchant of Hamburg with his money, and the man (fctcfcr) will not return it to him. Do you trust this citizen with anything 1 ? I do not trust him with anything. Has he already kept anything from you ] (SOncn ctnxiS befyaltcn). I have never trusted him with anything, so that he has never kept anything from me. Will you trust my father with your money ? I will trust him with it. What secret has my son entrusted you with 1 I cannot entrust you with that with which he has entrusted me, for he has desired (bitten*) me to keep it secret. Whom do you entrust with your secrets ? I entrust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them. Has your brother been rewarded "? He has on the contrary been pun- ished ; but I beg you to keep it secret, for no one knows it. What has happened to him ? I will tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret ? I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 201 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. ftdjt tmb Cation. Each man. Sefcet 937cnfd). Each child. ScK'S tnl>. Every one. set>ermcmn. The whole world. )ic gan$e SEBctt. 5. A. Sefcermatttt adds 3 in the genitive, and re- mains invariable in the other cases, thus : fNoM. 3eberntcmiu ^ I GEN. S Every one, every body. J DAT l^ Every thing (meaning all). ?C ( ( e . Obs. B. 3ltte, all, taken substantively, is put in the neuter gender singular. Ex. He knows every thing. (r form ntt I have seen all. 3>cf) tflOc atl He is fit for any thing. f (^c ift 311 allem 5. C. CWj, whole, entire, is used with the article, but alt, all, is never used with it. The whole town. )tc $an$e tabt. The whole society. )te gan^c cfctlfcfeaft. The walk (meaning the place to walk in), the concert, Gcncert ; the walk (meaning the walking), fret ' There were many people in the (5$ roaten met Scute cwf t>cm walk (at the concert). gtergcmgc (tm (Concert). I have cut his finger. f 3d) fycibc tfyn in ten ^ingct: go; fcfynttten. He has cut my leg. f (Sr fyat mid^ in ta^ SBetn gcfcfyntt- ten. He has cut off his finger. (5r ()at tr)m ben Jtnger abcjefcf)nitten. He has cut it off. (r fjat if)n i^m a(>cjcfd)nttten. Entirely. (Sangt'td). To bring along with one. 93i 1 1 6 r t n 9 c n *. Have you come quite alone ! irifc tc gang allein gcfcmmcn ? 9* 202 Obs. D. Slttettt, as a conjunction, has the same signifi- cation as aber, but ; as an adverb it signifies alone. No, I have brought all my men 9?ein, id) fjafte atle metnc Scute mite along with ine. o,ct>racf)t. He has brought all his men along (5r fyat alle feine Scute mita,c&tad)t. with him. Have you brought your brother afccn te Sfyrcn 23tut>et mttcjes along with you 1 fctad)t? I have brought him along with 3d) fyabe ifyn mitcjcfcradjt. me. Have you told the groom to bring abcn ie bent @tattfned)t cjefa^t, nur me the horse 1 t>a$ ^fcrb ^u bcincjcn ? The groom, tct @tallfnccl)t tn bcr 0la^c (go- verns the genitive). Near. < 23 c i (governs the dative). I 92 c 6 c n (governs the dative and [ accus.). Near me. 5?ctcn nut. f JBci t>cm Near the fire. 1 Km $eucr. [ 9Sor bcm Jcucr. Near the castle. Unruett tc^ (Sd^lcffc Where do you live 1 o n?o()ncn at ct ctwa^ fallen laffen ? He has not dropt anything. (r ^cit ntc^t^ fallen lafien. To hinder, to prevent. SSe You hinder me from sleeping. (Sic ttctfyinfcern micl) $u fcf)tafen. EXERCISES. 160. Whom do you pity 1 I pity your friend. Why do you pity him ? I pity him because he is ill. Do the merchants of Berlin $>a$ er pcijtcrplog), and afterwards to the concert. Were there many people in the public walk ? There were many people there. 16*2. What did you see at the concert ? I saw many people. What did you do after the concert? I went to the inn (t>a$ SOBtrtfySfyau*) in order to dine. Have you dined well 1 I have dined very well, 204 but I have spent too much. How much have you spent 1 I have spent nearly two florins and a half. Is the fare (pctfet nwn) good at your inn ? It is very good ; but every thing is so dear, that one must be rich to dine there. Have you dropt anything ] I have dropt nothing ; but my cousin dropt some money. Who picked it up ] Some men who were passing by picked it up. Have they returned it to him ? They have returned it to him, for they were good people. Where were you going to when I met you this morn- ing 1 I was going to my uncle. Where does he live ? He lives near the castle. What news has (fagt) your uncle ? He has no news. What has happened to him? A little misfortune has hap- pened to him. Will you tell me what has happened to him ] I will tell it you ; but I beg you to keep it secret. I promise you to tell it to nobody. Will you tell me now what has happened to him 1 He fell as (al$) he was going to the theatre. Is he ill ? He is very ill. I pity him from my heart, if he is ill. Have you succeeded in finding a hat that fits you well 1 I have succeeded in finding one. How does it fit you 1 It fits me admirably. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. Jfom mti> Cotton. Far. SBett. How far ? 2Btc nx'tt ? How far is it from here to Ber- 2Bte nxnt tft c$ con (jtct nacfy 23cr lin ? (in ? Is it far from here to Berlin 1 3ft cS roctt fcen fytet nad) SScrttn ? It is far. @S tft tt>dt. It is not far. <$ tft ntd)t roctt. How many miles is it 1 2Bicicl SMctlen ftnb c$ ? It is twenty miles. ($ fint) aroansicj 9Wct(cn. The mile, t)tc ?Q7eUc (a feminine noun*). It is almost a hundred and thirty ($ ftnb bcinofje bwnbcrt unb brctfi^ miles from here to Berlin. SKcttcn Don f)tcr nad) SBcrlin. It is nearly a hundred miles from (5$ finb ungcfal)r Jjunbctt 9)jcitcn t>cn Berlin to Vienna. SBerfm nadi) SBtcn. To like better. % t c t> c r m o 9 c n. b Part, past gemod)t. Imperf. in o eft t c. I like better, thou likest better, 3$ ma0 (icber, bu magfl Ucbcv, ec he likes better. macj UcOcr. A Gennan mile is equal to four English miles and a half. b 2ic&er is the comparative to gertt. (See Lessons XXXIX. and LIV.) 205 Than Hit, fl($ bag. 13d) mag Itefret f)tcr Wct&i'n ate au$* qcbcn. 3d) blade licbct r)tcr, at5 bap id) auSs gc&r. SDJityen te tdft ? I learn faster than you. 3$ tcrnc fdjncllet ate @tc, I do not understand you, because 3d) etftef)C a$ Sic facjcn web say. Icn You speak so fast that I cannot Sic fprcdxn fo fdfenctt, tag id) Sic understand you. md)t t>etjM)cn farm. I assure you that he wishes to 3d) t>crftd)cre (Sic/ tap ct Sic fptcs speak to you. d)cn will. To drink. Srin !cn*. Drank. r a n ! (Imperf.). Do you drink tea or coffee 1 rinfcn Sic Sfjcc ctcr . I drink neither the one nor the 3d) tttnfc fetn$ tten Octtcn. other. What do you drink in the morn- 2Ba$ trinfcn Sic tc$ ing? EXERCISES. 163. How far is it from Paris to London 1 It is nearly (Octnabc) a hundred miles from Paris to London. Is it far from here to Ham- burg 1 ? It is far. Is it far from here to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and forty miles from here to Vienna. Is it further from Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin ] It is further from Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin. How far is it from Paris to Berlin 1 It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from here to Berlin. Do you intend to g-o to Berlin soon ? I do intend to go thither soon. Why do you wish to go this time ? In order to buy good books and a good horse there ; and to see my good friends. Is it long since you were there 1 It is nearly two years since I was there. Do you not go to Vienna this year] I do not go thither, for it is too far from here to Vienna. Is it long since you saw your Hamburg friend 1 I saw him but a fortnight ago. Do your scholars like to learn by heart 1 They do not like to learn by heart ; they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. Do you like beer better than cider 1 ? I like cider better than beer. Does your brother like to play] He likes to study better thap to play. Do you like meat better than bread ? I like the latter better than the former. Do you like to drink better than to eat ? I like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink 207 better than to eat. Does your brother-in-law like meat better tban fish ? He likes fish better than meat. Do you like to write better than to speak] I like to do both. Do you like fowl better than fish 1 Do you like good honey better than sugar 1 I like neither. 164. Does your father like coffee better than tea ? He likes neither. What do you drink in the morning 1 I drink a glass of water with a little sugar; my father drinks good coffee, my younger bro- ther good tea, and my brother-in-law a glass of good wine. Can you understand me 1 No, Sir, for you speak too fast. Will you be kind enough (fo gut fcin) not to speak so fast (tongfcmicr $u fpres d)cn) 1 I will not speak so fast if you will listen to me. Can you understand what my brother tells you ] He speaks so fast, that I cannot understand him. Can your pupils understand you] They understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly. Why do you not buy anything of that merchant ? I had a mind to buy several dozen of handkerchiefs, some cravats, and a white hat of him ; but he sells so dear that I cannot buy anything of him. Will you take me to another? I will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of last year. Does he sell as dear as this (one) 1 He sells cheaper. Do you like going to the theatre better than going to the concert ] 1 do like going to the concert as well as going to the theatre ; but I do not like going to the public walk, for there are too many people there. Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish ? They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn Ger- man. Do they like to speak better than to write 7 They like to do neither. Do you like mutton ? I like beef better than mutton. Do your children like cake better than bread ] They like both. Has he read all the books which he bought ? He bought so many of them, that he cannot read them all. Do you wish to write some letters ] I have written so many of them, that I cannot write any more. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTIETH LESSON. 0i*ben?ig0te Action. OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. When the action falls upon the agent, and the ob- jective case refers to the same person as the nomina- tive, the verb is called reflexive. In reflexive verbs the pronoun of the object is of the same person as that of the subject, and stands either in the dative or the accusative, according as the verb 208 governs the one or the other case. In the third person singular and plural it is always jTrf), whether the verb governs the dative or accusative. A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. To disguise myself to disguise Sfttd) wrfteflen Un fcerfMfen. ourselves. To disguise thyself to disguise )id) scrftcflcn (5ud) t>cr(Mlen. yourselves. A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE DATIVE. To represent to myself to re- 9$it ttorficllcn llnS present to ourselves. To represent to thyself to re- )tt or[MIcn (Sud) present to yourselves. THIRD PERSON FOR ALL GENDERS. Singular and Plural Dative and Accusative. To disguise one's self to repre- id) ttcrftcltcn fid) serfMtcn. sent to one's self. The personal pronoun of reflexive verbs is placed after the verb as in English ; and so are all other personal pronouns when they are not in the no- minative. Obs. A. There is no real reflexive verb in English, that is to say, such as cannot be used otherwise ; but in German, there are many, as for instance the follow- ing, which govern the accusative : To rejoice. (Sid) frcuon. To be ashamed. (Sid) fd)ffmctu To look back. (Sid) umfcfycn*. Imperf. falj. Do you see yourself? (Sd)en u fdjnctDeft Did). He cuts himself. (r fd)imbet fid). I am afraid to go thither. Set) fftrd)tc mid) hin^UQC^cn. They burn themselves. (Sic brcnncn ftd&. To flatter. (S d) m c i d) c I n (governs the da- tive). Dost thou flatter thyself] d)incid)ctit Du Div 4 ? I do not flatter myself. 3d) fd)mcid)(c mtr ntdjt. 209 We do not flatter ourselves. effiir fd)meidK(n UttS md)t. He disguises himself. Gr KrftcUt fid). You represent to yourself. tc (Mien fid) or To fear some one. u'mantcn fiird)ten. To be afraid of somebodyi or rcem furd)tcn ct j?cn (Sud). Every body speaks of it. S^nncmn fprtdjt bason. Each man amuses himself as he in jjcbcr crtrciOt fid) tic Sett ttric likes. c$ if)m gcfallt. Each one amuses himself in the in jcfccr tcrtrci6t fic^ tic 3cit fo cuU best way he can. cr fann. The taste, tct cfcfemadf. To mistake, to be mistaken. t d) t r r c n x fid) t a u f eft c n. Every man is liable to mistake. ?ctcr SORenfd) fann fid) trrcn. You are mistaken. tc trrcn fid). To soil. ^cfcbnutlcn, fd)mu|tg mad)cn. To deceive. Sctriigen* (Octrtcqcn*). 210 Deceived. 25ctrc^cn (past part.) Imperf. be* treg. He has cheated me of a hundred (Sr fyat mid) um fyuntert Staler be* crowns. trogen. At (over). Uebcr (a preposition governing the dative and accusative). To rejoice at something. td) fiber etroa* ftcucru I rejoice at your happiness. 3d) frcue mid) ubct 3b* d5Iudf. At what does your uncle rejoice 1 SQScrubcc frcut fid) 3fyr )f)Ctm ? To believe. Uubcn. This verb requires the person in the dative, and the thing in the accusative. It governs also the accusa- tive with the preposition an* Do you believe that man 1 fauben (Sic btefcm Sftcmne ? I do not believe him. 3d) gtoube 3bnt nid)t. Do you believe what I am tell- QHaubcn a id) SfyWK ing you 1 fa$e ? I believe in God. 3d) cjtoubc nn ott. The God, t>cr ott (plural otter) ; the story-teller, the liar, ter Sugner. To utter a falsehood, to lie. Ciigcn (part, past gclogcn, Imperf. teg). (See tlie Continuation of this Lesson Page 211.) EXERCISES. 165. Have you written long or short letters 1 I have written (both) long and short ones. Have you many apples ? I have so many of them that I do not know which I shall (fell) eat. Do you wish to give anything to these children ? They have studied so badly, that I do not wish to give them anything. What is this man re- joicing at? He is rejoicing at the luck which has happened to his brother. What dost thou rejoice at"? I rejoice at the good fortune that has happened to you. What do your children rejoice at 1 They rejoice at seeing you. Do you rejoice at the happiness ot my father] I do rejoice at it. What does your uncle say to my happiness 1 He rejoices at it from his heart. Do you flatter my brother? I do not flatter him. Does this master flatter his pu- pils 1 He does not flatter them. Is he pleased with them 1 He is much (fcfyr) pleased (jufrtetcn) with them when they learn well ; but he is highly (fefyr) displeased with them when they do not learn well. Do you flatter me? I do not flatter you, for I love you. Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass ? I do see my sell in it. Can your friends see themselves in that large looking- glass ? They can see themselves therein. Why do you not re- main near the fire? Because I am afraid of burning myself. 211 Does this man make his fire] He does not make it, for he is afraid of burning- himself. Do you fear me 1 I do not fear you. Do you fear those ugly men 1 I do not fear them, for they hurt nobody. Why do those children run away ! They run away, be- cause they are afraid of you. Do you run away before your ene- mies 1 I do not rurr away before them, for I do not fear them. 16G. In what do your children amuse themselves'? They amuse themselves in studying, writing, and playing. In what do you amuse yourself ! I amuse myself in the best way I can, for I read good books, and I write to my friends. In what do you amuse yourself when you have nothing to do at home ] I go to the play and to the concert, for every one amuses himself in the best way he can. Every man has his taste ; what is yours 1 Mine is to study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, the ball, and the public walk, and to ride on horseback. Has that physician done any harm to your child 1 He has cut his finger (cf> in ten finger), but he has not done him any harm ; so you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. Why do you listen to that man 1 I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; for I know that he is a story-teller. How do you know that he is a story-teller ] He does not believe in God ; and all those who do not believe in God are story-tellers. Why does your cousin not brush his hat! He does not brush it, because he is afraid of soiling his fingers (fid) tic finger). What does my neighbour tell you ? He tells me that you wish to buy his horse ; but I know that he is mistaken, for you have no money to buy it. What do they say at the market 1 They say that the enemy is beaten. Do you believe it 1 I do believe it, because every one says so. Why have you bought that book 1 I bought it, because I wanted it to learn German ; and because every one spoke of it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) CONTINUATION OF THE SEVENTIETH LESSON. - . olge tor siebsn^igsten Cection. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, &c., use the verb in the passive voice ; and say : / was told, instead of, They told me ; It was given to me, in- stead of, They gave it to me. This is expressed in Ger- man by means of the indefinite pronoun matt, one, as in French by on. Ex, 212 I am told that he is arrived. SQfan fagt mir, tajj cr an.gcfrmmcn ifr A knife was given to him to cut Sftan gab tbm cin sOfrffcv, fetn 3ret his bread, and he cut his gu fdwciten, unt cr fdjnttt fid) in finger. ten ' PERFECT OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. Have you cut yourself? Joaben (ie fid) gcfdjnittcn ? I have not cut myself. 3d) babe mid) nicbt gefcbnittcn. Have those men cut themselves I ^>aben fid) tiefc Scanner gcfd)nittcn ? They have not cut themselves. (ie baben fid) nicbt gefdimttcn. Hast thou hurt thyself? I have not hurt myself. Who has cut himself? I have cut my finger. I have rejoiced. I have flattered myself. Thou hast cut thyself. He has flattered himself. We have been afraid. You have mistaken. To pull out. He pulls out his hair. He has pulled out his hair. He has cut his hair. I have had my hair cut. I have cut my nails. The hair, To go to bed. To get up, to rise. jbaft Scl) (?oOc nitr ntd)t S&er bflt fid) Qcfd)iuttcn ? f 3d) fccibc nnd) in ten 5mQ cr gc fdjnittcn. t Sd) babe mid) gcfreut (gcfccuct). 3d) bciOe mir gc[cbnieid)c(t. )u baft >id) gcfd^nittem (5r bat fid) gefd)mctd)c(t. f 2Btr batn'n un^ cjcfitrd)tct. C t 3br babt (Slid) gcirrt. f .qebc mit (Scnnenuntergang 311 < SBctte. C. 3d) lege mtcb mit (^enncnuntcrgana,. At what time did you go to bed 1 Urn roekbe 3eit fint tcrtcl cuif jwetf. The bed, tas n'tt (plur. en). Theories, J Thesun-set, J Nothing but. 91 1 d) t $ a ( . He has nothing but enemies. (t f)flt ntcbtS cifS He drinks nothing but water. (T trtnft md)t$ EXERCISES. 167. Did your father rejoice to see you 1 He did rejoice to see me. What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friends. What was your uncle delighted with (IZScruber fyat ficb thr Dfxtm gcfrcut) 1 He was delighted with (fiber) the horse which you brought him from Germany. 'What were your children delighted with ? They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had had made (for) them. Why does this officer rejoice so much (jo fcbr) 1 Because he flatters himself he has good friends. Is he not right in rejoicing"! He is wrong, for he has nothing but enemies. Do you flatter yourself that you know Qerman? I do flatter myself that I know it; for 1 can speak, read, and write it. Can you write a German letter without an error (t>et $i'l)tcr) ? I can. Does any one correct your letters 1 No one corrects them ; they do not require (braucben md)t) to be corrected, for I make no faults in them. How many letters have you already written ] I have al- ready written a dozen. Have you hurt yourself 1 ? I have not hurt myself. Who has hurt himself? My brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his finger. Is he still ill 1 He is better. I rejoice to hear that he is no longer ill ; for I love him, and I pitied him from my heart. Why does your cousin pull out his hair] Because he cannot pay what he owes. Have you cut your hair 1 I have not cut it (myself), but I have had it cut. Why do you pity that child 1 Because he has cut his foot. Why was a knife given to him ? A knife was given to him to cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his foot. 168. Do you go to bed early ? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep if I go to bed early. At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. At what o'clock do your children go to bed ? They go to bed at sun-set. Do they rise early ? They rise at sun-rise. At what o'clock did you rise to-day ? To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday 214 evening. Does your son rise late? He must rise early, for he never goes to bed late. What does he do when he gets up ] He studies, and then breakfasts. Does he not go out before he break- fasts ? No, he studies and breakfasts before he goes out. What does he do after breakfast 1 ? As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to my house, and we ride (on horseback) into the forest. Didst thou rise this morning as early as 1 1 I rose earlier than you, for I rose before sun-rise. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. OEin tmfc Cection. To take a walk. (Spqtcrcn Qcl)cn*. To take an airing in a carriage. (Spqteren fasten* (Imp. fufyr). To take a ride on horseback. (Spa^ictcn rctten* (Imp. rttt). - When two or more infinitives, two past participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- pend upon each other, the last in English is put the first in German. Do you wish to take a walk (to SBollcn cn ? He takes a walk every day. (5t gcf)t cute Sacje fpqtercn. Do you often walk ? cfocn (Sic eft fpqtcren ? I take a walk every morning. 3cf) (jcbe alle $02orgcn fpa^icrcn To take a child a walking. (Sin $inb fpa^tcrcn fuftvcn. Do you take your children a gufjrcn (Sic 35^ .^intcv fp03'tcrcn. walking 1 I take them a walking every 3cf) fiifyrc fie atfc 2(ftent> fpa^tcrcn. evening. B. Two infinitives or participles not depend- ing on each other follow the English construction. One must love and praise one's 93?cm mup fetncn Jrcunb ttcfcen unt) friend. (cbcn. Whom must we despise and 9Bcn nwp man ucrac^tcn unb ftra? punish ? fen ? THE [UNIVERSIT 1 215 ^^ I take a walk, when I have no- 3d) $ef)C fpa$tctctt, wcnn td) thing to do at home. md)t$ $u tfyun fyabe. A The adverb tt>amt is used to interrogate with respect to time only. In all other instances the English when is translated by tt>entt* Ex. When do you start 1 SOBcmn rctfcn tc a& ? When did he start * SOSann ift ec alujeretpt ? To teacA. e Ijr en. Ofo. J5. This verb, \vhen joined to an infinitive, governs the name of the person in the accusative ; and when the thing taught is expressed by a substan- tive, it governs a double accusative, the one of a per- son and the other of a thing. He teaches me to read. (5r (cfjrt mid) tcfen. I teach him to write. 3d) lef)te ifyn fdyrctOcn. He teaches me arithmetic and (5r tcfjrt nrid) t>a$ SKedjrten unfo writing. Obs. C. All infinitives taken substantively are of the neuter gender. Any German infinitive may thus be taken substantively, e. g. bag ^ledjnen, arithmetic, from recfyttett, to reckon; fca$ @d)reiben, the writing, from fefyreiben*, to write, &c. I teach you the German Ian- 3$ fefyre k tie t>cutfd)C pras guage. d)e. a rilntcrr id)tcn. To instruct. ^Untcrrid^t e 1 1 & e t te n (or 9- C ben*). The instruction, the lessons, bcr Untcrrtd)t. He ff ives m elesson, te^&gjp, I give him lessons in German (I 3d) Qct>e (or crtr^ettc) tljm Untcrrid^t teach him German). tm 5)eutfd)cn. I gave lessons in English to his 3d) I)aOe fetncn &tnt>crn llntcmd&t children (I taught his children tm Sngttfdjcn crt()cilt. English). He takes lessons in dancing. (t ntmmt llntcrrt^t tm Sanscn. The learned man, t>cr efefyrte ; , the language, is a feminine noun, and has n in the plural, 216 a learned man, cm ctcfjrtcr (See Obs. Lesson LIII.) ; the clergyman, ber et[t(td)C ; a clergyman, ctn ctftttdjcr ; the German master (meaning ) the master of the German > bcr >cutfd)lcF)rcr ; language), } the German master (meaning 1 that the master is a German, > bet bcutfd)C 2cfyrcr ; whatever he teaches), } the dancing master, bcr j To dance. To cipher, to reckon. SRecfyncn. To remember, to recollect, id) C r i n n C r n. Obs. D. This verb governs either the genitive alone, or, less elegantly, the accusative with the preposition an. Do you remember that man 1 (Srtnncrn (Sic fid) HefeS SOZanneS 1 I do remember him. 3d) crtnncrc mid) fetncr. ((Srinncrt cr fid) fcincS. ^erfprc* Orirt cr fid) en fcin Ecrfprc* d)en 1 He does recollect it. \ ? ** /'* *'&" I (r crtnncrt fid) barcm. Does he recollect it 1 \ ner f er j!* ^\ I Crtnncrt cr pd) baran 1 I remember you. sd) crtnncrc mid) Sfyrer. I recollect them. 3d) crinnerc mid) tf)rcr. He remembers me. (r crinncrt fid) mc'tncr. He recollects us. (r crtnncrt fid) unfer. I have remembered him. 3>d) f)flOc mid) fetncr crinncrt. EXERCISES. 169, Do you call me 1 I do call you. What is your pleasure 1 You must rise, for it is already late. W^hat do you want me for? I have lost all my money at play, and I come to beg you to lend me some. What o'clock is it ]-< It is already a quarter past six, and you have slept long enough. Is it long since you rose 1 It is an hour and a half since I rose. Do you often go a walking 1 I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home. Do you wish to take a walk] I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. Has your brother taken a ride on horseback] He has taken an airing in a carriage. Do your children often go a walking 1 They go a walking every morning after breakfast. Do you take a walk 217 after dinner 1 ? After dinner I drink tea and then I take a walk. Do you often take your children a walking ? I take them a walking every morning and every evening. Can you go along with me 1 I cannot go along with you, for I must take my little brother out a walking. Where do you walk ? We walk in our uncle's garden and fields. Do you like walking ? I like walking better than eat- ing and drinking. Does your father like to take a ride on horse- back ? He likes to take a ride in a carriage better than on horse- back. Must one love children who are not good ? One ought, on the contrary, to punish and despise them. Who has taught you to read ? I have learnt it with (Oci) a French master. Has he also taught you to write 1 He has taught me to read and to write. W T ho has taught your brother arithmetic ? A German master has taught it him. Do you wish to take a walk with us? 1 cannot go a walking, for I am waiting for my German master. Does your brother wish to take a walk ? He cannot, for he is taking lessons in dancing. 170. Have you an English master ? We have one. Does he also give you lessons in Italian? He does not know Italian ; but we have an Italian and Spanish master. What has become of your old writing master ? He has taken orders (has become a clergy- man). What has become of the learned man whom I saw at your house last winter ? He has set up for a merchant. And what has become of his son ? He has turned a soldier. Do you still recol- lect my old dancing master ? I do still recollect him ; what has become of him ? He is here, and you can see him, if you like (roollcn). Hastthoua German master 1 I have a very good (one), for it is my father, who gives me lessons in German and in Eng- lish. Does your father also know Polish ? He does not know it yet, but he intends to learn it this summer. Do you remember your promise ? I do remember it. What did you promise me ? I promised to give you lessons in German ; and I will doit. Wil . you begin this morning? I will begin this evening, if you please (tt>enn e 3ftnen gcfdtltg tft). Do you recollect the man whose son taught us dancing? I no longer recollect him. Do you still recol- lect my brothers ? I do recollect them very well, for when I was studying at Berlin, I saw them every day. Does your uncle still recollect me ? I assure you that he still recollects you. Do you speak German better than my cousin ? I do not speak it as well as he, for he speaks it better than many Germans. Which of your pupils speaks it the best ? The one that was walking with me yes- terday speaks it the best of them all. Is your uncle's house as high as ours ? Yours is higher than my uncle's, but my cousin's is the highest house that I have ever seen. Has your friend as many books as 1 ? You have more of them than he ; but my brother has more of them than (both) you and he. Which of us (SOBcr son un) has the most money ? You have the most, for I have but thirty crowns, my friend has but ten, and you have five hundred. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) JO 218 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. Certion. i tmb To make use of, to use. id)6et)tcncn genitive). (governs the Do you use my horse ? I do use it. Does your father use it 1 He does use it. Have you used my carriage ? I have used it. Do you use my books ? I do use them. May I use your book 1 Thou mayest use it. To approach, to draw near. To withdraw from, to go away from. Do you approach the fire 1 I do approach it. I go away from the fire. I go away from it. What do you recollect ] I recollect nothing. What are you withdrawing from ? Are you cold ? I am very cold. I am not cold. Art thou cold "? Is he warm 1 Are they warm or cold ] They are neither warm nor cold. Who is cold ? My feet are cold. His hands are cold. Why does that man go away from the fire ? He goes away from it, because he is not cold. To freezefrozen. Froze. SBebtencn effrU>cn befctcnt. S5ct)tencn c(ftf(6cn Oebicncn* naftcrn (governs the dative). cntfcrncn (governs the dative- with the preposition r>on), 97abcrn d) cntfcrnc mtd) t)cm S^uer^ 3d) cntfcrnc mtd) t>ar>on. SBcran crinncrn (Sic fid) ? 3d) crtnncrc mid) an ntdbt^ 2Bct)cn cntfcrncn @tc fid) ? t SMSWnfcft? @ iff m t r fcfjc f aft. ^ tft m t r nid)t !a(t. 3ft c^ pit !alt? 3ft c^ i^m tvarm ? 3ft c^ i^ncn it>arm otcr fa(t ? S^ ift t^ncn n?ct>cr warm ncc& faft, t 855cm tfl c^ faft ? t (5^> ift mtr an ben $i$cn faft. t * ift ibm an ten ^anDcn faft. SBarum cntfcrnt fid) ttcfcr 9}?ann t>en bcm Jeucr ? r cntfcrnt fid) bapcn x n?ci( c^ ibm ntd)t faft ift. f Jfrtcrcn -.qcfrorcn. tor (imperfect). Obs. The impersonal verb frteren, to freeze, governs 219 the accusative, and may also be used for the English verb to be cold, as : I am very cold. t $ f r ^ ct mid) f^) r I am not cold. t &* f cicrt mict > ni ^ Who is cold! t Sl'cnfrtcrte*? My feet are cold. t 9D2tr frteren trie gdffe. His hands are cold. t 3b m fricrcn tic cint>e. JPor M?Aa ? whereto ? for what 2B $ U ? purpose ? What do you want money for ? 2e$u &rcuicf)en (Ste (i5cft> ? I want some to buy a carriage 3d) braucbe roctdjcS/ urn etncn 2Bcu with. gen 311 frmfcn. What dees this horse serve you 2Bo$u fcient 36ncn tiefeS 3)fert>? for? It serves me to ride out upon. (g ttcm vut ou$jurcitcn or $um 2Cu^ retten. To ride out. Kusreitcn*. To go out in a carriage. 2(u6fal;ren*. EXERCISES. 171. W T hich is the nearest way to go to your uncle's castle ? This way is shorter than the one we took yesterday ; but my father knows one which is the nearest of all. Do you use my carriage ? I do use it. Has your father used my horse ! He has used it. What does this horse serve you for? It serves me to ride out upon. Do you use the books which I lent you 1 I do use them. May I (.fionn id)) use your knife 1 Thou mayest use it, but thou must not cut thyself. May my brothers use your books'? They may use them, but they must not tear them. May we use your stone table ? You may use it, but you must not spoil it. What has my wood served you for"? It has served me to warm myself with. For what purpose do your brothers want money ] They want some to live upon. What does this knife serve us for 1 ? It serves us to cut our bread, our meat, and our cheese with. Is it cold to day 1 It is very cold. Will you draw near the fire ? I cannot draw near it, for I am afraid of burning myself. Why does your friend go away from the fire 1 He goes away from it, because he is afraid of burning himself. Art thou coming near the fire 1 I am coming near it, because I am very cold. Are thy hands cold ? My hands are not cold, but my feet are. Do you go away from the fire 1 I do go away from it. Why do you go away from it 1 ? Because I am not cold. Are you cold or warm ? I am neither cold nor warm. 172. Why do your children approach the fire 1 They approach it, be- cause they are cold. Is any body cold ] Somebody is cold, Who 220 is cold 1 The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. Why does he not warm himself? Because his father has no money to buy wood. Will you tell him to come to me to warm himself? I will tell him so. Do you remember anything ? I re- member nothing. What does your uncle recollect? He recollects your promise. What have I promised him ? You have promised him to go to Germany with him next winter. I intend to do so if it is not too cold. Are your hands often cold ? My hands are scarcely ever cold, hut my feet are often so. Why do you with- draw from the fire ? I have been sitting near the fire this hour and a half, so that I am no longer cold. Does your friend not like to sit near the fire ? He likes, on the contrary, much (fcfyt) to sit near the fire, but only when he is cold. May one approach your uncle ? One may approach him, for he receives every body. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) ^ V SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. -JUrd tmfr Cection. Ta <&*VP $ Kofircn (verb active). \ <3id) raftrcn (verb reflexive). To get shaved. id) rafircn lajjcn*. To dress, to put on clothes. 2n$icf)cn*. To dress. tfnfletbtfn. To undress, to put off clothes. 2(u$$tcjjen* To undress. Obs. A. 2(ttjtef)ett* expresses either to dress or to put on clothes, but anfletbett caruonly be used to express the English to dress. The same may be said with regard to and cutctffctbetu Have you dressed yourself? a&en tc ftcf) onge I have not yet dressed myself. 3d) fa&e mid) nod) nid)t cmgefteibet. Have you dressed the child? >a&en @ic batf $tnb a I have dressed it. 3d) fjafce e$ angc^ccjcn. He has put on his coat. cn. Obs. B. 3Bedfett and cwftt>earf)ett are neuter, and take the verb fein* for their auxiliary. SBedfett signifies to wake in- tentionally, cwfwecfen unintentionally : Ex. SOBotten ie 221 mtdf) urn jtoet Ufyr toerfen ? Will you wake me at two o'clock? SRactyen te feinen ?drm, bamit ie ifyn md)t aitftt>earf)te auf dnmal au$ meinetn raume, I at once awoke from my dream. 2hiftt>ad)en, means to awake regularly without any accident. Ex. auftoacfyett, to awake in the morning. To come down ( ^erab, fyinab > ftetgen*, gcfyen*, (See Less. L.) ( Remitter, fyimmter $ reitcn*, fasten*, 2C* To go down into the well. 3n fcctt 93runncn !)tnuntcr fld^cn*. To come down the hill. Sgcm 5H'r$e bi'tab ftetgcn*. To go down the river. 3)m (Strom fjinaO fafjrcn*. To alight from one's horse, to 83cm 9)fctt>e ftcigcn*. dismount. To alight, to get out. \ ffd^m * To mount to ascend. (S t c t g c n (part, past gcftwcpn. Imperf. fttcg). To mount the horse. 2Cufg (auf t>a$) ^)fcrb flcigcn*. To get into the coach. 3n ben 8Ba$en ftcigcn*. To go on board a ship. 3n cin ct SOU'ifyc roertl), an tfyn 311 him ? fcfyvcibcn ? Is it better 1 3ft e 6cffcr ? It is better. (5s ift Ocf[cr. It is better to do this than that. (g$ ift kffct, btcfcS a($ jcnc$ $tt tfnin. It is better to stay here than to ($ ift focflcr, fytct $u bfcibcn, ci(^ fpa* go a walking. gicrcn $u gc^cn. EXERCISES. 173. Have you shaved to-day? I have shaved. Has your brother shaved 1 ? He has not shaved himself, but has got shaved. Do you shave often 1 I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the evening. When do you shave in the evening ] When I do not dine at home. How many times a day does your father shave 1 ? He shaves only once a day, but my brother has such a strong beard, that he is obliged to shave twice a day. Does your uncle shave often 1 ? He shaves only every other day (cincn 03 um ben cinfccrn), for his beard is not strong. At what o'clock do you dress in the morning 1 ? I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. Does your neighbour dress before he breakfasts "? He breakfasts before he dresses. At what o'clock in the evening dost thou un- dress"? I undress as soon as I return from (an?) the theatre. Dost thou go to the theatre every evening ] I do not go every eve- ning, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. At what o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre "? I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. Have you already dressed the child] I have not dressed it yet, for it is still asleep (fctyaft nccb). At what o'clock does it get up 1 I gets up as soon as it is waked. 174. Do you rise as early as 1 1 I do not know at what o'clock you rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. Will you tell rny servant to wake me to-morrow at four o'clock ? I will tell him. Why have you risen so early? My children have made such a noise that they wakened me. Have you slept well ] I have not slept well, for you made too much noise. At what o'clock must I wake you ? * >ie SD^ii^e, is a feminine substantive, and takes tt in the plural. 223 'Tomorrow thou mayest wake me at six o'clock.- 1 - At what o'clock did the good captain awake] He awoke at a quarter past five in the morning;. When did this man go down into the well 1 He went down into it this morning. Has he come up again yet (nriefocr fxrcuif gcjlicgcn) ? He came up an hour ago, Where is your brother ! He is in his room. Will you tell him to come down 1 I will tell him so ; but he is not dressed yet. Is your friend still on the mountain? He has already come down. Did you go down or up this river? We went down it. Has your brother dined already ? He dined as soon as he had alighted from his horse. Is your uncle already asleep (fcfytofcn*) ? I believe that he is asleep, for he went to bed as soon as he had alighted.- Did my cousin speak to you before he started * He spoke to me before he got into the coach. Have you seen my brother? I saw him before I went on board the ship. 175, How did my child behave ? He did behave very well, How clid my brother behave towards you ? He behaved very well to- wards me, for he behaves well towards every body. Is it worth while to write to that man? It is not worth while to write to htm. Is it worth while to alight in order to buy a cake 1 It is not worth while, for it is not long since we ate. Is it worth while to dismount from my horse in order to give something to that poor man ? Yes, for he seems to want it ; but you can (fb'nncn) give him something without dismounting from your horse. Is it better to go to the theatre than to study 1 ? It is better to do the latter than the former. Is it better to learn to read German than to speak It ? It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking ? It is better to do the latter than the former. Is it better to get into a coach than to go on board the ship ? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to go on board the ship when one has no wish to travel. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. bier nnir To hire, to rent. 9ft t e t fj e n. To hire a room. (Sin Simmer mtctfjcn. Have you hired a room ? aben cn afccjefd)Cifft. He has parted with his carriage. (5r f)t fetncn SBagcn afcgefdfrafft. Have you parted with (dis- at>cn fjabe tfjn him. Sd ot'f sTofs^thing. } t Did you get rid of youi damaged | inb te S^en wrbcrfcenctt sugar ] rfer log cjeroorben ? I did get rid of it. t 3$) bin tl)n (o^ gcwotbcn. Did he get rid of his old horse ? j 3ft er fctn alte8 $fctb lofi ben? He did get rid of it. f @r iffc c^ To hope, to expect. $ f f e n. Do you expect to find him there ? offen tc iljn ba JU pnben ? I do expect it. 3d) 6offe e$. Hope and expectation make offen unb Barren ma^t many a dupe. $um barren. (See Lesson XL. Obs. B.) To wait, to tarry. Barren. To change. S o u f fy c n* To change one thing for another. (StroaS ge^en ftn>a$ t)crtaufi^ett or umtaufd)cn* I change my hat for his. 3d) taufd)e meuten ^ut ^egen ben fetntgcn um. To put on one's hat. 2>cn ^>ut auffe|ett. To put on linen. 2Bafd)e a ontegen. To put on a cravat. in al$tud) umbtnben*. Part. past, cjcbunben. Imperf. banb. JSMI. *!.. He puts on other (shifts his) @r tegt (jUM) onbere 8355fd^e an. linen. He changes his linen. Ct tt)ed)fcft fetne I put on another cravat. 3d) btnfce etn anbereS I change my cravat. 3d) tt?ed)$le ba^ al$tud). T^te SBiifc^e, the linen, is a feminine collective noun and has consequent^ ly no plural. 225 To put on other clothes. He puts on other clothes. He puts on another shirt. @tn cmfceres nchmen*- To change the horse. um!(cih*n. )tc JUctbct n?ed)jc(n. (Sr flctfcct fid) urn. (5r rcccbfclt fctnc &(etbcr. (5r $tef)t cin nnfccrcg emt> cm. (5r n?cd)fdt fctn >c To exchange. 2S e d) f c ( n. To take fresh horses. 3)ic spfcrfcc n>cd)fe(n. To exchange a piece of money. Gin fetfW clt> ived)fc(n. To correspond with some one. JBricfe nut 3i'mcmt>em rcedtfem. Do you correspond with your 2Bed)fe(n crers fcnnc. EXERCISES. 176. Have you already hired a room 1 I have already hired one. Where have you hired it"? I have hired it in William Street, number (one) hundred and fifty one. At whose house (*8ct n>cm) have you hired it 1 At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. For whom has your father hired a room ? He has hired one for his son who has just arrived from Germany. Did you at last get rid of that man 1 I did get rid of him. Why has your father parted with his horses 1 Because he did not want them any more. Have you discharged your servant ? I have dis- charged him, because he served me no more well. W T hy have you parted with your carriage 1 ? Because I do not travel any more. Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar ] He has succeeded in getting rid of it. Has he sold it on credit] He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. Do you hope to arrive early in Paris ? T hope to ar- rive there at a quarter past eight, for my father is waiting for me this evening, For what have you exchanged your carriage which 226 you no longer made use of] I have exchanged it for a fine Ara- bian horse. Do you wish to exchange your book for mine 1 I cannot, for I want it to study German with. Why do you take your hat off? I take it off, because I see my old writing-master coming. Do you put on another hat to go to the market ] I do not put on another to go to the market, but to go to the great con- cert. 177. Why does your father put on other clothes ] He is going to the king, so that he must put on others. Have you put on another hat to go to the English captain ] I have put on another, but I have not put on another coat or other boots. How many times a day dost thou put on other clothes ] I put on others to dine and to go to the theatre. Do you often put on a clean shirt (einruetjSfcS Jocmb)? I put on a clean one every morning. When does your father put on a clean shirt] He puts it on when he goes to the ball. Does he put on a clean cravat (cin wciped n(stucf)) as often as you] He puts one on oftener than I, for he does so six times a day. Did you often take fresh horses when you went to Vienna ] I took fresh ones every three hours. Will you change me this gold coin (t>a$ (Seftftucf) '? I am going to (will) change it for you ; what money do you wish to have for it (fcafiir) ] I wish to have crowns, florins, and kreuzers. Do you correspond with my friend ] I do corres- pond with him. How long have you been corresponding with my brother] I have been corresponding with him these six years al- most. W T hy do you mix among those people? 1 mix among them in order to know what they say of me. Have you recognised your father ] I had not seen him for such a long time, that I did not recognise him (3d) fattc tfjn fo ton$_c ntd)t gcfcbcn, bap id) tfon md)t tuicbcr criranntc). Do you still speak German] It is so long since I spoke it, that I have nearly forgotten it all. Amongst you (llntcr (Such) country people there are many fools, are there not(mcf)t njafyt) ? asked a philosopher lately (ncu(tcc)) f a peasant (ctncn SBaiu'rn). The latter (Dicfct) answered him : " Sir, one finds some in all sta- tions (bet tcmb)." " Fools sometimes tell the truth (fete ," said the philosopher. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. JFftttf nutr Cection. To find one's self (to be, to do). crt fBatct ? 227 Obs. In the German the words jjerr, sir, $rau, ma- dam, &c. must be preceded by the possessive pronoun. He is ill. t crmann auf. To earn, to get. SScrbicnen. To gain. (Sictutnncn*. Part, past, Q c * tv o n n e n. Imperf. 9 c ro a n n. To get one's bread. etn S3rcb tjcrbtencn or crructbcn*. Part, past, crroorfccn. Imperf. To get one's livelihood by. He gets his livelihood by work- erbtene mctn c(b nut 2(rOcttcn* By what does this man get his SBomit crna'fyrt ficr) btcfcr 9}jann? livelihood ? To spill. aSetgtegen*, Part, past, o e r f 9 o f f e n. Imperf. o c r 9 of. He has spilt the wine over the Ct fycit ben SOSein auf ben Sifd) tiers table. QOffen (action). Compound verbs are conjugated exactly like simple verbs. We shall therefore merely note the irregularities of the latter, and leave it to the learner himself to add the separable or inseparable particles. Thus fctttb is the im- perfect of finfcen*, to find (See Lessons XXXV. and XLIL), and kfanb that of befinben*. The participle past of ftnben is flefunben, and that of beftnben*, befimben, the syllable $e being omitted on account of the inseparable particle (See Lesson XLV.). ^tett is the imperfect of the verb fyaUett*, to hold ( Les- son LIIL), and fyielt auf that of auf batten*. The past participle of fatten is ge^alten, and that of auf^atten*, aufge^attcn. 228 To stand. The wine is on the table. Has your father already parted ] He is ready to depart. Ready. To make ready. To make one's self ready. To keep one's self ready. To split {to pierce). To break somebody's heart. You break this man's heart. To hang. To be hanging. <5 t e I) c n *. Part, past, geftanben. Imperf. ftanb. et SGSetn ftcfjt auf bem Stfcfye (rest). de- 3ft 3&r etr SSatcr <5r ift fcctett afyutcifcn. 33erett. SBctcitcn. id) Oerett madjcn. (Sid) berett fatten*. Serfpalten (butd) fcofyren). Semanbem ba$ cr$ burd)bo()ren. te butcfy&efyten biefem 9ftannc ba$ (verb active, regular). 4!>angen* (a neuter irregular verb). Part, past, Imperf. jjDtng tnctn |>ut an tern Sftacjcl ? r tying baran. 3cf) tyangc ttjn an ben Sftagel. ' cr >tcb ift Qctyan^t wocbcn. 8QBcr fjat ben JtotO an ben S3aum ge* tyangt ? bee >teb ; ber JKauOer. bev patient. (See Note, Lesson L1V.) Siemltd)/ fo jtcmUdf). (5^ ift siemttd) fpat. ^ ift stemlic^ welt. Was my hat hanging on the nail 1 It was hanging on it. I hang it on the nail. The thief has been hanged. Who has hung the basket on the tree 1 The thief, the robber, the highwayman, The patient (the sick person), Tolerably well. It is rather late. It is rather far. EXERCISE 178. How is your father 1 He is (only) so so. How is your patient t He is a little better to-day than yesterday. Is it long since you saw your brothers ? I saw them two days ago. How were they ? They were very well. How art thoul 1 am tolerably well (ntdbt iiOet). How long has your brother been learning German ? He has been learning it only three months. Does he already speak it? He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your cousin who has been learning it these five years. Is it long since you heard of my uncle 1 It is hardly three months since I heard of him. Where was he staying then 1 He was staying at Berlin, but now he is in London. Do you like to speak to my uncle ] 229 I do like very much (feljt) to speak to him, but I do not like (id nid)t cjcrn) him to laugh at me. Why does he laugh at you 1 He laughs at me, because I speak badly Why has your brother no friends ? He has none, because he criticises every body. W T hat do you get, your livelihood by] I get my livelihood by working. Does your friend get his livelihood by writing 1 He gets it by speaking and writing. Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by working] They do not get it by doing any thing, for they are too idle to work. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) _ SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. Sedjs nnb fiicb^igstu Section. To doubt any thing. ) Un etroag $roctfc(n (governs the da- To question any thing. ) tive with the preposition on). Do you doubt that ? Sroetfeln < I do not doubt it. "^ I make no question, have no 3$ jwctflc md)t doubt of it. J It is not to be doubted. 2)atan ijt md)t $u petfcfo. What do you doubt ] SBoran petfeln U? I doubt what that man has told 3d) ^ractfle on t>em, roag Mcfet 93?ann me. mir gefagt ^at. To agree to a thing. Uebcr (or we^cn) ctwag cint^ (or To ItssVZ;! "*' \ Do you grant that ? cffcfjcn 1C C^ ? I do grant it. 3d) gcftc^e eg (or id) cjefterje es etn/ or id) gcbe eg gu). How much have you paid for that SQBtewcl Ijo^cn U fdr tiefen ^ut be^ hat 1 gQ^tt ? I have paid three crowns for it. 3d) Ijabe fctci J"or. 5 ft r (a preposition governing the accusative). I have bought this horse for five 3d) rjaftc ttcfcg $)ferb fiir (or urn) hundred francs. funf l)unt>ctt ^ranfcn gefauft. The price, bet Have you agreed about the price 1 tnt) tc fiber t)cn ^rctg (ttJCgcn 5>reife$) ctntg gcracrfcen ? We have agreed about it. 83?ir finfc boruber (tcgwcgen) etnig t About what have you agreed ? SBeritOcc (rocsroccjen) (inl) tc cint/j 230 About the price. }&>*,, On account of (about). 2Bea,cn (a preposition governing the genitive). cftehen @'tc 3hrcn JcfjUretn? 3d) gfftcfie if)n ein. 3d) gtfttfa tap c* ein getter ift. Do you confess your fault? I do confess it, I confess it to be a fault. To agree, to compose a differ- ence. To consent. However* For all that. To wear. What garments does he wear? He wears beautiful garments. Against my custom. As customary. The partner, " id) ttcrgleiclxn*. Part, past, we* Qlichcn. Imperf. wegltd). . (Sid) tictcinigcn. cn Sic gefcfycn, roa^ ec getf;an I did notice it. 3cr; f)abe c$ gefe^cn. To expect (to hope). SBcenmtfjcn (ftoffen). Do you expect to receive a letter SSermutfjen ^ic einen SBrtef oon 3fo r from your uncle ? rem >f)eim ^u errjalten ? I do expect it. 3d) fjoffe eg. He expects it. c ocrmut^et e^. Have we expected it? al'cn wtc e^ terntutl)ct ? We have expected it. 2Btc fjaCcn eg oennut^et. To get (meaning to procure). S3crfd)affcn. I cannot procure any money. 3d) form mte fetn e(b erfd)affcn. He cannot procure any thing to c fonn fid) ntd)t ^u effen t)erfd)afs eat. fen. EXERCISES. 179. What have you gained that money by ? 1 have gained it by working. What have you done with your wine ? I have spilt it 231 on the table. Where is yours ? It is on the larem ct bag SBrob gcfcf)ntttcn fjat- he had cut the bread). re. After having eaten (after he had ?iad)l>cm cr QCCjeficn fyatte. eaten.) 232 After cutting myself. 9?ad)bcm id) mid) $cfd)nittcn Ijatte. After dressing yourself. f tad)tcm tc fid) angqecjcn fatten. After he had withdrawn from the 9?ad)bcm cr fid) t>om geucr cntfcrnt fire. fyatte. After thou hadst shaved. 97ad)bcm 3)u >id) rafttt fyattcji. After they had warmed them- $ttad)bcm fie fid) gcrccirmt gotten. selves. Before I set out. (Sfjc id) abrcife. When I had read, I breakfasted. 9?ad)bcm id) gcfcfcn fyatte, frufyflurfte id). In the second member of a compound phrase the nominative is placed after its verb. When you had dressed you went 97adjbem a S^ C U^ After he had read the letter he 9?ad)t>em cr ben JsBrtcf gclcfcn Ijattc/ said. f^gte cr. Before I depart I will once more <5()C id) abrcifc, mill id) nod) cins see my children. mat meitu jlinbcr fel)cn. Obs. A. This transposition of the nominative does not take place when the phrase begins with the subject. He cut the meat after he had cut (r fdjnitt ba6 $lcifd), nnd)bcm cr bn^ the bread. S3rob gcfd)ntttcn feattc. What did he do after he had 2Ba$ tfyat cr, nad)bcm er gcgcffcn fjat^ eaten ? te ? He went to bed. (r ging ^u 23ctte. THE FOLLOWING VERBS GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE PREPOSITION ii6er. To be afflicted at something. Ucfccr ctnxiS bctru&t fcin*. To afflict one's self at something, id) ubcr ctttwS bctriibcn. Are you afflicted at the death of (Sinb @ic iih'r ben ob mcinc my friend 1 $rcunt>C6 bctriiOt ? I am much afflicted at it. 3d) bin fefjr foctrfibt borubcr. At what is your father afflicted ? ffiScrubcr ijit 3()r cnr SSatcr bctrubt ? The accident, bcr Bufall ; the death, bcr Sob. To die (to lose life). (Sterben*. I die, am dying. 3d) fterbc. Thou diest, art dying. )u fiirbft. 233 He dies, is dying. Died. Part, past, Cjeftotbctt. Imperfect, Jtatb. To complain of some one or some- id) u b e t Senianben ober thing. etwaS b e H a 9 e n (befd)wes ten). Do you complain of my friend 1 SSeftagen ie fid) iibct nictnen Jteunb ? I do complain of him. 3d) beftoge mid) ubct if)n. Of whom do you complain ? Uebct wen beftagcn What didst thou do after getting up this morning 1 When I had read the letter of the Polish count, I went out to see the the- atre of the prince, which I had not seen before (nod) ntd)t). What did your father do when he had breakfasted 1 He shaved and went out. What did your friend do after he had been a walking ? He went to the baron. Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut the bread 1 He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. .When do you set out ? I do not set out till (crft) to-morrow ; for before I depart I will once more see my good friends. What did your children do when they had breakfasted '{They went a walking with their dear preceptor. Where did your uncle go to after he had warmed him- self 7 He went nowhither. After he had warmed himself he un- dressed and went to bed. At what o'clock did he get up 1 He got up at sun rise. Did you wake him ? I had no need to wake him, 235 for he had got up before me. What did your cousin do when he heard (of) the death of his best friend ] He was much afflicted, and went to bed without saying a word. Did you shave before you breakfasted 1 I shaved when I had breakfasted. Did you go to bed when you had eaten supper ? When I had eaten supper I wrote my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. At what are you afflicted ? 1 am afflicted at that accident. Are you afflicted at the death of your relation 1 I am much (fcfjr) afflicted at it. When did your relation die 1 He died last month. Of what do you complain] I complain of your boy. Why do you complain of him ] Because he has killed the pretty dog, which I received from one of my friends. Of what has your uncle com- plained ? He has complained of what you have done. Has he complained of the letter which I wrote to him 1 He has com- plained of it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. QUI)t Section. Declension of Feminine Substantives. NOM. GEN. DAT. Ace. TU S Singular. The 1 Plural. bte, ber, ber, bte* bte, bet, ben, bte* I. SINGULAR. Rule. All feminine substantives, without excep- tion, together with all foreign feminine words adopted into German, as : bt'e ^orm, the form ; bt'e ftnte, the line, remain invariable in all the cases singular. Ex. NOM. bte grail, the woman ; GEN. ber gran, of the woman ; DAT. ber grail, to the woman ; Ace. bt'e gran, the woman. II. PLURAL. Rule. Feminine substantives ending in e, el, er, add n, and all others en, in all the cases of the plural ; and do not soften the radical vowels. (See Table of the Declension of Substantives, Lesson XIII.) There are two exceptions to this rule : 1st, The two substantives: bte SNittter, the mother; bte ocf)ter, the daughter, soften the radical vowels in 236 the plural without adding n* a Ex. Plural : bie the mothers ; tie orf)ter, the daughters. 2d, Feminine monosyllables containing an a or n, are declined in the plural like masculine substantives, that is, they add e in all the cases and soften the radi- cal vowel. b The door the doors. The bottle the bottles. The fork the forks. The pen the pens. The hand the hands. The nut the nuts. She they. Has she * She has. She has not. Have they ? They have. They have not. My (feminine singular). My (plural for all genders). SING. PLURAL. bie f)itr, bie iZfyitren* bie ftfafcfye bie glafofym* bie abel bie abelm bie geber bie geberm bie anb bie dnbe, bie unb fctn S3tubcc ot>ct sister. feine cfynxftet. My door my doors. 9??oine f)ib mctnc Thy fork thy forks. >cine aOe( ^)eine a Except in the dative. It will bo remembered that all substantives with- out exception take tt in the dative plural, if they have not one in the nomina- tive. (See Lesson XIII.) b The declension of those substantives which deviate from these rules will be separately noted. 237 His pen his pens. Her brother her brothers. Her sister her sisters. Her book her books. Jvter (Vine ftetcrn. 3fa iBrufccr thrc 2$ruter. 3bre djtwcfU't thrc dwcftcrn. Sbr JBud) tfjre 23uct)cr. THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE OF THE FEMININE GENDER. NOM. the good^ ^ GEN. of the good I j > and DAT. to the good ( j Ace. the goodj SINGULAR. NOM. bte gitte* GEN. bcr guten* DAT. ber gutem Ace. bie gate. PLURAL. tie gutem bcr gutem ben gutem bte gutcm Obs. B. The adjective preceded by a possessive pronoun of the feminine gender, as : nteine, beine, &c. has exactly the same declension as with the definite article. My good linen, the right hand, the left hand, the language, the tongue, the street, the town, the woman, the wife, the girl, the young lady, My right hand aches. His left hand aches. The room, the chamber, the cabinet, the apartment, The front room, the back room, the silk, the silk stocking, mcinc o,ute Setnwant ; tie rccbte ant> i tie linf'c ant> ; tie t ; tie Jrau (does not soften takes en in the plural) ; and tae Jrautctn. tie rcd)te J fcfymeqt tie linfe |>ant. tie tube ; tag Simmer ; tie hammer ; tag emad). d tie (Stubc ocra Ijcraug ; tie (Stube btntenaug ; tie (Seifce ; tec fettcne (Strumpf. c When the sensation expressed by the impersonal verb is felt only in a part of the body, the person is put in the dative. d <5tllbc is the room commonly inhabited and in which there is a stove. Btntmer is the general word for room, whether there is a stove in it or not. .Rammer is a small room in which there is no stove, and in which various things are kept ; hence bic JHeiberfammer, the wardrobe ; bte ^Bobenfammer, the garret, &c. emacf) is only used in speaking of the apartments in a cas- tle or a palace. 238 THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE IN THE FEMININE GENDER. NOM. GEN. DAT. Ace. Good, &c. (in the singular).! gute, guter, guter, gute. Good, &c. (in the plural), j gute, guter, guten, gute* Some good soup. ute uppf. Some bad pens. d)lecf)tc 5 c ^ cr ^. Some beautiful linen shirts. Scbone (einnxmftene emfccn. (See Obs. Lesson IV.) THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE IN THE FEMININE GENDER. A good, &c. (feminine). N. erne gate. G. enter gutem A. euie gute, D. enter gittetu THE FOLLOWING PRONOUNS ARE DECLINED LIKE THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. This or this one, that or that one, biefc, jcnc. Some, sundry, eintgc, etltd)C. Many, several, me fore or mcf)tctc. - Which, roclcrjc. All, cillc. Many a one, some, manner, mand)C/ mancfjcS. 2Cnt>ere is declined like an adjective. Obs. C. In the plural all adjectives, ordinal num- bers, and pronominal adjectives have the same declen- sion for all genders, as we have already seen in many parts of this work, particularly in the Table of the Declension of Adjectives, Lesson XVIII. REMARK. To become intimately acquainted with the declen- sion of adjectives, ordinal numbers, and pronominal adjectives, the learner has only to familiarize himself with the definite article ; for when the adjective is preceded by a word having the characteristic termina- tion/ it takes en in all the cases, except in the nomi- Some authors write mefyre, others ntef)tere. The latter is more usual, the former more correct. f The terminations of the definite article are called characteristic because they characterize the case, number, and gender. 239 native singular of all genders and the accusative sin- gular feminine and neuter, in which it takes e (Page 33, Rule 2d.). The adjective itself takes these termi- nations when it is not preceded by any article* or if the word preceding has not the characteristic termi- nation, as : em, ntetn, fetn, &c. in the nominative of the masculine, and nominative and accusative of the neuter gender. This principle is clearly exemplified in the adjective preceded by the indefinite article. The nominative etn, not having the characteristic termination er for the masculine and e for the neuter, the adjective takes it. Ex. it guter 9D?ann, em guteg $int>, The characteristic termination of the masculine being e r and that of the neuter e 3, that of the femi- nine is e : so that ifas sufficient to join the ending e to a word of the characteristic termination to make it feminine. Ex. Masc. and neuter : tnefer, tiefeS ; femi- nine : tnefe ; masc. and neuter : jener jcne ; feminine, jette, These principles being once well understood, the learner will find no difficulty whatever in declining adjectives, ordinal numbers or pronominal adjectives. Have you my pen ? a(>cn (Sic nicinc No, Madam, I have it not. Sftein, SKcibam (gnafcige S rauh )/ * fyafcc fie ntcbt. Which bottle have you broken ? 2Be(cf)c ??tafd)C fyakn (Sic $cr(>rec!)cn ? Which soup has she eaten? SSclcfK (guppc f)Qt fie gcgcffen? What pear have you ? 2Ba$ flit cine 23irne fyaben tu$ > the napkin, tag SeUertud), tie emctte. EXERCISES. 183. Are you not surprised at what my friend has done 1 I am much surprised at it. At what is your son surprised ? He is surprised at your courage. Are you sorry for having written to my uncle ? I am, on the contrary, glad of it. At what art thou afflicted 1 I am not afflicted at the happiness of my enemy, but at the death of my friend. How are your brothers ] They have been very well for these few days. Are you glad of it 1 I am glad to hear that they are well. Are you a Saxon ] No, I am a Prussian. Do the Prussians like to learn French ] They do like to learn it. Do the Prussians speak German as well as the Saxons 1 The Saxons and the Prussians speak German well ; but the Austrians do not pronounce it very well (nid)t all$u gut) ; notwithstanding they are (teffcn ungeacfytet fint e$) very good people. Which day of the week (38c(d)en Saq in tcr SBocfye) do the Turks celebrate (fcicrn) 1 They celebrate Friday (ten Jreitag) 5 but the Christians cele- brate Sunday, the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birth-day (t>er 184. Has your sister my gold ribbon 1 She has it not. What has she 1 She has nothing. Has your mother anything 1 She has a fine gold fork. Who has my large bottle 1 Your sister has it. Do you sometimes see your mother ] I see her often. When did you see your sister 1 I saw her three months and a half (Obs. C., Lesson LXV.) ago. Who has my fine nuts] Your good sister has them. Has she also my silver forks ] She has them not. Who has them ] Your mother has them. Have your sisters had my pens ] They have not had them, but I believe that their chil- dren have had them. Why does your brother complain 1 He complains because his right hand aches. Why do you complain ] I complain because my left hand aches. Is your sister as old as my mother 1 She is not so old, but she is taller. Has your brother purchased anything] He has purchased something. What has he bought] He has bought fine linen and good pens. Has he not bought some silk stockings 1 He has bought some. Is your sister writing ? No, Madam, she is not writing. Why does she not write] Because she has a sore hand. Why does the daughter of your neighbour not go out] She does not go out, because she has sore feet. Why does my sister not speak ] Be- cause she has a soar mouth. Hast thou not seen my silver pen 1 I have not seen it. Hast thou a front room ] I have one be- 241 hind, but my brother has one in the front. Does the wife of our shoemaker go out already 1 No, my lady, she does not go out, yet, for she is still very ill. 185. Which bottle has your little sister broken"? She broke the one which my mother bought yesterday. Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's 1 I have eaten neither of yours nor your mo- ther's, but of that of my good sister. Have you seen the woman that was with (bet) me this morning ] I have not seen her. Has your mother hurt herself? She has not hurt herself. Have you a sore nose ? I have not a sore nose, but a sore hand. Have you cut your finger 1 No, my lady, I have cut my hand. Will you give me a pen 1 I will give you one. Will you (have) this (one) or that (one) ? I will (have) neither. \Vhich (one) do you wish to have 1 I wish to have that which your sister has. Do you wish to have my mother's good black silk or my sister's 1 I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you have. Can you write with this pen 1 I can write with it (Obs. B., Lesson LIL). Each woman thinks herself amiable (ItcOcn^ tvtirtug) and each is conceited (&efi|t (Stgenltcbc). The same (@&cn fc) as men (t>ic OJicmnSpcrfon), my dear friend. Many a one thinks himself learned who is not so, and many men surpass (uOcrtrcffcn*) women in vanity (an (Sitetfett). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. Jfam ttttfc 0i*b*nfo0te Cection. To go into the kitchen, to be in 3n tie ucf)C gcljen*, in the kitchen. fctn*. (See Lesson XXIX. Note .) To go to church, to be at church. 3n trie jUrcfye cjefyen*, in fctn*. To go to school, to be at school. 3n trie cfjule cjcfjen*, in tet fctn*. To go into the cellar, to be in 3n ben Jtcttcr qcfjcn*, in tern cU the cellar. (cr fctn*. The dancing school, tie an$fd)utc ; the play (the comedy), tic eniot>te ; the opera, tie )pcr. To go a hunting, to be at hunt- f 2(uf tie 3a.qt acfxn* x cwf tcr 3aq& ing. fan*. (See Lesson XXX Note *.) TO go to the castle, to be at the 2(uf tag erfcn. 23aud)n;cf) ; plur. tie Singular and Plural fern. A Some of it, any of it. 1 Sing. Some of them, any of I and them. j Plur. Of it, of them. j fern. SBeldje, beren, berfelbem (See Obs. Lesson XVI.) Pronouns possessive abso-y lute. Mine, his, hers, A/- Sg. Ours, yours, theirs. ) FEMININE. Singular. tie metnige, tie feimcje, tie tie unjric^ tic tie b Substantives terminating in ct, t)eit, !ctt ; fc^aft, and Citt) are feminine. 243 Plural Mine, his, hers, Ours, yours, hers. ,' Plural. bte metnujen, bie feimgen, bt'e thricjcn* bt'e nnfrtgen, bte @nrtgen, bt'e if)rigen. c Have you my pen or hers ? ^jabcn a6en i^ mctncn (Bc^wcftcrn tie sisters "? 2Biid)cr .qcfd)tc!t ? 1 have sent them to them. 3d) fyaOe fie tfyncn The fruit, tic tud)t ; the tart, tic Sorte ; the aunt, tic 9)?uf)me (tie Scmte) ; the peach, tic *pprfid)e ; the strawberry, tic rtbcctc ; the cherry, tic $trfd)C ; the cousin (aunt), tic iBafc ; the niece, tic 97id)tc ; the might (power), tic 9Wad)t ; the maid-servant, tic the gazette, tic The relation M ' bet SBewa W J ? ( The neighbour (feminine), tic 9?ad)6atinn ; the ware (merchandise, goods), tic SBaarc* Obs. A. A feminine substantive is formed by join- ing the syllable inn to a masculine substantive. Ex. The actor, tcr c!emmen*. To have a cold, ten djnupfcn fyafccn*. To have a cough, ten $uffen f)a&cn*. I have caught a cold. 3d) fyaOe ten (Scfynupfcn ftcfenmtcn. The cold, ter (Sffymipfen ; the cough, tec frafittt* To make sick. tan6 madbcn. It makes me sick. (5$ mod)t mid) frnnf. EXERCISES. 186. Where is your cousin? He is in the kitchen. Has your cook (fern.) already made the soup ? She has made it, for it stands al- ready upon the table. Where is your mother ? She is at church. Is your sister gone to school ? She is gone thither. Does your mother often go to church 1 She goes thither every morning and every evening. At what o'clock in the morning does she go to church ? She goes thither as soon as she gets up. At what o'clock does she get up 1 She gets up at sun-rise. Dost thou go to school to-day 1 I do go thither. What dost thou learn at school ] I learn to read, write, and speak there. Where is your aunt ? She is gone to the play with my little sister. Do your sisters go this evening to the opera 1 ? No, Madam, they go to the dancing school. Is your father gone a hunting ] He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold. Do you like to go a hunting ? I like to go a fishing better than a hunting. Is your father still in the country 1 Yes, Madam, he is still there. What does he do there 1 He goes a hunting and a fishing there. Did you hunt when you were in the country ? I hunted the whole day. 187. How long have you stayed with (Oct) my mother 1 I stayed with her the whole evening. Is it long since you were at the castle ? I was there last week. Did you find many people there 1 I found only three persons there. Who were those three persons 1 They (($) were the count, the countess, and their daughter. Are these girls as good as their brothers 1 They are better than they. Can your sisters speak German 1 ? They cannot, but they are learning- 245 it. Have you brought anything to your mother 1 I brought her good fruits and a fine tart. What has your niece brought you ? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good peaches. Do you like peaches'? I do like them much (fef)t). How many peaches has your neighbour (fern.) given you 1 She has given me more than twenty of them. Have you eaten many cherries this year? I have eaten many of them. Did you give any to your little sister"? I gave her some. Why have you not given any to your good neighbour (fein.) 1 I wished to give her some, but she did not wish to take any, because she does not like cherries. Were there many pears last year 1 There were not many. 188. Why do your sisters not go to the play 1 They cannot go thither, because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. Did you sleep well last night 1 I did not sleep well, for my children made too much noise in my room. Where were you last night? I was at my brother-in-law's. Did you see your sister-in-law ? I did see her. How is she ? She was better yesterday evening than usual. Did you play 1 We did not play, but we read some good books ; for my sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. Have you read the gazette to-day 1 I have read it. Is there any thing new in it ] I have not read anything new in it. Where have you been since (fettt>cm) I saw you 1 ? I have been at Vienna, Lon- don, and Berlin. Did you speak to my sister] I did speak to her. What does she say ] She says that she wishes to see you. \Vhere have you put my pen 1 I have put it on the table. Do you intend to see your aunt to-day ? I do intend to see her, for she has promised me to dine with us. I admire (Ocnnmfccrn) that family (Me ^amiUf), for the father is the king and the mother the queen of it. The children and the servants (fca efinfce has no plural) are the subjects (K'r Untertfoan, gen. en) of the state (t>et tact). The tutors of the children are the ministers (tcr SRimfler), who share (tlH'ilcn) with the king and queen the care (fctc (Sorqe) of the govern- ment (Me Stcfltcrunj)). The good education (bte (Irjieljutw) which is given to children (See Obs. Contin. of Lesson LXX.) is the crown (bte .ftronc) of monarchs (t>et $ftenard), gen. en). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTIETH LESSON. 2Uljtpg3te faction. To march (to walk)* 9^nrfdbtren. n To walk (to go on foot). Qk'fycn* ($u Jufie $cf)en). a The verb nuirfcfnrctl takes the auxiliary few*, when there is a destination of place, else it takes either baben* or fetii*. Ex. ^Dte >Urmee tft nad) mavfdurr, the army has inarched to Rome; bie ?lrmce fyat (or tft) tdl afl marfdnrt, the army lias marched the whole day. 246 To step. To travel. To wander (to go on foot). The traveller, the wanderer (the traveller on foot), To walk or travel a mile. To make a step (meaning to step physically). To take a step (meaning to take measures morally). To go on a journey. To make a speech. A piece of business, "> an affair, _> To transact business, To salt. Salt meat, fresh meat, the food (victuals), the dish (mess), the milk, Salt meats, Milk-food, To attract. The load-stone attracts iron. Her singing attracts me. To allure, to entice. To excite, to charm. To charm, to enchant. To enrapture, to ravish. 1 am enraptured w T ith it. The beauty, the harmony, the voice, the power (the force), To meddle with something. To concern one's self about something. To trouble one's head about something, (to meddle with something). a$ abge&en*. urn cnvag lu'f ummcrn. 247 I <5o iiol meddle with other peo- 3d) tm|d)C mid) nid)t in frcmt>c pie's business. $&ntc(. The quarrel (the contest), tcr vpantvl ; the commerce (the traffic), tec xwtcl (has no plural). Strange (foreign), (ccntf. It is strange. ($ ifl fontcc&ac. He employs himself in painting, c ' lng ' ) M 1119 (plur. c). I do not like to meddle with 34 mtfct)C mid) nid)t ^mi in tliinqrs that do not concern me. tic mid) ntd>t^ an^cfxn. What is that to me 1 t 5ecc ; the nightingale, tic Q'lOdjtigatl. All beginnings are difficult. ZCttcc 7(nfang ift f^wcr (a proverb). To create* & d) a f f c n. Part, past, cpfdjajfcn. Imped*. fd)Uf. The creator, tec Sdjopfec ; the creation, tic djopfung ; the benefit (the kindness), tk 2Bct)ttl)at ; the fear of the Lord, tic gwd)t ^ jg)eccn ; the heaven, tec ^>tmmc( ; the earth, tie (Scte ; the solitude, tic (Stnfamfeit ; the lesson, tic Section ; b Substantives terminating in urn, form their plural by changing urn into cn. Ex. ba Snbtptbuum, the individual ; plur. bte3titbuen; the study ; plur bie (Stubicu. 248 the exercise, t>te the goodness. bie ute. c I have done it for your sake. 3d) fjobe c$ 3()tcttt>egen gctfjan, O65. The preposition ttegen takes its place either before or after the genitive which it governs ; but when it follows a personal pronoun, the letter t is substituted for the letter r of the pronoun which then forms one word with the preposition. The same thing should be observed with regard to the prepositions fyalben, on ac- count of, and um ttuUeit, for the sake of, with this difference, that the latter never stands before the sub- stantive. Ex. Sfflctnetivcgcn, mdnctfycil&cn, on ac- Unfertrocgcn, unfcrtfycMcn, on ac- count of me. count of us. 2\'inctrc>cgcn, bcinctljcMcn, on ac- (Surctim'cjen, eurctfyaffccn, on account count of thee. of you. 'ctnctnxcjcn, fcinctfycMcn, on ac- Sfyrctivegcn, tfjtctfyMcn, on account count of him. of them, for their sake. Sfjri'trvcgcn, ifjrctf^l&crr, on ac- count of her. In the same way we say : urn ttteutetttnttett, for my sake ; urn beineftmKen, for thy sake, &c. He has done it for the sake of (5c f)at c$ urn ifjrctwiflcn gctfyan. her. On account of you and your Sfacts wnb S^rcr ^tnber, etcn fa children, as well as on account n?cf)t oU mctnet? unt> ter 9}jeini of me and mine, I have put gen nx'gcn/ Ijabc id) Sbncn fcicfc you in mind of and inculcated n?ict)tigc unb untriiolidjc SBafyts this important and infallible fjcit ^u (5Jcmutf)e gcfuljrt unb ctn* truth. gcfd)arft. The cleanliness, the uncleanli- bta 3ictnlid^f cit ; bic Unretnltd^fctt ; ' ness, the government (meaning the bic )&rtgfdt. magistrate), Sensible, reasonable, Ccmunfttg. Not only but also. 9fad)t allcin fonbcrn aud&. EXERCISES. 189. Will you dine with us to-day 1 With much pleasure. What have you for dinner ? We have good soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food. Do you like milk-food 1 I like it bet- c Abstract substantives have no plural in German ; as fcie iite, the good- ness ; tie tefce ; the love, &c. 249 ter than all other food. Are you ready to dine] I am ready. Do you intend to set out soon 1 I intend setting out next week. Do you travel alone ] No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. Do you travel on foot or in a carriage ] We travel in a carriage. Did you meet any one in 'cwf with the dative) your last journey to Berlin ? We met many wanderers. What do you intend to spend your time in this summer? I intend to take a short journey. Did you walk much in your last journey ] I like very much to walk, but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk 1 He wished to walk at first, but after having taken a few steps, he \\ished to get into the carriage, so that I did not walk much. What have you been doing at school to-day ] We have been listen- ing to our professor, who made a long speech on (liter with the accus.) the goodness of God. What did he say? After saying, 44 God is the creator of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wisdom;" he said, " repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God." Why did you not stay longer in Holland] When I was there the living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay there longer. What sort of weather was it when you were on the way to Vi- enna ] It was very bad weather ; for it was stormy, and snowed, and rained very heavily.* 1 190. What are you doing all the day in this garden? I am walking in it (t>orin). What is there in it that attracts you 1 The singing of the birds attracts me. Are there any nightingales in it ] There are some in it, and the harmony of their singring enchants me. Have those nightingales more power over (ttfccr with the accus.) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender (gflrts 1Kb) mother, who loves you so much ] I confess, the harmony of the singing of those little birds has more power over me than the most tender words of my dearest friends. What does your niece amuse herself with in her solitude? She reads a good deal and writes letters to her mother. What does your uncle amuse himself with in his solitude ] He employs himself in painting and chem- istry. Does he no longer do any business"? He no longer does any, for he is too old to do it. Why does he meddle with your business ] He does not generally (qcn)of)n(tcj)) meddle with other people's business ; but he meddles with mine, because he loves me. Has your master made you repeat your lesson to-day ] He has made me repeat it. Did you know it 1 I did know it pretty well. Have you also done some exercises 1 I have done some, but what is that to you, I beg] I do not generally meddle with things that do not concern me; but I love you so much (fc fcbr) that I concern myself much (ft'fyr) about what you are doing. Does any one trouble his head about you ] No one troubles his head about d The learner must here repeat all the expressions relative to the impersonal verb e t ft, it if, in Leutont L1V. and LVl. 11* 250 me ; for I am not worth the trouhle. Not only for the sake of cleanliness, but also for the sake of health (fcie efunt>f)ett), prudent people avoid ((id) fyutcn oor with the dative) uncleanliness, and wash themselves often. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. in tmir acl)t}igst* Cection. OF THE FUTURE. The first or simple future is formed from the present of the auxiliary tt>erfcen*, to become, a and the infinitive of the verb, as in English from shall or will, and the infinitive. Ex. I shall love, he (she) will love. 3$ nxrt>e licfcen, er (fie) ttnrb liekn. Thou wilt love, you will love. 2)u rwrft lieben, 3^ roerbet (e fie fejjr (iebcn. 1 shall never love her. 3d) werbe fie me lieben. I shall love her when she loves 3d) roerfce fie Iteten, trenn fie mtd) me. tteben roirt). (See Less. XLVII.) Will you go out to-day ? SBerten @tc fyeutc < To be dusty. t a u 6 i 9 f e i n *, ftauOcn. Is it dusty 1 3il ee It is dusty. ($ tft It is very dusty. ($ iff fe[)r Is it muddy out of doors ? 3ft e fd)mn|tg traupen ? It is very muddy. ($ ift fefjr fd)mu|tcj. To be smoky, to smoke. 9?aud)cn. Is it smoky ] Does it smoke ? $Raud)t e^ ? It is very smoky. It smokes (S raud)t fel)t. much. It is too smoky. It smokes too ($ raud)t ^u fc^r. much. To go in. $ t n e i n $ c f) c n *. To come in. $ c t c t n i o m m e n *. * The verb tticrben*, when employed in the formation of the future and other tenses, loses its proper signification. 251 Will you go in t SBcrtcn Sic fjincin gcfjcn ? To sit down. id) f e e it, To si, t c n * (verb neuter). Part. past, gefcffcn. Imperf. fajj. I will sit down on that chair, 3tf) wttl mid) e id) mit tfjm (inversion). fprcdjcn. I shall speak to him if he comes 3d) rocrfce mit tfjm fprcd)cn, rocnn cc (without inversion). fcmmt. If it is fine weather to-morrow, I SScnn eS morgcn fd)3nc^ letter ifl, shall take a walk (inversion). werbe id) fpa^tcrcn gefycn. I shall take a walk if it is fine 3d) roerfce fpa^icren gc^n, wcnn cs weather to-morrow (without morgcn fdjoncS SOScttcr ijt. inversion). DC7 3 B. The subject is also placed after its verb, when in an inversion of propositions, the conjunction tioentt, if, is omitted in the first. This omission of the conjunction may take place or not ; but when it does, the second proposition begins with the conjunction f o, then (so). Then (so). 0. If I receive my money I shall C^" ** in (instead J < of: roenn td) mem c(t> befommc), C fo OcgoWe id) Sic. b Wlienever a will or intention and not merely futurity is to be expressed, the verb tooUen* is used. 252 to m " l sha11 an - Obs. When the conjunction ttxmtt is not omitted, the conjunction fo of the second proposition may either be omitted or not, unless the proposition is of a certain length. If you will promise me to keep SScnn &it mtr t>erfprcd)cn rooIU'tt, c$ it secret, I shall tell it to you. (jefjctm $u batten, fo roetbc tcl) e$ Sfyncn fa$en. I have spent all my money, so SA fa&e all twin (5}c(t> that I have none left. ben, fo bap mit fcinS mcfyt iibncj Wctot. T0./K/. SfilUn (anfullcn). To fill a bottle with wine. Gtnc fttofdje mit SBein anfuflen. I fill my purse with money. 3cf) fulle mctncn SBcutcl (nicinc Sflrs fc) mit ctb. With what do you fill that glass] 2Bemtt fallen <2te triefc* fa$ ? EXERCISES. 191. Will your father go out to-day ? He will go out, if it is fine weather. Will your sister go out? She will go out, if it is not windy. Will you love my brother? I shall love him with all my heart, if he is as good as you. Will your parents go into the country to-morrow 1 They will not go, for it is too dusty. Shall we take a walk to-day ? We will not take a walk, for it is too muddy out of doors. Do you see the castle of my relation behind yonder mountain? 1 do see it. Shall we go in? We will go in, if you like. Will you go into that room ? I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. I wish you a good morning, Madam. Will you not come in ? Will you not sit down ? I will sit down upon that large chair. Will you tell me what has become of your brother ? I will tell you. Here is the chair upon which he sat often. When did he die ? He died two years ago. I am very much (fchr) afflic- ted at it. Hast thou spent all thy money ? I have not spent all. How much hast thou left of it? I have not much left of it; I have but one florin left. How much money have thy sisters left ? They have but three crowns left. Have you money enough left to pay your tailor ? I have enough of it left to pay him ; but if I pay him, I shall have but little left. How much money will your bro- thers have left? They will have a hundred crowns left. Will you speak to my uncle if you see him ? If 1 see him, I shall speak to him. Will you take a walk to-morrow? If it is fine weather, I shall take a walk ; but if it is bad weather, I shall stay at home. 253 Will you pay your shoemaker 1 I shall pay him, if I receive my money to-morrow. Why do you wish to go ] If your father comes I shall not go ; hut if he does not come, i must go. Why do you not sit down? If you will stay with (bet) me, I will sit down; but if you go, I shall go along with you. Will you love my chil- dren 1 If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them ; but if they are idle and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. Am 1 right in speaking thus (fo) 1 You are not wrong. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. %mi nn& ucl)t}igste Cation. OF THE PAST OR COMPOUND INFINITIVE. In German, as in English, the past infinitive is formed from the infinitive of the auxiliary and the past par- ticiple of the verb ; but in English the past participle stands after the infinitive, whereas in German it pre- cedes it. Ex. Have loved, to have loved. (SJctiebt fjabcn, goticbt $u r)abcn. In order to have loved. Urn gclicOt $u fyaben. Without having loved. >f)ne gedcbt 511 fyaben. Have been loved. c(tebt roorbcn fetn. To have been loved. (Miebt wotfccn 311 fetru OF THE PAST FUTURE. The past or compound future is formed, as the first or simple future (preceding Lesson) from the present of the auxiliary toerben* and the past infinitive. Ex. I shall have loved, he (she) will 3d) ructbc geltebt fyabcn, cr (fie) nrirb have loved. geltcbt rjaben. Thou wilt have loved, you will u rwrft gcUcbt fjafren, Sfor rocrtct have loved. (f When I have paid for the horse ^ b d)(t I shall have only ten crowns j ^^ ^ nuv ^ ^ [ aijrtg Oteibcn. 254 -4- When at the end of a proposition there are two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive and a past participle, the verb which on account of the conjunction ought to be thrown to the end of the phrase, may be placed either before or after those in- finitives or participles. Ex. f 2Bag rocrfccn ^tc tfjun, rocrm "What will you do when you I 9)?tttcn gabcn iwrtr, or n>cttc gcfpttfrn fabcn, fo tvcrfcc 1$ wtffcn, wa^ id) jii thun (;abc. __ The latter way of placing the verb is the most elegant and most usual. Ex. f3cf) rjo&c tfjm $cfa$t, I have told him that you have J $fcrt) fyaben ocrfaufvn nu'iffcn (and been obliged to sell the horse. 1 not t?crf aufcn gcmujjt or muffcn The same (feminine). 2) t c f c 1 6 e A b t c n & m 1 1 d) c. (See Lessons XII. and XIV.) r r , ^ 5 ^tcfctbc (t)tc namltd)c) The same thing. One and the same. tncrtci. It is all one (the same). (5$ if! etncrtci. Masc. Fern. NeuL Such. clever, folrf)c, folcfyetf (is declined according to the characteristic termi- nation). Obs. A. When fold) is preceded by ein or fettt, it has the declension of an adjective. Ex. Such a man, such a woman, such (Sin fc(d)Ct Sftann, cine fctd)C a child. ctn fo(d)C^ ^tnK Such men merit esteem. (SoldK 9$cnfd)cn vcct>tcncn Tfdjtuncj. Obs. B. When fold) is followed by cut, it is not de- dined. Ex. 255 Such a man, such a woman, such (Sold) ein 9ftann, fold) eine Jtau, fold) a happiness. ein (SHiirf. Ow Me outside of, without, out of. U u p c t Ij a 1 & (a preposition gov- erning the genitive). The church stands outside the 2)ie egen, bafjer. That is the reason why. )a$ ift Die UrfacrK, tvarum. Therefore I say so. >*fnxi}cn facje tcl) cS. My sister's feet are cold. Reiner (Sd)ivcftct frtcrcn tic Jujtf. Her hands are cold. 3br fvtcrcn t>tc &iint>e (C6 ift ifyt an fcen jpanbcn fait). EXERCISES. 192. When will you go to Italy ? I shall go as soon as I have learnt Italian. When will your brothers go to Germany ] They will go thither as soon as they know German. When will they learn it ? They will learn it when they have found a good master. How much money shall we have left when we have paid for our horses 1 When we have paid for them we shall have only a hun- dred crowns left. Have you told my brother that I have been obliged to sell the carriage 1 I have told him so. Have you writ- ten to the same man to w r hom my father wrote? I have not writ- ten to the same, but to another. Have they already answered you? Not yet, but I hope to receive a letter next week. Have you ever seen such a person ? I have never seen such a one. Have you already seen our church 1 I have not seen it yet. Where does it stand 1 ? It stands outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order to show it to you. Who is there] It is I. Who are those men 1 They are foreigners who wish to speak to you. Of what country are they 1 They are Americans. Where have you been since 1 saw you] We sojourned long on the sea-shore, until a ship arrived, which brought us to France. Will you continue your narrative ? Scarcely had we arrived in France when we were taken to the king who received (aufnal)m) us very well and sent us back to our country. Whom are you look- ing for 1 ? I am looking for my little brother. If you wish to find him you must go into the garden, for he is there. The garden is large, and I shall not be able to find him if you do not tell me in which part (fccr fKi() of the garden he is. He is sitting under the large tree under which we were sitting yesterday. Now I .shall find him. 193. Why do your children not live in France? They wish to learn English, that is the reason w r hy they live in England. Why do you sit near the fire ? My hands and feet are cold, that is the rea- son why I sit near the fire. What do the people live upon that live on the sea-shore? They live upon fish alone. Why will you not go a hunting any more ? I hunted yesterday the whole day, and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, that is the reason why I shall not go a hunting any more. Why do you not eat ? I shall not eat before I have a good appetite. Why daes your brother eat so much ? He has a good appetite, that is the reason he eats so much If you have read the bo^ks which I lent you, why do you not re- 257 turn them to me ] I intend reading them once more, that is the reason why I have not yet returned them to you ; but I shall return them to you as soon as I have read them a ($um) second time. Why did you not bring me my clothes ? They were not made, therefore I did not bring them; but I bring them to you now, here they are. You have learnt your lesson, why has your sister not learnt hers] She has taken a walk with my mother, that is the reason why she has not learnt it ; but she will learn it to-morrow. When will you correct my exercises 1 I will correct them when you bring me those of your sister. Do you think (ojauben) you have made mistakes in them. I do not know. If you have made mistakes you have not studied your lessons well ; for the lessons must be learnt well, to make no mistakes in the exercises. It is all the same, if you do not correct them (for) me to-day, I shall not learn them before (fo tverte id) fte crft) to-morrow. You must make no mistakes in your exercises, for you have all you want, in order to make none. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. -Etei mtfr ad)t}igste Section. To die of a disease. Tin ctnet (dative) .Rrcmffyeit fats ben*. The small pox, tie Slattern (plural of tic %>late ter, the blister, the pustule, the pock). She died of the small pox. effncn, aufmacftcn, Sunwdxn, $ufd)lu'pcn * (active verbs). b 3ua,el)cn*, gufcf)ftcpcn*. Part, past, gcfctyoffcn. Imperf. fcfyojl 2Utfo>'l)cn * (a neuter verb), fid) ftffc ncn. f)tit o,cf)t (ctd)t cwf (tft lcid)t effncn). f)ur fd)Ucfjt md)t. Jenftct rocttem 33 en roettcm, ton fcvnc. 8)tan fief)t btefcg (r>en fcrne). f (Semmerfletber tragt man ntd)t im Summer clothes are not worn 1 SOStntcr. in winter. 1 (^ommerftetber roctben md)t tm 2Bm* ( ter getragen. rvirt> nicftt ^cfa tft unbc^rc ift fceutltcf). SBcgrcifcn*. Part, past, t>cgriffcn. Imperf. 6cqrtff. C 97ad) ten Umfta'nbcn. 1 ^ad) efd)affcnl)ctt t)ct: Umfta'nto. tie 93efd)affcn^ctt ; tcr Umftonb. That is not said. That cannot be comprehended. It is clear. To conceive, to comprehend. According to circumstances. The disposition, the circumstance, According as. According to circumstances. It depends on circumstances. Do not put the glass upon the Steflen itb gerfctcdjen. Imperf. j To put. teltcn. To lay. , Jc nacftbenv in fo fern. 97ad)bem c^ tft (nad>t>cm eg fommt). t)tc Umftanbc ftnt). Deffnctt and aufmac^ctt mean to remove the obstacle in order to give ac- cess, as : bte Xfyore, bte pr cine 3i m ^ r ^/ *ww c^ran!, etncn 3Brtcf offnen or aufmacfecn, to open the town-gates, the door of a room, a cupboard, a let- ter. Deffnen is only employed to make an opening in the thing itself, as : et= iten Setcfynam, cine 9lber, cin efd)n)iir offtten, to open a corpse, a vein, an ab- scess, because there is no opening yet. So we say bte Saitfgraben offnett, to open the trenches. 5luffci)ltef$ett is only employed in speaking of things that are shut with a key or a padlock. b The same distinction is to be made between JUtttacf)ett and jufctyltefmi*, us between aiifmacfyett and auffc^ltepett*. 259 To set, to seat. To stick. @'tecten. c Are the women handsome ? ^tnb Me $raucn fcfyb'n ? They are so ; they are rich and rctcl) lint) fcfyort. handsome. What countrywoman is she ? g^ jj She is from France. (Sic i|i cw$ (or pen) Jranfretcf). To be angry at somebody (about SBofc ciuf 3cmant>cn (fiber anything). fcin. What are you angry about ? Sffieruber fint) Sic fcofc ? Are you sorry for having done !)Ut c$ Sfacn U'tt), eg gctfycm 511 it 1 MH'U ? r<5* tl)ut nut (ctt>. I am sorry for it. < &* ift mir nict)t Ucl\ (See Lesson C LXXVII.) Polite (courteous), impolite (un- ofttd) ; unfjofttdj. civil). Happy, unhappy. GHucfltd) ; uncu'iitfltd). What sort of pen have you lost 1 Ba$ fur cine Jfebcv (jaOen (Sic ten? A gold one. (Sine goftcnc. What sort of pens has your 2Ba$ fur Jefcctn fycit 3 sister made ? gcfcf)nttten ? Good ones. (Sute. EXERCISE 194. Of what illness did your sister die ? She died of the fever. How is your brother 1 My brother is no longer living. He died three months ago. I am surprised at it, for he was very well last c (Stellen is used when the person or the thing spoken of is, as it were, standing upright, and Icflen when it is lying. Ex. fcie ($ldfer, bte j$lafd)e auf ben Xifd) ftcUeu, to put the glasses, the bottle on the table ; ein ^tinb auf baS S3ctt legcn, to place a child upon the bed ; ctn ,ftjeib auf bag $ett legen, to put a coat upon the bed ; tvo babcn 3ic mctnett (Stocf ^ingeftellt? where have you placed my stick? wo Ijafcen etc mcitt ISfttfitt ^in^clegt? where have you put my knife ? The verbs ftefyen* and Hcgeil* may be explained by the English verbs: to stand and to lie. Ex. 3(>* Srocf ftel)t in metnem simmer, your stick is (stands) in my room; 3ljr jSntber. ftebt am ^enfter, your brother stands at the window ; 3H* ?J?effer ItCi^t anf bem Xtfrf)C, your knife is (lies) upon the table; liter fteht 3fyt ^tocf imb ba Ue^t 3^ SJ^effer, here stands your stick and there lies your knife, ^refcen nearly answers to the English verb to seat, as : fe^en ^ic fid) hierher, seat yourself here. It is also used in the following idiom : Semotlbttl in ben <5tanb fefeen, to enable some one, as: tcf) babe ibn in ben (Stanb (^efc^t, e6 j^u tbun, I have enabled him to do it. (Stecfen, as an active verb, is used with the preposition in followed by the accusative. Ex. $n bte afd;e fterfen, to put into the pocket. We shall hereafter see various other examples of these verbs. 260 Summer when I was in the country. Of what did he die 1 He died of apoplexy. How is the mother of your friend 1 She is not well ; she had an attack of ague the day before yesterday, and this morning the fever has returned (unt) Mcfen 9?icr^cn twcti'v). Has she the intermitting fever 1 I do not know, but she often has cold fits. What has become of the woman whom I saw at your mother's 1 She died this morning of apoplexy. Did the wine sell well last year? It did not sell very well; hut it will sell better next year, for there will be a great deal of it, and it will not be dear. Why do you open the door] Do you not see how it smokes here] I do not see it; but you must open the window in- stead of opening the door. The window does not open easily, that is the reason why I open the door. When will you shut it 1 I will shut it as soon as there is no more smoke. Why do you not put those beautiful glasses on the small table ] If I put them upon that little table they will break. Did you often go a fishing when you were in that country ] We often went a fishing and a hunting. If you will go with us into the country, you will see the castle of my father. Y ou are very polite, Sir ; but I have seen that castle already. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. bio: nnb Cection. The utility, the use, fret 3?u($cn ; the advantage, frcr Q3orthei(. This thing is of no use. JDicfc as niit md)t$. Useful. 9tt$ad). Useless. llnnti, nuftoS. Is it useful to write a great deal ] 3ft C6 nu|tid), met $u ffyrctbcn ? It is useful. ($ tft nii(3ttd). Is it well (right) to do it 1 3ft e$ InfltC}, eg $u tljun ? It is not well (wrong). (5$ tft unlnUtg (untccfyt). What is that ] 8^n tft bos? I do not know what it is. ^cl) ivetp rucfyt, rvaS e ift. To be called. c t p e n *. Part, past, Q c 1) c t jj e n. Imperf. \) i c p. What is your name ] I 2$te ljctcn @ic ? My name is Charles. f 3d) fyetpe (mcin S7ame if!) ar(. 261 "What do you call this in Ger- 2Btc hcif't bciS mif tcutfcl) ? man 1 How do you express (say) this 8tc fngcn @tc fra$ auf franco jifd) ? in French ? What is that called 1 2ic ncnnt man ta ? To name. Sicnncn*. Part, past, gcnannt. Imperf. nannte. DECLENSION OF THE NAMES OF PERSONS.* The names of persons are declined either without or with the article. Without the article they take $ in the genitive, and en in the dative and accusative, with the article they add nothing to their termination. Ex. NOM. Sfittyelm or ber SBttyefat, William. GEN. SBityelmS beg 2Gill)etm, of William. DAT. 3Btll)elnten bent 2Bill)ehn, to William. Ace. 9BtII)elmen ben 2Bill)e(m, William. NOM. eitfabetf) or bte (Sh'fafcetb, Elizabeth. GEN. ifabetfyg ber tfabett), of Elizabeth. DAT. tfabetben ber tfabetfy, to Elizabeth. Ace. tfabetfyen bte gttfafcetlj, Elizabeth. 5. A. Names of persons terminating in fct), 3, jl, ?/ / J/ ta ^e en$ in the genitive. Ex. ^ranj, Francis ; gen. ^ranjen^* Names of females in a or e (the com- mon endings for almost all such names) change in the genitive a or e into en. Ex. SBtlfyehntna, Wilhelmine ; gen. SBilfyefnttnen^, of Wilhelmine. Seonore, Eleanor ; eonoren, of Eleanor. Obs. B. To indicate that the ending of the geni- tive is not a part of the name, it is commonly separ- ated by an apostrophe as in English. Ex. Sd)ttter^ ebtd)te, Schiller's poems ; oetfye'S SOBerfe, Goethe's works. Sooner than. (Sfyet a(3. Rather than. CtcOcr dig. He has arrived sooner than I. <5r t|l efjet angcfcmmcn ci($ id). For the proper names of countries and towns, see Lesson XLIX. 262 (Siefcot rocrfc iclj mctn <3c(t in ben Stop, cfx id) c$ ttcrfdbrwnte. (Sfye id) mctn dt t>crfd)n?entc, roers fe id) c* licbec in ten gluf. J will rather pay him than go 3cfy will \l)\\ licber beaten, alg Ijtns thither. gcfycn. I will rather burn the coat than 3d) will ten ci]en gcn?ip. I am sure that he has arrived. 3d) reeijj (or bin) getvijj, tap cr (ins gcfemmcn ift. To repair to, to go to. id) tvofyin bcgcbcn*. I went to my room. 3cf) bcgab mid) auf mctn Simmer. He repaired to that town. (?t bcgab fid) in ticfc tatt. To repair to the army, to one's id) $ur TCrmce/ ^u fcinem ^egimen^ regiment. tc bcgcben*. I repaired to that place. 3d) fyabc mid) an ttcfcn )rt bccjcbcn. He repaired thither. (r ^at fid) t>al)in bcqcbcn. Go where you please. Gk'ljcn d) fjattc cmcn Sufall. To ^owr. t c 9 c n*, f d) u 1 1 c n, c t n f d) c ns 6 en. To pour atvay. SB c 9 13 t c 9 c n*. To sAe<2. 25 c c 3 t c p c n*, To shed tears. Sfjrd'ncn tjergicQcn* (Part, past, sets gefiVn. Imperf. 5?cr^c^). A tear. (Sine Sbta'nc. With tears in his, her, our, OT 9)}it tljrdncntcn 2(ugcru my eyes. I pour wine into a glass. Scf) cu'cfk SKctn in cm (^. I put corn into a sack. 2$) jtf)iittc @ctrcibc in ctnen @acf. I pour out some drink for that 2$) fcrjcttfc btcfcm 9)fannc 511 trtnfcn man. cin. I pour away the wine, for it is Scrjfltcpc ten SQBctn nxg, tcnn cr taugt good for nothing. nicfytS, C f SS a 5 an&cttcffcn* (a n 6 & As ro, asfor*, with respect to. < t r o f f e n, n n e t r a f). ft 8Ba$ anbclangctu As to me, I do not know what f 2a mid) anOttrifft (antjctattcjt), to say. fo rocip id) ntd)^ wag id) facjen foil. To meet with. t^ntrcffen* (governs the ace.). Part, past, gettoffert. Im- perf. traf. Where have you met with him? f S5>c fjnbcn @U t!)n angctcoffcn ? I do not know what to do. f 3d) ructO ntcftf, wag id) tt)un fell. I do not know where to go to. f 3d) ttxip ntdjt, rvor)in id) gc^cn felt. He does not know what to an- f @c roctp nid)t, tag er antn?orten swer. fell, We do not know what to buy. f 2Btt ttnficn ntdjt, roa^ wit faufw fcllcn. To unbosom one's self to some (Sid) Scmantem ttcrtraucn. one. To trust some one. ^emanbcm trciucn or ocrtrauen. To distrust one. er(ad)C Gin in tag roll 2Sctn (cm oflc$ KBtn). Gin ud) roller ta^ fitter. tc tic SKittcl, crn 5>fcrt) fan fen ? Scf) baOc tic 9JZittcl tagu (icft fie). 3rf) bafcc fie ntd)t. tic Dame. d) m c c! c n. SBte fd)mccft Sbnen ticfec SQ&c'tn ? Gr fcbuiecft mtr gut. Gr fcljmcctt uiir nid)t. EXERCISES. 197. Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart ? They will ra~ ther tear them than learn them by heart. What does this man ask me for 1 He asks you for the money which you owe him. If he will repair to-morrow morning to my house I will pay him what I owe him. He will rather lose his money than repair thither. Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently several European languages, said that we should (man miiffc) speak Spanish with the gods, Italian with our (fc'tncr) mistress (Die (SMtcfrte Obs. Lesson LIII.) y French with our (fcincm) friend (masc.), German with soldiers, English with geese (tic an*), Hungarian (una,ari|"d)) with horses, and Bohemian (b&fynrifd)) with the devil (tcr Scufel). Why does the mother of our old servant shed tears ] What has happened to her 1 ? She sheds tears because the old clergyman, her friend, who was so very good to her (tcr ifor fo stcl utc* gcthan bat), died a few days ago. Of what illness did he die! He was struck with apo- plexy. Have you helped your father to write his letters ? I luive helped him. Will you help me to work when we go to town! I 207 will bolp you to work, if 3-011 will help me to get a livelihood. Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ] I have inquired after him ; hut nobody could tell me what has become of him. V, 'lu re did he live when you were here three years ago ] He lived then in Charles Street, No. 55. How do you like this wine 1 I like it very well ; but it is a little sour. 198. How does your sister like those apples? She likes them very well ; but she says that they are a little too sweet. Will you have the goodness to pass that plate to me? With much pleasure. Shall (Sell) 1 pass these fishes to you? I will thank you to pass them to me. Shall I pass the bread to your sister] You will oblige (ivrbtnK'u*) me by passing it to her. How does your mo- ther like our food 1 She likes it very well ; but she says that she has eaten enough. What dost thouaskmefor 1 Will you be kind enough to give me a little bit of (t>on) that mutton ] Will you ne the bottle, if you please"? Have you not drunk enough 1 ? Not yet; for I am still thirsty. Shall I give (einfcfycnfcn) you some wine ] No, I like cider better. Why do you not eat? I do not know what to eat. Who knocks at the door"? It is a foreigner. Why does he cry ] He cries because a great misfortune has happened to him. What has happened to you! Nothing has happened to me. Where will you go to this evening? I don't know where to go to. Where will your brothers go to] I do not know where they will go to ; as for me, I shall go to the theatre. > Why do you go to town? I go thither in order to purchase some books. Will you go thither with me ] I will go with you ; but I do not know what to do there. Must I sell to that man on credit] You may sell to him, but not on credit; you must not trust him, for he will not pay you. Has he already deceived any body ? He has already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. Must I trust those ladies ] You may trust them ; but as for me, I shall not trust them; for I have often been deceived by the wo- men, and that is the reason why I say, we must not trust every body. Do those merchants trust you ? They do trust me, and I trust them. 199. Whom do those gentlemen laugh at ] They laucrh at those la- dies who wear red gowns (fcaS .ftlett)) with yellow ribbons. Why do those people laugh at us] They laugb at us because we^peak badly. Ought we to ($Hujj man) laugh at persons who speak bad- ly] We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the contrary, to listen to them, and if they make blunders (JcMcr), we ought to correct them for them. What are you laughing at ] I am laughing at your hat; how long (fVit tvann) have you been wearing it so large ] Since (Qfettfccm) 1 returned from England. Can you afford to buy a horse and a carriage? I can afford it. Can your brother 268 afford to buy that large house ] He can afford it. Will he buy it 1 He will buy it, if it pleases him. Have you received my let- ter ? I have received it with much pleasure. I have shown it to my German master, who was surprised at it, for there was not a single mistake in it. Have you already received Jean Paul's and Wieland's works? I have received those of (pen) Wieland ; as to those of Jean Paul, I hope (fo boffe id)) to receive them next week. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY.SIXTH LESSON. gedjs nn& acl)t}igstt Cection. Who is there ? fffict tft ba ? It is I. 3d) tun e*. Is it you? in& @tc eg? It is not I. 3d) tin c$ md)t. It is you. ie fint) c$. It is he, it is she. Ct iff c$, fie tft e$. Are they your brothers ? c$ 3bre SBtwbcr ? They are not my brothers. & ftnb mctne $rut>cr ntd)t. Appositional phrases a are in German always put in the same case as the principal noun. Ex. NOMINATIVE. Lycurgus, the Spartan legislator, fyfurg, bet cfeggcbcr (Sparta^. Religion, this daughter of hea- 2)ic JRcttflicn, btcfc ed)ter bt 1 ^ .pint? ven, is the faithful companion incW, tft bie trcuc cfai;rttnn tcr of men. Sftnf$ttt. GENITIVE. The duty of a father, the natural St$ fBatcr^ bc^ naturltcftcn 2Scr? tutor of his children, is to pro- munbc$ fcincr ^inbcr/ 9)fltcf)t ifl vide for them. eS/ fiir fie su forgcn. DATIVE. That honour is due to my friend 3)tefe (Sljrc getmbtt mctncm Jreuube/ whq.is a brave man. ctncm broken 97}annc. I gave the father, this honest old 3d) ftfl&c bcm SSatcr, btcfem rcd)t^ man, the model of his family, fdjaffcnen (Srctfc, bcm 93?uftcr fcts that advice. ner Jonuttc/ ben Statl) cjccjcs ten. We call a phrase appositional when it serves to explain and determine the principal noun. THE fUFIVBBSITJ 269 That happened under Constan- ieg cjefd)iVf) untcr (Sonftanttn tent tine the Great, the first Chris- rcjjen, tern erften d)rijtttd)en Hai- tian emperor. for. ACCUSATIVE. It concerns my friend, the coun- (-g betrifft tiietnen S' rcui ?&/ t>en sellor N. SKatl) 97. I have known the king, that ermunt (plur. SScrmiinter) ; the model, tag 9)?uflcr ; the family, tie Janiiltc ; the people, tag 3Scl6 ; honest, red)tfd)affen ; faithful (true), trcu. To thee, my dearest friend, I give jDtr, metnem (tebften 5 rcu "^ c / 9 c be this ring. id) ttefen S^incj. B. In German the pronoun must be in the same gender, number, and case, with the substantive. Of me, who am his nearest rela- SScn nrir, fctncm iflbbftcn tion, he requests nothing. ten, rcrlan t qt cr nid)t$. Is it they who speak ? ftc c?, btc fprcdjcn ? It is they. (Sic fint) It is I W ho speak. C. When a personal pronoun is followed by a relative pronoun, it may or may not be repeated af- ter the latter ; but if it is not repeated, the verb which follows the relative pronoun must stand in the third person, though the personal pronoun be of the first or second person. It is you who laugh. ^f c /f /*' b r cr , f ie tad > cn ' or ' i &U fint) ci% l)cr (ad)t. r ^)u Inft c^ t>cr l)u It is thou who hast done it. < or, C >Du kiji eg, fccr eg gctljnn r;at. It is you, gentlemen, who have (Sic fint) eg, nicine erren, tic said that. 9^f a Qt fjabcn. To look like (to appear). TCugfchcn* tvie. IJow does he look 1 85Jtc fictyt ec aug ? 270 He looks gay (sad, contented). @r ftdjt tuftt^ (tvauncj, icfc$ S3tcr fiefjt cw$ rwc SBoffcr. You look like a doctor. Sic jVljen ix>k cin 2(rjt au. Our equals. f UnjVrc* (ctd)cn. He has not his equal or his f (r l)at fctncS <3lctd)cn nicfyt. match. (3 c m a n b c m 9 1 CM cr> c n *. Part, past, acaltcbcn. Imperf. qltcb. 3cmantcmd[)nlid)fc(>'u*or fctn *. He resembles me. (5r ftcbt mir abnlicf). I resemble your brother. Set) fltetdjc S&fi'ni 23rutcr. I resemble him. 3d) bin il;m af)n(td). Each other. (5 t n a n t> c r (an indeclinable pro- noun)^ We reserve each othe, {8 They do not resemble each other. Sic fcbcn ctnan^cc mrf)t afjnttd). The brother and the sister love )cr JPrubcr unt> bic Sct)tvc)1cr lic= each other. ben cincmt>cr. Are y on pleaseff with each other 1 ? (tnt) c fctnc 95cfannt|"cl)aft & 3*"; cfnntfcl, a ft nut t^m 90 macfyt. I have become acquainted with 3cf) ^obc tf)n f cnncn cjcfcrnt. him. Are you acquainted with him Sic nut ifjm (il)r) OcFannt ? (her) ? b inanbev indicates that the action expressed by the verb is reciprocal between several persons or tilings, and is employed for all cases and genders, 271 Do you know him (her) 1 ^cnncn @ic if)n (ftc) ! I am acquainted with him (her). Set) btnniit ifjm (if)r) bcfannt. I k-now him (her). 3d) fcnnc ifyn (ftc), He is an acquaintance of mine. (T tft mctn JBcfanntcr. She is my acquaintance. tc ift mcinc iBcr'anntc. He is not a friend, he is but an (r ijt fcin grcimfe, cr tjl nut cm acquaintance. SBcfcwntcr. Obs. (go denotes the consequence of a preceding proposition. (See DC? 3 B. Lesson LXXXI.) As tliou hast not done thy exer- SBctt feu fectnc ?Cuftabcn nkl)t gut QCS cises well, thou must do them mad)t ()flft, fo nmf't feu pc nccl) cms again, nutl macbcn. As he did not come, I sent for a cc nicl)t fam, (fo) tic icf) ifyn ru= him. fen. (Lesson LXXXI.) Again, once more. 9?orf) cinmot. As. SDo, EXERCISES. 200. Where have you become acquainted with that lady ? I have be- come acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. Is it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book] It is not I, it is your little sister who has soiled it. Who has broken my fine ink-stand? It is I who have broken it. Is it you who have spoken of me ? It is we who have spoken of you, but we have said of you nothing but good (utcs). Why does your cousin ask me for money and books ? Because he is a fool ; of me, who am his nearest relation and best friend, he asks for nothing. W'hy did you not come to dinner ($um 9TRtttagefjen) ? I have been hindered, but you have been able to dine without me. Do you think that we shall not dine, if you cannot come ] How long did you wait for me 1 We waited for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not come, we dined without you. Have you drunk my health 1 We have drunk yours and that of your parents. A certain man liked much wine, but he found in it (fearan) two bad qualities (Me (Sigenfdjaft). " If I put water to it (t)tncin)," said he, " I spoil it, and if I do not put any to it, it spoils me." How does your uncle look 7 He looks very gay ; for he is much pleased with his children. Do his friends look as gay as he ? They, on the contrary, look sad, because they are discontented. My uncle has no money, and is very contented, and his friends who have a great deal of it, are scarcely ever so. Do you like your sister ? I like her much, and as she is very com- plaisant towards me, I am so towards her ; but how do you like yours ] We love each other, because we are pleased with each other. 201. Does your cousin resemble you ? He does resemble me. Do your sisters resemble each other ? They do not resemble each other ; for the eldest (t>tc filtcjtc) is idle and naughty (unartuj), and 272 the youngest assiduous and complaisant towards every body. Whteft't 9)Zamt gterjt fid) tmmct fd)tim scrapes; but he always gets me 6ntcf $u ; abet et f)i(ft fid) im* out of them again. met ivietct fyetaug. Between. 3tt>tfd)en (governs the dative and accusative). The appearance, . tnS 2Cnfcr)en ; the sight, the face, tog dk[td)t ; the mien, the look, tie 9fticnc ; the countenance, the physiog- tic cftd)t$6tft>una,.. nomy, To have the appearance. 2)a$ Tfnfcfjcn fjafccn*. To appear. d)Ctncn*. Imperf. fd)tcn. 273 To look. ?(usft'f)cn*. To look well. (55ut flu$fef)cn*. To look good. ut iu fein fdjcincn*. You (appear) look very well. (Sic fcfjcn fcftr (jut ou*. She looks angry. (Sic fid)t ocr&rtcjtftd) nu. She appears to be angry. (id)C$ (5K'ftd)t madxn. To receive one kindly. incn frcunbftd) empfancjcn*. Friendly, kindly. grcunMtd). To look cross at some one. 3Miumfccm cin Ob'fc^ cftcftt mad)cn. When 1 go to see that man, in- 2$can id) ttcfcn 9)?ann bcfiK^c, mad)t stead of receiving me with plea- cr nrir cin bofcil (5)cftd)t, onjiatt sure, he looks displeased. micb frcuntltd) auf^unchincn. A good-looking man. in 9}Jann tcn cjutctn ?Cnfcbcn. A bad-looking man. in 972ann tcn fcbtccbtcm ?(nfcr)cn. Bad-looking people or folks. Ccutc en fdjtcc^tcm ?(njct)cn. To imagine. (Sid) cinbitt)cn (governs the da- tive). That man whom you see, seems Dec $Rann, ben Sic fcfjen/ fcbctnt desirous of approaching us. fid) un* (dative) na^crn ^U rvcllcn. To visit, to go to see some one. Senianbcn Oefud)cn. To pay some one a visit. Semanfccm cincn 23efud) madjen. To frequent a place. in en )tt befucftcn. To frequent societies. efcllfdwften befud)cn. To associate with some one. SMit Scmanbcm umcjcfxn*. It is all over with . ! J It is all over ! ($ tft tarum gefcbefjen ! It is too late to consult to-day efd)cf)enc tngc finb nid)t ^u cintcrn about what was done yesterday (Sptid)ivovt). (a proverb). The spite, the displeasure, &ct SScrbrufJ ; the grief, the sorrow, bcr Summer. To vex, to spite some one. Semcmfccm iScrbrup madjcn. To hurt some one's feelings. Scnianfccn fronfcn. You have vexed (spited) that (Sic fjabcn ticfcm 937annc SScrbrug man. qemod)t. You have hurt that man's feel- (Sic fyabcn fctcfcn 9}?ann (jcfra'nft. ings. The place, fccr )rt, tic (Stcttc, I know a good place to swim in. 3d) n>ei cine $utc 'Stctlc ^um 274 To swim. djnrimnu'n*. Part, past, cjc men. Imperf. fctjwamm. To experience. ( r f a r) r c n*. Imperf. c t f u I) r. To endure (experience). & r b u 1 1> c n. To feel (experience). Gmpfttlbett** Imperfect, cm? p f a n t>. I have experienced a great deal. Scb ftafcc met ctbutbct (cmpfunbcn/ crfafjrcn). I have experienced a great many 3cl) Oab< t)icl Un^iicf cjcfjabt. misfortunes. To suffer. 8 c t b c n* (9 c 1 1 1 1 c n/ I i 1 1). To feel a pain in one's head or f 2Cm Jtepfc obcr om Jupc Jcibcn*. foot. I felt a pain in my eye. f 3d) rjafce am 2(u$c (jcttttcn. To neglect. To mm (/o neglect). > c r f a ujn c n You have neglected your prom- crnacl)r ise. tafiicjt. You have neglected to come to (Sic (jafccn DctfiXumt, gut Stunb (^uc your lesson. Cccticn) ju fcmmcn. To yield. 8^ctd)cn* a takes fctn. Part, past, $avicf)cn. Imperf. iv'tct). To yield to some one. \cmant>cm nacrjgctn'n*. r^ict) in ctroae (accus.) fchich'n. To yield to something. < icb jii cttua^ bequcmcn. C ^ bet cttva^ (viwntvn tojfcn*. To yield to necessity. (td) in bit* 9Zctf>wcnbtgEctt fcrjicfcm We must yield to necessity. 9)?cm mup pel) in t>tc Sictl^vcntt^tcit fctjicfcn. To spring. pringcn*. Part, past, cjcfprungcn. Imperf. fptancj. To jump (hop). ^iipfcn. To hlow up, to burst. (Sprcngcn. To omit. 2(utof|cn*. Imperf. Ucp. To spring up from below. 9Scn untcn ^erauf fprin^cn*. To spring forward. >em>art fprtngcn To spring backward. Suriicf fprtn.qcn. The child hopped joy full around 3)a$ ^lint) fyiipfte fccubicj um micr; me. f)crum. b n 5Bctd)CU, to steep, and ettoetdjcn, to soften, to mollify, are active and regu- lar verbs, and consequently take l)rtben* for their auxiliary. b ijpftpfttt, to jump, to hop, to frisk, is gene rally used in speaking of animals that spring, anil of children. 275 Tin- brsiocrers let the bastion Me SSctogcrcr UcfJt'n tie 23nf!ct blow up. gen, The copier has omitted a few JDcv Hfcfcfirci&cr fyat ctntcjc Stfilcn au$s lines. cjctaficn. f2Cuf 3nwnt>cn cbcr ctroaS (e$ fprtnqcn*/ (e$ ftiinen, lo$ tens ncn* llcbcr Scmanfal efccr ctwaS fxtfal? (en*. The cat springs upon the rat. )tc ac fprtn.qt ouf He SKattc tog. To leap on horseback. id) auf t>a$ $)fett> fdjnrincjcn* (gcs To run. 9) between (dative) you and him ; you look pleased with all those who come to see you, and he looks cross at them. Why do you associate (cjcru'n Sic um) with those people? I as- sociate with thorn because they are useful to me. If you continue to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for they have 276 many enemies. How does your cousin conduct himself? He does not conduct himself very well ; for he is always getting into some bad scrape (or other). Do you not sometimes get into bad scrapes ? It is true that 1 sometimes get into them, but I always get out of them again. Do you see those men (Scute) who seem desirous of approaching us ? I do see them, but I do not fear them ; for they hurt nobody. We must go away, for I do not like to mix with people whom I do not know. I beg of you not to be afraid of them, for I perceive my uncle among them. Do you know a good place to swim in ? I do know one. Where is it 1 On that side of the river, behind the wood, near the high-road (Me Catftfttafle). When shall we go to swim ? This evening if you like. Will you wait for me before the city-gate? I shall wait for you there ; but I beg of you not to forget it. You know that I never forget my promises. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON. &cf)t tmi> Section. By all means (obstinately). Oiftit atft't 9flad)t tint) ereaft. To follow. Scfcjen, naci)a,el)cn* (govern the da- tive). To pursue. SSctfotgen (governs the accus.). I have followed him. 3d) bin ifym To lose one's wits. 2)cn 8Scrftan& setltcrcn*. Imperf. wrfor. The sense, the wit, the intellect, fcer 25crj!anK That man has lost his wits, for jDicfcr 9}tann f)at fcen QScrjtant) ccc* he does not know what he is lorcn, term cr ivcif md)t, tt>a$ ct doing. tl)ut. That man wishes by all means jDtcfcr 9}fann ttrill nur nut after (81* to lend me his money. watt fan cl& letfjen. Obs. A. The neuter of the demonstrative pronoun biefeg (ba) may in the singular relate to substan- tives of any gender or number, and even to a whole proposition. Is that the lady whom you spoke 3ft bas fcte Dame, tten fccr ic nut of ,to me ? uur gefprocbcn fjabcn ? That is a bad man. a$ tffc cin fcijfer 9flann. Which are the pens with which 2Bc(cbe$ fint) fcte $ebetn, nut tettcn you write so well 1 c(cfjc$ (ucf ! How lucky ! J Perhaps. 25 i e 1 1 c i df) t. I shall perhaps go thither. 3d) roctte triettctdjt (jtngcfjcn. O^5. D. Hoi^, before an exclamation, is translated by n>ie, ttnetriel, weld), Ex. How good you are ! 8StC ut jinb How foolish he is ! 2Btc t)umm tfl cr ! How foolish she is ! 85Mc founim tft fie ! How rich that man is ! 2Btc rctd) tfl Mcfcr How handsome that woman is ! 2tc fd)6n tft btcfc S How kind you are to me ! SBctdic utc ic flit nudf) fycibcn ! How happy you are ! s !$n$ f;n^ @tc fo gtucfticf) ! How much I owe you ! SBtcwcl tcf) 3bncn nid)t fdjutbt^ fcin ! How much I am obliged to you ! 2Bte fcfyt bin id) 3f)ncn ntdjt tcrfcun= ten ! How many (what a multitude 2Bc(cbc ^cnfdbi'nmcngc ! SOSclcr; cine of) people ! 9)Jcngc 85 elf g ! The multitude, the great number, tic S ome To owe someth ing to some one. 5 ""fcnnfcn Ijabcn*. I am indebted to him for it. iDag Iiotc id) tfjm j 278 To thank. .vD a n f C n (governs the dative). To thank some one for some- Scmantcm fur ctn?a$ tauten. thing. I thank you for the trouble you 3d) tanEc SJmcn fur Me 93?{tf)e, tic have taken for me. . ic fid) fur mid) QCCjctH'tt fyaben. Is there anything more grand I SS?a$ tft grower? Is there anything more cruel ] Bag tft graufamcr ? Is there anything more wicked ] 2a$ tjt gcttlofcr ? Can any thing be more handsome 1 ? $ann etrca* fd)6ncr fcin ? To run up. crkt(aufcn*. To hasten up. >erbcictlen. To run to the assistance of some Scmantcm $u |>iltfe citcn. one. To save, to deliver. SKcttcn. To hasten. @t(cn. To plunder (to rob). ^Muutcrrt. Many men had run up ; but in- 23ictc Scute roarcn f)cr(>cigccttt ; ofletn stead of extinguishing the fire, anftatt ba$ gcucr ^u lofd)cn, ftn^en the wretches set themselves to tic (Sleutcn cm ju ^liintcrn. plundering. To bejrin something. tit)n^ anfancjcn*. Imperf. fiucj. To sef about something. id) n cttva^ (ace.) madjcn. Have they been able to extin- $ctt man bag Jcucr lefdjen f cnncn ? guish the fire 1 Have they succeeded in extin- sft c$ thncn cjctungcn / ta^ Jcuer ^u guishing the fire ? Icfcbcn ? The watch indicates the hours. Die Ubr jCt^t tic ^tuuten on. To indicate. 2(n$eti}cn. To quarrel. id) 3 a n f C n. To chide, to reprove some one. 3cmanten au$}antVn or au^fd)iltcn* (gefd)c(ten, fd)a(r). To scold some one. 9)?tt ^cmantem ^anfen. The quarrel, ter 3anf, tic Sanfcrct. To dispute, to contend about Ueber ctivaS ftrciten* (g something. ftritt). About what are those people dis- 8eruOcr ftrettcn ttcfc Scute ? puting "? Tliey are disputing about who tc ^anfen ftd^/ wcr gucrfl gcl)cn fell. shall go first. OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. The present participle is formed from the infinitive, by adding the letter b* Ex. Stebefl, to love ; present 279 part. Ifcbcnb, loving ; arbcitcit, to work ; present part arbeftenb. The present participle in German is used in the at- tributive sense like an adjective. Ex. it jlcrbcnbcr SSatcr, a dying father ; ber (actycnbe ^riifyh'ng, the smiling spring ; bte ttdfyenbe tltnbc, the approaching hour ; ba$ gittcrnbe $tnb, the trembling child. But it cannot be used as a predicate. We cannot say with the Eng- lish : the boy is reading. a This must be expressed by the present tense, as: ber $nabe Kcft b In English the present participle is used to express cause, reason, condition, and time. But this is rarely the case in German. For in all such instances the present participle is translated by the following conjunctions with the verbs expressed by the English participles : ate, when, as ; itacfybem, after ; ba, as ; tnbem, as, whilst ; tt>eif, because. Ex. Being lately at your brother's 2tt$ id) neuttd) foci 3fccm 23ruK't house, I gave something to his roar, gab id) fctncn JUntcrn ctroa6. children. Having eaten supper, she went to 97ad)fccm c fie $u 9?ad)t gcgefjen fjattc, bed. ging fie $u JBcttc. Having no money, I cannot lend 2)a id) !cin cl& fjafce, fo fanu id) 3^ you any. ncn feinS tcifjcn. Knowing that you are my friend, S)a id) rucip, fcap @ie mcin Jreunb I beg of you to do me that fa- finb x fo (ntte id) @tc, nut ttefen vour. cfallcn 511 t^un. Not finding my brother, I went 3nt>cm id) mcincn ffiruber nid)t fanb/ to my sister. (fo) gtng id) $u mcinec Sd)n?cflcr. Being ill, I cannot work. SBetl id) frcm! bin, fann tc^ nid)t ars beiten. Obs. jB^ These examples show that each of the con- a In sublime style, principally in poetry, it may be used adverbially. Ex. Bittevnb sor jcbcm 5 fatten Icbt bet ^urd)tfame in etvigcr 5lngft, trembling at each shade the fearful lives in constant anxiety. 3f)m in bte 3?ebe etnfalienb, bcivtint ber cblc 2t$iUe6, interrupting him, the noble Achilles began. b Several words formed originally from verbs, have lost the nature of pre- sHut participles, and are used as adjectives only, both in the attributive and predicative sense ; they are : bringcnb, pressing ; briicfeub, oppressive ; Ctltneb- ntcnb, captivating; flicf?cnb, fluent : binreifjeubi overpowering ; friinfcnb, mor- tifying; reijenb, charming. Ex. 3bre Sittcn ftnb febv etnnet)menb, her man- ners are very captivating ; bte S 7loth tft brin^etlb, the necessity is pressing ; bte afl tfl bvitcfeiib, the burden is oppressive ; biefe *8eletbtgWtfl tft franCeiib, this insult is mortifying ; feine 9?ebe tft flicfjcnb, his speech is fluent; ftc tft rei^cnb, she is charming. c S'iadjfem can only be employed with the pluperfect of the indicative. 280 junctions al$ f nacfybem, ba, mbem, tt>etf, has its peculiar signification, and that there is necessarily a difference in their application: 1st, cd$ refers to a definite event of a past time ; 2d, nacfybem states that an action was finished when another action commenced ; 3d, bd im- plies a logical cause from which an inference is drawn ; 4th, intent is used to state that an event is simultane- ous with another event ; 5th, tt>ett expresses a real rea- son why a thing is or takes place. Obs. F. The present participle may, in English, be converted into a substantive by a preceding article, as : the reading, the writing, the speaking. This can- not be done in German, where the infinitive must be employed, as : ba efen, ba3 cfyretben, ba Sprecfyen. As an adjective, however, but not as an abstract substan- tive, the present participle may elliptically be turned into a substantive, as : bcr ?efenbc, one that reads ; ber cfyreibenbe, one that writes; ber Sprecfyenbe, one that speaks. By too much reading one fatigues )urd) 311 tnefcS Scfcn crmut^t man the eyes. fief) tie TCucjcn. Obs. G. Sometimes the present participle is transla- ted by a substantive preceded by a preposition. Ex. I saw your brother whilst I was 3d) Ijafce 3f)rcn 23rut>cr tm ^orfcctgc; passing by. ben cjefefjcn. He came with a book under his (Sr Fnui nut ctncm 25uc!)e untcr tern arm. Xrnic* When I was in the country, 1 was 2ft$ id) auf tern Con^c nxir, fccfanb td^ very well. mich fcbr tvoht. She smiled as she was saying ctn. To reply. (Sritnctvrn. To be struck with horror. 33 on ration (ntfi'|cn) K'fattcn iDcrbcn*. The horror, t>a$ raucn/ tn6 (Sntfofeon. A violent head-ache. (5tn 281 EXERCISES. 204. Ah, it is all over with me ! But, bless me ! (mctn ett !) why do you cry thus ] I have been (5ftcm fyat mir) robbed of my gold rings, my best clothes, and all my money : that is the reason why I cry. Do not make so much noise, for it is we who have taken them all in order to teach you to take better care of your things (@ad)cn), and to shut the door of your room when you go out. Why do you look so sad ] I have experienced great misfortunes ; after having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men ; and to my still greater ill-luck I hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. You must not afflict yourself so much, for we must yield to necessity ; and you know well the proverb : " It is too late to consult to-day about what was done yesterday." Can you not get rid of that man? I cannot get rid of him, for he will absolutely (fcurcfycuis) follow me. He must have lost his \vits. What does he ask you for 1 He wishes to sell me a horse, which I do not want. Whose houses are these 1 They are mine. Do those pens belong to you ? No, they be- long to my sister. Are those the pens with w r hich she writes so well 1 They are the same. Which is the man of whom you com- plain ? It is he who wears a red coat. " What is the difference (t>cr UntcrfcbictO between a watch and me 1 " inquired a lady (of) a young officer. " My lady," replied he, u a watch marks the hours, and near (bet) you one forgets them." A Russian peasant, who had never seen asses, seeing several in Germany, said : " Lord (3Xdn ett), what large hares there are in this country ! " How many obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! you have saved my life ! without you 1 had been (roa'rc id)) lost. Have those misera- ble men hurt you ? They have beaten and robbed me ; and when you ran to my assistance they were about to strip (au^icfycn*) and kill me. I am happy to have delivered you from (cms) the hands of those robbers. How good you are ! Will you go to Mr. Tor- tenson's to night (Mcfcn 2(bcnt)) ? I shall perhaps go. And will your sisters go 1 They will perhaps. Was you pleased at the concert yesterday ? I was not pleased there, for there was such a multitude of people there that one could hardly get in. I bring you a pretty present with which you will be much pleased. What is it 1 It is a silk cravat. W T here is it 1 I have it in my pocket (Me Safcbc). Does it please you 1 It pleases me much, and I thank you for it with all my heart. I hope that you will at last accept (cmncbmcn*) something of (t>cn) me. What do you intend to give me 1 1 will not tell you yet, for if I do tell you, you will find no pleasure when I give it to you. 205. Why do those men quarrel ? They quarrel, because they do not know what to do. Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said that several houses have been burnt. Have they not been able to save any- 282 thing ] They have not been able to save anything ; for, instead of extinguishing the flue, the miserable wretches who had come up set themselves to plundering. What has happened 1 A great misfor- tune has happened. Why did my friends set out without me ? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not come, they set out. Tell ((Sqafytcn) us what has happened to you lately. Very willingly, but on condition (nut fcem ^cfcingc or untct fret iBctnncjung) that you will listen to me attentively (cuifmeitfam) without interrupting (untcrbrcd)cn*) me. We will not interrupt you, you may be sure of it. Being lately at the theatre, I saw The speaking picture and The weeping woman performed. This latter play ()a6 leterc (tuc!) not being very (fonbcrlict)) amusing to me, I went to the concert, where the music (fctc 9}?ufif) caused me a vio- lent head-ache. I then left (ocrlaflicn*) the concert, cursing (ocr* uninfdxn) it, and went straight (Qcrcifcc) to the mad-house (fca$ Sftcirs rcnfyaufe), in order to see (bcfucfycn) my cousin. EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON. 3J*mt untr Towards, against. c 9 c n ) , Against. 2BtDcr ] gov egett denotes the direction of two things turned towards each other and is used for towards and against ; tt) t b e r, on the contrary, denotes hostility and is only used for against. Ex. To take the field against the cgcn (or itribcr) ben Jcint) enemy. gtcfxn*. What have you against me 1 2Ba$ fyafccn cr) mid) ? You speak against yourself. (Sic rct>en Qcqcti (or rotter) fid) fclOjf. To swim against the current. cgen t>cn Strcni fdpmmmetl*. The love of a father towards his 3)te Sicbe ctncS aSotcrg gc^cn (not children. nnt>ct) fctnc I have nothing against that. 3d) fya Self, selves. c ( 6 ft or f c ( t) c t (is indeclin- able). I myself. S* fclfrft. Thou thyself, he himself. )ii fd6ft, cr fclbft. W T e ourselves, you yourselves. 8Str felbft, 3^r (8tc) fctOfl. They themselves. * c Sag. The day before Sunday is Satur- )et Sag rer (Benntag r)ctpt SJamfc day. tag. The day before (the preceding JDcr Sag corner (tcr tJOrfyergerjentc day) was Friday. Sag) war cm J^eita^, Again (anew). SScn iKcucm, router. Once more (again). 9i'ccb cinniaf. He speaks again. (5r jpricbt rotctcr. I must hear him again. 2>ct) uiup il;n rcn 97cucm f)6'rcn. Obs. B. The adverb ttnebcr must not be mistaken for the inseparable particle ttnfcer (Lesson XX V*), nor for the preposition ttnber, against. It answers to the English word again. Ex. tttteberfommen*, to come again ; ttriebetOltfaitgen*, to begin again. It must not be mistaken for jururf, back again, which as in English denotes retrogression. Ex. ^uritcffoutinefl*, to come back again. The light, ta* 8tct)t. To blow. i^lcifcn* (gcbtafcn, Mies). To blow out. 2di6t>(afi'n*. To flee. gltcbcn* (fleflorxn, flof)). To run away. < (vntlaufcn*. C. ;Dacn lew fen*. Why do you run away ? 2Barum laufen Sic nxg (tarcn) ? I run away, because 1 am afraid. Sch faufe tarcn (roeg), rocit id) niter) furd)te (or nxil id) jurd)t f;abe). To make one's escape. J To run away, to flee. > Die Jjtudjt ncr)mcn* (or ergrctfcn*). To take to one's heels. } He deserted the battle. (Sr tft a tcr Sd)(ad)t cntflorjcn or cnUaufen. The thief has run away. >er SDtei tft cntfaufcn (taron- or roegs gdaufen). 284 To catch, to lay hold of, to seize. (Srgrctfcn* (ergriflren, cr griff).- To translate. UcK'rfejjen.* To translate into German. 2(uf K'utfcl) iibcrfc^cn. To translate from French into 2(u* tern Jrnnjoftfdxn tn$ 3)cutfd)e German. (iOcrfcgcn. To translate from one language 2(u$ cincr . c, . , S 95cm 2Tnfanqc bi? ^um @nte. From the beginning to the end. j ^ y*m nto. To produce (to yield, to profit). (Sinbrtna/'n*. To destroy. Scrftorcn. To reduce. ^crat)ftf|cn. To limit. einfcbrd'nfcn. To diminish (to lessen). 93cr!lctncrn. To reduce the price. cn SprciS f)cra()fc|cn. To reduce (to bring down) the Sen 5>rct^ MS auf cincn Skater price to a crown. IjcruntcrOtingcn*. The merchandise, tie S35aarc. The price of the merchandise f Die SSaare fc^ta'gt aK falls. The yard, the ell. tic (5ttc. To deduct. f S7acfe(affcn*. Having not overcharged you, I f )a id) (Sic gar ntcf)t tiOerfcfet ^a6e x cannot deduct anything. jo fann ic^ nid)t^ nad)laffcn. KaTt^h. {* (inseparable). By the year (or a year), jahvltd) ; by the day (or a day), tOijttd) ; by the month (or a month), wonatlicrj. a In iiberfc^ctt, to translate, the accent being on the root of the verb, it b e r is inseparable, and consequently ius past participle is iifcerfcfct, not ubergefffct. (See Lesson XLV.) 285 By no means. ar nid)t. Not at all. an$ unt> gar mcfct. How much does that situation SBterui fcrtnqt 3fywn ttcfi'S 2Cmt yield you a year! j^Wtcl) dn? EXERCISES. 206. On entering the hospital (tas efpttal) of my cousin I was struck with horror at seeing several madmen (fccr 9?arr, gen. en) who came up (naben) to me jumping and howling (f)eutcn). What did you do then 1 I did the same (e* cbcn fo macben) as they, and they set up a laugh (anfancjcn* $u lacbcn) as they were withdrawing (fid) $ururfs atefyen or Wfgbfge&cn*). When I*was yet little I once (einft) said to my father, " I do not understand (pcrftcfjcn*) business, and I do not know how to sell ; let me play." My father answered me, smiling- (Ui'cbe(n), " In dealing one learns to deal, and in selling to sell." " But, my dear father," replied I, " in playing one learns also to play." " You are right," said he to me ; " but you must first (oevs fjcr) learn what is necessary and useful." Do you already know what has happened 1 I have not heard anything. The house of our neighbour has been burnt down. Have they not been able to save anything 1 They were very for- tunate in saving the persons that were in it ; but out of (sen) the things that were (fid) K'flnfccn*) there, they could save nothing. Who has told you that ! Our neighbour himself has told it to me. Why are you without a light ? The wind blew it out, when you came in. W^hat is the day before Monday called ! The day be- fore Monday is Sunday. Why did you not run to the assistance of your neighbour whose house has been burnt down ? I could not run thither, for I was ill and in bed. What is the price of this cloth ! I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. I think (fin- ten*) it very dear. Has the price of cloth not fallen ! It has not fallen : the price of all goods has fallen, except (au6o,encnmicn) that of cloth. I will give you three crowns for it. I cannot let you have it for (urn) that price, for it costs me more. Will you have the goodness to show me some pieces (ba$ (Stuct, plur. c) of English cloth ! With much pleasure. Does this cloth suit you 1 It does not suit me. Why does it not suit you ! Because it is too dear ; if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it (tarwi). Having not asked too much, I cannot take off anything. 207. You learn French ; does your master let you translate 1 He lets me read, write and translate. Is it useful to translate in learning* a foreign language ! It is useful to translate when you nearly know the language you are learning ; but while (nxnn) you do not yet know anything, it is entirely useless. What does your Ger- man master make you do ! He makes me read a lesson ; after- wards he makes rne translate French exercises into German on 286 (ftC'Ct with the accus.) the lesson which lie has made me read ; and from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks German to me, and I have to answer him in the very (fdbft) language which he is teaching me. Have you already learnt much in that manner? You see that I have already learnt something, for 1 have hardly been learning it four months, and I already understand you when you speak to me, and can answer you. Can you read it as well ? I can read and write as well as speak it. Does your master also teach English ? He does teach it. Wishing to make his acquaint- ance, I must beg of you to introduce me to (bet) him. As you wish to make his acquaintance, I shall introduce you to him. How many exercises do you translate a day 1 If the exercises are not difficult I translate (from) three to (bis) fouf every day, and when they are so, I translate but one. How many have you already done to-day 1 It is the third which I am translating; but to-morrow I hope to be able to do one more, for I shall be alone. Have you paid a visit to my aunt] I went to see her two months ago, and as she looked displeased, I have not gone to her any more since that time. How do you do (to-day) ] I am very unwell. How do you like that soup? I think (ftnl^u*) it is very bad ; but since I have lost my appetite I don't like anything. How much does that situation yield to your father 1 It yields him more than four thousand crowns. What news do they mention (fcigcn) ? They say that the Turks have taken the field against the Russians. Every one will find in himself the defects which he remarks in others : the defects of others are before (us), our own behind us. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETIETH LESSON. tfemt&SU flection. PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. I may have, thou mayest have, 3$ fyfl&e, 3)u fjafreft, cr (fie, e$) he (she, it) may have. baft*. We may have, you may have, Bit fyafcen, 3fa fyabct, fie fjabcn. they may have. I may be, thou mayest be, he 3cf) fct, S)u fctcft (or ft'tft)/ IT (fie, (she, it) may be. C5) feU We may be, you may be, they 2Btr fetcn, Sfy? fctct/ fie feten. may be. I may become, thou muyest be- 3cl) wcrfcc, )u n>crbcft, cr (fie, c) come, he (she, it) may become. iverbe. We may become, you may be- 2Btr tm'rfcen, 3^ roctbct, fie n?er* come, they may become. K'tt. 1 may praise, thou mayest praise, %$ (cfce, 2>u lofccft er (fie, c$) lofte. he (she, it) may praise. 287 We may praise, you may praise, SOBtr (often, 3f)r fofcct, fie they may praise* Obs. A. The present of the subjunctive differs, in regular verbs, from the present of the indicative only in the third person singular, which rejects the letter t. All German verbs are regular in the present of the subjunctive, which is formed from the infinitive. Obs, B. The letter e which is often omitted in the present of the indicative (Obs. A, Lesson XXXIV.) must always be retained in the present of the sub- junctive. He who requires to be honoured SDBcr ocrtangt/ top man tfyn fetneS on account of his riches, has 9fctd)tf)um6 rocgen K'tefyrc, t>ec also a right to require a moun- Ijat aud) etn 3icd)t 311 tJCttancjen, tain to be honoured that con- fca9 nian ctncn SBcvg wrefyrc, t>cr tains gold. clt) in fid) fyat. IMPERFECT OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE. In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive does not differ from that of the indicative. In irregu- lar verbs it is formed from the imperfect indicative by softening the radical vowels and adding an e* b The imperfect of the subjunctive is used after the conditional conjunction tt>entt, if, expressed or under- stood. If I had money. S5*cnn td) d5clt> fyatte (or fjcitte id) cfo). a In conjugating their verbs, learners would do well to prefix a conjunction to each person of the subjunctive, not because a conjunction should necessa- rily precede that mode, but because it is advisable to get into the habit of placing the verb after the conjunction, particularly in compound verbs. They may use for that purpose one of the conjunctions b a , tt> e n n. Ex. JDaf id) abfdjtetbe, that I may copy ; tenn id) dbfcfeHebe, if I copied ; tt>etm id; abgefd)rieben ptte, if I had copied ; bap id) a&fd)retben tvevbe, that I shall copy, &c. These examples show that when the phrase begins with a con- junction (Lesson XLVIL), the separable particle is not detached from the verb in simple tenses, and in the past participle gives way to the syllable ge. b From this rul must be excepted the sixteen irregular verbs which com- pose the first class in our list. These, having already an e in the imperfect indicative, do not add one in the subjunctive. Several of them do not soften the radical vowel, but become regular again in the imperfect subjunctive, as : fennen*, to know ; nennen*, to name, to call ; rennett*, to run ; fenben *, to send ; toenbetl*, to turn. 288 If I saw him. SOBcnn id) ibtt fafje (or fafyc id) ifyn). If he did it. g&cnn cr e$ tfyatc (or tfjatc cr e$). Were he to lose his money. SScnn er fctn elt> Dcrlore. Were he to beat his dog. 2cnn cr fctncn unt> fct)(ugc. If you were rich. SSSerm @te rctd) roarcn (or rcflrcn etttt is not conditional it re- quires the indicative mode. Ex. If he is not ill, why does he send SOScnn cr md)t frcm! iff, nxirum Wpt for the physician 1 er ten ^Doctor femmcn ? 06s. D. Instead of toentt, the imperfect subjunctive of the verb foffen is often used at the beginning of a sentence, as should in English. Should you still receive my let- ofltcn erben*, which is: id} nwvfce, I should or would become, and, as in the future tenses (Lesson LXXXI. and LXXXIL), the present of the infinitive for the conditional present, and the past of the infinitive for the conditional past. The imper- fect of the subjunctive may be used instead of the conditional present, and the pluperfect of the subjunc- tive for the conditional past. Ex. I should do it. 3d) rourbe c$ tfjun (or id) tljatc e$) He would have done it. CSr roiirfce c$ Qctfycm fyciben (or ec fyatte c cjctbcm). We would go thither. 8SMr tvurfccn t>af)in gcfycn. You would go thither. Sbt rcwrbct f)tngcf)cn. They would go thither. tc n?urt)cn ^tngchcn. Thou wouldst thank me once. 2)u wfirteft mtr ctnft tanfcn. At one time, one day (once). (Stnft, cinc^ Sagcg. Obs. E. The imperfect of the subjunctive or the conditional tense may be employed either before or after conditional propositions, as in English. Ex. 289 I would buy it if I had money 3d) fauftc eg (or tcb nnirbc eg faiu enough. fen), nxnn tcb ell> cjenug rja'tte. If 1 had money enough I would 95*enn tcb clt> p/mio, batrc, fo tuurfrc buy it. tcb 06 faufcu (or fo fauftt tcb cs). Had I money enough I would pay attc id) el& g.'nug, fo bc$ablte id) for it. eg (or fo OJftrDc tcb eg be$ab(cn). Had 1 money I would give you .pJitte id) ell> (or nvnn id) GMb some. fyiittc), fo nritrbe tcb 3bncn nxtcbeS cjcbcn (or fo gabc id) Sftiu'ti n>cU If 1 went thither I should see SScnn id) IjtnQtncjC, fo tvurfcc tct) if)n him. fcf)cn. Were I to give it to him, he would abe id) c^ t^nt, cr tvuvbc eg (or fo keep it. roiirfrc cr w) bebnttcn. If I gave it to him, he would not SBcnn id) eg tbm .qJibe, fo nnirfcc er eg return it to me. mtr nicbt ivieKT^eben. Had you come a little sooner (or, gftarcn Sic eincn Kugcnbftcf eber Cs if you had come a little sooner) fommen (or ruenn Sic eincn 2(iu you would have seen my bro- gcnWicf ebcr qcfommcn tvcircn), fo ther (or, you might have seen nnirfcen (Sic mctncn SWrubcr gcfe= my brother). fyen b^bcn (or fo hattcit olfen*, mogen*, biirfen*, is often employed to express various feelings, as : 1st, $6mten, fear or desire. Ex. He might fall. cirf (or tiirftc) id) (Sic bitten, mir $u fogcn ? Would you learn German, if I SOSurben cn ^ie nad) )Dcutfd)tcmb many, if I had gone thither rctpt fein, wcnn tcf) mit with you ? fcafiin gcrctf't ware ? Would you go out, if I remained SBiirfccn (Sic au&jefycn/ wcnn ic^ at home 1 $u .paufc Wtcbc ? I would remain at home, if you 3d) nntrfcc $u ^>aufc Mctben (or id) went out. Wcbc ju |>aufc) roenn ie au\>5 m Would you have written a letter, SEitrtcn (Sic cinen SBricf qcfcbricbcn if I had written a note ? Ijabcn, n?cnn ic^ cm SBitlct gefd^rtc* fccn The spectacles, tic SBritlc (is in German used in the singular) ; a pair of spectacles, cine 23rifle ; the old man, t>cr cilte Warn, tct the optician, t>cr SDpticug ; To go (or come), to fetch. ?(bf)eK'n. To keep one's bed (one's room). Dag SBctt (t>a$ 3'tmmcr) The plate, bet the son-in-law, bcr the daughter-in-law, Me ( the progress, bic ^ertfd)rittc (plural) ; the step (the pace), bcr cbritt ; really, nnrfltd). EXERCISES. 208. Would you have money, if your father were here ? I should have some, if he were here. Would you have been pleased, it I 291 had had some books 1 I should have been much pleased, if you had had some. Would you have praised my little brother, if he had been good ?_If he had been good, I should certainly (flenM) not onlv have praised, but also loved, honoured, and rewarded him. Should we be praised, if we did our exercises ? If you did them without a fault, you would be praised and rewarded. Would rny brother not have been punished, if he had done his exercises 1 He would not have been punished if he had done them. Would your sister have been praised, if she had not been skilful ! She would cer- tainly not have been praised, if she had not been very skilful, and if she had not worked from morning until evening. Would you give me something, if I were very good 1 ? If you were very good, and if you worked well, I would give you a fine bpok. Would you have written to your sister, if I had gone to Dresden"! I would have written and sent her something handsome, if you had gone thither. Would you speak, if I listened to you! I would speak, if you listened to me, and if you would answer me. Would you have spoken to my mother, if you had seen her 1 ? I would (have) spoken to her, and have begged of her to send you a hand- some gold watch (tic iltjt), if I had seen her. 209. One of the valet de chambres (t>er jtammctfctcncr) of Louis the XIV. (Sutwtjj fccs XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to bed, to recommend (cmpjvblcn*) to the first president (t>cr Dbcrprafu tent) a law-suit (t>et 9)ro$c{J) which he had against his father-in-law (tvclchi'n cr mit fctncm (Scbivtegcrsatcr fiibrtc), and said, in urging him (in 3cmantvn fcrtngen*) : "Alas (2(cb) sire (@ucr 9}toii'jWt;, you have but (tc Mirfcn nur) to say one word." " Well ((Si)," said Louis XIV., " it is not that which embarrasses me (t>a$ tft es ntd)t/ nxi mtch anftcbt) ; but tell me, if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad if I said that word ! " If the men should come, you would be obliged to give them some- thing to drink. If he could do this he would do that. A peasant having seen that old men used spectacles to read, went to an opti- cian and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician put another pair of the (sen ten) best which he could find in his shop upon his nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to him : " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all!" "If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want your spectacles." I have always flattered myself, my dear brother, that you loved me as much as I love you ; but I now see, that I have been mistaken. I should like to know why you went a walking without me. I have heard, my dear sister, that you are angry with me, because I went a walking without you. I assure you that, had I known that you were not ill, I should have come for you ; but I inquired at your physician's about your health, and he told me that you had been keeping your bed the last eight days. 292 210. A French officer having arrived at the court of Vienna (am $tcs tier efc), the empress Theresa (Die .fiaijVrtnn Sfxrcfta) asked him, if (cb) he believed that the princess of (pen) N., whom he had seen the day before, was (rua'rc) really the handsomest woman in (son) the world, as was said ? " Madam," replied the officer, " I thought so yesterday." How do you like that meat 1 I like it very well. May I (arf or titrftc tch) ask you for a piece of (son) that fish ] If you will have the goodness to pass me your plate, I will give you some Would you have the goodness to pour me out some drink 1 With much pleasure. Cicero seeing his son-in-law, who was very short (Han), arrive with a long sword at his side (an tH't cite)* said : " Who has fastened (flclnm&cn) my son-in-law to this sword 1 " (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-FIRST LESSON. in tmb neunpjste Section. To propose. (Sid) e r n c (j m c n *. I propose going on that journey. 3d) nchmc mic t>er, bicfc SRcifc modxn. | J I endeavour to do it. 3d) Ocinuhc mid), e$ $u tfnm. I endeavour to succeed in it. 3d) fiidx, C8 1) a I) i n ^u brina,cn. To aspire after something. 97ad) 'ctit>a^l trad)tcn. He aspires after places of honour, ^t tradjtct nod) ^Orcnftt'IIcn. The honour, btc f)rc ; the riches, t>cr 9?ctd)tf)um ; the title, tcr SitcU I should not have complained of 3d) ttwrfcc mid) lifter bo$, n?n^ cr what he has done, if it had gctfoan ^at, nid)t t\'f(acjt babcn, injured only me; but in doing tvcnn c^ nnr mtr gcfcht^ct hattj ; t7, he has plunged many fami- obcr cr f)at pictc ^amiltcn ta^urcl) lies into misery. in* ((cnt> cjcfKtqt. Since you are happy, why do 3)a Sic t) o d) gliuKid) finb, n?arum you complain 1 ? Ocftogcn Sic fid) t) c n n ? Obs. A. In German a good many words, as : fcemt, booty, tt>ol)l, &c. are used for the sake of euphony. Such words cannot possibly be rendered in English. Ex. 293 What do you wish to say with &ci$ rceltcn Sic t> c n n fccmrit this? Qcn? Since you have nothing- to tell )a Sic iljm bed) nid)t$ $u him, why do you wish to see fyatvn, tvarum tvollcn Sic tfjn him 1 i> c n n fchcn ? Who has made the best use of 2Bcr hot rv o b t h'n Ocftcn his money *? pen fcincm cite gcmadjt ? To injure. SdiaK'n. To plunge (to precipitate). Stur^on. The use, KT You would oblige me much, if Sic nnirbcn mid) fcbr you would do me this favour. ivenn Sic mir ttcfc crivcifcn ivclltcn. If you w r ould render me this 95>cnn Sic nur ttcfai ^tcnfl fciftcn service, you would oblige me ivclltcn, fo tvurtcn Sic ir.td) fcf)t much. rcrbt^cn. To oblige. ^crbinbcn*, wrpflicbtcn. To render a service to some one. 3ttuant>cm fincn ^)icn)l (ciflcn. The obligation, tic >cr(unfctiel)fcit. To tie (attach). 2MnN*n*. I tie the horse to the tree. 3d) btnfrc tfl^ 9?fcrb an ben ffioum. He is the most honest man that Sag ift tcr cbr(td)fic ^ann, t>cn has ever been seen. man jc (jcmcit?) gcfcfjcn bt. I want a horse that must be tal- 3d) nm cin ^)fcrb fjcibcn, t)a^ (ivc(? ler than this. d)C6) proper ift n(^ ttcfc^. I am sorry that she is ill. @g ift (tt)iit) mir tcib, t>ap ftc fran! ift. I am glad that you are come. ($ ift mir (icO, tap Sic gc!cmmcn ftnK I am astonished that he has not 3d) ruunbcrc mid), ba|5 cr fcinc 2Cufs done his exercises. cjabcn nid)t qcmad)t Ijat. He will marry her though she is (5r ruirt) fie bcirat^cn, cb fie a,teidf) not rich. nicbt rctcb ift. I will wait until he returns. 3d) ivill rcartcn, Oi$ cr ^urudffcmmt. In case that should happen, let 3m JflHc c^ Qcfdjtcl)^ fo lajfcn Sic me know it. mid)'6 rciffcn. OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. O6s. B. In German the subjunctive, being only used to express doubt or incertitude, is not governed by any particular words. It has more affinity to the English subjunctive than to that of any other lan- guage, and more than would at first be supposed. We sometimes, however, prefer the subjunctive where the English use the potential should or would, though we could in this case even use either the potential or the subjunctive. Ex. 294 1 should do it, if it were possible. Were I in your place, or if I were in your place. Had he the treasures of Crcesus, or if he had the treasures of Cro3sus. That man would be happier, if he left off gambling 1 . He would have been happier, if he had left off gambling. If you knew how ill I am, you would not be astonished to find me in bed. Sel) ID it r t c c$ tfyun, tvcrm eg meg* (let) iv a r c. 28 a r c tcb an Shrcr Stcfle, etcr avnn tcb an Sbrer Stdlc ID a r c. a 1 1 c er tic Scbae tc* (Sroju?, otcr nx'nn cr tic Scba'e tee (ri)s fu* b a 1 1 c. >iefer 9D?ann rourtc flfflcffidjet f c t n, rccnn cr ta* @ptdai 1 t c 9 e. (Sr ty ii r t e gliicf lidbcr cj c n; c f c n f c t n, rucnn cr bag piclcn g c laffcn hattc. 85?cnn Cic if u 9 1 c n (or H> ft t c n te), ivtc franf tch bin, fc wiirt t> c n (S'tc nicl)t crftcumt fctn (fo roarcn Sic ntcht crftaunt), niter) tm S^ctti* 311 put en. (5r it? ii r t> c c^ ntcl)t g c t h a n fyci; ben, f) a 1 1 c cr ten rfctcj t>c r a u eg c j"cl)C n. Scb ID ii r b c nucb fwr untanfftac batten, f a b e tcb Sic ntd)t al5 mctncn ^ct>(tbatcr a n. 2)tc Jranjcfcn ID ii r t) c n Me Scblacbt ntcbt g e ID c n n e n b a b c n (or batten Me Scblacbt nicht Qe* n? o n n e n), tDcnn fie ntcbt etnc fo grc^c llcfrcrmacbt pen Ccuten 9 c b a b t fatten. C. In English the potential should or would is used to express a wish relating to a future time, and the subjunctive to express a wish relating to a past time. In both instances the Germans use the subjunc- tive. Ex. He would not have done it, had lie foreseen the result. I should think myself ungrateful, did I not consider you as my benefactor. The French would not have gain- ed the battle, if they had not had superior numbers. I wish you would do it. I wish you would go thither. I wish you had done it. I wish you had gone thither. 1 should have wished to see him, had it been possible. Scb nriinfcbtc, Ste t M t c n c$, or fcajj tc e$ t b # t e n. Scb nriinfcbtc, Sic 9 1 n 9 c n I) t n, or ta9 Sic b t n cj t n 9 c n. Scb nninfcbtc, Sic * batten c$ t: t b a n, or tap Sic C6 cj c t () a n batten. Scb tDitnfcbte, Stc n? a' r c n \}\m Q e 9 a n 9 e n, or tap Stc bin* 9 e 9 a n 9 c n ID a r e n. Scb b a 1 1 c 9 c ID ii n f cb t, tbn 511 feben, ware c$ m&jltd) 9 c to e f fc n. 235 I should like to read, if I had 3d) ( a f e gcrn, tcnn id) nut Sett only time. I) a 1 1 e. Obs. D. Some expressions require sometimes the indicative and sometimes the subjunctive according to the manner in which the sentence is formed. Ex. {Indie. @r mag fo reicf) fein, n>ie er nriflL Subj. (r fet fo reicf), ttne er rootte, Hndic. Sfyre etoaft mag fo Whatever your power 1 grog few, al$ fie unit. may be. ] Subj. 3l)ve eroalt jet norf) I fo . In German we never employ the indica- tive, 1. In conditional propositions with or without the conjunction tt>emt, if. (See preceding Lesson.) Ex. If I could I would do it. cnn id) fonntc, fo tbatc tdj e$ ; or fonntc id)/ fo tfyate td) c^. If she were amiable he would S&cnn fie Itcbcn^tviirMg wave (or marry her. roarc ftc UcOcnsrtJurt)^)/ fo tljctc cc ftc. 2. In exclamations and wishes. Ex. If I had friends ! a'ttc id) Jrcimfcc ! If I were rich ! $Iarc id) rcid) ! May heaven grant it ! >cr tmmcl gc(>c c^ ! God forbid ! d>ott bcftiitc ! I could not have thought it ! a'tte id)' tocft 3. After the verbs erjafyfert, to relate ; fragett, to ask ; fagen, to say, and others, which relate indirectly, either to what we have said ourselves, or to what we have heard said by other persons. Ex. He related to me, that he had (r cr^ahftc mir, t>a|5 cr cr unb such a one, whether I had no JHT rucirc, Ob tcb fein elt> f)attc, money, w^hy I did not know tvarum id) nid)t fc^rcitjen fonnte. how to write. 296 Thou art master on the cross- 3)u Gift em Sfteiftcr cwf fcer bow, Tell. brujl, Sett. They say, thou standest up to Sfflcrn fac\t, tu na'bmcft c$ ouf nut any shooter ] jctem (Schiifecn ? (e*Ulcr*6 'Bttbclm Sett.) I told him he had made a mis- ^cb fagU* ttwi, fcajj cr ficb gctrrt fyate take ; but he thought that was te ; er mctnte (ibcr, to? ivcire nicl)t impossible, as he had looked mogUcb, rueil cr cs trcimot turd)' it over three times. gcfcbcn batte. A wise man said, The renson (Sin SBctftr fagte : )cr 9??cnfcr) f)at>e why a man has but one mouth bepiucgcn cincn SDUmb unt) ^it>ct and two ears is, that lie may )()rcn, taunt cr swinger fprcc^c, speak less and hear more. unt) mcfyr t)orc. F. Mr., Mrs., and Miss such a one, are often translated by ber ltnt> t)er for the masculine, bt'e imb t)ie for the feminine, fca lint) fcd$ for the neuter. He said he would marry Miss (5r fnqtc, cr roorbc* ta^ unfc ta$ such a one. ^rciulctn lunrntbcn. To sufter shipwreck. Schijf^tttdj (cit)cn*. Possible, mSgttd) ; impossible, unmocj(td). Whether. ) 6. O&s. G. D6 is only used in indirect questions, or before sentences which express doubt or possibility. Ex. I do not know whether he is at Set) rocip nicrjt, cf) cr 311 $aufe tft. home. I did not know whether you 3$ rouC'te ntcrjt, c() c$ S^ncn (ict) would be glad of it. fein nnirtc. The question is whether he will (* tft Me Srngc, ct> cr c$ n?irt) do it. rocllcn. jH". D6 is a component of the following con- junctions : obgleid), obfi^on, obwoM, objtt)ar, though, al- though. These conjunctions ought to be considered as two separate words, for the subject or even the case of the verb may be placed between them. Ex. I shall buy that horse, though it ^cb tvcrtc MefcS Spferb fflufot/ efe c$ is not an English one. Qtcid) fein (5ncjl3nt>cr ift b * .9BcrS>C is here in the future of the subjunctive. (See the following Les- son.) b When the subject or case of the verb is not a personal pronoun, it is not 297 Though he is my cousin, he cr ojtctd) (or fdjcn) mctn SScttct nevertheless does not come to tft, fo tommt cr tod) ntd)t gu mir. see me. Although he has promised it to >bo,tcid) cr c* mir t>erfprod)cn tar, fo me, I do not rely upon it. $at)(e id) tod) ntcbt barauf. Although he is poor, he does )b cr [ebon (or gk'tcb/ groar, roof)() nevertheless a great deal of arm tft, fo tfout cr tod) met utc*. good. However, nevertheless, ted) ; the folly, tic Sborfxtt, tie )?arrbett ; the character, tcr Gbaraftcr (plur. c), tic Qtt muttjeart; bashful, timid, Mete ; fearful (timid), furcbtfam ; natural, uaturlid) ; polite (civil), impolite (uncivil), IjofUd) ; unfjofltd). EXERCISES. 211. Well (9?un), does your sister make any progress 1 She would make some, if she were as assiduous as you. You flatter me. Not at all ((on$ unt gar nicbt),! assure you that I should be highly satisfied, if all my pupils worked like you Why do you not go out to-day 1 I would go out if it was fine weather. Shall I have the pleasure of seeing you to-morrow ] If you wish it I will come. Shall I still be here when you arrive (bet Sbrcr ?(nfunft) 1 Will you have occasion ((ScU'Cjenfyi'tt) to go to town this evening] I do not know, but 1 would go now if I had an opportunity (tie (&: tccjcnfxit). You would not have so much pleasure, and you would not be so happy, if you had not friends and books. Man would not experience so much misery (fo met ((cnt) in his career (niif fetncr 2aufbabn), and he would not be so unhappy, were he not so blind. You would not have that insensibility (tie cfubllofigfcit) towards the poor, and you would not be so deaf to (taub a/gcn) their supplication (tic SMtte), if you had been yourself in misery for some time. You would not say that if you knew me well. Why has your sister not done her exercises'? She would have done them, if she had not been prevented. If you worked more, and spoke oftener, you would speak better. I assure you, Sir, that I should learn better, if I had more time. I do not complain of you, but of your sister. You would have had no reason (llrfacbc) to complain of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. What has my brother told you 1 He has told me that he would be the happiest man in the (?en tcr) world, if he knew the German lan- fuage, the most beautiful of all languages. -isually placed between these two words. Ex. JCBgfeid? Hefe$ $fcrb letn irn^lauber tft, fo trerbe id) e tod) faufen, although this horse is not an Eng- ish one, I shall nevertheless buy it. jCbgleirf) btcfem 9)tanne tud)tS tinberfa^ ten tft, fo bettagt er fid) tod), though nothing has happened to this man, he is nevertheless complaining. 13* 298 212. I should like to know why I cannot speak as well as you. I will tell you : you would speak quite as well as I, if you were not so bashful. But if you had studied your lessons more carefully ((.K'fjVr), you would not be afraid to speak; for, in order to speak well, one must learn; and it is very natural, that he who does not know well what he has learnt should be timid. You would not be so timid as you are (als tc finfc), if you were sure to make no mistakes There are some people who laugh when I speak. Those are impolite people ; you have only to laugh also, and they will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I (do), you would speak well. You must study a little every day, and you will soon be no longer afraid to speak. I will endeavour to follow 3 T our ad- vice, for 1 have resolved (fid) totnel)mcn*) to rise every morning at six o'clock, to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. De- mocritus and Heraclitus (in German as in English craclitu$, &c.), were two philosophers of a (son) very different character : the first laughed at (uber with the accus.) the follies of men, and the other wept at them. They were both right, for the follies of men deserve (lU'EluetU'n) (both) to be laughed and wept at. My brother told me that you had spoken of me, and that you had not praised me. We should have praised you, if you had paid us what you owe us. You are wrong in complaining of my cousin, for he did not intend to hurt your feelings. I should not have complained of him, if he had only hurt my feelings ; but he has plunged into misery a whole family. You are wrong in associating with that man. He only aspires after riches. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 2mei nub fiection. To be thoroughly acquainted with Qfttt finer acfye gcnau fccfcmnt (or a thing. Dcrtraut) few*. To make one's self thoroughly @td) nut finer flaumc ; the anecdote, tic tfncctetc ; the soap, tic cifc ; the roast-meat, ter JBratcn. To dry (to wipe). tfbtredfncn. To cease (to leave off). 2Cuff)6rcn. I leave off reading. f 3d) fyore mtf gu fcfcn. She leaves off speaking. t @w |)ort auf ^u fprcdfjcn. T id $ mntcn* (gcmtctcn, mtct). < ^crmcttcn*. To avoid some one. Scmantcn mctbcn*. To avoid something. (Stroas termcitcn*. To escape (avoid a misfortune). Qftnem lln^lurfc cntcjcr)cn* or cnttttts ncn* (cntronncn/ cntrann). The punishment, tic (Strafe. To avoid death he ran away. Urn tern Sote gu cntge^en, nar)m cc tic gtud)t. The flight, the escape, tie Jlucfyt. t Sine (or etnet) adjc cntbcr)rcn To do without a thing. ? (governs the gen. or the ace.). (n'fxlfen* ofjne etwag.* ic fid) ofyne 23rot Can you do without bread ? [ cntbeljren ? I can do without it. 3>cf) fann eg entt>e!jrcn. I do without bread. 3d) frcbctfe mid) c^nc 93rct. Do you do without bread ? 93cf)i'lfcn tc fid) ofjne 23rot ? I do without it. 3d) fann eg cntbcfyren. ^ruc^t is the fruit of trees and plants. Ex. u'e WelbfrMfe, the fruit of the fields. $rucf)t is also employed figuratively : Ex. 2)te Sruc^t fetner Slrbett, tlie reward of his labour. Cbft is only used in speaking of apples, pears, plums, and similar fruit. Hence bag .fteniobft, kernel-fruit; bag (sreitt= cbft, stone-fruit. c ^ntbcbreu is employed in the sense of to be mtkout and to do without; ftcp befyelfen* in the sense only of to do without. 300 There are many things which we SBtt muffen tricleS cntfccfjrctt. must do without. (9}?an fa^t, cr- rocrfce mermen afcrcU fen. 9)?cm focjt, fcaj* cc moreen afcrctfcn n>crt>c. FUTURE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. The futures of the subjunctive differ from those of the indicative only in the second and third persons singular, which are : toerbejl and tt>erbe, instead of ttnr ft and ttrirb. Ex. Thou wilt praise. >u rocrfccft (often. He will praise. (5t tucrbc (ebon. Thou wilt have praised. 2)u nxrtcft c^elcOt !)flbcn. He will have praised. amit oufroartcn ? Shall I help you to some soup ? > f .ftann tcb Sfencn nut Suppc auf? Shall I help you to some soup ] 3 warren ? I will trouble you for a little. f 3$ M tc nu * c ^ n wenig taton To ask for (politely). tcb May I crave (beg) the favour of f Virf id) nur 3f;rcn Stamen your name ] bitten ? 301 The woman, the wife, tag SBcib. 3 EXERCISES. 213. I come to wish you a good morning. You are very kind. Would you do me a favour 1 Tell me what you want, for I would do anything to oblige you. I want five hundred crowns, and I beg of you to lend them to me. I will return them to you as soon as I have received rny money. You would oblige me much, if you would render me this service. I would do it with all my heart, if I could ; but having lost all my money, it is impossible for me to render you this service. Will you ask your brother whether he is satisfied with the money which I have sent him ? As to my bro- ther, though it be little, he is satisfied with it : but I am not so ; for having suffered shipwreck, I am in want of the money which you owe me. Henry IV., meeting (nnttcft'en*) one day in his palace (bcr s ])a(aft) a man whom he did not know (t>cr ifym unbcfcmttt war), asked him to whom he belonged (jUOtfytrm). " I belong to myself," replied this man. " My friend," said the king, " you have a stupid master." 214. Have they served up the soup "? They have served it up some minutes ago. Then it must be cold, and I only like soup hot (runrz me (Suppc). They will warm it for you. You will oblige me. Shall I help you to some of this roast-meat 1 I will trouble you for a little. Will you eat some of this mutton ? I thank you, I like fowl better. May I offer you some wine 1 I will trouble you for a little. Have they already served up the dessert 1 They have served it up. Do you like fruit] I like fruit, but I have no more appetite. Will you eat a little cheese ] I will eat a little. Shall I help you to English or Dutch (hcttanttfd)) cheese 1 1 will eat a little Dutch cheese. What kind of fruit is that] It is stone-fruit. What is it called ] It is called thus. Will you wash your hands? I should like to wash them, but I have no towel to wipe them with. I will let you have (gebcn lafjcn) a towel, some soap, d ;ie ^tau is used in titles, in which case it is not expressed in English. Ex. S)ie ^rau rciftnn, the countess. It stands for, 1. the mistress of the house. Ex. 'DaS tft bte ftrau som -Onufe, that is the mistress of the house ; 2. the consort. Ex. (Seine ^rau ift fefyr fcfrijn, his lady is very handsome ; 3. the sex, but then it is generally combined vyith the word ^erfon or $im* iner. Ex. fttititett (Ste btefe Vvrauenspevfon (btefeS ^rauenjimmer) ? do you know that lady ? The word 2Betb means : 1. in general a woman of the lower classes. It is sometimes combined with the word ^erfoit, and in speak- ing contemptuously with the word ^Bitb. Ex. ^te SBetber om gemeinen 33olfe, the women of the lower classes ; bte 2Betbgerfcm, ba3 ^Betbebtlb, the female ; 2. a consort among the lower classes. Ex. @r fyat etn 3Betb QtnQm* men, he has taken a wife (has married) ; 3. the sex in general. Ex. (m ebleS SIktb, a woman of noble sentiments ; bte ^atuv beS SBeibeS, woman's nature. 302 and some water. I shall be much (fv'fjr) obliged to you. May I ask you for a little water ? Here is some (>a batcn (Sic). Can you do without soap] As for soap, I can do without it ; but I must have a towel to dry my hands with. Do you often do with- out soap ? There are many things which we must do without. Why has that man run away ? Because he had no other means of escaping the punishment which he had deserved. Why did your brothers not get a better horse ? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would have got another better one. Has your father arrived already? Not yet, but we hope that he will arrive this very day (nod) fjeutc). Has your friend set out in time 1 I do not know, but I hope that he will have set out in time. 215. Will you relate something to me ? What do you wish me to re- late to you ? A little anecdote, if you like. A little boy asked (ferfccrn) one day at table (bci Sifdn*) for some meat ; his father said that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should wait until some was given to him. The poor boy seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to him, he said to his father : " My dear father, give me a little salt, if you please." "What will you do with it ? " asked the father. " I wish to eat it with the meat (3d) mil 06 $u from JWfcbc tfffcn) which you will give me," replied (pcrfcs cn) the child. Every body admired (bttOtintetti) the little boy's wit ; and his father, perceiving that he had nothing, gave him meat with- out his asking for it. Who was that little boy, that asked for meat at table ? He was the son of one of my friends. Why did he ask for some meat? He asked for some because he had a good appe- tite. Why did his father not give him some immediately ? Be- cause he had forgotten it. Was the little boy wrong in asking for some ? He was wrong, for he ought to have waited. Why did he ask his father for some salt? He asked for some salt, that (bas nut) his father might perceive that he had no meat, and that he might give him some. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-THIRD LESSON. -JDrd tmfc Action. To execute a commission. (Stnen TCuftrog auSndjtcn, r>ott$tcl)cn*, lu'forcjcn. I have executed your commission. 3d) Mc Sbrcn 2Cuftra$ cuit cilices ridjtct (rell$oacn, bcfer$t). 1 2 I have received with the greatest 3d) Ijcifcc 30* untcrm fcdjflcn cm pleasure the letter which you 3 4 addressed to me, dated the 6th mtd) gcrtd)tctc$ fcftrctfccn nut instant. tern groftcn Skrgnucjcn ten. 303 When the adjective precedes the noun (Les- son XVIII.) all words relating to it are placed before the adjective, or the participle used adjectively, in the following order: 1st, The article or pronoun; 2d, all words relating to the adjective or the participle adjec- tive ; 3d, the adjective or participle adjective ; and finally, 4th, the noun. Ex. 12 3 A man polite to wards everybody, in Qecjen Scfcctmatm F)6fUtf)et 4 12 3 A father who loves his children. Ctn fcine .ftinfcct ftc(H*nt>ct You have to study the twentieth ic tyabcn trie $nxin,ji<}ftc Section Lesson, and to translate the 123 exercises relating to it. $u ftutitcn, unfc trie to$u t\fo 4 ttcjcn Have you executed my commis- $afccn tc mcinen TCuftraa sion V rid)tct ? 1 have executed it. 3d) fafce tf)n au$gertd)tct. To do one's duty. cine tgfett tbun*. To fulfil one's duty. cine 9?flid)t crfiillcn. To do one's task. cine irbeit macbcn. That man always does his duty. JDicfer 9)?ann tljut tnmicr fein tigfctt. That man always fulfils his duty. 3)iefer 9}?ann erfiittt immer feme Have you done your task 1 ^>aben @tc S^e 2(rbett cjcmad^t ? He depends upon it. @r Derta^t fid) fcarauf. I rely upon you. 3d) ucrtoffe mid) cwf <3 You may rely upon him. fckfcS (Sk'ft ttcfcm Ratine Qts that man ? nfigcn ? It will be sufficient for him. ($$ ixnrt) tfym genugcn. Little wealth suffices for the wise. Seeing gcm'igt t>cui SBctfen. Was this man contented with >at ftcb He for 9ftann nut ticfcr^um* that sum ? me Ivgniigt ? {2Bat ttcfc ummc fur ticfen 9}?ann btnvctdxnt) ? 2Bar tu'fc ummc ttcfcm tOfomnc Qt; mig ? It has been sufficient for him. (5r ()at ftcb fcanut bcgnti^t. He would be contented if you CT roiirtc fid) bi'gnfigon, wcnn would only add a few crowns. nur nod) cintgc tvclltcn. To add. To build. ffiaucn. To embark, to go on board. Stcb cinfd)tffcn. The sail, tas cgct. To set sail. llntcr 8'egc( gc()cn*. To set sail for. 'in. To sail with full sails. 9)Jtt pctlcn egcln faljrcn*. He embarked on the sixteenth of (r fyflt fid) am fcd)^'l)ntcn (c^cr ten last month. fecb}cl)ntcn) teuton SOJemits ctngc^ fd)tffr. He sailed on the third instant, r tft ten brtttcn (ctcr am trittcn) t)iv')V^ uutcr @cgc( gogangcn. That is to say (i. e.}. &a$ Ijci9t (namtict)). Et caetera (etc.), and so on, and lint) fo ivcttcc (abbreviated u. f. tx?.). so forth. Otherwise, differently. ?fnK*r$. In another manner. ?Cuf ctnc antcrc ?frt. If I knew that, I would behave 8cnn id) t>a6 nn'ulc, njitrtc id) nuc^ differently. anfccrS bcncbmcn. If I had known that, I would SBcnn tcb ba* gciuuiJt battc, fc tu'trtc have behaved differently. id) mtcb antvrs bcncnimcn feaLH'iu To behave. (gtd) Ocncfjmcn*. Else (otherwise). If not. 85? o ntcf)t. Mend, else (if not) you will be SBcficrn @te ftcb, fcnjl (tvo ntd)t) punished. n?trt) man (Sic ftrafcn. I cannot do it otherwise. 3d) fann c^ md)t antcr^ mac^cn. 305 OP THE IMPERATIVE. The second person singular of the imperative, being formed from the second person singular of the indica- tive, is only irregular when the latter is so. Ex. e* ben*, to give ; second person of the indicative, bit Qibft, thou givest; imperative, gib, give thou. e(fett*, to help ; second person of the indicative, bit I)Mfji/ thou helpest ; imperative, fyilf, help thou. From this rule must be excepted: 1st. The follow- ing verbs : fyaben*, to have ; second person, bit Ijaft, thou hast ; imperative, fyabe, have thou ; feilt*, to be ; second person, bit btfi, thou art ; imperative, fei, be thou ; tt>erben*, to become ; bit ttnrfr, thou becomest ; imperative, tt>erbe, become thou ; WHflht*/ to know ; second person, bit tt>eit, thou knowest ; imperative, ttriffe, know thou ; Gotten*, to will ; bit ttriHjl, thou wilt ; im- perative, tt)ofte, 2d. Verbs which, in the second person of the indicative present, change the letter a into CU In the imperative they resume the radical vowel. Ex. aitfert, to run ; bit Idttffi:, thou runnest ; imperative, kill* fe, run thou. All the other persons of the imperative are derived from the present of the subjunctive, which is always regular, as well as the plural of the present of the in- dicative. Have patience ! a(vn ult> ; btc Lend it to me ! Cctfjcn (Sic c^ nrit ! To borrow. SBcrgeu ((ctf)en*). I will borrow some money of Scb will nut rcn 3^ncn c(b you. (Ocrgcn). I will borrow this money of you. 3d) will McfcS clt) t?cn 9 CIU Borrow it of (or from) him. Bergen ie c^ t>on tr)m. I do borrow it from him. sd) Obs. A. These examples of the imperative are for the third person plural, which is most commonly used 306 in polite conversation ; but we sometimes also employ the second person plural, particularly in exhortations, Be (ye) good. (ctb $ut. c Know (ye) it. SKtffct e. d Obey your masters, and never (5>d)0td)et e (Surcn Ccfyrctn, unb \m? give them any trouble. cbct tfynen me i&crbrup. Pay what you owe, comfort the 25c$af)(et, roa$ 3br fcbuttig fetb ; afflicted, and do good to those trojlct bte Unluofltd)en, unb tfnit that have offended you. fccnjemgen utc*, bte (ud) beleU btgt tjcTbcn. Love God, thy neighbour as thy- ickt ott unb (Surcn 9?ad)jtcn rote self (in German yourself). (Sud) fclbft. To obey. (5kbotcf)en. To comfort. Srojlen. To offend. SMetbujcn. The neighbour, fccr 97acl)ftc ; sadness, fcic the creditor, tcr the watch, Me Ufa ; the snuff-box, bie Dofe. Obs. B. We often employ compound imperatives, in order to give to understand that we either com- mand or invite. They are formed for the third person sing, and plur. with mogett*, may ; fofleit*, shall ; and for the first person plural with laffen*, to let, which likewise forms the compound imperative in English; and with tt>oltett*> will. Ex. @r mag Io6en, let him (he may) praise ; er foil lofceit, let him (he shall) praise ; jte ntogcn tcben, let them (they may) praise ; fte fotten lobett, let them (they shall) praise ; laflct UUg loben, let us praise ; tt>tr U)oUcn Io6en, let us (we will) praise, &c. Let us always love and practise Caffct un$ tmmcr btc Sucjcnb tieben virtue, and we shall be happy unb cuisutu'n, jb wcrbcn it>ir in both in this life, and in the btefcm unb jcncm CeOcn gliicfluf) next. fcin. Let us see which of us can shoot 2Btr rceftcn fehcn, tt)cc sen un$ am best. fccftcn fd)ie(jcn fann. c From 3t)t fetb, second person plural of the indicative. i From %lp ttJttfet, &c. &c. From 3br getjorc^ct, &c. &c. 307 EXERCISES. 216. Have you executed my commission ? I have executed it. Has your brother executed the commission which I gave him? He has executed it. Would you execute a commission for me ] I am un- der so many obligations to you, that I will always execute your commissions when it shall please you to give me any. Ask the horse-dealer (fcet $pfctt>cr)a'ntlcr) whether he can let me have the horse at (fur) the price which I have offered him. I am sure that he would be satisfied, if you would add a few florins more. I will not add anything. If he can let me have it at (fur) that price, let him do so; if not, let him keep it (fo maq cr e$ bcbaltcn). Good morning (in the accus.), my children ! Have you done your task? You well know that we always do it; for we must (miiyten) be ill not to do it. What do you give us to do to-day 1 I give you the ninety-third lesson to study, and the exercises belonging to it to do, that is to say, the 216th and 217th. Endeavour to commit (niad)cn) no errors (tor gefylcr). Is this bread sufficient for you 1 It would be sufficient for me, if I was not very hungry. When did your brother embark for America] He sailed on the thirtieth of last month (U'gtcn Senate). Do you promise me to speak to your brother] I do promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon you. Will you work harder for next lesson than you have done for this ] I will work harder. May I rely upon it 1 You may (tons ncn cs). 217. Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters (cinfccrn) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse (arqcr). Be not afraid of your creditors ; be sure that they will do you no harm. You must have patience, though you have no mind for it (t>a$u) ; for I also must wait till I (man) am paid what is due to rne. As soon as I have money, I will pay all that you have advanced (au$z Icgcn) for me. Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think of (tcnfcn an* with accus.) it every day. I am your debtor (fcct et fptclen). What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray, lend it to me. What do you wish to do with it ] I wish to show it to my sister. Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. Do not fear. What do you want of (pen) my brother ? I want to borrow some money of him. Borrow some of somebody else. If he will not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. You will do well. Do not wish (for) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence (t> ^crfcluuun) has given you, and consider (bcbcnfcn*) that there are many men who have not \vhat you have. Life ( IDaS Ceben) being short, let us endeavour to make it (ofl un*) as agreeable (ancjcs ticfytii) as possible. But let us also consider that the abuse (Oct 308 of pleasure (in the plur. in German, SBerqnfiqungen) makes it bitter (bitter). Have you done your exercis } 1 could not do them, because my brother was not at home. i on must not get your exercises done by (?on) your brother, but you must do them yourself. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.) NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. bier mib Cation. To be a judge of something. f id) cwf ctu?a$ wrflebcn*. Are you a judge of cloth 1 j ^H'rfU'bcn Sic fid) auf 3 tid) ? I am a judge of it. f 3d) wiftcbe mid) fcarauf. 1 am not a judge of it. j 3d) ctiU'f)c"nrid) md)t fonrauf. I am a good judge of it. f 3d) rvr.)1ebe mid) fcfjt gut tmrauf. I am not a good judge of it. j 3d) rerfUl)c mid) nid)t fd;t gut fcarauf. To draw. 3 c i d) n c ru To chalk. S7ad)^ctd)ncn (fatftrcn). The drawing, tic 3ctd)iumg ; the drawer, tor 3ctd)ncr. To draw from nature, from life. )Jad) tec 9?atur, nac^ tcm getcbncn. To draw a landscape from nature. Sine 2antfd)aft nac^ t)cr 97atur ncn. To manage or to go about a thing. (5 cnfangcn*. How do you manage to make a SBtc fangcn cc fci- nc 2Crt). Awkwardly, unhandily. l!ngcfd)ic!t. He should have managed the (r battc eg bcffcr anfangcn foltftt thing better than he has done. You should have managed the tc batten c^ anfccrtf anfangcn thing differently. nutfT^n. They ought to have managed it (Sic batten c$ mad)cn fottcn/ n?tc id). as I have done. We ought to have managed it 23Mr fatten c$ antcrS mac^cn fcllcn/ differently from what they did. al$ ftc. 309 To forbid. I forbid you to do that. To lower. To cast down one's eyes. The curtain rises, falls. The stocks have fallen. The day falls. It grows towards night, or night comes on. It grows dark. It grows late. To stoop. To feel. To He smells of garlic. To feel some one's pulse. To consent to a thing. T To hide, to conceal. 85 c 1 6-t c t e n *. Part, past, wr* fceU'n. Imperf. ucrOet. 3d) occOtctc 3bncn, fcicfcS $u tF)iin. JDttcfccrfcijfi'n*, Ijcriinterfafjcn*. jDtc 2(ugcn nicl>cr|'d)lcu]cn*. )cr ^orbnnq cjebt mif, fcillt. t &** 2ed)fclcour$ tft Befallen (ftefjt nu'trtijcr). t > Scij} net$t fid). ( twrfc 9ad)t* ) (5$ rutrb fpd't* c n * (^crodftcn*, rod)). 6r riccbt nad) .Kncb(aiid). Sfcmanbcm t)cn $u(^ fubton. 3d) roilligc fcaccin. 3d) art* mcinc (StnmiU^ung bqu. (WrtCrflen/ genune He is a true man. Indeed. 3n 5i^abrr)cit. In fact. Sn bcr Sfeot (rwrflid), wa^r The fact, tic Sbat ; true, roabr (rcd)t) ; n)af)tfjaft ; (Sr tft ctn nwftrrjaftft 9}2ann. This is the right place for this )ci? tft t>ct roabrc (rccfyti 1 ) picture. Mcfcg cma(t)c. As I live ! t ^ w^ftr id) (cOc ! To think much of some one. 2(uf Seiuanbcn ttc( fatten*. To esteem some one. Scmonbcn fcba^en. I do not think much of that man. 3d) f)a(tc ntcbt tcl nuf fcicfcn I think much of him (I esteem 3d) Mtc tucl auf i()n (id) him much). To permit, to allow. The permission, I permit you to go thither. (To command, to order). tfyn (5 r ( a u 6 c n. fctc @r(autnip. 3d) crtaubc 3fyncn r;in3U9cf;cn (or tafjin S3efefyfcn* (6cfof;(cn, befall). 310 Obs. When the third person plural is employed in the imperative instead of the second, the personal pro- noun always follows the verb, but never when the second person is employed. Ex. Order it to be done. Sflcfcbfcn Sic, tap man c$ tfyuc. Be virtuous. Sett tucjenbfjaft. Will you permit me to go to the Swollen Sic mtr crlaubcn, cwf ten market ] 9)torft $u qcfyen ? To hasten, to make haste. @'i(en, ficb jVutcn* Make haste, and return soon. Men Sic unt fcmmcn Sic fcalt nnctcr. I had done reading when your 3d) bcittc mifyefiort $u (cfcn, a($ 3fyt brother entered. JBruter bercintrat. You had lost your purse when I Sic batten Sbrc SP&'rfc Dcrtcrcn/ al^ found mine. icb tic mcintqc font. To step in, to enter. crcinttetcn (cjetretcn, trat). To be ashamed. S t d) f cf) a m c n. To be ashamed of some one or Sicb 3iianfcc6 ctcr ctncc Sad)e something. fcbamcn*. I am ashamed of my impatience, ^cb fchcinic mid) mcincc llnte) be contented with me. Has the little boy kept his word ? Not quite, for after having said that, he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table (fid) on ten Sifeb fc|cn), and fell asleep (etnfcbtofen*). He is a very good boy when he sleeps, said his father, seeing him some time after (fcarauf). 219. Are you a judge of cloth 1 I am a judge of it. Will you buy some yards (for) me 1 Give me the money, and (fc) I shall buy some (for) you. You will oblige me. Is that man a judge of cloth 1 He is not a good judge of it. What are you doing there? I am reading the book (tn tern SBud)tf) which you lent me. You are wrong in always reading it (unmet tartn $u fcfcn). What do you wish me to do ] Draw this landscape ; and when you have drawn it, you shall decline some substantives with adjectives and pro- nouns. How do you manage to do that ? I manage it so. Show me how you manage it. What must I do for my lessons of to- morrow (Die mergenK* c) 1 Transcribe your exercises fairly, do three others, and study the next lesson. How do you manage to get goods without money ? I buy on credit. How does your sister manage to learn German without a dictionary 1 ? She manages it thus. She manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother manage it ] He manages it very awkwardly : he reads, and looks for (cmffucbcn) the words in the dictionary. He may learn in this manner (cuif fotcfc SBeifc) twenty years without know- ing how to make a single sentence (fccr crr), order some one to feel my pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." This sally (S)icfet $utc (Sinfall) saved his life. Do not judge (rtcf)s ton), you who do not wish to be judged ! Why do you perceive the mote (ta$ (Strch) in your brother's eye, you who do not perceive the beam (tcr SSciftcn) which is in your own eye 1 Would you copy your exercises if I copied mine] I would copy them if you copied yours. Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had transcribed mine 1 She would have transcribed it. Would she have set out if I had set out ] I cannot tell you what she would have done if you had set out. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. Jiinf xtnb Section. To grow (to wax). 2Bad)fcn* (takes fctn* for its auxiliary. Part, past, Qcwad)* fen. Imperf. roucl)*). To grow rapidly (fast). i*fctf .Hint ift in fuqcr Sett fcfjr in a short time. cjcroacbfcn (or fyerangcrcacfyfcn). To grow up (to grow tall). ^cranrvad)fcn*. The flower, tie SBdtme ; the shelter, fccr @d)U| (Me or a ( $ n? c n n (followed by the imperfect of the subjunc- tive). That man pretends to sleep. jiDtefet QDfcwn ftcltt fid), al$ oft cu fcbttcfc. This young lady pretends to )icfc$ ^rautcin tfwt, a(o know German. ftc tcutfd), or a(6 tvcnn bcutfcb fcetftunbe. They pretend to come near us. ic ftcllen ftcb/ al$ eO (or wcnn) fie fid) un$ na^cvn wctlten. Then, thus, so, consequently, li (f C. Obs. A. This word must not be mistaken for the English word also, which is translated into German by and). In a short time. Lately. To make a present of something to some one. Mr. Fischer wrote to me lately, that his sisters would be here in a short time, and engaged me to tell you so ; you will consequently be able to see them, and to give them the books which you have bought. They hope that you will make them a present of them. Their brother has assured me, that they esteem you without know- ing you personally. 14 cut cfdjcn! nut mncbcn. >erc gifdxr fdjrieO nitr- ncntid), tnp fcinc Jrantcin (Sd)nxftcrn in .ftuqcm !>tcrf)cr fomnu'n tv^cbcn, unt Oat micb/ ce S^ncn ^u faa.cn. ^ie wcrtcn (Sic alfo fc^cn^nt) t()ncn tie 93ttd)cc gcOcn fonncn, ivc(d)e Sic jcfauft ^aOcn. Sic ^cft'cn, taji (Sic tf)ncn cin cfcbcnH tamit madhcn n?crtcn. 3^ S3ru = tct bat micb J?erftd)crt / taO ftc '@tc bccbfd)^^^/ o^ne ie perfonttc^ su fcnncn. 314 Would to God. SBcfftc ctt. (See Obs. F. Lesson XC.) Would to God it were so. SQBoUtc ett, e$ roarc fo. Would to God he had done it. SQBoUtc ctt, cr tyatte c cjcfyan. To want amusement. 7 n . r / <. * . To get or be tired. j eonge ffiSnte fofon.* How could I get tired in your 83Me fennte id) fret Sftncn foncje 9ScU company ? (c fyaben ? Firstly (at first), crftcne ; secondly, &c. ^wcttcng K* To have reason to. itrfacrie hotcn* ju. He has reason to be sad. (r f) &c$aMcn faficn*. To suffer one's self to be pre- j @M) bitten (ajjcu*. vailed upon. To o-et one's self invited to dine, f (tcb yuil SJttttcujcfiVn ci feffm*. Get paid. f Snffru tc fk Let us set out. CajjVn Sic un* (or nnr n>oflcn) retfcn. Let us breakfast. gaffi'it (Sic unS (or nnr rcettcn) friifjs (tfirfen. Let him give it to me. )a cr nut c$ gc6c x or cr cfcc c^ nur. Let him be there attwelve o'clock. Dap cr um ^n?o(f llfjr t>a fct, or cr fci um ^ruclf Ubr t>n. Let him send it to me. )afj cr nur c$ fcnt)c, or cr fenfoc c5 nur* He may believe it. JDap cr cjtaufcc/ or cr gtautc CN To be at one's ease. S3cbnc\cn, bcbagttcl) cbcr tcqucm fcin* (impers. verb, gov. dat.), To be uncomfortable. UnOc belief)/ unbcqucm ct>cr Cjcmrt fan*, I am very much at my ease upon (5$ tft nur auf btcfcm cf)CU}(teb (obct chair. unbcba^(tcb) auf 3brcm 'ti We are uncomfortable in that (5$ bcbnc^t un^ in tnefcm boarding-house. (t)tcfcr ^cnfien) ntcl)t. To make one's self comfortable. (5$ ftcb ftequcm mad)cn. To put one's self out of the way. tcb bcmiifjen. Make yourself comfortable. DDJacbcn @tc C5 ftcb fcequcm. Do not put yourself out of the iBcmiifycn te pel) nicbt. way. Do as if you were at home. Sbim ap cr ni not come. !cmmcn fonntc. To prefer. 2Ser$tcbcn* I prefer the useful to the agree- 2>cb $U'l)tf bv^^ 0Ju^(kbc tcm able. nc^mcn ucr. 316 Obs. C. When an adjective is used substantively in the masculine or feminine gender, a noun is always understood, e. g. ber Otocfye, the rich, meaning ber retcfye 9D?arttt ; bte (2cf)6ne, the beautiful woman, meaning bie fcfyone gran, Few words to the wise (proverb). (55e[cFrten iff cult prcttgcn (Styrtdjs ivort). Obs. D. An adjective used substantively without a noun being understood is always put in the neuter gender, e. g. bag roe, the great ; bag (rt)a6ene, the sublime ; bag Sleii^ere, the exterior ; bag Sttnere, the in- terior. What he likes best is hunting (Sein CtcOftcS tg- tuc and fishing. gtfcfyeiu For when the Manly and the C -Derm n?o fca$ (Strengc nut tern Fair, ten, When Strength and Beauty I 9Bo tatfcS jtd) unt) 93?tftc$ form a pair, ten, Then rings it out a merry song. [ Da cu'bt e$ ctncn cjutcn .^(anq. (d)i(let in his 2tet>*ttcn tec lecfe, the song of the bell). Severe, tender, mild (gentle). trcng, jatt/ nitft. To be welcome. SOSillCcmmcn fctn*. You are welcome every where. (g>tc fint) ubcrall rctdfcmmcn. He will arrive in a week. (?t rotrb in acl)t Sflcjen (cincr anScmmcn. It took him a week to make this (Sr f)at Mcfe 9Mfe in acftt journey. gcmacbt. He will have finished his studies (5r rt>tct> fctnc tufctcn in cincm in three months. SSicvtc(jat)re j?ctlcnt>ct b^>cn. He finished his studies in a year. (5r fyat fctnc (Stut>tcn in cincm 3nr)s re EXERCISES. 221. Have you already seen my son 1 I have not seen him yet, how is he ? He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise him, for he has grow T n very tall in a short time. Why does this man give nothing to the poor ] He is too avaricious (|}d$uy) ; he does not wish to open his purse for fear of losing his money. What sort of weather is it ] It is very warm ; it is long since we had any rain (eg bat lana,e mcl)t Qcrecjnet) : I believe we shall have a storm (ctn (Skroittet frcfommen). It may be (a$ fann wef)l fctn). The wind rises (fid) erfjcbcn*), it thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I do hear it, but the storm is still far off (n?dt cntfcvnt). 317 Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens. Bless me (3)?ettt ott), what a shower (ruclrf) ctn cntfc^ltcbor 9?ccjcn tft t>ci6) ! If we go into some place we shall be sheltered from the storm. Let us go into that cottage then ; we shall he sheltered there from the wind and the rain. I have a great mind to bathe (bobcn) to-day. Where will you bathe ? In the river. Are you not afraid of being drowned 1 Oh no ! I can swim. Who taught you (c5) ] Last summer I took a few lessons at the swimming-school (tie S>d)twmmfd)U(c). Where shall we go to now 1 Which road shall we take ? The shortest will be the best. We have too much sun and I am still very tired ; let us sit down under the shade of this tree. Who is that man that is sitting under the tree ? I do not know him. It seems, he wishes to be alone ; for when we offer to (n>dlcn*) to approach him, he pretends to be asleep. He is like your sister : she understands German very well ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to understand me. 222. Have you seen Mr. Jaeger 1 I have seen him ; he told me that his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired me to tell you so. When they have arrived, you may give them the gold rincrs which you have bought ; they flatter themselves that you will make them a present of them, for they love you without knowing you personally. Has my sister already written to you ] She has written to me, I am going to answer her. Shall I (@otl id)) tell her that you are here 1 Tell her ; but do not tell her, that I am wait- ing for her impatiently. Why have you not brought your sister along with you ]- Which one ] The one you always bring, the youngest (fcic junjtftc)- She did not wish to go out, because she has the tooth-ache. I am very sorry for it ; for she is a very good girl. How old is she 1 She is nearly fifteen years old. She is very tall for her age (bag Tttter). How old are you ] I am twenty-two. Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. 223. Will you drink a cup of (fcic SaffV) tea] I thank you, I do not like tea. Do you like coffee ] I do like it, but I have just drunk some. Do you not get tired here ] How could I get tired in this agreeable society ] As to me I always want amusement. If you did as I do, you would not want amusement ; for 1 listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn (crfabren*) a thou- sand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but you do nothing of that kind, that is the reason why you want amusement. I would do every thing like (nnc) you, if I had no reason to be sad. I have heard just now that one of my best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best friends has drowned herself. Where has she drowned herself] She has drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yester- day at four o'clock in the morning she rose without saying a word 318 to any one, leaped out of the window which looks into the garden, and threw (fttirjcn) herself into the river where she was drowned. Let ns always seek the friendship (Me Jrcunt^foaft) of the good and avoid (flicben*) the society of the wicked ; for bad society corrupts (tK'rberlK'n) good manners (bie 'ttten, fern. plur.). What sort of weather is it to-day ] It snows continually (nod) tinnier), as it snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances (allem '2(nfd>cU ne nacb) will also snow to-morrow. Let it snow, I should like it to snow still more, and to freeze also, for I am always very well when it is very cold. And I am always very well when it is neither cold nor warm. It is too windy (gar 411 nrinbta,) to-day, and we should do better if we staid at home. Whatever weather it may be, I must go out, for I promised to be with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-SIXTH LESSON. Sect)* nrib JUctum. Notwithstanding, in spite of. Notwithstanding that. In spite of him (her, them). Notwithstanding his promise. Hnqcad)tct (governs the gen.). 2ibcr (governs the accus.). jDcffcn ungead)tct. SBtfccr fttnrn (tbrcn) 2Bitten. (Seine* JBcrfprcd)cn6 ungcaofytct. To manage. Do you manage to finish your work every Saturday night ] Even. (Scgar. He has not even money enough (r bat fcgar md)t (Mb gcnug, um to buy some bread. JBtcb $u faufen. ber0cl!a(t macbert, tap. fc einrtcbtcn, bap. fc nwcben, bap. tc c^ fc, fraO (Sic atlc aniftag 2(benb nut S^rcr 2(rt>cit fcrtig werbcn ? SKicbtcn (Sic c^ fc ctn, bap (Sic jebcn (Samjlag ?(6cnb niit 3()rci: TCrbeit fcrttjj wcrbcn ? {iKicbtcn Sic eg fc etn (cbcr niodhcn (Sic c* fc), bap te allc Satnftag 2(bcnb nut 3brcr Krfcctt fcrtig ftnb (cbcr tferc 2(rt>ctt fevtia l)as ben) ? Try to do that to oblige me. I manage to go thither. S3eftrcKn Sic ftcb, btefcg um mid) gu Derbtnbem Scb rtcbtc c6 fo ctn, bap id) fann. tl)im/ 319 To have done. Will you soon have done work- feint) Sic bait nut Sfyvcr TCrbctt in or ? fcrtio, ? I shall soon have done. 3d) nxrtc bait) taunt fcrttcj fcin. To keep warm. (Sid) warm fatten*. To go always neat. (Sid) imnier rctnltd) batten*. To be (to keep) on one's guard, (Sid) Mi ten, fid) serfehcn*. To take care (be careful). (Sid) in 2Cd)t net) men*. To keep on one's guard against er tiefcm Sftannc. man. Jf you do not take care of that enn Sic fid) er ticfem ^ferbc horse it will kick you. ntd)t in ?Cd)t ne^mcn, fo n?trb C6 ic fd>(oc\en. Take care. (Sefycn (Ste'fid) oor. I fear he will come. 3>cb f'ird)te, ba er fcmme. I do not doubt but he will come. 3d) $a>eifle nicbt, frafj er fcmmt. The bad weather hinders us from >a* fcbtccbtc Settee ferl)int'Crt x tap taking a walk. n?ir fpajieren gcbcn. I shall prevent you from going 3d) rucrbc fd)Cti t>erf)int>crn, tap (Sic out. au^eben. I shall not set out till every 3cb nxrtc nicftt aftreifen, big altcS thing is ready. fertig ift. The enemy is stronger than you >er S^nt) ift ffatfer, alg ftc Cjccjfaubt thought. faben. I shall certainly come, unless I Scb nxrtc gewip fcmmcn/ c$ fei am taken ill. tenn, tap id) !ranf wiirtc. To be taken ill (to fall sick). &ran6 roerten*. Very little more, and I would do ($ fe()lt wenii}, tap tc^ eg tl)UC. it. It is in your power to obtain me f (5$ ftebt nur bet 3bncn, tap tc that situation. ttefe (Stelle befcmme. He is quite different from what r ift ganj anter^ alg cr t)Cr ^ract he was two years ago. 3abren ivar. You do not act any more as you Sie fanteln nicht mef)t fc, n?ic (or have done. , (Sie bcinMn antcr^ ale) (Sic ^ bantelt baben. Before you undertake anything (Sbe (Sie etiva? untfrncrjmcn, fagen tell me of it. (Sie es nur. Did any body know how to tell at 3?niant anf eine natnrlid)erc a story in a more natural (more (nnqefunftettere) ?(rt 511 artless) manner than Lafon- genwpt, als Safontaine ? taine ? 320 A thought, cin ctcmft' (masc.) ; an idea, cine 3^cc ; a sally, .cin (Stnfafl (masc.). To be struck with a thought. (Sinen (Sinfaft babcn* (etnfaflcn*). A though, strikes. {^^^. That never crossed my mind. (So eftuaS tft nur nie eingefaUcn. To take it into one's head. f id) etnfallen foffen*. He took it into his head lately to f Cr (icjj fid) ncuUd) etnfaHen, mid) rob me. gu befh'bU'n. What is in your head 1 t SSaS fdllt 3fynen cin. In order that, in order to. 2(uf tap or framit. He works in order to be one day Q;r arbcitct, taunt cr fetncm useful to his country. (ante cinft (cincS nxrtc. The native country, the father- ta$ 8Sater(ant>. land, One day, once, cincS Sac^e^, ctnj!* To be born. ebtirttcj fcin*. Where were you born ? f jffio fint) (Sic i_ I was born in this country. f 3d) bin in ticfcm Cant>c Where was your sister born ? f 2Bc ift 3J)re en 9iCrt)anicrifa gcbiirttg. W T herewere your brothers born ? f 9Bo fint) 3bre JBrfi^cc gcburttg ? They were born in France. f cr). All around, round about. SKunfc Return (runt) umfjcr). The dish went around the whole )ie ^cbiifTc( cu'no, bet tcr gan^cn company till it came back to Stfd)gcfeUfcr>aft fyenmi, big fie wit* the landlord. t)er ^iim SBirt()C $uriicf fam. We sailed around England. Bir fcgcltcn urn (Snqtant) fycrum. They went about the town to look Sic gingen in t)cr (Stat)t umber, um at the curiosities. tftrc innercn 3^erfn>iirt)tg!eitcu $u bctrad)tcn. To go around the house. Mm tag >au fycrum gcfjen*. To go about the house. 3>n tern |)aufe umfycrgcfjen*. To express one's self. (Sid) augbtticfcn. To make one's self understood. (Sid) tferftanfclid) macrjen. To have the habit. >ic (9en?el)nfyett ^abcn*. To accustom. cru&'bncn. To accustom one's self to some- (Sid) an ctwag (accus.) gcmofjncn. thino;. Children must be accustomed Winter mfiffcn bet 3citen on tic 2(rs early to labour. bctt gcwitynt wcvtcn. 321 rCEinc (accus.) 8r)nt fein*. lam accustomed to it. 3d) bin c* geroefynt. I cannot express myself in Ger- 3d) fann mid) im 3)cutfdbcn ntd)t cwt man, for I am not in the habit ousfrriicfcn, ivetl icb r,td)t $u }?** of speaking it. d)en qavebnt bin (ctcr: rue it id) im Vrcdxn nid)t gctibt bin). You speak properly. f (Sic refccn, nnc pd) (J Qcfyort. To chatter. Maut>crn. To piate. enn) so unpolite as to laugh at you 1 Do you not know the proverb 1 What proverb 1 He who (Lesson XXIX.) wishes to speak well, must begin by speaking badly. Do you understand all I am telling you ? I do understand and comprehend (bfgreifen*) it very well ; but I cannot yet express myself well in German, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. That will come in (mit fccr) time. I wish it (may) with all my heart. Good morning, Miss. Ah (C'i) ! here you are at last. I have been waiting for you with impatience. You will pardon me, my dear, I could not come sooner (cbcr). Sit down, if you please. How is your mother 1 She is better to-day than she was yesterday. I am glad of it. Were you at the ball yesterday ? I was there. Were you much amused (fid) bcluftigcn) ? Only so so. At what o'clock did you return home ] At a quarter past eleven. 322 225. Do you sometimes see my brother ] I do see him sometimes ; when I met him the other day (neultcb), he complained of you. " If he had behaved better, and had been more economical (fpavfam)," said he, " he would have had no debts (Scbulbcn, plur.) and I would not have been angry with him." I begged of (bitten*) him to have compassion on you, telling him, that you had not even money enough to buy bread. "Tell him, when you see him," re- plied he to me, "that notwithstanding his bad behaviour towards me, I pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one should not laugh (fpcttcn) at those to whom (Lessons XIV. and LX.) one is under obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be much obliged to you," added he in going away. Why do you associate with that man 1 ? I would not associate with him, if he had not rendered me great services. Do not trust him, for if you are not on your guard, he will cheat you. Take care of that horse, otherwise it will kick you. Why do you work so much ? 1 work in order to be one day useful to my country. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY.SEVENTH LESSON. Siebcn unb neanpflste Cedion. He is too fond of me to do such f (5r (ie(>t mtcb $u fcfyr, of$ bap cr a thing. bicfcs tbun (elite. I will rather die than do that. | 3cb will lu'bcr ftcr&cn, cite ba id) biefcs tf)un [elite or al* frtefc* tfyun. She loved him so much, that she ap cr cin 9^arr ift. To get married (to enter into i tcb flcrfxtratbt'ru matrimony). ( id) Dcrc^Itcbcn or rcrmaf)(cn. To marry somebody. Scmcinfccn btirotben. To marry (meaning to give in 2>erl)citatt)cn (tcvcf)ticr;cn). marriage). My cousin, having given his SJiacbfccm tnetn SScttcr fcinc Sebrcc? sister in marriage, married ftcr erbctratf)et bflttc (Page 280)^ Lady Pommern. fyctratfycte cr ^rouU'tn con ycu;? morn. Is your cousin married 1 3ft 3br crr SScttcc cr^ciratr)ct ? No, he is still a bachelor. f Sftcin, cr ift nod) lefctg. To be a bachelor. f CcDig fcin*. Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. 95 c r i c Q c n The embarrassment, the puzzle, tic 93erlcgcnf)dt. You embarrass (puzzle) me. (Sic fe|cn nuc^ in 2?crtcgcnf)Ctt. 323 You puzzle (perplex) me. tc madjcn mid) tfertegcn. The marriage, tie^beirnth, Me (*f)C. He demands my sister in mar- (*t wrtanQt mctnc d)tt>cftct $ur riage. C'()C. To lake measures. 93tak't\YjC(n ncfymcn* (or crqrcifcn*). I shall take other measures. 3d) iWrfce cmtcrc Qfttfrcgefa crgrcU fen (or nefymcn). Goodness ! how rapidly does SOfdn eK ! vole mftteidjt tie 3cit time pass in your society. in 3brcr cfcttfd>aft. The compliment, ta$ (omplimcnt (plur. c a ). You are making me a compli- 8te macbcn mic ta cin (Sompttmcnt, ment to which I do not know tvcrauf id) md)t$ $u antwoctcn what to answer. roctj}. The least blow makes him cry 2)cc flctnftc (Scf)(ag md)t i^n ivcu (weep). ncn (Orincjt tljn sum ilBctncn). To frighten. 6 r f cl) r c dt c tt (a regular active verb). rp i r . i , J @rfd)rccfcn* (a neuter irregular To be frightened. J ^ ( crfc ^ rccfcn/ crfcf)raf) . 8 Thou art frightened, he is fright- 2)u crfcfyrictfr, cr ccfdjuit. ened. Be not frightened. (Srfdjrccfcn (Sic ntd)t. The least thing frightens him >a5 cctn^ftc crfcfytccft i^n (jic). (her, them). At what are you frightened? SBortiOct crfcf)rccfcn . It depends upon him to do that. (5s Ijangt Don iftm a6, fctcfeS gu t^un. O ! yes, it depends upon him. ) ! [a, bag ban^t ton tl;m ab (fcmmt ouf ifjn an). That man lives at every body's iDicfcr 9}^ann (cbt auf 3>ct>crmann$ expense. Unf often. The expense (cost), tic llnfcjlen (is never used in the singular). At other people's expense (or 7(uf Kirtcret Unfcftcn. charge). * Neuter nouns derived from foreign languages and terminating in cut take e in the plural, except the two words: bag ^arlament, the parliament; bad ^egtmenr, the regiment, which like all other neuter nouns, take er in all the case* plural. 324 The fault, bie < Itisnot my fa H l, *{Jj?S&.ai** D ::i 1 5*?s*', 1 1 * ** * * nu-,,t. Who can help it ? 2er faun tafur ? Whose fault is it I i^Vgj*m> IcannotheJpi, j g ^ ^tlL, The delay, bcr Tfuffcfeuk He does it without delay* (5r tfyut C6 cbne 2(uffd)iib. I must go (must be off). f 3d) will macfyen, tap id) forte fcnunc. Go away ! be gone ! t SOtocfyen Sic, bap 'ic fortfemmn ! To ^e astonished (surprised). (Srftauncn, erftaunt fetn*. I am surprised at it. 5 |* ^Ftaiine barubcr. J 3d) bin barubcr erftaunt. An extraordinary thing happened (5^ crctgncte fid) cto>a 2Cupercrbcnt? which surprised every body. lidxs, wcviibcr 3ebcrmann er- ftaiintc (erftaunt ivar). (<$$ tft JCie(e5 gefd)c&en / wcrfiber Ste crjtauucn werten. S^ bat fid) 9Stete6 cteignct, rpcrubcu Sic crftaunen ivcrfccn. (g^cbrerc Sage werten (jtncjc^en, efje tiefc? gefd)tef)t (Se werten mcfyrcrc Sage cljc ttcfcg To jest. d) e r 3 c n. The jest, ter d&erg. You are jesting. Ste fcbcr^cn. He is no joker (cannot take a (Sr (apt utd)t nut fief) | joke). To beg some one's pardon. Scmanbcn um 33cr$eibuna, bitten" I beg your pardon. 3d) bittc Sic um f" To pardon. 8Serjei()er" The w 7 atch goes too fast. 3)te Ubr gebt t?cr (or $u fri!ib). The watch goes too slow (re- >ic llljr ^c(>t nacl) (or ^u fpa't). tards). My watch has stopped. Sffietnc Ur;r ift fteben gcblieben. To stop. tc^cu bleibcn*. Where did we leave off] t 2Bo fint wtr jte^en 325 Where did we stop 7 f 2o fint rwr cjcMtcOcn ? We left off at the fortieth Les- &Dtr ftnt> bet tec ricrjto/tcn Cccttcn, son, page 100. cite 100 jlefjcn gcbltcOcn. To wind up a watch. (Sine Ufjr ouf$tcf)cn*. To regulate a watch. (Sine Uhc (Mien, Your watch is twenty minutes sfyrc llbr acl)t $rcanjig 90?imUcn 511 too fast, and mine a quarter friilj (ror), tint) tic nietntvjc cine of an liour too slow. 9>iertc(ftunto $u fpcit (nad)). [t will soon strike twelve. (g ruirt) cjtctcb jroflf fd)lagcn. Has it already struck twelve ? at eg fd)en jrootf gcfd)tocn ? To strike (heat). Sdtfacjcn* (Imperf. fd)liuj). Thou strikest, he strikes. )u fcljta^ cc fd)(a^t. Till I see you ao-ain. 7 , ... I hope to see you again soon. 5* To fail, to want, to ail. J c & t C n. What ails you ? ? r> * r f ^ What is the matter with you ? j**** ^ ft You look so melancholy. (tc fc^cn fo fd)n?ccmfltl)t9 On condition, or provided. f !J^ bcr Wnflno, tafr (_ O^tt tern SBcttn^c, tap. I will lend you money, provided 3d) roiU 3bncn clt> tctfjcn/ you will henceforth be more tcr Scttncjung, tap (Sic in economical than you have hi- funft fparfamcr feicn, a(^ ic therto been. Fjcr qctvcfcn ftnt). Henceforth. sn 3u!nft. Economical. parfam or fjauSfjaftcttfd). To renounce gambling. 3)cm otj) he had a great mind to give me a box on the ear (He Cbrfctcjo), because I had not brought them sooner. What did you answer him ? Sir, said I, I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me ; and if you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely (.fiauni) had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword (nad) tern Decjcu cjveifai*), and I ran away (Me 'fiiuity nefymen*). 228. At what are you astonished 1 I am astonished to find you still in bed. If you knew how (one) sick I am you would not be as- tonished at it. Has it already struck twelve 1 Yes, madam, it is already half past twelve. Is it possible that it is so late! That is not late, it is still early. Does your watch go well (rccht) 1 No, miss, it goes a quarter of an hour too fast. And mine goes half an hour too slow. Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right. Is it wound up ! It is wound up, and yet (Cvnnocb) it does not go. Do you hear, it is striking one o'clock. Then I will regulate rny watch and go home. Pray (3d) btttc) stay a little longer (ncd) cin ! I cannot, for we dine precisely at one o'clock (mtt K'Ul dn*). (Adieu), till I see you again. 229. What is the matter with you, my dear friend 1 why do you look so melancholy 1 Nothing ails me. Are you in any trouble ( ,aben Ste indent) cinen Rummer) ? I have nothing, and even less than nothing, for I have not a farthing and o\ve a great deal to my cre- ditors. Am I not very unhappy ] When a man is well and has friends he is not unhappy. Dare I ask you a favour 1 What do you w r ish ? Have the goodness to lend me fifty crowns. I will lend you them with all rny heart, but on condition that you will re- nounce gambling and be more economical than you have hitherto been. I see now, that you are iny friend, and I love you too much 327 not to follow your advice. John ! What is your pleasure, sir] Bring me some wine. Presently, sir. Henry ! Madam 1 Make the fire.- The maid-servant has made it already. Bring me some paper, pens and ink. Bring me also some sand (NT (gtrcnfont) or blotting-paper (t^as efct)pciPUT), sealing-wax (tcr (StCQcUacf) and a liyht (^tcbt). Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, and be back again m, twelve o'clock in order to carry my letters to (auf) the post office. Very well, madam. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON. 2UI)t tmir Section. Out of, except. It u j) c r (governs the dative).* Out of, or without doors. Tfnfjcr fccm .frctufe. He works out of doors. G?r arOcitct aniJcr tern Joaufe. They were all present, except (tc tvarcn attc t>a, aufjcr t>cn 6ctt>m the two brothers. 23rtit>ern. Except you and I, nobody was 2Cupcr Sfyncn unb nur fcfylte 0ttcs absent. manfc. Besides that, otherwise. 2(ncrN'm (ii&etHc$). Excepting this, he is* an honest tfufetfcem t|l cc cin efytttdjct: It can be done. f ^ttt ^tttcl, 15 c^ ^u tbun. There is no means of rinding f (5$ ift nid)t nioq(id) (cfecr c$ gtOt money now. fctn Sflittel), ficb in ttcfcm ^ugcns bltctc ell) gu fcrfd)a(fv'n. Along. C a' n $ 6 (governs the dative as well as the genitive). A, ong the road. All the year round. f )a$ gcin^c 3^1)^ F)tnburc^. To enable to. Sn fcen ^tanb fc|cn gu. To be able to. %\\\ tcmfcc fan* ^u. To sing. eincjcn* (Part, past, gcfuncjcn. Imperf. fang). Qtll^er employed as a conjunction may be followed by any case, according to the verb by which the case is governed. Ex. 3d) bttbe Wemanbcn aiifcer tfyn gefefyen, I have seen no one except him ; e3 tvar 9ltemaub ba, aufier er, nobody was there except he. b ^vi 2J7ittej, the means, is here in the plural. c The preposition liittflg must not be mistaken for the adverb Kingfl, super- lative of lange, a long while. Ex. Ccinqg ben Ufern be8 3ftf)einS ttit icf) f^on langfl geretfet, it is a long time since I travelled along the borders of the Rhine. 328 To the right, on the right side JKccfytS, rcd)tct (or hand). To the left, on the left side (or inf$, (infer >cmt. hand). Could you not tell me which is , tventcn et turd) tic 97afc. Without. ) f) n c, f o n b c r (govern the accus.). Do not go out without me. (?3cben (Sic oljnc mtcb ntcr;t auc> ! Without the least doubt. (Sonter d alien SivetfcU To last: (lo wear well). gotten*/ t a n c r n. That cloth will wear well. )tcfe$> Sucb tvtvt c\ut finften. How long has that coat lasted Bic Inn^e f)at 3f)ncn fctefcS you? gehatten ? To my liking. S^acr; metncm ^BeftcOen (cfallcn) d Center instead of c^/tte is only used in poetry. 329 To every body's liking. 9?ad) 3ctctmann 25c(ict>cn gc fall en). Nobody can do any thing to his 9?icmant> fann ifjm ctrcmS tcd)t liking-. d)cn. The question is, it turns upon. { g It does not turn upon your (s fyanMt fid) md)t urn pleasure, but upon your pro- cmiiqen, fentcrn um gress. fd)rittc. You play, sir, but playing is not (gic fptelon, nictn err ; flln't @tc the thing, but studying. fctlcn nid)t fpiclcn, fentcrn ftutU ten. What is going on? } * :$ fcnnnt tarauf an ^u nriffcn, tx>a n>ir tl)un rocrtcn (conversational style : SOStr niujjcn tviffcn, ivtc t^un feUcn), um unfcrc Sett fytnauOrincjcn ot>cr 311^= The question is to know what we shall do to pass the time . agreeably. frrino,cn. I propose (intend) joining a hunt-^ 3d) nd)inc mir tter, eincr * ing party. K't^uroefyncn. On purpose. 07tt SU'ijJ/ Dccfa^lid). I beg your pardon, I have not 3d) Otttc <2>tc um ^cr^ci^un^, id) done it on purpose. fyabc C5 nic^t t)ovfa|(ic^ (mit g(cip) getfyan. A game at chess, cine ^arttc A game at billiards, cine \parttc To play upon the violin. 2Cuf 6cr SStctinc fpictcn. To play the violin. )tc 3Stcttnc efccr SSiolin fptctcn. To play for something. It in ctu?a$ fptclcn* To play upon the harpsichord. 2Cuf fccm ^taricr (tag ^(at?tcr) fpic* {en. To play upon the flute. 2(uf tcr glctc (t)tc S(otc) 6lofcn*. To play at cards. Garten fptctcn. The game of chess, ba5 cJ)ad)fptc( ; the card, tic $attc ; the playing at cards (the card- t>a$ Jtartcnfptcl ; playing), the pack of cards, tag (gptcl Garten. Obs. The name of the instrument is put in the ac- cusative when we wish to express, with the verb fpt'e* lcn r that a person knows how to play ; but when we wish to express that he is actually playing, it requires the preposition auf with the dative. Ex. t>te 23ioltne fptefcn, to play the violin ; auf fcer Siclme fpielcn, to play 330 upon the violin. The names of games are employed without an article, and the rest is as in English. To blow. S3 ( a f c n * (acMafcn, Mtc$). Thou blowest, he blows. u blafi'tf, cc Waft. To hold one's tono-ue. 7 ^ < To stop speaking, to be silent, j @*ctflcn* Do you hold your tongue ? Scbroci^cn Sic ? I do hold my tongue. 3d) |cbn>eigc. After speaking half an hour, he 9?ad)l>cm cr cine fyatOe Stunbc cjcrc* held his tongue. bet tyattc, fdjroicg cr. To suspect. 93 c t m u t f) c n. I suspect what he has done. 3d) wrmutbc, roaS cr gctfjan fjat. He does not suspect what is (r rcrmutbct tud)t, tvaS going to happen to him. fahrcn luirD. Do you intend to make a long ctcn!cn Sic fid) fano,c in t>cr Stabt stay in town ? auftu batten ? I do not intend to make a long 3d) flct>cn!c mid) nid)t lancjc ta aufs stay there. jubattcn. To make a stay. (Sid) ouffjoltcn*. The stay, the sojourn, bcr ttufcntfyalt. To think. >D e n ! c n * (cjcbfldjt, badjtc). To think of some one or of some- 2(n 3^ntant>cn ofcct an ctn?a5 ten* thing. fen*. Of whom do you think? Tin rocn frcnfcn Sic? Of what do you think 1 SBoran t>cn!cn Sic? (See Rule, Lesson LXIV.) EXERCISES. 230. Sir, may I ask you where the Earl of B. lives 1 He lives near the castle (Lesson LXVIII.) on the other side (jcnfttt) of the river. Could you tell me which road I must take to go thither? You must go along the shore ((a'ng$ tK'm dkllflfcc bin), and you will come to a little street on the right, which will lead you straight (curare) to his house (cwf t^a$ au$ $u). It is a fine house, you will find it easily (U'tobt). I thank you, sir. Does the Count N. live here"? Yes, sir, walk in (fid) berdn bcmitbcn), if you please Is the count at home 1 I wish to have the honour to speak to him. Yes sir, he is at home ; whom shall I have the honour to announc (nu'lfrcn) T I am from B., and my name is F. Which is the shortest way to the arsenal (ba$ 3cu$bau$) ? Go down this street, and when you come to the foot, turn to the lefl and take the cross-way ; you will then enter into a rather narrov (cncjc) street, which will lead you to a great square, where you wili 331 see a blind alley. Through which I must pass ! No, for there is no outlet (Dcr 2(u6gam}). You must leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it. And then ! And then you must inquire further. 1 am very much ohliged to you. Do not mention it (lis ifr ntcl)t ilrjViolx). 231. Are you ahle to translate a French letter into German ! I am (i*$). Who has (of) taught you ? My German master has enabled me to do it. You are singing, gentlemen, but it is not a time for singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. We are at a loss. What are you at a loss at! I am going to tell you : it is a question with us how we shall pass our time agree- ably. Play a game at billiards or at chess. We have proposed joining a hunting party : do you go with (us) ! I cannot, for I have not done my task yet : and if I neglect it, my master will scold me. Every one according to his liking; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. Does Mr. K. go with us! Perhaps. I should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, excepting that he is an honest man. What is the matter with you! you look angry. I have reason to be angry, for there is no means of getting money now. Have you been at Mr. A's 1 I have been at his house ; but there is no possibility of borrowing any from him. I suspected that he would not lend me any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him ; and had you not told me to do so, I should not have subjected my- self (fid) ausfcgcn) to a refusal (Die cib|cl)la'ijtC ?(ntn;crt). 232. I suspected that you would be thirsty, and that your sister would be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you hither. I am sorry, however, that your mother is not here. 1 am aston- ished ((is (.K'frcniM inicb) that you do not drink your coffee. If I were not sleepy 1 would drink it. Sometimes (^cilfc) you are slee- py, sometimes cold, sometimes warm, and sometimes something else is the matter with you (iff Sbncn ctruo* ?(nlcres). I believe that you think too much about (an) the misfortune that has hap- pened to your friend (fein.). If I did not think about it, who would think about it ! Of whom does your brother think 1 He thinks of me ; for we always think of each other when we are not together (t*ctfammcn). I have seen six players (t>cr Sptc(cr) to-day, who were all win- ning at the same time (}U catcher Sett). That cannot be, for a player can only win when another loses. You would be right if I were speaking of people that had played at cards or billiards ; but I am speaking of flute and violin players (Dcr ^(6tcn= tint) i>ieltnfptcs fcr). Do you sometimes practise (macbcn) music ! Very often, for I like it much. What instrument do you play ! I play the violin, 332 and my sister plitys the harpsichord. My brother, who plays the bass (6cr 25a|5) accompanies (ln\)(nfcn) us, and Miss Stolz some- times applauds us (ocmcmKm JBctfflH gtifratfdben). Does she not also play some musical instrument (fcas nuififiittfcbc 3"ftniment) 1 She plays the harp (t>tc ^atjv), but she is too proud (ftel$) to prac- tise music with us. A very (fc(jr) poor town went to considerable expense (fccc fcetracf)t(td)e ?(ufh>anl>) in feasts and illuminations (suit 5rcut>enjv)lcn unt) (r(ed)tiim}cn) on the occasion of its prince passing- through (&ct tcr Durd)rcifc ti)re6 ). The latter seemed himself astonished (erftcumt) at it. "It has only done," said a courtier (fccr .pcfiiiann), " what it owed (to your majesty)." "That is true," replied (ocrfegcn) another, "but it owes all that it has done." (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) NINETY-NINTH LESSON. Cedion. tm& neunjigsie (Sntrocfcct ober. (Lesson LXI.) Either or. He either has done it, or will eini is not only combined with 8letc and fcf)on, but also with anberd t 333 ( afcer, or attcm or g[etef)tt)of)t 3tt>ar, .... or jebcd), though never- ( theless, or but. Prepositions either govern the )ic 95ftF)0g(ctct) bicfc^ Jraulctn ntd)t very handsome, she is never- fcbcn tft, fo tft fie t>cd) feljr theless very amiable. tuurttg. However handsome she maybe, ^o fcbcVfic nucf) fctn ning, fo ift ftc still she is not amiable. tod) md)t ttebcneiuurttg. You as well as your sister. .) 334 Though I wrote to him, never- 3cb f)fl&c tfym .jroat gefebrtcbcn, gfctcb- theless he has not answered n?ol)l f;cit er niir wd)t gcontwortct. me. (3cb tviinfebtc, cr fyattc c$ nicfyt cs 3 Anfcftte, tag cr c* md>t gctfom jjatte. s. C. The conjunction t> a $ may be omitted ; but then the verb immediately follows its subject. I wish you W ould g o with m , } g SJJ I hope that your sister will marry my brother. Suppose we had neither bread, nor wine, nor money. Would to God that all great lords loved peace ! Sch Fjcffc, S^r Jrfiutcin ivtrt) mctncn SBrutcr Jra'utctn then. ftcr mcincn n?trb. fit, ivtr fjd'ttcn wcbcr S3rot/ nod) 9&i*n ^rtcbcn ! SBotltc ott, bo9 otic grope ^crren ten gricfccn Itebten ! By virtue of. jt r a f t (governs the genitive). By virtue of his employment (r mup fro ft fetnc$ 2Cmte$ fo fyans (his office) he must act thus. tcln. According to (by virtue of). 23 C r m 6 g C (governs the gen.). According to your order I must aSerm&'gc 3fac$ 95efer;U nmp ic^ fo speak thus. fprcdjcn. Instead of. 2Cnftntt or ftatt (governs the genitive). He sent his daughter instead of Hnftatt fetncS vSof)ncg fc^tcftc cr fctne his son. Socbtcr. He has adopted him. r bat ibn an .RtnbcS ^tatt c am gcnomnicn. Go thither instead of me. (gtott metncr gcljc 5)u fyn. c The word tc (id)! To alter, to change. (tcb That man has altered a great deal >kfer g)iann bat ficb fcbr t>cranbcrt x since I saw him. fcttbcm tcb thn nicbt gcfeljcn ^^ To alter a coat. (Stncu 9?ocf an^crn. To recommend. (Smpfefjtcn*. To take leave (to commend one's id) cmpfcf)(cn*. self). Farewell, adieu ! Scb cmpfcbtc mtcb S^ncn ! I have the honour to bid you f 3d) f)tc tic G'fytt', mtcb 35ncn gu adieu. cmpfcfjlcn. Obs. D. This and le&ett ie n)of)f, farewell, is the general salute of the Germans when leaving each other. Farewell (adieu) ! Men tc To bid one's friends adieu. ctncn ^rcunt)cn 2c(>cn?of)t fflvjcn. The recommendation (respects, tic (Smpfefjluncj. compliments), o Remember me to him (to her). 5 mcine To enjoy. cnicpcn* (governs the ace.). Enjoy all the pleasures that vir- (5>eme9en @tc alle tue permits. tt?c(cbc tie Su.Qcnt) crtaubt. The past, btc ^Scrcjan^onbctt, t>a the present, t>a$ cgontvartigc ; the presence, btc (Sjccjenroart. In his presence. Sti fcincr (SJcgenwart. The future, bcib SuHinfttgc ; the loss, bet 33cr(uft ; the loss of time, bcr 3ettr>erliift. Not to fail. 2(u6vtcbtcn x nidjt 336 Pray, present my compliments 3>d) btttc eft tft fdjon akvfcrttqt). I shall not stay (fid) ouf&fiftcn*) any longer. I only wished in passing by (tm SSotbctgcrjCn), to inquire about (fid) crEunMa.cn nach) your health. You do me much honour. It is very fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the plea- "Bure of seeing you again this afternoon (nod) Stfdjc), and if you have time we will take a little turn together (fo qcfycn ruir cin iin'niq mtt I'tnanbcr fpajicrcn). With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will come for you (Sic abbelcn) about (o,cqcn) seven o'clock. -Adieu then (alfc), till I see you again. I have the honour to bid you adieu. 234. The loss of time is an irreparable (uncrfc|(td)) loss. A single minute cannot be recovered (uncbctcr(anqcn) for all the gold in the world. It is then of (pen) the greatest importance (tic 2Btd)ttcjett) to employ well the time, which consists only of minutes (au$ SRU nutcn bejMu'n*) of which we must make good use (Me man roobl be? nu(3cn nuip). We have but the present ; the past is no longer any thing, and the future is uncertain. A great many people (cbt ttU'ltf 9)?enfcben) ruin themselves (fid) 511 runbc rtd)tcn), because they wish to indulge themselves too much (it)ctt fie ficb flfl^u qttt(id) tf)tin tucltcn). If most (Me nictftcn) men knew how to content themselves (fid) Ocz pnuqen) with what they have they would be happy, but their gree- diness (Me iericjfctt) very often makes them unhappy. In order to 337 be happy, we must (muji man) forget the past, not trouble ourselves about (fid) befuiumern uiu) the future, and enjoy the present. I was very dejected (trauru}) when my cousin came to me. " What is the matter with you ] " he asked me. " Oh (neb) ! my dear cousin," replied 1, "in losing that money, I have lost every thing." " Do not fret," said he to me, u for I have found your money." 235. As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me he begins to speak French, in order to practise it (um fid) $u itben), and overwhelms me with po- liteness (nut 4bofUcI)tVttcn fttetfy&ufttl), so that I often do not know what to answer (n?a id) tfym anhverten foil). His brothers do the same (e$ cbenfo macrjcn). However, they are very good people ; they are not only rich and amiable, but they are also generous (qreOnwtbto,) and charitable (roebltfyatig). They love me sincerely (cwfttd)ttg), therefore, I love them also, and consequently (fe(glid)) shall never say anything to their disadvantage (9?ad)tbei(to,e$ son tfynen). I should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony (tne UmftanN') ; but every one has his faults (t>er Jeljler), and mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 236. Have the enemies surrendered (fief) crgeben*) ? They have not surrendered, for they did not prefer life to death ; and though they had neither bread, nor water, nor arms, nor money, they determined to die rather than surrender. Why are you so sad ? You do not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend (fern.). Tell me, for I assure you that 1 share (tbetlen) your sufferings (t^a Cettvn) as well as (eben fcwcbl ate) your pleasures (Me #wil>c). Though I am sure that you partake of (-Sbeil an c'tncr er bet cleqenl)cit). Let us speak of something else now. What do you think of the man who spoke to us yesterday at the concert 1 He is a man of much understanding (cm fef)r eri ftanbiger 9)Jann), and not at all wrapt up in his merits (tcn fctnen SScrMonfton cinj.V'ncnimcn fcin*). But why do you ask me that 1 ? To speak of something. It is said (Wan faa,t) : contentment surpasses riches (Siifriefccnfjctt Qcl)t fiber JKetcbtrwiu) ; let us then always be content. Let us share with each other (nut einanber tr>ettcn) what we have, and live all our life-time (unfer gan^e^ Ccbcn) inseparable (uniertrennltcb) friends. You will always be welcome (ttnllfommen) at my house, and I hope to be equally so (c3 aucb) at yours. If I saw you happy I should be equally so, and we should be more con- tented than the greatest princes, who are not always so. We shall be happy, when we shall be perfectly (gcllfommcn) contented with what we have ; and if we do our duty as we ought (gcljorioj, God 15 338 will take care of the rest (jo nritb bcr licfoc ett fur fca$ ttcfcricje fers gen). The past being no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy about the future, and enjoy the present. 237. Behold, ladies, those beautiful (fyerrttcf)) flowers, with their colours so fresh and bright (nut ifyren fo frtfcl)cn unt> glcinjcnben gars ben) ; they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the colour of innocence (Me Unfcl)u(t) ; the violet indicates gentleness (Me (gJcmftmutl)) ; you may (man fann) see it in Louisa's eyes. The forget-me-not ()as d$crgijmicmnid)t) has the colour of heaven, our future (tunfttq) dwelling (tie SBofjnuwj, repeat the genitive), and the rose (Me $ofe), tne queen of flowers, is the emblem (fcaS innbtlfc) of beauty (Me cbonfyett) and of joy (Me Jreufce). You (^Jan) see all that personified (ocrnrirflict)t) in seeing the beautiful Amelia (2(ma(ie). How beautiful is the fresh verdure (tn$ jun$e frtfcfoe ($5run) ! It is salutary (roefyl tbun*) to our eyes, and has the colour of hope (Me offnuni)), our most faithful (ttcu, repeat the genitive) friend (fern.), who never deserts (wrlaflVn*) us, not even in death (tin Sote). One word more my dear friend. What is your plea- sure ? I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your mother. Tell her, if you please, that I regret (betcuicrn) not having been at home when lately she honoured (Oeefyren) me with her visit. I thank you for her (in tftrcm 9?amen), 1 shall not fail. Farewell then. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) HUNDREDTH LESSON. ^tmbertste Cection. s OF THE ADVERB. We have hitherto shown by numerous examples for the practice of learners, the place which the adverb is to occupy in a sentence. Let us now determine the place of the adverb by standard rules. As the adverb modifies the signification of the verb, it should always be near it, particularly the negative nid)t> which, if misplaced, would entirely change the meaning of a phrase. Ex. I have not the honour to know 3cb fjafce ntcfjt Me (Sfyve, al)rbaft guter SKann, a truly good man ; eine ttnrflid) gute elegeufyeit, a truly good opportunity ; eiu fcl}r artige^ $iub, a very good child. 2d, It follows the imperative and precedes the infi- nitive to which it relates. Ex. Ofcben Sie laut, speak aloud ; fprcrfien emt ie langfam rebeten, fo n>itr^ be id) ie tocrfleljen, if you spoke slowly I should under- stand you. 4th, In compound tenses it precedes the past parti- ciple. Ex. & fyatte laut gelefcn, roemt Sie ifyn ofter bajit angcl)alten fatten, he would have read aloud, if you had oftener engaged him to do so ; irf) bin fcfyon ba ge# n>efen r I have already been there (Lesson XLI.) ; id) fyabe ihn Dorgeflern gcfeljen, I saw him the day before yesterday. 5th, It follows the case of the verb, but precedes it when it is a partitive, or joined to an indefinite article. Ex. 3d) faf) tint geftent, I saw him yesterday ; er l)at e3 nttr fo eben gegebett, he has just now given it to me ; id) ttntl ibn Sbneu morgen fd^irfen, I will send it to you to- morrow (Lesson XXVIII.) ; fjafl u maitrf)mat ^a^tit^ cf)er au^beflern taflen ? hast thou sometimes had cravats mended? id) fyabe trattd)ma[ ^c(d)eau^bej]ern taflfen,! have a Um ^et)U U^r S^or^enS, is an adverbial phrase, and all sorts of adverbial expressions, or compound adverbs, as they may be called, follow the rules of simple adverbs. 340 sometimes had some mended (Lesson XLIV.) ; @te je einen epfyanten gefeben ? have you ever seen an elephant ? id) babe me emen gefeben, I have never seen one ; er l)atte biefen 5E>iorgen feitt elb, he had no money this morning ; er tragt gern etnen groen itt, he likes to wear a large hat. 6th, It precedes the case of the verb when governed by a preposition. Ex. 3d) tt>itt ifyn morgen jit Sfynen fd)i* den, I will send him to you to-morrow (Lesson XXVIII.) ; fmb Sie (ange bet meinem 2Sater geblieben ? have you stayed long with my father (Lesson XLVII.) ? id) bin eine tunbe fang bet ifym gebtieben, I have stayed with him a full hour (Lessons XLVII. and XLVIII.) ; tt)tr fprad)en fo eben tton 3()nen, we have just spoken of you ; fonnen @ie fyente ju mir fommen ? can you come to me to-day? PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE n i d) t Rules. 1st, It likewise follows the simple tense and the case of the verb, when there is one, but precedes the infinitive and the past participle. Ex. 3$ tterflefye bie* fen SKann nid)t> I do not understand that man ; ber SKann fyat ben goffer nid)t, the man has not the trunk ; ber jnnge ?D?enfd) (3iutg(ing) f)at tbn nidjr, the young man has it not (Lesson IX.) ; @te ejjen nid)t, you do not ea't ; id) ^abe i!)it ntd)t gebabt, I have not had it (Lesson XLII.) ; er tt)ttt nid)t arbetten, he does not wish to work ; id) babe ifyn nid)t gefel)en, I have not seen him ; id) babe they do not love each other ; id) fd)meid)fe mir nid)t, I do not flatter myself; fte feben einanber mcf)t dt)nlid), they do not re- semble each other (Lesson LXXXVL). O^5. A. When the negative sentence is preceded or followed by an affirmative one, nid)t precedes the case of the verb, but if the affirmative sentence con- tains another nominative with Ctber, the negative fol- 341 lows the general rule. Ex. 3d) Me nid)t biefen, foit* tern jenen, I have not the latter, but the former ; er f)dt biefetf, aber nidjt jene3, he has the latter, but not the former (Lesson XL) ; id) fyabe Sfjren nt nid)t, aber went SSrnber fyat ifjn, it is not I who have your hat, but my brother. Obs. B. A negative, not depending on the nomina- tive of the verb, precedes the word the sense of which it modifies. Ex. & arbeitet ben gangen ag mrfjt, he does not work during the whole day ; and man arbeitet nid)t ben ganjen ag, one does not work all day. 2d, The case of the verb being governed by a pre- position, nid)t, like other adverbs (Rule 6 above), pre- cedes it. Ex. & ifl nicfy: jn anfe, he is not at home (Lesson XXVI.) ; id) fitrcfyte mid) nid)t fcor if)tn, I do not fear him (Lesson LXX.). 3d, It follows the adverbs of time, but precedes all other adverbs, as adverbs of quality, of place, &c. Ex. 3d) arbeite bente nid)t, I do not work to-day ; er fdjreibt nid)t fd)on, he does not write well ; er ifl nid)t ba, he is not there ; id) gefje nid)t ba^in, I do not go thither. 4th, It follows the adverb nod). Ex. 3d) bin nod) nid)t ba gewefen, I have not yet been there ; id) bin nod) ntd)t bei ibm gemefen, I have not yet been at his house (Lesson XLL). The following sentences, however, must be distinguished from each other : tt>otten e nod) n i d) t etn>a3 effen ? will you not eat anything yet ? and ttwllen Sie n i d) t nod) etwa^ eflen ? will you not eat anything more? In the latter sentence nid)t modifies the signification of nod) ettt>a3. Obs. C. The negative precedes the word and), when the sentence is both interrogative and negative, but follows it when the sentence is simply negative. Ex. SSin id) nid)t and) ba geroefen ? have I not also been there ? nnb id) and) nid)t, nor I either ; nnb er and) nid)t, nor he either. To pretend to be ill. > f (ir 1 1 flScn, man fci 342 This boy always pretends to be )tefer .ftnafrc cjtfrt fid) tmmer flic ill ; but when we sit down to frnnf auS ; allein rvenn man $tt dinner, he is generally well 3tfd)C fleht, fo tft or gewohn(id) again. nncbet ijcr^cjlcUt (ivtebcr gefunb). To be said. f ). der foot and nearly crushed to death. I now ascend the mountain ; a Sefet crflimmc id; ten SBerq ; ctn deep valley unfolds itself to ttefe$ Sbat ercffnct fid) iiietnem my delighted eyes ; a limpid ferfchcnten ?(uflc ; ^it>ifd)en ^arten stream murmurs among the etnifcben riefctt cm ftarer 5?ocb/ verdant shrubs; sheep are $u meinen ^iiQcn nxtt>en Cnmmcr, grazing at my feet, and I be- unb burd) ben fernen S^alt) l>res hold the last rays of the set- cben fid) btc (often (Strablen ber ting sun breaking through the finfcntcn erbc tci) nncbctfcmmcn, &c.). 343 I shall be back in a moment. 3d) fcmmc Qfcid) rwcbcr. We scale the castle this very S)tcfe5 (2d)(o crftcujcn roir in ticfa night. Sincbt. 1 have the keys, we kill )cr ScbttiflM bin idj nid'd)tia, ; nnr crmerfccn The guards, and deliver thee JDte utcr, rcipen id) au3 )cinct from thy prison. jammer. (@{f>iHet'$ SKaria (Stuart). 1st, The imperfect has already been touched upon in Lesson LVII. It is the historical tense of the Ger- mans. Ex. Scipio Africanus was in the ha- cipie, tcr 2ffrifancr, fac^tc, cr ware bit of saying, he never was rue nxnia^r olmc sBcfcbaftto/tng, less idle than when he had at* rccnn'er nid)t$ $u tbun battc. nothing to do; and in fact his irflid) roar cr aucb ^i*-' nicbr fas busiest time was that which fcfoafrtcjt, al^ in t>cr (Sinfamfctt ; he spent in solitude. For it tcnn J)U'r fann cr fcincn roicbttcjcn was there he meditated over Itntcrncrmumgcn unt) dicfcbaftcn his great enterprises and his nacb ; btcr, im @cbopc tcr JKuljc/ future deeds. In the bosom cntiuarf cr $lanc ^um 9Kct)t fcincs of retirement, he traced plans SSatcrlantc^ unt) bier/ cntfcrnt for the happiness of his coun- tten tern ^trcifc fctncr S^ttbur^Ct/ try ; and there, far from the untcrf)tett cr fid) ctnjtg unt) atlcitt intercourse of his fellow-citi- mit t>cm lucfc tcrfclbcn. zens, he devoted his thoughts to the promotion of their wel- fare. 2d, It is used to narrate an action or event of which the narrator was an eye-witness, or to express an ac- tion in reference to another which was either simulta- neous with, or antecedent to it (Lesson LVII.). Yesterday a child was drowned, dkftcrn crtrcmf cin jtinb, a(3 id) auf while I was on the bridge. tcr iBriicfc ftanK He granted rny request because (r gcruabrtc mcinc SSittc, wci( cr ftc he found it just. qcrccbt font*. I was playing with my pupil, 3d) fptcttc mit mctncm Scgtingc, C(H when the news was brought man uiir tic Sftacfyrtcfyt brad)tc. to me. 1st, The perfect tense is used to express an action or event as perfectly ended without any reference to another circumstance, and when the narrator was not an eye-witness of it. Ex. 344 Were you yesterday at the con- tnt te (jeftcrn tm (Scnccrt cert 1 rcefen ? Has the army been beaten 1 3ft tie TCrmce Qefdjlac^en rcottcn ? Has anybody been drowned ? 3ft Semcmt ertrunfcn ? Were you ever in Vienna ? tnt te j[e in 2i$tcn gcrwfen ? 2d, The imperfect may even be used when the nar- rator has not witnessed the event ; but then he must take care to add to his narrative a phrase like : fagte er, he said ; fagt ntatt, it is said, &c. Ex. They say, that day before yester- SSorgcftcrn, fa $ t m a n, war cm day there was a great feast in o,tofjc JJcft in ter tatt. the town. They say there was a battle on 2)en ftinf unt $twn$tqften foricjen the 25th of last month. Senate/ fjeipt e*, pel cine d)lad)t Obs. D. We have already seen (Lesson XXXIY.) that we cannot say with the English, I am writing, I do write, both of which must be expressed by the only present id) fd)rci6e, I write ; nor, I was writing, I did write, both of which must be expressed by the only imperfect id) fefyrieb, I wrote (Lesson LVIL). Expres- sions such as the following : When you come to learn, he is to write, to go, I am to have it, fyc., cannot be translated literally in German. In such cases we use the future when mere futurity, and the verb fottett when necessity or a wish is to be expressed. Ex. When you come to learn French. SQ&ann te fran.jffjifd) lerncn WCttctU He is to write. (5r rotrt fcfjrctOen. Am I to go thither 1 oil id) fnna,el)cn ? He is to go thither. (r fell fytngefycn. Am I to have this book 1 ? oil id) ttcfeS 23ttd) fjofccn? Am I to give you a pen? oil id) Sbncn cine Jeter ge&cn? I was to speak for them all. 3d) folltc flit 2(lle fprcdften. He was to arrive on the 20th. r follte ten $n>an$to,jleii anfommen* Obs. E. At the end of a phrase we sometimes omit the auxiliary of the perfect and pluperfect tenses, when the phrase that follows it begins with another auxi- liary. Ex. 345 f )b id) gfetd) me $u $pavt gercefen Though I have never been in Paris, I am nevertheless ac- quainted with all that is ^ going on there. bin, inn id) tod) t>cn cittern tetrtd)tet, tvaS tafelbft )b id) g(eid) ntematS $u ^ari^ gen?es fen, fc bin id) tod) son allem um tetrtd)tct, ivai> tafelbft rotgel)t. As he did not answer me, I wrote^a et nut nid)t geantivortet (bot), to him no more. babe id) ifym ntd)t me()t gcfd)vtcs ben. The enemy having been beaten, 9?ad)tem bet fitirib gefdtfafjen roots it is to be hoped that the war ten (ift), ift gu ^offen, tflp t>ct will be at an end. tieg geenbigt fetn met. EXERCISES. 238. Have you seen your niece 1 Yes, she is a very good girl who writes well and speaks German still better : therefore she is hon- oured and loved by every one. And her brother, what is he doing ? Do not speak to me of him, he is a naughty (bofc) boy, who writes always badly and speaks German still worse : he is there- fore loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties (ter qute iBiffcn) ; but he does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad day-light (bei hetlcm Sage), and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit down to dinner, he is generally better again. He is to study physic (tie ?(rjnct!itnft) ; but he has not the slightest inclination for it ($ar fctne 2ujt ta$u). He is almost always talking of his dogs which he loves passionately (lett>enfd)aft(td)). His father is ex- tremely (cuifjcrerfcentltdb) sorry for it. The young simpleton (t>er SMcfcfinntQe) said lately to his sister: " I shall enlist (^clbat rcers ben* obir fid) anroetben (affcn*) as soon as pea^ce is proclaimed (of? feut(id) bcfcmnt umd)en ofcet pub(ktren). 239. My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with some friends at (in dat.) the (hotel) King of Spain (sen Spantcn). Why do you always speak French and never German ? Because I am too bashful. You are joking; is a Frenchman ever bashful? I have (a) keen appetite : give me something good to eat. Have you any money 1 No, sir. Then I have nothing to eat for you. Will you not let me have some on credit 1 I pledge (oerpfdnfcen) my honour. That is too little. What, sir ! My dear friend, lend me a ducat (t>et ^ncot, gen. en). Here are two instead of one. How much I am obliged to you ! I am al- ways glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in yours. Is this house to be sold 1 Do you wish to buy it 1 ? Why not? Why does your sister not speak 1 She would speak if she were not al- ways so absent (jcrftrcut). I like pretty anecdotes (t>tc 2(nect)0te) ; they season (nritrjen) conversation (tie UlttcrfyattUttg) and amuse (be- i p;* 346 lufti^en) every body. Pray, relate me some. Look, if you please, at page 389 of the hook (in from ^ud>e) which I lent you, and (fe) you will find some. To-morrow I shall set out for Hanau ; but in a fortnight (in wcrjcbn Sagcn) I shall be back again, and then I shall come to see you arid your family. Where is your sister at present ? She is in Berlin, and my brother is in Leipzic. This little woman is said to be going to marry the counseller N., your friend ; is it true 1 I have not heard of it. What news is there of our great army 1 It is said to be lying (ftef)en*) between the Rhine and the Weser. All that the courier told me seeming very probable (ruafjrfcbctnltcb), I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed for Paris. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON. Qnribttt mib *rste Cection. To begin to laugh, to weep, to 2Cnfan$cn $u todjen, gu roetnen, $u cry, &c. fcbrcicn u. f. tv. To pledge. 9Serpfant>en. To pawn. 23erfcgen. To destroy by fire and sword. sfflit Jcutr unb dfjrocrt tterfyeeren. To look out of the window. 2(u t>em JJenftcr fcben*. I do not know whether this so- %fy nwt(* nid)t, cb Mefe cfcflfoftaft ciety will admit me. mid) nrirD fyaben ivellen. After ten o'clock you will not f 9Zad) gcftn lU)r trcffcn ant> ijl cingcfd)(afen. To smell of garlick. 9?ad) .finebtaud) ricd)cn*. To smell of wine. 9?ad) SBcin riccbcn*. The sermon is over. )ic ^rcbigt ift au^. That is the question. <$ tfl t)ic Jra^c (c fommt barauf an). He has nearly fallen. t (T ware frcinafte gcfatlcn. I did not find a living soul. 3d) fabc frinc (cbcnbi^c @cc(c an^c* troffcn. To meet with. 2f n t r c f f c n * (Part, past, cjctref* fen. Imperf. traf). You have the wrong key. Ste baftcn ten unred)ten (Sdjttiffef. He is now on the road. r ift jc$t auf ban SBcgc. Give me a clean plate, if you cben n tic Safcfye 9 ret fen*. pocket. To put one's son to school. ctnen ttnung b r i n 9 e n *. settle). To set something on fire. Ctn>a3 an^iinten (anftecfen). To set to work. id) an tie Xrbctt m a d) e n. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS DEPENDING 1st, On the use or omission of an article. 1 have read Schiller. 3d) fjafce ten @d)i(tct He broke his neck. r (jat ten ^>a(5 gebrod)cn. Nature is the best instructress. 3) i c 37atur ift tic bcfte Scfjrennn. Man is mortal. > e r SKenfd) tft fterbltd). Human life is short. 3) a ^ mcnfd)ltd>e Cebcn ift futj. Vice plunges its followers into )a$ Safter fluqt fcine perdition. in^ 3Sertcrbcn. Eloquence is powerful. & i e SBcrettfamfett ift mddjttg. Poetry is enchanting. 3) i e ^id)thmft tft bcaubernt Government. 2) i c 9?i'gierung. History teaches us experience. 2) i c (Skfd)id)te Uf)tt un^ rfa Saint Paul. 2) e r t)ti(\w ^autu^ Most of his contemporaries. 2) i e mciffcn fcincc In town. Sn t c r tatt. To go to church. Sn t i e .ftirdjc gefjen*. The East Indies. Dfftntien. The West Indies. S^cfttnticn. Before the conclusion of the dra- SSoc (Sttticjung ma. 2d, On the use of a pronoun. I take the liberty of writing' to 3$ nctjme mtc tie greifjett, an you. te ^u fdjreibem 348 How goes it 1 How do you do? SBtc gcr)t'$ 3 f) n c n ? Very well. ( gebt mtr fcljr tvefyf. I have bought a hat. 3* &abe m t r ctncn ut gefauff. ^ Let us go on a party of pleasure. 2Btr roollen u n t fjeute etn $crnu* gen Dcrfftttffcn. He is quite at home. (Sc mod>t ft d) * 6 bequenu He is very conceited. en. I have it before my eyes. 3d) f)be c$ or 2Cugcn. I consent tazY, (willingly or with Sd) bin e$ jufrtefcen. pleasure). 3d, On the use of a verb. Who has said mass to-day ? SQBcr foot F)cutc tie Sftcfjc g e ( c f c n ? I am with you in a moment. 3d) f C m m C Qtctcf). We shall have a storm. 2Bit wcrfccn eih (Sewttter b e f o m s m en. How is that ? SODte 9 e fj t ba^ $u ? I do not scruple to do it. 3d) t r o g c ! e t n S3 e t) c n ! e n, What do you ^AinA; of it? 83>a* fjottcn ie They will not dissuade me from 3d) ta(fc nur t>n^ ntd)t it. To buy a lottery ticket. 3 Me Scttcrtc f C e n. To fo ftorw. 3ut 2Be(t f c m m c n *. To bring forth. 3ut SBclt b r t n 9 e n *. To doubt (to ca// in question). 3n 3a)Ctfc( g t c fj c n *. To /ay the cloth. 5)cn Stfcft beef en. To se rfown (to compose). en $um ^etnbc ntQdftcit. I fear to be burdensome to you. 3d) futd)te 3fynen ^ut eaft gu fallen. OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING IDIOMS. To prescribe milk-diet. i e 9}?tlcr)fur rerort)nen. To copy fair. 3n$ 9?cinc fdjwben* (rein obfc^rei? ben*). Of one's own accord. 2(ue freien ^tiidfen. We shall not live to see it. SBir n?er^en c$ nict)t erteben. It is all over with me. @$ ift urn nu'cr; gefci)e()en. 349 My head turns round (is giddy). (S3 wtvb nut fdjrotnbttcrj. I faint. 3d) Kiemnic cine )f)mnad)t. I thought you were a German by 3d) fjtelt @ic fttt etncn $$0rnefl birth. )cutfd)cn. To live on bad terms with some llncintg mit Senionbcm tc&en. one. To follow an unprofitable trade. (Sid) nut fcreblofcn &iinficn ofcgc&cn*. This seems reasonable. )a$ Id'jjt fid) fyoten (fdjctnt t>ccnunf= tig). To lose one's reputation. cinen gutcn Seamen writer en*. o/. SKtttclft or ocrmittctft (go- vern the genitive). He has succeeded by means of 9Scrmtttc(ft Sftrc^ SBcijtanbcg ift eg your assistance. ifjm gctunc^cn. We reached the shore by means 2Btr famcn mtttelft (t)crmttte(ft) etnc of a boat. ^atjnc^ an5 itfcr. Towards (to meet). < n t g c 9 c n (governs the dative). We went to meet his father. SOBit gingcn fctncm SSatcr cntgcgen. Against (in opposition to). 3 u tt) t b e r. Never act against the laws. $ant(e me ten efegcn Opposite. egcniiber. My house is opposite his. SBctn j^au^ ftc^t tern fetnigen iiOcr. Obs. The prepositions entgegett, jimrifcer, and iibcr are always placed after the case which they govern. Next to (after). 9fc & d) ft (governs the dative). Next to you I like him best. 3?d'd)ft Sfacn ift er mir bet Sictfte. Together with (besides, inclu- Sftc&ft/ fammt (govern the dative). ding). He lost the ducat together with (5c Ktfet ben Uneaten fammt ben the crowns, sold the garden t)n(ern, ttcrfaufte ben (Garten including the house. ncOft betn jg>aufe. If I were now to question you as SKcnn id) (Sic jct fragtc/ tt?te id) in I used to do at the beginning unfern crftcn Cccttoncn ^u than of our lessons, what would pflegtc (tx>te id) nnfnng^ gu t^un you answer! Pfl^tc), n;a^ n?urben 8te ants roortcn ? 350 We found these questions at first tr fmrtcn nnfnngS biefe g'vogcn rather ridiculous, but full of etwas ladbcrlid) ;'aflctn Dell 23cv? confidence in your method, we trancn ouf Sfyrc 2d)tart, beams answered as well as the small tvortcten rwr fciefelbcn, fo-gut eg quantity of words and rules we une ter Heine SScrratf) pen 3crs then possessed allowed us. tern unt S^egeln ($)rinctpten), ten nnt tcmicils Ijattcn, gvftattetc (ct laubte). We were not long in finding out 2tt fyafon bait gcmcrft, tap tie that those questions were cal- grcigen tnrciuf bercdjnct woven, culated to ground us in the un$ turd) tic rciterfpmbenten rules, and to exercise us in TCntroertcn, tic tx>it gcjrmmgcn conversation, by the contradic- nxircn, tarouf gu gebcn, tie tyrin; tory answers we were obliged ctpien (3?e$e(n) etn^ufct)arfen unb to make. un$ in ter Unter!)flttun0 $u (iben. We can now almost keep up a Sc|t fonnen tt)tr un^ Oetnn^e rclU conversation in German. fcnmien auf fccutfd) (im 2)cutfd)cn) unterbntten. This phrase does not seem to us >iefet o| fc^ctnt un^ md)t tcgtfcft logically correct. rtd)ttc\. We should be ungrateful if we Btt nxiren untonftar, ruenn nrir allowed such an opportunity cine fc fcbcnc elcgenbctt Dcrbeis to escape without expressing gefyen licpcn, cbne Sbnen unfcrc our liveliest gratitude to you. leb()aftej!e 3)anfbarfett ju be^etcjen. In all cases, at all events. 7(uf jeten Jail. The native, ter (Stnqebovne ; the insurmountable difficulty, tie unubemnntftcbe (^dbtrtertQfeit ; this energetic language, ttefe cncrgifcbc (fraftpcllc) a* gtoubc id) gern) ; but the question is whether this agreeable society will admit me. You are welcome every where. What ails you, my friend ? How do you like (Btc fdjmectt S^ncn) that wine? I like it very well (herr* Ucb) ; but I have drunk enough ($ut cniigc ctet genug) of it. Drink once more. No, too much is unwholesome (ungcfunt) ; I know my constitution (tic 97atur). Do not fall. What is the mat- ter with you ? I do not know ; but my head is giddy ; I think I am fainting. I think so also, for you look almost like a dead per- son. What countryman are you "? I am a Frenchman. You a CfriCitntltctjfett is derived from erfennett, to acknowledge. anf&ar!ctt expresses both gratitude and acknowledgment. 351 speak German so well that I took you for a German by birth. You are jesting. Pardon me. I do not jest at all. How long have you been in Germany ] A few days. In earnest] You doubt it per- haps, because I speak German ; I knew it before I came to Ger- many. How did you manage to learn it so well ? I did like the prudent starling (ter taar). Tell me, why you are always on bad terms with your wife (Me gran) 1 and why do you engage in unprofitable trades'? It costs so much trouble (($ fofU't fc fid 932iif)C) to get an employment (big man cin bcfenwit). And you have a good one and neglect it (c<> f)tntanfc(5cn ctcr crnad)tafficjen). Do you not think of the future ? Now allow me to speak also (3^t toffcn tc nitd) aud) rctcn). All you have just said seems reasonable, but it is not my fault (c$ tjl md)t nictnc (Scbulfc), if I have lost my reputation ; it is that of my wife (twine $rcw ift @d)utb fcaran) ; she has sold my finest clothes, my rings, and my gold watch. I am full of debts (roll Scfoulbcn fcin*), and I do not know what to do (rociSid) onfangcn ctcr tf)im fell). I will not excuse (cntfcbultigi'n) your wife ; but I know that you have also contributed (l>cttra$en*) to your ruin (t>as 83crtcrbcn). Women are generally good when they are left so. 241. DIALOGUE. The master. If I were now to ask you such questions as I did at the beginning of our lessons, (viz.) Have you the hat which my brother has 1 am I hungry ? has he the tree of my brother's garden 1 &c. what would you answer? The pupils. We are obliged (gc$nnmgcn) to confess that we found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confi- dence in your method, we answered as well as the small quantity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were in fact not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we can almost keep up a conversation in the energetic language which you teach us, we should answer : It is impossible that we shouM have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot have one and the same thing. To (2fuf with accus.) the second question we should answer, that is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : that there is more than one tree in a garden, and in telling us that he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logi- cally correct. At all events we should be ungrateful if we allowed such an opportunity to escape, without expressing our liveliest gratitude to you for the trouble you have taken in arranging those wise combinations (Huge Be$e ctnfctyciqcn* ctcr (Sombinntioncn ma.; d>cn), to ground us almost imperceptibly (bctnobc unmcrf(icb) in the rules, and exercise us in the conversation of a language which, taught in any other way, presents (tarlneten*) to foreigners, and even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 352 HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON. fjunbert xtnb Cation. To avoid death, with which he Urn tern Sefce $u entgcljcn, tcr tnm was threatened, he took to K'fcrftnnt) (rueimt cr betvelu't flight. aw), nabm (crgriff) cr tic gludjt. I warrant you (I answer for it), f 3d) ftchc Sbncri tafiiv. So goes the world. { o cjcl)t eg in tec 2Be(t. But must one not be a fool to tfbcr nutptc man nicbt em 9?arr fcin, remain in a place bombarded roam man an cincm pen Ungnrn by Hungarians 1 bcmOorDtrtcn >rte blciben roelirc ? The deuce take the Hungarians f *Dap tic ltnC|arn, nx(d)C fcinc who give no quarter ! (Snabc gcOcn (n>c(d)C gar ntdjt fd)cncn)/ betni Jpcnfcc wcircn ! Will you be my guest 1 90?c(Tcn Sic nu'tn aft fctn ? Will you dine with me 1 Swollen cnianbcn 311 aft bitten*. To invite some one to dinner. < Scmanfccn ^um 9}Jtttogc(rcn ctn C ten*. I have ordered your favourite f Scb f)abc 3^c Cctbfpctfc dish. taffcn. There is nothing like a good (5$ gcht nid)t5 itbcr ctn piece of roast meat. JBratCll. The roast meat, tcr 2^raton, t>a^ cbratcnc ; the guilty, t>cr Scbulfci^c ; the innocent, tcr llnfcbulitc^c ; a good (jovial) companion, ctn (nfHgcr iBrubcr ; the husband, t)cr 9)?ann (@l;cmann). I an ctncr nd)e F) To be disgusted with a thing.-? (Stncv (Sacbc (genitive) uOcr'Dritffig .< Gtner ad ( fctn*. Who hazards gains. ) f gvifd) gcnxiQt ift featb gcivcnncn. Nothing venture nothing have. (cfl| themselves by swimming. fprana (ftur^te fid)) ing 9}iccr, um fid) nut ^d)ivtnmicn 511 vcttcn. 353 He was struck with fright, (Sr wurbe tton ^cftrcdfcn fccfattcn when he saw that the fire (crfcfyrctf l)cftig), al$ cr faf), tag was gaining on all sides. tag Jcuer ouf alien ^ettcn urn fid) griff- He did not know what to do. j (5r n>ute ntd)t, wo$u cr fid) cnts fd)ltepcn fellte. C (5r mecfytc nad)ft'nncn, rwc cr wofltc. He reflected m vain. ^ & f(lnn ^^ ^ In vain. SBftgefttd), rergefcenS, umfonfh To reflect (to hesitate). , n?c(d)cr ^uc\e^cn n?ar, me all this. f;at mtr What would have hecome of < SQ&ic n?arc c$ nur crgan^cn ? me ? \ 2Ba^ ware au^ mtr cjcnJerfccn ? A FEW MORE IDIOMS. It is a fortnight (a week) since SStcqe^n (ad)t) Sa^c tancj 6m I was out. nid)t au^cgnngen. Will you not go out to-day ? tc rcerben tccl) ^cutc I would not importune you. Set) will 3fynen nid)t fallen. He has nothing to live upon. (Sr fjcit nid)t^ ^u Ic6cn. I board and lodge him. 3d) gcOe i()m frcicn Sifd) unt nung. The mystery will be discovered. )tc adje it)trb fcljcn an ten Sag fcmmcn. They are going to lay the cloth. Wlan tvirt> talb ben Sifc^ becfcn. He lives high (feasts, eats, and (Sr tf't unb trinft gut. drinks well). Have you done ? tnb tc fertig ? That is his business. )a mag er gufeben. To do one's best. (gein TTeuperfte^ tl)un*. He has assisted me. (Sr tft mir gur ^)anb gc.gangen. We must not be too particular. SBtr mujfcn c^ fo gcnau hid)t nc- men. He is not to be blamed for not @S tft ifjm nid)t 511 t>crbcn!cn/ bap cr doing it. c$ ntcbt tbut. The book is out of print ; it was a$ S3ud) tft ocrgrtffen ; c^ war tci publised by N. 97. serlegt. Will you please to take a plain Swollen (tc mtt ctncm ctnfacften supper with us ] TlOcnbcffcn frci un^ furltci) (obcr t)crltc(>) nefymcn ? 354 The general has been defeated -Set -Jcltfjcrr tft aufS &aupt Qcfd)(az and the army routed. gen unt> tie 2(rmec fitec t)cn cws fen gavcrfcn wcrtcn. The angel, ter <5ncjd ; the masterpiece, tci? 93cetfterftuc? ; her physiognomy, ibrc @H'fid)t$l>Utung ; the expression, tcr 2(ustrucf ; her shape, tl>rc (Skftolt ; the action, tie cmt>lung ; the look, tor 2(ntlic! ; the contentment, tie Sufrictcnfjctt ; the respect, tie efanntfd)aft gu mod)cn. I shall do all in my power to 3d) wcrte nlle^ 932ocjttcbc tf)un, um deserve your good opinion. mid) Sftrcr eivcgenfieit iviictig gu mncbcn. Allow me, ladies, to introduce to (Srtaubcn ic Uubcfrantt^ctt)." 213. Will you be my guest 1 ? I thank you ; a friend of mine has in- vited me to dinner: he has ordered my favourite dish. W T hat dish is it] It is milk-food. As for me (;ia$ mid) nnbelangt), 1 do not like milk- food : there is nothing like a good piece of roast beef or veal (:0tint^' et>er &a(b*bratt'n). What has become of your young- est brother 1 He has suffered shipwreck ingoing to America. You must give me an account of that (Cr$at)U*n @ic nut food) t>a*). Very willingly. Beingr on the open sea, a great storm arose. The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire. The crew jumped into the sea to save themselves by swimming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learnt to swim. He reflected in vain ; he found no means to save his life. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. Well (57un), what has be- come of him 1 I do not know, having not heard of him yet. But who told you all that 1 My nephew, who was there, and who saved himself. As you are talking of your nephew ()a (ic qcrabe t)Ca Sbrcm 97cffcn fprcdvn), where is he at present? He is in Italy. Is it long since you heard from him ] I have received a letter from him to-day. What does he write to you ] He writes to me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings (jubnnflfn*) him a hundred thousand crowns. Is she handsome 1 ? Handsome as an angel ; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiognomy is mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in (sen) the world, and her mouth is charming (atlcrltebft). She is neither too tall nor too short : her shape is slender ; all her actions are full of grace, and her manners very engaging. Her look inspires respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit (Ccr flSerftanD) ; she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings ravishingly. My nephew finds in her but one defect (t>cr -JcbU'r). And what is that defect] She is affected (inacbt 2(nfprudx)' There is nothing perfect in the world. How happy you are ('JBte flliicHid) ftnt) vtc) ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine house, and all you wish (for). Not all, my friend. What do you desire more ] Contentment ; for you know that he only is happy who is contented. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 356 HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. fjnnbert unb brUte Action. GENERAL REMARKS ON GERMAN CONSTRUCTION. The fundamental principle of German construction is this : the word which, after the subject, expresses the principal idea, is always placed after those words which only express accessory ideas. It has the advan- tage of attracting and of keeping up and increasing the attention to the end of the phrase. The word which least defines the subject is placed at the beginning of the sentence, then come those words which define it in a higher degree, so that the word which most determines the meaning of the phrase is at the end. According to this we place the words in the follow- ing order: 1st, The adverb of negation tticfyt, when it relates to the verb of the subject. Ex. Sctn SSatcr fccantttwtct 1 ntcinen S3rtef ntcfyt, his father does not answer my letter. 2d, The other adverbs relating to the verb of the 1 2 subject. Ex. @ie fcfyretfceit 3^en SSrief wcfyt gut, you do not write your letter well. 3d, The preposition with the case it governs, or in its stead the adverbs of place : ba, fyter, and their com- pounds : bafyer, bafyin, as well as the demonstrative ad- verbs compounded of ba and fyter, as : bamit, batten, 1 fyiertwt, barauf, baruber, &c. Ex. @r antwortete ittdjt 2 3 fyoflirf) aitf meuteit SSrtef, he did not answer my letter 1 2 3 politely. @r cuttrcortete nicfyt fcfynctf bavauf, he did not answer it quickly. Ofrs. When the verb of the subject has several ca- ses with their prepositions, that which defines it the most exactly follows all the others, the determination of time always preceding that of place. Ex. r trat 357 roegen feiner Unfdjirfb nrit froljlidjem @5ej7d)te Dor ba3 eridjt (which defines most exactly), on account of his inno- cence he appeared before his judges with a joyful countenance. er efhtyttofe blteban btefem age (time), auf ber fd)onften gutr (place), bet alter gdjonljeit ber ret'jcn* ben 5Ratur (place) bennod) efyne alle Sntpjtnbung (which de- fines most exactly), the insensible man, remained on that day without the least emotion, though in the most beautiful field and surrounded by all the beauty of charming nature. 1 4th, The predicate of the subject. Ex. 3d) &W nkf)t 2 3 4 intnter mit fetner Sfattoort jufrtcben, I am not always satisfied with his answer. 5th, The separable particles of compound verbs, as well as all those words which are considered as separ- able particles, inasmuch as they complete the sense of the verb (Obs. A, Lesson LXVIL), as: au$tt)enbig lernen, to learn by heart; in 3(d)t nefymen*, to take care ; ju 9D?tttag ejfen*, to dine, &c. Ex. SOBannn gtng 123 5 er nid)t ofter mit 3I)nnt an^ ? why did he not go out with you oftener ? 6th, The verb in the infinitive. Ex. & fann Sfyltcn 1223 6 nid)t tmmer fdjneK auf 3fyven S3rfef anttnorten, he cannot always answer your letter quickly. 7th, The past participle or the infinitive, when they form with the auxiliary a compound tense of the verb. 1223 7 Ex. @r fyat mir ntd)t tmmer fyoflid) baranf geanm>ortet, he has not always answered it politely. & nnrb S'jnen 1223 7 ntd)t tmmer fo fyofltd) anf 3f)ren 93rtef antworten. %* These remarks apply to the natural order of ideas; but the German language is so much subject to inversions, that we must sometimes deviate from them, according to the stress which we wish to put on cer- tain words, or the strength and importance we wish to give them in the sentence. See the following 358 % RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX OR CONSTRUCTION. 1st, When the adjective which precedes the noun is accompanied by some words that relate to, or define it, they are placed immediately before it. Ex. ne gegen 3^bermann t)ofltd)e Sran, a woman polite towards everybody. 3fyt @ie fyerjlid) ltebenbe$ $inb, your child that loves you from all his heart. (Lesson XCIII.) 2d, Personal pronouns, when not in the nomina- tive, as well as reflexive pronouns (Lesson LXX.) are placed after the verb. Ex. 3d) Itebe td), I love thee. & Itebt mid), he loves me. 3d) nwnfcfye 3t)nen einen gnten 5Korgen, I wish you a good morning. S0?eine d)tt>efler befutbet (Td) tt>ol)(, my sister is well. Obs. A. When the accusative is a personal pro- noun, it precedes the dative, if not, it follows it. Ex. eben @ie me in em 83rnber ba3 83 nd)? do you give the book to my brother ? 3d) gebe e $ i fy m, I do give it to him. 9DJad)en ie 3fyrer gran emaljlinn metne @mpfel)(ung, present my compliments to your lady. 3d) gab etf bem SSater, I gave it to the father. (Lesson XXVIII.) But if we wish to put a particular stress on the dative, we must put it after the accusative. Ex. (Sr er$cif)(te bie ganje efdjirfjte feiner Srau, he told his wife the whole history. Here the whole strength of the sentence falls on the words feiner $ran* O&s. B. When the case of the verb is a genitive, it is always preceded by the accusative, whether a per- sonal pronoun or not. Ex. 3d) t>erjTd)ere e meiner ;>od)ad)timg, I assure you of my esteem. SERan fyat ben efangenen be 23erbred)en3 itbentnefen, the prisoner has been convicted of the crime. (Lesson LXIV.) 3d, The infinitive and past participle are always preceded by their cases, or in other words, the infini- tive and past participle always stand at the end of the sentence. Ex. 3d) tt>erbe morgen anf$ ?anb gefyen, I shall go into the country to-morrow. & i\i gefiern bal)in ge* gangen, he went thither yesterday. 3d) rcerbe 3ftnen ba3 S3nd) geben, I shall give you the book. & tjat e$ mir ge^ fagt, he has told it to me. (Lessons XXIV. and XLI1.) 359 Obs. A. When two or several infinitives, two past participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- pend on each other, the first in English becomes the 1 2 last in German. Ex. @ic fcmtett il)tt fpredjen fyoren, you 21 12 may hear him speak ; id) tterbe fycitte nid)t fpajieren gefyett 3 321 f onnett, I shall not be able to go a walking to-day ; feilt 12 2*1 an3 iff fcerfauft tocrben, his house has been sold. (Lesson LXXI.) Obs. B. The two infinitives or participles, &c., not depending on each other, follow the English construc- 1 2 tion. Ex. 9Q?cm ntu ett liebett unb fcereljren, we must 1 2 love and honour God ; fte tt>irb geliebt unb gelobr, she is 1 2 loved and praised. (Lesson LXXI.) 4th, The verb of the subject (in compound tenses the auxiliary) is removed to the end when the phrase begins, (a) with a conjunction, as : a(, ba, ob, ba$, tt>etf, tt>entt, a &c. (b) with a relative pronoun, as : ber, toeldjer, tt>er r meaning he who, and ttx*3, that which ; (c) after the relative adverb, VDO, and all the prepositions combined with it, as : tt>oburdf>, toontit, toofcon, &c. Ex. 2lf^ id) (Te jam erflen 5>?ate faf), when I saw her for the first time. 2tf) ttnmfcfjte, bag er mitgutge, I wish he would go with us. @r liebt Sic niefjt, n>ei( @ie il)n bcletbigt J)a^ ben, he does not love you, because you have offended him. SBarten gie, bi id) mein e(b befcmme, wait till I receive my money. SBBentt id) e^ gemugt hatte, had I known that. ?efen te ba^ SSud), n)e(d)e^ id) 3()iien gelie^ fyen I)abc? do you read the book w r hich I have lent you ? SBifen ^ic nidjr, n>o er gen>efen iff ? do you not know where he has been ? Gormen Sie mtr tttd)t fctgen, tt>a au^ i{)tn gen>orben iff ? can you not tell me what For conjunctions which do not remove the. verb to the end of the phrase, see Lesson LXI. 360 has become of him ? Sag ijl eg efcen, toobnrrf) cr einen fo grogen djaben erlitten fyat, n>ofcon er jTcfy fd)tt>erlid) Dieter erfyolen ttnrb, it is precisely that, by which he has sus- tained such a loss, as he will find it difficult to recover from. (Lesson XL VII ) Obs. A. When a proposition in which the verb is required at the end of the sentence, contains one of the auxiliaries fein and tt>erben, or one of the verbs biirfen, fonnen, lafien, miififen, foKen, woffen, joined to an infinitive, those take their place immediately after the infinitive. Ex. 28enn @te bag ^)ferb faufen Gotten, if you wish to buy the horse. (Lesson LXIX.) But when not governed by a conjunctive word, they stand before the infinitive and its case. Ex. SOBotten @ie bag ^ferb faufen ? Do you wish to buy the horse ? Obs. B. Incidental or explanatory propositions are placed immediately after the word which they define, or at the end of the principal proposition. Ex. @g ifl fefyroer, einen $einb, todcfyer toacfyfam ijl, ju itberfattert, or : eg ifl fd)tt>er r einen ^etnb ju uberfatten, n)elc^er tt)ad)fam ijl* (Lesson LX.) Obs. C. When there are at the end of a sentence two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive and a past participle, the verb which the conjunction requires at the end, may stand either before or after them. Ex. 9Bcnn @ie S^re Section werben (liibtrt fyafcen, or: (lubtrt t)aben werbcn, fo n>erbe id) 3l)nen fagen, n>ag gie git tl)ltn l)aben, when you have studied your lesson, I shall tell you what you have to do. (Lesson LXXXII.) ON THE TRANSPOSITION OF THE SUBJECT AFTER ITS VERB. 5th, Whenever a sentence begins with any other word than the subject or nominative, its order is in- verted, and in all inversions the subject stands after the verb in simple, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses (Lesson LVIIL). From this rule must be ex- cepted conjunctive words which serve to unite senten- ces. They leave the subject in its place and remove the verb to the end of the sentence (Lesson XL VII. and Rule 4th above). 361 A German sentence may begin with an adverb, a preposition and its case, a case, an adjective, a parti- ciple or an infinitive. Ex. ente g e b c i rf) mcttf au, I do not go out to-day ; morgeit n> e r b e -id) ie befnd)en, to-morrow I shall come to see you ; im Slufauge fd)uf ott fiiintntet unb (Srbe, in the beginning God made heaven and earth. S3 o n f e i n e n $ i n b c r it f p r a d) e r, he spoke of his children. Set ^sbneit babe id) ntcht S3 ltd) fcergeffett, I forgot my book at your house. Dnt 5Kettfd)en madjt fein SEBifle grog unb ftein (Sniffer), his will makes a man great and little. Dfeid) ift cr nid)t, aber gefebrt, he is not rich, but learned, eitebt nrirb er md)t, aber gefitrd)tet, he is not loved, but feared. (Sdjabctt faint Seber, abcr niUscn fann itur bcr 2Geife unb utc, any man can do injury, but the wise and good only can be use- ful. (Lesson LVIII.) 6th, The subject is placed after the verb in an in- version of propositions, that is, when that which ought to stand first, is placed after, and forms, as it were, the complement of the other. In other words : the subject is placed after its verb in the second member of a compound phrase (Lesson LXXVIL). An inver- sion of propositions takes place, when the first propo- sition begins with a conjunction. Ex. af5 er ie (te&r, tt> e t $ td) (for: id) twig, bap er Ste liebt), I know that he loves you. 3e fletgiger ein djiUer ift, befto fdntellere gertfdjrt'tte nf a d) t e r, the more studious a pupil is, the more progress he makes. Sffienit id) reid) Ware, fo t) a 1 1 e t d) gteuttbe, I should have friends, if I were rich. 9?ad)* bem unr bte @tabt t)er[ajTett batten, jog b e r g e i n b iit btcfefbe ein, when we had left the town, the enemy en- tered it (Lesson LXXXL). Obs. In transposing the phrase there is no inversion of propositions. Ex. er $einb 30*} in bte gtabt ein, ttad)bem tt>tr biefelbe Dertaflfen fatten, the enemy entered the town, after we had left it (Lesson LXXVIL). 7th, The subject also follows its verb, when in an inversion of propositions, the conjunction lt> e n n is left out in the first. Ex. 3(1 bag SBetter flflnfttg (for: toenn baS Setter giinftig tfi), fo n?erbe id) biefe &eife "in ad)t 16 362 antreten, if the weather is favourable I shall set out in a week (Lesson LXXXL). The same is the case with the conjunction ob, whether. Ex. 3d) n>eig iticfyt, f d) I a f e ober tt> a d) e i d> (for: ob id) fefyfafe ober tt>ad)e), I do not know whether I am asleep or awake ; and all compound conjunctions, such as : obgfeid), obfdjon, tt>enn gfeirf), tt>enn fdjon, though. Ex. S3in i d) gfctrf) (fdjon) ntcfjt reid) (for : ob or n>emt id} g(eid) nid)t refd) bin), fo bin id) bod) jnfrieben, though I am not rich, I am nevertheless contented. Obs. Adverbs of comparison, such as : ttn'e, as ; gleid)* ftne, the same as ; nid)t niir fonbent and), not only but also, &c., make the nominative of the second member go after the verb, but not that of the first (this ob- servation is included in Rule 6. above). Ex. 3Bie (or gleid)tt>ie) bcttf Sfteer fcom SBinbe (eioegt tt>irb, alfo tt> i r b c t n SOi a n n &on fetnen ?ctbenfd)aften bcwegt, as the sea is agitated by the winds, so a man is agitated by his passions. 8th, Some conjunctions, when beginning a sentence, make the nominative go after its verb, as : bod), how- ever ; bennod), nevertheless ; gtetctylttofrf, notwithstand- ing ; beflfen wngecufyet, for all that ; trirfjtg befb roemgetv nevertheless ; l)uigegett, im egetttfyett, on the contrary. (This rule is included in Rule 5.) Ex. effen uttgead)* tet f) a 6 e n @ t e ntcmaK ntetnen Sffiunfd) erfutten rotten, for all that you were never willing to accomplish my desire ; bod) f d) r i e b e r, cr femtte wcfyt Fouttneif, however he wrote that he could not come. 9th, The subject follows its verb when the phrase is interrogative or ejaculatory. Ex. Semen Sfyre JQerren 33 r fiber beutfd)? do your brothers learn German ? SBte gfftcf (id) f i n b t e ! or $8 ie f i n b t e fo glitdflid) ! how happy you are ! (Lesson XXXII. and LXXXVIII.) Obs. When the subject is a personal or an interro- gative pronoun, the construction of the interrogative sentence is the same as in English. Ex. 3ft ?r jtt Saufe ? is he at home ? inb Sfyte grdulein dweftern in bent arten ? are your sisters in the garden ? 22er ift ba ? who is there ? SEBaS f)aben @ie getban ? what 363 have you done ? 2Se(d)er $nabe ()at biefe 33nd)er gefanft, nnb tt>em hat er (Te fccrcbrt ? which boy has bought those books, and to whom has he given them ? 3I?a3 fitr ei* nen SOBageu fyaben Sie gefauft ? what carriage have you bought ? 10th, The subject not only stands after the verb, but also after all the words relating to it, when the sen- tence begins with the indefinite pronoun e3* Ex. @$ lebrt im$ bte Srfafyrnng, experience teaches us. @3 ill nid)t atte age eine fo gute elegenf)eit, there is not every day such good opportunity. llth, In inversions where the subject stands after its verb, it may take its place either after or before the other cases, if they are personal pronouns, and if the subject is a substantive. Ex. petite gibt mem fefyrer mir ein Sad), or fyentegibt mir mein ?ebrer cut SSnd), to-day my master will give me a book. ejTern gab mem ?ef}* rer e$ mir, or geftern gab e3 mtr mein ?el)rcr, my master gave it to me yesterday. )b er gfeirf) gan j enfjlettt n)ar, erfannte il)n bod) fein (Eol)n, or erfannte fein @ol)it i()it bed), though he was quite disfigured, nevertheless his son recognized him. 12th, But if the subject is likewise a personal pro- noun, or if the other cases are substantives, it must precede. Ex. eftern gab er e mir (not e3 mir er), yes- terday he gave it to me. >af)er liebt ber Sd)it(er ben ef)# rer (not liebt ben Cefyrer ber d)it(er), therefore the pupil loves his master. 2)ejfen nngead)tet erfannte ber @ol)n ben 3Sater (not ben Sater ber @of)n), nevertheless the son re- cognised his father. EXERCISES. 244. A stranger having sold some false jewels (ber faffcftc (Stuljlctn) to a Roman empress (tic rourifdx Jtatfcrinn), she asked (ferfccrn Den) her husband (to make) a signal example (of him) (Me cutffallcnbe (55enuc|tf)iU!n^). The emperor, a most excellent and clement prince (t)cr ein fcftr gncitigcr unb nutber Jurft war), finding it impossible to pacify (Oerulu^en) her, condemned the jeweller to be thrown to the wild beasts ($11:11 .ftanwfe nut ben ivUben SI)tercn). The empress re- solved to be present (Beufle) with her whole court (ber Jbcfjlaat) at the punishment of the unfortunate man (fane? Scbi'6). As he was led into the arena (cuf ben ^vampfpfafe ivfu!:vt luurbe), he expected to die (fid) auf ben Scb gcfapt raadjen) ; but instead (jlatt governs the 364 genitive) of a wild beast a lamb (fcciS Somni) came up to him and caressed him (rucld)C$ ifyn (tcbfefctc). The empress, furious (au^crft aufgebrad)t) at the deception (fid) gum 95cftcn gcbatten gu fcljen), com- plained bitterly of it (fid) bitter teprocgcn bcfjagcn) to (bet) the em- peror. He answered : " I punished the criminal (t>er 83erbred)cr) according (nad)) to the law of retaliation (fcas 808tctcrt>crgcltunQsrcd)t). He deceived (bctrifjjcn*) you, and he has been deceived in his turn (tvietcr)." 245. The bakers of Lyons, having- gone to Mr. Dugas (gn Scmantcm Common*), the provost (tcr tcit)trtd)tcr), to ask his permission (3e- wanten urn (Srtaubntfi bitten*) to raise the price of bread (mit fccm S3rete cwfgufdjtoQen), he answered that he would take their petition into consideration (cr rootle ten egenjlant ifjrer Mtte untcrfudjen). As they took leave (ivcggcfycn*), they contrived to slip (Itepcn fie un bemcrft) a purse containing (mit) two hundred Louis d'ors (ter out$s for) on the table. When they returned, in the full conviction (nid)t gruetfeln) that the purse had been a powerful advocate in their favour (rwtffam fur cine cid)C fprcd)cn*), the provost said to them : 4i Gen- tlemen, I have weighed (abtua'cjcn) your reasons (tec runt) in the scale of justice (tie S3Jagfd)atc tcr erccfytigfctt), and I have found them wanting (ntd)t OlIrDtd)ttp). I have not thought it expedient (3d) f)telt md)t bafur) by a fictitious raising of price (unter ctncr linens cjriintctcn Sfyeurunq) to make the public (bat 9?ub(thim) suffer : I have, however (ubrt^en?), distributed (ocrtf)Ct(cn) your money to (\\ns ter with accus.) the two hospitals of the town, for I concluded (id) gfciubtc) you could not intend it for any other purpose (l>cr ebrauch). Meanwhile (3d) fycibe ctngefefjen) as you. are able to give such alms (folcfye 2ftmcfen ^u gebcn), it is evident you are no losers (rcvlicrcn*) by your trade (tas ewerbe)-" 246. THE PHYSICIAN TAKEN IN (bl'tVOgeil). A physician of (in) Dublin, who was rather old (rocfdxr fd)cn gtctnttd) bejaljrt ruar), but who was very rich and in extensive prac- tice (in Qrofjcm JKufe ftcfjen*), went one day to receive a considerable (jtcmiid) grc9) sum of money in bank notes and in gold. As he was returning home with (bclatvn mit) this sum, he was stopped (anfjaU ten*) by a man who appeared out of breath (aujj'cr ?Ctf)euO? owing to the speed with which he had run (roeil er gu fd)netl gefanfen ivar). This man asked him (lint ter iljn bat) to come to see his wife, whom a violent diarrhoea retained in bed dangerously ill (an einem F)eftt v qen Rdiffe qcfahrCid) franf" barnicbcr ttec\cn*) ; he added that it was urgent she should have immediate advice (t>ojj fd)(euntae ."pitfe fehr nothiuenttg iva're), and at the same time promised the physican his guinea fee (cine uincc ftir ctnen S3cfud)). The physician, who was very avaricious (cjetjtg), was pleased at the prospect of gaining his guinea (ei(te fie gii tvrttenen) ; he direc- 365 ted (facjcn gu) the man to lead the way (3cmanbem ben SOSeo, gctgcn), and promised to follow. He was led to a house situated (ftefyen*) in a remote (entleo,en) street, and made to ascend to the third story (in ba$ brttte (Sterfrocrf), where he was admitted into a room, the door of which was immediately (o(fobalb) locked (&erfd)fu*9cn*). The g-uide (Dcr Jaibrer) then presenting (l>arrcid)en*) a pistol with one hand, and with the other an empty (leer) purse, which was open, spoke as follows (bterauf rebete ber gubrer ben cvfcfyr ecfenen TCrjt fohjcnbcriiKiQcn an, inbcm, &c.). 44 Here is my wife : yesterday she was seized with a violent diarrhoea (an ctncm fyefttgen ffiaucrjffuffc letbcn*), which has reduced her to the state (in ben Suftanb flerfefeen) in which you (now) see her ; you are one of our most eminent (gcfd)tc!t) physicians, and I know you are better able than any one to cure her. I am besides (tiberbtctf) aware that you possess the best remedy for her; haste then to employ (anruenben) it, unless you prefer swallowing (KM? fcb(ucfen) the two leaden pills (Me $)iUe) contained in this instru- ment." The doctor made a horrible face (ba$ obfcJ)Cultd)C @cftcf)t), but obeyed. He had several bank notes and a hundred and twen- ty-five guineas rolled up (in SKellen) ; he placed the latter (Me lt$s tern) into the purse, as he had been desired (gebulMcj), hoping thus to save his bank notes. But the thief (t)er ouncr) was up to this, and was perfectly aware of his having them in his pocket (roupte, bojj cr fie in ber Sa- fd)C battc). "Wait," said he, "it would not be fair (biUicj) that you should have performed (r>ertid)ten) so miraculous a cure (tie fiur) without remuneration (t)ergeOen6) ; I promised you a guinea for your visit, I am a man of honour (bee 9ftann flon ftre), and here it is ; but I know that you carry about your person (bet fief) fjaben) several little recipes (bag SReccpt, plur. c) most efficacious (fe()r rotrffam) as preventives against the return (Me Mclfefyr) of the disorder (t>a? Uebel) you have just removed (fyeilen) ; you must be so kind as to leave them with me." The bank-notes immediately took the same road as the guineas had done. The thief, then keeping his pistol concealed "beneath his cloak (ber Mantel), ac- companied the doctor into the street ((jicrnuf fiifyfte fcct aimer, in^ bem ivtcbcr girlie!) requesting him to make no noise. He stopped him (frel)en taffen*) at the corner (an ber (Sdfc) of a street, and for- bidding (t>erbieten*) him to follow, suddenly (plofjttcl)) disappeared, to seek, in a distant part of the town (bag cntlecjcne another habitation (tie 247. DIALOGUE (bte Unterretung) BETWEEN A FATHER AND MOTHER ON THE HAPPINESS OF THEIR CHILDREN. Countess. Forgive me for having disturbed (roedfen (a (Ten*) you so early ; but I wanted to speak to you on matters of im- portance. 366 Count. You alarm (beunrufytcjen) me .... I see that you have been crying; what has happened, my dear (tfyeuer)? Countess. I own I am a little agitated (iinriitjtq) ; but I have nothing unpleasant (UnangenefymeS) to communicate (mtttfyetlen) ; on the contrary. Count. From your emotion (bte 53ett5ec}ung), I should guess Emily to be the cause of it (bag on bte 9?ebe tft). Countess. It is true .... My sister came this morning with a proposal (etne etratfy sorfcfytaaen*) for her. Count. Well? Countess. The gentleman who asks her (in marriage) is en- dowed with (befigen*) all the advantages (ber $er$ug) of birth (bte eburt) and fortune (ba (itcf). His merit is acknowl- edged (cmerf enncn) by all. He is thirty ; his person agreeable ; he loves Emily, and even refuses the fortune (bte 3lii3fteuer) which we should give her, stating his affection to be secured by her only (serfoncjt nut fie). Count. But how comes it that you are not overjoyed at this (auger ftd) or Jreube fetn*)? I am very anxious (v>or 23e is well informed (unterrtd)tet), and perfectly devoid of affectation (unaffecttrt). He is a passion- ate admirer of talent (etn en let'benfcfyaftltcfyen efcfymacf fur la* lente fy<*bcn*) ; in short (mtt etnem 2Botte) he possesses every quality (bte (Stojenfcfyaft) that can answer my daughter's happi- ness (gliicf(td) madjen). How can I reject him (fie tfym 367 Surely, my love (meut ^reunb), you do not think me so selfish (etneS fold) en got3miiS fdfyto, Bitten*). Count (taking her hand) (fie bet bev >anb fafifenb). But can I consent to a sacrifice (bav Opfer) that would make you for ever (cutf winter) unhappy ? Besides (UeberbteS) I never could bring myself to part from Emily. She is my daughter ; more than that even, her amiable disposition is your work. In Emi- ly I find your sense (ber etft) and your virtues. No, I cannot part (fid) trennen) from her. I am looking forward with so much delight (fid) etne fo fitge 23orflel(ung oon bent 2Sercjnttgen mad)en) to her entrance into the world (fie in bte Belt etncjefufyrt 311 fe* fyen) ! I am in much hopes of her shining in it (tfyreS giiten (r* folgS barm 311 gemegen). How gratifying (n>te teener) to me will be the praise (ba3 Sob) bestowed (ertfyetlen) on her ! for I am convinced (ba td) ba3 SBennigtfetn fyabe), that to your care of her (bte ^orgfa(t) alone, my love, she will be indebted for whatever success she may obtain. After having devoted (n)tb^ men) the best years of your life to her education, can you now give her up, and see her torn from (entretgen* with dative) your arms and her country ; can you consent thus to lose in one mo- ment the fruit of (son) fifteen years of anxiety ($Rut)e imb Sfrfcett) ? Countess. I have laboured for her happiness, and (have) not (sought) to educate (brtmjen*) a victim to my own vanity. I beseech you, consider (bebenfen*) also the great and unhoped for advantages of the match (bte $}erbtnbuttg) now in agitation (roeldje man unS anbtetet). Think of the smallness (bte b JOtttteU rotigt'gfet't) of her fortune. Consider the excellence and amiable disposition, the high birth and immense (unermegltd)) fortune of her future husband ! It is true, I shall be separated from Emily, but she will never forget me . . . this thought will be my consolation, and without fear for her future life (iiber ba (d)tcffal SmtlienS bemfytgt), I shall be able to bear any other triaJ (alleS ertragen). Count. But will Emily herself be able to bring herself to leave you ? Countess. She has always been accustomed to obey the dic- tates of reason (bte QSermtttft sermao, atteS iiber fie). I am wil- ling to believe this will cost her some effort (bte ^(nftrengung nnrb t'br fd)wer fatten) ; but if she does not dislike Qemanbem mtgfatten*) the temper and person of Mr. de Moncalde, I can answer (auf fid) nefymen*) for her compliance (fie 311 betuecjen), however painful (fcfyroterig) the sacrifice (ju bt'efem Opfer). In short I entreat (befd)tt?ore) you to entrust entirely to (fid) o,att3 auf) me the care (meo,en ber orge) of her happiness. 368 Count. Well (2Bofylcm), since you wish it, I will give my consent. You have indeed, my dear, earned (erwerben*) for yourself a right (fcaS S^ed)!) to dispose of your daughter (fiber tfyr @d)tcffa( 511 entfdjetfoen), which I will not dispute (jtretttg mad)ett). I know you will sacrifice (aufopfern) yourself for the sake of one so dear to you (fur fctefen fo tfyeuern egenftanb). I fore- see OoorauSfetyen*) that I shall not have your fortitude (fcer 9)iiitt)) y but I admire, and can no longer withstand (mtberftefyen*) (your argument). Still (3 efcodj) think, what sorrow (imemel Summer) you are preparing for yourself (ft d) beretten) ; how shall I my- self support your grief and my own, your tears and those of Emily? Countess. Do not fear (befutcfyten) that I should cloud (fcciin* rubigen) your life by useless (iiberflufttg) repinings (tie Stage). How could I give myself up to sorrow when my greatest con- solation will be the hope of alleviating (mtlfcevn) your grief? Count. Ah, you alone are every thing to me ! You know it well .... friendship, admiration, and gratitude are the ties (tie SBanfcc, plur.) that bind (feffe(n) me to you. The influence (Die >errfd)cift) you have acquired (erlangett) over my mind (iiber mid)) is so thoroughly justified (recfytfertigen) by your vir- tues, that far from denying (serlaiignen), I glory in it (fetnett Sftitbm foart'n fecn, fte anjuerfennen). It is to you I owe every thing : my reason, my sentiments (ba efiif)l) niy principles (^er runt>fa^) and my happiness. In you I find the most ami- able as well as the most indulgent (nacfyftcfytto,) of friends, the wisest (roet'fc) and most useful adviser (bte milMtcfyfte JRatfcgebe* rinii). Be then the arbiter of my children's destiny (fcte &d)ieb& rtdbtertnn i'tber ba^ @d)icffal) as you are that of my own. But at any rate (memgftenS) let us attempt (atleS oerfud)cn) to per- suade the Count of Moncalde to settle (ftd) ntebeirldffett) in France. ... He seemed so srruck (gerufert) by your affection (fcte &totlid)ttifl for Emily, and to feel for you such sincere attachment (9(ni)dnglt'ct}fett) that I cannot yet believe his inten- tion (tie 9(bftd)t) to be to separate you from your child. I can- not think his decision (fcer Sntfcfylug) unalterable (unoercinbers ltd)). Countess. No, do not let us flatter ourselves. He is a firm and decided character (fern {ft feft unfc entfcfyfeffen). He has positively (bcfh'mmt) told my sister that it would be vain to at- tempt to exact from him a promise (tl)m h'e 33e t'ncumg pr$ii* fcfyretben) of residing in France. His resolution is irrevocably (umtnfcemifhd)) taken to return to Portugal. Count. You grieve (betvuben) me .... But I repeat to 369 you, the fate of Emily is in your hands. Whatever it may cost me, you shall be absolute mistress (iDt'e iimimfcfyrcmfte ebt'ete* rinn) of it. I shall consent to whatever you decide on (befdjlte* gen*). Do you intend speaking to-day (nod) fyeiite) (on the subject) to Emily ? Countess. After dinner .... But it is late ; it is time to dress .... I have not yet seen my sons to-day ; let us go and see them. Count. I wanted to consult (urn 3?atfy fragcn) you on (meg en) something connected with (cmgefeen*) them. I am dissatisfied with their tutor (bet efmetfler). Another has been proposed ($orfd)(ac}en*) me, I should wish you to speak to him ; I am told he speaks English perfectly ; I cannot judge myself of the latter. Countess. I will tell you if he really understands it well . . Count. How ? . . . But you have never learnt English . . Countess. I beg your pardon. I have been studying it for the last year, to be able to teach Henrietta, who had asked me to give her Oemanfcen um etroaS erfiicfyen) an English master. In general Qm )iird)fd)mtt) masters teach so carelessly (mttfo meler Dfocfylaffigfeit) that, however excellent they may be> two years of their lessons (fcer Untemcfyt) are not worth three months (fca h'erte(jaf)r) of those (oon tern) given by a mother. Count. What a (wonderful) woman you are ! . . . . Thus till your children's education is completed, you will spend part of your life with masters. Half of it (T)te erne ^)a(fte) you devote (anwenften) to study (fid) 311 iintemd)ten), and the other half in teaching what you have learnt .... Yet in spite of such nu- merous occupations, whilst you thus multiply (ttennelfdlttcjen) your duties, you spare time to devote (twbmen) to your friends and to the world (fct'e efeflfcfyaft). How do you manage (e3 cmfancjen) ? Countess. It is always possible to find time for the fulfilment of duties that are pleasing to us (bte un3 tfyeuer ftnb). Count. You always surprise me (beftdnbtg m Grflaunen fe* en), I own .... Ah ! if your children do not make you hap- py, what mother could ever expect from hers a reward of her affection ! . . . . And our dear Emily may be for ever lost to you ! . . . I cannot bear (ertragen*) the thought of it ! Shall you see your sister again to-day ? Shall you give her your an- swer for the Count of Moncalde ? Countess. He requested a prompt decision (cine fdjneffe nnb befh'mmte) .... I shall accordingly give (ertt)et(en) him the answer, since you allow it, as soon as I have questioned Emily on the subject (mt'(ten eftnmmcjen priifen). 16* 370 Count. I am certain, Emily will refuse (cwSfcfyfogen*) him. Countess. I think as you do, but it is not enough (fytnret cfyenb fetn*) that she has no aversion (abgenetgt fetn*) to the Count of Moncalde, and that she feels (fyegen) for him the esteem he so justly deserves ..... Count. Well, I see, we must submit (fief) entfcfyltegen*) to this sacrifice (fcte 5(ufopfenmcj) .... Speak to your daughter ..... Speak to her alone, I should never have courage to support (cwSMten*) sucn an interview (tie Unterrehmg) . . . I feel I should only spoil all your work. 248. DIALOGUE. EMILY. AGATHA. Agatha. I was looking for you .... But, dear Emily, what is the matter? Emily. Have you seen mamma (bte Gutter) ? Agatha. No, she is gone out ; she is gone to my aunt's. Emily. And my father ? Agatha. He has shut himself up (fid) etnfdfylteisen*) in his study (ba$ Sabtnett) .... But surely, Emily, they are think- ing of your marriage (bte 2*er{)etratl)nng) ; I guess (erratfyen*) as much (e3) from your agitation (an Detner Stenwrruncj). Emily. Ah; dearest sister, you little dream (me ttnrflt )u ben Wamen beSjenujen erratfyen) who is my intended (tern man mid) bejltmmt) ! . . . . Agatha, dearest Agatha, how much 1 pity you, if you love me as well as I love you ! Agatha. * Good heavens (erecfytet |)tmmel) ! Explain (Sr Heir en) yourself more clearly (bentltcfy). Emily. I am desired ($ftcm beftefylt mfr) to marry the Count of Moncalde, and he is to take (mtt fid) fiifyren) me to Portugal. Agatha. And you intend to obey ? . . . . Could you leave us ? .... Is it possible my mother even should consent ? Emily. Alas ! (Setter) dear Agatha, it is but too true. Agatha. No, I never can believe it .... it is impossible you ever can ()it barfft mcfyt) obey. Emily. What are you saying ? Do you think I should oppose my mother's wishes (fcmn tcfy metner Sautter Agatha. But do you think she herself will ever consent to such a separation ? Emily. She only considers (in SSetracfytung atefyen*) what 371 she calls my interest (ber QSortfyetO ; she entirely forgets her- self. Alas ! she also forgets that I could enjoy (geniejjen*) no happiness she did not witness (befifen fie mcfyt 3eucje ware) ! Agatha. Dear sister, refuse your consent (nidjt etnttnUtcjen) ! Emily. I have given my word. Agatha. Retract (juriufnefymen*) it ... out of affection to my mother herself; your unfortunate obedience (ber efyo would be Oorbevetten) a constant source of regret (bte D?eue) to us all. Emily. Agatha, you do not know my mother's fortitude. Her sensibility (3()r gefiifyfootfeS er$), though mastered (gelei* tet) by her superior mind (bte iiberlecjene 2}ernunft), can, it is true, sometimes make her suffer, but will never be strong enough to betray her even into showing a momentary weak- ness (nie roirb e$ etnen ^higenbftcf cfyrocicfye in ifyr ^erwotbrtn^ gen) .... She is incapable (imfdfytg) of ever regretting (be veu en) she has fulfilled a duty. Agatha. Emily ! dearest sister, if you go, I shall not sur- vive (etn>a$ iiberleben) such a misfortune ! Emily. Ah, if you love me, conceal (from) me the excess (ba$ ttebermag) of your grief. It can only unfit me for the task I have to perform (welcfyer nut 511 fefyr ba$u geeignet ifl, mid) nod) fdjroa'cber 311 macfyen). Do not further rend (nid)t D(lenb^ gerrei^en*) a heart already torn by the conflict of (ba6 fdjon fo 9ett)ei(t if! $tt)ifc^en) duty, affection and reason. Agatha. Do not expect me to confirm (Did) 511 befefHcjett in) this cruel resolution. I can only weep and lament my own hard fate. Emily. I hear some one .... Dear Agatha, let us dry our eyes. 249. ON THE LIABILITY TO ERROR (2Bie fefyr man ftd) irten fann) OF OUR JUDGMENTS (in feinem ilrtfyeile), OR THE INJURY (ber cfyaben) REPAID (erfegen). An English stage-coach (bte Ccmbfiitfcfye), full of travellers (ber 3^eifenbe), was proceeding (fafyren*) to York. Conversa- tion fell on (9TRcm fprad) met son) the highwaymen and robbers that infested (bie man 5fter3 auf antreffe) those parts (ber SSecj), and on the way of concealing one's money. Each person had his secret, but no one thought (feinem f^et e ein) of telling it (offenbaren). One young lady (ba $?cibd)en) only of eighteen, was less prudent than the rest (nidfyt fo Hug few*). 372 Imagining, no doubt, (Cfyne 3roetfel in ber SWetmmcj) that she was thereby giving a proof (ber 3eroet$) of her cleverness (ber }erjlanb), she said with great self-satisfaction (gcm$ offen*' $er$*g) that she had a draft (ber 2Bed)felbrtef) for two hundred pounds, which was (beftefyen*) her whole fortune, but that the thieves would be very clever (ItfttoJ if they thought of seeking for (menn fte fucfyen fottten) this booty (ber 9?aub) in her shoe, or rather (ja fogar) under the sole of her foot ; to find it they would be obliged to (e3 mftfjte tfynen nur etnfaften) rob her of stockings. The coach was soon after (balb barcutf) stopped (anfyalten*) by a gang of thieves (bte 9?anberbanbe), who called upon (cuif> forbern) the affrighted and trembling travellers to deliver up (I) era, eb en*) their money. They accordingly all pulled out (t)erau$tefyen*) their purses, fully aware (ftcfy sorjMlen) that resistance (ber SBtberflfoltfc) would be perfectly useless, and might prove dangerous (cber gar gefa'brltd)). The sum (thus produced) appearing too small to these gentlemen (of the road) they threatened (broken) to search (bnrd)fitd)en) all the luggage (bte Sffecten), if a hundred pounds were not immediately given them. " You will easily (letcfyt) find double that sum (ba Sopped te)," said an old gentleman from the corner of the coach (rtef ifyrteit fwTten cui3 bem ^Bagen SH) " if you examine (burd)? f ltd) en) the shoes and stockings of that lady." The advice was very well taken (cuifnefymen*), and the shoes and stockings being pulled off, the promised treasure (ber uerffmbtgte cfyalj) was discovered (jetgt ftdj). The robbers humbly (fyefltd)) thanked the lady, paid (mad) en) sundry compliments on the beauty of her foot, and without waiting for an answer, they made off with their prize, leaving the coach to proceed on its journey (wetter fafyren*). Hardly were the robbers gone, when the consterna- tion (bte S5e(!iirgiin v q) of the travellers was changed (fid) tterrcan* beln) into indignation (bte SQButfe). Words could not express (fid) mcfyt mtt Morten cuiSbriicfen (aflfeii*) the sorrow of the poor woman, nor the resentment (ber 3 Drn ) expressed by (emporen) the whole party against the betrayer (ber ^erratber). The strongest, and even the most insulting epithets of disgust CDte ung(tmpfltd)fi:en unb befc^tmpfenbjl'en 23etnamen) were lav- ished on him by all (fid) an3 alter 3)iunbe l)6ren laffen*), and many went even so far as to call him a rascal (ber S3ofett)td)t) and the accomplice of the thieves (ber ^cinbergencg). To these marks (bte 3(eiigerung) of the general indignation (be$alk cjemetnen Unnn!!en) (his conduct had excited) was added (oer* 373 btnben*) the threat (He SrofHimO of giving the informer (ber 5(rujeber) a sound beating, and of throwing him out of the window (jum $Bao,en fytnauS), and of instituting legal proceedings against him (3emanbett a,ertd)t(td) befottgett). In short (Stur$), all seemed to concur (fid) erfcfyopfen) in forming schemes (fcer Sntitnirf ) for taking exemplary vengeance on the offender (an tern traf* bar en cine auffatfenbe 9?ad)e). The latter remained perfectly unmoved (fief) cjcmj ftttt &etfta(ten*) and only remarked once in extenuation (fidb mtt ber 3teugenmq etttfd)Hlbtaen), that a man could have nothing dearer to him than himself (3eber fet fid) felbfl ber Ctebfie) ; and when the coach reached the end of its journey (ate man am Qiele ber JKetfe mar), he suddenly (unset- fefyens) disappeared (x>erfd)tt>t'nben*), before his fellow-travellers could accomplish (tnS 28erf fe$en) any one (et'ne etn$to,e) of their intended measures (bte beabficfyttcjten Sftagrecjeht) against him. As to the unfortunate young lady, it is easy to imagine (fid) sorfteflen) that she passed a sad and sleepless night (bte 9?ad)t t)6d)jl: traitrtg itnb fd)(af1ic^ siibringen*). To her joy and aston- ishment (fcaS rfiaitnen), she received the next day the follow- ing letter : " Madam, You must yesterday have hated (serabfcfyenen) as an informer the man who now sends you, besides the sum you then advanced him (*>orfd)t'egen*), an equal (g(et'd)) sum, as interest thereof (ate 3^ n f e baraitf), and a trinket (ba$ 3titt>el) of at least the same value (ber SfBertfy) for your hair (ju 3f) r ew aarfd)mncfe). I hope this will be sufficient (btnretd)en) to si- lence (mt(bern) your grief, and I will now explain (fagen) in a few words what must appear mysterious in my conduct (ben cje* fyetmen @mnb metneS 95etrao,en3). After having spent (fid) auf* fatten*) ten years in India (3nbten), where I amassed (jufam- menbnnqen*) a hundred thousand pounds, I was on my way home with letters on my bankers (ber 2Bed)felbrfef) to that amount (fi'ir bte o,an$e umme), when we were attacked (ano,e- fatten werben*) yesterday by the highwaymen. All my savings (bte retd)ltd)en Erfparniflfe) must have inevitably been sacrificed (e3 mar gefd)eften um), had the shabbiness (tie Sarg()ett) of our fellow-travellers (ber 9?etfea,efd'l)rte) exposed us to a search from (otMt ^etten) these unprincipled spoilers (ber 9(nqret'fer). Judge (ilrtt)et(en) for yourself, if the idea of returning to India thorough- ly empty handed (mtt sofltq leeren )anben), could be support- able (ertracjltd)) to me. Forgive me, if this consideration (bte 33etrad)tnng) led (ttermogen*) me to betray your confidence (ba3 3 ll traiien erratfeen*) and to sacrifice (aufopfern) a small 374 m K ^J sum, though not my own, to save my whole fortune. I am under the greatest obligation to you. I shall be happy to testify (33eroetfe geben son) my gratitude in any way in my power, and I request you to consider (recfynen) these trifles (fi'tr md)t3) as only the expressions (fcte cjertngen &id)eri) f m y readiness (burd) n^elc^e tc^ mtc^ beeifere) to serve you." SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. A SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. PARTS OF SPEECH. 1. The German language has ten parts of speech: The Article, Substantive or Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition) Conjunction, and Interjection. Of these six are declinable ; namely, the Article, the Noun, the Adjective, the Numeral, the Pronoun, and the Verb. The remaining parts of speech are indeclinable and are called PARTICLES. The declinable parts of speech have two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. To substantives, and to all the other declinable parts of speech, except the verb, belong three genders, Mas- culine, Feminine, and Neuter. 2. They have also four cases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, which in general cor- respond to those of the same name in the Classical Languages. 1st, The nominative is employed as the subject of a proposition, in answer to the question "who?" or "what?" e. g. SSct femmt? K't SSatcr, Me gutter unb t>a$ .fitnb fcmmen ; who comes 1 the father, the mother and the child are coming. 2d, The genitive denotes the relation of origin, possession, mu- tual connection, and many others, which in English are expressed by the possessive case, or by the preposition of. It answers to the question "whose?" e. g. SBScjpn >aus ift t>a$? (5* ift t>cS ^6ntg5 ; bos aufmann$ ; whose house is this? It is the king's; the mer- chant's. 378 3d, The dative is the case of the remote object, from which any thing is taken, to or for which any thing is done. It answers to the question "to whom?" "for what?" e. g. 8QBcm brtngft )u tas 23ttcb ? 5>cui Cchrcr ; torn ^nabcn ; for whom do you bring that book ? For the teacher ; the boy. 4th, The accusative indicates the immediate object of an active transitive verb, in answer to the question " whom?" or "tvhat?" e. g. S3?a$ fjaft 2)u ? (Sine gebet ; cm SOlcfict ; what hast thou 1 A pen ; a knife. ARTICLES. 3. An article is a word which serves to restrict or individualize the meaning of substantives. There are in German as in English two articles ; the definite ber, tie, ba, the ; and the indefinite cut, cine, cin, an or a. In German both articles are declined, i. e. they indi- cate by a change of termination the gender, the num- ber, and the case of the substantive to which they be- long. DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. SINGULAR. Masc. NOM. ber, GEN. be$, DAT. fcem, Ace. ben, Fern. bte, ber, ber, bte, Neut. bem, the. of the. to the. the. PLURAL. For all genders. bte, the. ber, of the. ben, to the. bte, the. DECLENSION OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Masc. Fern. Neut. NOM. ctn, ctne, cm, a, an. GEN. etneS,, etner, etneS, of a, an. DAT. etnem*, etner, etnem, to a, an. Ace. etnert, etne, etn, a, an. OBSERVATIONS. 4. Obs. I. The meaning of substantives without the article is expressed in the most general manner. The office of the article is to point out either definitely or indefinitely an individual of the genus or species denoted by the substantive ; e. g. ber 90?cmn, the man ; cine S3(ume, a flower. 379 Obs. 2. Hence common nouns only, which under one term comprehend many individuals, can, strictly speaking, assume the article. The remaining classes of nouns must from the nature of their signification commonly reject it ; viz : 1st, proper names, which already contain the notion of individuali- ty ; as, Goethe, Walter Scott, &c. ; 2d, abstract substantives and names of materials, the meaning of which is so general, that no individual is distinguished ; as, virtue, water, gold. Obs. 3. The article, however, is employed in various rela- tions before all classes of substantives, even more frequently in German than in English. ARTICLE BEFORE PROPER NAMES. 5. The article is used before proper names in the following instances : 1st, When the name of a person assumes the signification of a common noun. This is the case, when the same name is com- mon to several individuals ; as, tic (gtuart'S, tic Gatene, the Stuarts, the Catos, or when it is employed to express some quality or characteristic ; as, cr tft cm grocttcr ^Mato, he is a second Plato ; bcr (Sajar unfcrcc Sett, the Caesar of our age. 2d, If the name of a person is preceded by an adjective ; as, bcr belli flc spetruS, bcr grojic Jrtebrid), St. Peter, Frederick the Great. 3d, When the name of an author is put instead of his works ; as, id) (cfc ben u(fe bcburfen, to stand in need of help. 2d, When their meaning is restricted to some particular in- stance ; as, bas SBaffer bcr (Slbe, the waters of the Elbe ; bet Sletp be (d)ii(ct, the diligence of the scholar. ARTICLE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS. 7. Common nouns are usually connected either with the definite or indefinite article. Its omission, however, becomes necessary in the following cases : 1st, When the common noun expresses some quality or condi- tion; as, ct tft jtaufmann, jlomg, (Sclbat geroerben/ he has become a merchant, king, a soldier. 2d, In titles, superscriptions, &c., as in English ; e. g. teeter Cutfyct ; ctt, gran tctrtcb/ Mr., Mrs. Dietrich ; beutfd) -- cnglifd)C$ SBortetlwd), German-English Dictionary. 3d, When the common noun, in connection with a preposition, constitutes an adverbial expression, or when several common nouns are united by a copulative conjunction and form one complex no- tion ; e. g. $u -Julie/ fiber 2cmb, $u (d)tffe retjen, to travel on foot, by land, by sea; $0fi unb SRettet fd>noOen/ unb jliee unb Junfcn jtoben (SBurgcr)/ both horse and horseman were panting, and pebbles and sparks were flying; nut ut unb JBlut/ with property and life. 4th, Common nouns in the plural, denoting several individuals in an indeterminate manner, and corresponding to the singular with the indefinite article cin, cine, ctn/ do not admit of the article ; as, tcl) FjaOe e t n e n SB 1 1 c f crftalten/ 1 have received a letter ; plur. id) hciOe S3 r t e f e ctfyatten, I have received letters, spferbe ftnb nu^tid)C Sf^icre/ horses are useful animals. , 5th, The omission of the article often gives a partitive significa- tion to the substantive, especially, if it be the name of a material substance. In this case we supply the English some (the French du) ; e. g. gt& ifjm SBrob, 9Jtt(d)/ SQBetn, give him some bread, milk, wine, &c. IDIOMATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 8. In a manner peculiar to the German, the definite ar- ticle is often put before a common noun, to indicate that the en- tire species is meant ; e. g. t) e r $ftenfd) tjt jterbltd), man (all men, every man) is mortal. So also before abstract substan- tives and names of materials, when their meaning is to be taken to its full extent ; e. g. unb b t e lugenb, fie tjl few leerer 381 , and virtue, it is no empty sound ; fca Stfen tjl cm $)ie* tad, iron (all iron) is a metal. The Germans employ the definite article also before the names of seasons, months, days, and in many other cases, where the English idiom does not admit of it ; e. g. fcer cn$, ber omnuT, fcer 2(benb, spring, summer, evening ; fca3 Sfcrtjlcntfyum, Christi- anity, fcte (fye, matrimony, &c. THE ARTICLE IN SENTENCES. 9. When in the same proposition several substantives of the same gender and number follow each other, the article is expressed with the first only ; but if they differ in gender or in number, or are otherwise opposed to each other, it must be expressed with each ; e. g. btc QBcrwanfctcn imfc JfCUltfce buv jVs Planned ftnb afle tcbt, the relations and friends of this man are all dead ; bcr 93atcr, bte Strutter unb bte ttutbcr fiitb 311 a ufe r the father, the mother and the children are at home. When a substantive in the genitive case limits the meaning of another, the article is always omitted before the limited sub- stantive, if the genitive precedes it ; e. g. mcmcS Q3ruber3 93ud) ba6 S3 lid) mcmcS 95rufcet, my brother's book ; cwf fei* ncS ?fbctt^ crflcm angc, on the first journey of his life. 10. If the definite article is preceded by one of the pre- positions an, cuif r bet, turd), fi'ir, in, cn, cr, iibcr, 311, both are frequently contracted into one word. The following is a list of the principal contractions thus formed : ?Cm, an*, aufc, betm, tm, lUcrm, untcrm, instead of an bent/ e. an ta^, 4 4 QUf 4 bci bcm, 4 hird) ta, ' 4 fur ta^ 4 in Dem, 4 in >a$, 4 t>on tcm, 4 rer batv 4 iibcc torn, 4 iibcr ta? x 4 tint :t tern, 4 311 torn, t -it j wr. e. g. am Jcnftcr, at the window ; an$ lifer, to the shore ; cwf 5 $c(t>, into the field ; fcetm Stcbte, near the light; turd)^ SYIUT, through the fire ; fiir6 JCatcvtnnt/ for one's country ; tin &flUJV, in the house ; tn$ S^oijcr, into the water; ttom v^)tmuu'(, from (the) heaven ; &er6 Tfng^'tcbt, before the face ; ubcrin CiTfccnleOcn, above this earth- ly life ; libcrg sj^ocr/ over the sea ; untcrm JBaumc/ under the tree > 511111 (i)(ucf, fortunately ; gut Jroutc, to the joy. 382 SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 11. A substantive or noun is the name of any person or thing. Substantives are divided into three principal clas- ses : Proper, Common, and Abstract. A proper noun is the name of an individual person or object ; as, ^etrtrirf), ^eittfcfyfaitb, Henry, Germany. A common noun is a general term comprehending a plurality of individuals or parts, and applicable to each of them ; e. g. SKenfof), SSaum, ^ferb, man, tree, horse, &c. Among" common nouns may also be included names of materials ; as, (ifcn, iron ; 93iild), milk, and collective nouns, which are singu- lar in form, but plural in signification ; as, 83 elf, people ; ebircje, range of mountains. An abstract noun is one which serves to denote either a quality, an activity, or mode of being, to which the mind attributes an independent existence ; e. g. greil)ctt, liberty ; ?aitf, course ; ebarf)tm$, memory, &c. In German the initial of substantives and words used substantively is always a capital letter. We shall consider the substantive in a fourfold point of view ; namely, as to its Gender, its Number, its Inflection, and lastly its Government. I. GENDER. 12. The grammatical gender of names of per- sons and animals generally corresponds to their natu- ral sex, i. e. the names of all male beings, including that of the Divinity and other superior beings regard- ed as males, are masculine ; those of all females are feminine ; e. g. ber 9Wamt, the man ; ber ott, God ; bev eifi, the spirit ; bte ottinn, the goddess ; bte SKutter, the mother. Exceptions. Diminutives in cb c n and ( c i n ; as, ta$ 9D?aM)cn, the maid ; fcaS < D?iaun(i'tn, the mannikin ; also, fcaS SBi'tO, the woman, and certain compounds ; as, Me 9)ionnspcrfen, the male; t>06 fcittV grauenjtmiucr, the female, woman. 383 Appellations, comprehending an entire species of living beings without reference to any distinction of sex, are some- times masculine, sometimes feminine, and sometimes neuter, e. g. fcer ^ttenfd), man (homo) ; fcte ^Bacfytel, the quail ; fcaS the horse. 13. With respect to substantives in general, their gender, as far as it is reducible to rules, may be deter- mined either by their signification, or by their termi- nation. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR SIGNIFICATION. I. Masculines. The name of winds, seasons, months, and days are masculine ; also the points of compass, as, fcer 9torb, ^iifc, Ojt, 2Befl, the north, south, east, west. II. Feminities. Most names of rivers are feminine, e. g. tie Xfyemfe, Sonau, SBefer, the Thames, Danube, Weser. Ex- cept fcer 9tyetn, SRain, Dtyone, 3ftl :c. 14. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : 1st, The names of letters, fcaS 3(, 35, :c. 2d, All infinitives and other words, which properly are no substantives, but are used as such ; e. g. fca Sefyen, <)bren, the seeing, hearing ; ba$ lite, efybne, the good, beautiful ; t>a$ Scnn, ba3 Slber, the if, the feirf. 3d, Names of countries and places ; as, Seiitfofylcmb, granf? ^, 2efpS'3/ Sret'burg, Germany, France, Leipzig, Freiburg. Except the following : tic .ftrtmm, Crimea ; t>te Caufi|, Lusitania; tie Wlwt, Mark ; fcie ^fa(^ Palatinate; t)ic Sct)ivci^ Switzerland; all those ending in e t ; as, t>ie Sittfet, SGBalodbci 2C., Turkey, Wala- chia ; and all those compounded with a u or 3 a u ; e. g. tec 58rei$2 gait, tic SOBcttcrau K. 4th, Most collective nouns and names of materials ; as, ba3 $df, the people ; QStet), cattle ; gletfd), flesh ; aar, the hair. 5th, Names of metals ; as, fcaS Stfen, olb, tlber, 3 l ' nn / tne iron, gold, silver, tin. Except: t)cr ^oOatt, cobalt; tic ^{atina, platina; bcc (Staljt, steel ; ter Sombarf, tombac ; tcr 3inf, zink. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR TERMINATION. 15. I. MASCULINES. To the masculine gender be- long : 384 1st, Primary derivatives* of one syllable ; as, fcer $ln$, cfyfag, prud), Sanf, fflnft, the flight, beat, sentence, course, river. 2d, Most derivatives, both primary and secondary, terminating in el, er, en, ing, ling; e.g. fcer tpfel, top; (Ecfynabel, beak ; Summer, sorrow ; )urtger, hunger ; attert, garden ; SfBcujert, waggon ; , eltwm, hero, heroine, &c. 2d, Primary derivatives in fce, e, t, ft; e. g. fcte snake ; ftiutfce, knowledge ; ^ernunft, reason ; Swift, art. JS.xc. 1. The following- are masculine: 3$aft, bast. 9#ont>, moon. S^eiacrjt, reflection? 93icnat, month. JBctrad)t, consideration. s))?ojt, must. Socbt, wick. SKof!, rust. 2Henft service. (ct)ad)t, shaft (in mines). >raf)t, wire. Schaft, shaft. S)un|l, vapour. ^dnift, rascal. JDurft, thirst. Sc(C, pay. ft, earnestness. Stift, tag. fl, forest. Srcjl, comfort, j!, frost. >ctr;ad)t, suspicion. ibt/ yest. ^crluji, loss, ennnnft, gain. 2Bon|l, paunch. ed)t, pike. S5?irf)t, wight. ^cvbjlt, autumn. 8Q5utf, filth. 932 1 ft/ dung. Stvift, dispute. c. 2. The following are neuter : fcn$ efpcnfl, spectre ; (&tf ficbt, face; ^aupt, head; ^tn^ child ; (cinot>, jewel; Ctd)t, light; Stiff, (ecclesiastical) foundation. 18. 3d, Secondary derivatives, formed by the affixes e t, e, I) e 1 1, f e 1 1, 11 n g, f rf) a f t, a t ty, it t ^ ; as, bte ^euc^elet, hypocrisy; (stdrfe, strength; Sufenftett, boldness; Sttelfett, vanity; gefliing, fortress; gan^fc^aft, landscape; home ; 5(rmutt) r poverty. 17 386 Exceptions. Many of those in c are masculine ; as, t>cr pa[l', the hare; JKflOc/ crow; .Rafc, cheese, &c., and some are neuter; as, fraS TdiCjt', the eye ; (S'rbo, inheritance ; (Srtfc, end, &c. Sicratl), ornament, is masculine, and ^ctfdjaft, seal, is neuter. 19. III. NEUTERS. To the neuter gender belong : 1st, All diminutives ending in cfyen and (etn; as, fca3 Q3U'tmd)ert, the floweret ; ol)ncf)eit, little son ; ^ucfylem, little book ; gran letrt, young lady, miss. 2d, Collective and frequentative substantives formed by the prefix g e ; as, fra3 eftnfce, domestics ; etbfe, noise ; c* ftt'rn, constellation ; fca erefcc, talk ; elciufe, frequent walking, &c. 3d, Most secondary derivatives formed by the affixes f e (, fat, tfyum, ntgj as. fca Ucberbletfcl, remainder; ^citbfcl, riddle ; >rangfal, distress ; c^tdffal, iate ; Stjrtftcnt^um, Chris- tianity ; ) erg outturn, dukedom ; S3imfcntg, alliance ; &er(att$ nt0, relation. Exc. 1. Of those in t f) u m, three are masculine: KT 3>m t^uin/ error ; 9?clcbtl)inn, riches ; S&odb&fyum, growth. Of those in fat, Srubfal, affliction, is feminine; (Etcpfcl, stopper, is neuter. Exc. 2. The following in n 1 15 are feminine : grievance. (J-rtaiiOni^pefmission. rubnt:}/ affliction. ^autnif^ putrefaction. JBct-ummcrni^ sorrow. $in|lcrmp, darkness. JBcfercjni?/ apprehension. JlcnntniS, knowledge. SBtNKinbfltf, condition. fiScrbammni^ damnation. mpfangnt^ conception. SBtltutH, wilderness. (Srfparntp, savings. GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 20. Compound substantives generally adopt the gender of the second component, which contains the emphatic idea ; as, fcer Sird) t) D f/ tne church-yard ; fcaS 9?at() I) cut ^ the town- hall ; bte Suib m it i) ( e, the windmill. Exc. 1. Names of places are always neuter, though their prin- cipal component may be masculine or feminine ; e. g. (ta?) grcis u r $ (Me JBurc}), am ft u r $, SBtttcn c r 3 (t> c c iBcrcO, &c, Exc. 2. A number of substantives compounded with t C t 93? u t () are feminine : TCnmutf)/ grace. (ganfrnuitft, meekness. JDcmutf)/ humility. @d)twrmutf), melancholy. (Srefimutb, generosity. aBchmut^, sadness, f), forbearanctj. 387 Exc. 3. The following likewise deviate from the general rule: tvr tflM'cb e u (b i e S\'bou), abhorrence; Me ^lOURauge, lamprey ; the following compounds of Sbeil, part: ta* ($H\}emhd(, the reverse; vpinteitbett, hind part; i^ortvvtbnl, fore part ; also, fc e r 9Jiittn?ed), Wednesday, which, however, sometimes is t> i e 9)ttttn>od). GENDER OF FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 21. Those foreign substantives which have preserved their original fcirn, retain also the gender which they have in the lan- guage from which they are adopted ; e. g. tcr Sector, *3i;ntt? cud; fct'c ^pntar.t'3, fra$ Souciltum. But those, whose form has become assimilated to German words, frequently assume another gender ; c. g. t>cr 3(Uar (altare), the alter ; ter 5lerper (corpus), the body ; fcer D?uut (ruina), the ruin ; bay Genfulat (consulatus), the consulship, &c. Some substantives have two genders, and are generally also em- ployed in different significations. The following list exhibits the most important of them :^ ba$ Spanb/ the ribbon. 5^cr Sillier/ the peasant ; fcas ^ouer/ the cage. ta5 ^uul)/ the bundle. tn* (Sbcr, the chorus. ta ^rfi'nntnip, decision (judicial). ta? (Srl'C, the inheritance. ba? ebalt/ the salary. Me ei^i't, the whip. Mo irKiftv', the heath. 32er .ftimfce, the customer ; Me .^ui^o, knowledge. tflS 0)?cnfd)/ the wench. tfl6 JRei, the twig. ^n5 (Sd)t(^ / sign (of a house). \T ec, the lake ; Me er Stiff, the peg ; t>n^ ^ttft, charitable foundation. >Der SbcK, the part ; tn^ Sbeil/ the share. 5)er Sbcr, the fool; bn$ 2bcr, the door. *Der ^etMenfl/ earnings ; ta^ ^orMonji/ the merit. the volume ; the peasant ; the alliance ; (Sber, the choir ; (vrfnuitiuh', knowledge; OiTlu', the heir ; (Sic bolt/ the contents ; (Si'ifvl, the hostage ; j>Ctbf/ the pagan ; .ftiinbo, the customer; b/ man ; rice ; II. NUMBER. 22 In German, as in English, substantives have two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. With respect to the termination of the singular no definite rules can be given. 388 The^nominative plural is formed from the nomina- tive singular according to one of the following Rules: Rule I. The nominative plural frequently does not differ from the nominative singular by any additional letter or syllable, especially in masculine and neuter substantives ending el, er, en, and diminutives in d) e tt and I e i n . It is then either the same as the singular, or is distinguished from it by the modification of its radical vowel ;* e. g. ber @n- gel, the angel, pi. bte (Jngel; ber Staffer, emperor, pi. bte Staffer; baS genfler, window, pi. bte genfler \ ber >8ater, ia- ther, pi. bte QSdter ; ber Of en, stove, pi. bte Oefen; ber 93ru* ber, brother, pi. bt'e $3riiber. There are only two feminine substantives belonging to this class : flatter, mother ; Tecfyter, daughter, pi. OJiittter, Ted)- ter. The change of the radical vowel is restricted to mascu- line nouns ; of neuters, only ^tejTer, monastery, has Stlbjler in the plural ; but, bo3 SfBajfer, water, pi. bie ^Bajfer ; ba 9?n* ber, oar, pi. bte 9?iiber. 23. Rule II. In all other cases the nominative plural is formed from the nominative singular by an- nexing one of the terminations e, e r, e n (n); e. g. ber greimb, the friend, pi. bie ^reunb e ; bev ^nabe, the boy, pi. bte $naben ; batf S3itd), the book, pi. bte SSitrf) er O^5. 1. The termination c belongs chiefly to masculine substan- tives. It is, however, also added to feminines and neuters ; e. g. frcr 09, the day, pi. bte Sflgc ; bet Jtcpf/ the head, pi. tic .ficpfe; tic Jtunft, art, pi. tie ^linfte ; tn6 iBovt, the word, pi. Me SBctti 1 . Obs. 2. The termination cr properly belongs to nouns of the neuter gender only. Masculines assume it only by way of excep- tion ; e. g. bn$ *8tlb, the picture, pi. tic iBtlfrcr ; tas ^lint 1 , the child, pi. tic Winter ; tcr ctjl, the spirit, pi. tic Gciftcr. Obs. 3. The termination c n (n) is assumed principally by femi- nines, also by masculines, and a few neuters ; e. g. tic (Debute, the school, pi. tic ^cbutcn ; tic Stfatd, the needle, pi. tic 9?citcln ; tcr ^afc, the hare, pi. tic afcn ; ta }f)C, the ear, pi. tic >f)rcn. 24. Obs. 4. Substantives which form their plural in e r * That part of the substantive which is never affected by the changes of in- flection is called its root. When it contains one of the vowels a, 0, ll, or the diphthong au, they are frequently changed into (i, P, ii, ail in the plural and arc then said to be modified. 389 always modify the vowels of the root (a, o, u, ail) ; and those, which form their plural in e n, never modify it. With respect to plurals in e, the modification always takes place when the substantive is feminine, and usually too when it is masculine, but rarely when it is neuter. Rule III. Masculine and neuter nouns adopted from modern languages frequently form their plural in $ ; as, @eiue% Corfc, (plo' 5 so also German words, the termination of which is not susceptible of inflection ; as, fcte U\, fcte '$/ fcte ty a p a ' 3. Rule IV. Nouns compounded with OJtann usually take e u t e instead of 9R d n n c r (the regular pi. of 9Q?cmn) in the plural ; e. g. fcer Slaiif m a n n, the merchant, pi. Saitf ( e it t e ; fcer >cf m a n n, the courtier, pi. tie >of I e u t e. 25. Common nouns alone are by their significa- tion entitled to a plural number. The following classes of substantives want the plu- ral: 1st, Proper names, except when they assume the signification of common nouns ( 45) ; as, Slarl, Jrtefcnrf), 9?em. 2d, Names of materials, except when different species of the same genus are to be denoted ; as, fca$ Sifett, (tlber, otb, iron, silver, gold ; but fcte SrDcn, the earths (different kinds) ; tie Sftmeralmajfer, mineral waters. ^3d, Many collectives ; as, fca eftnfce, the domestics; ba SStel), cattle, &c. 4th, All infinitives and neuter adjectives used substantively ; as, ta3 ^Betg, white (the colour) ; bt$> >d'gltd)e, the ugly ; ta Stnfommett, the income ; ba ^iffen, knowledge. 5th, Most abstract substantives, especially such as denote qualities, powers or affections of the mind, &c. ; as, fcer J$(ei@/ diligence ; tie 3 ll 9 en ^ J u th ; fcte Q^ernunft, reason ; fcte Surest, fear. Sometimes, however, they become concrete, expressing different kinds of the same quality, &c., and then they are em- ployed in the plural ; as, litgenben, virtues , (Bcfybnfyet'ten, beau- ties. 26. 6th, Substantives denoting number, measure, weighty when preceded by a numeral, are put in the singular, even though in other connections they may form a plural ; as, gn>et g u g brett, two feet wide ; fed)3 ^ f u n t Gutter, six pounds of butter ; etn 9?eqtment con tcutfent) $)? a n n (not Banner, pi.)/ a regiment of thousand men. 390 Exceptions. Feminine substantives in e, and such as express a measure of time; as, $rc>ci (Sllcn (&i c (Stic) Such/ two ells of cloth; fiinf Safyte tong, for five years; moreover, all names of coins; as, $tt>ct refcrjcn, $tpb'(f .ft reiser, two groshes, twelve kreuzers, are put in the plural as in English. 27. Some substantives are employed in the plur- al number only : 2(l)nen, ancestors. -[fftaferrt, \ i Meltern, parents. JRot&eln, $ m 3Upen r alps. ^3?clfeit, whey. O)l:ern, Easter. ^ffncjflen, Whitsuntide. ^cinfe, tricks. ^porteln, fees. Ira'ber, husks. Iritmmer, ruins. Iruppen, troops. 2Betfynad)ten, Christmas. 3ett(ciiifte / junctures. 3tnfen, interest of money. ^ >ofert, $ 23neffd)aften, papers. Siltffinfte, revenue, gatfen, Lent, gterien. vacation, efdtfe, rents. Uebmagen, limbs. 5toften, expenses. Ceute, people. 28. There are a number of substantives which have two forms for the plural, partly as a simple dia- lectic variety, but most commonly with different sig- nifications : SINGULAR. Set 23ant>, the volume ; )a 93anb, the ribbon ; )a3 23anfc, the bond ; Ste 23anf, the bench ; )te 33anf, the bank ; Ser Waiter, the peasant ; )a3 Waiter, the cage ; Ser Sern, the thorn ; )m$, the thing ; Sing, little creature ; eftd)t, the face ; eftcfyt, the vision ; )Dtn, the horn ; PLURAL. tie 23anbe. t>te fcte -23d'nfe. bte 35anfen tie ^Sauern. tie Waiter. Dernen. X)brner. bte He tie ejtd)ter. bte eftdfjte. tie Corner ; but $ o r n e, dif- ferent sorts of horn. 391 Ser aten, the shutter ; tie Ser i'aben, the shop ; fcte Cdben. Ser Orr, the place; Set gifjtto, the shield ; tie Sad d)tlb, the sign ; fcie Sad Sti'uf, the piece ; tie Stiicfe. Sad tmf, the fragment ; tie Stiidfen. Ser Ifjor, the fool ; fcte Ifyeren. Sad Ifyev, the door ; bte Ifyere. Sad SBort, the word ; tie ^Sorter ; but ffi o rt c, words, in connected discourse. III. INFLECTION. 29. For the purposes of declension we divide German substantives into two classes, which differ es- sentially in their mode of inflection ; viz : 1st, Common and Abstract Nouns ; 2d, Proper Names. DECLENSION OF COMMON AND ABSTRACT NOUNS. 30. Common and abstract nouns have two priii cipal forms of inflection, denominated the earlier and the later declensions. The characteristic distinction of each is the termination of its genitive singular, which in the earlier declension is 3 or e , and in the later It or e m All feminine substantives are invariable in the sin- gular ; hence their mode of declension is determined by the nominative plural. The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are always alike, and their difference is pointed out by the article only. The dative plural always assumes it, unless its nom- inative already ends in that letter. EARLIER DECLENSION. 31. The earlier declension comprises nouns of all genders, and may be distinguished by the termination 392 of its genitive singular, which (feminine nouns ex- cepted) is always $ or e $, The nominative plural is either the same as the nominative singular, or it assumes one of the termina- tions e, e r, e n or n. In the plural the radical vowels a, 0, U, and the diph- thong ail, are generally modified into a, 5, it, au. Hence to inflect a word of this declension, not only the genitive singular, but also its nominative plural must be given ; e. g. ber 23rnber, the brother, gen. be3 33ruber, nom. pi. bie S3riiber ; bie Srucfyt, fruit, nom. pL bie griicfyte ; bcr $(eib, the garment, gen. beg $feibe, nom. pi. bie $leiber* TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE EARLIER DECLENSION. SINGULAR. ] I. NOM. given. 1 like the sing. GEN. e$, 3 (en$, n$). " DAT. e, or like the nom. n. Ace. like the nom. i like the nom. PLURAL. II. III. IV. e. e. en. e. er. er. ern. er. en, n. en, n. en, n. en, tu 32. PARADIGMS. I. a. 2)er 33ater, the father. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. ber 93ater, the father ; bte QSater, the fathers. GEN. fceS 55ater^, of the father ; ber 53ater, of the fathers. DAT. bem ^ater, to the father ; ben QSatern, to the fathers. Ace. ben 93ater, the father ; bte 93dter, the fathers. I. b. )te 5D7utter, the mother. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. fcfe Stutter, the mother; bie 9)iiitter, the mothers. GEN. ter flutter, of the mother ; ber SRiitter, of the mothers. DAT. ter iWutter, to the mother ; ben 9SRuttern, to the mothers. Ace. bte 2)iiitter, the mother ; bte SSRiitter/ the mothers. 393 II. a. )er 93anm, the tree. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. ber 93anm, the tree ; bte 23aume, the trees. GEN. bed 93anmed, of the tree ; ber 23anme, of the trees. DAT. bem 93anme, to the tree ; ten 93anmen, to the trees. Ace. ten 93aum, the tree ; tie 93aume, the trees. II. b. Die $anb, the hand. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. bte anb, the hand ; bte anbe, the han ' GEN. bet )anb, of the hand ; bcr dnbe, of the hands. DAT. ber $anb, to the hand ; ben >anben, to the hands. Ace. bte >anb, the hand ; bte a'nbe, the hands. III. a. J)ad ?teb, the song. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. bad Ct'eb, the song ; bte Ct'eber, the songs. GEN. bed StebeS, of the song ; ber Weber, of the songs. DAT. bem ?t'ebe, to the song ; ben Ctebern, to the songs. Ace. bad Steb, the song ; bte Cieber, the songs. III. b. Ser et'fr, the spirit. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. ber et'ft, the spirit ; bte etfter, the spirits. GEN. bed ct'tfed, of the spirit; ber etfter, of the spirits. DAT. bem et'fle, to the spirit ; ben etftern, to the spirits. Ace. ben eijt, the spirit ; bte etfler, the spirits. IV. a. 55er tra^I, the ray. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. ber (Stratyl, the ray ; bte !H\}C(, bird; l>cc Dcgon, sword; tag Stcqrt, seal ; t>cr (fatten, garden ; bcr ?(t>(er, eagle ; tcr S^acion, waggon ; tcr 5Bru^cr / brother; ta SBccfcn, basin; tec ^cijtcr, master ; fcaS Scicbcn, signal. girl, maiden ; 23iicMctn, little book ; Skttcfyen, violet; SUiimlctn, floweret. 9)cUtt:c and Scd^tcr, daughter, are the only feminine substantives which retain in the plural the termination of the nominative sin- gular. 34. Like bcr S3aum (II. a.) are inflected the follow- ing: 1st, Masculines and neuters terminating in the prefixes cmfc, at, id)t, ig, ing, ling, rid) ; e. g. $ei(an&, saviour ; 9J?onat, month ; ftaffg, cage ; $)ciupt(tng, chieftain, &c. 2d, .Many foreign substantives, such as, ber 3fbt, Sfttar, 93i* fd)Df, Sarttnat, ^ataft; the abbot, alter, bishop, cardinal, pal- ace, &c. 305 3d, All substantives ending in the affixes rtt and fat; as, bte gtnjlerm'g, darkness ; Semttm'g, knowledge ; fca$ (Scfyuf* fa I, fate ; J)rangfal, calamity, &c. Like tie anb (II. b.) are declined the following fem- inines : ?fnc\jt, anguish. 2uft, air. 2(u*ftucf)t, evasion. 2 lift, delight. ?Cvt, axe. 9J?ad)t, power. *8anf, bench. SRagfo, maid-servant. SSrcmt, bride. SDtaiiS, mouse. ffiruft, breast. 9?ad)t, night. ^auji, fist. 9Jaf)t, seam. rud)t, fruit. 92otri, distress. an$, goose. -Diiif', nut. (Stefcbnwlft, swelling. fca3 2()er, the chorus ; fca fflv$, the r, the reed; pi. gt)6re, gtog 35. Substantives declined like ba ?teb (III.) are gen- erally of the neuter gender, and masculine only by way of exception. They always modify the vowel of the root. Examples : ?Cmt, office. Samm, lamb. 231Kb, book. 9?cft, nest. Dcrf, village. SKat>, wheel. C$5etb, money. (Scbtcp, castle. grave. S>ctf, nation. herb. SKc't^ woman. So also all nouns ending in t f) n nt ; as, JKcidfttrium/ riches ; m, dukedom, and a few foreign words ; as, ^avfomcnt, 396 The masculines declined like { C b are as follows : 3 rotdjt, villain ; Corn, thorn ; eift, spirit (III. b.) ; @ott, God ; \tetb, body ; $?cmn, man (wr) ; Ort, place ; 9?anb, border ; QSormiinb, guardian ; 2Balb, wood ; 2Burm, worm. 36. Substantives inflected like ber Strafyl (IV.) are of the masculine and neuter genders. They are but few in number and never modify the radical vowel in the plural. They are : 1st, Names of persons terminating in o r ; as, Sector, *pre* feffor, ^ajtor, &c. Except : Saftor, Slectropfyor, 9ftatabor, and also Meteor, which have their plural in e. 2d, Foreign words which still have, or once had the Latin termination i u m, as, tub t it m, pi. tub i e n, studies ; Sottc> gtitm, pi. (SoQegt'en, lectures ; ^(bxjerb, pi. 5(berbten, adverbs ; also those ending in tt r as, Srebitw, itb(lantt r &c. ; those terminating in a ( or i 1 have i e n in the plural, as, *Rega(, pi. goffit, pi. geffil t e n. 3d, The following masculine substantives : jDorn, thorn. @pcrn / spur. Jfcrft, forest. ^tadjct, sting. tcr, god-father. ttcfcl, boot. laurel. (Stnwjj/ ostrich. mast. letter, cousin. r, neighbour. llntcrt^an, subject. $)fau, peacock. StcratI)/ finery. (Sec, sea. 4th, To these may be added the following foreign masculines : Gonfuf, consul. ^rtffcct, prefect. demon. 3)fatm, psalm. t, diamond. JRubtn/ ruby. n, pheasant. tnot, state. Snipcf!, import. Sfyren, throne. ^jiuefcl, muscle. Sractat, treaty. ct, slipper. 5th, The following neuter words : tfucjc, eye. 3nfect, insect. JBctt, bed. Sproncm, pronoun. (nt>e, end. tatut, statute. ,>cmb, shirt. 9?crfc, verb. 37. Like 9Jame (V.) are inflected the following 397 masculines: fcer 33ncf)fla6e, letter ; geld, rock; grtebe, peace ; $nnfe, spark ; ebcmfe, thought ; (aube, faith ; mtfe, heap ; Same, seed ; a$ GEN. tc6 DAT. torn Ace. t>a$ tic cr$cn, t>ct tic cr$cn. The word >d)mcrg, pain, has either c n ^ or e ^ in the genitive, and in the dative en or e. Nom. tct cfynicr^ Gen. t>e$ cljnicr^cn^ or (d)tiu'r$c$, Dat. tern ^cbnier^n or 6>d)imrje ; Nom. pi. Me ^cn. The word ^djrccf, terror, is also irregular : Nom. tcr or djrccfcnx Gen. tc$ @d)rccfcn$ or (Sd)tccfc^^ Dat. t>cm or djrcrfcn/ Ace. ten ^djred or c^cccfcn ; Nom. pi. tie cfyrccfen. LATER DECLENSION. 38. Substantives of this declension are either masculine or feminine. Masculines form their genitive in n or en, and re- tain that termination in all the remaining cases sin- gular and plural. Feminines being indeclinable in the singular, as- sume the n or en in the plural only. No nouns of this declension ever modify the radical vowels a, 0, n, or the diphthong au in the plural ( 24). TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE LATER DECLENSION. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Masc. and Fern. NOM. given, en, n, GEN. err, n, en, n, DAT. en, n, en, n, Ace. en, n. en, n. 398 39. PARADIGMS. I. Ser raf, the count. SINGULAR. NOM. ber raf, the count ; GEN. be3 rafen, of the count; DAT. bem raf en, to the count ; Ace. ben rafen, the count ; PLURAL. tie raf en, the counts ; ber rafen, of the counts ; ben rafen, to the counts ; bte rafen, the counts. II. Der Srbe, the heir. SINGULAR. NOM. ber Srbe, the heir ; GEN. be$ Srben, of the heir ; DAT. bem (rben, to the heir ; Ace. ben Srben, the heir ; PLURAL. bte Srben, the heirs ; ber (Srben, of the heirs ; ben Srben, to the heirs ; bte (rben, the heirs. III. Ste Jraii, the woman. SINGULAR. PLURAL. the woman ; bte Jranen, the women ; ber rauen, of the women ; ben graiten, to the women ; bte 5 ran en, the women. NOM. bte , GEN. ber 5 rcu1 / f tne woman ; DAT. ber grail, to the woman ; Aec. bte 3 ran, the woman ; IV. Die Jeber, the pen. SINGULAR. NOM. bte geber, the pen ; GEN. ber 5cker, of the pen ; DAT. ber eber, to the pen ; Ace. bie geber, the pen ; PLURAL. bie Sckmi/ the pens ; ber gcbern, of the pens ; ben gebern, to the pens ; bte gebeni, the pens. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. When the nominative singular ends in e, or in one of the unaccented affixes el, e r, a r, the genitive and re- maining cases assume n only; as, ber Coroe, the lion, gen. be$ 6rcen; bie Sangel, the pulpit, pi. bte Han$e(n; ber 23an* er, the farmer, gen. be3 33anern ; otherwise e n becomes ne- cessary; e. g. ber)elb, the hero, gen. be$ ^elben; ber efetf, the companion, gen. be3 efe((en ; ber ^3eet, the poet, gen. be^ ^Poeten ; bte Jyran, plur. bte jranen. Obs. 2. Feminine substantives were formerly declined in the singular number also ; this practice, however, has been 399 retained only in certain adverbial expressions, in which the substantive is connected with a preposition ; e. g. cwf (Jrfce tt, on earth; mtt greufcen, with joy, joyfully; son (Betten fceS $bm'errn in the gen. and dat. sing., but $ err en in the plur.), master; 3Dtenfd), man ; Iftarr, fool ; *J)fau, peacock ; ^rtnj, prince ; Ityot, simpleton. 2d, Masculines terminating in e unaccented ; e. g. 2Cffe, the ape. R nappe, squire. SSatbe, bard. 9?ad)fomme, descendant. , surety. 9?effe, nephew. , dragon. $)atf)e, sponsor. fe, hawk. 3?iefe, giant. ehiitfe, assistant. claoe, slave. c, idol. 3cuge x witness. , shepherd. 3d, Names of nations, such as are not derived from the name of the country. They generally end also in e ; e. g. bet -Bcner, the Bavarian. tcr Sftaure, the Moor. tec SBolwic, the Bohemian. bet gMc, the Pole. bet SBtttte, the Britain. bet ^teupe, the Prussian. bet 93u(gat, the Bulgarian. bet SHufje, the Russian. bet SMnc, the Dane. bet acbfe, the Saxon. bet Deutfcrje, the German. bet (Scbrcabe, the Swabian. bet ^tan^cfe, the Frenchman, bet e, the Swede. bet (SktcctK, the Greek. bet Sartnt, the Tartar. bet ef[e, the Hessian. bet Surfe, the Turk. bet 3ube, the Jew. bet Uncjar, the Hungarian. 41. 4th, Masculine substantives of foreign origin, termi- nating in ant, a r cfy, at e n t, if, t ft, e t, 1 1, o t, o g, o p b/ om :c. ; e. g. bet ^rofejlant, D3?onatd), CSantttat, ^tatat, (Stu^ bent, ^taftbent, ^atbeltf, 937etl)Dbifl, (Shttft, ^Det, Fernet, (Jte^ mtt, Sefiitt, Sbfet, Tljeelog, ^Pfetfoleci/ ^btlcfopl), ^ftronom :c. 5th, All the feminine nouns in the language, except 400 those mentioned above ( 33 and 34). They are either monosyllables, as Safyti, path ; ^>flicf)t, duty, or polysyllables, chiefly ending in e, el, er, at I), ei, enb, fyett, inn, frfjaft, Uttg. The following may serve as examples : MONOSYLLABLES. tfrt, kind. oat, seed. 2Hirg, citadel. cbladjt, battle. $5(ur, plain. (Spur, trace. 3a$fc, chase. 3f)ot, deed. Cafl, burden. 3at)t/ number. tua(, torment. POLYSYLLABLES. tfrftctt, labour. 9?otur, nature. (Sntc, duck. )()nmad)t, impotence. Cermet, formula. $pccfic, poetry. CQcnt), region. SScltgton, religion. .frcmfclung, action. ^cbiiffd, plate. Sungfcr, maiden. Saubc, dove. .ftcmginn, queen. Umscrfitat, university. Ccifccnfcbaft, passion. SBafytfyett, truth. ;^ news. Sungc, tongue. FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 42. 1st, With respect to substantives of foreign origin, we have already under each declension, noticed such as have ac- commodated their termination to the analogy of German words. There are some, however, which still appear in their original form unaltered ; as, ber-JOtfefct'cuS, the physician ; fcer SafuS, the case ; ta$ ^actum, the fact ; ba$ Ifyema, the theme, &c. These are either indeclinable in the singular; as, ter @(eni, the clergy, gen. fce3 SleruS, dat. tern @(cni$, &c., or they as- sume $ in the genitive ; as, fca3 Sactum, gnbi'whuinv the fact, individual, gen. fceS 3 ac ^ um ^ 3nWt>ttMMitlJ, 2d, In the plural, foreign nouns either assume en (36); as, SSerbiim, verb, pi. $erben; (Btufcuitn, study, pi. tii&t' en; or they retain in all cases the original termination of the nomi- native plural ; as, 9Rebict', $?iiftct, Safit^, gacta, l^emata. 3d, Masculine and neuter substantives, adopted from the French or English, generally take $ in the genitive singular, and retain it in all the cases of the plural ; fcer Cert, gen. ted t'ovtS, pi. tie CertS ; ter Sfyef, the chieftain, gen. te* i)ef$, pi. tie SbefS; taS erne, the genius, gen. te$ erne' 3, pi. tie ( 24. Rule III.) 401 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 43. Proper nouns are either names of PERSONS, or names of COUNTRIES and PLACES. Names of persons are declined either with or without the article. I. When preceded by either of the articles (em orber), names of persons are not varied in the singular, the different cases being sufficiently indicated by the in- flection of the article ; as, ber emitter, gen. betf Sofyttler, dat. bent Sdntter, ace. ben gcfyilter; ein Sutler, gen, eine$ Cutljer, dat. einem futfyer, ace. eincn fntfyer, Exception. If the genitive of the name of a male limiting the meaning of another word is connected with an adjective, and placed before the governing word, it assumes the termination ; as, &eg gro? pen .ft a n t * SBcrfc, the works of the great Kant ; tc$ bcriifymtcn 2) it r c r *$ cmalfcc, the paintings of the celebrated Diirer. 44. II. When not connected with the article, mas- culine names ending in $, $, fof), r, j, and feminines end- ing in e, form their genitive in e n 3 ; all other names, both masculine and feminine, including also diminu- tives in d)en, form their genitive in '$ simply; e. g. 9War, gen. ?[Raren$; 3So, gen. 8Soen$; Souife, gen* goutfenS; but jgtermann, gen. ermann'd; (5arl, gen. (5arl 'd ; ^"^rf)^ (Jonny), gen. ^dn^djen g ; 2lbelf)etb, gen. b' $. Remark I. In the dative and accusative singular it has been customary to annex the termination c n. It is better, however, to leave those cases like the nominative, and to prefix the article, when ambiguity would otherwise arise; e. g. nom. C effing/ gen. fieffing'S/ dat. (frcm) Ceffing (better than Ccffmgcn), ace. (ten) Rcm. 2. Names of Latin or Greek origin were formerly inflected after the manner of Latin nouns ; e. g. nom. *paii(u$ / gen. ^aitlt, dat. faille, ace. ^autum ; 'pfotomS efprddje, Plato's dialogues ; (Siceront'S S^eben, Cicero's orations, &c. Now, however, they follow the analogy of German nouns, and the ancient mode of inflection is only retained in a few expres- sions, as, (SfyrifH elnirt, &c.; e.g. *}Mato'3 efpracfye ; gt^ cerc'3 9?cben ; ^Pbabui' Sabetn or bie jabetn be^ ^tjabri^, the fables of Phaedrus ; ber D?eic^t^um be^ Srofu^, the wealth of Cro3sus. 402 PLURAL OF PROPER NAMES. 45. The plural of proper names is only employed when the same name is common to several individuals ; as, bte (Scfylegel, bte >ermcmne, persons of the name of Scfylecjet, )er* mann ; or when they are converted into common nouns ( 5.) ; as, bte S^eiitcne unferer $eit, the Newtons of our age, &c. Rules. The inflection of proper names in the plural number is not influenced by the article, and the radi- cal vowels (a, o, it, au) are never modified. When the names are masculine, terminating in a, e, t, a I, e I, t (, e r, e n or d) e it, the plural remains unaltered. All other masculine names of German origin, and foreign names ending in a ttt, It, form their plural by adding e to the nom. sing. ; but those ending in o, add tte* Examples : Sing* Plur. Sing. Plur. (Sotta, (bte) Gotta. 2(Mpf), (tic) (ampc, (Sanipc. anntba(, anmba(. Dmtv SKeter. atone. The dative plural always assumes the termination n, unless the nominative already ends in that letter ; as, ten ?ittl)erit, 9)Manrf)tl)one n, &c., to the Luthers, Melanchthons, &c. Names of females invariably add e it or n in every case of the plural ; as, gfora, pi. gfora'it, gm'fe, guifen, pi. 4G. PARADIGMS. MASCULINES. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. Sutler, GEN. 8utfyer% DAT. (bem) gutter, Ace. (ben) Cutfyer ; NOM. (bte) Cutler, GEN. ber* Cutler, DAT. (ben) Cutfyern, Ace. (bte) 2ittl)er. * In the genitive plural the article is necessary to point out the case ($ 5. 6th.). 403 SINGULAR. NOM. getbm(3/ GEN. etbmen$, DAT. (bem) etbnt$, Ace. (ben) Setbntg; SINGULAR. NOM. $ermann, GEN. crmami% DAT. (tern) )ermann, Ace. (fcen) Hermann ; SINGULAR. NOM. btfye, GEN. btfee'S, DAT. (bem) btfje, Ace. (ben) btfye; PLURAL. NOM. (Die) 2etbme, GEN. ber Setbmge, DAT. (ben) etbnten, Ace. (bte) Sctbmfce. PLURAL. NOM. (bte) ermanne, GEN. ber ^)ermanne, DAT. (ben) ermannen, Ace. (bte) |)ermanne. PLURAL. NOM. (bte) btfee, i GEN. ber btt)e r DAT. (ben) btfyen/ Ace. (bte) bt^e. FEMININES. SINGULAR. NOM. SBcrtba, GEN. Eertba'S, DAT. (ber) Ace. (bte) SINGULAR. NOM. ertranb, GEN. ertraub'S, DAT. (ber) ertraub, Ace. (bte) ertraub; SINGULAR. NOM. GEN. DAT. (ber) gutfc, Aec. (bte) Sutfe ; SINGULAR. NOM. Suite, GEN. 3ulten$, DAT. (ber) 3iiKc, Ace. (bte) Suite; PLURAL. NOM. (bte) GEN. ber DAT. (ben) Ace. (bte) PLURAL. NOM. (bte) ertrauben, GEN. ber ertrauben, DAT. (ben) ertrauben, Ace. (bte) ertrauben. PLURAL. NOM. (bte) Sutfen, GEN. ber Cutfcn, DAT. (ben) gmfen, Ace. (bte) gittfetu PLURAL. NOM. (bte) %niitn, GEN. ber %u[ien, DAT. (ben) 3ulten, Ace. (bte) 404 OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. The termination c n 6 of the genitive singular belongs particularly to feminine names in c. With respect to masculines in ^ fj, fet), X/ $, the practice of substituting % or a simple apostrophe, instead of cn6, is becoming more frequent ; e. g. dbni*6 s pt)ilefcpl)U', the philosophy of Leibnitz ; 9)fcrt SRi'ty'd)'* llmriffc gtt'&fctUer't I'U'D Don fccc (ocfc, Retzsch's Illustrations to Schiller's Song of the Bell. 47. Obs. 2. When a family name is preceded by one or more Christian names, or common nouns without an article, the family name alone is inflected ; e. g. 3 D ^ ann $einrid) $ of fen 3 (or simply Stog'S) Ueberfegumjen, John Henry Voss's translations ; itbmcj 5 r * c & *" id) ' d ^eben, the life of King Frederick. Ofo. 3d, But if the article precedes, in connection with the word 5) err, or a common noun designating some title or office, the proper name is not inflected ; as, bad )aud feed >errn IW it ($ (er, the house of Mr. Mailer ; tie Ifyaten bed ftatferd Sari be^ 5^ n f^ en / tne ex plits of the Emperor Charles V. ; fca$ tant)^ bt(t) bed grof en Stc^ter @ b t ^ e, the statue of the great poet Goethe. NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND PLACES. 48. 1. Names of countries, places, rivers, mountains, &c. which are of the masculine or feminine gender, are generally ac- companied by the article ( 5), and declined like common nouns ; as, tie S>rf)roet3, gen. fcer <5cf;n>et$, dat. fcer (Bcfyroet'j, ace. fcte (gcfyroetj ; ber SBrei&jcw, gen. bed -^retd^ait'd, &c. ; bet D^ljein, gen. bed 9?f)eined, &c. ; bte X^emfc, gen. ber Xtjemfe, &c. 2. Neuter names of countries and places, not terminating in d, g or x, have the sign d in the genitive and remain unal- tered in all the other cases ; e. g. bte Unttterfttciten Deutfofy* lanbd, the Universities of Germany ; D^ngtcmbd 5(be(, the no- bility of Russia ; er fommt son Q3er(tn (dat.), he comes from Berlin , nad) Cetpjtg (ace.), to Leipzig, &c. 3. Since names of places which end in d, g, x do not admit of an additional d in the genitive, for the sake of euphony, it is customary to put them in apposition with the genitive of some word like t a b t, ) o r f, g e ft it n g (town, village, fort),^or to prefix the preposition o n , e. g. bte (Stnroofyner ber ^tabt (or yon ^3arfd) the inhabitants of the city of Paris ; bte son Sftatnj, the situation of Mentz. THE (UNIVERSr 405 \d IV. GOVERNMENT. 49. 1st, When a substantive is the subject of a proposi- tion, it is always in the nominative case, and governs the verb in number and person. 2Ber rctf't? T)cr 23ater, fret 5 rciin ^ itnb bte ^ofyne retfen. Who travel] The father, the friend, and the sons are travelling. 2d, In the oblique cases, i. e. in the genitive, dative, and accusative, nouns are governed either by other nouns, or by adjectives, verbs, prepositions, &c. ; e. g. bte IWuttcr b c 3 ) a u f e , the mother of the house ; ber t v a f e roiirbu), worthy of punishment; etnen 33rtef fcfyreiben, to write a letter ; auf Dem a it b e, in the country. We shall here only consider the relation which one substantive may sustain to another. 50. Substantives which stand in the relation of equality to each other, are put in the same case. They may be thus related : 1st, When one is added to another, for the sake of explana- tion, or is put in apposition with it; e. g. 2Btlt)clm b er (fro- b e r c r, William, the Conqueror ; 3fyr f ennet tfyn, ben & d) 6 * p f c r fiibner )eere, ye know him, the creator of bold armies ; tl)m, m e t it e m 3B c 1) 1 1 b d t e r, to him, my benefactor. 2d, When one constitutes the predicate to the other; as, fctn 2*ater t|l S\bntg geroorfcen, his father has become king; er tfl m e t n 5 r e " n &/ ne ^ s m 7 f" 6 ^. 3d, When one is compared with another ; as, ber Ifwrm i(l ^}6()er al ber S3 a u m, the tower is higher than the tree. 4th, When several substantives constitute a compound sub- ject to one verb; e. g. djDnfyett unb 39^"^ treten tn ifyre i>ptfe 9ted)te mtebcr etit, Beauty and Youth are fully reinstated to their former rights. 51. 1st, A substantive which stands in the relation of cause, wigirij possessiori, mutual connection, &c., to another, is put in the genitive; e. g. ber efcmcj ber 236 get, the sing- ing of birds ; ber (Scfyopfer b e v 2B e 1 1, the creator of the world ; ba $>au3 b e Sa it f m a n n 3, the house of the mer- chant; bie djwefler be$ Q3ater&, the sister of the father. 2d, The genitive is often employed adverbially to express the relation of time, locality or manner; be3 9)?orcjen6, bed 9[)?tttvig, be$ 5(benb3, in the morning, at noon, in the evening ; fctefigen OrteS, of this place ; gute^ s Dhttl)e fetn r to be of good cheer ; imttem'cfyteter Sacfye, without accomplishing one's pur- pose. 406 3d, A substantive which has a partitive signification is fol- lowed by a genitive of the whole ; e. g. fcte 33aiime etne ar- tenS, the trees of a garden ; fca3 J)act) be >aufe3, the roof of the house. 4th, If, however, the partitive substantive points out a num- ber, measure or weight, the name of the material numbered, measured, &c., is more frequently put in apposition with it than in the genitive ; as, etne -JWemje $ t n fc e r, a number of children; mir fiinf Silent) (Stern, with five dozen of eggs; cut ^Paar <5ttefc(, a pair of boots. But when the thing measured has an adjective or other declinable word connected with it, the genitive is required; as, jroet glafcfyen f bfHtcfyen 2Betne3, two bottles of superior wine; ein *JJfunt> fvtfdjer Gutter, a pound of fresh butter. ADJECTIVES. 52. An adjective is a word which limits the meaning of substantives. Every adjective may generally be employed in two different relations, viz : 1st, The quality expressed by it may be conceived as inde- pendent of the subject, and be asserted of it by a formal act of judgment ; as, ba$ )an& tjl $ r o g, the house is large ; tie 9?efe tft rotfy, the rose is red. The adjective thus used is called predicative, and is never inflected in German. 2d, The quality expressed by it may be so intimately con- nected with the substantive as to form one complex idea with it, and then the adjective is termed attributive ; as, fca g r e 3, the large house ; tie r otf) e 9?efe, the red rose. Remark. The predicative adjective stands usually after the verbs f e t n, to be ; ru c r t> c n, to become, and b (e 1 1> c n, to remain ; sometimes also after certain transitive verbs ; e. g. NT immcl ivnr b (cut/ the sky was blue ; Me 9tad)t ivtrt) t) u n i c t, the night be- comes dark ; tm$ ,ft(ctt> btctbt fa u b c r, the dress remains clean ; f I it 9 maolxn, to make wise ; 9 r it n farbcn, to die green, &c. 53. Some adjectives can only be employed in the predicative sense, as : cibbeft, disaffected ; bract), fallow ; oncjft, distressed, afraid ; etnqctcnf, remembering; bcrdt, ready ; foint, hostile ; 407 gar, done ; notf), needful ; ganc} unt> a* (Vtfccnc .palStucb, the silk cravat; but, KT .panfcfobuf) tfl ron ct>cr, KT $1119 \\i ton G>o(fc, the glove is (made) of leather, the ring is (made) of gold. 2d, All superlatives, ordinal numerals, and certain adjectives formed from adverbs of time and locality ; e. g. tcr grotto, fret gnji'ite, tor trtttc K., the tallest, the second, the third, &c. ; fcorttfl, hv'uttiV b^'fuV 3 l '^ r ^V mergcnfc, from t)crt, there ; (jciite, to-day ; fjtcr/ in this place ; gcjU'rn, yesterday ; morcjcn, to-morrow. 3d, Many derivatives ending in tfrf) and lief)/ including also adjective names of nations ; as, btcbtfd), rtiievish ; ncrMfch/ northern; roortlid), literal ; anfangltd), original ; bcutfd)/ German ; franjofifd)/ French ; cncjltfd)/ English, &c. We are to consider, 1st, the inflection, 2d, the comparison, and 3d, the use and government of adjectives. I. INFLECTION. 55. When an adjective is used in the attributive relation, certain terminations are added to it, indica- tive of the gender, the number, and the case of the sub- stantive to which it is united ; e. g. gilt e r SBettt, good wine ; cuter fofyonctt 33htme, of a fair flower ; fca ffetn c SSitcfy, the small book. All attributive adjectives of every degree of com- parison are susceptible of three different modes of in- flection, denominated the flrst, second, and third declen- sions. 408 THE FOLLOWING TABLE EXHIBITS THE TERMINATIONS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. SINGULAR. First Declension. Second Declension. Third Declension. / Muse. Fern. N Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. NOM. cr e eg C e e er C (1 GEN. c$, en er c$, en en en en en en en DAT. cm er em en en en en en en Ace. en e e$ en e e en e ti PLURAL. For all genders. 15* 2d 3d Decl. Decl. Decl. NOM. c en en GEN. er en en DAT. * en en en Ace. e en en Remark. The first declension of adjectives corresponds to the earlier declension of substantives, and presents the greatest varie- ty of terminations ; so also the second possesses the characteris- tics of the later declension of substantives (the en in the genitive and remaining cases). The third declension is composite, partak- ing of the character of both. FIRST DECLENSION. 56. When an adjective is preceded by no other limiting word, or by one which is indeclinable, it as- sumes the terminations of the definite article* in all its cases singular and plural, and is said to be inflected according to the first declension, thus : * With this difference, that in the nom. and ace. neuter singular the ad- jective has C $ instead of a 9. 409 SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. GEN. DAT. Ace. Masc. g liter, ( guteS, f guten, giitem, guten, Fern. gate, giiter, guter, giite, \ NeuL guteS, g u ten, giitem, guteS ; For all genders. NOM. gitte, GEN. guter, DAT. guten, Ace. gute, good, of good, to good, good. PARADIGMS. I. MASCULINE. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. GEN. DAT. Ace. rotter rotbeS ) rotten $ rotfyem rotten 2Bem, ffietneS, ffietne, red wine, of red w r ine, to red wine, red wine ; rctfye rottjer rotfyen rotfye Seine, II. FEMININE. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. fiige 5 ruc fa/ sweet fruit, ffige fivufyte, GEN. fiiger $md)t, of sweet fruit, fiiger ^riicfyte, DAT. fiiger Srucfyt, to sweet fruit, fufjen 5riicf)tetT, Ace. fiijje gnicr^t, sweet fruit ; fiige gviid)te. III. NEUTER. SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. gnteS @e(^, good money, gute etter, GEN. ^ ; > @e(be^, of good money, giiter e(ber, DAT. giitem elfce, to good money, guten elfcent, Ace. gute^ elb, good money ; gute e(t)er. Obs. 1st. The following are some of the indeclinable words which may precede the adjective without affecting its termination: c t to a $, some ; g e n u g, enough ; a t ( e r I c i, of various sorts ; m c b r, more; v> t e f, much; loenig, little; in the plural the numerals g n> c i, t> r c i, &c. e. g. g c n u g rctfjcr SKctn/ enough red wine ; a If ( c r (c t fflpe Snid)^ a variety of sweet fruit ; w c n i g guteS iBrct), little good bread. Obs. 2d. We are* to regard c$ as the regular termination of the genitive singular masculine and neuter, though en most always takes its place for the sake of euphony, when the noun itself has c$ in the genitive; e, g, gut en 2Bctne*, fatten SBaJTerS, of cold wa- ter; Oanren Gx(t>v'$/ of ready money. 410 SECOND DECLENSION. 57. An adjective belongs to the second declen- sion, when it is preceded either by the definite article ber, bie, bd3, by a demonstrative or relative pronoun, or an indefinite numeral. It then assumes the termination ein the nominative singular for all genders, and in the accusative singular feminine and neuter, and the ter- mination c U in all the remaining cases singular and plural, The pronouns and indefinite numerals are : ticfcr, btofc, btcfcS, this ; jjcncr, jonc, jcneS, that, yonder; tcrjVdn*, tucfeUn', bciffclbc, the same ; fcerjcmcje, fcicjemge, iaeicnicjc, that ; n)c(cl)cr, twldx, rveicbc*, who, wliich ; felcbcr, feldx, fetd)C$, such ; jrtcr, Jcfce, jcfccC ? each jccj(id)cr, Kj}(idx, jtgftd)e, 5 alter, allc, allc^ all ; cinder, cinuy, ctni^c^ > sev eral- ctltdxr, ctftclx, c s ne ' se niancl)cr / inanc^c, manclx*, many a, &c. 58. PARADIGMS. SINGULAR. PLUKAL. Masc. Fern. Neu*. For all genders. N. ter gute, t)(e (jute, ba$ gate, G. be guten, fcer guten, be^ guten, . , , , D. bcm guteit, ber giiten, bem guten, A. ben guten, bte gttte, ba^ gute ; bie gitten, the good, ber guteti, of the good fti VJUitll, vj. \.iiys v^\_fvt, ben guten, to the good, bie guten, the good. I. Dtefer wctfe -JOtann, this wise man. SINGULAR. PLURAL, NOM. btefer roeife GEN. biefeS weffen DAT. biefem wetfen -D?anne Ace. tfefen met fen btefe roet'fen L_ btefer rceifen 9)?citiv^ btefen wet fen v^dnnenv btefe weifen 5Dtanner. II. 3ebe fc^one Sdime, each fair flower. SINGULAR, PLURAL. fd)6nen S3(umen? NOM. jcfe fd)bne , GEN. jeber fct)bnen QSuime, DAT. jeber fd)6nen SSlume, Ace. jebe fci)i>ne 33(ume; metier fd)6nen roetcfyen fd)bnen 33(nmen? c^icnen 5?(umen? 411 III. 3^ne3 grime Sefo, yonder green field. SINGULAR. PLURAL. jene cjrimen Jelber, jencr gnuien Jyetfcer, jenen gri'men gelfcern, jene cjrunen Jelber. NHM. jeneo cjritne Jve^r GJ:.\. jeneS gviuicn gelteS, DAT. jcncm cjrimen fid^e, Ace. jene3 grime Jelt ; So decline : tvrfclbc retfrc 58ctn, the same red wine ; Me K'fjVrc ^rucht (pi. Jsriicbti 1 )/ the better fruit; ivcldjcs ncujlc JUcib (pi. JUetfrcr) ? which newest garment 1 OBSERVATIONS. 1st, According to the usage of many writers the adjective rejects the n in the nom. and ace. plural, when it is preceded by one of the words c t n t $ c, some ; c 1 1 1 d) i*/ in c h r c or in c () r o r o, seve- ral ; in n n di o, r> t c I c, many ; a I ( c, all ; as, cilK' fictile Schulcr, all diligent scholars ; ptclc ctlc SKcnjdxn/ many noble men, &c. It is not necessary, however, to make this exception to the general rule. 2d, When the definite article, being preceded by a preposition, coalesces with it into one word ( 10), the inflection of the adjec- tive is not thereby altered ; e. g. t) u r d) 6 g r u n c Jcft, through the green field ; t m Q r c (j c n ^paufc, in the great house. THIRD DECLENSION. 59. An adjective is inflected according to the third declension, when it is preceded either by the in- definite article, by a personal or possessive pronoun, or by the singular of the indefinite numeral I e i n, no, none. It assumes the terminations of the first declension in the nominative singular of all genders (er, e, eg), and in the accusative singular feminine and neuter (e, e3), and the terminations of the second declension in all the remaining cases. The pronouns are : personal, id), fcu, er, fte, c, rot'r, t'fyr, fie, I, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they ; possessive, mem, bem, fein, linfer, euer, tl;v> my, thy, his, our, your, her (their). PARADIGMS. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masc. Fein. Neut. For all genders. fetne gitten, femer cwten, fetnen gnten, fetne guten. NOM. em filter, erne gate, em cjitte^, fetne cutten, GEN. eined cwten, etner guten, eineS guten, DAT. einem gnten, etner gnten, einem gnten, Ace. etnen guten, efrte gute, ein giiteS; 412 I. SINGULAR. NOM. met'n guter 95rufcer, GEN. metneS guten $3ruber, DAT. metnem guten 25niber, Ace. metnen guten 53ntber ] (jitter 33ruber, my good brother. PLURAL. metne guten SBrufcer, metner guten 93riifcer, meinen guten 53rufcern, metne guten 25riiber. II. ^e jungfte efter, her youngest sister. SINGULAR. NOM. tyre ji'tngfie ^cfyroefler, GEN. t^rer jungften ^cbwefler, DAT. tfyrer ji'mgjlen Ace. PLURAL. tyre' ji'tngjien ^(^mefl'ern/ tt)rer jungften (Bcfyweftern, tt)ren jiingflen ^d)W)ejiern, III. Unfer SINGULAR. NOM. unfer a ^^ GEN. itnfreS gro^en DAT. itnfcrm grofjen Ace. unfer / our large house. PLURAL. unfre grcgen ciufer, unfrer unfern grcgcn unfve So decline : few fofycnerer lacj (gen. 1a$e3), no finer day ; fetne ancjene^me D?etfe (pi. 0?eifen)^ l^ s pleasant journey ; Sinb (gen. StnbcS, pi. ^tnber), thy good child. Remark. The adjective is declined in the same manner when it follows one of the personal pronouns icb, I ; fcu, thou ; ivir, we ; iftr (ic)/ you ; except in the genitive case, where the definite ar- ticle must be supplied; e. g. tch nrmcr 9)?ann, 1 poor man; gen. in c t n c r, ^ c arincn 5^anne*> of me, the poor man ; dat. mtr ar^ men sojannc/ to me poor man; ace. nriebcirnicn iDDiann, me poor man. So also, tu cjutc Sautter, thou good mother ; gen. t) c t n c r, \> c r c\u? ten g^uttcr, &c. ; the guten Oeutc, you good people ; dat. eucl) cjutcn Ccuten ; ace. cud) gutcn Scute/ &c. OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 60. Obs. 1st. When adjectives, terminating in c f, e r x e n, are inflected, they frequently drop the c of those terminations for the sake of euphony ; as, em cfclcr (instead of efceler) S'ebn, a mag- nanimous son ; fcer ebne (for et> e n e) SS^cq, the smooth road ; Me bit? t r e (instead of Ottt etc) Jrncht, the bitter fruit. Sometimes this c is retained, and that of the syllable of inflection is rejected in its stead, especially in the dative case ; as, ein Ijcttrcr .pimmd, clear sky, gen. fine* fyettven .ptnmicte/ dat. c'tnem l)eit r n (not belt i* r e n or fjctt v e u) 413 jjDtmmcl, &c. ; ten cfc c ( n, rjctt c r n Jg>erjcn, to the generous, cheerful hearts. Obs. 2d. The attributive adjective is frequently left uninflected like the predicative. This is the case : 1st, When it is placed after its substantive, as the predicate of an abridged proposition ; as, tic .fittppc, f cl) r c f f lint) ft c t I, the cliff, rough and steep ; tic Uicfc, fret unt) f c f f c It c $ crgcfycn fid) in un* gcincjmcn SRaumcn ( aufc$, to the greatest pillar of our house. 4th. When two or more adjectives are con- nected with the same substantive, they all follow the same rules of inflection : I. utcr, tetl)cr, fcwtrct SBctn, good, red, pure wine. NOM. center, retf)cr, Icuitrcr SSktn, Bitten, rctf>cn, lautrcn DAT. c\utcm, rctbcm, tautcrm ^Bct Ace. gutcn, rct^cn, (autcrn SKcin. II. )ic rcifo, fc^onc, gate 5rud)t, the ripe, fair, good fruit. NOM. tie rctfc, fchonc, gutc ^ GEN. tcr rcifcn, fd)oncn, gutcn gruc^t/ u. 414 III. Unfct fd)8nc$, QvttncS ra$/ our fine, green grass. NOM. unfcr fd)onc$/ primes GEN. unfrcs fctyonw, gruncn rafc$, K. With respect to case I, however, usage is not decidedly estab- lished, as the last adjective frequently follows the inflection of the 1st declension in the nom. sing, and plur. only, and that of the 2d declension in all the remaining cases : tuarnu'/ frtfd)C 9DZtkb, warm, fresh milk, gen. and dat. warmer/ frifd) c n SOJtld) ; QUtcS/ wctjjcs Srefc, good white bread, gen. gutcS, rvcijk n Jftrotc*, dat. Qutcm/ tt?ctjj c u c/ pi. gute, rocijjc SSrofcc, gen. gutcr au'tpcn 53rctc, II. COMPARISON. 62. In German, as in English, there are two modes of comparing adjectives, called the terminational and the compound comparisons. The former makes the comparative and superlative by adding certain terminations to the simple form of the positive ; the latter by prefixing to it the adverbs of comparison : m e 1) r, more ; a in m e t ft c n or 1) 6 cf) (1, most. Rule I. The terminational comparative is formed by ad- ding e r, and the terminational superlative by adding (1 or e ft to the root of the positive ; e. g. frol), comp. frofy e r, superl. fro* fy e (1, glad, glader, gladest ; retd), reid) e r, reid) ft rich, richer, richest ; fd)btt> fdjoii e r, fd)6n ft/ beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. Rule II. Adjectives, containing the vowels a, C, it/ gener- ally modify them in the comparative and superlative degrees ; e. g. alt/ alter/ a Iteft, old, older, oldest ; a,ro, cjroger, (jrbgt, great, greater, greatest. 63. The vowels of the root, however, are not modified in the following instances : 1st, In all participles which have become susceptible of com- parison, by assuming the signification of adjectives ; as, rafcnb/ mad ; fcfylacjcnt*/ decisive; wfdjlaa/n/ cunning; tvnverfcn, abandoned, &c. ; e. g. rafcnb/ comp. rnfcnt) cr, superl. rafcnb ft. 2d, All adjectives containing the diphthong au; as, rnuli/ rough, comp. raufycr/ superl. raufycft; so: a/au/grey; tanb, deaf ; laut, loud, &c. 3d, Derivative adjectives terminating in c (/ e r/ c n, c/ or in one 415 of the affixes t> a r, fa m, r) a f t, i cj, i d) t, 1 t d) K., e. g. hm!ef, dark ; trccfrn, dry; rjagcr, slender ; fuvd)tbar, formidable; ratl^fcini, advisa- ble ; Ocfhaft, malicious; roaltto,, woody ; grcifid)t, grass-like; tljuns lid), feasible, &c. 4th, In the following : SMoft, pale ; f(ar, clear ; fcuft, gentle ; hint, variegated ; f ncipp, tight ; fatt, satisfied ; faM, fallow ; larmi, lame; fcbtaff/ slack ; folfd), false ; lc?, loose ; fd)(anf, slender ; fwbf joyful matt, wearied ; Parr, numb ; aerate, straight ; nierfd), brittle ; fte($, proud ; iKfunfc, healthy ; rtacft, naked; ffraff, stiff; c\lfltt/ smooth ; ptatt, flat; fhimm, dumb; t^c! t, hollow ; plump/ clumsy ; tell, mad ; I -eft, kind; rob, raw ; veil, full ; ft\M, bald ; runt>, round ; $al)m, tame, faro, stingy ; 64. When the adjective ends either in b, t, ft, e, , fd) or $, the c before the (t of the superlatives becomes essential for the sake of euphony. In all other cases it is commonly rejected ; e. g. inevfeb/ brittle, superl. mcvfd)cft; flclj/ proud, superL ftol$ c ft :c. ; but, f(ar, clear, superl. f(ar ft ; tapjvr, valiant, superl. tapfcc ft ; fdjuttiji, culpable, superl. fd)u{Mi) |1 2C. Polysyllables terminating in c(, cv or en, generally reject the c of this termination in the comparative, but resume it again in the superlative; e. g. cbef, comp. cfcUr (instead of cMcr), superl. ct> c ( ft ; fu'itcr, cheerful, comp. t)dt r c r, superl. fycit c r jit ; cr^ebcn/ de- voted, comp. cr^cb n c r x superl. crgcb c n ft. 65. Comparatives and superlatives are inflected like positive adjectives ; thus : 1. Better wine, 2. fairer flower, 3. greener field. N. Offerer 2etn, fd)onccc c^ 6cft c n 2ctnc$ K./ tie fdjonft e SBliune, gen. tcr fdjonft c n SMume K. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 66. The following adjectives are irregular in their com- parison : POSIT. COMP. SUPERL. gut, beflfer, bejt, good, better, best; bed), l)6l)er, fccdjft, high, higher, highest; nafye, nafcer, ndd)fl, near, nearer, nearest ; tn'ef, me^r, < ' J much, more, most. 416 Also the adverbs : gent, liefrer, am liebjlen, gladly, more gladly, most gladly , (wemg), mfnfcer, am mtnfceften, little, less, least. 67. There are a number of adjectives, derived from ad- verbs of place, which under a comparative form have a posi- tive signification, and hence their comparative is wanting : POSIT* SUPERL. fcer, bte, ba dufjeve, aitgerfle, outer, extreme, uttermost; it n a fytntere, fytnterile, hind, hindermost; n n n trmete, innerfte, inner, innermost ; tt tt n mtttlete, rwttelfte, middle, middlemost; n n n ntefcere, niefcerfte, lower, lowermost ; tf n n obere, cberfle, upper, uppermost; n n tt imtere, untetfle, under, undermost; H it n werbere, sorberjle, fore, foremost. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 68. Adverbs of manner, the form of which is generally the same with that of adjectives, are likewise susceptible of comparison; as, cjefcfyrmnfe, gefcfynnnber, fcfybn, fcfycwer, swiftly, more swiftly, beautifully, more beautifully. They express the superlative, however, by prefixing to it a m (a contraction for an bem, 10); as, am gefcfynnnfcften, am fcrjbnflen, most swiftly, most beautifully. But when no comparison, but simply eminence is to be denoted by the superlative, au f *, a contraction of the preposition mif with the accusative of the article (t>a*), is prefixed, or $11111, a contraction of the preposition $u with the dative of the article (Km) ; e. g-. a u f $ frcunMtcfoftc, 311 in fcbenftcn, most kindly, most beautifully; cr cmpfing mid) nuf? bof lichflc, he received me most courteously. The ad- verbial superlative of eminence, which is also called the absolute superlative, may likewise be expressed by the simple form of thai degree, or by the termination c n $ ; as, gtttt9ft, most kindly ; ins mj})!, most cordially ; fyecbftcnS, at the most ; ta'ngllen*/ at the longest. OBSERVATIONS. 69. Obs. 1. The plural of the comparative mcljr, more, is in c I) r c or m c f) t e r ?/ which is used as an indefinite numeral in the sense of the English several. Obs. 2. The two numerals, K't erfte x the first, bcr k|ti% the last, though superlatives in sense, give rise to new comparatives, fcer er fU r c and t)cr ( c t cr c, which correspond to the English the former the latter. Obs. 3. The compound comparative becomes necessary when 417 two adjectives, denoting qualities of different degrees, are predi- cated of the same person or thing ; e. g. cr tjlt m c 1) r fntt n(S warm/ he is rather cold than warm ; t>u luft ni c 1) r gclcfyrt a( flucj, thou art more learned than prudent. Obs. 4. The compound superlative becomes necessary when the indefinite article precedes ; e. g. cin bb'obft gtcuifcwuT Oittenfd), a most cruel man; cine 1) d) ft gcfal)rfid)C Slfifc, a most dangerous journey. Obs. 5. There are a number of particles (adverbs) which are frequently placed before adjectives of every degree of comparison to render their meaning intensive. They are : 1st, With the posi- tive, au&crft, extremely; 1) 3d) ft/ highly; fo fjr, very, &c. 3d, With the comparative, u t c (, much ; ID c t f or b c t n> c t 1 c w, by far ; n e d), yet, &c. 3d, With the superlative, bet we it cm/ by far; and the prefix a H f r ; e. g. f c fj r f cl) c n, very pretty ; w c i t grSjicr, by far greater ; a II c rfdjenjl, most beautiful of all. Obs. 6. In comparisons, af $ corresponds to the English than, and n>tc to the English as ; e. g. (Sic ftnfc alter nl$ id)/ you are older than I ; cr ift fo Qrcp n? t c fcin Stater, he is as tall as his father. III. USE AND GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 70. 1. Adjectives of every degree of comparison may be employed substantively ; but they even then retain the in- flection of adjectives ; e. g. fcer 2Bct'f e, the wise (man), sage ; ein 2'Beff e r, a sage ; tie @d)6ne/ the fair woman ; ta3 (rfycu lene, the sublime. 2. With respect to adjectives which are used substantively in the neuter gender, it is necessary to distinguish : 1st, Those which assume no termination, and which designate either some abstract quality, or some material named after that quality; e.g. fcciS 9? c d) t/ justice; cr frrtd)t fin rcinc* 2)cutfd)/ he speaks pure German ; ta$ SMci n> c t $, white lead ; XBcrttncc SB t a u, Prussian blue, &c. These are inflected like substantives of the earlier declension, and are used in the singular only ; as, fra$ Sfctou/ t)c? SBtoirf &c. 2d, Those which assume the terminations of the attributive adjec- tive and are inflected like it; e. g. ta$ (SJutc, the good (3d decl.) ; ctrcns utc^/ somethingr good (1st decl.); t>a$ rune/ the green; cin an^cS, a whole. 71. With respect to their signification, adjectives are di- vided into two classes, viz : 1st, such as make complete sense of themselves without the addition of any other word; as, gut, good ; grog, great, &c. 2d, Those which of themselves can- not express an entire idea, but require the addition of some 18* 418 complemental notion ; as, b e tt) ll 1, conscious of; ( o , free from, &c. The former may be termed absolute, the latter re- ' The complement of a relative adjective may either be the oblique case ( 49. 2d.) of a substantive (including all words used as such), or a verb in the infinitive with $ u . ADJECTIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 72. Adjectives signifying possibility, duty, necessity, easi- ness, difficulty, and the like, are followed by an infinitive with 3 u ; as, e$ tft mtr mcfyt m 6 9 1 1 d) 3 u 9 e fy en, it is not possible for me to go ; er tfl genotfytgt 3 it a r b e 1 1 e n, he is obliged to work ; berett 311 fampfen, ready to contend. In this connec- tion the infinitive, though active in form, is often passive in signi- fication ; (etd)t sit macfyen, easy to be done ; fcfyroer sit glauben, hard to be believed, &c. ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE OBLIQUE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 73. When relative adjectives are followed by a substantive, it is put either in the genitive, the dative, or the accusative. I. The adjectives governing the genitive are : fci'fcfu'fticj/ in want of; tuntucj, acquainted with ; IvfltfjVn, diligent in ; macbttg/ master of; fcfligt, authorized ; miifci', tired of; benefit, in need of; fd)utt% guilty of; K'ft>ut, conscious of; tf)eUf)aft, partaker of; Ctnocbent, remembering ; t)crt>ad)tifl, suspected of; fcil)tg, capable of ; tterlufHo, losing ; fret), happy in ; toll, full of ; gaturttC}, in expectation of; tviirfcu), worthy of. QCixnp, certain of ; Examples. (Stnct (prctct)C m a cl) 1 1 cj fctn/ to be master of a lan- guage ; cuu'tf 2Sctt>vccr)cn6 fd)Ulti^ guilty of a crime; fccr (Strafe ti) ii r t) i Q, worthy of punishment. 74. II. The adjectives which govern the dative case are : 1st, Such as are derived from verbs which govern the dative ; as, gcbcrfam, obedient to; frtcnjlfrar, bound in service to; t>cn, obliged to, &c. 419 2d. The following : cifinftd), resembling; angemcffen, suited to; cuu^cndwi, agreeable ; anjflcjjtfj, offensive ; frcfannt, known ; K'C|iU'iH, convenient ; fccnnijjt, known ; biinltd), serviceable ; ttgcn, own ; frcwfc, strange ; freimtltcb, friendly ; cjcgcnrucirttg, present to ; gclmtftg, fluent ; (jt'iuajj 1 / suited to ; jcnctgt, inclined ; gcivogcn, kind ; flcivacfyfi'n, equal to ; ijlcidb, like ; , gracious; n, salutary ; ^, kind ; tQ, troublesome ; Hob, dear, agreeable; v'ttiij, hurtful ; , near ; ), useful ; fci)x\Mtcl), injurious; fcbuiMi^ indebted ; trcu, true, faithful ; tibcrU'Qen, superior ; tnuvr^o^ticb, ever memorable to; t\'i^acbtuv suspected by ; ttcrbcrHtd), destructive to ; Dcrbapt, odious to ; l?trwfln^t / related ; t>ortl)ctll)aft, advantageous ; tvttrtg, loathsome ; nnllfommen/ welcome ; gugct^an, addicted to. Examples : tct ^cf)n tft fctncm SSatct a f) n I i d), the son resembles his father; ct iff fctncm 33crufc md)t g c tt) n d) f c n, he is not equal to his calling; cs tft itjm 6 c t ( fam, it is salutary to him ; nnc wc( Inn tch 3f)u i n f ct) u i t> i 9 ? how much do I owe you 1 cc t)l mtr t c r () a f' t, he is odious to me, &c. III. Adjectives denoting the measure, weight, or wor/A of a thing ; also age or duration of time, govern the accusative ; as, $n?olf spfimt) fd)U>cr, twelve pounds in weight; cincn Stngct: b r c 1 1, of the breadth of a finger ; cincn Sfatcr it) c r t f), worth a crown ; cr tfl jcfyn 3ttfyr a(t, he is ten years old ; funf Sa^re I a n Q, for five years, &c. NUMERALS. 75. Numerals are either definite or indefinite ; as, t) i e r, } c 1) n, four, ten ; t) i e (, a ( ( e r many, all. Definite numerals are divided into two classes : Cardinal and Ordinal. Cardinal numerals are such as express simply the number of persons or things in answer to the question " how many?" fcrei, three ; merstg, forty. Ordinal numerals designate the rank of a person or thing in a series ; as, fcer erjle, the first ; fcet atttolfte, the twelfth. 420 Ordinals are formed from cardinals by annexing the termi- nation ft e, when the cardinal ends in cj, and the termination tc in all other cases; as, ter an?an$t'g ft e, w'erte, the twen- tieth, fourth. Exceptions. The ordinal of ettt, one, is irregular: bet erftc (instead of fcct ctntc), the first. Instead of t>cr grocttc/ the second, it was formerly customary to say tec a n b c r e. 76. The following is a list of cardinal and ordinal numerals : CARDINAL. 1. dn, dn$, one; 2. $n>d, two ; 3. t>rd, three; 4. mcr, four; 5. fiinf, five ; 6. fed)*, six ; 7. futon, seven ; 8. d)t, eight; 9. twin, nine ; 10. jcbn, ten ; 11. c(f, eleven ; 12. $tr8lf, twelve, &c, 13. brdjcbn ; 14. wer$ebn ; 15. fiinftcfjn ; 16. jcd>pbtt; 17. ju'frenjcbn or fict^cfjn ; 18. 19. 20. 21. cin uni) 22. ^it)ct 30. brctO 31. ctnunD 40. rtc 50. fftnfttg; 00. fccbjt^; 70. ftebcnjig or \idw$ ; 80. nd)tjtjj ; 90. ncun^tg; 100. liuntcrt; 101. huntort unb etn$ ; 102. buntcrt unt) ^n?ci ; 103. ^onbcrt un^ trd, :c 200. ^cttiunbert ; 300. frrctyunbcrt ; , ORDINAL. ; crftc, the first. $tvdtc, ' second, britte, ' third, tricrti*, i fourth, ftinfte, ' fifth, fi'cbftc, * sixth. fu'lK'nte, ' seventh. ocbtc, ' eighth, neuntc, " ninth, gi'bnti*/ " tenth. ctftc, " eleventh, gtvclftc, " twelfth, &c. brdc()ntc. ftinf^cbntc. groan ji.qfte. dn unb [ grod unb c brct^tgftc. dn unb brdpujfte it. jicben^tgfte or ftcfytgjtc. ncun^igfte. bunbcrtjlc. bunbcrt unb cr|^c. bunbcrt unb ^njdtc. bunbcrt unb brtttc K. brdl)unbcrtftc. ad)tbunt>crtfK. ncunbunfrcrtftc. tciufcntflc. 421 CARDINAL. ORDINAL. 400. iricrfiunfccrt ; tct, tie,ta$ 500. ffttif bimbctt ; 600. fecbsbmrtcrt ; 700. pebcnrjuntert ; 800. ad)tbuntcrt ; 900. ncunfmntert; 1000. taufcnt) ; 2000. 3000. t>reitaufcnt>. 100,000. buntctttaufenb. 1,000,000. cine 93?tllten. 2,000,000. groct gjztUioncn. OBSERVATIONS. 77. Obs. 1. When c in stands in connection with other numerals, it is indeclinable ; as, e i n lint werjuj, forty one , e t n taufcnt) acfytfntntert fi'mf itnfc wer^ta,, 1845. In other ca- ses it is always inflected. This may be done in four different ways : 1st, If the numeral c i n, either alone or with an adjective, limits the meaning of a substantive, and is not preceded by any other de- clinable word, it follows the inflection of the indefinite article C t n, c t n c, ci n, and differs from it only by a greater stress of accentua- tion; e. g. ctn (ojuter) SHann, one (good) man; cine (gute) Jrau, one (good) woman ; c t n (cuiteS) JPtint*, one (good) child. 2d, When it stands entirely alone, either in an absolute sense or relating to some substantive understood, it is inflected like an ad- jective of the first declension c i n c r, e i n c, c i n c $, &c. ; e. g. and) ntd)t Since roar ta, not one even was there ; (Si n c n cn un$ roirl) fra$ 2ec$ treffen, the lot will fall on one of us ; cine mctnec @cl)ivcficrn, one of my sisters, &c. 3d, But if it is preceded either by the definite article t>Ct, t>ic,t>a$, or any other word having the characteristic terminations of the ar- ticle ( 57), it is declined like an adjective of the second declen- sion ; e. g. K*r cine 9Jtann, fcte cine S rciu / & a $ etne Jttnt), the one man, one woman, one child, &c. 4th, The numeral c i n follows, finally, the inflection of the third declension of adjectives, when it is preceded by a possessive pronoun, in e t n, t) ctn, f c i n/ &c. ; e. g. mctn c t n e t -tBriiK'r, my one bro- ther; ft'tnc cine cfyrccfkr, his one sister ; (Sucr c t n c $ spferfc, your one horse, &c. 78. Obs. 2. The numerals g ro e { and fe r e t are in- fleeted only when they are not preceded by the article or some other declinable word ; thus : 422 NOM. groci, brct ; GEN. gipctcr, bract ; DAT. groctcn, brctcn ; Ace. jwei, brcu Examples: mis ^roctcr ebct brcicr 3citgen 93?unb, from the mouth of two or three witnesses ; facjc c$ bed) j c n e n b r c i (not b r. c i e n) Srcunbcn, pray tell those three friends. Obs. 3. The remaining cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except that they assume e n in the dative case, when they are used substantively ; e. g. mtt e cf) f e n fafyrert, to ride in a coach with six (horses); cuif atfert JHeren frtecfyen, to crawl on hand and foot. But, mtt fed) c vO^ann, with six men; mtt t e r (Sofynen, with four sons. Ofo. 4. Instead of $ro C t, b c 1 b c, both, is frequently used, and is inflected like an adjective in the plural : nom. b ci b c, gen. b c U b c r, &c. ; b t c b c i b c n, gen. bet b c i b c n, &c. ; f c i n c b c i b c n, gen. f c t n c t c i b c n, &c. ; e. g. feme b c t b e n 93rut>et ftnb franf, both his brothers are sick ; bic bctbcn Jrcunbe tvorcn ba, both friends were there. The neuter singular, b c t b c $, refers to two different things, but is never applied to persons. It corresponds to the Eng- lish : both the one and the other ; as, fjdben (Sic ferob cbcr 9Bein? Scl) bflbc b e t b C ^. Have you bread or wine 1 I have both the one and the other. 79. Obs. 5. Most cardinal numerals are adjectives, which, however, like all other adjectives, may be used substan- tively. The words $ it n b e r t and X a u f e n t) are employed as collective nouns of the neuter gender, and are inflected as such : nom. ba3 )iint>ert, gen. be$ )unbert&, pi. bte )wtDerte ; e g i u $ u n b c v t e n, by hundreds ; 3 it X a it f e n b e n, by thousands. ( t n e Million is a noun of the feminine gen- der, and occurs only in connection with an article, Obs. 6. When numerals serve simply to denote cyphers, or the abstract notion of number, they are substantives of the feminine gender, the word 3 a M being understood ; as, bte C3 ft W) S r e t, the number three ; bte 2* t e r 3 1 g, the number forty. Ofo. 7. By means of the affixes et and ling, masculine sub- stantives of various significations are formed from cardinal num- bers ; e. g. cm 5) r c t c r, ctn c d) f c r, coins of three and six kreuzers ; ctn ?( cb t g t g c r, a man of eighty ; 3 n? c t u n b g n? a n 3 1 - Q e r, wine grown in 1822 ; 3 rot U i n cj, twin ; 5) r t U t u cj, triplet. Obs. 8. Ordinal numerals are regularly declined after the 423 manner of adjectives. When used substantively, their initial letter must be a capital, if a person is referred to ; as, bte Srften roerben bte 2eten fern, the first shall be last. 80. To the preceding classes of numerals may be added the following compounds, formed partly from cardinals, partly from ordinals, and partly from indefinite numerals : I. COMPOUNDS FORMED FROM CARDINAL AND INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 1st, Distributives ; formed by prefixing the adverb j e ; as, j e fi e b e n, by seven ; j e 3 e \) n, ten at a time, or as in Eng- lish, j m e t 11 n b s ro e t, two and two. 2d, Iteratives ; formed by adding the substantive 0? a I, time, etnmal, once; funfmal, five times; jebeSmal, each time ; welmal, many times, &c. Sometimes 9J? a ( is separat- ed and declined like a substantive; as, em -JO? a I, once; 311 gefyn vO? a I e n, ten times. This is always the case when it is preceded by an ordinal : ba3 erfte, jroette 5D?a(, the first, second time. 3d, Multiplied lives ; formed by annexing the affix fad), or the obsolete fdlttcj, fold; e. g. etnfad), sroetfad), simple, twofold, tenfold ; s t e ( f a cfy, manyfold ; ttg, an hundredfold, &c. 4th, Variatives ; which are indeclinable, and formed by adding the obsolete substantive let (meaning kind, manner), and inserting e t for the sake of euphony ; as, ei* n e r I e t, of one kind, all the same ; fcreierlei, of three kinds ; mcincfyerlet', welerlet, of various, of many kinds, &c. II. COMPOUND NUMERALS FORMED FROM ORDINALS. 81. 1st, Dimidiatives ; indeclinable adjectives formed by annexing J) a I b, half, to the ordinal ; as, t) r 1 1 1 e I) a I b, two and a half (literally third-half ^ meaning two whole and one half of a third] ; f ii n f t e 1) a I b, four and a half, &c. Instead of aroettefyalb/ anfcertfyalb is used, from the obsolete word ter anbere, the second ( 75. Exc.~). 2d, Ordinal adverbs in e n S ; as, e r jl e n , 3 tt> e 1 1 e n 3, 2 e 1) n ten 3, firstly, secondly, tenthly, &c. 3d, Partitives ; masculine substantives formed by means of the affix tel (from Ifyetl, part); e. g. ber Qrt'ttel, Q3ter? tel, 3 e &ntel/ ^unbertftel, the third, fourth, tenth, hun- dredth part. 424 INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 82. The indefinite numerals are as follows : dtfe, all ; md)t3, nothing ; gefammt, ? complete, etmcje, ) fammtlufr, S entire ; etltdje, > JJJJ, gcm$, all, whole ; mancfye, } Jeter, } each wel, much, many ; jebroeber, > e ' . mcfcr, more ; fegltdjer, } * ' genitg, enough ; few, no, no one ; ettt>a>3, some, a little. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. The indefinite numerals serve either to express num. ber, as, etntge, edtcfye, mandje, jeber or jecjltcfyer; 01 quantity, as, etroa3, gang; or icrt/i, as, e n t a S, some, is indeclinable, and usually connected with collective nouns or names of materials ; e. g. c t ro a 6 (SK'tt, some money ; c t n> n c frtfdxS 95?flfff r x some fresh water. When, as a substantive, it corresponds to something, it is an indefinite pronoun ( 92). 425 2d, (5$ a n 3 indicates the completeness of an object and is opposed to half, part, &c. ; ber, bte, bag a n J c, the entire, whole ; ctn 9 a nt $ e 6 3tabr, a whole year. It is inflected like adjectives ; but before neuter names of places and countries' it is always indeclinable ; as, Q a n 3 Xmcrifa, cnben, all America, London. 85. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING NUMBER AND QUANTITY BOTH. 1st, ?(l f e r, a I I c, a ( ( c , all, in the plural implies number, and in the singular quantity ; e. g. alter & c t n, all the wine ; a II c 9}? itch, all the milk ; and often without any termination ( 81,. Obs. 2.);att btefer etn, all this wine; alt bas iBrob, all the bread ; a 1 1 c Me iiSafoter, btc ficbcn (cld)C a If eg (not a 1 1 e, $ 57), all which ; l>et b i e f e m a 1 1 c m, in all this, &c. The neuter singular sometimes designates number in the most inde- finite manner; e. g. a 1 1 c 5 rennet, rettct, flud)tet, all are running, sa- ving, rescuing. "When the English all is equivalent to the whole, it is rendered by the German q a n 5 ; as, all the hour, all the day, bte 9 a n 3 c (Ettinbe, ben g a n 5 e n Sag. 2d, & c t n, i e t n c, ! e t n, no, none, is declined' like the indefinite article tin, etne, etn, when it stands in connection with a substan- tive ; and like an adjective of the first declension, Reiner/ 6 c t n c, f e t n e $, when the substantive is not expressed ; as, f c t n SXftenfd), no man ; Ijojl )u cm ittud) ? 3d) r)abc f c t n e * ; hast thou a book ? I have none ; er Ijat f e t n e Jreunbe, he has no friends. 3d, t e t c r, ti e \ c, in c ( e $, n? c n 1 9 e r, iv e n t 9 c, ro e n t 9 c $, &c. ; e. g. e^ fonnen fieri nur 8 e n t q e reciicren, but few can govern themselves ; id) effe ritd)t IM c t e ^rucbt, I do not eat many kinds of fruit. When an article or pronoun precedes, incl and tucmg must be inflected, even if they refer to quantity ; e. g. tie D t c (c n crte, the many words; fetn n> e n t ge ^ ctb, his little money, &c. 5th, The comparatives m e b r, more, and rt) e n t g e r, less, are not generally inflected, except m e t)t cr e x the plural of metjr, when it assumes the signification of several ( 69). 426 86. OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS. Obs. 1. If numerals stand in connection with substantives which express a definite number, measure, or weight, the Ger- man idiom requires the substantive to be put into the singular ( 26) ; as, jroblf ty f n b, twelve pounds ; jwet t it cf, two pieces. Obs. 2. Numerals which denote a part of a greater num- ber or multitude of objects, are followed by a genitive of the whole, or by the dative with the preposition a n 6, from among ; n n t e r, among ; x> o n, of ; e. g. t r e t f e in e r 5tinber, three of his children; fcer erfle son meinen greunfcen, the first of my friends ; $H I ( e li n t e r 1 1)11011, many among them. Obs. 3. When the genitive of the whole is a personal pro- noun, it always precedes the numeral ; as, e$ ftnb it n f e r 3 tt> a n $ t g, there are twenty of us ; e roerben i () r e r m'cfyt i e I e fetn, there will not be many of them. O6^. 4. When a definite number is to be stated approxi- mately, or with uncertainty, the adverbs and prepositions em- ployed in German for that purpose are : e t tt) a, something like; ungefafyr, about; b etna fee, fa ft, almost; fa urn, scarcely ; $ e 9 e n, bet, an t) i e, nearly, about ; e. g. fca spferb ifl nng ef ai)r fynnbert "IMcr roertfy, tne horse is worth about a hundred crowns ; cv ifl b e i n a f) e or an fc i e fnnfsia, 3afyr alt, he is nearly fifty years of age. Ofo. 5. The word 6t$ (till, to) is used when a number can be stated only KS fluctuating between two given numbers ; as, i c r b t f ii n f tiiufcnt) 9)Jann, from four to five thousand men ; jivan^a, fciS ttdfncj 3l)atcr, about twenty or thirty crowns. Obs. 6. The English upward is rendered by u n ft c tt i cf) C or n t) c t n 1 9 c ; as, Da* .pans ill n c u n $ t g u n t) c t ( i df) c 5u|} f)ecf), the house is upward of ninety feet high, or in conversational Ger- man often, c 1 1 i d) c n e 11 n $ t g. Obs. 7. The English either and neither have no corresponding words in German, and are rendered by c i n c r t) n b c i fe c n/ one of the two, and f c i n c r t o n b c 1 1> c n, none of the two. 87. Obs. 8. Numerals are sometimes employed ellipti- cally without a substantive, when a point of time is expressed; e. g. tfl e3 nod) ntd)t $tv blf ? is it not twelve yet? (J3 fyat eben fc r e i gefcfylagcit, it has just struck three. In these cases the word U b r or an t e r II t) r, o'clock, is to be supplied. In the same manner ordinal numerals are used, when the day of the month is to be denoted ; e. g. ten ttjiettielften t?aben 427 nnr ? what day of the month is it ? 2Btr fyafcen fc e n $ tt> a it - 3 t 3 ft e it (Tag be3 Senate), it is the twentieth. When in connection with a date the name of the month is given, the preposition of is never expressed in German; as, ten funftcii 932 a t, the fifth of May ; am t> r 1 1 1 c u 2C u Q u ft, on the third of August, &c. PRONOUNS. 88. Pronouns are words which serve as the sub- stitutes of nouns. Pronouns are divided into Personal, Possessive, De- monstrative, Determinative, Relative, and Interrogative. I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 89. A personal pronoun is one which simply indicates the relation of personality ; i. e. whether the substantive rep- resented be the person speaking (t d), tt) t r, I, we), or spoken to (b u, i fy r, thou, ye), or spoken of (e r, ft e, e 3, ft e, he, she, it, they). Personal pronouns are declined as follows : FIRST PERSON (FOR ALL GENDERS). SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. id), I, GEN. metner (mein), of me, DAT. nut, to me, Ace. mid), me ; NOM. twr, we, GEN. unfer, of us, DAT. un^ r to us, Ace. un, us. SECOND PERSON (FOR ALL GENDERS). SINGULAR. PLURAL. NOM. tfyr, ye or you, GEN. eiier, of you, DAT. end), to you, Ace. end), ye or you. NOM. til, thou, GEN. fretner (bent), of thee, DAT. bit, to thee, Ace. bid), thee ; THIRD PERSON. SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. NOM. er, he, fte, she, e$, it, GEN. feiner (fetn), of him, tferer, of her, fetner (fetn), of it, DAT. tfym ) to him, tl)r ? n - to her, tt)m \ to it, Ace. tfyn I Ph him -fte $' lu; ' her; e^ } P^/ it. 428 PLURAL. For all genders. NOM. fte, they; GEN. tfyrer, of them ; DAT. tl)nert ? r , to them ; Ace. fte $ |ICP ' them. ^ 90. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. The genitives m c t n c r, fc c i n c r, f e t n e r, now gener- ally take the place of the earlier forms m c t n, t> etn, f c i n, which are found only in poetry, and in certain familiar expressions ; as, ttetcu'O nictn md>t, forget me not ; qefcenfc nu'tn, remember me. Obs. 2. When the prepositions f) a ( c n, rot* fl e n, on account of, and urn rot ((en, for the sake of, are compounded with the geni- tives m c t n, t) c i n, f c t n, if) r, the syllable ct is inserted for the sake of euphony ; e. g. me i n c t - , t> c t n c t - , f c i n c t - , \\jrct: ft a I 1' n (roc^cn), on my, thy, his, her account. The genitives n f c r and ^ u c r take t simply : urn u n f c r t ro i ( ( c n, for our sake ; c u r c t n? e q c n, on your account. Obs. 3. The word fid) (sibi, se) is the reflexive pronoun for the gen. and dat. of the third person, both singular and plural. It is used in propositions, in which the action of the verb terminates in the subject itself, from whence it proceeded. The oblique cases of the first and second persons, as well as the gen. of the third (feiner, t()rer), do not possess a separate form of the reflexive, and hence they are themselves employed in a reflexive sense ; e. g. id) fd)ante mid)/ I am ashamed (lit. I shame myself) ; bu foK'ft bid), thou praisest thyself. In these instances, however, the indeclina- ble word f e ( t> ft or fc I b c r is added, whenever emphasis or per- spicuity require it ; e. g. f c t n c r f c I 11 ntd)t fcbenen, not to spare one's self; mtr fclber, to myself; bid) fclbft, thyself. When joined to the nominative of the first, second or third persons, feftft or fclbcr is intensive; as, id) fctbcr farm fie rctten, 1 myself can rescue her ; u f e ( ft mupt rtd)tcn, thou thyself must be the judge ; fcer .Ronifl fc (bft erfcbtcn, the king appeared in person. Obs. 4. There is one reciprocal pronoun in German ct nan bet (contracted for c t n c r ben a n t) e r n), one another, each other. Instead of this, however, the reflexive pronouns are often employed in a reciprocal sense in the plural ; as, roir fennen u n $ or cincinz t) c r, we know each other ; fte $anfen fi d) or m i t c t n a n t) c r, they are quarrelling with each other. 91. Obs. 5. In poetry, and when addressing the Supreme Being, their intimate friends or families, the Germans employ the second person singular, u. In polite conversation, however, they al- ways address each other in the third person plural, t e x gen. 5 ^' r ev, dat. 3 f) n e n, ace. t e ; e. g. ich tnnfe 3 ft n e n, I thank you ; roc cjehcn (Ste fmi ? where are you going! It is also customary for superiors to address their dependants and others of inferior rank in the second person plural (3 f) r, (' U d), you, to you), or in 429 the third person singular ((5r, (Sic, he, she} ; e. g. iva? fyat (5r ^ (>rnd)t ? what have you brought 1 In writing, both the personal and possessive pronouns relating to the person addressed, must al- ways begin with a capital letter; e. g. id) bittc f)n) um 3br (X'tn, (vm'r) J^ucb, I beg you to give me your book. Obs. 6. The neuter pronoun cs is never used in the genitive and dative cases (f c t n cr, t b m) except when it relates to a per- son. When a thing is referred to, the expressions of it, of them, to it, with it, are either rendered by the demonstrative pronouns bcffen, t>crcn, or by an adverbial pronoun, t) a $ u, t> a mi f, t) a r a n &c. ; e. g. have you much of it? fyabcn (Sic ttffftl iM ? what do you wish with it 1 } n?Q6 lucllcn @U* t> a mi t (see pages 20 and 142)? Obs. 7. The pronoun c$ has often a very indefinite significa- tion, sometimes corresponding to the English " it, 11 sometimes to the unaccented " there," but frequently it is expletive, and cannot be rendered at all. It is employed : 1st, As the subject of impersonal verbs, or such as appear to be used impersonally; as, cs tonncrt, c$ bltgt, it thunders, it lightens ; c $ f r c u t m i d), I am glad ; c $ 3 i t 2 c u 1 1, there are men. 2d, It simply stands as the representative of the subject of a proposition, when its order is inverted and the predicate comes first ; as, c $ fullt fid) t> c r p c i d) c r, c $ K'bnt (id) t> a $ a 3 (expletive), the granary is replenished, the house expands ; c $ fint) incbt cOcn fd)tcd)tc Banner, they are by no means worthless men. The c of the c$ is often elided; as, Ottncj'S mir, bring it to me ; cr f) a t ' $ Qctfyan, he has done it. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 92. Among personal pronouns are properly included the following, which, however, represent the third person only, and in the most indefinite manner : 3 ? w a n fc, S t n e r, some one, some body ; 3^^^^^^nn, every one, every body ; $K t c m a n b, S c t n c r, no one, nobody ; man, one, they, people (corresponding to the French on). To these may be added c t tt> a $, something, and n t d) 1 3, nothing. 9)?an, etroaS and ntcfytS are indeclinable. and Se^rmann are declined as follows : NOM. 3ero unfer, ( unfere^, itnfreS, of our, unferS, ' unferem, unfrem, to our, . unferm, ^ unfer, our. 431 PLURAL. For all genders. NOM. imfeve, iinfre, our, GEN. unferer, unfrer, of our, DAT. unferert, nnjVen, to our, Ace. unfere, iinfre, our. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. I. Of the remaining pronouns of this class, en c r, your, is declined like u n fc r, and the others like m c t n. It will he per- ceived that the remark made respecting euphonic changes in ad- jectives ending in c I, er, en, unaccented ( 60. Obs. 1st.), is also applicable in the case of u nfcr. Obs. 2. The word e t cj c n, own, is often joined to possessive pronouns to make the notion of possession more prominent ; as, iiictn ctcjnct 9?ecf, my own coat; unfcc eigncg jUnfc, our own child. Obs. 3. It will be perceived, that for the third person singular there are two forms of the possessive, viz : f c t n/ when the gender of the possessor is masculine or neuter, and t f) r, when it is femi- nine. Each of these again indicates, by means of its terminations, the gender of the object possessed, with which possessive pronouns, like all other adjectives, must agree in gender, number and case ; e. g. f c t n (iljr) flSatcr, f c t n c (tt)rc) Gutter, f c t n (tbr) JBucl), his (her) father, his (her) mother, his (her) book. Obs. 4. When a possessive pronoun constitutes the predicate to a substantive, or to a pronoun denoting a determinate object, it re- mains like adjectives, uninflected ; as, fcn* 93ucb ill fctn, the book is his ; roc9 t)l tcr JRubm ? 9?uc > c i n, nut 5) c t n ! Whose is the glory 1 Thine, only thine ! ( 52, 1st.) Obs. 5. In addressing persons of rank, it was formerly custom- ary to use 3 b t o instead of the third person feminine 3 f) t e, her, and also in place of (Su c r, your ; e. g. 3 b t (now 3 b t c) 93?ojes flat Me .^oniqtnn, her Majesty the queen; 3b ro ((Sur c) sjftoji'ftat bflOcn nrir Ocfcbtcn/ your Majesty has commanded me. In written communications the pronouns (urc, your, cine/ his, and (Seiner, to his, are commonly contracted into ( iu, e., and r. ; e. g. (Sn;. iDurcfylaucfyt, your Highness; / feme " fetntge, his, tfyrer, t^re, tfyreS, it n n tfyre " tfyrfge, hers, unferer, itnfere, unfereS, r/ /< n unfre " imfrtcje, ours, eurer, eure, eure^, ff ^ eure " eurtge, yours, t'fyrer, t^re r t^re^, ff ^ f , t^re " t^rtge, theirs, 3fyrer, 3f)^^ 3^^^ (in polite conversation) JJfyre or3t)ru ge, yours. 96. The inflection of possessive pronouns, both absolute and conjunctive, may be illustrated by the following examples : I. My brother and his. SINGULAR. NOM. nicin 23rubcr unb fotncr, tec fctntgc ; GEN. mcincS J#rut>cr$ unl) fctncs, t>c^ fctnigcn ; DAT. mcincm 93ru^cc unb fcincm/ fccm fctntgcn ; Ace. mcincn JBrut>cr unt> fctnc^ ben fctnt^cn. PLURAL. NOM. mctnc SBrtibcr unb fctn^ tie fciniqcn ; GEN. mctncc S^rubec unb fetncr, ber fetnigcn ; DAT. mctncu SBrubern unb fetncn, ben feintcjcn; Ace. mctnc JBriiber unb fetne, btc fctntgcn. II. Her sister and mine. NOM. if)rc @d)tvcf!cr unb nictnc, bte mctnigc ; GEN. U)rer (BVbrucjIei* unb mctncr/ ber mctnujcn ; DAT. t()rec djivcftcr unb meincr, ber mctntgcn K. III. Our house and theirs. NOM. unfec ^>au^ unb tfcre^/ ba$ il^rigc ; GEN. unfre^ &aufc$ unb ihre^ be^ iljvtgcn ; DAT. unfecm ^aufe unb tfyrcm, bem tljrtQen K. Examples. 3ft bt$> %fa DTecjenfd&trm (masc.) r 3^ l ltnte (fern.), 3t)t ^(etb (neut.) ? 3a, c tfi: m e t n e r, ber meute, t)er meuncje metne, tie metrte, bte metnt^e met? neS, t)a^ metne, ba metnfge; is this your umbrella, your ink, your garment 1 Yes, it is mine (i. e. my umbrella, my ink, my garment). Remark. The absolute possessive pronouns are sometimes em- ployed substantively, in which case their initial must always be a 433 capital letter ( 11); as, ta$ 9ft c i n t c, ) c t n t g e, t e, b a , this, that. J)tefer and jener are declined like adjectives of the first de- clension, thus : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masc. Fern. Neuf. For all genders. fct'efe, these, ttefer, of these, btefetr/to these, fctefe, these. 98. The demonstrative pronoun b e r, fc t e, t a ^ may supply the place of either bt'efer or jener. When it stands in connection with a substantive, or any word used as such, it is inflected like the definite article ( 3), and differs from it only by a stronger accentuation. But when it is used abso- lutely, it deviates from the inflection of the article in the gen- itive singular, and in the genitive and dative plural, thus : SINGULAR. Masc. Fein. Neut. NOM. &er, tfj$\ t)M this, that; NOM. btefer, btefe, bt'efeS (bt'e), this, GEN. btefeS, btefer, bt'efeS, of this, DAT. btefem, btefer, btefem, to this, Ace. btefen, btefe, bt'efed (bt'e), this ; GEN. *> W een, f thi I beg, ^ tier, ^ bep, ^ DAT. bem, ber, bent, to this, that; Ace. ben, bie, ba3, this, that; PLURAL, For all genders. NOM. bte, these, those ; GEN. beren, of these, those; DAT. benen, to these, those ; Ace. bte, these, those. 434 99. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. iDtcfct implies proximity either of space or time to the person speaking, and hence it is frequently equivalent to the English the latter. 3 ? " c r / on tne other hand, refers to some- thing well-known (the Latin ille}, already mentioned^ or remote, and hence it is often rendered by the former. Obs. 2. The neuter pronouns l> t c s and fc a $ are, like the in- definite co ( 91. Obs. 7), often employed to represent the subject of a proposition in the most general and indefinite manner, some- times even without any distinction of gender or number ; e. g. I s a $ ill cm gran^ejV, that is a Frenchman; l> t c r> f t n t> incinc l^ltcrn, these are my parents ; t) n $ finl 9Mtvn, those are pinks. Obs. 3. jsDcjj is the more ancient form of the genitive singular masculine and neuter, now only used in the more elevated style of poetry and in composition ; as, fce I) a ( b, t> e f} ro t- $ c n, on that ac- count ; t> c p frcuc fid) t5 (Srtrtftd)/ let the earth rejoice in it. IV. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 100. Determinative pronouns serve to make prominent the person or object which is the antece- dent of a subsequent relative clause. They are : fccr, fcie, fca, that ; fcerjem'cje, biejenuje, ge, he, she, it, that person (who) ; terfelbe, fctefclbe, the same; the obsolete fclbtcjcr/ felbtcjc, felbigeS, the same ; and folcbcr, feldje, fold)c^ (talis), such. Ser, tie, ta^ r when standing with a substantive, is inflected like the article ( 3), and when used absolutely, like the de- monstrative pronoun fcer, btc, fcaS, except that in the genitive plural it has t) e r e r instead of be r en j e. g. ta3 Scfytcffat beret ift batt, bte fid) felbjl gu erna^ren nid)t tm tante ftnb, the fate of those is hard, who are not able to support them- selves. 101. oldjer, when used without the article, follows the inflection of the first declension of adjectives, but when prece- ded by the indefinite article etn, cine/ em, it is inflected like an adjective of the third declension, thus : NOM. felcfyer, fold>e, ;<< >"' lititen, NOM. etn fetefyer, etne fcldje, etn fv * w w v/ GEN. etne fold}en, etnet folc^en, eineS fold; en, &;c. Jetjenige and b e r f e I b e are compounds, of which 435 both components are declined ; ber, tie, ba following the in- flection of the definite article, and j c n i g and f e I fc c that of the second declension of adjectives : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. NOM. berjenfge, btejentge, basjemge, I NOM. btejemgen, GKX. beSjentgen, berjemgen, beajemgen, DAT. bcmjemgen, berjemgen, bemjemgen, Ace. benjemgert, btejemge, bciSjenige 5 GEX. bcrjemgen, DAT. benjemgen, Ace. btejemgen. 102. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. Determinative pronouns can always be distinguished from demonstratives by the relative clause by which they are gen- erally followed. Examples : t> c r \ c n t g e, iv c I cb e r t> i e 2i> i \- f e n fd) a f r c n lie b t, nxib* feine 9)Zuj;c cuf cine angenefjmc 7(rt 311 be* mien, he who is fond of the sciences, is never at a loss how to improve his leisure hours pleasantly; cr fyat bcnfclbcn JeMec gemacbt, ID c ( d) e n id) geniad)t Oabe, he has made the same mistake, which Ijiavemade; trauc ben en ntc/ t>ic *Dir fdjmcidjctn, never put confidence in those, who flatter you. Obs. 2. The determinative pronouns may be employed either adjectively or substantively. 3)crjenige serves simply to point out emphatically the antecedent without any other modification ; K'rfdbc adds to it the notion of identity, which is often made intensive by the particle e b c n ; as, e b e n I'crfeKH 1 / the very same, eldu'r im- plies a reference to the kind or constitution of persons or things ; e. g. f c ( d) e Sriid)t, such fruit ; c t n f c (d) e r iBater, such a father. When jchbcr, in conformity with the English idiom, is followed by the indefinite article, it is not inflected, f old) c t n Sftann/ such a man ; fold) ctncm Sohne, to such a son. Sometimes the syllable of inflection is likewise dropped, when it is accompanied by an adjec- tive ; as, fold) gre&c 83ffdKi6enl)dt, such great modesty. Obs. 3. )et and fcetfelbe often stand simply as the repre- sentatives of the personal pronouns er, fie, c $, or of the posses- sives fetn, ihr, his, hers, when two persons mentioned in the same or in a previous sentence are to be clearly distinguished from each other; e. g. ct fant) ben iCater unb bcffen (5obn ^u .^aufc, he found the father and his (i. e. the father's) son at home; bcr 3ttng* Itn^ fd)rteO fetnem greunte fiber tn^ besorfteljenbe Sd)icffa( bcffelbcn/ the youn^ man wrote to his friend concerning his (the friend's) fu- ture destiny ; btcfer 9DJann tljut ollee fiir fdncn SJsruber, abet berfcU be ructii t(jm fetnen 5)nu! bapr, this man does every thing for his brother, but he (the brother) is not grateful for it. V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 103. A relative pronoun is one which serves to connect a limiting or explanatory clause to a preceding 436 noun, to which it relates, and which is called its ante- cedent. The German language has four relative pronouns, viz : fcer, tie, fcaS, and roelcfyer, TOelcfye, TOelcfyeS, who, which ; roer, TOaS, who, what, and the obsolete and indeclinable f o 104. 2Belcfyer is the only pronoun of this class which may stand adjectively in connection with a substantive. It is declined like an adjective of the first declension, thus : SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. Neut. NOM. TOelcfyer, TOelcfye, TOelcfyeS, who, which, GEN. TOelcfyeS, TOelcfyer, welched, whose, of which, DAT. TOelcfyem, TOelcfyer, welcfyem, to w r hom, to which, Ace. TOelcfyen, weldje, welc^e^, whom, which. PLURAL. ' For all genders. NOM. roelcfye, who, which, GEN. roelcfyer, whose, of which, DAT. roeldjert, to whom, to which, Ace. roelcfye, whom, which. The relative t e r is inflected like the demonstrative fcer, bte, ba$ ( 98). The plural of w e r and n> a 3 is wanting ; in the singular they are thus declined : Masc. and Fem. Neut. NOM. roer, who, he who, she who, GEN. wc ff en ' I whose, of whom, TO eg, ) DAT. TO em, to whom, Ace. TO en, whom ; which, what, meg, of which, of what, t, to which, to what, which, what. 105. OBSERVATIONS. Ofo. 1. The pronouns roct and n? a never relate to an indi- vidual or determinate object, but to such only as are of the most general and indefinite character. Hence they are commonly em- ployed after the neuter demonstrative t>a $, or the indefinite numer- als ollcS, all, ctrociS, something, mcincfycS, many a (thing-), Diet, much, n> c n i a S, t a 6 id) ^abe, gcOc id) it, that which I have, I give thee ; a U c *, tt) a 5 nut tfycucr ift, all that is dear tome. But, bicfcr ^naOc (definite), roc Id) cr in tic d)u(c gcfjt, this boy who goes to school ; t>te iKcfc, rv c I d) c Wuht, the rose which blossoms. Obs. 2. The forms vo c r, n> c f f c n, n> c m, n? c n relate to persons only, of either sex ; n? a 6 and the genitive n? e p only to things and 437 abstract terms. 93$ c {J is also used in the compounds and roe p () a 1 6 e n, wherefore, on which account. Ofo. 3. On account of this indefinite signification of ro c t and tt> a $, their antecedent is frequently omitted, and they become equi- valent to t> e r j c n t g c rc> e t cb c r, b i c j c n i 9 c n? e t d) c, t) a 5 i c n is 9 e n? eld) c i, he who, she who, that which ; e. g. nx r ctnfam fit in feinct hammer unt) (cfyrocrc, btttvc Sbronen roetnt (9teatU)/ Ae w^o sits in his lonely chamber, shedding the heavy, bitter tear; n?o$ fein nw, gcfd)c()C ! That which must needs be, let it come to pass ! Sometimes, however, to give emphasis to the expression, the de- terminative t>er, trie, t>ci$ is added to the main proposition, which in this construction always follows the relative clause ; e. g. tu e r ntd)t arbettcn iwtt, bet fell aucfy nid)t ejfen, 7*e who is not willing to labour, neither shall he eat. Obs. 4. The compound relatives whoever-) whatever, whosoever, &c., are rendered in German by annexing ciud) or t miner to roer or nxi ; e. g. re c r and) (t m m c r), n? a $ a u cb (t m m c r), &c. Obs. 5. After personal pronouns of the first and second persons, the relative tv e ( d) e r is never used, but always & e r ; e. g. t d), t) c r (not nxldxr) id) ttor )ir ftefyc, I who am standing before thee ; 5) u, t e r >u mctn ctgcncr ^Brubcr luft, thou who art mine own brother. It will be perceived from these examples, that in German the personal pronouns (t ch, t) u) are repeated after the relative ; when- ever this is the case, the verb of the relative clause must agree in person with the personal pronoun ; otherwise it is put in the third person, and agrees with the relative ; e. g. Unfcr >atcr, t) c r ) u In ft in fccin Jptmmct, our father who art in heaven ; 2) u, t) e r fo trie I lie f t unt) fo rocnti) t) c n i t/ thou, who readest so much and thinkest so little. Obs. 6. Instead of ro e t d) e ^ ro c ( d) e r x pi. w c I df) e r x the gen- itives of the relative ivdolxr, the Germans regularly substitute 1) e f * f I*, to C it, pi. b C r etl ; the genitives of n>c(d)cr being only used when the relative is employed adjectively ( 104); e. g. t>ct ^cmn, t> c f f e n (not n? c ( d) c 6) (ef)n id) fcnne, the man whose son I am ac- quainted with; tic iBaume, t>e r en (not tue(d)cr) ltit()en aOqcfallen ftnb, the trees, the blossoms of which have perished. But, teuton/ tt>eid)C^ ^pbifcfcpbcn ^rincipta tcf) gctefcn Ijabe, Newton, the Princi- pia of which philosopher I have read. 0s. 7. The use of the relative f o, instead of ro c I d) e r and t> e r, is antiquated. It occurs only occasionally in poetry, as, 3lb'$dKn fchtummcrt, fo tor Sautter Jrcufrc/ fo t>er tclj t)c ^)orfe^ war, Rosetta sleeps (in death), who once was the joy of her mother, the pride of the place. VI. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 106. Interrogative pronouns are employed in asking questions. They are : 1st, wer? wa$? who? what? which are al- 438 ways used substantively ; 2d, welder, ro e I d) e, tt> e I d) e 3 ? which, what 1 used substantively and adjectively both ; and 3d, tt> a fiir etn, eine, etn? what sort of ? The plural of roer, roaS is wanting ; the singular is declined thus : Masc. and Fern. Neut. NOM. ttjer, who? roa$, what? GEN. ttjeffen or roe, whose? (n)e), of what? wcjn,* to what ? was, what ? DAT. rcem, to whom ? Ace. wen, whom? The interrogative roelcfyer is inflected precisely like the re- lative ( 104). 107. When nja fiir efn stands in immediate connection with a substantive, the e t n, which is the only declinable part, follows the inflection of the indefinite article in the singular number. In the plural the pronoun is simply n> a 3 f it r. What sort of a tree, a flower, a book ? SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. Neut. NOM. roa3 fur etn 93aum, ei'ne 35htme, etn GEN. roaS fiir etne SSaumeS, enter 53lume, etne DAT. waS fiir etneut SBattme, etner QShtme, etnem S3ud)e? Ace. roa$ fiir etnen ^Saum, etne SSlume, etn Q3ud)? What sort of trees, flowers, books ? PLURAL. NOM. roaS fiir 3cutme, 23(umen, S3iic^er ? GEN. on rcaS fiir Mailmen, SSdimen, S5iid)ern? DAT. waS fiir ^Sditmen, SSlumen, SSiicfyern? Ace. tt)a fiir SSciume, S3(umen, S3iic^er? But if the substantive, to which roa fiir etn relates, is not expressed, it is declined in the singular only, like an adjective of the first declension, thus : Masc. Fern. Neut. NOM. roa fiir etner, etne, etneS, GEN. roa$ fiir etned/ efner, eineS, DAT. n>a fiir etnem, etner, etnem, Ace. roaS fiir et'nen, etne, etne^. * With respect to the pivnominal adverbs, which supply the place of the oblique cases of demonstrative, relative and interrogative pronouns, see the remarks on ADVERBS, below. 439 108. OBSERVATIONS. Obs. 1. The genitive tucffen, and the dative ID cm, are gener- ally applicable to persons only, and not to things, except the ab- breviated form iv cO in composition; as, wcfjbnlb, ivcfhvcgcn, wherefore, on what account ; e. g. ivevf)a((> toft )u gefemuicn ? wherefore hast thou come? ivef'ivcjjen ivcint fie? why does she weep 1 Ohs. 2. The pronouns run $ f u vein and tv c f d), the nninflected form of ivdofocr, are sometimes used in exclamations of surprise ; e. g. s ll>flj> fiir ctu JBauni ! What a tree! Scltf, iveld) etn SKcnfel) ! Lo, what a man ! >> c t d> Kief K'$ &tmmc($ l)ab id) wefl* (jifdrtcnt'ert ! What heaven-sent fortune 1 have cast away ! Obs. 3. $ c r and iv n $ are employed when inquiry is made after a person or thing in the most general and indefinite manner. CSeUbcr is more definite, including the notion of the qualili/ or condition of the individual object inquired after. It is the correlative of fclcber ( 102. Obs. 2), and corresponds to the Latin qualis. 9a$ fur ctn indicates the species or kind, to which the person or thing belongs; e. g. SScv tit tci ? Gin 9)ionn. &3 n $ fur cincr? (5'\\\ .^nufiuonu 0115 .^amlnir^. 9Bc(d)cr ^taufmann? ^orr Q t \ Who is there ] A man. What sort of one ] A merchant of Ham- burg. What merchant ] Mr. N. $n$ hofl ^)u ? Ginc SBdniu*. ^J a>> f u r e t n e ^(ituic 1 G'tne .9?cfo. 21> c ( d) e ? >te rctlje. What have you "? A flower. What sort of a flower? A rose. Which rose ? The red rose. Obs. 4. The c i n/ of ivaS fur etn, is omitted before names of ma- terials, or before substantives of the plural number. 85? a $ fur 8ein ? What kind of wine? a$ fiir Ceutc? What sort of people? Obs. 5. The interrogative iva$ is sometimes employed in the sense of iv a r u m ; e .g. 2i* n c> K'trtU'ft ^n IDid) ? Why art thou cast down ? 2 a $ ivetneu Sic ? Why do you weep ? VERBS. 109. 1st, A verb is a word by which either an ac- tivity, a, passivity, or a simple mods of existence is predi- cated of a person or thing called its subject ; e. g. t'rf) fcfyreifce, I write ; u nnrfi gcfrfjfaqcn, thou art beaten ; tie 5Kcfe 6IiU)t, the rose blooms. 2d, Verbs are divided into two principal classes Transitive and Intransitive. 3d, Transitive verbs are active verbs, the sense of which is not complete without the addition of an object in the accusa- tive case; e. g. id) fcfyretbe cinen 23rief, I am writing a letter. 440 110. Intransitive verbs are of two kinds: 1st, Neuter verbs, which denote either a quiescent state (sim- ple mode of existence) ; as, id) ntfye, ftge, fd)lafe, I am resting, sitting, sleeping, or such an activity as does not terminate in any object ; e. g. id) laufe, fdmpfe, gefye, I am running, strug- gling, going. 2d, Those active verbs, the object of which is either in the genitive or dative ; e. g. id? fcfyone, ttergeffe, erinnere mid) fei* n e v, I spare, forget, remember him , id) gefyorcfye, traue, banfe i I) m, I obey, trust, thank him. 111. Transitive verbs have two forms, called the active and the passive voices. If the subject is represented as the agent acting upon an- other person or thing (object in the accusative), the verb is said to be in the active voice; e. g. id) rufe, Hebe, nenne ifyn, I love, call, name him. But if the subject of the verb is the object of the action ex- pressed by it, the verb is said to be in the passive voice ; e. g. id) rcerbe gerufen, geliebt, genamtr, I am called, loved, named* 112. 1st, Intransitive verbs do, from the nature of their signification, not admit of a passive voice, but have the active form only ; as, id) reife, ftefye, I am travelling, standing. 2d, When, however, the active subject cannot be named, or is designedly left indeterminate, intransitive verbs may be used impersonally in the third person singular of the passive voice ; e. g. e mtrfc getangt, gefptelt, getrttnfen, there is dancing, playing, drinking going on. 113. The class of intransitive verbs comprehends also reflexive verbs. Of thfese there are two kinds : 1st, Such as are employed in the reflexive form only ; as, ftd) beftnnen, fid) fefynen, ftcfy freuen, to reflect, to long, to rejoice. 2d, Such as are formed from transitive verbs by the addition of the reflexive pronouns mid), it n 3, fc t d), e u d), ft d) ( 90. Obs. 3) ; e. g. er cirgert ft d), he is vexed ; id) (ege m i d), I lie down ; fy&te S)tt > i d) ! beware ! from & r g e r n/ I e g e n, I) u t e n, to vex, to lay down, to guard. This form of verbs is of extensive use in German, and cor- responds to the deponent verbs in Latin and to the middle voice in Greek. 114. 1st, Impersonal verbs are employed in the third person singular only. Their subject is quite indeterminate, and 441 is always expressed by the indefinite pronoun e 3 ( 90. Obs. 7") ; as, e & r e g n e t, e 3 b o n n e r t, e 6 b 1 t 1} t, it rains, it thun- ders, it lightens ; e3 fyetfjt, it is said ; e3 cjtbt Ceitte, there are men. 2d, Many verbs have an impersonal form in German, which are not used as such in English ; e. g. e3 bumjert mid), I am hungry ; e3 titrftet mtcf), I am thirsty ; e frtert mid), I am cold ; e3 (dgt ftd) mcfyt (jut jtncjen, it is not easy to sing, &c. 115. Of auxiliary verbs there are two classes in Ger- man : 1st, Auxiliary verbs of tenses, of which there are three : I) a b e n, to have ; f e t n, to be ; and ro e r t e n, to become (shall, will). 2d, Auxiliary verbs of mood, not absolutely necessary to the conjugation of the verb. They are seven in number : b it r* f e n, to be permitted ; f 6 n n e n, to be able (can) ; m 6 3 e n, to be allowed (may) ; m it f f e n, to be obliged (must) ; f o 1 ( e n/ to be under obligation (ought) ; w D t ( e n, to be willing (to intend) ; laff en, to let (permit). 116. In the conjugation of the German verb, we distinguish, as in English, the relations of Number, Person, Mood* and Tense. 117. Verbs have two numbers, Singular and Plural; and three persons, each of which may be distinguished by its characteristic termination. The following scheme exhibits the terminations of verbs as as- sumed by the three persons, singular and plural : Singular. Plural. 1st Person e or given, 2d Person eft, (1, 3d Person e t, t, or like the first person ; EXAMPLES I Singular. Plural. en, et,t, en. id) ret) e, I speak, tit (obefr, thou praisest, ev fptet t, he plays ; nn'r (efen, we read, ibr fel) e t, ye see, fte fucfy e n, they seek. 118. German verbs have four moods, viz : the Indica- tive, Subjunctive, Imperative, and the Infinitive ; the significa- tion of which in general corresponds to that of moods of the 442 same name in English ; e. g. fte r e b e n, they speak (in- die.) ; id) bcitte g e r e b e t, I should have spoken (subj.) ; r e b e S u ! speak thou (imper.) ! 119. They have, moreover, six tenses: the Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Simple Future, and Future Perfect. Of these the present and imperfect of the indicative and subjunctive active are simple tenses ; the remaining ten- ses of the active voice, as well as all the tenses of the passive, are periphrastic, i. e. formed by means of the perfect partici- ple or infinitive, and the auxiliary verbs of tenses ( 115) ; e. g. pres. id) ty o r e, I hear ; imperf. id) fyb r te, I heard ; perf. id) babe g e fy b r t, I have heard ; pres. passive, id) werfce g e * I) b r f, I am heard, &c. 120. There are four forms of the infinitive : the present and perfect infinitives active ; as, I o b e n, to praise ; cj e 1 b t ft a b e n, to have praised ; and the present and perfect infinitives passive ; e. g. Q e I o b t tt> e r b e n, to be praised ; 3 e I o b t n> o r b e n f e t n, to have been praised. The present infinitive active always ends in n or e n, and is often preceded by the pre- position 5 ii 5 as, ju fyelf e n, to help ; gu tabel n, to blame. 121. The German verb has three Participles: the present, perfect, and future. 1st, The present participle is formed from the present infini- tive, by adding b to it ; as, toben fc, fyoren b, praising, hearing. It is always active in its signification, and is less extensively employed than the English participle in ing. 2d, The perfect participle generally assumes the prefix g e, and ends either in e t or t in regular verbs ; as, g e (cb e t, praised ; g e (eb e t, lived ; or in e n 00 m irregular verbs ; as, Q e feb e n, seen ; g e $ef[ e n, eaten. When belonging to tran- sitive verbs, it has a passive signification (except in the com- pound tenses of the active voice), but when formed from in- transitive verbs, it is active ( 112), differing from the present participle only in the relation of time. 3d, The future participle is formed from the infinitive with git, by annexing the letter b ; as, gu (oben, to praise ; Sit lebenfc, to be praised; $u crebren b, to be venerated, verable. Like the Latin participle in dus (amandus, veneran- dus), it always has a passive signification, involving at the same time the notion of necessity, propriety, or possibility. It is, however, employed only as an adjective in the attributive rela* 443 thn (52); as, fccr $u ID ben be (2d)ii(er, the scholar who is to be (ought, may, must be) praised. But not : ber cfyi'tler i\t 5 it (o b e n fo 5 in. the latter case the infinitive with $u is used instead of the participle: ter @d)iUer tft git lob en, the scholar is to be praised, is worthy of praise. 122. With respect to the perfect participle, it is to be re- marked, that it does not assume the prefix i r r, ft it t> t r t, b a r b t e r t, from abfeto t r e n, to absolve ; fhit> t r e n, to study ; barb t e r e it, to shave. 5th, In verbs compounded with the particles fcurcfy, f) inter, ii b e r, it m, u it t e r, D o 1 ( and ra t e t) e r, when they are in- separable, in which case the accent rests not on the particle, but on the verb ; e.g. o 1 1 b r a d) t, t) t n t e r g a n 9 e n, u n f t e r f cfy r t e b e n, from orttbrutgen, to consummate, finish ; fyintercjefyen, to deceive, and antei'fcfyretben, to sign. AUXILIARY VERBS. 123. To the full conjugation of German verbs, three auxiliaries are necessary, and only three, namely, the auxiliary verbs of tenses ( 115) : I) a b e n, to have ; f e t it, to be, and tt> e r b e n, to become. 1st, > a b c n is used in forming the perfect infinitive (and tenses derived from it), the perfect and pluperfect, both indi- cative and subjunctive, of all transitive and of many intransitive verbs; as, gcliebt fya&en, to have loved; perf. icb We cjcltcbt, I have loved ; pluperf. id) f) a 1 1 c i}e(tc['f, 1 had loved ; future perf. id) iverK' $ c I i c b t f) a b c n, I shall have loved, &c. 2d, c t n serves to form the same tenses of all verbs in the passive voice and of many intransitive verbs in the active ; e. g. perf. id) b t n flcltcbt wetfccn, I have been loved ; future perf. hi unrtf flclkbt tverbetTfdn, thou shall have been loved; id) b i n gcrcif't/ I have travelled. 444 3d, 80S c t 1> e n is used in the formation of the future tenses, when it corresponds to the English shall or will, and also in the formation of all the tenses of the passive voice, when it corresponds to the English verb to be ; e. g. id) tt> c r t> c Ucbcn, I shall love ; tm n> i r ft cjelU&t fyaOcn, thou M?J^ have loved ; ct n? i r t> geticbt, he is loved, &c. 124. The simple tenses of the auxiliary verbs are irre- gular as in English. The compound tenses are regularly formed, as in all other verbs, according to the following RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES, Rule I. The perfect tense of any verb is formed by annex- ing its perfect participle to the present indicative of either 1) a * b en or f eirt ; id) r; a b e gefyabt, geliebt, gefungen, I have had, loved, sung ; id) b i n gett>efen, gegangen, gereif y t, I have been, gone, travelled. Rule II. The pluperfect is made by joining the perfect par- ticiple of the verb to the imperfect tense of either f) a b e n or f e i n ; as, id) fy a 1 1 e gefyabr, geiiebr, gefungen, I had had, loved, sung ; id) m a r gewefen, gecjangen, geretf t, I had been, gone, travelled. Rule III. The first or simple future is formed by annexing the present infinitive of the verb to the present indicative of the auxiliary roerfcen; as, id) roerfce ^aben, Keben, reifen, fetn, I shall have, love, travel, be. Rule IV. The future perfect is made by joining the perfect infinitive of the verb to the present of the auxiliary n) e r t) e n ; e. g. id) w c r b e gefyabt fyaben, geltebt fyaben, gereif t fyaben, I shall have had, loved, travelled. Remark. The corresponding tenses of the subjunctive mood are formed in a similar manner. 125. From these rules it will be seen, that in order to form all the compound tenses of a verb, three principal parts must necessarily be given, viz : the present infinitive, the per- fect participle, and the perfect infinitive (which also contains the auxiliary which the verb employs). 126. Instead of the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive (td) fydtte, id) l)dtte getmbt, I might have, I might have had), when they are conditional, i. e. when they denote a possibility not conceived as really existing, the imperfect subjunctive of t e r b e n (id) rourbe), in connection with the present and per- 445 feet infinitive, is often used ; e. g. id) ro ft r t e f) a b e rt, I i t * b e n, I should have, love ; id) imtrte gefyabt, geltebt fyaben, I should have had, have loved. These compound forms of the verb have commonly had a place among the other tenses, under the name ofjirst and second conditionals. 127. PARADIGMS TO THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. I. a ben, to have. C PRES. INFIX, fyciben, to have. Principal parts. < PERF. PART, gefyabt, na (L ( PERF. INFIN. gcfyabt fyaben, to have had. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Singular. Singular, id) fyabe, I have, am having, do id) fcabe, I may have, be hav- have, ing, til ^aft, thou hast, &c. til fyabcft, thou mayst have, &c. cr (fie, e^) ^at, he (she, it) has, er (fie, e3) fyabe, he (she, it) &c. may have, &c. Plural. Plural. tmr ftaben, we have, <&c. n>tr ftaben, we may have, &c. i^r t)abet (babt), ye or you i^r fjabet, ye or you may have, have, &c. itrbe gefyabt I)aben, he would have had ; Plural. Plural. roir nntrben ^aben, we should wir mitrben gefcabt l^aben, we have, should have had, tfyr witrbet fyaben, you would ifer wiirbet (jebabt l)aben, you have, would have had, fie roikben l)aben, they would fte nnirben ge^abt fyaben, they have* would have had. IMPERATIVE. Singular. Plural. fyabett tmr, let us have, ^abe (bit), have (thou), do thou (jdbetorfyabt(tt)r)/ ^ have ye, do have, . t^aben te, ^ ve nave > ^abe er (fte, e$), let him (her, fyaben fte, let them have, it) have ; INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES. Pres. fyaben, to have, Pres. fyctbenb, having, Perf. gefyabt ^aben,to have had. Perf. gefyabt, had. 448 128. II. e t n, to be. C PRES. INFIN. fetn, to be. Principal parts. < PEIIF. PART, gewefen, been. ( PERF. INFIN. gewefen fetn, to have been. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Singular. Singular. id) btn, I am, id) fet, I may be, fcu btfl, thou art, hi feieft (fetft),thou mayst be, er (fie, e3) tjl, he (she, it) cr jet, he may be ; is; Plural. Plural. wtr fmt), we are, tmr feten (fetn), we may be, tfyr fett>, you are, tt)t fetet, you may be, fte fmfc, they are. fte feten (fetn), they may be. IMPERFECT. Singular. Singular. tdf) mar, I was, tdf) ware, I might be, fcu marejl (warft), thou wast, &u wdrefl (roa'vfr), thou mightst be, er war, he was ; er ware, he might be ; Plural. Plural. imr waren, we were, imr waren, we might be, tfyr waret (wart), you were, tfyr waret (wart), you might be, fie waren, they were. fie waren, they might be. PERFECT. Singular. Singular. td) bin (jewefen, I have been, id) fet cjewefen, I may have been, tu btjlgewefen, thou hast been, bit fetjl cjewefen, thou mayst have been, er tjl gewefen, he has been ; er fet gewefen, he may have been ; Plural. Plural- wir ftnfc gewefen, we have been, wtr feten cjewefen, we may have been, i()r fett) gewefen, you have been, ifyr fet'et gewefen, you may have been, fte ftnfc cjewefen, they have been, fte feten a,ewefen, they may have been. 449 PLUPERFECT. Singular. Singular. id) tt>ar cjemefen, I had been, id) mare gemefen, I might have been, bit marfl gemefen, thou hadst bu mareft gemefen, thou mightst been, have been, er mar cjemefen, he had been ; er mare gemefen, he might have been ; Plural. Plural. mtr maren gemefen, we had mtr maren gemefen, we might been, have been, ifyr maret gemefen, you had ifyr mdret gemefen, you might been, have been, fie maren gemefen, they had fte maren cjemefen, they might been. have been. FIRST FUTURE. Singular. Singular. id) merbe fetn, I shall be, id) merbe fetn, I shall be, tut mirjl fein, thou wilt be, fcu merbefl fern, thou wilt be, er mtri) fetn, he will be ; er merbe fetn, he will be ; Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. mtr merben fetn, we shall be, ifyr merbet fetn, you will be, fte merben fetn, they will be. FUTURE PERFECT. Singular. Singular. id) merfce gemefen fetn, I shall id) merfce gemefen few, I shall have been, have been, bit mt'rft gemefen fetn, thou wilt tu merbejl gemefen fetn, thou have been, wilt have been, er mtrb cjemefen fetn, he will er merbe ^emefen fet'n, he will have been ; have been ; Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. mir merben gemefen fein, we shall have been, ifyr merbet gemefen fetn, you will have been, fte merben cjemefen fetn, they will have been. 450 CONDITIONALS. FIRST CONDITIONAL. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Singular. Singular. id) twtrbe fefn, I should be, id) nnirfce geroefen fein, 1 should have been, ba roarbeft fetn, thou wouldst ba itwrbeft: cjeroefen fern/ thou be, wouldst have been, er nntrbe fetn, he would "be ; er iwtrbe geroefen fein, he would have been ; Plural. Plural. nnr twtrben fetn, we should be, tmr nntrben geroefen fern, we should have been, t&r txnirbet fetn, you would be, tfyr market gercefen fetn, you would have been, fte nntrben fetn, they would be. fte roitrben geroefen fefn, they would have been. IMPERATIVE. Singular. Plural. feten rot'r, let us be, fet (t>a), be thou, do be, fett) (tftr), ) be ye, feten te, ) do ye be, fct er (fie, e), let him (her, it) feien fte, let them be. be; INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES. Pres. fetn, to be, Pres. feienfc (roefenb), being, Perf. geroefen fetn, to have been. Perf. geroefen, been. 129. III. SB e r fc e n, to become (shall, will). rPREs. INFIN.. roerben, to become. Principal parts. \ ^ ERF ' f ART - Shorten, become. I JTERF. INFIN. gensorben fetn, to have L become. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Singular. Singular. id) toerfce, I become, am be- id) werbe, I may become, bo coming, do become, becoming, fca rotrft, thou becomest, &c. ta merbeft, thou mayst be- come, &c. er rotrfc, he becomes, &c. er roerbe, he may become, &c. 451 Plural Plural tmr roerben, we become, &c. rotr roerben, we may become, &c. tfyr roerbet, you become, &c. tfyr roerbef, you may become, &c. fte roerben, they become, &c. fte roerben, they may become, &c. IMPERFECT. Singular. Singular, id) nntrbc (roarb), I became, id) roitrbe, I might become, be was becoming, did become, becoming, bit rourbefl (roarbft), thou be- bu roitrbcft thou mightst be- camest, &c. come, &c. er twtrbe (roarb), he became, er roiirbe, he might become, Plural Plural rotr rourben, we became, &c. wtr witrben, we might be- come, &c. tfyr ttjurbet, you became, &c. tfyr mitrbet, you might be- come, &c. fte ttntrben/ they became, &c. fte mitrben, they might be- come, &c. PERFECT. Singular. Singular. id) btn ^emorben (morben), I id) fet (jeroerben (worben), I have become, been becom- may have become, been be- ing, coming, bit btjl cjeroorben (roorben), thou bit fetft geroorben (wcrben), hast become, &c. thou mayst have become, er tft ^emorben (roorben), he er fet cjewerben (morben), he has become, &c. may have become, &c. Plural Plural. wtr ftnb gerocrben (roorben), rot'r feten geroorben (roorben), we have become, &c. we may have become, &c. tfyr fetb cjeroorben (roorben), tfyr fetet geroorben (roorben), you have become, &c. you may have become, &c. fte ftnb geroorben (roorben), fte feten gerootben (roorben), they have become, &c* they may have become, 452 PLUPERFECT. Singular. id) roar geroorben (roorben), I had become, been becom- ing* bit roarft geroorben (roorben), thou hadst become, &c. er roar geroorben (roorben), he had become, &c. rotr roaren geroorben (roorben), we had become, &c. ifyr roaret geroorben (roorben), you had become, &c. fte roaren a,eroorben (roorben), they had become, &c. Singular. id) rodre geroorben (roorben), I might have become, been becoming, bit rod'refl: geroorben (roorten), thou mightst have become, er roa're geroorben (roorben), he might have become, &c. Plural. rotr roaren geroorben (roorben), we might have become, &c. ifyr roaret geroorben (roorben), you might have become, &c. fte roaren geroorben (roorben), they might have become, FIRST FUTURE. Singular. id) roerbe roerben, I shall be- come, be becoming, tit rotrjl roerben, thou wilt be- come, &c. er rotrb roerben, he will be- come, &c. Singular. id) roerbe roerben, I shall be- come, be becoming, til roerteft roerben, thou shalt become, &c. er roerbe roerben, he shall be- come, &c. Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. ttnr merben roerbert, we shall become, tfyr werbet werben, you will become, &c. fte werben werben, they will become, &c. FUTURE PERFECT. Singular. id) tperbe gemerben (roorben) fein, I shall have become, been becoming, til iwrjl: genwrben (worben) fein, thou wilt have become, &c. er wtrb geroorben (vt>orben) fetn, he will have become, &c. Singular. \&) werbe ^emorDen (worben) fetn, I shall have become, been becoming, bii roerbefl: ^emcrben (wcrben) fein/ thou wilt have become, &c. er roerbe geroorben (worben) fetn, he will have become, &c. 453 Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. rot'r werben geroorben (roorben) few, we shall have become, &c. t'fyr roerbet cjeroorben (roevfcen) fet'n, you will have become, &c. fte roerben geroorben (roerfcen) fetn, they will have become, &c. CONDITIONAL. FIRST CONDITIONAL. Singular. tcfy roiirbe roerben, I should be- come, be becoming, til roiirbefl roerben, thou wouldst become, &c. er roiirbe roerben, he would become, &c. Plural. roir rourben roerben, we should become, &c. tfyr miirbet werben, you would become, &c. fie miirben merben, they would become, &c. Singular. werbe (bu), become thou, do become, roerbe er (fie, e^), let him (her, it) become ; INFINITIVES. Pres. roerben, to become, Perf. geroorben fein, to have become. SECOND CONDITIONAL. Singular. id) roi'trbe geroorben (roorben) fetn, I should have become, been becoming, bu ttntrDeft gerocrben (roorben) fetn, thou wouldst have be- come, &c. er roiirbe geroorben (roorben) fein, he would have become, &c. Plural. rotr roiirben cjeroorben (roorben) fetn, we should have be- come, &c. t'^r roiirbet gemcrben (roorben) fetn, you would have be- come, &c. fie roiirben geroorben (roorben) fein, they would have be- come, &c. IMPERATIVE. Plural. roerben rotr, let us become, roerbet (tbr), ) become ye, roerben (Ste, $ do become, roerben fte, let them become. PARTICIPLES. Pres. roerbenb, becoming, Perf. cjeroorben, become. 130. It has been remarked ( 123) that the compound tenses of some intransitive verbs are made by means of the auxiliary ty a b e n, and of others by means of f e i n. The sig- 454 nification of the verb generally decides which auxiliary is to be employed. 131. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE AUXILIARY I) a b e rt* 1st, Impersonal and reflexive verbs; as, e3 fyat cjere^itef, gebennert, it has rained, thundered ; id) I) a b e mid) gefmit, I have rejoiced ; er ty a t fid) gedrcjert, he has been vexed. 2d, All the auxiliary verbs of mood ( 115) ; as, id) f) a b e germigt, I have been obliged ; er {) a t md)t fommen fcnnen, he has not been able to come. 3d, All intransitive verbs which are followed by an object in the genitive or dative, or by a preposition ; as, er fy a t met* tier gebad)t, he has remembered me ; id) I) a b e ifym getient, I have served him ; er 1) a t i'tber )id) gefpottet, he has derided you. Except: fcecjegncn,, to meet;^ fefQcn, to follow, and rocidjcn, to yield to, which govern the dative, and take fcin. 4th, Verbs denoting a permanent state or such an activity, by means of which an impression on the outward senses is produced ; e. g. id) fy a b e cjelegen, gefd)(afen, geftanben, cje* roobnt, 1 have lain, slept, stood, lived; er 1) at gefrraufet, cje^ triittt, cjefcuftet, gegtdnjt, gerod)en, gefd)tenen r geweint, he has bellowed, roared, exhaled fragrance, glittered, smelled, ap- peared, wept, &c. 132. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE AUXILIARY fettt, 1st, The verb fern itself; as, id) bin geroefen, I have been ; id) n> a r geroefen, I had been. 2d, Verbs w r hich imply motion either in general, or to some definite place or object ; moreover, such as denote a transition from one state to another, especially verbs compounded with the prefixes er, set, ent, or with the particles an, auf, cuiS, em, &c. The following list exhibits most of them : cutfia?acf)cn, to awake ; erftouncji, to be astonished, and mtCmrtcn, to degenerate ; other compounds with e r ; gncn, to meet ; fofjrcn/ to move ; cn, to burst ; faukn, to become putrefied ; xn, to break ; fltcqcn, to fly ; gcn, to press ; fltcfvii, to flow ; filen, to hasten ; frtcrcn, to freeze ; cr^rimuicn/ to grow angry ; Qefyen, to go ; 455 grfangcn, to get, to arrive ; gem fen/ to recover ; getattocn/ to fall into ; gertnnen/ to coagulate ; gefobcben/ to come to pass ; l)t'i(cn, to heal ; jiwn, to run in haste; fomsnen/ to come ; fvuvben, to creep ; fanK'ii/ to land ; laufen/ to run ; quell en/ to well forth ; vet fen, to ripen ; reifen, to travel ; retten/ to ride; rennen, to run ; rin iicn/ to flow; riirfen/ to move ; fcbetfcen/ to part ; fd)tei\'n/ to dart forth; fcbiffen, to sail ; fd)(eicben/ to sneak ; fetyliipfen, to slip ; fc&mctjcn/ to melt ; fdjreiten/ to stride ; fcbiucllen, to swell ; februimmen/ to swim ; fd)tt>tnt>en, to vanish ; [ege(n/ to sail ; fin fen/ to sink ; (prte^en/ to sprout; fpringcn/ to leap ; fbta/n/ to rise ; flerben, to die; ftojjen/ to push ; flranfcen, to strand ; ftraucbetn, to trip ; flveidxn, to ramble ; fturjen/ to plunge ; treten, to step ; trciben/ to trot ; tterarnien/ to grow poor ; ttcrnxfcn/ to decay, and many other verbs compounded with o c t ; tt?anl>ern, to wander ; nxiten/ to wade ; wcicbcn/ to yield ; 5ie()en/ to pass. 133. Some verbs employ fyabert in one signification, and fctn in another. With fyaben they generally imply an activity, and with fetn a state or condition : Sr bat fca3 Samin au%ebrannt, he has burnt out the chim- ney ; ba3 fttue? ift aii^qebrannt:, the fire has done burning ; id) feabe fcrtgefabren s lefen, I have continued to read ; id) bin fortgefafyren, I drove off; fcie 9?6l)re t)at gefloffen, the pipe has leaked ; fca SBaffcr ifl gefloflfen, the water has flowed ; id) fyabe gefroren, I have been cold ; tie 9Jii(d) ijl gefroren, the milk is frozen ; id) fyabe mic^ miifce gegangen, I have become fatigued with walking ; id) bin nad) )aiife gegangen/ I have gone home ; id) babe gejagt, I have hunted ; id) bin gejagt, I have run in haste ; id) babe ein ^Pferfc geritten/ 1 have ridden a horse ; id) bin auS* geritten, I have taken a ride. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 134. It has already been observed ( 119) that only .two tenses of the German verb are simple tenses, namely, the present and imperfect of the active voice. Besides these the present infinitive active (fyaben/ werfcen), two participles (pres. 456 fyabenfc, perf. gefyabt), and the imperative mood, are also simple forms of the verb. All other parts are periphrastic or com- pound, and formed by means of the infinitive or perfect parti- ciple, and one of the auxiliary verbs of tenses. 135. In the compound tenses the auxiliary alone is in- flected. Hence it follows, that when the inflection of the aux- iliaries is known, and the principal parts of any verb are given, all the .tenses of the same may be easily formed according to the rules given above ( 124). 136. The inflection of the compound tenses being uniform in all German verbs (with this variation only, that some take fyaben and others few for their auxiliary), all the differences and irregularities of conjugation must be sought for in the simple forms. 137. With respect to their simple forms, verbs follow two different modes of inflection : 1st, Without changing the radical vowel, they form the im- perfect simply by adding the termination e t e or e t to the root ; and the perfect participle, by adding the termination e t or t ; e. g. pres. infin. lob e n, to praise, imperf. id) lob t e, perf. part, ge* lobet (ge(obt). Verbs thus conjugated are usually called regular verbs. 2d, The vowel of the root is changed in the imperfect tense and in the perfect participle, which latter then always ends in c n or n, and the first and third persons of the imperfect indica- tive remain without any termination ; e. g. pres. infin. b e * f e fy I c n, to command, imperf. td), er befall, I, he com- manded, perf. part, b e f o ty I e n ; pres. infin. ( e f c n, to read, imperf. id) I a 3, perf. part, g e I e f e n. Verbs of this form of conjugation have heretofore passed under the name of irregular verbs. As, however, they are very numer- ous, comprehending nearly all the primitive verbs of the language, this name is now generally discarded, and various attempts have been made to reduce them to a number of regular conjugations. Note. The classification of the irregular verbs (which name we retain for the sake of convenience), and an alphabetical list of them will be found below. Sixteen verbs are partly regular and irregular, in the forma- tion of their simple forms. They will be found in the table of irregular verbs below. 457 138. The personal terminations of the simple tenses are essentially the same in both kinds of verbs, except in the first and third persons singular of the imperfect indicative, in which irregular verbs assume no termination. The first and third persons plural end always in e n, and the second person plural in e t throughout all the moods and tenses. 139. When the root of an irregular verb contains one of the vowels a, o or it, it is generally modified into d, 6, u in the second and third persons of the present indicative, and also in the imperfect subjunctive ; e. g. id) fyalte, tit fydltft, et fydtt, I hold, thou holdest, he holds ; id) fanfc, subj. id) fdnbe, I found, I might find. In like manner the radical e is changed into { or t e in the second and third persons of the present indicative, and in the singular of the imperative ; e. g. id) cjebe, fcii gtbft, er Qibt, gtb bu, I give, thou givest, he gives, give thou ; id) fefye, bit ftefyft, er fiefyt, fret) ht, I see, thou seest, he sees, see thou. 140. The following table presents a comparative view of the terminations of the simple forms of verbs, both regular and irregular. PRESENT OF ALL VERBS. Indicat. Subjunct. Indicat. ! ' 1st Pers. e, e, ^ C 1st Pers. en,n, 2d Pers. eft, ft, eft, ^ < 2d Pers. et, t, [3d Pers. et, t. e. SJ ( 3d Pers. en,n. IMPERFFCT OF REGULAR VERBS. Subjunct. en, et, em IMPERAT. OF REG. VERBS. 2d Pers. sing, e, 1st Pers. pi. en, 2d Pers. pi. et,t INFINITIVE. en, m Pres. ent>, nfc. > \Perf. 9 et,t IMPERFECT OF IRREGULAR VERBS. IMPERAT. OF IR. VERBS. Indicative. Subjunctive. Indicative. Subjunctive. ( 1st Pers. te, ete, ete, te, .^ ? 2d Pers. teft, eteft, eteft, teft, ^ 3d Pers. te, ete, ete, te, ^ (1st Pers. ^ ^ 2d Pers. g; (3d Pers. ten, eten, tet, etet, ten, eten. eten, ten, etet, tet, eten, ten. PARTICIPLES. 1st Pers. 2d Pers. '3d Pers. 20 ft, eft, e, eft, ft, e. 2d Pers. sing. f e, 1st Pers. pL en, 2d Pers. pi. et, f. 458 IMPERFECT OF IRREGULAR VERBS. Indicative. Subjunctive. "3 : 1st Pers. en, en, iNFINITIVIf, I* ?2d Pers. et, t, et, t, s i [3d Pers. en. en. en. PARTICIPLES. < n reS r 1 Perf. ge en. 141. REMARKS ON THE TABLE. Remark I. In the present tense, all German verbs are larly formed by adding the above terminations to the root of the present infinitive, Remark 2. In the imperfect of regular verbs, the t and the c t in- dicate the tense, and the remaining part of the termination the different persons. The imperfect of irregular verbs, on the other hand, lias terminations for the person only, the tense being suffi- ciently distinguished by the change of the radical vowel. Remark 3. With respect to the c preceding the terminations ff, tc, &c., it is to be observed, that it is always retained in the sub- junctive mood, but in the indicative it may either be retained OF omitted, as euphony may require ; e. g. subjunctive, tcf) Ict>c, I may praise, tu (cbcjl, tliou mayst praise, id) fob c t c, I might praise - r indicative, tu le(>cft or lob ft, thou praisest; id) tab etc or lob t e, I was praising. Remark 4. Verbs ending cf tt or cr n, reject the c of the termi- nation of inflection throughout, before ft, t or n. But in the first person of the present indicative, and in the imperative singular, the c of the original termination is rejected in its stead ; e. g. fammcln, to collect; pres. indie, td) fammle (instead of fmitmctc), I collect, tw fcmmu'lfr, cr famine! t/ thou collectest, he collects, fammtc 2)u, do thou collect ; C5 fcauct t x it lasts, from franc r n, &c. The sub- junctive, however, either retains the c in both cases, or rejects the first only; e. g. id) tafcclc or tat) I c, I may blame, jie tat) c (en or tat 1 ( c n, they may blame, &c. 142. The tenses of the passive voice are all periphrastic, and are formed by combining the perfect participle of the verb with the different moods and tenses of the auxiliary no e r b e n j as, pres. indie, tcf) tt>evfce g elteb t> I am loved ; imperf. widic. id) ronrbe q e I J e 6 t f I was loved ; perf. indie, td) bin a, e 1 1 e b t n, I have been loved, &c. In this connection the perfect tperben always loses its prefix g t. ( 122. 1st.) 459 PARADIGMS TO THE CONJUGATION OF GERMAN S^ERBS. 143. I. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 8 o b e it, to praise, regular. Di ii f e it , to call, irregular. rPREs. I^FIN. (oben, rufen, biFERF. IXDIC. id) (obte, rtef. . PAKT . ^ g^" . INFIN. cjelobt, gerufen tyabem ACTIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Singular. I praise, call, am praising, calling, do praise, call, id) lobe, ntfe, tu lobefl (lobfl), nifejl (ruffe), er lobet (lobt), mfct (ruft) ; Plural. wit lobcn, rufen, tfer lobet (lobt), rufct (raft), fte lob en, rufen* Singular. I may praise, call, be prais- ing, calling, id) lobe, rufe, tit (obeft, ntfefl, er lobe, rufe 5 Plural. wir (oben/ rufen, ifyr lobet, rufet, fte lob en, rufeiu IMPERFECT. Singular. I praised, called, was prais ing, calling, did praise, call id) lobtc, rtef, tu (obteft, rtefefl (n'effl), er (obte/ rtef; Plural. U5tr lobten, riefen, ifer (obtet/ rtefet (rieft), fte lobten, riefen. Singular. I might praise, call, be prais- ing, calling, id) lobete, riefe, tu lobetefl, riefeft, er lobete, riefe ; Plural. n>ir lobeten, riefen, ifcr lobetet, rtefet, fte lobeten, rteferu PERFECT. I have praised, called, been I may have praised, called, praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. Sing, id) fyabe, tu fyajt, er fyat Sing, id) fyabe, tu l)abe(l/ er gelobt, gerufetf ; t)abe gelobt, gerufen ; 460 Plur. rotr fyaben, tfyr fyabt, fte P/wr. rotr fyaben, tfyr fyabet, fie fyaben cjelobt, geritfen, fyaben gelobt, geritfem PLUPERFECT. I had praised, called, been I might have praised, called, praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. Sing, id) fyatte, bit fyatteft, er zrc#. id) fyatte, bit fycittefl, er fyatte gelobt, geritfen ; ^citte getobt, gerufen 5 PZwr. mtr fatten, t>r t)attet, fie PZwr. wtr fatten, tf)t l)dttet, file fatten gelobt, gerufem fatten ^elobt, gentfen* FIRST FUTURE. I shall praise, call, be prais- I shall praise, call, be prais- ing, calling, &c. ing, calling, dec. Sing, id) werfce, bit ttnrft, er Sing, id) merbe, bit roerbeft, rotrb (oben, rufen j er werbe, loben, riifen ; Plur. nnr njerben, tl)r werbet, Plur. tmr werben, ft)r merbet r fte roerben loben, ritfeiu fie roerben loben, ntfen* FUTURE PERFECT. I shall have praised, called, I shall have praised, called, been praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. Sing, id) roerbe, bu rot'rft er Sing, id) roerbe, bit ttjerbeff, er twrb cjelobt, gerufen l^aben ; rcerbe ^elobt, cjentfen fcciben , Plur. twr werben, tl)r merbet, Plur. twr werben, tl)r merbet, fie roerben gelobt, gerufen l)a? fte roerben gelobt, cjenifen bem CONDITIONALS. FIRST CONDITIONAL. SECOND CONDITIONAL. I should praise, call, be prais- I should have praised, called, ing, calling. been praising, calling. Sing, id) roitrbe, bit rofirbeft, Sing, id) roiirbe, bit roiirbefi, er rottrbe loben, ritfen ; er roitrbe gelcbt, cjerufcn l)a^ ben; Plur. rotr roitrben, t'^r roiirbet, Plur. rotr roftrben, t^r roitrbet, fte roiirben loben, riifen. fte roiirben gelobt, gentfen 461 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Plural. lobert tmr, let us praise, be praising, lobe (feu), praise thou, do lobet, (obt (tfyr), ? praise ye, praise, lobert te, $ do ye praise, lobe er (fie, e), let him (her, loben fte, let them praise, it) praise, be praising ; Singular. Plural. ntfen tt>tr, let us call, be call- ing, tufe (bit), call thou, do call, ntfet, raft (tfyr), ) call ye, do ritfen te, J ye call, tlife er (fte, e3), let him (her, ntfen fte, let them call, be it) call, be calling ; calling. INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES. Pres. loben, rttfen, to praise, Pres. lobenb, ntfenb, praising, to call. calling. Perf. gelobt, gerufen fyaben, to Perf. gelobt, geritfen, praised, have praised, called. called. PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I am praised, called, &c. I may be praised, called, &c. Sing, td) roerfce, hi nnrft, er Sing, id) roerbe, bit wertejl, ev wtrb ge(obt, geritfen ; werte gelobt, cjeritfen ; Plur. iwr werben, tt)r merbet, Plur. tmr werben, t()r werbet, fie werben gelobt, gerufen. fte werben cjelobt, cjeritfen. IMPERFECT. I was praised, called, &c. I might be praised, called, &c. Sing, id) nntrbe, bit witrbeft, Sing, id) roitrbe, bit ttjitrbefi", er er iwirbe getobt, ^erttfen ; txntrbe gelobt, gerttfen j Plur. twr wnrben, ttjr murbet, Plur. n>tr witrben, tf)t fte witrben cjetobt, gerttfen. fte tx>itrben gelebt, 462 PERFECT. I have been praised, called, I may have been praised, &c. called, &c. Sing, id) bin, tu btfl, er tft ge* Sing, id) fet, tu fet'eft, er fet lobt, gerufen morten; gelobt, gerufen morten ; Plur. mtr ftnt, tfyr fett, fte Plur. mtr feten, tfyr fetet, fte ftnt gelobt, gerufen mortem feten ge(obt, gerufen mortem PLUPERFECT. I had been praised, called, I might have been praised, &c. called, &c. Sing, id) mar, tit marft, er mar Sing, id) mare, tu mareft, er gelobt, gerufen morten ; mare gelobt, gerufen morten ; Plur. mtr maren, tfyr maret, fte Plur. mtr maren, tfer mdret, maren gelobt, geriifen mor^ fte maren gelobt, gerufen tern mortem FIRST FUTURE. I shall be praised, called, &c. I shall be praised, called, &c. Sing, id) merte, tu rntrjl, er Sing, id) merte, tu mertefl, er mtrt gelobt, gerufen mert^n ; merte gelobt, gerufen mer* ten; Plur. mtr merten, t'fyr mertet, Plur. mtr merten, tfyr mertet, fte merten gelobt, gerufen fte merten gelobt, gerufen mertem mertem FUTURE PERFECT. I shall have been praised, I shall have been praised, called, &c. called, &c. Sing, id) werte, tu ttnrft, er Sing, id) roerte, tu wertefl, er mtrt ^elobt, (jenifen worten merte geiobt, gerufen roorteu fern; fern; Plur. wtr merten, t()r mertet, Plur. wtr roertert, tbr ttjertet, fte werten cjelobt, gerufen fte merten gelobt, gerufen worten fetm worten fein. CONDITIONALS. FIRST CONDITIONAL. I should be praised, called, SECOND CONDITIONAL. I should have been praised, called, &c. $eHg-. id) miirte, tu miirteft, Sing, id) mi'trte, tu miirteft, er miirte gelobt, gerufen ten fetnj er mitrte gelobt, gerufen merten ; 463 Plur. nnr awrbeit, ifyr twtrbet, fie roikben gelobt, gerufen roevben. Plur. nnr roiirben, ifyr fte roitrben getobt, gerufen rcorben fern* IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Plural. roerben rcir gelcbt, gerufen, let us be praised, called, roerbe (bit) gelobt, gemfen, be roerbet (tf)r) gebbt, gernfen, ) (thou) praised, called, ttjerben PART> ^^ op ^^ I.PERF. INFIN. fid) gefreut ^abem INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I rejoice, am rejoicing, do re- I may rejoice, be rejoicing, id) freite mid), bit freuefi: bier;, er freue fic^ ; joice, &c. Sing, id) freite mid), bit freiteft (freujr) bid), er freuet (freut) Plur. roir freiten un$, i()r fren^ Plur. mir freiten wt et (freut) euc^, fie freuen ficr;. et end), fie freiten fid). IMPERFECT. I rejoiced, &c. I might rejoice, dec. Sing, id) freitte mtc^, bit freu? Sing, id) freuete mid), bu fren^ teff bic^, &c. etejl bic^/ &;c. 464 Plur. Nit freitten un, tyr Plur. tm'r fmteten un, &c. freutet end), &c. PERFECT. I have rejoiced, &c. I may have rejoiced, &c. id) fyabe mtd) gefreut, fcu Sing, id) fyabe mid) gefreut, fcu bid) gefmtt, &c. fyabefl: fctd) gefreut, &c. imt daben un gefreut, PZ^^. wr ^aben un^ gefreut, . &c. PLUPERFECT. I had rejoiced, &c. I might have rejoiced, &c. td) ^atte mtc^ gefreut, jSz'wg-. ic^ ^atte mtc^ FIRST FUTURE. I shall rejoice, &c. I shall rejoice, &c. Sing, id) roerfce mtc^ freuen, Sing, id) werbe mtd^ freuert, tu ttJtrjl fcid) &c. fcu merbejl t>idb &c. FUTURE PERFECT. I shall have rejoiced, &c. I shall have rejoiced, &c. Sing, id) werte mid) gefreut 5fn^. tc^ werSe mtc^ gefretit ^aben/ feu wtrft btd) &c. l)aben, bit roerbefl &c. CONDITIONALS. FIRST CONDITIONAL. SECOND CONDITIONAL. I should rejoice, &c. I should have rejoiced, dec. Sing, id) nntrbe mtcf) freiten, tu Sing, id) witrbe mtdf) gefreut wiirfceft &c. ^aben, bit wurbejl &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. rejoice thou, &C. P/wr. fteiten writ itn^ freue btdf), freitet (tt)r) eitd^, freite er (fie eS) ftc^ ; freiten fie fid), INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ftd) freiien, to rejoice. fid) freuenfc, rejoicing. Perf. ftc^ gefreut fyaben, to fic^ gefreut, rejoiced. have rejoiced. 145. III. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. e f) e tt, to go, takes f e t n for its auxiliary. r PRES. INFIN. get) en, to go. IMPERF. INDIC. tch qtnq, I went. gone . . INFIN. gegangen fetn, to have gone. 465 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I go, am going, do go, &c. I may go, be going, &c. Sing, id) cjefye, bit gdjejit (gefyjl:), Sing, id) gefye, tu gefyeft er P/wr. wir gefyen, ifyr gefyet PZwr. wir gefyen, ifyr gefyet, fte (gefyt), fte gefyen (gefyn) gefyen. IMPERFECT. I went, was going, did go, &c. I might go, be going, &c. Sing, id) ging, bu gingjl, er $wg-. id) ginge, bit gtn^ejl, er PZwr. tt)ir gutgen, t^r gtnget, PZwr. nnr gtngen, i^r cjtnget, fie gtncjeiu fte gingen* PERFECT. I have gone, been going, &c. I may have gone, been going, &c. Sing, id) bin, bit bijl, cr i|l ge? Sing, id) fei, bit feiejl:, cr fci garden ; gegangcn ; Plur. wir ftnb, ifer feib, fte ftnb Plur. twir feien, i^r feiet, fte gegangen, feien gegangen. PLUPERFECT. I had gone, been going, &c. I might have gone, been going, &c. Sing, id) war, bit roar|T, er war fikVi^. id) ware, bu wareft, er ; ware cjecjangen ; Plur. wir waren, il)r waret, fte Plur. wir waren, i^r waret, fte waren gecjangen. waren gegangen* FIRST FUTURE. I shall go, be going, &c. I shall go, be going, &c. Sing, id) werbe, bit wirfl, er Sing, id) werbe, bit werbeft, er wirb $et)en ; werbe gefyen ; Plur. wir werben, ifyr werbet, Plur. wir werben, it)r werbet, fie werben cje^en* fte werben gefyen* FUTURE PERFECT. I shall have gone, been going, I shall have gone, been going, &c. &c. Sing, id) werbe, bu wirjl, er Sing, id) werbe, bit werbeft, er wirb gegangen fein; werbe gea,ana,en fein; Plur. wir werben, ifyr werbet, Plur. wir werben, ifyr werbet, fte werben gegancjen fein. fte werben a,ea,ana,en fein. 20* 466 CONDITIONALS. FIRST CONDITIONAL. SECOND CONDITIONAL. I should go, be going, &c. I should have gone, been go- ing, &c. Sing, id) toiirbe, bu ttwrbejl:, Sing, id) rm'irbe, bit rm"ttbe(l, er rottrbe (jefyen ; er roiirbe gegangen fetn ; Plur. rot'r tt)tirben, t()r ttJiirbet, Plur. rmr rmtrben, tt^r roitrbet, fte nntrben ge^en* fie wurben gegan^en fetn. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Plur. gefyen ttn't, let us go, be Sing. t d), i t) it, I am, thou art, he is hungry ; e3 burflet, frtert, fdjaubett m t d), I am thirsty, cold, shuddering ; e3 geltngt m i r, I succeed ; e3 grauet 1 1) m, he dreads. The accusative or dative is sometimes placed first, and then the e 3 is omitted ; as, m i d) fyungert, m t d) bur* ftet, m t r graiiet/ &c. V. COMPOUND VERBS. 149. 1st, Compound verbs are either separable or inse- parable. 2d, In compounds of the first class, the constituent parts are separated, and the first component is placed after the verb, in all the simple forms of the verb which are susceptible of in- flection, viz : in the imperative active, and in the present and imperfect, both indicative and subjunctive ; e. g. cmfangeit, to begin, pres. indie, id) faitije a n, I begin, irnperf. id) ftitg a n, I begun, imperat. fancje I)u a n, begin thou. Moreover, in the per- fect participle, the augment g e is inserted between the separable particle and the verb ; e. g. atugezfangen, ait&ge*gattgen/ ab*ge* reif't, from aitfancjen/ to commence ; auScjefyen, to go out; ab* retfcn, to set out on a journey. Remark. In subordinate propositions, however, which are in- troduced by a conjunction or conjunctive word, such as alf>, t>a, in? b c m, iv e n n, nn* U, fo a 9, &c., or by a relative pronoun, this separa- tion of the component parts does not take place; e.g. a (6 cOcn Mo 3cnnc aufgtng (from aufge&cn), just as the sun was rising; ix> c n n cr nur a n f a m e (from anfomatcn) ! would that he might ar- rive ! 3 n & c m id) am $aufc t) c r b c i g t n g, as I was passing by the house. Die Sijurc, n> c I cl) e fid) a u f 1 1) at/ the door which opened. 149. {n compounds of the second class, the constituent parts remain inseparably connected throughout the entire con- jugation of the verb, and the perfect participle does not assume the augment $ e, if the first component is one of those insepa- rable particles mentioned above ( 122) ; but if it is a noun or an adjective, the augment is prefixed to the entire compound ; e. g. id) ocrlfere, I lose, td) oerlor/ I lost, part. erforen, lost. But, frufyfhtdfen, to breakfast (compounded with the adjective fri'tl), early), perf. part, g e fritfyjtudf f ; recfytfertuj en, to justify (from redjt, just), per part, g e recfytfevtujt, &c. 468 150. Verbs compounded with substantives or adjectives are generally inseparable, when they so coalesce in sense as to form one complex conception ; but when their union is so slight, that they may be regarded as distinct words, they are se- parable ; e. g. tatt ftnben, to take place ; fyod) acfyten, to esteem highly ; lo fprecfyett, to acquit ; perf. parts, <&tatt ge* funben, fyod) cjeacfytet, lo$ gefprocfyem 151. When the verb is compounded with a particle (i. e. with an adverb, a preposition, or a simple prefix), the accent determines to which of the two classes the compound belongs. If the particle is accented, the compound is separable ; but if the principal accent falls on the verb itself, the compound is in- separable. A list of inseparable prefixes has already been given above ( 122. 2d). 152. Verbs compounded with the following adverbs and prepositions are separable : a b, an, a ii f, a it 3, b e t, b a r, e t n, fort, fy e r, fyt n, and the compounds of ber and fytn : tyerab, fytnetn, &c. ; n a d), n t e b e r, o b, o r, ro e g, 3 u, S u r u cf .* EXAMPLES. an!ommcn, to arrive, part, angcfommcn ; cuifjlefyen, to rise, barbrtngcn, to offer, fettfafyten, to continue, fottgefafyrcn ; n, to throw away, jubrtngcn, to spend, 153. Compounds with b it r d) r t) t n t e r, ii b e r, n m, u rt* t e r/ tt D ft and m t e b e t are separable, when the accent rests on the particle ; they are inseparable, when it rests on the verb itself ( 122. 5th). It is frequently the case, that in one and the same compound this difference of accentuation has given rise to different significations. EXAMPLES. burd) b r t n 9 e n (inseparable), to penetrate, part, burd) btun^en; burd) bttncjcn (separable), to press through a crowd, part. burd) r c t f c n (insep.)/ to travel over, part, burd) r c t f f t ; b u r d) tctfcn (sep.)/ to travel through, part.b u t d) gmipt ; liber f ii t) r c n (insep.), to convince, part, ubcr f ii ft r t ; ii b cr fiiftrcn (sep.), to convey over, part, * Compare also the table of separable and inseparable verbs on pages 52 and 53. 469 imtct r) a ( t c n (insep.), to entertain, part. Utltct gotten; u n t c r fatten (sep.)/ to hold under, part, u n t c r a/fyaltcn ; roll c n t) c n (insep.), to finish, part. r?oll e n t> c t ; D I ( Qtepcn (sep.), to fill by pouring into, part. t> H cjea,effcn. Remark. Compounds with the preposition rotfccr (which should be carefully distinguished from the adverb n> t e b e r) are always inseparable, the accent being invariably assumed by the verb itself; as, rotter I c g e n, to confute, part, nnfccr t c q t ; nrifccrftcfyen, to withstand, part, tx>tt>crftant>en. The adverbial prefix mt0 cannot be reduced to any definite rule, as the accent does not in all instances decide whether it is separable or inseparable. 154. With respect to the infinitive of compound verbs, it is to be remarked, that the particle gu ( 120) is placed be- fore it, if the verb is inseparable ; if separable, it is inserted be- tween the two components, and constitutes one word with them ; e. g. $ u entroet'fyert, to desecrate ; $ u aerfaflen, to fall into pieces ; but, an^u^famjen, to begin ; weg^u-werfert, to throw away ; juritcf-su^tretben, to drive back, &c. 155. Compounds generally follow the conjugation of their simple verbs. The following is a specimen of the simple forms of a separable compound : 3( b r e t f e n , to set out on a journey. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Singular. Singular. td) rcifc ab, tu rcifcft afc, cc rctfct id) rctfe a&, tu rcifcft afc/ et reifct (rctf't) oO ; ab ; Plural. Plural. nnt rctfcn at, tfjr reifct (rcif t) a^ ttrit reifcn at), i^r rctfct at, fte tctfcn ftc rctfcn afo. at. IMPERFECT. Singular. Singular. trf) rctf'tc at, tu rctf'tcft at, cr rctf'tc ic^ rcifctc afe, t>u rctfctcft at, cr teU at ; fete at ; Plural. Plural. roir rciptcn at, ifyt rctftct at, fte roir retfetcn at, if)r rctfctct at, ftc rctptcn at. retfetcn at. IMPERATIVE. Singular. Plural. teifc (bu) at, rctfc er at ; rctfen n?ir at, rctfet (retf'r) i^r at x retfen fie at. 470 INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES. Pres. afctetfcn or aOgutctfen. Pres. Part, cibtdfenb. Perf. afojereif t few. Perf. Part, abgetetf't. SYNTAX OF THE VERB. I. AGREEMENT. 156. The verb agrees with its subject nominative in number and person. In German the subject cannot be omitted as in the Classical languages, in which the termina- tion of the verb is sufficient to indicate the difference of per- son and number ; except in the second person of the impera- tive singular, when bii, like the English thou, is expressed only for the sake of emphasis ; e. g. id) lefe, I read ; b 11 tebeft thou speakest ; bet @turm fyat au$geto6t, the storm has ceased to rage ; bte Snabcn fptelert, the boys are playing. But, im- perat. rebel ( e f e ! read, speak (thou) ! @ p t e I e , Stnb, cutf bet 3)hittcr <8d)DO ! Play, my child, on thy mother's lap ! (Schiller.) Exception 1. When several verbs constitute a compound predi- cate to one subject, it is only expressed with the first. 5)u arbciteft tttcl, r id)tcft cibct wcnig cuiS, thou labourest much, but accomplish- es! little; unb cc f)ort' mit ftummem atme, reH't fid) blutcnt) IcS, pr c^t (tc t)cftig in ttc 2Crme, fcbtvtngt (id) auf fcin ic$ and t>ci$ are followed by a verb in the plural; when the substantive after the verb which they represent is plural ; fctcS ft n b mctnc 58riit>cr, these are my brothers ; c ft n t) cfytUcfye Banner, they are honest men. Excep. 3. In reciting the multiplication table, the Germans use the singular where the plural would seem proper ; wet mat funf i ft gwan^tc}, four times five are twenty, &c. Excep. 4. When the subject of a verb is a pronoun of the first or second person, it is sometimes omitted by poetical license ; as, a b c nun, act) ! ^pfyttofepfytc, 3urij!tcrei unb 50?cbictn burcfyauS ftututt, I have now, alas ! completely mastered philosophy, the jurist's craft, and medicine (Goethe's Faust). 157. When the verb refers to several subjects equally related to it, it must be put in the plural ; as, Dfocfyt nnb Icuj flrttten nut et'ncmbet urn ben SSorjiig, night and day were contending with each other for the preference. When, how- ever, the subjects are connected by disjunctive conjunctions, or when they are regarded as one complex notion, the verb is 471 in the singular ; e. g. webcr ber &ater nod) few ofyn i ft fca (jeroefen, neither the father nor his son has been here ; $er* rat() unb Slrgroefyn I a u f d) t tit alien (cfen, treason and suspi- cion (combined) lurch at every corner ; fyier tft *Pfeffer unb l$, here is pepper and salt. 158. After several subjects of different persons, the verb in the plural agrees with the first person in preference to the second, and with the second in preference to the third ; e. g. id) unb Su (tmr) ft n b 23riiber, I and thou are brothers ; Dii unb ber SBater (3fyr) fet'b einanber a'fynlid), you and your father resemble each other. Sometimes, however, the verb agrees with the nearest nominative ; id) bavf veben, md)t Sii, / am per- mitted to speak, not thou. II. TENSES. 159. It will be perceived from the paradigms, that the German verb has no separate forms to express the distinctions observed in English between / praise, and I am praising, do praise, I praised, and I was praising, did praise, &c., all of which are implied in the one form id) lobe, id) lobte (see page 279). 160. In German, as in English, the present is often em- ployed instead of the imperfect, to give greater animation to historical narration (see page 342). 161. The present is used in place of the future, espe- cially if the event is regarded as certain ; as, morgen f bmmt er roteber, to-morrow he will come again ; fimftige 2Bed)e ret- fe id) nad) Sonbon, next week I am going to London ; serlag Sid) brauf, id) laffe fed)tenb fyier ba^ 8eben r ober fiiljr e fte au$ ^pilfen, depend upon it, I shall either fighting lose my life here, or lead them out of Pilsen (Schiller). (See page 342). 162. So also, on the other hand, the first future is used instead of the present, and the future perfect instead of the perfect, to give an air of probability to the expression ; e. g. er ro ir b roefyl nid)t $u )cwfe fetn, he is not likely to be at home, er ro i r b auSgecjangen f e i n, he has in all probability gone out (literally, he will have gone out) ; )u ttnrjl 5 id) ge^ irrt l)aben/ you must have made (have probably made) a mis- take. 163. The imperfect, the perfect, and the pluperfect cor- respond on the whole to the tenses of the same name in Eng- 472 lish, with this exception, that when simply a division of time, and not another event is referred to, the Germans sometimes employ the perfect, when the English idiom requires the im- perfect ; e. g. geflern ftub 3fyre 33itd)er angefommert, yes- terday your books arrived ; er tfl lete 8ed)e g eflo r b en, he died last week. On the meaning and use of these tenses, and on the omission of the auxiliary, see pages 343, 344, and Les- son LVII. 164. As to the moods of the German verb, the Indica- tive, the Subjunctive, as well as the Conditionals and the Im- perative, have been treated at large and illustrated with numer- ous examples in the former part of the book, so that a further analysis of them in this place would be superfluous. On the Subjunctive and Conditionals see Lessons XC. and XCL, and on the Imperative, page 305. III. THE INFINITIVE. 165. Besides serving to form the compound tenses of the verb ( 134), the infinitive mood is used in various other relations, either with or without the preposition JIL 166. All infinitives may be regarded as abstract verbal substantives of the neuter gender, and are frequently employed as such in every case, generally in connection with the arti- cle ; e. g. fcaS (5ten tfl tfym fcfyafcltd), sitting is injurious to him ; id) bin fc e$ d) r e t b e n 3 mttfce, I am tired of writing ; Sum Si e t f e n bijl )u mcfyt (jefcfyuft, you are not fit for travel- ling. 167. The infinitive is employed without $u in the follow- ing instances : 1st, When it stands as the subject of a proposition ; as, cjeben t'ft fe(to,er ate nefymert, it is more blessed to give than to receive ; flerbett tfl m'cfytS, aber leben unD m'cfyt fefyert, fcaS tfl etn Ungliicf (Scfytller), to die is nothing, but to live and not to see, that is a wretched lot indeed. 2d, In connection with the auxiliary verbs of mood b ii r * fen, fonnen, la f fen, mo 3 en, muff en, follen, rooU ten ( 115. 2d), and in. particular expressions, also with fyabert and t & u n ; e. g. er I d g t em a3 b a u e n, he orders a house to be built; id) barf fptelen, I am permitted to play; )it f D 1 1 fl mcfyt fl e !) I e n, thou shalt not steal ; la fie gefyeit, let them go ; )u fy afl gut r efc e n, it is easy for you to speak ; fie tfyitt mcijtS ate roetuen, she does nothing but v/erp. 473 Remark. When the auxiliary taff c n, in the sense of to order, is followed by an infinitive, the latter, though active in German, must generally be rendered by the passive in English ; as, cc (apt em 35ud) einbinben/ he orders a book to be bound, &c. 3d, In connection with the verbs f) e t $ e n, to order ; fy e t e tt and n e n n e n, to call ; ty e t f e n, to help ; t e f) r e n, to teach ; I e r n e n, to learn, and m a cf) e n, to make ; e. g. fyetg tfyn ge* Ijen ! tell him to go ! 4th, When joined to certain verbs denoting an exercise of the senses ; as, fefyen, to see; fjbren, to hear; fufylen, to feel ; ft n t> e n, to find ; as, id) fefye tfyn f cmmen, lefen, setd)* it en, I see him coming, reading, drawing, &c. ; id) fyore ifyn ftngen, fptelen, I hear him singing, playing ; id) fanfc ifen fcfylafen, ft^en, I found him sleeping, sitting. In this connection the in- finitive has the signification of the present participle. 5th, The infinitive is employed without ju in connection with the following verbs: b let ben/ to remain; get) en, to go; fasten, to ride in a carriage ; r e 1 1 e n, to ride on horseback ; e. g. bletben @tc ften, keep your seat ; er gefyt betteln, he goes a begging ; fte fafyren fpajteren, they take an airing, a ride in a carriage ; er rettet fpc^teren/ he takes a ride on horseback. 168. By an idiom, peculiar to the German, the auxiliary verbs of mood fcitrfen, fonnen, mogen, mufien, fotten, rootten, lajfen, and also the verbs fyetgen, ^elfen, t)6ren, fe^en, lernen, le^ren, assume the form of the infinitive, instead of the perfect participle, when they stand in connection with another infini- tive ; e. g. er fyat fid) nid)t ruf)ten biirfen (instead of gebiirft), he has not been permitted to stir ; Su fydtteft f ommen f o ( ( e n (instead of gefettt), you ought to have come ; 3^ fcabt tie getnfce Sng(ant)'^ fennen lernen/ ye have learnt to know the enemies of England. It is now customary, however, regularly to employ the participle of the verbs lernen and lefyren instead of the in- finitive ; as, er feat tfyn fennen 9 e I e r n t, he has become ac- quainted with him; tcf) fyabe tfyn seicfynen gelefyrt, I have taught him drawing. THE INFINITIVE WITH JU* 169. The infinitive with $u is sometimes employed in- stead of the simple infinitive, as the subject of a proposition, especially when in an inverted proposition it comes after its predicate; e. g. e cjejtemt fcem ^anne, tfycittg gu fetn, it behoves man to be diligent, &c. 474 170. When the infinitive with 311 is not the subject of a proposition, it is equivalent to a verbal substantive in an oblique case, corresponding either to the Latin supine (ama- tum, amatii), or to the gerund (amandi do dum do). It is thus used : 1st, After substantives, especially such as signify an inclina- tion or affection of the mind, opportunity, time, te 33itrbe tft fcfywer 311 tragen, the burden is hard to be borne ; e tjl mtr unmbgltcf) 311 fommen, it is impossible for me to come, &c. 3d, After verbs, generally as the object to which an activity, a desire, or emotion of the mind implied by them, is directed , e. g. ftcf) freuen, to rejoice ; fid) bemiifyen, to strive ; fyeffen, to hope ; gebenfen, to intend ; notfytgen, gtwngen, to necessitate, compel; ttetgeflfett, to forget ; cerbteten, to forbid, &c. ; e^ freitt mid), te 311 fel)en, I am glad to see you ; er bemiifyte ftd), t^rt etnjuboten, he strove to overtake him ; icfy ratfye Sir, 311 fcijrcet* gen, I advise you to be silent. 171. 4th, After many verbs which serve to designate the time or mode of an action ; as, anfcmgett/ to begin ; auffyoren, to cease ; fortfafyren, to continue ; etten, to hasten ; pflegen, to be wont ; ttermcgert, to be able ; brcwcfyen, to need ; fcfyetnen/to appear; nn'ffeit, to know ; e. g. er fcingt an 311 ftngen, 311 tan^ert, he begins to sing, to dance ; er sermag mcf)t 3U fprec^en, he is not able to speak ; )u fcfyetnjl e^ ntd)t 3U rot (fen, you appear not to know it, &c. 5th, The infinitive with 311 is sometimes employed as the predicate of a proposition in connection with the copula f e t n, to express the possibility or necessity of an action. The infin- itive, in this connection, though active, has generally a passive signification ; as, e$ tft fetne 3^^ 3 erlteren, there is no time to be lost ; fein (Sternbtlb tft 311 fefyen, no star is to be seen; er tfl mrgenb$ angutreffen, he is nowhere to be found. It occurs also in the same signification with fyaben ; er fyat fyter mcfytS 311 fagen, he has nothing to say here ; wa$ fyaft Su 311 tfywt ? what 475 have you to do ? It is this construction of the infinitive, which has given rise to the future participle ( 121. 3d). 6th, The infinitive with 311 serves sometimes to denote the purpose or design of an action or state expressed by a previous verb, in which case the particle um usually is pre- fixed to add emphasis to the expression ; e. g. t'df) f emme, ii m )tr 93ucfyer $u brtngen, I come for the purpose of bringing you books ; er gefyt tit We tabt, u m mtt etnem 5 relln ^ e jujam* men git fommen, he goes into town in order to meet a friend. IV. PARTICIPLES. 172. Participles are declined like adjectives, and follow the same rules of inflection. Set (tebenbe Skater, the affectionate father ; etn ge(tebte$ fiinb, a beloved child. So also substantively : ber enefene, one who has recovered from sickness ; bte terbenbe, the dying woman ; ba S3er(ana,te, that which was wished for, &c. 173. The present and perfect participles are frequently used as adverbs of manner ; e. g. @te fprecfyen fl t e e n b, you speak fluently ; errotfjenb folgt er tfyrett pitren, blushing he follows her steps. This is especially the case with perfect participles, in connection with the verb f o m m en, to come ; fyeitlenb f ommt ber tiirm 9 e fl o g e n, bet bte 5 (am* me braufenb fucfyt (cfyttfer), howling the blast comes flying, and roaring seeks the flame ; er fbmmt ge(aufen, gentten, he comes running, riding, &c. 174. Participles, like adjectives, serve either to form the predicate of a proposition, or they are joined to a noun in an attributive sense ( 52) ; e. g. ber D?amt ifl 9 e ( e f) r t, the man is learned, and ber g e I e fy r t e 9Lftann, the learned man; bte Dfacfyt tft serfloffen, the night is past, and bte serfloffene 9tarf)t, the past night; ba 2fBaflfer tjl fte* b e n b, the water is boiling, and ba3 ft e b e n b e 2Bafjer, the boil- ing water ; bte anbfcf)aft tjl e n 1 3 ii rf e n b, the landscape is charming, and bte etttgiidfenbe Canbfcfyaft, the charming landscape. The present participle, however, is not generally used in the predicative sense, unless it has entirely assumed the signification of an adjective; thus we cannot say : id) feinrufcnb/ltebcnb, fefycnt), I am calling, loving, seeing; but : id) tufc, licbc, fcf)C. ( 159.) 175. In connection with another verb, the present par- ticiple, either alone or qualified by other words, frequently 476 stands as the abridged form of a subordinate proposition, serv- ing to express the time, manner, cause, or condition of the ac- tion denoted by the verb ; as, bte$ bet mfr b e n f e n b, fcfyltef td) etn (time), revolving these things with myself, I fell asleep, in- stead of, tnbem tcfy bte bet mtr fetbjl bodjte, &c., whilst I was revolving, &c. ; tfym bte >cinbe b r u cf e n b, nafym er 2(bfd)teb (manner}, shaking his hands he took leave ; fern 9(bbtlb buU bet fie, aflet'n ba3 forperlefe 2Bort serefyrenb; i. e. met! fie afletn ba3 forperlofe SfBort serefyrt (cause) (Skitter), she tole- rates no image, adoring the incorporeal word alone. This construction, however, is not as extensive in German as in English, and entirely inadmissible, when the subject of the participle is different from that of the verb, or when in English we employ the compound participle. Thus we cannot say, the sun being risen, I set out on my journey, but when the sun had arisen, &c, a I tie ge I) r a n n t, the house is burnt down, and ba$ a&ge&rannte ^>au^ the house which has burnt down ; tcr ^reunt) i ft a n g e !o m me n, the friend has arrived, and t er a n 9 c f c m m c n e greunt/ the friend 477 who has arrived. Some participles have assumed the signification of adjectives, and may even be compared. (See 63. 1st.) Note. The government of verbs is treated of at the close of the table of irregular verbs below. ADVERBS. 178. An Adverb is a word which limits the meaning of verbs, of adjectives, and of other adverbs. Adverbs correspond to the questions where ? when ? how ? to what degree ? &c. EXAMPLES. 2$ iff bag $)ferb ? Where is the horse ? (St ift n t r g e n b $ gu finbcn. He is nowhere to be found. .fiemmen (Sic fy c r c t n ! Walk in ! SB o n n ift cr ancjtfemmcn ? When did he arrive 1 (r ijl 9 c ft c r n gcfterbcn. He died yesterday. )cc Jtnabc fcfyrciOt fcfyon, after CC The boy writes beautifully, but licf't f cf) I e d) t. reads poorly. 3)cr SSatcr tft fc for fcctttiOt. The father is very sad. >te S^cfc tft a u n c I; m c n b The rose is exceedingly beauti- fd)Ciu ful. 179. With respect to their signification, adverbs may be divided into six classes : 1st, Adverbs of Place. These may either designate rest in a place, in answer to the question where 1 as, itberatt, aflentfyat ben, every where ; ircjenbroo, any where ; mrgenfcS, nowhere ; fyt'er, ta, bort, here, there ; wo, where ; augert, without ; t'nnert, within ; obert, above ; unten, below ; fyinten, behind ; orn, be- fore ; recf)t3, on the right hand ; ItnB, on the left hand ; and the compounds : broben (bar^oben), there above ; btimten (bar^ unten), below ; brau^en, out of doors ; ^tenteben, here below ; bteflfett^, on this side ; jenfett$, on that side ; or, motion or direction towards a place, in answer to the question whither ? bafcer, along ; fyterfyer, hither ; babm, thither ; fyerab, down (towards the speaker) ; fytnab, down (away from the speaker) ; bergcwf, up hill ; bercjab, down hill ; ttorroartS, forward ; ritcf* 5art^, backwards ; ()t mm elm art 3, toward heaven, &c. 2d, Adverbs of Time. These denote either a point or pe- 478 riod of time, in answer to the questions when ? how long since ? by what time ? as, bcmn, then ; mamt, when ; bam a 13, at that time ; mm, jet, now ; etnjl, once ; ned), still ; fdjon, berettS, already; otmal, fonfl, heretofore, formerly; balb, soon ; funfttg, hereafter ; neultd), jimgfl:, recently ; cmfangS, at first ; be3 $?orgen3, be 3(benb3, in the morning, in the eve- ning ; cjeftern, yesterday ; fyeute, to-day ; morcjen, to-morrow ; je, jemal, ever ; me, never, &c. ; or a duration of time ; as, attegett, at all times ; tmmer, fretS, always ; lange, long. 3d, Adverbs of Modality, which are either affirmative, nega- tive, potential, optative, interrogative, or imperative ; as, ja, yes ; bod), however ; fret(td), aroar, though, however ; fiiwafyr, roafyr* ltd), ttnrf(td), verily, truly, actually, in very deed ; fid)er(td), surely ; new, no ; ntd)t, not ; fetnett>eg, by no means ; wetfetcfyt, perhaps ; mafyrfcfyetnltd), probably ; etroa, n>ol)(, per- haps, indeed; wenn bod), ta^ bod), would that ; ofc, if; et* wa, mot)(, perhaps, perchance; mm, now; fcenn, then; htrd)* au, aderbtng^, fdjlec^terbtng^, by all means, absolutely, &c. 4th, Adverbs of Quantity, derived from numerals, and an- swering to the questions how much ? how many ? e. g. ettt)a3, somewhat ; gcm^, entirely ; gemtg, sufficiently ; mel, much ; mem'g, little ; tfyette, partly ; metftenS, mefflent^etl^, mostly, for the most part; erfreni, firstly; groettenS, secondly, &c. ; ferner, further, moreover ; legtenS, lastly ; gmetmal, twice, &c. ; euu fad), simple ; welfad), many fold, &c. ( 80.) 5th, Adverbs of Quality or Manner, which answer to the question how? as, gtticHt'd), fortunately; fd)Dtt, beautifully; fcfylecfyt, badly; fletgig, diligently, dec.; fo, so, thus; me, as, how; eten fo, just so, &c. Many of this class are originally adjectives or participles. 6th, Adverbs of Intensity ; as, fefyr, very ; gar, quite ; fo* gar, even ; a'ltfjerjr, bod)fr, ungemetn, extremely, highly, uncom- monly; ganjltcfy, btttg, entirely, fully; betnaije, fafl, almost, nearly; mir, only; faiim, scarcely; I)bc!)fren3, at the most; menf^flen^, at least ; rcett, bet roeitem, by far, &c. 180. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADVERBS. Ofo. 1. Beginners should carefully mark the distinction be- tween the adverbs f) t n and I) c r, for which there are no correspond- ing 1 terms in English ; f) t n denotes motion away from, and fj e r approximation towards the person speaking. These words have given rise to a number of compounds, all of which participate in this original signification. Examples : 479 Away from, towards the speaker. IjinaO, Ixrab, down ; jjtnauf, fjcrauf, up; rjtnau?, fyerautf, out; fnnctn, h'rein, in; fyuuiOcr, fjciubcr, across. So also b a I) t n, thither, to that place ; b a r) c V, thence, from that place ; b r t f) t n, to yonder place ; bortfjer/ from yonder place ; roof) in, whither; roofyct, whence, &c. Obs. 2. To adverbs of intensity may be added the compound proportionals j c j c, or { c t) c ft c, or jc u in f o, the the ; as, j c grower, b c ft o fccffcr, the greater, the better ; j c (anger cr U'bt, u m f fd)lcd)tcr nnrb a 4 , the longer he lives, the worse he becomes. Obs. 3. The adverb of place, t) a, is derived from the demonstra- tive pronoun b c r, and is an abbreviated expression for an bicfcm )rtc, in this place. So the adverb rc>o, the correlative of t>a, is derived from the relative pronoun rocr, and stands instead of cm nx'lcfyem )rtc, in which place. Both t>a and roo, therefore, are termed pro- nominal adverbs. As adverbs of place they are combined with I) t n and I) c r, and form the compounds t>cif)tn, tafjcr, n>el)tn, tuofxr. Obs. 4. Besides serving as adverbs of place, t>a (tar), and tt>0 (n?cr), are often compounded with prepositions, to supply the place of the dative and accusative neuter of the demonstrative 1) c r, and of the relative or interrogative it) c r x n> c ( cr; c r . Thus the Ger- mans regularly say : fcafrct, therewith, instead of foci fccm ; recOci, wherewith, bet weld) cm ; banrit, thereby, nttt t>cm ; rcemtt, whereby, nut tx>c(cf)cm ; babuvcf), through, by it, burcf) t>aS ; rcoburcf), through, by which, burd) it)c(cl)c5 ; baftir, for that, fur ba$ ; ttjcftir, for which, fur rc>e(cr;e$ ; baran, thereon, an bcm ; tucran/ whereon, an tuctdjcm ; baucn, thereof, rcn bcm ; n, whereof, on it)clcr;em ; u, thereto, gu bcm ; n, whereto, gn wctc^cm. Obs. 5. Some adverbs are compared like adjectives. Their mode of comparison has already been explained ( 68). Obs. 6. On the position which the negative nicfyt and adverbs generally are to occupy in sentences, see Lesson C. 480 PREPOSITIONS. 181. A preposition is a word which is joined to nouns or pronouns, to point out their relation to some other word in the sentence. 182. The following is a list of the German pre- positions : on, on, by, near ; ^instead; cwf, on, upon ; ciuS, out, out of; cwer, > without, on the cwperfycilb, J outside ; fcct, near, with, by ; frinnen, within ; fcieffcit, on this side ; burd), through ; entgccjcn, over against ; fur, for, in favour of ; aetf"' S towar< ^ s a g a i nst > lU, tyalbcn, >on account of; next to ; nefccn, beside ; ticOft, together with ; cbcrfyalb, above ; fammt, together with ; fctt, since, from ; tro, in spite of; , ? tyalbcn, >o hcMcr, j urn, about, round ; um ttJtUcn, for the sake of ; t, notwithstanding ; ijtntcr, behind ; in, in, into ; jcnfett, beyond ; Craft, by virtue of; lancjS, along; tout, according to ; nut, with ; nad), after ; c, by virtue of; Don, from, by, of; $or, before ; roaf)tent>, during ; tvcgcn, on account of; ttnfcct, against ; $u, to ; ^ufolcjc, in consequence of ; giitt>it>ct, against ; grwfcfyen, between, betwixt. 183. Prepositions require the substantives, with which they are connected, to be put either in the Genitive, the Dative, or the Accusative. Some few require the dative in one signi- fication, and the accusative in another. I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 184. The prepositions which govern the genitive case, are: anftatt or ftatt, fyalben or fyaiber, cutfjerfyalb, ir 481 cterfyalb, imterfjalb, btefieit, jenfet't, fraft, but, mittcljl or mttteljl, nngeacfytet, urtroett or wtfern, tfermoge, roaforenb, roegen, urn widen, and lcwg, sufolge, tvo (see 188). EXAMPLES. 2C n ft a 1 1 fdncS 23ater, instead of his father ; bet (5f)rc F) a 1 6 e n, for the sake of honour ; auJK't [) a (0 ber Statt, without the city ; jcnfeit be (5>ra6e*, beyond the grave; fraft metneS 2(mte$, hy virtue of my office ; (cut beg JBriefe*, according to the letter; u n- n? c 1 1 be$ $ird)I)ef$, not far from the church-yard ; ro a () r c n t> t>c^ Jtrtcgcfv during the war ; u m t>c$ : 5r^'^ cn ^ widen/ for the sake of peace ; t r o $ fciner 9^ad)t x in spite of his power. II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE ONLY. 185. Prepositions which govern the dative case alone, are : cui3, auger, bet, Innnen, entgegert, gecjenuber, gema'g, mtt, nad), nac^ft, suna'cfyjl, nebft, fammt, fett, on, 311, juiwfcer, and o b, when it is equivalent to n> e g e n/ on account of. EXAMPLES. r Fcmmt cutS tcr jttrcljc, he comes from church; aupcr 2)tt: tvarcn 2(Uc t)a, all were present except you ; cr t^ofynt b c t m 23cic!er, he lives with the baker; b inn en (always refers to time) gwet SOBedx'n, within two weeks; cr cjet)t i()tn entgegen/ he goes to meet him*; m it metncr 9)Zutter, with my mother ; n a d) tern aufe, to the house ; n e ft fcinem Jrcunbc/ together with his friend ; fail tern Sage, since that day ; 3 u fcer Uiellc, to the spring. III. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 186. The following prepositions require the accusative only : barer;, fiir, gegert, ofyne or fonfcer, urn, and wtber. EXAMPLES. r rctf't burcf)^ gan$c Canb, he travels through the entire country ; t) u r cb if)n tun icf) gtftcfltc^/ by him I am made happy ; cc belofynt mid) fiir metne 9}2uf)c/ he rewards me for my trouble ; ter SSatcr fcrgt fiir feme jttnfcer, the father provides for his children; 9DJann f ii r 93Jann, man by man ; tcl) l)o(te t)a^ f it r d)meicbe(et, I re- gard this as flattery ; q e 9 e n ben Strom, against the stream ; g c- g en etnanber, towards each other; ol)ne Swetfef/ without doubt; fonber (55(etd)cn, without an equal; um etn ill)r, at one o'clock; um ben ,88ntg, about the king; id) faufte e^ um gn?o(f ^reu^er, I bought it for twelve kreuzers ; n?ibcr fetnen S ccun ^/ against his friend. 21 482 IV. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING BOTH THE DATIVE ASTI* ACCUSATIVE. 187. The following prepositions are sometimes connect- ed with the dative, and sometimes with the accusative : an, auf, (unter, tn, neben, iiber, urtter, or, and With respect to all the prepositions of this class it is to be ob- served, that when they imply rest or motion in a place, they are followed by the dative, in answer to the question where ? but when they imply a tendency or motion from one place to another, they are followed by the accusative, in answer to the question whither ? EXAMPLES. ($r roofynt" an b c m 9)Jeerc, he lives near the sea ; cr geljt a n b a itfcr, he goes towards the shore ; ct fd)tctbt ci n fetnen S rcun ^/ ne writes to his Yriend ; a n ber rcinje, at the frontiers ; cr arbcttct n u f bem $elt>c, he labours in the field ; a u f bcr (Sd>ulc, at school ; cr gtcfjt n u f ba 2anb, he moves into the country ; a u f ben ?COenb, for the evening ; f) t n tc r bcm xuife, behind the house ; cr fcfet ftd> ^tntcr ben )fcn, he takes his seat behind the stove; cr ift i n bee &tabi, he is in the city; IcT) CJC(K in bic Stabt, I am going into the city; im Some/ in anger; in btc cmb ncl;mcn/ to take into the- hand; cr (le()t ncbcn nur, he is standing by my side; tct) fe^te mid) n c c n tfen, I seated myself by his side ; u b c r ben (Stcrnen, above the stars ; (i c r ben glup gefycn, to go across the river ; u r^ ter freiem .ptmmet, under the open sky; untcr fcinen . JBntbcrn> among his brothers; tcr tljm, before him; cr ftellt fid) t>cr bcit (Sptccjol/ he takes his position before the looking-glass ; 5 n; i f d) c it nur unb tt)in, between me and him, &c. 188. Of those prepositions which govern the genitive ( 184), the following three may also be connected with the dative : ( d n 9 ; as, Idn$ bey UfetS, or IdngS kern lifer, along the shore ; 3 u f D I cj e, which with the genitive precedes, and with the dative follows the noun ; as, jufolge fceS SBericfyted, or bem 33end)te gufolcje, according to the report ; and t r D i} ; as, trots fetrtcm fyerben d)tcffale, in spite of his hard fate ; tro ber cfal)r r in spite of the danger. 189. When prepositions precede the definite article, they often coalesce with it into one word, as, t m, for inbem, &c. A list of these contractions has been given above ( 10). 483 CONJUNCTIONS. 1 90. A conjunction is a word by which two simple sentences are united into one compound sentence* 191. Conjunctions have been variously classified accord* ing to their different significations. They are : 1st, COPULATIVE ; unb, and ; cmd), also ; foroofyt a(, as well as ; aitbcm, moreover ; ciugerbem, besides ; roeber nod), nei- ther nor ; md)t nut or mcfyt atletn fonbern and), not only but also ; ferner, furthermore ; jugletd), at the same time. 2d, DISJUNCTIVE; entroeber o bet, either or; e. g. eitt* tt> e b e r grog o b e r Hem, either large or small. 3d, ADVERSATIVE ; aber, attem, but ; fcnbern (used only after a negative), but ; bod), jebod), yet ; bennod), nevertheless ; fonft else ; m'elmefyr, rather ; fytngegen, on the contrary ; md)t foroofyt al3 welmefyr, not so much as rather. 4th, CONDITIONAL; menu/ fo, wo, roofern, if; fafl3 or tm gatf, in case ; jo md)t, if not ; e. g. > e n n id) nut etn vOitttel nwgte, ben djaben iweber cjut $u mad)en! if I only knew some means of repairing the damage ! In German the conjunction roenn is often omitted, and then the verb (if the tense is simple) or the auxiliary (if the tense is compound) takes the place of the conjunction ; m d r e ft Sit fyier geroefen, mem SSrttber ware md)t geftorben, for roenn Sit fyter gemefen warefl, &c., if thou hadst been present, my brother would not have died. 5th, CONCESSIVE ; gwar, to be sure, indeed, true ; nnettjofyf, obmot)(, obfd)on, ob^(etd), wenn g(etd), though, although ; e. g. o b n) o \)l ba^ letter fd)6n iff, fo fann er bod) m'd)t au^geten, though the weather is fine, he is nevertheless unable to go out. Compare also page 296. 6th, CAUSAL ; benn, for ; ba, roeil, nun, since ; e. g. t'd) gefye mtt Str, w e i ( Sit ben recfyten SBeg md)t fcnnfl, I go with you, because you do not know the right way ; sortt>art3 mugt Sit, benn ritcfroartS fannjl Sit ntc^t met)r, you must go onward, for back you can no longer go. 7th, ILLATIVE ; alfo, bamm, therefore ; bafyer, hence ; beg* fyalb, begwegen, nm begmitten, on that account; fo(glt'd), conse- quently ; e. g. ev i\t franf, f o 1 9 1 1 df) mug er ju >aiife bleiben, he is sick, consequently he must remain at home ; e cjeftel i^m md)t mebr unter ben 5)?cnfd)en, begroe^en sog er fid) in bte (Sinfamf ett juvi'uf, he was no longer pleased among men, there- fore he retired into solitude. 484 8th, FINAL ; fca, that ; cwf fcag, fcamtt, in order that ; um 511, in order to ; jtr ftrafen tfyn, b a m i t er fid) beflfere, we punish him in order that he may reform ; eilen te, fcamt't a, when ; roann, when ; nja^renb, whilst ; tnbem, tnteffen, in that, during which time ; In3, until, &c. 192. For those conjunctions which require the verb to be put at the end of the sentence, see page 180. On com- pound conjunctions, cntroeber oter, &c., see page 332. INTERJECTIONS. 193. Interjections are words or articulate sounds expressive of sudden emotion. The most important interjections used in German, are : act) ! alas ! ah ! falto ! holla ! df) ! ah ! l)ui ! hurrah ! quick ! auf ! up ! l)ufd) ! hush ! brat* ! bravo ! fnadfS ! crack ! snap ! ct ! why ! eigh ! Icifcet ! alas ! frtfci) ! brisk ! quick ! ol) ! ! oh ! fort ! away ! paff ! puff ! puff ! (iicf ^u ! success to you ! pfui ! fy ! 60 1 ha ! pc^taufcnt) ! 'zounds ! f)a, f)a, F)C ! fyc t>a ! soho ! ho there ! fd)t ! fyAt ! hold ! tcpp ! agreed ! phalli Wl^lo, behold! fief; ba ! ! hey-day! "J^wo! ala! j)tlf, |>tmmri ! heaven help ! n?cl)(an ! well then ! 485 Remark 1. As interjections express no thought, but simply out- breaks of feeling 1 , they neither govern other words, nor are they governed by any. Rent. 2. They stand in connection with every case, but more particularly with the nominative, -griftf) ! cfcflcn, fctfc $ut cmt) ! brisk ! my workmen, be at hand ! t>cm Sljorcn gefcfytcfyt c rccl)t ! the fool deserves it ! Rem. 3. The use of rcol)t, rocfyc, $etf, is elliptical, fct being understood. They always require the dative which depends on the omitted verb ; e. g. rochc (fct) tf)m ! wo be to him ! Jbcit (fct) )it! hail thou ! The interjections e, ad), and pf ui are frequent- ly put with the genitive ; e. g. pfut fcet cfyanfcc ! for shame ! ncf) t>cg @(cntcS ! alas, the misery ! NOTE. For the general principles of CONSTRUCTION and a recapitulation of the RULES OF SYNTAX, which are scattered through the book, see Lesson 103, pages 356 363. 486 TABLE OF CLASSIFICATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. REMARK. From this table must be excepted the sixteen irregu- lar verbs, which in our list form the first class.* J i o rS ^ 11 I ^1 Infinitive. h Past Participle. i i e a e cFjcn, to see, fab, flcf^cn. e ^clfcn, to help, Mf, Qcl)o(fcn 11 a i tnnen, to reflect, fann, ^cfonncn. in t a u Srinfcn/ to drink, rtanf, cjctvunfcn. IV ie a fatten, to fall, IW, gcfaltcn. K ie djrdfcen/ to write, fc^rtc^ 9cfd)rie6cn. V et i i Scipcn, to bite, t)tp, QcOtffcn. a', cm, vi tr (Sdjtepcn/ to shoot, fd^cp/ gcf^offen. VII a u a (^cf)(o^cn/ to beat, f*, 9 , gefdjtagcn. The 5th and 6th classes include the greater part of the irregular verbs. 487 EXPLANATORY REMARKS. I. The first class changes the radical vowel e into a in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. eben, to give ; imperfect gab ; past part, gegeben. To this class must be added : bitten, to entreat (beg), which changes the radical vowel t in the same manner, as : imperfect bat j past part, gebeten. II. The second class changes the radical vowel e or { into a in the imperfect, and in the past participle into p. Ex. Iftef)* men, to take ; imperf. nafym ; past part, genommen ; geroinnen, to win ; imperf. geroann ; past part, genoonnen. To these must be added, gebd'ren, produce (to give birth to), which has a in- stead of t in the root, as : imperf. gebar ; past part, geboren. III. The third class changes the radical vowel t into a in the imperfect, and in the past part, into u. Ex. Scfyltngen, to sling ; imperf. fctylang, past part, gefcfyhmgcn ; except fctngen, to hire ; imperf. bung ; past part, gefcungen 5 fcfytnten, to flay ; imperf. fcfyunb ; past part, gefcfyunten ; and tfyun/ to do ; imperf. tfyat; past part, getfyan. IV. The fourth class changes the radical vowel a into te in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. )at ten, to hold; imperf. fyt'elt; past part, gefyalten $ except fang en, to catch ; imperf. ftng ; past part, gefangen. The following conform to the principle of the rule, resuming in the past part, the radical vowel or diphthong of the present : (aufen, to run ; imperf. Itef ; past part, gelaufen ; ge^en, to go ; imperf. gtng ; past part, gegangen ; betgen, to order ; imperf. fyfeg ; past part, gefyeigen ; rufen, to call ; imperf. rtef ; past part, gerufen ; ftcgen, to push ; imperf. ftte ; past part, gejlo^en. V. The fifth class changes the radical vowel et into te in the imperf. and in the past part, or before a double consonant into u Ex. S3tetben, to remain ; imperf. blteb ; past part. geMteben ; fcfynetfcen, to cut ; imperf. fc^nttt j past part, ge* frf?nttten. 488 VI. The sixth class changes the radical vowels : 5, cm, e, t, it, 6, ii, into o in the imperf. and past participle. Ex. cfyroci* rert, to fester ; imperf. fcfyroor , past part, gefcfyworen ; faugett, to suck ; imperf. fog ; past part, gefogen ; fcmfen, to drink to excess; imperf. foffj past part, gefeflp en ; fyebert, to lift ; imperf. tyob ; past part, gefyoben ; ertt)trren r to embroil (to confuse) ; imperf. sermorr ; past part, ^ermorren; bteten, to offer ; imperf. tot ; past part, geboten ; fc^moren, to swear ; imperf. fdjwor fdjwur) ; past part, gefcfyworett ; lugen, to lie ; imperf! (09 ; past part, gelogen* VII. The seventh class changes the radical vowel a into u in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. 2Bad)fen, to grow imperf. HnicfyS; past part, geroacfyfen ; jle^en/ to stand, has jlanb in the imperfect (formerly, however, jtunt>) and in the past parf. gejtcmberu 489 to ' .1 f s. .l^ 13 fi =1 . r2 2 S.^ ^ ^ O .j C ** ""^ OH f &a 1 1 1 "3 "s vE 52 *l '22 r "fl o - SM CO *i "^ # f | 1^^ z &*& % S5=ff|l| ||f | " (Li JO >0 ^*S<42SSe2u2- 22 wf *o 53 cricncncr en CD cr crxr: CD en en ^n en i || f 8 *- Jri .* *i ; S .f g < 3 c ti ii ii S.H-e^ W W : <3 -ZZ j ^j & /=> Illfliiiilfi ^ "5 2~2 ts ^ *e^e*e*e B *" -S" *B *B *6" *S" -S" 'S-S' H 3 *^ s r > D '-* C _d 1 O ^ ca -g #* s^ *^ -j . .; .j . O -i #* *i HH ^."o "o -2 a t5 .S-"* ^ "3 o 1 Ifl'n- J- jL <3 S ^e-e-e^ iUltlililf i rH * S" w c3 G^ EH OH. i PH to ^ff ^ B c O CL,-^ ^ & - *J7 cf 5 ^- ' * * ' S& tz CO je^'" 1 " . "5 ' tl S 1 ' fes * ' CO ** w "c T3 ^ t* ^^ ^ |j ^ . t* i^ ^^ fi * cd C rt 3 V 2 x ** l^ " .2 ,2 o -^ |5| l/i ^3 1 ^ Iff ^ -if I 1 ^ s .1 <*H ! ^ s 1 s !H a OJ o .- .- g 12 * ll i "S ^ .1 ^"s^ -j M ^2 CJ ^ , ^ ** ^Q I S 'S ^ a ^> s o o ^- X^22 M-^JJ s s 2 J^ t3S||532-3|o ft M llll s^ ^ S -3 g||silllgl|g ^ S .s s ^^ S S S ^ S 15=^ 1* $^ S5 (9^5?5? 490 PQ w EH o o o o 02 * EH 'r- , hH ' . "1 Q^ 1 ' *>$ IJ 3 - a g ^ .S W3 Cj "all s 1 "^ be 52 T3 ^ ^ J 8 'o 03 bD 02 +* * *H I I 3 c bD 02 03 I * cu S.JH g g g "5 O ' *-< ' c3 IS - 1 BI O3 ;_, eS, g/E a eS.' 3 i\ I I C* >=> ^ &H o> -j3 S o 3 ^ 491 JS2 5 I I M I 1 . . e- C -s> - ^.J i gjT :- i- :a If ^l*.fi|.ft| -j ?> n> O ;o : C '^ '^ '^ W J- > J>^> sO>^> ^>^/J^Sj^OC/-^j'^>^>'J^ " ^ O O G v ^ . ^ ^g- jr *i *> ^ ^. o S a ;S ^ *-> j- >-> I li *" r*^ C^ o bo J t .38 I rO O o3 3 1 o .^ - p o3 Q3 o > o 3 o| F^ S'rt O) & iiifiWii jtji Sy^y-^-S^ S^ S^i ^S^^'c^^^^^^^^^ S^ c ^ ' "M^O'^^CJ"' ""i^O'^o If5o5 Oi W < i O^D ^OvSC^rMT^OO^C^^ ^^ -S.s 492 ill III If 1 1 d 'S g c 5 c y IS II I il " gg c cs I *e* JO JO JO ^ JO JO >e ill If I .2 1 I 8 c e: rs 55 JO JO "T~ .S (D O U ^ H ^ 3 o 3 . g 3 ^ g S S^ o *.^&:^. c'*t. r C re C -li l-slf^i s . . fc3 ' Q co o o o --a :zr liifli C K j J 3 cT 494 cL a Is.' 8 s^ 8-3 s E C C C l.* en cn en < cr c*i cncf) I 1 & -^ 2 00 cfi cn en . -J ^"en'cn srsar c c: !* i > C > o vs en cncn K T3 P? -1- fef : .a ? 2 & - y t ^y% 1 J_> ._ *> en.< 8 M I .f ! cn "cn . g 3 S ^ O ' tT G ^ oT r, U ^ od -S g* 3 B-^.S o o^ 3 "*t. ^"^ > -Pn2 g-g p^ <^ .^. ,__ I r-4 O ^ O 495 II 111 I I I 8r g sg fj It si, ggs g 4= c S * s- ;- * * *f J t I 111 o <> o ^> > ' i ?* rN w^ *" 2 .. 5* i "sIS 1 S ^g 5 * ^tf = ^ I .a I 1; 3 I .& *8- J2 a aT CS3 1 2 2 .f- 1 s M 1) g q 5 o bo si " o 5\2 r> 11 ^ ! r- cj r ~i 10 -O ^fllll g g ^ g a ^13 ' ^ ai ^ T^ O Tj! o ^2 *3il 2 -d a^ s ^l 11 cr w 33 PXJ l-s 496 Ill ? 111 f 1 1 1 1 uf I I I |) 1 1 e* -> _. s_ t . M r2 *- "H, ^ s ^ g g g <' cc^cg^c c "S "H J> o 2 JC> J^^ S -**^ *?J .j** c>) <3^ C3 <3 <3 - .- '-* trf O 1 "i > o tj t> t> <3^ C71, <3^ Cfi <>i <>i C>} * 1 *73 1 IE? *:!_ .^ * ^ S s 2 ^ 'c c '5 to *2 1 44s* 4< |5 ^ M .^ 1 < * i.iis S"SS555^ SSQ. jl s 1 fill 1 t"***2^* * ~ c I *>> ^e ^e-B-s-e^g^e ^e a> ** ^6" o ^_j 1 c f A . & : : :J ^ . * p : ' P3 3 ^ ^ . O r? JI 2 vS. 's" '-** ^ <3 ^J ;2 ^S -^ k- 1" /= ij ^ 5 ''S ! I I cT * ^Jti- * * (1 * ^ . . - * ^="3" ^- 1 !r> ^ 1 & "8 ^ S JO >=> JO M X ^3 * cd d> - vS ^S ^ 1 ^ .2 aTjj 5 ""1 | ^r o" o -1 ^tS o ->'S - a? *" .S *o E "*"* c ^ ^* ** ^ C 3 0^2 ^^ J bJD ca '3 C3 "* ^ : * t "3 ccSS-g^S ^ SS^Isl^^S: ^2 -2 * O- C v ^_i C g" "c >t: i s -o ~2 c 5 C3 '?> sIsSS^s|S g g tf> ift C9 *? f U W, ^ ,-, ^ ^^ <- i- o 497 II w^ i OO OO 3 OD OO - C 5 55 <3" oo *e** ^ s "g oo on i C 3 . cr tt 4 I 55 5 5 I .a I * SrS isl I en. 2 t Jf . 2 S 5 53 n S3 >S* 2 ~ ' 3 X;i . ^ co S-S- ^ o 7 ^ ^ 2 s * i JL! H -2 -^ ^S B a, ^ bfl rl^i ^ 2 1JI- 5i* , B^s 3 a to *3 3 *o s.S 5 O S d S H ^ -I--Q o ** ^s" j 499 s&- ~s .4|| || I I II g g c 3 Sj c o e B C ,t I ^S s s s g -c i g J?i:i:i: is % I > -ll -^S 1 } <3} II a s & & III c S" ^S - _J .~ ZT "^T o CJ ?* ? <3 o o o 3 .,-? ^zi V~? "Ci Mi - - wi >g" C? 1 1 ti I ; : g a * tt e^ ^ j& S Si . ^ ti bc-S- 3 M % *"" ^ "2= ? S : tf ^-5 .2 8, CO s I ! T III ittfi &. -p g ^ C ^ O rfi ' >** v& 19 c3 o5 S oT 500 ill > o do 1 I I 1 1 : c g c --> .> c a a a o 3 B a "S-'s- 'S-'s-'s-S- . en en en en SS r^ C a a J>- enen en en -Blee -e>e v C C8 3 !*! P-i aT s *s ti=L c ; cr?4*i c g a o ~ ~ o *?= > -^ -_. '^~'^~ ' r^ en en en en en en a^.^io \riSj_> ^oic: ^^^1 ^aitg: ^ - I - enencn er. en en en en en 3s /=> . c *s .e: ^. >e - ^^ & I I t e. S3 bJD ^ ^^T OH 'S -^ S3 03 tT S 2 b? & & 1 ^ Q .2 2 a- .2 d g-s - a -^ g n s - O CO CO C* i-< ( ! s g i^g-3 [iff] s5 is g p?^ I '- 502 C C, S o .*S b*D c g g S^ &S sir | B-yLJ s,s g^ |a| I 1 1 eiii: >f> 3 3 ^ e < >^ cr.-=> ^> <* j> -^ j *S" "2 5 "^ I> -5 f^ i S " . o ^sc= ? c c a 3 Iff g I. fit 1~ MMlA Q ^ 503 \ 1 1 1 *" 1 g g S 5 g 4? jl J* g c a JO u c If JO l lilt }_> W W J- rworrcn 4 ! 15 s ? 1 K K * & 2 s ^> . . #* US ,A 1^> ** "S s o ts= lift. 3^*e B ^ -*- *C ^ ^ S S %i ? ^ <^3 ^^s *s" .Si SB j-* > r> ** * g K i K S e ^S* ^^"^^ ^6* *G* N - X 'U> *S* *6'*S'9' ^ *B" j -* .. i- "* Y(^ 05 T> Ti CD 5 S ^j '"^ ^ ti ^3^*^ *s* ^ ^ ^ 1 e ^ u JO H 1 Ill * f-t b t * s *^S~ 5 * s 1 sss _> s f . . i I* ^o U N O ?" "g H ^ K i- : S hD 2 M JO 1 i M JO <6 1 1 1*S 'en & JQ g ** w 13 J >i ^s" O) O he o .2 W -4. 8 i M c o .S a* ;Q ^ S J-> O .s*^> "1 ** "~* "^ ) 03 pQ S? O ?Q S g - 2 ^ -3 3 3 ^S I iff I I G ^ 504 gll jt-1 INI! | tr 'a :~ S g B-' a t: c s ^j ^ ^c ji o S o gag C?) CS^ C53 1^ a >e a a "a "a a 1 a f a flssl a a a a a cs a . <3 B 2-02 It: * ^ a JO * i a JO I 1 ' p ? S 3 o si o 2 o I ^3 G co O .S 505 1 I js3 ? IU ooc-> W *-i *- o *' ' -S 5-3 ^O <* 2 H 3 Hi C _. O -* T3 en t^ C! O O c3 j^ 1-U Isl i=? S-t-g 8 c a 'SH^- 2 2 ^~ ' X "2 ^ r ' is active and regular. ), is an active and regular verb. 1 o 1 I ' = *n & h *^ ^ 1 J o; 1 O o 5 3 -f ^ ,-. .^ i ^ o t ^ SS c C' 00 kh 1 r: .f S 13 ^ i "^' r_l -" O o J -( cr, S ^OQ jts > . ^ r. a ll 506 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. The subject of the verb is always in the nominative ; the di- rect or immediate object is put in the accusative. Ex.: Sav( fcfyretbt etnen 23nef, Charles writes a letter. Sari is the sub- ject or nominative, etnen 55rfef is the immediate object or accu- sative. I. VERBS WHICH ARE FOLLOWED BY THE NOMINATIVE. The following verbs take after them only the nominative ; if they have an attribute, it is in like manner put in the nomi- native : <& i t n, to be. (Setn 23rutcr roar etn proper |>ctt>, his brother was a great hero. SB c r t> c n, to become. (5t rourbe cin wcfycr SOfann, he became a rich man. SB ( tf i t> c n, to remain. (5r HicO f!ct$ mcin getrcuer rcunt>, he al- ways remained my faithful friend. .> c i ji c n, to call (be called). 9)?etn attcjlcr SBruber fyctpt (Sarf, my eldest brother is called Charles. d) c i n c n/ to appear. 3)cr 00, fcfyicn nrir cine (Srimbe, t cm Sag, the day appeared to me an hour, the year a day. With some passive verbs, such as genannt roerben, to be called, named. Ex. : Sr fann etn brauer -JWann genannt n>erbcn, he can (may) be called a good man ; gefcfyolten roerfcen, to be chided. II. VERBS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. a) The following verbs, besides the direct object in the accu- sative, have an indirect object in the genitive : - ?( n f( a q c n, to accuse, 93Zcm ftagtc ifyn t>c$ 2)icbflaOle an, they accused him of theft. ^ c 1 c h r c n, to instruct. (Jr fiat mid) ctnc^ SBcffcrn Mcbrt, he has instructed me in something better (put me right). VH c v o b c n, to deprive, rob. 93?cm hat thn fcincS 3Scrmocjon Oc* raubt, they have deprived (robbed) him of his fortune. &cfd)tt(btgen, to charge. 93Jan hat i()n teti .pcd)ivrrat^ fcc* fd}ll(^t^'\t / they have charged him with high treason. ( n 1 1 c 1) i a, c n, to exempt, dispense. 9)?an (jot tl)n fcuu'S TTmtcS Cntfo^t, they have dismissed him from his office. U c b c r f ti h r c n, u b c r ID c i f c n, to convict. 937an !mt thn cU iu*$ a>i'rbvcd)cn^ iibcvfti()rt (iiiuTivicfi'n)/ they have convicted him of a crime. U c b c r f) e b c n *, to exempt. Sa'manfrcm e j ncv @acl)C ubcv^cOcn, to exempt a person from any thing (or trouble). 507 U e fr e r 9 e it $ e n, to persuade, convince. (r tyat mid) fceficn* liK' v^iK}t, he has convinced me of it. > e v ficbcrn (see Obs. Lesson 64), to assure. 3d) tcrfid)cre <2 te uu'tner ^>cd)ad)tuncj unt) mctncr Sicbc, I assure you of my esteem and affection. Jo or iv c if en *, to banish. Gtnen te$ 2antc* b wrrocifcn, to banish a person from his country. &* u r 1 1 a, e n, to honour, estimate, (Sr nntrfcicjt raid) feineS a>cr^ trau cn$, he honours me with his confidence. b") A considerable number of reflexive verbs require an in- direct object in the genitive, as : t cb a n n c f) in c n*, to interest one's self. (5r nafym fid) be* in? h'5 an, he interested himself in (for) the child. icb be Men en, to avail one's self. sd) befricne mid) ticfet fcbeiKn ^H'leaenfH'it, I avail myself of this good opportunity. id) b e f I e i 9 e n * or b c f I c i (H cj c n/ to apply, attach one's self. J^ofK'tfncjc 5Mcb tcr ^111)01^, attach yourself to virtue. c r u n q b c 9 c b c n *, to resign one's office, to desist from, renounce one's claim, pretension. i cb b c m a cb 1 1 9 c n y fi cb c m c i ft c r n, to possess one's self, to make one's self master. 9)?an bcmacbtt^te fid) t>e$ JDtcbc^ they pos- sessed themselves of (captured) the thief. id) cine? ) r t c $ b c fi n n c n *, to remember a place. Sid) t>c$ SBctncS cntfyaltcn*, to abstain from wine. Sid) ctner adje c ntfd) i a a,cn* x to divest one's self of (give up) any thing. id) t) c r 2C r me n c r b a r m c n *, to take upon one's self the cause of the poor. icb e t n e $ 93erfprcdjen$ (or an f c t n 93 e r f p r c d) c n) c r i n n e r n (Obs. D. Lesson 71), to remember a promise. id) fetnetf 3ornc crivcbtcn/to check one's anger. i cb e t n c t 2C n t tv o r t 3 c 1 1 6 ft c n, to console one's self with an answer (await a reply in confidence). id) f c i n c 9? c i cb t !j u m r ii f) m c n, to boast of one's riches. icb ctncr fcbtccbtcn ant>luno, fdjamcn, to blush (feel ashamed) at a bad action. id) ctncr acbc untcrfangcn* (cber untcrfte^cn)/ to venture upon (undertake) any thing. id) cineS felcben (iic!$ tJcrmutFjcn, to anticipate (calculate upon) such good fortune. icb cinct ad)C ttctfcljctt, to be aware of (prepared for) any thing. id) c i n c r a cb c tv c i g c r n, to hesitate upon (refuse) any thing. This verb is used also with oon, as : 3d; bin sou 3$ret ^mwbfc^aft liber* jeitgt, I am convinced of your friendship. b This may also take after it the preposition (IU, as : Scmanbcn an bent ganfcf Otmctfen, to banish a person from his country. 508 c) Many verbs are used indifferently with the genitive or accusative ; but with the genitive they mark a sense more gen- eral and more absolute than with the accusative, as : 2C cb t c n, esteem. 3cr> ncbtc fcinct (eN'r tfjn), I esteem him, SB e fe 2 r f c n, to be in need, fSMr bcfciirfcn Sfjrcr (ofccr SOrc) ufe fe, we are in need of your aid. ( n t b c f) r c n, to spare, do without. 3d) fcmn fcincr (ebcr tl)n) nic()t cntbdjrcn, I cannot spare (do without) him. ( r ru a r) n c n, to mention, make mention. ($t mvafynte 3f;rcc (eK't c$ ScbcnS (efcct tag Cebcn), en- joy life. 5) f i c Q c n, to take care, (T pfU'Qte fcincr (ofccr fctne) efunfcrjcit, he took care of his health. c n, to spare (take care of), gftcm muff fcincc (efcct tf)n) fcfycncn, they must spare him. d) The verb few, to be, requires the genitive in the following expressions : c tv o fj n t f c t n, to be accustomed. (t iff tcffcn nid>t gcrcefjnt, he is not accustomed to it. 5) c r 93f c t n u n 3 f c t n, to be of opinion. u t c n 9)2 u t ft c / Q u t c r a u n e f c i n, to have courage, to be in a good humour, in spirits. SB i U c n 5 f c t n 7 to have the intention. 3) c $ t) c $ f C i u, to die, be dead. (Sr tft fat ot>c$, he is a dead man. u t c r o f f n u n g f * t n/ to he with child. Rem. Verbs always require after them the same case as the past participles used adjectively. (See the government of adjectives, Lesson 93.) e) Verbs referring to time, require in like manner the geni- tives, although not followed by a preposition, as : 5) c $ 932 c r t q c n $, t> c $ ?C 6 c n b $ f p a 3 i c r e n g c f) c n, *D take a walk in the morning, in the evening. 5) c $ 9?cicbt$ c (b c r 92 act) t or tTie 9?acr)t I) tribute!)) a r b c i t c n, to work at (all) night. 5) c $ 83 o r m i 1 1 a cj 6 a r c i f e n/ to depart (start, set out) in the morning, forenoon. ) e $ 9? a cb mi 1 1 a 9 $ f p a g i c r c n r c 1 1 e n/ to ride out (on horseback) in the afternoon. > c $ S a 9 (0 c t o t> c r a m a cj c) a r b c i t c n, to work by day, in the day time. c Custom requires that the word !ftacl)r, although feminine, takes here an in the genitive. 509 S u n b S07ontag$gcbt Me $ o ft a &/ the mail leaves on (every) Sunday and Monday. Wl c i n 5 r c u n b t o nun t f c d) 5 m a t b c $ 3 a F) r $ (o b c t i in 3 b r e)/ $ n> c t m (i ( t c 5 932 c n a t $ (o b c r i m 93? o n a t), c t n in a ( Me 3.$ ccb c (accusative), my friend comes six times a (in the) year, twice a month, once a week. (See Lessons 31 and 54, Obs. B.) III. VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. Besides the direct object in the accusative, verbs often have an indirect one, which is put in the dative. Ex. : 3 c in a u t> c m c t n> a 3 c c n, to give something to some- body. 3 c in a n ft c m f a 3 c n, m c ( b c n, f d) r c i c n, a n t n> e r= t c n, to say to, mention to, write to, reply to somebody. The verbs which require the dative are : a) Most neuter verbs which do not admit of a direct object in the accusative, as : 3 t' in a n b c m a n 9 c lj c r c n, to belong to somebody. 3 i* m a n t) c in a u 6 ID c t d) c n *, to avoid somebody. f a I ( c n, to please. (Sr gcfallt mirfefjr, he pleases me much. 3 c HI a n & c m $ c () c r cb c n, to obey somebody. 3 *-' in a n t> c m 9 ( c i cl) c n *, to resemble somebody. b) The following reflexive verbs : t cb c t n i ( t> c n, to imagine to one's self. u Wbcft 2)ir cin, you imagine to yourself. i cb c r fl c b c n *, to yield, surrender. <5t crcjtOt fid) bet Siu gcnt<, he yields to virtue. (2 i cb n a b c r n (c b e r ft d) n n f) c n), to approach. 9?af)mt (Sic fid) Mn Jcucr, approach the fire, r natjct fid) nur, he approaches me. >tcf) ttorftenen/to represent to one's self, to imagine. 3d) ftcllc nut t>cr, I represent to myself. t d) ro i b m e n, to devote (consecrate, dedicate) oneself. (Sc rwtmict fid) ben cfd)aftcn, he devotes himself to business. c) Certain impersonal verbs. See page 158, Obs. A. (S e> t ft m i r a n g ft/ I am afraid. ( f d) c t n t 2) t r/ it appears to you (thee). 58enn e$ 3bncn bclte&t, if you please, like. < g ^atmttgett&umt, I dreamt, &c. IV. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE, a) All active and transitive verbs are followed by the accu- sative of the direct object, which in the passive voice becomes the subject nominative, as : 510 ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 3 d) f d) a c m c i n c n ft r c a n b, SttctR Jrcunb rcirb ren mtr cjcfd)at. I esteem, appreciate my friend. 3d) cf)tc bi e SB a ^ r fy e i t, I Sic SBa&rfyctt nnrfc sen nut gccfyrt. honour the truth. @ r 1 1 c b t t> a $ ,R i n t>, he loves 5a3 ftint> tvtrb fen if;m geltcOt. the child. b) Most of those reflexive verbs, which ought to be consid- ered as active, expressing an action which terminates in the agent himself (see Lesson 70), as : 3 eft f r c u c m t cf)/ I rejoice. 5) u f cb a m ft Si d), you are (thou art) ashamed. 23 c m ii f) c n (Sic fi d) n t d) t, do not trouble yourself. c) Certain impersonal verbs. (See page 158, Obs. A.), as : 6 $ fj it n g c r t mid)/ I am hungry. .(5 f r i c r t i I) n, he is cold. d) The following verbs govern two accusatives, the one of the person, and the other of the thing : $ c 1 9 c n *, to call, be called, order. c ( t c n *, f d) i m p f c n x d to abuse. <5t fcbaft (fdjimpftc) mid) cincn barren, he called me a fool by way of reproach. ^ It must not be forgotten that the verbs ^cijjett, ttettttett, fc^eltett, and fc^tm* ^>fen have two nominatives in the passive. D. Appleton fy Co. have recently published HISTORY OF GERMANY, FROM THE EARLIEST PERIOD TO THE PRESENT TIME. BY FREDERICK KOHLRAUSCH, Chief of the Board of Education for the Kingdom of Hanover, and late Professor of History in the Polytechnic School. Translated from the last German edition, BY JAMES D. HAAS. One elegant 8vo. volume, of 500 pages, with complete Index, SI 50. TRANSLATORS PREFACE. The high merits and distinguished character of the original German Work, by Pro- fessor Kohlrausch, of which this is a translation, have long been acknowledged. A work which, d tiring- a period of thirty years, has enjoyed so much popularity as to have gone through several editions, embracing a circulation of many thousand copies ; a production which has extended and established its good repute, even in its original form far beyond its native clime, to England, France, Belgium, Italy, America, &c. (in some of which countries it has been r printed in German,) and has thus become a standard bo<>k of reference in almost all thi Universities and principal public as well as private educational Institutions. Such a p iblication possesses ample testimony proving it able to create a lasting interest, and confirn. ng its claims to consideration and esteem. The aim of the distinguished author, in this valuable history, is thus simply but dis- tinctly expressed by himself: " My sole object," he says, " has been to produce a suc- cinct and connected development of the vivid and eventful course of our country's his- tory, written in a style calculated to excite the interest and sympathy of my readers, and of such especially who, not seeking to enter upon a very profound study of the sources and more elaborate works connected with the annals of our empire, are nevertheless anxious to have presented to them the means of acquiring an accurate knowledge of the records of our Fatherland, in such a form as to leave upon the mind and heart an enduring, indelible impression." That our industrious historian has attained his object, the intelligent reader will find in the interest excited, the clear views i't.rarted, and the deep impression effected by Ins animated portrayals of both events and individuals. This has been the original and acknowledged characteristic of Herr Kohirausch's work throughout its entire existence j but in the new edition, from which this translation has been rendered, he has endeavour- ed to make it as perfect as possible, both in matter and style, and besides this has en- riched it with many valuable notes not contained in the former editions : thus making it in reality a concise, yet, in every respect, a complete history of Germany. It is important to remark, that Professor Koh'rausch is a Protestant, and one distin guished not less for his freedom from prejudice and impartiality, than for the comprehen- siveness of his views and the high tone of his philosophy. The general adoption of the work alike by Protestant and Romanist is proof sufficiently convincing of the impartiality ot his statements, and of the justice of his reflections and sentiments. " After England, no country has stronger claims upon the attention of Americans than Germany Its institutions, language, literature and national character combine to ren- der its history highly interesting. The place it has occupied among nations for 1000 years that is, ever since the era of Charlemagne has been, on the whole, second to none in importance Some of the greatest inventions among them gunpowder and the art of printing owe their origin to the Germans. The literature of Germany is now exciting a marked influence over our own, and we can never forget that Germany is the cradle of the Reformation. " Notwithstanding all these claims upon our attention, it is not to be denied that the history of Germany has been very little known among us. Few persons except the highly educated have more than a very measrre knowledge of the outlines of German history. *' The publication of Kohirausch's History, which is a standard work at home, comes m very opportunely to supply the dearth of information on this interesting topic. It fur nishes a most valuable compeud ; and will tend to spread in our country a knowledge of one of the most refined as well as most learned of modern nations. Few of the his- torical works of our day are more worthy of the public patronage. Erenhff JUirrvr, A NEW SCHOOL AND REFERENCE DICTIONARY, Published by D. Apphton <5f Company. A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE* CONTAINING THE PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION Of all words authorized by eminent writers ; TO WHICH ARE ADDED, A VOCABULARY OF THE ROOTS OF ENGLISH WORDS, AND AN ACCENTED LIST OF GREEK, LATIN, AND SCRIPTURE PROPER NAMES. BY ALEXANDER REID, A. M., Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. WITH A CRITICAL PREFACE, BY HENRY REED, Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. One Volume 12mo. of near 600 pages, neatly bound in leather. Price $1. Among the wants of our time was a good Dictionary of our own language, espe- cially adapted for academies and schools. The books which have long been in u-e, were of little value to the junior students, being too concise in the definitions, and immethodical in the arrangement. Reid's English Dictionary was compiled e\[ K - ly to develop the precise analogies and various properties of the authorized words in general use, by the standard authors and orators who use our vernacular tongue. Exclusive of the large numbers of proper names which are appended, this Diction- ary includes four especial improvements and when their essential value to the student is considered, the sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our lan- guage instantly will be perceived. The primitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and where there are any de- rivatives from it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is append- ed, thus furnishing a complete classification of all the connected analogous words of the same species. With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English word, is conjoined a rich illustration for the linguist. The derivation of all the prim- itive words is distinctly given, and the phrases of the languages whence they are de- duced, whether composite or simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both ancient and modern, by a reference to any word, can ascertain the source whence it has been adopted into our own form of speech. This is a great acquisition to the person who is anxious to use words in their utmost clearness of meaning. To these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Roots of English Words, which is of peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, fur- nish the linguist with a wide-spread field of research, equally amusing and instruct- ive. There is also added an Accented List, to the number of fifteen thousand, of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. With such novel attractions, and with such decisive merits, the recommendations which are prefixed to the work by Professors Frost, Henry. Parks, and Reed, Messrs. Baker and Greene, principals of the two chief grammar schools at Boston, and by Dr. Reese, Superintendent of Common Schools for the city and county of New York, are justly due to the labors of the author. They fully corroborate the opinion expressed by several other competent authorities, that " Reid's English Dictionary is peculiarly adapted for the use of schools and families, and is far superior to any other existing ftunilar compilation." TEXT BOOK FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS. Appleton Sf Co. have recently published the third edition GENERAL HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION IN EUROPE, From the Fall of the Roman Empire to the French Revolution. BY M. GUIZOT, Late Professor of History, now Prime Minister of France. With occasional Notes by C. S. HENRY, D.D., Professor of Philosophy and History in the University of the City of New-York. One volume 12mo. Price $1 00. " We hail with pleasure the republication of this able work. It is terse and full, and adverts to the most interesting topic in the social relations of mankind, the progressive improvement of the European nations frinn the overthrow of the Roman Empire by the Goths, and Huns, rind Vandals, in the Fifth Century. " The work of M. Guizot comprehends a Course of Lectures which he delivered, and which contain the spirit of Modern History, all condensed into a focus, to illuminate one ni.-st impressive feature in the annals of ihe world. A concise view of the chief themes will accurately unfold the importance of this volume. A The introductory lecture is devoted to a discussion of the general subject in its prin- ciples ; which is followed by the application of them to the condition of European society. " M. Guizot next proceeds to develop the deranged state of the kingdoms of Europe, after the subversion of the Roman power, and the subdivision of the ancient empire into d'.stiiirt sovereignties ; which is followed by a survey of the feudal system. The various > and civil revolutions of the people with the crusades, the conflicts between the nicrarHncal supremacy, and the monarchical and arlstocratical authorities also, are de- veloped with the fluctuations of society, through .their combined tumultuous collisions; until the invention of printing, and the maritime discoveries of the fifteenth century, with the Reformat*, produced a convulsion, whose mighty workings still are exhibited, and the rich fruits*bf which constantly become more plentiful and fragrant. " The two lectures which close the series, are devoted to the English revolution of the seventeenth, and the French revolution of the eighteenth century. " There are two features in M. Guizot's lectures which are as attractive as they are novel. One is, the lofty moral and religious principles which he inculcates. We doubt that very few professors of history in our own country, in their prelections, among their students, within an American College, would have commingled such a continuous stream of the best ethics, with a subject avowedly secular, as M. Guizot has incorporated with his lectures addressed to the Parisian infidels. ' Another is, the predominant influence which he has attributed to Christianity, in effecting the progressive melioration of European society. " To the friends of religious freedom especially M. Guizot's Lectures on Civilization are a most acceptable present ; because they are not the result of a controvertist's en- deavours to sustain his own opinions in a polemical conflict with an adversary, but the deliberate judgment of an impartial observer, who has embodied his decisions m cideutally, while discussing another topic." JY*. Y. American. PREPARING- FOR PUBLICATION, COMPLETE HISTORY OF MODERN CIVILIZATION ; From the Fall of the Roman Empire until the Year 1789. With com. plete Chronological and Historical Tables. Translated from the French of M. GUJZOT. This volume is the second part of M. Guizot's " Course of Modern History," in thirty thi^e Lectures, and is an erudite and luminous development of the principal changes, even'-s, derangements, and organization of the modern European nations after the fall of the Roman Empire, until they assumed their present chief characteristics. It forma a complete filling up, in minute details, of the former work, and is precisely adapted to unfold the origin, attributes, and operations of the political systems connected with feu dahsui, and the subsequent revolutions r the kingdoms of Europe. D. Appleton fy Co. have just published LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY. BY THOMAS ARNOLD, D.D., Author of " History of Rome." etc., etc. With an Introduction and Notes by HENRY REED, Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania. One handsome volume 12mo. This volume contains the first Lectures which were delivered by Dr. Arnold after his appointment as Regius Professor of History in the university of Oxford. The series of Lectures must be considered merely as introductory to the expanded views and re- searches which the author would have developed had h s life buen prolonged. In the primary lecture which was delivered when he entered upon his official duty, the lecturer presented his definition of history with a summary of the duties appertaining to the pro- fessor of it. Appropriate, dignified and perspicuous, it exhibits both originality and power in a high degree, commingled with felicitous illustrations of the characteristics, effects, and value of historical literature. Four lectures follow on the study of history, rich in the prominent topics of inquiry concerning national prosperity among which, with masterly eloquence and delineations he adverts to the political economy, the re- ligious controversies, the national wars, and the geographical relations of countries. The next three lectures contain a survey of European history, particularly examining the revolutions in ecclesiastical affairs, and the continuous struggles to cast off the despotic yoke, and to gain and establish religious and civil freedom. The eighth lecture displays the nature of that historical testimony which claims and merits credence. In this disquisition the author exhibits in his truth and forcefulness the law of evidence and the method of its application in investigating historical facts. The course of Lec- tures is an elegant memorial of the author whose unquenchable philanthropy and un- . tiring zeal in behalf of the best interests of mankind render his decease the subject of regret to the civilized world. WILL SHORTLY PUBLISH HISTORY OF THE ROMAN REPUBLIC. BY M . M I C H E L E T , Professor of History in the University of France, Author of " The jSistory of France," etc., etc. Translated by VICTOR G. BENNE, A.B One handsome 8vo volume *' M. Michelet- in his history of the Roman Republic, first introduces the reader to the Ancient Geography of Italy: then by giving an excellent picture of the present state of Rome and the surrounding country, full of grand ruins, he excites in the reader the desire to investigate the ancient history of this wonderful land. He next imparts the results of the latest investigations, entire, deeply studied and clearly arranged, and saves the uu- educated reader the trouble of investigating the sources, while he gives to the more edu- cated mind an impetus to study the literature from which he gives very accurate quo- tations in his notes. He describes the peculiarities and the life of the Roman people in a masterly manner, and he fascinates every reader, by the brilliant clearness and vivid freshness of his style, while he shows himself a good historian, by the justness *md impartiality with which he relates and philosophizes." The Westminster Review observes : " His ' Histoire Romaine' is not only the history of institutions and ideas, as in Niebuhr, but also by virtue of the vast interpretative faculty of imagination, places the men of Rome, with their creeds and aspirations, vividly before you." COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF HISTORY. D. APPLETON & co. HAVE JUST PUBLISHED, A MANUAL OP ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY. COMPRISING I. Ancient ?>fstor ; Containing the Political History, Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Na- tions of Antiquity, carefully revised from the ancient writers, and illustrated by the discoveries of Modern Scholars and Travellers. II. Containing the Rine and Progress of the Principal European Nations, their Political History, and the changes in their Social Condition, with a History, of the Colonies founded by Europeans. BY W. COOKE TAYLOR, 1,1,. D. Of Trinity College, Dublin. Revised, with an Additional Chapter on the United States, BY O. S. HENRY, D. D., Professor of History in the University of New-York One handsome volume 8vo. of upwards of 700 pages. $2 25 +** For the convenience of Students as a tezt book, the Ancient or Modern portions can b* had separately bound. The ANCIENT HISTORY division comprises Eighteen Chapters, which include the general out- lines of the History of Egypt the Ethiopians Babylonia and Assyria Western Asia Palestine the Empire of the Medes and Persians Phenician Colonies in Northern Africa Foundation and History of the Grecian States Greece the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire the States that arose from the Dismemberment of the Macedonian Empire Ancient Italy Sicily the Ro- man Republic Geographical and Political Condition of the Roman Empire History of the Ro- man Empire and India with an Appendix of important illustrative articles. This portion is one of the best Compends of Ancient History that ever yet has appeared. It contains a complete text for the collegiate lecturer ; and is an essential hand-book for the student rho is desirous to become acquainted with all that is memorable in general secular archaeology. The MODERN HISTORY portion is divided into Fourteen Chapters, on the following general subjects : Consequences of the Fall of the Western Empire Rise and Establishment of the Saracenic Power Restoration of the Western Empire Growth of the Papal Power Revival otf Literature Progress of Civilization and Invention Reformation, and Commencement of the States System in Europe Augustan Ages of England and France Mercantile and Colonial Sys- tem Age of Revolutions French Empire History of the Peace Colonization China the Jews with Chronological and Historical Tables and other Indexes. Dr. Henry has appended a new chapter on the History of the United States. This Manual of Modern History, by Mr. Taylor, is vhe most valuable and instructive work concerning the general subjects which it comprehends, that can be found in the waole department tf historical taerature. COMMON-SCHOOL LIBRARY. First Series, 25 volumes-*- Second, 25 volumes. D. APPLETON & CO. respectfully invite the attention of Superintendents and Teaclv ers of District Schools, to their valuable Series of Instructive and Moral Works for youth or the adult. The design has been to embrace in this collection only such Works as tnay be read by every member of a family, always inculcating a good moral, yet unsectarkm in character, aiming to give an interest and a taste for reading. RECOMMENDATION FROM I. 8. RANDALL, DEPUTY SUPERINTENDENT OF COMMON SCHOOLS FOR THE STATE OF NEW-rORK. u I have long been in the habit of recommending your first Series of the School Library to Trustees of School Districts wishing to purchase for their Library ; and I can cheerfully bear testimony to the value of the entire Series. Taken as a whole, the works are admira- bly adapted to the intellectual and moral wants of the rising generation ; and the neatness of their execution no less than the cheap rate at which you are enabled to afford them, render! their introduction into our School District Libraries in every respect desirable." FIRST SERIES. FIRST IMPRESSIONS ; or, Hints to those who would make Home happy. Bj Mrs. Ellis. THE DANGERS OF DINING OUT ; or, Hints to those who would make Home happy. To which is added the Confes- sions of a Maniac. By Mrs. Ellis. SOMERVILLE HALL ; or, Hints to those who would make Home happy. To- which is added the Rising Tide. By Mra Ellis. LITTLE COIN, MUCH CARE: or, How Poor People Live. By Mary Howitt. WORK AND WAGES ; or, How Poor Peo- )le Live. By Mary Howitt. E ON, HOPE EVER; or, the Boyhood of Felix Law. By Mary Howitt. STRIVE AND THRIVE, a tale. By Mary SOWING AND REAPING; or, What will Come of It ? By Mary Howitt. ALICE FRANKLIN, a sequel to Sowing and Reaping. By Mary Howitt. WHO SHALL BE GREATEST ? a tale. By Mary Howitt. WHICH IS THE WISER ? or, People Abroad. By Mary Howitt. TIRED OF HOUSEKEEPING. By S. T Arthur. THE LIFE AND ADVENTURES OF HENRY HUDSON. By the author of " Uncle Philip's Conversations." THE ADVENTURES OF HERNAN CORTES, the Conqueror of Mexico. By the same. THE LIFE OF CAPT. JOHN SMITH. By the same. THE D AWNINGS OF GENIUS ; or, Early Lives of Eminent Men. By Anne Pratt. THE MYTHOLOGY OF GREECE AND ITALY, adapted for children. By Tho- mas Keightly. THE POPLAR GROVE ; or, Little Harry and his Uncle Benjamin. By Mrs. Cop- EARLY FRIENDSHIPS. By Mrs. Copley. THE PEASANT AND THE PRINCE ; a tale illustrative of the French Revolu- tion. By Harriet Martineau. MASTERMAN READY ; or, the Wreck of the Pacific. Written for Young People. By Capt. Marryatt. Three volumes. THh LOOKING-GLASS FOR THE MIND ; or, Intellectual Mirror. An elegant collection of delightful stories and tales. Many plates. THE TWIN SISTERS, a tale. By Mrs. Sandharn. HOPE SECOND SERIES. THE LIFE OF OLIVER CROMWELL. By Robert Southey. LL. D. HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLU- TION, its Causes and Consequences. By F. Maclean Rowan. 2 vols. THE ADVENTURES OF DANfEL BOONE, the Kentucky Rifleman. By the author of " Uncle Philip's Conversa- YOUNG STUDENT; or, Ralph and Victor. By Madame Guizot. In 3 vols. One of the best moral and instructive works ever written. LOVE AND MONEY, an Every-Day Tale. By Mary Howftt. THE MINISTER'S FAMILY; or, Hints to make Home happy. By Mrs. Ellis. PHILIP RANDOLPH, a tale of Virginia. By Mary Gertrude. MY OWN STORY, the Autobiography of a Child. By Mary Howitt. THE TWO APPRENTICES; a Tale for Youth. By Mary Howitt. ** The volumes are furnished strongly bound in leather, at 30 cents each by the Series. WOMAN'S WORTH ; or, Hints to Raise the Female Character. A very valuable work, suitable for all classes. THE SETTLERS IN CANADA, written for Youth. By Capt. Marryatt. 2 vols. MY UNCLE, THE CLOCKMAKER, & tale. By Mary Howitt. THE GIRLS' MANUAL ; containing the Principles of Conduct. THE BOYS' MANUAL; containing the Principles of Conduct. THE FARMER'S DAUGHTER, a Picture of Humble Life. By Mrs. Cameron. THE YOUNG MAN FROM HOME, in a Series of Letters on Dangers and Duties. By J. A. James. FAMILIAR LETTERS ON CHEMISTRY, and its application to Physiology, Com- merce, and Agriculture. By Prof. Liebig THE GOLDMAKER'S VILLAGE ; an ex- cellent narrative. Translated from the German of H. Zchokke. A CATALOGUE OF BOOKS, IN VARIOUS DEPARTMENTS OF LITERATURE. PUBLISHED BY D. APPLETON b Co., NEW-YORK, AXD GEO. S. APPLETON, PHILADELPHIA. For sale by the several Booksellers throughout the United States. (Ulassifieb AGRICULTURE. Falkner on Manures. Smith's Productive Farming. Farmer's Treasure, by Falkner and Smith. ARTS, MAmJFACTURES, &c. Ewbank's Mechanics and Hydraulics. Hodge on the Steam-Engine. Lafever's Modern Architecture. *' Sta.ir-ca.se Construction. Ure's Dictionary of Arts, Manuf., and Minei. BIOG-RAPHY, Hamilton (Alex.), Life of. Philip's Life of Milne. CHEMISTRY. Freseniua's Chemical Analysis. Liebig's Chemical Letters. Parnell's Applied Chemistry. EDUCATION. Hazen's Symbolical Speller. Keightley's Mythology of Greece and Italy. Taylor's Home Education HISTORY. Frot's History of United States Navy. Army. Guizot's History of Civilization. L'Ardeche's History of Napoleon. Taylor's Natural History of Societj. JUVENILE. Boone. Daniel, Adventures of. Boy's Manual. Cameron '3 Farmer's Daughter. Child's Delight. Copley's Early Friendships Copley's Poplar Grove. Cortes, Adventures of. De Foe's Robinson Crusoe. Evans's Joan of Arc. " Evenings with the Chronicler!. Guizot's Young Student. Girl's Manual. Holyday Tales. Howitt's Love and Money. " Work and Wages. " Little Coin, much Care. " Which is the Wiser? " Who shall be Greatest " Hope on, Hope ever. " Strive and Thrive. *' Sowing and Reaping. " No Sense like Common Sense, " Alice Franklin. Jerram's Child's Story-Book. Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. Looking-Glass for the Mind. Lucy and Arthur. Log Cabin, or World hefore You. Martineau's Crofton Boys. " Peasant and Prince. Marryat's Masterman Ready. Old Oak Tree. Prize Story- Book. Pratt's Dawnings of Genius. Sandham's Twin Sisters. Smith, Capt.. Adventures o Sherwood's Duty is Safety. '* Jack the Sailor. " Think before you Act. Taylor's Young Islandeis. cry Little Tales. Youth's Book of Nature. MEDICAL. Chavasse's Advice to Mothers. Hall's Principles of Diagnosis. Smith on Nervous System. MISCELLANEOUS. Arthur's Tired of Housekeeping. Austin's German Writers. Carly e's Heroes, Hero Worship. Cotton's Exiles of Siberia. D'Israeli's Curiosities of Literature. Deleuze on Animal Magnetism. Ellis's Mothers oTEngland. *' Wives of England. " Daughters of England. " Women of England. " First Impressions. " Danger of Dining Out. Somerville Hall. Embury's Nature's Gems. Foster's Miscellanies. " Christian Morals. Goldsmith's Vicar of Wakefield. " Essays. Johnson's Rasselas. Lover's Handy Andy. " .5. d. Treasure Trove. Maxwell's Hector O'Halloran. More's Domestic Tales. Rural Talcs. Pure Gold. Sinclair's Scotland and Scotch. Shetland and Shetlanders. St. Pierre's Paul and Virginia. Taylor's Physical Theory of Another Life. Useful Letter-Writer. Woman's Worth. POETRY. Burns's Poetical Works. Cowper's " Gems from American Poets. Hemans's Poetical Works. " Songs of the Affections. Lewis's Records of the Heart. Milton's Poetical Works. " Paradise Lost. " " Regained Moore's Lallah Rookh. Pollok's Course of Time. Scott's Poetical Works. " Lady of the Lake. " Marmion. " La/ of the Last Minstrel. Southey's Poetical Works. Thomson's Seasons. Token of Affection, by various writer! " Friendship. Token of Love. " the Heart. " Remembrance. Young's Night Thoughts. RELIGIOUS. A Kempis's Imitation of Christ. Anthon's Catechism on Homilies. Beaven's Help to Catechising. Bible Expositor. Book of Common Prayer. Burnet's Hist, of Reformation. " Exposition of XXXIX. Artic.es. Bradley's Practical Sermons. " Sermons at Clapham and Glasbury. Churton's Early English Church. Christmas Bells. Cruden's Concordance, N. T. Clarke's Scripture Promises. Evans's Rectory of Valehead Faberon Election. Gresley on Preaching. " English Churchman. Hare's Sermons. Hooker's Works. James's True Christian. " Widow Directed. " Young Man from Home. Christian Professor. " Anxious Inquirer after Salvation. " Happiness, its Nature and Sourcen- Kip's Double Witness. Kingsley's Sacred Choir. Lyra Apostolica. Magee on Atonement. Manning on Unity of the Church. Marshall's Notes on Episcopacy. More's Private Devotion. " Practical Piety. Maurice's Kingdom of Christ. Newman's Parochial Seimons. " Sermons on Subjects of the D*y. Ogilby on Lay-Baptism, " Lectures on the Church. Palmer on the Church. Paget's Tales of the Village. Pearson on the Creed. Philip's Devotional Guides. " The Hannahs. " The Marys. " The Marthas. " Th Lydias. " Love of the Spirit. Sherlock's Practical Christian. Smith on Scripture and Geology. Spencer's Christian Instructed. Spincke's Manual of Devotion. Sprague's Lectures to Young People " True and False Religion. Button's Learn to Live. " Learn to Die. " On Sacrament. Stuart's Letters to Godchild Taylor on Episcopacy. "" Golden Grove. " Spiritual Christianity Wayland's Human Responsibility Wilson's Sacra Privata. Wilberforce's Communicant's Manual. VOYAGES AND TRAVELS. Cooley's American in Egypt. Olmsted's Whaling Voyage. Silliman's Ameiican Scenery Southgate's Turkey and Persia. Applet on' s Catalogue of Valuable Publications. A KEMPIS. OF THE IMITATION OF CHRIST: Four books by Thomas a Kempis. One elegant volume, 16mo. 1 00. "The author of this invaluable work was born about the year 1380, ami luis always bean honoured by the Church for his eminent sanctity. Of the many pious works composed by him, his ' Imitation of Christ' (being collection?: of hi* devotional thoughts and meditations on impor- tant practical subjects, together with a separate treatise on the Holy Communion) is the most celebrated, and has ever been admired and valued by devout Christians of eveiy name. It li;n passed through numerous editions and translations, the first of which into English is said to have been made by the illustrious Lady Margaret, mother of King Henry VII. .Messrs. Appluton's rery beautiful edition is a reprint from the hist English, the translation of which was chiefly copied from one printed at London in 1677. It deserves to be a companion of the good Bishop Wilson's Sacra Privata. Banner of the Crons. AMERICAN POETS, GEMS FROM AMERICAN POETS. One volume, 32mo., frontispiece, gilt leaves, 37 1-2 cents. Forming one of the series of " Miniature Classical Library." Contains selections from nearly one hundred writers, among which are Bryant, Halleck, Longfellow, Percival, Whittier, Sprague, Brainerd, Dana, Willis, Pinkney, Allston, Hillhouse, Mrs. Sigourney, L. M. David- son, Lucy Hooper, Mrs. Embury, Mrs. Hale, etc. etc ANTHON, CATECHISMS ON THE HOMILIES OF THE CHURCH, 18mo. paper cover, 6 1-4 cents, $4 per hundred. I. Of the Misery of Mankind. II. Of the Nativity of Christ. CONTENTS. III. Of the Passion of Christ. IV. Of 'the Resurrection of Christ. By HENRY ANTHON, D. D., Rector of St. Mark's Church, New York. This little volume forms No. 2, of a series of " Tracts on Christian Doctrine and Practice," now in course of publication under the supervision of Rev. Dr. Anthon. AUSTIN FRAGMENTS FROM GERMAN PROSE WRITERS. Translated by Sarah Austin, with Biographical Sketches of the Authow. One handsomely printed volume, 12mo. $1 25. ARTHUR. TIRED OF HOUSE-KEEPING By T. S. Arthur, author of "Insubordination," etc. etc. One volume, 18mo, frontispiece, 37 1-2 cents. Forming one of the series of " Tales for the People and their Children." CONTENTS. I. Going to House-keeping. II. First Experiments. III, Morning Calls. IV. First Demonstrations. V. Trouble with Servants. VI. A New One. VII. More Trouble. VIII. A True Friend. IX. Another Powerful Demonstration. X. Breaking up. XI. Experiments in Boarding and Taking Boarder. XII. More Sacrifices. XIII. Extracting Good from Evil. XIV. Failure of the First Experiments. XV. The New Boarding- house. XVI. Trouble in Earnest. XVII. Sickness. XVIII. Another Change. XIX. Conclusion. BEAVEN. A HELP TO CATECHISING. For the use of Clergymen, Schools, and Private Families. By James Bea ven, D. D., Professor of Theology at King's College, Ton nto. Revised and adapted to the use of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States. By Henry Anthon, D. D., Rector of St. Mark's Church, N. Y. 18mo., paper cover, 6 1-4 cents, $4 per hundred. Forming No. I of a series of" Tracts on Christian Doctrine and Practice," now in courie of publication under the superintendence of Rev. Dr. Anthon. Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. BIBLE EXPOSITOR. Confirmation of the Truth of the Holy Scriptures, from the Observations ol recent Travellers, illustrating the Manners, Customs, and Places referred to in the Bible. Published under the direction of the Society for the Promo tion of Christian Knowledge, London. Illustrated with 90 cuts. On* volume, 12ino., 75 cents. EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. * The Holy Scriptures contain many passages full of importance and beauty, but not generally understood, because they contain allusions to manners find customs, familiar indeed to those to whoi* they were originally addressed, but imperfectly known to us. In order to obviate this difficulty this volume is now presented to the public, consisting of extracts from the narratives of trave. lers who have recorded the customs of the oriental nations, from whom we learn that some usages were retained among them to this day, such as existed at the times when the Scriptures were written, and that their manners are in many instances little changed since the patriarchal times. The compiler of this volume trusts that it may be the means, under God's providence, of leading unlearned readers to a more general acquaintance with Eastern customs, and assist them to a clearer perception of tlie .propriety and beauty of the illustrations so often drawn from them iu the Bible." BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER; And Administration of the Sacraments and other Rites and Ceremonies ol the Church, according to the use of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States of America, together with the Psalter or Psalms of David. Illustrated with six steel engravings, rubricated, 18mo. size, in various bindings. Morocco, extra gilt leaves, $2 25. With clasp, do., $3 09. Imitation of Morocco, gilt leaves, $1 50. Plain do., $1 00. Without rubrics, in Morocco, extra, $2 00. Imitation do., $1 25. Sheep, plain, 37 1-2 cents. It may also be had in rich silk velvet binding, mounted with gold, gilt bonders, clasp, &c., price .$8 00. A very superior edition, printed in large type, from the new authorized edition, is nearly ready. It will be embellished with choice steel engravings from designs by Overbeck. BOONE. ADVENTURES OF DANIEL BOONE, The Kentucky Rifleman. By the author of " Uncle Philip's Conversations." One volume, 18mo. 37 1-2 cents. Forming one of the series of "A Library for my Young Countrymen." " It is an excellent narrative, written in a plain, familiar style, and sets forth the character and wild adventures of the hero of the Kentucky wilderness in a very attractive light. The boys will all be in an agony to read it." Com. Jldn. BOYS' MANUAL. Comprising a Summary View of the Studies, Accomplishments, and Princi- ples of Conduct, best suited for promoting Respectability and Success in Life. 1 vol. 18mo. 50 cents. BRADLEY. FAMILY AND PARISH SERMONS. Preached at Clapham and Glasbury. By the Rev. Charles Bradley. From the seventh London edition, two volumes in one, 8vo. $1 25. PRACTICAL SERMONS For every Sunday throughout the vear and principal holydays. Two volumes of English edition in one 8vo $1 50. J)^r The above two volumes may be bound together in one. Price $2 50. The Sermons of this Divine are much admired for their plain, yet chaste and elegant style; they will be found admirably adapted for family reading arid preaching, where no pastor is located. Recommendations might be given, if space would admit, from several of our Bishops and Clergy also from Ministers of various denominations. The following are a few of the English and American critical opinions of their merit: " Bradley's ityle is sententious, pithy, and colloquial. He is simple without being quaint, and he almost holds conversation with his hearers, without descending from the dignity of the tacred chair." Eclectic Re.vicic. " We earnestly desire that every pulpit may ever be the vehicle of discourses as judicious and practical, as scriptural and devout, as these.' 1 Christian Observer. " The style is so simple that the most unlearned can understand them ; the matter so instruc- tive that the best informed can learn something; the spirit so fervent that the most engaged Christian can be animated and wanned by tbyir perusal." Christian Witness, Applctons Catalogue of Valuable Publications BURNET. THE HISTORY CF THE REFORMATION Of the Church of England, by Gilbert Burnet, I). 1)., late Lord Bishop of Salisbury with the Collection of Records and a copious Index, revise* and corrected, with additional Notes and a Preface, by tiie Rev. E Nares, I). D., late Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford Illustrated with a Frontispiece and twenty-three engraved Portraits, form ing four elegant 8vo. volumes. $8 00. A cheap edition is printed, containing the History in three vols. without the Records which form the fourth vol. of the above. Price, in boards, $2 50. To the student either of civil or religious history, no epoch can he of more importance than thnt of the Reformation in Engl md. The History of Bishop Burnet is one of the most celebrated and hv far the most frequently quoted of ;tny that has been written of this great event. Upon the original publication of the first volume, it was received in Great Britain with the loudest and most extravagant encomiums. The author received the thanks of both Houses of Parliament, and was requested by thorn to continue tho work. In continuing it, he had the assistance of the most learned find eminent divines of his time; and he confesses his indebtedness for important aid to Lloyd, Tillotson, and Stillingtieet, three of the greatest of England's Bishops. The present edition of this groat work lias been edited with laborious care by Dr. Nares, who professes to have corrected important errors into which the author fell, and to have made such improvements in the order of the work as will render it far more useful to the reader or historical student. Preliminary explanations, full and sufficient to the clear understanding of the author, are given, and marginal references are made throughout the book, so as greatly to facilitate and lender accurate its consultation. It will of course iind a place in every theologian's libraiy and will, by no means, we trust, be confined to that comparatively limited sphere JV*. Y. Tribune. BURNET. AN EXPOSITION OF THE XXXIX ARTICLES Of the Church of England. By Gilbert Burnet, D. D., late Bishop of Salisbury. With an Appendix, containing the Augsburg Confession, Creed of Pope Pius IV., &c. Revised and corrected, witli copious Notes and Additional References, by the Rev. James R. Page, A. M. One handsome 8vo. vol- ume. $2 00. The editor has given to our clergy and our students in theology an edition of this work, which must necessarily supersede every other, and we feel he deserves well at the hands of the Church, which he has so materially served. Churck of England Quarterly Review. BURNS. THE COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS Of Robert Burns, with Explanatory and Glossarial Notes, and a Life of the Author, by James Currie, M. D., illustrated with six steel engravings, one volume, 16mo. $1 25. Forming one of the series of " Cabinet Edition of Standard British Poets." This is the most complete American edition of Burns. It contains the whole of the poetry com- prised in the edition lately edited by Cunningham, as well as some additional pieces ; and sach notes have been added as are calculated to illustrate the manners and customs of Scotland, so ag to render the whole more intelligible to the English reader. He owes nothing to the poetry of oilier lands he is the offspring of tho soil : he is as natural to Scotland as the heath is to her hills his variety is equal to his originality; his humour, his gayety, his tenderness and his pathos, come all in a breath; they come freely, for they come of their own accord ; the contrast is never offensive ; the comic slides easily into tho serious, the serious into the tender, and the tender into the pathetic. Allan Cunniii The Messrs. Appleton &. Co., of New York, have just published a beautiful edition of " The Life and Adventures of Robinson Crusoe." Not the miserable abridgment generally circulated, but De Foe's genuine work, Robinson Crusoe in full and at length, a story which never palls upon the reader, and never can lose its popularity while the English language endures. Pentisylvan'um. D'ISRAELI. CURIOSITIES OF LITERATURE, And the Literary Character illustrated, by I. D'Israeli, Esq., D. C. L., F. S. A. First and Second Series. The Literary Character, illustrated by the Histo- ry of Men of Genius, drawn from their own feelings and confessions, by I. D'Israeli, Esq. Curiosities of American Literature, compiled, edited, and arranged by Rev. Rufus W. Griswold. The three works in one volume, large 8vo. Price $3 50. This is the double title of a large and beautifully printed octavo volume, which has just made its appearance in the World of Letters. With the first part every body is already familiar. The deep research, the evident enthusiasm in his subject, and the light and pungent humor displayed by D'Israeli in it, are the delight of all classes of readers, and mil undoubtedly send him down a cheerful journey to posterity, if only on account of the pleasant company in which he has managed p agreeably to introduce himself. The other portion of this work that relating to the Curiosi- ties of American Literature is entirely new to the public; yet we shall be disappointed if it i> not directly as popular as the other. Mr. Griswold has performed his task in a manner highly creditable to his tasto, while displaying most favorably his industry, tact, and perseverance. Nt* York Tribune. DE LEUZE. PRACTICAL INSTRUCTION IN ANIMAL Magnetism, by J. P. F. De Leuze, translated by Thomas C. Hartshorn. Re- vised edition, with an Appendix of Notes by the Translator, and Letters from ,minent Physicians and others, descriptive of cases in the U. States. One volume, 12mo. $1 00. The translator of this work has certainly presented the piofession with an uncommonly weV digested treatise, enhanced in value by his own notes and the corroborative testimony of eminent Dtofiicians. Boston Med $' Surg. Journal. Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. ELLIS.-THE DAUGHTERS OF ENGLAND; Their position in Society, Character, and Responsibilities. By Mrs. Ellis. In one handsome volume, 12rno., cloth gilt. 50 cents. ELLIS. THE WOMEN OF ENGLAND; Their Social Duties and Domestic Habits. By Mrs. Ellis. One handsome volume, 12mo., cloth gilt. 50 cents. ELLIS. THE WIVES OF ENGLAND ; Their Relative Duties, Domestic Influences, and Social Obligations. By Mr. Ellis. One handsome volume, 12mo., cloth gilt. 50 cents. ELLIS. THE MOTHERS OF ENGLAND; Their Influence and Responsibility. By Mrs. Ellis. One handsome volume, l^mo., cloth gilt. 50 cents. Tliis is an appropriate ami very valuable conclusion to the series of works on the subject oJ female duties, by which Mrs. Ellis has pleased, and we doubt not profited, thousands of readers. Her counsels demand attention^ not only by their practical, sagacious usefulness, but also by the neek anil modest spirit in which they are communicated. Watchman. ELLIS. THE MINISTER'S FAMILY; Or Hints to those who would make Home happy. By Mrs. Ellis. One vol- ume, 18mo. 37 1-2 cents. ELLIS.-FIRST IMPRESSIONS; Or Hints to those who would make Home happy. By M/s. Ellis. One vol nine, ]8mo. 37 1-2 cents. ELLIS.-DANGERS OF DINING OUT; Or Hints to those who would make Home happy. By Mrs. Ellis. One vol ume, 18rno. 37 1-2 cents. ELLIS. SOMERVILLE HALL; Or Hints to those who would make Home happy. By Mrs. Ellis. One vol- ume, ISrno. 37 1-2 cents. The above four volumes form a portion of series of" Tales for the People and their Children." u To wish prosperity to such books as these, is to desire the moral and physical welfare of the human species." Belli Chronicle. EVANS.- EVENINGS WITH THE CHRONICLERS; Or Uncle Rupert's Tales of Chivalry. By R. M. Evans. With seventeen illustrations. One volume, 16mo., elegantly bound, 75 cents. This would have been a volume after our own hearts, while we were younger, and it is carcely less so now mhen we are somewhat older. It discourses of those things which '.harmed nil of us in early youth the daring deeds of the Knights and Squires of feudal warfare the true version of the "Chevy Chase," the exploits of the stout and stalwart Warriors of England, Scotland, and Germany. In a word, it is an attractive book, and rendered more so to young read- ers by a series of wood engravings, beautifully executed. Courier fy Enquirer. EVANS THE HISTORY OF JOAN OF ARC. By R. M. Evans, author of " Evenings with the Chroniclers," with twenty- four elegant illustrations. One volume, 16mo. Extra gilt. 75 cents. In the work before us, we have not only a most interesting biography of this female prodigy, including what she was and what she accomplished, but also a faithful account of the relations that exirted between England and France, and of the singular slate of things that marked the period when this wonderful personage appeared upon the st;ige. The lead ing incidents of hei 5ife are related with exquisite simplicity and touching pathos ; and you eannot repress your :id mi- ration for her heroic qualities, or scarcely repress your tears in view of her ignominious end. To the youthful reader we heartily recommend this volume. Albany Advertise* 8 Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. EVANS, THE RECTORY OF VALEHEAD ; Or, the 'Records of a Holy Home. By the Rev. R. W. Evans. From the twelfth English edition. One volume, 16mo. 75 cents. Universally and cordially do we recommend this delightful volume We believe no person coaKl read this work, and not be the better for its pious and touching lessons. It is a page taken j-orn the book of life, and eloquent with all the instruction of an excellent pattern ; it is a com- mentary on the affectionate warning, "Remember thy Creator in the days of thy youth." We have not for some time seen a work we could so deservedly praise, or so conscientiously recom- c*.,,J Literary Gazette. EMBURY. NATURE'S GEMS; OR, AMERICAN FLOWERS In their Native Haunts. By Emma C. Embury. With twenty plates of Plants rarefully colored after Nature, and landscape views of their localities, from drawing.=Mtaken on the spot, by E. W. Whiteiield. One imperial oc- tavo vul'ime, printed on the finest paper, and elegantly bound. This beautiful work will undoubtedly form a "Gift-Book" for^jLseasons of the year. It is illustrated with twenty colored engravings of indigenous flowers,^^en from drawings made on the spot where they were found ; while each flower is accompanied by a view of some striking f'Mture of American scenery. The literary plan of the book differs entirely from that of any other work on a simil tr subject which has yet appeared. Each plate has its botanical and local de- scription, f hough the chief part of the volume is composed of original tales and poetry, illustrative of the sent i men's of the flowers, or associated with the landscape. No pains or expense has been spared in the inichanical execution of tiio volume, and the fact that it is purely American both in its graphic and literary departments, should recommend it to general notice. EWBANK. HYDRAULICS AND MECHANICS. A Descriptive and Historical Account of Hydraulic and other Machines for raising \Vater, including the Steam and Fire Engines, ancient and modern ; with Observations on various subjects connected with the Mechanic Arts ; including the Progressive Development of the Steam Engine. In five hooks. Illustrated by nearly three hundred Engravings. By Thomas Ewbank. One handsome volume of six hundred pages. $3 50. This is a highly valuable production, replete with novelty and interest, and adapted to gratify equally the historian, the philosopher, and the mechanician, being the result of a protracted and extensive research among the arcana of historical and scientific literature. Nat. Intelligencer. FABER. THE PRIMITIVE DOCTRINE OF ELECTION; Or, an Historical Inquiry into the Ideality and Causation of Scriptural Elec- tion, as received and maintained in the primitive Church of Christ. By (ieorge Stanley Faber, B. D., author of "Difficulties of Romanism,' "Difficulties of Infidelity," &c. Complete in one volume, octavo. $1 75. Mr. Faber verifies his opinion by demonstration. We cannot pay a higher respect to his work than by recommending it to all. Church, of England Quarterly Review. FALKNER. THE FARMER'S MANUAL, A Practical Treatise on the Nature and Value of Manures, founded from Experiments on various Crops, with a brief Account of the most Recent Discoveries in Agricultural Chemistry. By F. Falkner and the Author of " British Husbandry." 12mo., paper cover 31 cents, cloth 50 cents. It is the object of the present treatise to explain the nature and constitution of manures gene- rally to point out the moans of augmenting the quantity and preserving the fertilizing power of fari. yard manure, the various sources of mineral and other artificial manures, and the cause of tbixi frequent fuiluics. Aatlior^s Preface. FARMER'S TREASURE, THE ; Containing " Falkner's Farmer's Manual," and " Smith's Productive Farm- ing," bound together. 12mo., 75 cents. FOSTER ESSAYS ON CHRISTIAN MORALS, Experimental and Practical. Originally delivered as Lectures at Broadmead Chapel, Bristol. By John Foster, author of " Essays on Decision of Char- acter, etc. One volume, 18mo., 50 cents. This volume contains twenty-six Essays, some of which are of the highest order of sublimity . 9 Applcton's Catalogue of Valuable. Publications. FOSTER. B1OG-, LIT., AND PHIL. ESSAYS, Contributed to the Eclectic Review, by John Foster, author of" Essays on De- cision of Human Character," etc. One volume, 12mo., $1 25. These contributions well deserve to class with those of Macauley, Jeffrey, and Sidney Smith, in the Edinburgh Review. They contain the productions of a more original and profound" thinker than either, whose master-mind has exerted a stronger influence upon his readers, and lias left a deeper impression upon our literature ; and whose peculiar merit it was to present the doctrines and moralities of the Christian faith, under a form and aspect which redeemed the familiar from triteness, and threw a charm and freshness about the severest truths. London Patriot. FROST. THE BOOK OF THE NAVY: Comprising a General History of the American Marine, and particular account* of all the most celebrated Nava. Battles, from the Declaration of Independ ence to the present time, compiled from the best authorities. By John Frost, LL. D. With an Appendix, containing Naval Songs, Anecdotes, &c. Embellished vvith numerous original Engravings, and Portraits oi distinguished Nava^poinrnanders. One volume, 12mo., $1 00. This is the only popular and yet authentic single view which we have of the naval exploits of our country, arranged with good t.iste and set forth in good language U. S. Gazette. This volume is dedicated to the Secretary of the Navy, and is altoge'her a very faithful and attractive historical record. It deserves, and will doubtless have, a very extended circulation JV*a Intelligencer. FROST. THE BOOK OF THE ARMY: Comprising a General Military History of the United States, from the period of the Revolution to the present time, with particular accounts of all the most celebrated Battles, compiled from the best authorities. By John Frost, LL. D. Illustrated with numerous Engravings, and portraits ot distinguished Commanders. One volume, 12mo., $1 25. This work gives a complete history of military operations, and their causes and effects, from the opening of the Revolution to the close of the last war, with graphic descriptions of the cele- brated battles and characters of the leading generals. It is illustrated with numerous portraits on steel and views of battles, from original drawings by Darley and others. The importance of pop- ular works of the class to which this and the " Book of the Navy " belong, must be obvious to all who recognize the value of national recollections in preserving a true national spirit. FRESENIUS. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS. Elementary Instruction in Chemical Analysis. By Dr. C. Rhemigius Frese- nius. With a Preface by Prof. Liebig. Edited by I. Lloyd Bullock. One neat volume, 12mo. Paper, 75 cents ; cloth, $1 00. This Introduction to Practical Chemistry is admitted to be the most valuable Elementary In- structor in Chemical Analysis fo scientific operatives, and for pharmaceutical chemists, which has ever been presented to the public. GUIZOT.-THE YOUNG STUDENT; Or, Ralph and Victor. By Madame Guizot. From the French, by Samuel Jackson. One volume of 500 pages, with illustrations. Price 75 cents, or in three volumes, $1 12. This volume of biographical incidents is a striking picture of juvenile life To all that num- berless class of youth who arc passing through their literary education, whether in boarding- school? or academies, in the collegiate course, or the preparatory studies connected with them, we know nothing more ptecisely fitted to meliorate their character, and direct their course, subordi- nate to the higher authority of Christian ethics, than this excellent delineation of "The Young Student," by Madame Guizot. * * * The French Academy were correct in their judgment, when they pronounced Madame Guizot's Student the best book of the year. Courier $ Enquirer* GUIZOT. GENERAL HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION In Europe, from the fall of the Roman Empire to the French Revolution. Translated from the French of M. Guizot, Professor of History to la Facul- te des Lettres of Paris, and Minister of Public Instruction. Third Ameri- can edition, with Notes, by C. S. Henry, D. D. One handsome volume, 12-no., $1 00. Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. GRISWOLD. CURIOSITIES OF AMER. LITERATURE: Compiled, edited, and arranged by Rev. Rufus W. Griswold. See D'Israeli GIRL'S MANUAL: Comprising a summary View of Female Studies, Accomplishments, and Prin ciples of Conduct. Frontispiece. One volume, 18mo., 50 cents. GOLDSMITH.-PICTORIAL VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. The Vicar of Wakefield. By Oliver Goldsmith. Illustrated with upwards of 100 engravings on wood, making a beautiful volume, octavo, of 300 pages. $1 25. The same, miniature size, 37 1-2 cents. We love to turn back over these rich old classics of our own language, and re-juvenate our- selves by the never-f.iiling associations which a re-perusal always calls up. Let any one who hag not read this immortal tale for fifteen or twenty years, try the experiment, and we will warrant that he rises up from the task the pleasure, we should have said a happier and a better man. In the good old Vicar of Wakefield, nil is pure gold, without dross or alloy of any kind. This much we have said to our last generation readers. This edition of the work, however, we take it, was got up for the benefit of the rising generation, any Mary Ilowitt. LSiuo., two Plates, 38 cents. HOPE ON, HOPE EVER; Or, The Boyhood of FYlix Law a Tale. By Mary Howitt. 18mo., two Plates, ClOth gilt, 3d cents. NO SENSE LIKE COMMON SENSE; A Tale. By Mary Ilowitt. 18mo., two Plates, cloth gilt, 38 cents. *** The above ten volumes form a portion of the series published under the general title of ' Tales for the People and their Children." Of late years many writers have exerted their talent* in juvenile literature, with great success. >iarti:ie:iu Ins nnde pol' '.c.il economy as familiar to boys as it formerly was to statesmen. Our own Mi.-s Sedgwick has produced some of the most beautiful mor.il stories, for the edification and delight of children, which have ever been written. The lion. Horace .Mann, in addresses to adults, h;is presented the claims of children for good education, with a power and eloquence of ttyl , :md ;in elevation of thought, which shows his heart is in his work. The stories of Mary liowitt Harriet Martin-jail, Mrs. Copley, and Mrs. Ellis, which form a part of" Tales for the Peo- ]>! : read with profit by parents for the good lessons they inculcate, and by all other read- ers for the literary excellence they display We wish they could be placed in the hands and engraven on the minds of all the you'n in the country. They manifest a nice and accurate observation of human nature, and especially the na- tu e of children, a fine sympathy with every thing good and pure, and a capability of infusing it in the minds of others great beauty and simplicity of style, and a keen eye to practical life, with all its fiults. united with a deep love for ideal excellence. Messrs Appleton & Co deserve th? highest praise for the excellent manner in which they h:;v --{jot up" their juvenile library, and we sincerely hope that its success will be so great as to induce them to make continual contributions to its treasures. The collection is one which should be owned by every parent who wishes that the moral and intellectual improvement of his children should keep pace with their growth in years, and tho development of their physical powers. American Traveller JERRAM.-THE CHILD'S OWN STORY-BOOK; Or, Tales and Dialogues for the Nursery. By Mrs. Jerram (late Jane Eliza- beth Holmes). Illustrated with numerous Engravings. 50 cents. There are seventy stories in this volume They are admirably adapted for the countless youth for whose edification they are narrated Boston Gazette. JOHNSON. THE HISTORY OF RASSELAS, Prince of Abyssinia a Tale. By Samuel Johnson, LL. D. 32mo., gik leaves, 33 cents. *** Forming one of the series of" Miniature Classical Library." Appletoti's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. JAMES. THE TRUE CHRISTIAN, Exemplified in a Series of Addresses, by Rev. John Angell James. One vol 18mo, 38 cents. These addresses are amongst the choicest effusions of the admirable author. Chr. Intell. - THE ANXIOUS INQUIRER A.fter Salvation Directed and Encouraged. By Rev. John Angell Jameg, One volume, 18rno., 38 cents. Up wards of fwnnty thousand copies of this excellent little volume have been sold, which fully attests the high estimation the work has attained with the religious community. - HAPPINESS, ITS NATURE AND SOURCES. By Rev. John Angell James. One volume, 32mo., 25 cents. This is written in the excellent author's best vein. A better book we have not in a long tim see n . Evangelist. THE CHRISTIAN PROFESSOR: Addressed in a Series of Counsels and Cautions to the Members of Christian Churches. By Rev. John Angell James. Second edition. One volume, 18rno., 63 cents. A most excellent work from the able and prolific pen of Mr. James. Chr. Intelligencer. THE YOUNG MAN FROM HOME. In a Series of Letters, especially directed for the Moral Advancement of Youth. By Rev. John Angell James. Fifth edition. One volume, 18mo., 38 cents. The work is a rich treasury of Christian counsel and instruction. Albany Advertiser - THE WIDOW DIRECTED To the Widow's God. By Rev. John Angell James. One volume, 18mo., 38 cents. The book is worthy to be read by others besides the class for which it is especially designed ; and we doubt not that it is destined to come as a friendly visitor to many a house of mourning, and as a healing balm to many a wounded heart. JV*. Y. Obaerccr KEIGHTLEY- THE MYTHOLOGY OF GREECE And Italy, designed for the use of Schools. By Thomas Keightley. Nume- rous wood-cut illustrations. One volume, 18mo., half bound, 44 cents. This is a neat little volume, and well adapted to the purpose for which it was prepared. It presents, in a very compendious and convenient form, every thing relating to the subject, of impor- tance to the young student. L. /. Star, KINGSLEY. THE SACRED CHOIR: A Collection of Church Music, consisting of Selections from the most distin- guished Authors, among whom are the names of Haydn, Mozart, Beetho- - i c- i> : ii__ i _ : . ~.c ~\/r :_i i._ A ._.! i i Mr. George Kingsley : Sir, Wo have examinedthe " Sacred Choir" enough to lead us to ap- preciate the work tis the best publication of Sacred Music extant. It is beautifully printed and tabstantially bound conferring credit on the publishers. We bespeak for the " Sacred Choir " an extensive circulation O. S. BOWDOIN, Sinceicly ycurs, E O. GOODWIN D. IN GRAHAM. K IP._ TH E DOUBLE WITNESS OF THE CHURCH, By Rev. Wm. Ingraham Kip, author of " Lenten Fast. 1 ' One volume, 12mo. Second edition. Boards 75 cents, cloth $1 00. This is a sound, clear, and able production a book much wanted for these times, and one that we feel persuaded will prove eminently useful. It is a happy delineation of that DOUBLE WITNESI which the Church bears against Romanism and ultra-Protestantism, and points out her middle path as the only one of truth and safety. Banner oftfie Cross. 14 ** Catalogue of Valuable Publications. LAFEVER. BEAUTIES OF MODERN ARCHITECTURE; Consisting of forty-eight Plates of Original Designs, with Plans, Elevations, and Sections, also a Dictionary of Technical Terms ; the whole forming a complete Manual for the Practical Builder. By Al. Lafever, Architect. One volume, large 8vo., half bound, $6 00. STAIR-CASE AND HAND-RAIL Construction. The Modern Practice of Stair-case and Hand-rail Construction, practically explained, in a Series of Designs. By M. Lafever, Architect With Plans and Elevations for Ornamental Villas. Fifteen Plates. One volume, large 6vo., $3 00. Mr. L:ifl-vfr's " Beauties of Architecture," and his "Practice of Stair-case and Hand-rail cou- truction," constitute two volumes rich in instruction in those departments of business. They tre a noc'-ssary acquisition not only to the operative workman, but to all landlords and proprietors of houses, who would rom'usm both the ornamental and usefu' in their family dwellings, and also understand the most economical and profitable modes by which their edifices can be erected and repaired. LEWIS. RECORDS OF THE HEART, By Sarah Anna Lewis. One volume, 12mo., $1 00. VvV h ivt- re-id some of the pieces with much pleasure. They indicate poetic genius of no or- dinary kiii'l, ;tnd are irn!>u :d with much feeling and pathos. We welcome the volume an a credit able accession to the poetic literature of the country. Boston Traveller. LIEBIG.-FAMILIAR LETTERS ON CHEMISTRY, And its relation to Commerce, Physiology, and Agriculture. By Justus Lie- big, M. D. Edited by John Gardner, M. D. One volume. 13 cents in paper, 25 cents bound. The Letters contained in this littles volume embrace some of the most important points of the Science of Chemistry, in their application to Natural Philosophy, Physiology, Agriculture, uud Commerce. LETTER-WRITER, The Useful Letter-Writer, comprising a succinct Treatise on the Epistolary Art, and Forms of Letters for all ordinary Occasions of Life. Compiled from the best authorities. Frontispiece. 32mo., gilt leaves, 38 cents. Forming one of the series of u Miniature Classical Library." LOOKING-GLASS FOR THE MIND; Or, Intellectual Mirror. Being an elegant Collection of the most delightful little Stories and interesting Tales ; chiefly translated from that much ad- mired work, L'ami des Enfans. Illustrated with numerous wood-cuts From the twentieth London edition. One volume, 18mo., 50 cents. Forming one of the series of" Tales for the People and their Children." LOG CABIN: Or, The World before You. By the author of "Three Experiments of Liv ing," " The Huguenots in France and America," etc. One volume, ISino., 50 cents. Every person who takes up this volume will read it with interest. It is truly what the writer intended it should be ** A Gnide to Usefulness and Happiness." LOVER. HANDY ANDY: A Tale of Irish Life, by Samuel Lover. Illustrated with twenty-three char- acteristic steel Engravings. One volume, 8vo., cloth $1 25, boards $1 00 Cheap edition, two Plates, paper, 50 cents. This boy Handy will be the death of us. What is the police force about to allow the uttering f a publication that has already brought us to the brink of apoplexy fifty times ? Sport. Review. L- S. D. TREASURE TROVE : A Tale, by Samuel Lover. One volume, 8vo., with two steel Engravings- Paper cover, 25 cents. This is a capital thing. The gay and the grave, the "lively and severe," are unived with a akilful hand, and there is a latent tone of sound morality running through "L. S. D." which wi)J give a lasting value to its pages. Commercial Advertiser. 15 Applcton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. LUCY AND ARTHUR; A Book for Children. Illustrated with numerous engravings, elegantly bour in cloth. 50 cents. Lucy airl Arthur is a charming story of the nurserk, prepared oy an experienced author. Se- cure it for the funnily. American Traveller. LYRA APOSTOLICA. From the Fifth English edition. One elegantly printed volume, 75 centi. In this elegant volume there are forty-five sections, and one hundred and seventy-nine IrtM poems, all short, and many of them sweet. New York American. MAGEE. ON ATONEMENT AND SACRIFICE: Discourses and Dissertations on the Scriptural Doctrines of Atonement- and Sacrifice, and on the Principal Arguments advanced, and the Mode of Reasoning employed, by the Opponents of those Doctrines, as held by the Established Church. By the late Most Rev. William M'Gee, D. D., Arch- bishop of Dublin. Two volumes, 8vo., $5 00 This is one of the ablest critical and polemical works of modern times. The profound biblical information on a variety of topics which the Archbishop brings forward, must endear his name to all lovors of Christianity. Orme. MANNING.-THE UNITY OF THE CHURCH, By the Rev. Henry Edward Manning, M. A., Archdeacon of Chichester. One volume, 16mo., $1 00. Part I. The History and Exposition of the Doctrine of Catholic Unity. Part II. The Moral Design of Catholic Unity. Part III. The Doctrine of Catholic Unity applied to the Actual Stata of Christendom. We commend it earnestly to the devout and serious perusal of all Churchmen, and particularly of all clergymen, as the ablest discussion we ever met with of a deeply and vitally important sub- ject. Churchman. MARRYAT.-MASTERMAN READY; Or, The Wreck of the Pacific. Written for Young Persons, by Capt. Marry- at. Complete in 3 vols., 18mo., with Frontispiece, cloth gilt, $1 25. Forming a portion of the series of "Tales for the People and their Children." We have never seen any thing from the same pen we like as well as this. It is the modem Crusoe, and is entitled to take rank with that charming romance. Commercial Advertiser. MARSHALL. NOTES ON THE EPISCOPAL POLITY Of the Holy Catholic Church, with some account of the Developments of Mo dern Religious Systems, by Thomas William Marshall, B. A., of the Dio cese of Salisbury. Edited by Jonathan M. Wainwright, D. D. With a new and complete Index of the Subjects and of the Texts of Scripture On volume, 12mo., $1 25. I. Introduction. II. Scripture Evidence. III. Evidence of Antiquity. IV. Admission o! Adversaries. V. Development of Modern Religious Systems. A more important work than this has not been issued for a long time. We earnestly recom mend it to the attention of every Churchman. Banner of the Cross. MARTINEAU. THE CROFTON BOYS; A Tale for Youth, by Harriet Marti neau. One volume, 18mo., Frontispiece Cloth gilt, 38 cents. Forming one of the seiies of "Tales for the People and their Children." It abounds in interest, and is told with the characteristic ability and spirit of the distinguished author. Eoawng Post. THE PEASANT AND THE PRINCE; A Tale of the French Revolution, by Harriet Martineau. One volume, 18mo. Frontispiece. Cloth gilt, 38 cents. Forming one of the series of" Tales for the People and their Children.' This is a most inviting little history of Louis the Sixteenth and his family. Here, in a atylm even more familiar than Scott's Talos of a Grandfather, we have a graphic epitome of many faeti connected with the days of the " Revolution." Courier $ Enquirer. Applctoti's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. MAURICE. THE KINGDOM OF CHRIST; Or, Hints respecting the Principles, Constitution, and Ordinances of the Cath- olic Church. By Rev. Frederick Denison Maurice, M. A. London. One volume, 8vo., 600 pages, $2 50. On the theory of the Church of Christ, all should consult the work of Mr. Maurice, the most philosophical writer of the day. Pruf. Garbctt's Bampton Lectures, 1842 MILTON. THE COMPLETE POETICAL WORKS Of John Milton, with Explanatory Notes and a Life of the Author, by the Rev. Henry Stebbing, A. M. Illustrated with six steel Engravings. One vol- ume, 16mo., $1 25. Forming one of the series of "Cabinet Edition of Standard Poets." %* Tho Latin and Italian Poems are included in this edition. Mr. Stebbing's Notes will be found very useful in Hur.idating the learned allusions with which the text abounds, and they are also valuable for the correct appreciation with which the writer di- rects attention to the beauties of the author. PARADISE LOST, By John Milton. With Notes, by Rev. II. Stebbing. One volume, 18mo., cloth 3tf cents, gilt leaves 50 cents. PARADISE REGAINED, By John Milton. With Not's, by Rev. II. Siebbing. One volume, 18mo., cloth '.-."> cents, ii'ilt l-a\r> 3 cents. MAXWELL. FORTUNES OF HECTOR O'HALLORAN And his man Mark Antony O'Toolr, by W . II. Maxwell. One volume, 8vo., two plates, paper, :">() cents, twenty-four plates, boards, $1 00, cloth, $1 25 It is one of the bust of all the Irish stories, full of s,>,rit, fun, drollery, and wit. Cour. 4* E-nq MOORE.-LALLAH ROOKH ; An Oriental Romance, bv Thomas Moore. One volume, 32mo., frontispiece, cloth gilt, 3d c- Forming a portion of the scries of ' Miniature Classical Library." This exquisite Poem has long been the admiration of readers . 1'r.il < lasses. MORE.-PRACTICAL PIETY, By Hannah More. One volume, 3mo., frontispierr, 3S cents. Tunning one of the series of-' Miniature Chusical Library." ' I'r :nMicr'l Piety " has always bee deemed the most attractive and eloquent of all Hannah M ore's PRIVATE DEVOTION: A Series of Prayers and Meditations, willi an Introductory Essay on Prayer, chietly from the writings of Hannah More. From the twenty-fifth London edition. One volume, 32mo., Frontispiece, cloth gilt, 31 cents. Forming one of the series of- Miniature ('I i.->ic il Library." Upwards of fifty thousand copies of this admirable manual have been sold in the U. States. DOMESTIC TALES And Allegories, illustrating Human Life. By Hannah More. One volume, o., 38 cents. CONTENTS. I. Shepherd of Salisbury Plain. II. Mr. Fantoin the Philosopher. TIL Two Shoemakers. IV Giles the Poacher. V. Servant turned Soldier, VI. General Jail Delivery. RURAL TALES, By Hannah More. One volume, 18mo., 38 cents. CONTENTS. I. Parley the Porter. II. All for the Best. III. Two Wealth" Farmers. IV Tom White. V. Pilgrims. VI. Valley of Teais. Forming a portion of the series of" Tales for the People and their Children " These two volumes comprise that portion of Hannah More's Repository Takt vlach ait adapted to general usefulness in this country. Catalogue of Valuable Publications. NAPOLEON.-PICTORIAL HISTORY Of Napoleon Bonaparte, translated from the French of M. Laurent de L'Ar- deche, with Five Hundred spirited Illustrations, after designs by Horace Vernet, and twenty Original Portraits engraved in the best style. Com- plete in two handsome volumes, 8vo., about 500 pages each, $3 50 ; cheap edition, paper cover, four parts, $2 00. The work is superior to the long, verhose productions of Scott and Bourienne not in style alone, but in truth being written to please neither Charles X. nor the English aristocracy, but for the cause of freedom. It has advantages over every other memoir extant. American Traveller. NEWMAN PAROCHIAL SERMONS, By John Henry Newman, B. D. Six volumes of the English edition in two volumes, 8vo., $5 00. --- SERMONS BEARING ON SUBJECTS Of the Day, by John Henry Newman, B. D. One volume, 12mo., $1 25. As a compendium of Christian duty, these Sermons will be read by people of all denomina- tions ; as models of style, they will be valued by writers in every department of 1. erature. United States Gazette. OGILBY. ON LAY-BAPTISM: An Outline of the Argument against the Validity of Lay-Baptism. By John D. Ogilby, D. D., Professor of Eccles. History. One vol., 12mo., 75 cents. From a cursory inspection of it, we take it to be a thorough, fearless, and able discussion of the subject which it proposes aiming less to excite inquiry, than to satisfy by learned an-l ingenious argument inquiries already excited. Churchman. -- CATHOLIC CHURCH IN ENGLAND And America. Three Lectures I. The Church in England and Apostolic and Catholic. II. The Causes of the English Reformation. HI Its Character and Results. By John D. Ogilby, D. D. One vol., 16mo., 75 cents. " I believe in one Catholic and Apostolic Church." JVtcenc Creed Prof. Ogilby has furnished the Church, in this little volume, with a most valuable aid. We Uiink it is designed to become a text-book on the subject of which it treats. True Catholic. OLD OAK TREE: Illustrated with numerous wood-cuts. One volume, 18mo., 38 cents. Tho precepts conveyed are altogether unexceptionable, and the volume is well calculated to prove attractive with children. Saturday Chronicle. OLMSTED.-INCIDENTS OF A WHALING VOYAGE: To which is added, Observations on the Scenery, Manners, and -Customs, and Missionary Stations of the Sandwich and Society Islands, accompanied by numerous Plates. By Francis Allyn Olmsted. One vol., 12mo., $1 50. The work embodies a mass of intelligence interesting to the ordinary reader as well as to tho philosophical inquirer. Courier 4" Enquirer PAGET.-TALES OF THE VILLAGE, By the Rev. Francis E. Paget, M. A. Three elegant volumes, 18mo., $1 7: The first series, or volume, presents a popular view of the contrast in opinions and modca of thought between Churchmen and Romanists ; the second sets forth Church principles, as opposed to what, in England, is termed Dissent; and the third places in contrast the chaiacter of the Churchman and the Infidel. At any time these volumes would be valuable, especially to the young. At present, when men's minds are much turned to such subjects, they cannot fail of being eagerly sought for. New-York American PALMER.-A TREATISE ON THE CHURCH Of Christ. Designed chiefly for the use of Students in Theology. By the Rev. William Palmer, M. A., of Worcester College, Oxford. Edited, with Notes, by the Right Rev. W. R. Whittingham, D. D., Bishop of the Prot. Epis. Church in the Diocese of Maryland. Two volumes, 8vo., $5 00. Ths chief design of this work is to supply some answer to the assertion so frequently made. that individuals are not bound to submit to any ecclesiastical authority whatever : or that, if they re, thy must, inconsistency, accept Romanism with all its claims and errors. Preface. 18 Appleton's Catalogue of Valuable Publications. PARNELL. APPLIED CHEMISTRY, In Manufactures, Arts, and Domestic Economy. Edited by E. A. Parnell. Illustrated with numerous wood Engravings, and specimens of Dyed and Printed Cottons. Paper cover 75 cents, cloth $1 00. The Editor's aim is to divest the work, as flir as practicable, of all technical terms, so as to adapt it to the requirements of the general render. The above forms the first division of the work. It is the author's intention to continue it from time to time, so us to form a complete Practical Encyclopaedia of Chemistry applied to the Arta. The subjects to immedi..tely follow will be, Manufacture of Glass, Indigo, Sulphuric Acid Zinc, Potaih. Coffee, Tea, Chocolate, &.C. PEARSON. AN EXPOSITION OF THE CREED, By John Pearson, D. D., late Bishop of Chester. With an Appendix, contain- ing the principal Greek and Latin Creeds. Revised and corrected by the Rev. W. S. Dobson, M. A., Peterhouse, Cambridge. One vol., Svo., $2 00. The fallowing mail be stated as the ad-untu^c.-; <>fthi.i fiit.ion over all others First Gre.it care has been taken to correct the numerous errors in the references to the texts 0f Scripture, which had crept in by reason of the repeated editions through which this admirable work has passed, and many references, us will be seen on tuining to the Index of Texts, havo oeen added. Secondly The Quotations in the Notes have beenulmosi universajjy identified and the refer- ence to them adjoined. Lastly The principal Symbola or Creeds, of which the particular Articles have been cited by the Author, have IXM-M annexed ; and wherevei the original writers have -jiven the Symbola in a scattered and disjointed manner, the detached parts have been brought into a successive and con- nected point of view. These have been added in Chronological order, in the form of an Appen- dix. Tr. YOUNG MAN'S CLOSET LIBRARY, By Robert Philip. With an Introductory Essay, by Rev. Albert Barnes. One volume, 12mo., $1 00. - LOVE OF THE SPIRIT, Traced in His Work : a Companion to the Experimental Guides. By Robert Philip. One volume, Idmo., 50 cents. - DEVOTIONAL AND EXPERIMENTAL Guides. By Robert Philip. With an Introductory Essay by Rev. Albert Barnes. Two volumes, 12mo., $1 75. Containing Guide to the Per- plexed, Guide to the Devotional, Guide to the Thoughtful, Guide to the Doubting, Guide to the Conscientious, Guide to Redemption. - LADY'S CLOSET LIBRARY: The Marys, i r Beauty of Female Holiness ; The Marthas, or Varieties of Fe- male Piety , The Lydias, or Development of Female Character. By Rob- ert Philip. Each volume, ISmo., 50 cents The MATERNAL scries of the above popular Library is now ready, entitled The Hannahs ; or, Maternal Influence of Sons. By Robert Philip. One volume, 18m^., 50 cents. The author of this excellent work is known to the public as one of the most prolific writer aivimri ! i;n:i:r I \\ number the rcpuMication in this country of Pulton's ' Meditations on the Lord- d, having since read the work, are prepared to recommend it warmly and without qualifica'...on to the perusal of our readers. Banner of the Cross. DISCE MORILEARN TO DIE: A Religious Discourse, moving every Christian man to enter into a Serious Remembrance of his End. By Christopher Sutton, D. D. One volume, Himo., jjfci DO. Of the thr<>" works of this excellent author lately reprinted, the " Disce Mori" is, in our judg- ment, decidedly the h.*st. \Vc do not believe that a single journal or clergyman in the Church will he found to s.iy a word in its disparagement. Churdnnan. DISCE VIVERELEARN TO LIVE: Wherein is shown that the Life of Christ is and ought to be an Express Pat- tern for Imitation unto the Life of a Christian. By Christopher Sutton, D. D. One volume, IGmo., $1 00. In the " Di-ce Viverc," the author moulded his materials, after the manner of a Kcmpis, into an " Imitatio I'hrnti ;" each chapter inculcating some duty, upon the pattern of Him who gave Himself to be the beginning and the end of all perfection. Editor's Preface. SWART. LETTERS TO MY GODCHILD, By the Rev. J. Swart, A. M., of the Diocese of Western New- York. One volume, o^mo., cloth, gilt leaves, 3S cents. The design of this little wr.r\. 1 by tin; author in the preface, is, the discharging of Sponsorial obh^utmti.-!. \\ \\ with interest and pleasure, and deem it well fitted to se- cure its end. Primitive Standard. SHERLOCK. THE PRACTICAL CHRISTIAN; Or, the Devout Penitent ; a Book of Devotion, containing the Whole Duty of a Christian in all Occasions and Necessities, fitted to the main use of a holy Life. By R. Sherlock, D D. With a Life of the Author, by the Right Rev. Bishop Wilson, Author of " Sacra Private," &c. One elegant vol- ume, IGmo., $1 00. Considered as a manual of private devotion, and a means of practical preparation for the Holy Communion of the Body and Blood of Christ, this book is among the best, if not the best, ever commended to the members of our Church. Churchman. SILLIMAN.-A GALLOP AMONG AMERICAN SCENERY; Or, Sketches of American Scenes and Military Adventure. By Augustus L. Silliman One volume, IGmo., 75 cents. 21 Applet on' s Catalogue of Valuable Publications. SHERWOOD. DUTY IS SAFETY; Or, Troublesome Tom, by Mrs. Sherwood. One volume, small 4to., illustra ted with wood cuts, cloth, 25 cents. THINK BEFORE YOU ACT, By Mrs. Sherwood. One volume, small 4to., wood cuts, cloth, 25 cents. - JACK THE SAILOR-BOY, Ujf Mrs. Sherwood. One volume, small 4to., wood cuts, cloth, 25 cents. Mrs. Sherwood's stories carry with them always such an excellent moral, that no child can read them without becoming better. Pliiladelphia Enquirer. SINCLAIR. SCOTLAND AND THE SCOTCH; Or, the Western Circuit. By Catharine Sinclair, author of Modern Accom plishments, Modern Society, &c. &c. One volume, 12mo., 75 cents. SHETLAND AND THE SHETLANDERS; Or, the Northern Circuit. By Catharine Sinclair, author of Scotland and the Scotch, Holiday House, ci M ions. Vil. Kcrlosiastical Associations. VIII. Official Respon sibility. IX. The Slavery Question. WILBERFOROE. MANUAL FOR COMMUNICANTS; Or, The Order for administering the Holy Communion ; conveniently arrang- ed with Meditations and Prayers from old English divines : being the Eu- charistica of Samuel Wilberforce, M. A., Archdeacon of Surrey, (adapted to the American service.) 38 cents, gilt leaves 50 cents. We most earnestly commend the work. Churchman. WILSON SACRA PRIVATA. The Private Meditations, Devotions, and Prayers of the Right Rev. T. Wil- son, D. D., Lord Bishop of Soder and Man". First complete edition. One volume, IGmo., elegantly ornamented, $1 00. The reprint is an honor to the American press. The work itself is, perhaps, on the whole, the best devotional treatise in the language, it has never before in this country been printed entire. Churchman. A neat miniature edition, abridged for popular use, is also published. Price 31 cents. WOMAN'S WORTH ; Or, Hints to Raise the Female Character. First American from the last Eng lish edition, with a Recommendatory Notice, by Emily Marshall. On neat volume, 18mo., cloth gilt 38 cents, paper cover 25 cents. The sentiments and principles enforced in this book may be safely commended to the atten- tion of women of all rinks London Atlas. YOUTH'S BOQK OF NATURE; Or, The Four Seasons Illustrated, being Familiar Descriptions of Natural His- tory, made during Walks in the Country, by Rev. H. B. Draper. Illustra- ted with upwards of 50 wood Engravings. One vol., square 16mo., 75 cents. One of the moat faultless volumes for the younjr that hr.s ever been issued. Chr. *7KsrsJ THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. ICLF (N) I OCl 181939 DEC I21940JM 19 1942 M co 1939 OCT 2 3 198? IRCULATION DEPT. BY c 5 1989 CIRCULATION DEPT. LD 21-50m-l,'3 I D RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW SEP o 7 2001 12,000(11/95)